HELP

 

Macro Commands

 

$SET @variable=value

 

This command assigns the value to the variable.  This variable can then be used later in the script in any line.  Be careful of creating variables which may occur accidentally in commands, such as variables whose names are substrings of others (e.g. @number and @num or @file1 and @file13).  Unexpected results may occur.  It’s recommended to use a long name, such as @filename or @baudrate, rather than @f or @b.

 

Example:-

 

$SET @baudrate=115200

AT+IPR=@baudrate

 

 

 

$SET BAUD=rate

 

This command sets the baud rate of the connection to the new rate.  It will automatically close and re-open the port, once the rate has been changed.  This does NOT issue an instruction to the remote device to change baud rate, it affects only the local status.

Example:-

 

$SET BAUD=115200

 

 

$WAIT time

 

Instructs the app  to pause for a particular number of milliseconds

Example:

$WAIT 10000

 

 

$WAIT OK [time]

 

Instructs the app to wait for an OK response.  Anything else will throw an error.  An optional time will set the time for how long the app will wait for the OK response

Example:-

 

$WAIT OK 10000

 

 

$SEND file

 

Instructs the app to load the contents of a particular file and send it using the XMODEM-1K protocol.

Example:-

 

$SEND c:\firmware\NewFW.img

 

 

$PROMPT @variable

Prompts the user to set the value for that particular variable.  The prompt box which appears also allows the user to select a filename, if they wish to. Here Is an example of use:

$PROMPT @baudrate

AT+IPR=@baudrate

$PROMPT @firmware-file

$SEND @firmware-file

 

 

AT Commands Interface Guide

for Firmware 7.45

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

Important Notice

Due to the nature of wireless communications, transmission and reception of data can never be

guaranteed. Data may be delayed, corrupted (i.e., have errors) or be totally lost. Although significant

delays or losses of data are rare when wireless devices such as the Sierra Wireless modem are used

in a normal manner with a well-constructed network, the Sierra Wireless modem should not be used

in situations where failure to transmit or receive data could result in damage of any kind to the user or

any other party, including but not limited to personal injury, death, or loss of property. Sierra Wireless

accepts no responsibility for damages of any kind resulting from delays or errors in data transmitted or

received using the Sierra Wireless modem, or for failure of the Sierra Wireless modem to transmit or

receive such data.

Safety and Hazards

Do not operate the Sierra Wireless modem in areas where blasting is in progress, where explosive

atmospheres may be present, near medical equipment, near life support equipment, or any

equipment which may be susceptible to any form of radio interference. In such areas, the Sierra

Wireless modem MUST BE POWERED OFF. The Sierra Wireless modem can transmit signals that

could interfere with this equipment. Do not operate the Sierra Wireless modem in any aircraft, whether

the aircraft is on the ground or in flight. In aircraft, the Sierra Wireless modem MUST BE POWERED

OFF. When operating, the Sierra Wireless modem can transmit signals that could interfere with

various onboard systems.

Note: Some airlines may permit the use of cellular phones while the aircraft is on the ground and the door is

open. Sierra Wireless modems may be used at this time.

The driver or operator of any vehicle should not operate the Sierra Wireless modem while in control of

a vehicle. Doing so will detract from the driver or operator’s control and operation of that vehicle. In

some states and provinces, operating such communications devices while in control of a vehicle is an

offence.

Limitations of Liability

This manual is provided “as is”. Sierra Wireless makes no warranties of any kind, either expressed or

implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or

noninfringement. The recipient of the manual shall endorse all risks arising from its use.

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a

commitment on the part of Sierra Wireless. SIERRA WIRELESS AND ITS AFFILIATES

SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM LIABILITY FOR ANY AND ALL DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,

GENERAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF PROFITS OR REVENUE OR ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR

REVENUE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE ANY SIERRA WIRELESS

PRODUCT, EVEN IF SIERRA WIRELESS AND/OR ITS AFFILIATES HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR THEY ARE FORESEEABLE OR FOR CLAIMS BY ANY

THIRD PARTY.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, in no event shall Sierra Wireless and/or its affiliates aggregate liability

arising under or in connection with the Sierra Wireless product, regardless of the number of events,

occurrences, or claims giving rise to liability, be in excess of the price paid by the purchaser for the

Sierra Wireless product.

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 2

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

Patents

This product may contain technology developed by or for Sierra Wireless Inc.

This product includes technology licensed from QUALCOMM3G

This product is manufactured or sold by Sierra Wireless Inc. or its affiliates under one or more patents

licensed from InterDigital Group.

Copyright

ฉ 2011 Sierra Wireless. All rights reserved.

Trademarks

AirCardand Watcherare registered trademarks of Sierra Wireless. Sierra Wireless™, AirPrime™,

AirLink™, AirVantage™ and the Sierra Wireless logo are trademarks of Sierra Wireless.

, , , inSIM, “YOU MAKE IT, WE MAKE IT WIRELESS”,

WAVECOM, WISMO, Wireless Microprocessor, Wireless CPU, Open ATare filed or registered

trademarks of Sierra Wireless S.A. in France and/or in other countries.

Windowsand Windows Vistaare registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Macintosh and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

QUALCOMMis a registered trademark of QUALCOMM Incorporated. Used under license.

Other trademarks are the property of the respective owners.

Contact Information

Phone: 1-604-232-1488

Sales Desk: Hours: 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Pacific Time

E-mail: sales@sierrawireless.com

Post:

Sierra Wireless

13811 Wireless Way

Richmond, BC

Canada V6V 3A4

Fax: 1-604-231-1109

Web: www.sierrawireless.com

Consult our website for up-to-date product descriptions, documentation, application notes, firmware

upgrades, troubleshooting tips, and press releases: www.sierrawireless.com

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 3

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

 

Document History

Revision Date History

001 June 19, 2008 Creation for Open ATSoftware Suite 2.10

002 August 20, 2008 Updates for Open ATSoftware Suite 2.10

003 September 16, 2008 Updates for Open ATSoftware Suite 2.11

004 October 14, 2008 Creation for Open ATSoftware Suite 2.12

005 October 21, 2008 Update for Open ATSoftware Suite 2.12

006 December 5, 2008 Creation for Open ATSoftware Suite 2.20

007 February 2, 2009 Updates for Open ATSoftware Suite 2.20

009 February 27, 2009 Updates for Open ATSoftware Suite 2.21

010 March 16, 2009

Updates for Open ATFirmware v7.4

New commands:

+CGEQREQ

+CGEQMIN

+CGEQNEG

Updated commands:

+CREG

+CGREG

+COPS

+CCFD

+WUBS

API

+SPEAKER

011 April 24, 2009

Updates for Open ATFirmware v7.4

Updated Commands

+WDWL

+WHCNF

+WFM

+STSF

+CPOL

+ILLR

+WDSS

+WDSG

+WMBS

+WDSS

+CGEQNEG

+CGEQMIN

+CGEQREQ

+CPLS

012 August 21, 2009

Updates for Open ATFirmware v7.4a

New Command

+WWSM

+WTMR

Updated Commands

+WBHV

+WGPRS

+CNMI

+SPEAKER

+CMGF

+CSAS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 4

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

+CCLK

+WDSH,

+WDSG,

+WDSI,

+WDSS,

+WDSF,

+WDSB

+WIPS

+STSF

+WTMR

+WDSD

+CMUX

013 October 23, 2009

Updates for Open ATFirmware v7.4a

Updated Commands

+WIPS

+IPR

+CCED

+CMUX

Appendix

+WTMR

+CLIP

+STGR

014 February 26, 2010

Updates for Open ATFirmware 7.42

Updated Commands

+WCFM

+WOPEN

+WSCAN

+VGR

+COPS

+WDSS

+STSF

+WGPRS

+WTBI

+WCFM

+CGMR

+ATI

+WSVN

New Command

+WPPP

015 March 25, 2010

Updates for Open ATFirmware 7.43

Updated Commands

+WUBS

+WCPS

Added Note to Commands not applicable to Q26 Extreme

Module

016 June 1, 2010

Updated command +WMBS

Updated the following commands regarding the AirPrime

SL6087 module:

+WHCNF

+DAC

+SPEAKER

+WDSS

017 July 23, 2010

Updates for Open ATFirmware 7.44

Updated commands:

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 5

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

+CGDCONT

+IFC

Dial Command to a specific number D

+WMBS

In Appendix: Results, Specific Error Codes

+WDOP

+CCED

+CGMM

+WTMR

+Auto-tests &T

+CRMP

+VGR

+CGMI

Request identification information I

+W32K

+WCPS

+COPS

+WOPEN

+CPHS

+CSVM

+WSVN

018 January 14, 2011

Updates for Open ATFirmware 7.44

Updated commands:

+WDSH

+CFUN

Request identification information I

+CCED

+CLVL

+VGT

+VGR

+WDGT

+WDGR

+CMGL

+WRIM

+WCCS

+WCFM

+WOPEN

+WWSM

Appendix

019 February 18, 2011

Updates for Open ATFirmware 7.45

Updated commands

+CGACT

%Dn

+COPS

+WPPP

Information I

+CCED

&S

+WCPS

+WCFM

+WOPEN

+WWSM

+WHCNF

+W32K

+WBHV

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 6

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

+CGMR

+DAC

+CSCA

+WTMR

+IPR

+IFC

+ICF

&W

+WDSS

+WDSG

+WDSE

+CMUX

+CGCLASS

New Commands

+WPOW

+WUSB

+WCER

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 7

 

Overview

The aim of this document is to provide Sierra Wireless customers with a full description of the AT

commands associated with the Firmware 7.45 software release.

Note: Though all features are documented in this manual, new features may still be in beta stage at

publication and therefore may not yet be validated. Please refer to the Customer Release Note for

complete and detailed information regarding beta and validated features at time of release.

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 8

 

Contents

VOLUME 1

1 Introduction

2 AT Commands Features

3 Basic commands

4 Identifications commands

5 Open ATCommands

6 Global Configuration Commands

7 Embedded module Status Commands

8 Serial Port Commands

9 Security Commands

10 Time Management Commands

VOLUME 2

11 GSM Network Commands

12 Call Control Commands

13 Data Commands

14 GPRS Commands

15 PLMN Commands

VOLUME 3

16 Phonebooks Commands

17 Short message Commands

18 SIM Commands

19 SIM ToolKit Commands

20 Supplementary Services Commands

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 9

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

VOLUME 4

21 Audio Commands

22 I/O Commands

23 Battery Commands

24 CPHS Commands

25 Fax Commands

26 Fax class 2 Commands

27 Remote Device Management Services Commands

APPENDIX

1 Codes and Values

2 Examples

3 Technical Appendixes

4 Interoperability

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 0 February 18, 2011 10

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079

019

February 18, 2011

Volume 1

AT Commands Interface Guide

for Firmware 7.45

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 2

Contents

1. INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................5

1.1. Scope of this Document ....................................................................................................5

1.2. Related Documents...........................................................................................................6

1.3. ETSI Secretariat ................................................................................................................8

1.4. Abbreviations and Definitions............................................................................................9

1.5. AT Commands Presentation Rules.................................................................................14

2. AT COMMANDS FEATURES ............................................................................15

2.1. Sierra Wireless Line Settings ..........................................................................................15

2.2. Command Line ................................................................................................................15

2.3. Information Responses and Result Codes......................................................................15

2.4. Proprietary Commands ...................................................................................................15

2.5. SIM Insertion and Removal .............................................................................................16

2.6. Background Initialization .................................................................................................16

2.7. Length of Phone Numbers ..............................................................................................17

2.8. Bad Software Message ...................................................................................................17

2.9. Commands concatenation...............................................................................................18

3. BASIC COMMANDS ..........................................................................................20

3.1. Attention Command AT...................................................................................................20

3.2. Repeat Last Command A/ ...............................................................................................21

4. IDENTIFICATIONS COMMANDS ......................................................................23

4.1. Manufacturer Identification +CGMI .................................................................................23

4.2. Request Model Identification +CGMM ............................................................................25

4.3. Hardware Version +WHWV.............................................................................................27

4.4. Date of Production +WDOP ............................................................................................29

4.5. Write IMEI +WIMEI..........................................................................................................31

4.6. Embedded module Serial Number +WMSN....................................................................33

4.7. Product Serial Number +CGSN ......................................................................................35

4.8. Request Revision Identification +CGMR.........................................................................37

4.9. Request identification information ATI ............................................................................39

4.10. Write IMEI SVN +WSVN .................................................................................................45

4.11. Capabilities List +GCAP..................................................................................................47

5. OPEN ATCOMMANDS....................................................................................49

5.1. Sierra Wireless Downloading +WDWL............................................................................49

5.2. Sierra Wireless Open ATControl Command +WOPEN................................................51

5.3. Open ATTasks Resume Command +WOPENRES .....................................................60

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 3

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

6. GLOBAL CONFIGURATION COMMANDS.......................................................61

6.1. Report Mobile Equipment Errors +CMEE .......................................................................61

6.2. Hardware Configuration +WHCNF..................................................................................63

6.3. Embedded Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV ....................................................72

6.4. Features Management +WFM ........................................................................................81

6.5. Commercial Feature Management +WCFM ...................................................................85

6.6. Sierra Wireless SLEEP Mode +W32K ............................................................................88

6.7. Power Off +CPOF ...........................................................................................................90

6.8. Set Phone Functionality +CFUN .....................................................................................92

6.9. Sierra Wireless Reset +WRST........................................................................................95

6.10. Save Configuration W .....................................................................................................97

6.11. Restore Factory Settings F..............................................................................................99

6.12. Default Configuration ATZ.............................................................................................101

6.13. Display configuration V..................................................................................................103

6.14. Sierra Wireless Custom Character Set +WCCS...........................................................105

6.15. Select TE Character Set +CSCS ..................................................................................108

6.16. Sierra Wireless Phonebook Character Set +WPCS .....................................................110

6.17. Set Language +CLAN ...................................................................................................112

6.18. Language Event +CLAE................................................................................................115

6.19. Select Type of Address +CSTA ....................................................................................118

6.20. Cellular Text Telephone Modem +WCTM.....................................................................120

6.21. Sierra Wireless Debug Interface Management +WDEBUG..........................................122

6.22. Digital to Analog Converter +DAC.................................................................................124

6.23. Automatic Boost Mode +WCPS ....................................................................................128

6.24. Auto shutdown +WASR.................................................................................................132

6.25. IP Stack Settings +WIPS ..............................................................................................137

7. EMBEDDED MODULE STATUS COMMANDS...............................................140

7.1. General Indications +WIND...........................................................................................140

7.2. Phone Activity Status +CPAS .......................................................................................147

7.3. SIM Holder Status +WSHS ...........................................................................................149

7.4. Indicator Control +CIND................................................................................................151

7.5. Mobile Equipment Event Reporting +CMER.................................................................154

7.6. Mobile Equipment Control Mode +CMEC.....................................................................157

7.7. Sierra Wireless Status Request +WSTR.......................................................................159

7.8. Temperature Monitoring Report +WTMR......................................................................161

7.9. Sierra Wireless Critical Error Report +WCER...............................................................165

8. SERIAL PORT COMMANDS ...........................................................................167

8.1. Echo ATE ......................................................................................................................167

8.2. Fixed DTE Rate +IPR....................................................................................................169

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 4

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

8.3. DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF ..............................................................................172

8.4. DTE-DCE Local Flow Control +IFC...............................................................................175

8.5. Result Code Suppression ATQ .....................................................................................177

8.6. DCE Response Format ATV .........................................................................................179

8.7. Set DCD Signal C..........................................................................................................181

8.8. Set DTR Signal D ..........................................................................................................183

8.9. Set DSR Signal S ..........................................................................................................185

8.10. Sierra Wireless Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM................................................................187

8.11. Back to online mode AT0 ..............................................................................................191

8.12. Multi-flow Management +WMFM ..................................................................................192

8.13. Multiplexing Mode +CMUX............................................................................................197

8.14. Sierra Wireless USB Configuration +WUSB .................................................................200

9. SECURITY COMMANDS .................................................................................205

9.1. Enter PIN +CPIN ...........................................................................................................205

9.2. Enter PIN2 +CPIN2 .......................................................................................................209

9.3. PIN Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC.....................................................................211

9.4. Change Password +CPWD...........................................................................................213

9.5. Facility Lock +CLCK......................................................................................................216

9.6. Sierra Wireless LoCK +WLCK ......................................................................................219

10.TIME MANAGEMENT COMMANDS................................................................222

10.1. Clock Management +CCLK...........................................................................................222

10.2. Alarm Management +CALA ..........................................................................................224

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 5

1. Introduction

1.1. Scope of this Document

This document describes the AT-command based messages exchanged between an application and

Sierra Wireless products in order to manage GSM/GPRS related events or services.

Embedded module

External AT

Application

Send AT command

Receive AT response

Serial Link

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Introduction

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 6

1.2. Related Documents

This interface specification is based on the following recommendations:

[1] ETSI GSM 07.05: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Use of DTE-DCE

interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)

[2] ETSI GSM 07.07: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); AT command set for GSM

Mobile Equipment (ME)

[3] ITU-T Recommendation V.25 ter: Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control

[4] ETSI GSM 03.40: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Technical implementation

of the Short Message Service (SMS) Point-to-Point (PP)

[5] ETSI GSM 03.38: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Alphabets and languagespecific

information

[6] ETSI GSM 04.80: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2): Mobile radio interface

layer 3, Supplementary service specification, Formats and coding

[7] 3GPP 05.02: 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group GSM/EDGERadio

Access Network; Multiplexing and multiple access on the radio path – 3GPP TS 05.02

V6.9.2 (2001-04)

[8] 3GPP 24.008: Mobile radio interface Layer 3 specification; Core network protocols; Stage 3

[9] 3GPP TS 11.11 Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)

Interface

[10] 3GPP TS 05.08 Radio subsystem link control

[11] 3GPP TS 23.040 Technical realization of the Short Message Service (SMS);

[12] 3GPP TS 22.042 Network Identity and Time Zone (NITZ) service description; Stage 1

[13] 3GPP TS 51.011 Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)

interface

[14] 3GPP TS 27-010 Terminal Equipment to User Equipment (TE-UE) multiplexer protocol

[15] 3GPP 23.014 Support of Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) signaling

[16] ISO 639 Langages Codes

[17] 3GPP 27 060 Packet domain; Mobile Station (MS) supporting Packet Switched services

[18] 3GPP TS 23.038 Alphabets and language-specific information

[19] 3GPP TS 27.005 Use of Data Terminal Equipment - Data Circuit terminating Equipment (DTEDCE)

interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)

[20] ETSI GSM 11.14 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+); Specification of the SIM

Application Toolkit for the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM - ME) interface

[21] 3GPP TS 23.003 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile

Telecommunications System (UMTS); Numbering, addressing and identification

[22] ETSI GSM 02.24 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Description of

Charge Advice Information (CAI)

[23] ETSI GSM 02.86 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Advice of Charge

(AoC) Supplementary Services - Stage 1

[24] ETSI GSM 02.90 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Unstructured

Supplementary Service Data (USSD) - Stage 1

[25] ETSI GSM 02.85 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Closed User

Group (CUG) Supplementary Services - Stage 1

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Introduction

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 7

[26] 3GPP 27.007:Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile

Telecommunications System (UMTS);AT command set for 3GPP User Equipment (UE) (Release

1999)

[27] 3GPP 23.107:Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS);QoS Concept and

Architecture (Release 1999)

[28] 3GPP 24.008: European digital cellular telecommunication system (Phase 2+). Mobile radio

interface layer 3 specification. (Release 1999)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Introduction

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 8

1.3. ETSI Secretariat

The following addresses may be of use in obtaining the latest GSM/GPRS recommendations:

Postal address: F-06921 Sophia Antipolis CEDEX – France

Office address: 650 Route des Lucioles – Sophia Antipolis – Valbonne – France

Web address: http://www.etsi.org/

Tel: +33 4 92 94 42 00

Fax: +33 4 93 65 47 16

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Introduction

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 9

1.4. Abbreviations and Definitions

1.4.1. Abbreviations

ACM Accumulated Call Meter

ADC Analog Digital Converter

ADN Abbreviated Dialing Number (Phonebook)

AMR Adaptive Multi-Rate

AMR-FR AMR Full Rate (full rate speech version 3)

AMR-HR AMR Half Rate (half rate speech version 3)

AOC Advice Of Charge

APN Access Point Name

ARN Address Resolution Protocol

ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange, Standard

characters table (1 byte coding)

AT ATtention

Hayes Standard AT command Set

BCCH Broadcast Channel

BER Bit Err Rate

BM Broadcoast Message Storage

CBM Cell Broadcast Message

CB Cell Broadcast

CCK Corporate Control Key

CCM Current Call Meter

CHV Card Holder Verification

CHAP Challenge handshake Authentication Protocol

CI Cell Identifier

CLI Client Line Identification

CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation

CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction

CNL Cooperative Network List

CODEC Coder Decoder

COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation

CPHS Common PCN Handset Specification

CPU Central Processing Unit

CSD Circuit Switched Data

CSP Customer Service Profile

CTM Cellular Text telephone Modem

CTS Clear To Send signal

CUG Closed User Group

DAC Digital to Analog Converter

DTR Data Terminal Ready

DCS Digital Cellular System

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Introduction

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 10

DCE Data Circuit Equipment

DCD Data Carrier Detect

DLC Data Link Connection

DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier

DM Device Management

DNS Domain Name System

DSR Data Set Ready

DTE Date Terminal Equipment

DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

DTR Data Terminal Ready

ECC Emergency Call Codes

ECM Error Correction Mode

ECT Explicit Call Transfer

EDGE Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programming Only Memory

EF Elementary Files

EFR Enhanced Full Rate (full rate speech version 2)

EGPRS Enhanced GPRS

ENS Enhanced Network Selection

E-ONS Enhanced Operator Name Service

ERMES European Radio Messaging System

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

FD FIFO depth

FDN Fixed Dialing Number (Phonebook)

FR Full Rate (full rate speech version 1)

GERAN GSM EDGE Radio Access Network

GPIO General Purpose Input Output

GPRS General Packet Radio Service

GSM Global System for Mobile communication

HDLC High-level Data Link Control

HFR High Frequency Regeneration

HLR Home Location Register

HR Half Rate (half rate speech version 1)

HSDPA High Speed Downlink Packet Access

HSUPA High Speed Uplink Packet Access

ID IDentifier

IETF Internet Engineering Task ForceT

IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity

IN/OUT/IN_OUT In, out or In Out. see glossary

I/O Input/Output

IP Internet Protocol

LAC Local Area Code

LED Light Emitting Diode

LND Last Number Dialed

LP Language Preferred

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Introduction

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 11

LPI Lines Per Inch

M Mandatory

MCC Mobile Country Code

ME Mobile Equipment

MMI Man Machine Interface

MNC Mobile Network Code

MNP Microcom Networking Protocol

MO Mobile Originated

MOC Mobile Originated Call (outgoing call)

MS Mobile Station

MSB Most Significant Bit

MSISDN Mobile Station International ISDN Number

MT Mobile Terminal

MTC Mobile Terminated Call (incoming call)

N.A. Not applicable

NCK Network Control Key

NITZ Network Information and Time Zone

NSCK Network Subset Control Key

NTC Negative Temperature Coefficient

N.U. Not used

O Optional

OA Outgoing Access

OPL Operator PLMN List

OS Operating System

OTA Over the Air

PAD Portable Application Description

PAP Password Authentication Protocol

PC Personal Computer

PCCP PC character set Code Page

PCK Personalization Control Key

PCL Power Control Level

PCM Protection Circuit Module

PCN Personal Communication Network

PCS 1900 Personal Communication Service (GSM system offering 148 full

duplex voice channels per cell)

PDP Packet Data Protocol

PDU Protocol Description Unit

PIN Personal Identification Number

PLMN Public Land Mobile Networks

PNN PLMN Network Name

PPP

Point-to-Point Protocol

Peer to Peer

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network

PTS Product Technical Specification

PUCT Price per Unit and Currency Table

PUK PIN Unlock Key

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Introduction

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 12

QoS Quality of Service

RAM Random Access Memory

RDMS Remote Device Management Services

RI Ring Indicator

RIL Radio Interface Layer

RLP Radio Link Protocol

RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication

RTS Ready To Send signal

RX Reception

SAP Service Access Point

SC Service Center

SDU Service Data Unit

SIM Subscriber Information Module

SMSR Short Message Status Report

SMS Short Message Service

SS Supplementary Services

SPCK Service Provider Control Key

SPN Service Provider Name

STK Sim ToolKit

SVN Software Version Number

TA Terminal Adaptor

TBF Temporary Block Flow

TE Terminal Equipment

TTY TeleTYpe

TON/NPI Type Of Number/Numbering Plan Identification

TX Transmission

UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter

UCS2 Universal Character Set 2 Character table (2-byte coding)

UDUB User Determined User Busy

UIH Unnumbered Information with Header check

UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System

USB Universal Serial Bus

USSD Unstructered Supplementary Service Data

UTRAN Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Introduction

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 13

1.4.2. Definitions

The words "Mobile Station" (MS) or "Mobile Equipment" (ME) are used for mobile terminals

supporting GSM/GPRS services.

Terminal Equipment is the Man-Machine Interface of a GSM/GPRS device (modem or handset). A TE

can be a handset MMI or the AT command line interface.

User

GSM/GPRS network

TE ME

Sierra Wireless product

A call from a GSM/GPRS mobile station to the PSTN is called a "mobile originated call" (MOC) or

"outgoing call", and a call from a fixed network to a GSM/GPRS mobile station is called a "mobile

terminated call" (MTC) or "incoming call"

In this document, the word "product" refers to any Sierra Wireless product supporting the AT

commands interface.

1.4.3. Logos

This picture indicates the +WIND indication from which the AT command is allowed. X values

can be: 1, 3, 4, 16.

This picture indicates that a SIM card must be inserted to support the AT command.

This picture indicates that an AT command is supported even if the SIM card is absent.

This picture indicates that the PIN 1 /CHV 1 code must be entered to support the AT command.

This picture indicates that an AT command is supported even if the PIN 1 /CHV 1 code is not

entered.

This picture indicates that the PIN 2 /CHV 2 code must be entered to support the AT command.

This picture indicates that an AT command is supported even if the PIN 2/CHV 2 code is not

entered.

This picture indicates that the AT command is available using the AirPrime Management

Services.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Introduction

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 14

1.5. AT Commands Presentation Rules

The AT commands are presented in the present documentation as follows:

• A "Description" section provides general information on the AT command (or response)

behaviour.

• A "Syntax" section describes the command and response syntaxes and all parameters

description.

• A "Parameters and Defined Values" section describes all parameters and values.

• A "Parameter Storage" presents the command used to store the parameter value and/or the

command used to restore the parameter default value.

• An "Examples" section presents the real use of the described command.

• A "Note" section can also be included indicating some remarks about the command use.

• Figures are provided where necessary

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 15

2. AT Commands Features

2.1. Sierra Wireless Line Settings

A serial link handler is set with the following default values (factory settings):

• speed according to customer choice at order time,

• 8 bits data,

• 1 stop bit,

• no parity,

• RTS/CTS flow control.

Please use the +IPR, +IFC and +ICF commands to change these settings.

2.2. Command Line

Commands always start with AT and finish with a <CR> character, excepted A/ command.

2.3. Information Responses and Result Codes

Responses start and end with <CR><LF>, except for the ATV0 DCE response format and the ATQ1

(result code suppression) commands.

• If command syntax is incorrect, the "ERROR" string is returned.

• If command syntax is correct but transmitted with wrong parameters, the "+CME ERROR:

<Err>" or "+CMS ERROR: <SmsErr>" strings is returned with adequate error codes if CMEE

was previously set to 1. By default, CMEE is set to 0, and the error message is only

"ERROR".

• If the command line has been executed successfully, an "OK" string is returned.

In some cases, such as "AT+CPIN?" or (unsolicited) incoming events, the product does not return the

"OK" string as a response.

In the following examples <CR> and <CR><LF> are intentionally omitted.

Note: The command syntax accepts negative parameters. If the command parameter is negative and out of

the acceptable range, the "+CME ERROR: 3" string is returned if CMEE was previously set to 1.

2.4. Proprietary Commands

When a command is Sierra Wireless proprietary, the information is indicated in the command

description.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

AT Commands Features

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 16

2.5. SIM Insertion and Removal

SIM card insertion and removal procedures are supported. There are software functions relying on

positive reading of the hardware SIM detect pin. This pin state (open/closed) is permanently

monitored.

When the SIM detect pin indicates that a card is present in the SIM connector, the product tries to set

up a logical SIM session. The logical SIM session will be set up or not depending on whether the

detected card is a SIM card or not. The AT+CPIN? command delivers the following responses:

• If the SIM detect pin indicates "absent", the response to AT+CPIN? is "+CME ERROR: 10"

(SIM not inserted).

• If the SIM detect pin indicates "present", and the inserted card is a SIM card, the response to

AT+CPIN? is "+CPIN: xxx" depending on SIM PIN state.

• If the SIM detect pin indicates "present", and the inserted card is not a SIM card, the response

to AT+CPIN? is "+CME ERROR: 10".

• These last two states are not provided immediately due to background initialization. Between

the hardware SIM detect pin indicating "present" and the final results, the AT+CPIN? sends

"+CME ERROR: 515" (Please wait, init in progress).

When the SIM detect pin indicates card absence, and if a SIM card was previously inserted, an IMSI

detach procedure is performed, all user data is removed from the product (phonebooks, SMS etc.).

The product then switches to emergency mode.

2.6. Background Initialization

After entering the PIN 1/CHV 1, some SIM user data files are loaded into the product (phonebooks,

SMS status, etc.). Please be aware that it might take some time to read a large phonebook.

The AT+CPIN? command response occurs after PIN checking. After this response user data is

loaded in background. This means that some data may not be available just when PIN entry is

confirmed by "OK". The reading of phonebooks will then be refused by "+CME ERROR: 515" or

"+CMS ERROR: 515" meaning, "Please wait, service is not available yet, init in progress".

This type of answer may be sent by the product at several points:

• when trying to execute another AT command before the previous one is completed (before

response),

• when switching from ADN to FDN (or FDN to ADN) and trying to read the relevant phonebook

immediately,

• when asking for +CPIN? status immediately after SIM insertion and before the product has

determined if the inserted card is a valid SIM card.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

AT Commands Features

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 17

2.7. Length of Phone Numbers

Phone numbers can be made of up to 80 digits. The 20 first digits are stored in SIM, in the phonebook

file (EFADN, EFFDN or EFLND) corresponding to the selected phonebook. The next digits are stored in

other extension SIM files (EFEXT1 or EFEXT2).

As an example:

Number of digits Nb of records in EFADN Nb of free records in EFEXT1

1 to 20 1 0

21 to 40 1 1

41 to 60 1 2

61 to 80 1 3

If there is no more free records in the EFEXT1, the behaviour is:

• if user tries to store an entry of more than 20 digits: +CME ERROR: 20,

• if user tries to dial a number of more than 20 digits: +CME ERROR: 20.

As the maximum length for the numbers (in ADN, FDN, LND) phonebooks is 80 digits:

• if user tries to dial a number of more than 80 digits: +CME ERROR: 26.

Before performing a call, the number of free records in the EFEXT1 is checked, to be able to store the

dialed number.

• if there are free records left, the call is setup

• otherwise, +CME ERROR: 20 errors are returned (memory full).

Please refer to Recommendation 3GPP 11.11 97H[9] for more details.

2.8. Bad Software Message

The Sierra Wireless embedded module is designed to be downloaded with specific software. When

the user has to take in charge the software download, it is necessary to be sure that the compatible

software is downloaded. If the software downloaded is either corrupt or non-compatible, the message

BAD SOFTWARE is displayed. To remedy, reinstall the initial specific software version.

Note: If the embedded module is still displaying BAD SOFTWARE, only Sierra Wireless or a distributor can

recover it.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

AT Commands Features

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 18

2.9. Commands concatenation

The Sierra Wireless embedded module supports basic AT commands and extended AT commands

concatenation.

2.9.1. Basic Syntax commands

2.9.1.1. Basic Syntax command format

The format of Basic Syntax commands, except for the D and S commands, is as follows:

<command>[<number>]

where <command> is either a single character, or the "&" character (IA5 2/6) followed by a single

character. Characters used in <command> shall be taken from the set of alphabetic characters.

<number> may be a string of one or more characters from "0" through "9" representing a decimal

integer value. Commands that expect a <number> are noted in the description of the command (see

clause 6). If a command expects <number> and it is missing (<command> is immediately followed in

the command line by another <command> or the termination character), the value "0" is assumed. If a

command does not expect a <number> and a number is present, an ERROR is generated. All leading

"0"s in <number> are ignored by the DCE.

Additional commands may follow a command (and associated parameter, if any) on the same

command line without any character required for separation. The actions of some commands cause

the remainder of the command line to be ignored (e.g., A).

See the D command for details on the format of the information that follows it.

2.9.1.2. S-parameters

Commands that begin with the letter "S" constitute a special group of parameters known as "Sparameters".

These differ from other commands in important respects. The number following the "S"

indicates the "parameter number" being referenced. If the number is not recognized as a valid

parameter number, an ERROR result code is issued.

Immediately following this number, either a "?" or "=" character (IA5 3/15 or 3/13, respectively) shall

appear. "?" is used to read the value of the indicated S-parameter; "=" is used to set the S-parameter

to a new value.

S<parameter_number>?

S<parameter_number>= [<value>]

If the "=" is used, the new value to be stored in the S-parameter is specified in decimal following the

"=". If no value is given (i.e., the end of the command line occurs or the next command follows

immediately), the S-parameter specified may be set to 0, or an ERROR result code issued and the

stored value left unchanged. The ranges of acceptable values are given in the description of each Sparameter.

If the "?" is used, the DCE transmits a single line of information text to the DTE. For S-parameters

defined in this Recommendation, the text portion of this information text consists of exactly three

characters, giving the value of the S-parameter in decimal, with leading zeroes included.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

AT Commands Features

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 19

2.9.1.3. Concatenating commands after extended syntax

commands

Additional commands may follow an extended syntax command on the same command line if a

semicolon (";", IA5 3/11) is inserted after the preceding extended command as a separator. The

semicolon is not necessary when the extended syntax command is the last command on the

command line.

2.9.1.4. Concatenating commands after basic format commands

Extended syntax commands may appear on the same command line after a basic syntax command

without a separator, in the same manner as concatenation of basic syntax commands.

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 20

3. Basic commands

3.1. Attention Command AT

3.1.1. Description

This command always returns OK.

3.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

3.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None

3.1.4. Parameter Storage

None

3.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Basic commands

Repeat Last Command A/

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 21

3.2. Repeat Last Command A/

3.2.1. Description

This command repeats the last command of the open session. Only the A/ command itself cannot be

repeated.

If this command is the first one of the open session, the response is OK without any treatment.

3.2.2. Syntax

Action command

A/

Note: The response depends on the previous command

Read command

None

Test command

None

3.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None.

3.2.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Basic commands

Repeat Last Command A/

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 22

3.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGMI SIERRA WIRELESS EMBEDDED MODULE

OK

A/

Note: Repeat last command

SIERRA WIRELESS EMBEDDED MODULE

OK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 23

4. Identifications commands

4.1. Manufacturer Identification +CGMI

4.1.1. Description

This command gives the manufacturer identification.

4.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGMI

Sierra Wireless

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

4.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None.

4.1.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Manufacturer Identification +CGMI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 24

4.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGMI

Sierra Wireless

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Request Model Identification +CGMM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 25

4.2. Request Model Identification +CGMM

4.2.1. Description

This command is used to get the model identification text.

4.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGMM

<model>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

4.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<model>: model identification text

The total number of characters, including line terminators, in the

information text shall not exceed 2048 characters.

4.2.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Request Model Identification +CGMM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 26

4.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGMM

WMP100 Product

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Hardware Version +WHWV

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 27

4.3. Hardware Version +WHWV

4.3.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command gets the hardware version.

4.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WHWV

Hardware Version <version>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WHWV=?

OK

4.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<version>: embedded module hardware version

string type

4.3.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Hardware Version +WHWV

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 28

4.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WHWV

Note: Requests hardware version

Hardware Version 4.14

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Date of Production +WDOP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 29

4.4. Date of Production +WDOP

4.4.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command gets the date of production.

4.4.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDOP

Production Date (W/Y): <date>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WDOP=?

OK

4.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<date>: production date

string format for date is: ww/y where ww is the week number (range: 01-53)

and y the year.

4.4.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Date of Production +WDOP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 30

4.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDOP

Note: Requests date of production

Production Date (W/Y): 01/6

OK

Note: Date of production is WEEK: 01/YEAR: 6 (1st week of year 6)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Write IMEI +WIMEI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 31

4.5. Write IMEI +WIMEI

4.5.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command downloads the IMEI. This operation is possible only if the

embedded module contains the default IMEI.

The IMEI can only be downloaded once.

No password is needed. If the download is not correct, only Sierra Wireless can reset the IMEI.

4.5.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WIMEI=<IMEI>

OK

Read command

AT+WIMEI?

+WIMEI: <IMEI>

OK

Test command

AT+WIMEI=?

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Write IMEI +WIMEI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 32

4.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<IMEI>: IMEI

14 or 15 digits as defined in GSM 23.003 762H[21]

default value: 012345678901234

When a 14 digits IMEI is written, the 15th digit is automatically added using Luhn

algorithm.

4.5.4. Parameter Storage

None.

4.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WIMEI?

Note: Request IMEI

+WIMEI: 012345678901234

OK

AT+WIMEI=123456789099998

Note: First dowload on 15 digits

OK

AT+CGSN

Note: Get stored IMEI

123456789099998

OK

AT+WIMEI=35282000000005

Note: First dowload on 14 digits

OK

AT+CGSN

Note: Get stored IMEI

352820000000054

OK

AT+WIMEI?

Note: Request IMEI

+WIMEI: 352820000000054

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Embedded module Serial Number +WMSN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 33

4.6. Embedded module Serial Number +WMSN

4.6.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command returns the serial number of the embedded module.

4.6.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WMSN

Serial Number <serial number>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WMSN=?

OK

4.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<serial number>: Embedded module serial number

integer type on 15 digits

4.6.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Embedded module Serial Number +WMSN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 34

4.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WMSN Serial Number 123456789012345

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Product Serial Number +CGSN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 35

4.7. Product Serial Number +CGSN

4.7.1. Description

This command allows the user application to get the IMEI of the product.

4.7.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGSN

<IMEI>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

4.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<IMEI>: Embedded module IMEI (15 digits number)

4.7.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Product Serial Number +CGSN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 36

4.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGSN

Note: Get the IMEI

012345678901234

OK

Note: IMEI read from EEPROM

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Request Revision Identification +CGMR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 37

4.8. Request Revision Identification +CGMR

4.8.1. Description

This command is used to get the revised software version.

4.8.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGMR

<SW release>.<WCPU> <size> <date> <time>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

4.8.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<SW release>: software release

<WCPU> type of embedded module

<size> software size

<date> date (mmddyy) of software generation

<time> hour (hh:mm) of software generation

4.8.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Request Revision Identification +CGMR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 38

4.8.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGMR

R7.43.0.201003261552.WMP50 2139952 032610

15:52

OK

Note : Software release v7.42, generated on January 28, 2010.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Request identification information ATI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 39

4.9. Request identification information ATI

4.9.1. Description

This command causes the product to transmit one or more lines of specific information text.

4.9.2. Syntax

Action command

ATI<n>

Depending on <n>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Request identification information ATI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 40

4.9.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: information display control parameter

0 embedded module with the 2nd core:

display manufacturer identification (equivalent to 98H+CGMI, refer to these commands for more

precisions)

embedded module without the 2nd core:

display manufacturer followed by model identification (equivalent to 9H+CGMI and 10H+CGMM,

refer to these commands for more precisions)

3 display revision identification (equivalent to +CGMR)

4 display embedded module configuration in RAM (equivalent to &V0)

5 display embedded module configuration in EEPROM (equivalent to &V1)

6 display embedded module data features. Lists the supported data rates, data modes and fax

classes.

7 display embedded module voice features

8 embedded module with the 2nd core:

display software version followed by the chip Id

embedded module without the 2nd core:

"OK"

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Request identification information ATI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 41

9 display component details: Downloader, Firmware, embedded OpenAT application

(Developer Studio version used to build it, Integrated Plug In version), memory

the response is divided in 4 groups:

<Component>,<Version>[,<Name>,<Company>,<Size>,

<TimeStamp>,<Checksum>,<Offset>

[-<SubComponent>,<SubComponentVersion>]

<MemoryType>,<MemorySize>

[<InfoTage>,<InfoValue>]

<Component>: ascii string

embedded software component type

possible values: "DWL","FW","OAT","3G+"

<Version>: ascii string

version of the software component

<Name>: ascii string

component name

<Company>: ascii string

component company

<Size>: integer

component size in bytes

<TimeStamp>: ascii string

component timestamp

<Checksum>: ascii string

component checksum

<Offset>: ascii string

offset address of the component

Note: For the Open ATapplication, <Version>,

<Name> and <Company> fields are filled in

the application source code. Please refer to

ADL User Guide for more information.

<SubComponent>: ascii string

subcomponent name

this field is filled by Developer Studio (supported from

version 1.1)

<SubComponent Version>: ascii string

subcomponent version

this field is filled by Developer Studio (supported from

1.1 version)

<MemoryType>: "ROM" or "RAM"

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Request identification information ATI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 42

<MemorySize>: size of the <MemoryType> in bytes, in hexadecimal, set

at the upper roundish value ( 100000 = 8 Mb, 200000 =

16 Mb, 400000 = 32 Mb, 800000 = 64 Mb, …)

<InfoTag>: Information Tag, the value is the following parameter.

Current supported value: "DWLNAME"

<InfoValue>: Information value.

For "DWLNAME" information Tag: Type of the correct

DWL file type to be downloaded in the embedded

module, based on the product name. ASCII string

other "OK" string is sent back

Note: The 2nd core is the other brand chip used in Sierra Wireless embedded module. For example, the

Icera chip is the 2nd core used in Q26Extreme product.

4.9.4. Parameter Storage

None.

4.9.5. Examples

Command Responses

ATI0

Note: Manufacturer and model

identification

SIERRA WIRELESS

WMP100 Product

OK

Note: See 101H+CGMI and 102H+CGMM commands

ATI0

Note: Manufacturer identification (if the

embedded module has the 2nd core)

SIERRA WIRELESS

OK

Note: Response of embedded module with 2nd core inside.

ATI3

Note: Revision identification

R7.42.0.201001280843.WMP100 2131488 012810 08:43

OK

Note : Software release v7.42, generated on January 28, 2010.

ATI6

Note: embedded module data features

DATA RATES:

AUTOBAUD,300,1200,1200/75,2400,4800,9600,14400

DATA MODES: T/TN,ASYNCHRONOUS

FAX CLASS 1,2

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Request identification information ATI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 43

Command Responses

ATI7

Note: embedded module voice

features

SPEECH CODINGS: FR,EFR,HR,AMR

OK

ATI8

Note: Request the 2nd core SW version

and chip Id

RELEASE_R3_0/ICERA_SDK_EV2_3g/wcom_q26e_02_audio/Stack_

18.2.a

P4 rev: CL125092 with 0 local changes

ABCFE4597AE87F21EC57

OK

Note : For example, Icera chip is used as the 2nd core in the embedded module

ATI8

Note: For other embedded module

OK

ATI9 "DWL","V08b0i","","Sierra Wireless",54752,"011410

16:55","d7ba6c55","00010000"

"FW","FW_SRC_742_5.WMP100G","R7.42.0.201001280843.WMP10

0","Sierra Wireless",2131488,"012810

08:43","460a8311","00020000"

"OAT","1.0.0","My Test Application","Sierra

Wireless",226748,"012210 10:05","5e796578","00260000"

-"Developer Studio","1.1.1.200911160856-R3160"

-"Open AT OS Package","6.32.0.01"

-"Firmware Package","7.4.2"

-"WIP Plug-in Package","5.30"

"ROM","400000"

"RAM","100000"

"DWLNAME","WMP100SM3"

OK

Note: Component details with an embedded Open ATฎ application.

"DWL","V08b0i","","Sierra Wireless",54752,"011410

16:55","d7ba6c55","00010000"

"FW","FW_SRC_742_5.WMP100G","R7.42.0.201001280843.WMP10

0","Sierra Wireless",2131488,"012810

08:43","460a8311","00020000"

"ROM","400000"

"RAM","100000"

"DWLNAME","WMP100SM3"

OK

Note: Component details without an embedded Open ATฎ application.

"DWL","V08b0i","","Sierra Wireless",54752,"011410

16:55","d7ba6c55","00010000"

"FW","FW_SRC_742_5.WMP100G","R7.42.0.201001280843.WMP10

0","Sierra Wireless",2131488,"012810

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Request identification information ATI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 44

Command Responses

08:43","460a8311","00020000"

"OAT","1.0.0","My Test Application","Sierra

Wireless",226748,"012210 10:05","5e796578","00260000"

"ROM","400000"

"RAM","100000"

"DWLNAME","WMP100SM3"

OK

Note: Component details with an embedded Open ATฎ application which was not

built using Developer Studio and with DWL file information.

"DWL","V08b0i","","Sierra Wireless",54752,"011410

16:55","d7ba6c55","00010000"

"FW","FW_SRC_742_5.WMP100G","R7.42.0.201001280843.WMP10

0","Sierra Wireless",2131488,"012810

08:43","460a8311","00020000"

"OAT","","","",226748,"012210

10:05","5e796578","00260000"

-"Developer Studio","1.1.1.200911160856-R3160"

-"Open AT OS Package","6.32.0.01"

-"Firmware Package","7.4.2"

-"WIP Plug-in Package","5.30"

"ROM","400000"

"RAM","100000"

OK

Note: Component details with an embedded Open ATฎ application on which fields

are not filled.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Write IMEI SVN +WSVN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 45

4.10. Write IMEI SVN +WSVN

4.10.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command updates the IMEI SVN.

4.10.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WSVN=<IMEI SVN>

OK

Read command

AT+WSVN?

+WSVN: <IMEI SVN>

OK

Test command

AT+WSVN=?

+WSVN: (list of supported <IMEI SVN>s)

OK

4.10.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<IMEI SVN>: IMEI SVN

BCD type

range: 0-98

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Write IMEI SVN +WSVN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 46

4.10.4. Parameter Storage

None.

4.10.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WSVN=? +WSVN: (0-98)

OK

AT+WSVN?

Note: Request IMEI SVN

+WSVN: 10

OK

AT+WSVN=11

Note: Update the IMEI SVN

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Capabilities List +GCAP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 47

4.11. Capabilities List +GCAP

4.11.1. Description

This command returns the complete list of capabilities.

4.11.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+GCAP

+GCAP: (list of supported <name>s)

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

4.11.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<name>: supported capability

+CGSM CGSM command supported

+FCLASS fax command supported

4.11.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Identifications commands

Capabilities List +GCAP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 48

4.11.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+GCAP

Note: Get capabilities list

+GCAP: +CGSM,+FCLASS

OK

Note: Supports GSM and FAX commands

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 49

5. Open ATCommands

5.1. Sierra Wireless Downloading +WDWL

5.1.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command switches the product to download mode.

After downloading, the embedded module should be reset using AT+CFUN=1.

5.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDWL

+WDWL: 0

Note: Downloading in progress. NACK character is sent every second by the embedded module.

Read command

AT+WDWL?

+WDWL: <version>

OK

Test command

None

5.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<version>: XModem downloader version

string type

5.1.4. Parameter Storage

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Open ATฎ Commands

Sierra Wireless Downloading +WDWL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 50

5.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDWL?

Note: Get downloader version.

+WDWL: V02.12

OK

AT+WDWL

+WDWL: 0

Note: Download mode started. File can be sent using the terminal

application

AT+CFUN=1 OK

5.1.6. Notes

+WDWL command allows launching the download process only on UART1, UART 2 and USB ports

(and not on multiplexed port (see 103H+CMUX command)).

Because a reset is made when the AT+WDWL command is sent to the embedded module, the host

application should support the reset on USB port if this command is sent on this port (USB

disconnection and reconnection in USB CDC mode).

Downloading is performed using the Xmodem protocol or 1K-Xmodem (checksum only, CRC is not

supported) protocol.

The flow control of the hyperterminal has to be set to "Hardware".

Caution: Software damages may occur if power is lost or if a hardware reset occurs during the downloading

phase. If it occurs, send again AT + WDWL command to the embedded module and download again

the file.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Open ATฎ Commands

Sierra Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 51

5.2. Sierra Wireless Open ATControl Command

+WOPEN

5.2.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command performs the start, stop, delete, and get information about

the current Open ATembedded application.

This command also erases the Open ATflash objects storage place, and configures the Application

& Data (A&D) storage place size (including AirPrime Managment Services storage place). Please

refer to the Open ATdevelopment guides for more information.

This command permits to configure the Open ATSafe Boot. This service prevents the Open AT

application from starting when defined keys of the keyboard are pressed.

5.2.2. Syntax

• If <Mode>=0,1,3,4 or 5

Action command

AT+WOPEN=<Mode>

OK

• If <Mode>=2

Action command

AT+WOPEN=<Mode>

+WOPEN: <Mode>,<IntVersion>[,<ExtVersion>]

OK

• If <Mode>=6

Action command

AT+WOPEN=<Mode>[,<A&Dsize>]

+WOPEN: <Mode>,<A&DSize>,<OatSize>

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Open ATฎ Commands

Sierra Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 52

• If <Mode>=7

Action command

AT+WOPEN=<Mode>

+WOPEN: <Mode>,<OatState>

OK

• If <Mode>=8

Action command

AT+WOPEN=<Mode>[,<SafeBootState>[,<Key1>[,<Key2>]]]

+WOPEN: <Mode>[,<SafeBootState>[,<Key1>[,<Key2>]]]

OK

Read command

AT+WOPEN?

+WOPEN: <Mode>

OK

Test command

AT+WOPEN=?

+WOPEN: (list of supported <Mode>s),(list of supported <A&DSize>s),(list of

supported <Key1>s),(list of supported <Key2>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Open ATฎ Commands

Sierra Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 53

5.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Mode>: operating mode

0 stop the Open ATembedded application

If the Open ATapplication is running, the embedded module resets.

1 start the Open ATembedded application

If the Open ATapplication is stopped, the embedded module resets.

2 get the Open ATฎ library versions

3 erase the Open ATembedded application flash objects

4 erase the Open ATembedded application

5 suspend (in Sierra Wireless OS) the Open ATembedded application tasks

6 If the <A&Dsize> parameter is used: configure the Application & Data storage size.

If the <A&Dsize> parameter is not used: display the current A&D storage place size and

Open ATapplication space size.

7 Open ATapplication current state

8 Configure the Open ATSafe Boot: please refer to the 104H<SafeBootState>, 105H<Key1> &

106H<Key2> parameters description for more information

<IntVersion>: ASCII string giving the internal Open ATlibrary version

<ExtVersion>: ASCII string giving the external Open ATlibrary version

If no embedded application is loaded, the <ExtVersion> parameter is not returned.

<A&DSize>: This parameter includes A&D volume and AirPrime Managment Services volume.

Kbytes size allocated for the Application & Data storage place (default value: 768 Kbytes)

usable only with <Mode> = 6

MinSize is different according to AirPrime Managment Services features activation state (see

chapter Device Services General status +WDSG command).

When the Device services are in prohibited state (see chapter Device Services General

status +WDSG), MinSize=0.

When the Device services are not in prohibited state (see chapter Device Services General

status +WDSG), Minsize value differs according to the flash memory size:

64 for 32Mbits Flash size, 256 for 64Mbits flash size, and 256 for 128Mbits flash size.

MaxSize value differs according to the flash memory size:

1024 for 32Mbits Flash size, 4864 for 64Mbits flash size and 13056 for 128Mbits flash size.

Provided parameter value will be rounded up to the next flash sector sub-division (64

Kbytes). For example, if a 100 Kbytes size is required, a 128 Kbytes size will effectively be

set.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Open ATฎ Commands

Sierra Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 54

<OatSize>: Open ATapplication reserved size (in Kbytes)

returned with <Mode> = 6

This size is calculated from the <A&Dsize> one, since the whole available size for Open

AT, A&D and AirPrime Managment Services storage places is fixed according to flash

memory size. 1280 Kbytes (<OatSize> + <A&Dsize> = 1280) for 32Mbits Flash size, 5120

Kbytes (<OatSize>+<A&Dsize>=5120) for 64Mbits Flash size and 13312 Kbytes

(<OatSize>+<A&Dsize>=13312) for 128Mbits Flash size.

<OatState>: Open ATapplication current state

returned with <Mode> = 7

This state will be greater than 0 only if the current +WOPEN command state is 1 (except

when OatState = 13, which can occur even if the application is not started on the target).

0 application is not started (current mode is AT+WOPEN=0)

1 no downloaded application in the embedded module

2 bad checksum

The application binary seems to be corrupted.

3 bad header

The downloaded file seems not to be an Open ATฎ application.

4 version mismatch

The application binary was built with an SDK version which is not compatible with the

current OS.

5 too many tasks

The number of declared tasks in the application exceeds the maximum allowed one.

6 bad binary init function

The application binary seems to be corrupted.

7 bad task entry point

The application binary seems to be corrupted.

8 link issue

The application global variables area initialization is impossible.

9 bad memory configuration

The RAM size required by the application exceeds the maximum allowed one.

10 application is not started; starting was cancelled by the Open ATฎ Safe Boot. When

reset with this command, the safe boot buttons must be held down until the reception of

+wind3.

11 application is not started; starting was cancelled due to Open ATฎ OS internal tests

(depending on the OS version linked vs the downloaded application. Please refer to the

ADL User guide for more information).

12 application started in target mode

The application is now running on the target (the application adl_main function or task

entry points have been called).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Open ATฎ Commands

Sierra Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 55

13 application initialization pending in RTE mode;

The application is going to be started in debug mode.

14 application started in RTE mode;

The application is now running in debug mode

15 application initialization pending in Target mode;

System error during flash or RAM initialisation.

16 no tasks declared;

The application tasks table is empty, no task is declared

17 bad priority value;

At least one task priority value is incorrect (not unique or too high value w.r.t.,the number

of tasks)

18 Reserved

19 Reserved.

The application has declared call stacks for High Level Handler interrupt execution

context but not the Low Level Handler interrupt execution context.

20 Reserved

21 The Open ATapplication has defined some interrupt priority change, but the interrupt

priority array not valid.

<SafeBootState>: usable with <Mode> = 8

0 stop the Open ATSafe Boot.

1 start the Open ATSafe Boot.

(default value: 1)

<Key1>: usable with <Mode> = 8

[0 – 24] first key used for Open ATSafe Boot.

(default value: 19)

<Key2>: usable with <Mode> = 8

[0 – 24] second key used for Open ATSafe Boot. This key has to be either on the same

row or the same column of the keyboard that Key1.

(default value: 24)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Open ATฎ Commands

Sierra Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 56

5.2.4. Parameter storage

The <Mode>, <A&Dsize>, <Key1> and <Key2> parameters are stored in EEPROM without using the

AT&W command. The default value can be restored using AT&F.

5.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WOPEN=? +WOPEN: (0-8),(64-1024),(0-24),(0-24)

OK

AT+WOPEN? +WOPEN: 0

OK

AT+WOPEN=2

Note: Get the Open ATlibrary versions

+WOPEN: 2,"AT v03.01","AT v02.10"

OK

Note: Open ATversion 2.10 application downloaded.

AT+WOPEN=7 +WOPEN: 7,0

OK

Note: Open ATapplication not started

AT+WOPEN=1 +CME ERROR: 541

Note: since main versions do not match, the Open ATapplication

can not be started.

AT+WOPEN=2

Note: Get the Open ATlibrary versions

+WOPEN: 2,"AT v2.00","AT v2.00"

OK

Note: Open ATv2.00 library version. An embedded application has

been downloaded on this product..

AT+WOPEN=3 OK

Note: The flash objects are erased

AT+WOPEN=1

Note: Start the embedded application.

OK

+WIND: 3

Note: Product resets in order to start the embedded application.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Open ATฎ Commands

Sierra Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 57

Command Responses

AT+WOPEN=7 +WOPEN: 7,12

OK

Note: Open ATapplication started on the target.

AT+WOPEN=8 +WOPEN: 8,1,19,24

OK

Note: Safe Boot is active and uses the keys 19 and 24

AT+WOPEN=8,1,10,12 OK

Note: Safe Boot is active and uses the keys 10 and 12.

AT+WOPEN=8,1,10,10 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: Two different keys have to be supplied

AT+WOPEN=8,1,10,16 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: The two supplied keys have to be on the same row or on the

same column

AT+WOPEN=3 +CME ERROR: 532

Note: The embedded application is activated so the flash objects are

not erased.

AT+WOPEN=4 +CME ERROR: 532

Note: the embedded application is activated so it cannot be erased

AT+WOPEN=0

Note: Stop the embedded application.

OK

+WIND: 3

Note: Product reset in order to stop the embedded application.

AT+WOPEN=3 OK

Note: The flash objects are erased

AT+WOPEN=4 OK

Note: The embedded application is erased

AT+WOPEN=6 +WOPEN: 6,704,576

OK

Note: 704 Kbytes are reserved for the A&D storage place, and 576

Kbytes for the Open ATapplication

AT+WOPEN=6,1344 +CME ERROR: 550

Note: The current Open ATapplication size is too big to allow this

new A&D storage place size.

AT+WOPEN=6,704 +WOPEN: 6,704,576

OK

Note: No product reset (same size used)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Open ATฎ Commands

Sierra Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 58

Command Responses

AT+WOPEN=6,900 +WOPEN: 6,960,320

OK

+WIND: 3

Note: Size updated according to the next flash sector sub-division.

Product reset in order to set the new A&D storage place size.

AT+WOPEN=6 +WOPEN: 6,960,320

OK

Note: 960 Kbytes are reserved for the A&D storage place, and 320

Kbytes for the Open ATapplication

AT+WOPEN=5

Note: Suspend Open ATtasks

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: The Open ATapplication is not running

AT+WOPEN=1

Note: Start the embedded application

OK

+WIND: 3

Note: Product reset in order to start the embedded application

AT+WOPEN=5

Note: Suspend Open ATtasks

OK

AT+WOPEN? +WOPEN:5

OK

Note: Open ATapplication suspended by giving AT+WOPEN=5

command can be resumed by AT+WOPENRES command

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Open ATฎ Commands

Sierra Wireless Open ATฎ Control Command +WOPEN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 59

5.2.6. Notes

For mode = 1: if the main version numbers returned by the AT+WOPEN=2 command do not match,

the command will reply "+CME ERROR: 541"

<Mode> = 3 and <Mode> = 4 are only available if the Open AT

embedded application is stopped

(AT+WOPEN=0).

Open ATembedded applications can be resumed with AT+WOPENRES command.

The command returns an error when trying to use a key not available for Open Open ATSafe Boot.

The external Open ATlibrary version is not returned in the "AT+WOPEN=2" response.when an

Open ATapplication is corrupted. This happens when the application download was incomplete, and

when the CRC is corrupted, then the application decompression is impossible.

Caution: With <Mode> = 6, any A&D size change will lead to the area format process (this process will take

some seconds on start-up, before the "+WIND: 3" indication display (up to 1.5 second per 64 Kbytes

flash sector size can be considered as a maximum); all A&D cells data will be erased.

USB restrictions:

Starting or stopping an Open ATapplication resets the Sierra Wireless embedded module. When

these AT commands (AT+WOPEN=1 or AT+WOPEN=0) are sent to the Sierra Wireless embedded

module by using the USB serial port, the user must:

1. Close the USB serial port as soon as the command is sent to the Sierra Wireless embedded

module. This means that the OK response cannot be received by the user application.

2. Wait sufficient time to allow the Sierra Wireless embedded module to reset. Usually, the user must

wait 1 second before reopening the USB serial port.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Open ATฎ Commands

Open ATฎ Tasks Resume Command +WOPENRES

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 60

5.3. Open ATTasks Resume Command

+WOPENRES

5.3.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows to resume the suspended Open ATembedded

application.

5.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WOPENRES

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WOPENRES=?

OK

5.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None.

5.3.4. Parameter Storage

None

5.3.5. Examples

None.

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 61

6. Global Configuration Commands

6.1. Report Mobile Equipment Errors +CMEE

6.1.1. Description

This command defines the method for returning error messages. The simple ERROR message can

be replaced by the verbose method to include the results codes +CME ERROR: <err>. (See section

"ME error result code: +CME ERROR" in the "Appendixes" of the present document for "+CME

ERROR" result codes description. See section "Message service failure result code: +CMS ERROR"

in the "Appendixes" of the present document for "+CMS ERROR" result codes).

6.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CMEE=<n>

OK

Read command

AT+CMEE?

+CMEE: <n>

OK

Test command

AT+CMEE=?

+CMEE: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Report Mobile Equipment Errors +CMEE

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 62

6.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: error reporting method

0 disable ME error reports, use only "ERROR" (default value)

1 enable "+CME ERROR: <err>" or "+CMS ERROR: <err>"

6.1.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be restored

using AT&F.

6.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CMEE=? +CMEE: (0,1)

OK

AT+CMEE=0

Note: Disable ME error reports, use only "ERROR"

OK

AT+CMEE=1

Note: Enable "+CME ERROR: <err>" or "+CMS ERROR:

<err>"

OK

AT+CMEE? +CMEE: 1

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Hardware Configuration +WHCNF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 63

6.2. Hardware Configuration +WHCNF

6.2.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows to:

• activate or deactivate the keypad functionality in the embedded module when available. When

the keypad is deactivated, ten more I/0 pins will be free to be used (see PTS documentation

for more information).

The new setting to activate or deactive the keypad will be in effect after the next module

restart. With the keypad activation, ten GPIO pins are subsequently used by the keypad and

cannot be used by other applications.

• activate or deactivate the flash LED (activity status indication)

The new setting will be taken into account after a restart.

If the software downloaded is either corrupted or non-compatible, the flash LED is in "very

quick flash" mode even if the flash LED is deactivated.

• activate or deactivate the 32 kHz clock to output on a pin of the embedded module. When the

32 kHz feature is deactivated, one more I/0 pin will be free to be used (see PTS

documentation for more information).

The new setting will be taken into account immediately after the 32 kHz feature activation or

deactivation. With the 32 kHz feature activation, one I/O pin is immediately used to output the

clock and this pin is no more usable as an I/O pin (until the 32 kHz feature will be

deactivated).

• This command allows the users to activate or deactivate the management of Voltage

Indication pin used by an External SIM Switch to know the power supply level to use as SIM

Vcc. User can choose the I/O pin which will be allocated for the feature among available I/O

(see +WIOM AT command). If user does not use the command, a default I/O is defined (see

PTS documentation for more information).

The new setting will be taken into account after a restart. The I/O pin is allocated after the

restart during the embedded module initialization.

• This command allows the users to select the InSIM switch mode. User without adding an

external SIM card will be able to make some usage of the network (SMS, GPRS). They can

also insert an external SIM card which can have precedence over the embedded SIM. Three

modes which are provided are:

􀂃 External SIM privileged (default) – External SIM selected if detected, otherwise internal

SIM is selected if feature is activated

􀂃 External SIM only – External SIM selected, whatever the state of the external SIM

􀂃 Internal SIM only – Internal SIM selected, whatever the state of the external SIM

• This command allows the users to activate or deactivate the Diversity Antenna Test which is

used for test purpose at customer factory.

The new setting will be taken into account after a restart such that the diversity antenna will

be used as main antenna.

The Diversity Antenna Test feature is available only on specific product; for example, the

Q26Extreme

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Hardware Configuration +WHCNF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 64

• This command allows the users to set the FD of UART. The new setting will be taken into

account immediately. UARTs have dedicated memory in the form of a FIFO structure for each

receive and transmit operations. The purpose of the FIFO structures is to hold data either

received from the serial port or to be written to the serial port.

6.2.2. Syntax

• For <type> = 0, 2 and 6

Action command

AT+WHCNF=<type>,<mode>

[+WHCNF: <type>,<status>]

OK

• For <type> = 1, 4 and 5

Action command

AT+WHCNF=<type>,<mode>

[+WHCNF: <type>,<status>,<resetFlag>]

OK

• For <type> = 3

Action command

AT+WHCNF=<type>,<mode>[,<GpioId>[,<Polarity>]]

[+WHCNF: <type>,<status>,<resetFlag>[,< GpioId>,<Polarity>]]

OK

Read command

AT+WHCNF?

+WHCNF: <type>,<status>[,<resetFlag>[,<GpioId>,<Polarity>]]

[+WHCNF: <type>,<status>[,<resetFlag>[,<GpioId>,<Polarity>]][…]]

OK

Test command

AT+WHCNF=?

+WHCNF: <type>,(list of supported <mode>s)[,(list of supported <GpioId>s,(list of

supported <Polarity>s]

[+WHCNF: <type>,(list of supported <mode>s)[,(list of supported <GpioId>s,(list of

supported <Polarity>s][…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Hardware Configuration +WHCNF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 65

6.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<type>: hardware functionality

0 keypad (not supported for AirPrime SL6087 module)

1 flash LED

2 32 kHz clock

3 voltage indication IO supplier

4 InSIM Switch functionality

5 Diversity Antenna Test

6 FD functionality

<mode>: requested operation

For <type> = 0

0 deactivate the keypad

1 activate the keypad (default value)

2 get the keypad status

Note: Keypad is not supported for AirPrime SL6087 module

For <type> = 1

0 deactivate the flash LED

1 activate the flash LED (default value)

2 get the flash LED status

For <type> = 2

0 deactivate the 32 kHz clock. The I/O pin is available (default value).

1 activate the 32 kHz clock. The I/O pin is used to output the clock.

2 interrogate the 32 kHz clock management status

For <type> = 3

0 deactivate the voltage indication IO supplier feature (default value)

1 activate the voltage indication IO supplier feature

2 reserved for future use

3 get the voltage indication IO supplier feature status

For <type> = 4

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Hardware Configuration +WHCNF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 66

0 external SIM privileged (default)

1 external SIM only

2 internal SIM only

3 get the inSIM switch selected mode

For <type> = 5

0 deactivate the diversity antenna test (default value)

1 activate the diversity antenna test

2 get the diversity antenna test status

For <type> = 6

1 set the UART FD to 16 bytes

2 set the UART FD to 32 bytes

3 set the UART FD to 56 bytes (default value).

<status>: current functionality status

For <type> = 0

0 the keypad is deactivated

1 the keypad is activated

For <type> = 1

0 the flash LED is deactivated

1 the flash LED is activated

For <type> = 2

0 the 32 kHz clock management is deactivated

1 the 32 kHz clock management is activated

For <type> = 3

0 the voltage indication IO supplier feature is deactivated

1 the voltage indication IO supplier feature is activated

For <type> = 4

0 external SIM selected if detected, otherwise internal SIM is selected

1 external SIM always selected

2 internal SIM always selected

For <type> = 5

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Hardware Configuration +WHCNF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 67

0 the diversity antenna test is deactivated

1 the diversity antenna test is activated

For <type> = 6

1 UART FD is 16 bytes

2 UART FD is 32 bytes

3 UART FD is 56 bytes

<resetFlag>: indicate if the embedded module must be reset to take into account the

functionality state change

Note: Only for <type> = 1, <type> = 3, <type> = 4 and <type> = 5.

0 the functionality has not been modified since the last boot of the product.

1 the functionality has been modified since the last boot of the product: It has

to be reset in order to take the modification into account.

<GpioId>: Gpio name (as mentioned in the embedded module Product Technical

Specification and Customer Design Guideline) to use for voltage indication

IO supplier feature.

This parameter is optional. GPIO24 is the default value for wmp100, q64001,

q2686, q2687, q2687cl, fsu01 and fsu02 embedded modules.

Note: Only for <type> = 3

<Polarity>: Gpio polarity selection. Optional parameter. 1 is the default value for

wmp100, q64001, q2686, q2687, q2687cl, fsu01 and fsu02 embedded

modules

0 inverted polarity:

- High level is applied on Gpio if lower voltage must be used as SIM Vcc

- Low level for higher voltage

1 direct polarity:

- High level is applied on Gpio if higher voltage must be used as SIM Vcc

- Low level for lower voltage

6.2.4. Parameter storage

For each kind of <type> parameter, the <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using

AT&W. Default values can be restored using AT&F.

For <type>=3, <GpioId> and <Polarity> parameters value are stored in EEPROM without using

AT&W. Default values cannot be restored using AT&F.

For <Type>=6, <Mode> parameter value is stored in the EEPROM with using AT&W. Default value

cannot be restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Hardware Configuration +WHCNF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 68

6.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WHCNF=? +WHCNF: 0,(0-2)

+WHCNF: 1,(0-2)

+WHCNF: 2,(0-2)

+WHCNF: 3,(0-3),("GPIO0"-"GPIO48"),(0-1)

+WHCNF: 4,(0-3)

+WHCNF: 5,(0-2)

+WHCNF: 6,(1-3)

OK

Note: The InSIM syntax is only given for embedded module that

embeds an InSIM.

AT+WHCNF? +WHCNF: 0,1

+WHCNF: 1,1,0

+WHCNF: 2,0

+WHCNF: 3,0,0

+WHCNF: 4,0,0

+WHCNF: 5,0,0

+WHCNF: 6,3

OK

Note: The InSIM state is only given for embedded module that

embeds an InSIM

AT+WHCNF=0,2

+WHCNF: 0,1

OK

Note: Keypad is activated

AT+CMER=,1

Note: Ask key press event report

OK

+CKEV: 12,1

+CKEV: 12,0

Note: Key 12 has been pressed and released

AT+WHCNF=0,0

Note: The keypad is deactivated

OK

AT+WHCNF=1,0

Note: The flash LED is deactivated

OK

AT+WHCNF=2,0

Note: The 32 kHz output clock is deactivated

OK

AT+WHCNF=3,1

Note: The voltage indication IO supplier is activated

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Hardware Configuration +WHCNF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 69

Command Responses

AT+WHCNF=3,3

Note: Get the voltage indication IO supplier status

+WHCNF: 3,1,1,"GPIO24",1

OK

Note: The third parameter <1> indicates a embedded module reset is

needed

AT+WHCNF=6,2

Note: Set UART FD to 32 bytes

OK

AT+CFUN=1

Note: Reset the embedded module

OK

AT+WHCNF=3,3

Note: Get the voltage indication IO supplier status

+WHCNF: 3,1,0,"GPIO24",1

OK

Note: The third parameter <0> indicates that the voltage indication IO

supplier feature is taken into account

AT+WHCNF=3,1,"GPIO2",1

Note: The voltage indication IO supplier is activated

OK

AT+WHCNF=3,3 +WHCNF: 3,1,1,"GPIO2",1

OK

AT+CFUN=1

Note: Reset the embedded module

OK

AT+WHCNF? +WHCNF: 0,1

+WHCNF: 1,1,0

+WHCNF: 2,0

+WHCNF: 3,1,0,"GPIO2",1

+WHCNF: 4,0,0

+WHCNF: 5,0,0

+WHCNF: 6,3

OK

AT+WHCNF=3,0

Note: The voltage indication IO supplier is deactivated

OK

AT+WHCNF=3,3 +WHCNF: 3,0,1

OK

AT+WHCNF=4,2

Note: The internal SIM always selected

OK

AT+WHCNF=4,3

Note: Get the inSIM switch mode

+WHCNF: 4,2,1

OK

Note: The third parameter <1> indicates that the internal SIM always

selected feature is not taken into account

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Hardware Configuration +WHCNF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 70

Command Responses

AT+CFUN=1

Note: Reset the embedded module

OK

AT+WHCNF? +WHCNF: 0,1

+WHCNF: 1,1,0

+WHCNF: 2,0

+WHCNF: 3,0,0

+WHCNF: 4,2,0

+WHCNF: 5,0,0

+WHCNF: 6,3

OK

AT+WHCNF=0,2

Note: Interrogate the keypad status.

+WHCNF: 0,0

OK

AT+CMER? +CMER: 3,1,0,0,0

OK

Note: After the keypad is deactivated, no unsolicited result is sent

when a key is pressed or released.

AT&F

Note: Restore factory settings

OK

AT+WHCNF=0,2 +WHCNF: 0,1

OK

AT+WHCNF=1,2 +WHCNF: 1,1,1

OK

Note: The third parameter <1> indicates a embedded module reset is

needed

AT+WHCNF=2,2 +WHCNF: 2,0

OK

AT+WHCNF=0,1

Note: Activate the keypad

OK

AT+WHCNF=5,1

Note: Activate the Diversity Antenna Test

OK

AT+WHCNF=5,2 +WHCNF: 5,1,1

OK

Note: The third parameter <1> indicates a embedded module reset is

needed

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Hardware Configuration +WHCNF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 71

Command Responses

AT+WHCNF=6,1

Note: Set UART FD to 16 bytes

OK

AT+CFUN=1

Note: Reset the embedded module

OK

AT+WHCNF? +WHCNF: 0,1

+WHCNF: 1,1,0

+WHCNF: 2,0

+WHCNF: 3,0,0

+WHCNF: 4,0,0

+WHCNF: 5,1,0

+WHCNF: 6,3

OK

6.2.6. Notes

• To activate the voltage indication IO supplier feature with this command, you must select a

single voltage (i.e. 3v only or 1v8 only) with the Sierra Wireless feature command (AT+WFM).

It’s this voltage that will be used by the electrical SIM interface of the embedded module. This

selection with AT+WFM must be the current settings (i.e. the reset flag must be equal to 0).

• The mode 4 allows choosing the InSIM mode for the embedded module start is only available

on the embedded module that embeds an InSIM. For other embedded modules, the +CME

ERROR: 3 will be returned.

• Keypad is not supported for AirPrime SL6087 module; parameter <type>=0 is therefore

unavailable for the SL6087.

• The <type>=6 for setting UART FD will not be supported for USB. "+CME ERROR: 3" will be

returned if "AT+WHCNF=6,x" (where x can be 1, 2 or 3) is passed on USB port.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Embedded Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 72

6.3. Embedded Module Behaviour Configuration

+WBHV

6.3.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows the user to configure the behaviour of the

embedded module.

6.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WBHV=<parameter1>[,[<parameter2>][,<parameter3>]]

For <parameter1>=6

[+WBHV: <parameter1>,<parameter2>,<parameter3>]

Else

[+WBHV: <parameter1>,<parameter2>[,<resetFlag>]]

OK

Read command

AT+WBHV?

+WBHV: <parameter1>,<parameter2>[,<resetFlag>]

Except for <parameter1>=6:

+WBHV: <parameter1>,<parameter2>,<parameter3>

[+WBHV: <parameter1>,<parameter2>[,<resetFlag>][…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Embedded Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 73

Test command

AT+WBHV=?

+WBHV: <parameter1>,(list of supported <parameter2>s) [,<resetFlag>]

Except for <parameter1>=6

+WBHV: <parameter1>,(list of supported <parameter2>s),(list of supported

<parameter3>s)

[+WBHV: <parameter1>,(list of supported <parameter2>s) [,<resetFlag>][…]]

OK

6.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<parameter1>: configuration mode

0 configure embedded module response on outgoing voice calls

1 configure embedded module working mode

2 configure the response delay for a call

3 active/deactive ENS feature

4 configure Mix Tone with voice feature

5 Configure Network registration denied indication

6 configure DTMF blank duration for DTMF decoder

8 configure Gain expression (index or dB unit)

9 active/deactive Enhanced Network Selection for Fixed Application

feature

<parameter2> configuration value

<parameter1> <parameter2>

0 0 embedded module response is sent on call establishment (default

value)

0 1 embedded module response is sent when audio path is opened

0 - interrogate embedded module respond mode

1 0 ACTIVE mode with GSM stack in idle is normal (default value)

1 1 ACTIVE mode with the GSM stack turn-off

1 2 SLEEP mode with the GSM stack turn-off

1 - get modem init mode state

2 0 response when the remote part hangs up (default value)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Embedded Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 74

2 1 107HOK will be displayed immediately after the ATD command and

+WIND: 5,x indication.

2 - interrogate modem call respond mode

3 0 deactivate ENS feature (default value)

3 1 activate ENS feature

3 - get ENS feature mode state

4 0 deactivate Mix tone with voice feature (default value)

4 1 activate Mix tone with voice feature

4 - get Mix tone with voice feature mode state

5 0 deactivate Network registration denied indication feature (default

value)

5 1 activate Network registration denied indication feature

5 - get Network registration denied indication feature mode state

6 BlankDuration Also expressed by <parameter3>

only for <parameter1>=6.

configures the silence duration used to separate 2 DTMFs.

It can be expressed by step (with <parameter2>) or by ms (with

<parameter3>).

108HIf user sets blank duration with <parameter2> and <parameter3>,

an error is returned.

109HIf user sets blank duration in ms with a <parameter3> which it is

not a step multiple, a round up is done (cf example).

The step depends on the embedded module used:

Step <parameter2> <parameter3>

10HWMP100,

WMP50,

Q2686,

Q2687

10ms [1-255]

Default: 20

[10-2550]

Default: 200ms

1HNote: If SLEEP or ACTIVE mode is activated (+WBHV:1,1 or

+WBHV:1,2 and a reset has been done for the activation of the

consumption mode), blank duration value is null, because DTMF

decoding feature is not avalaible.

So <parameter2> and <parameter3> =0.

6 - get the current silent duration use to separate DTMF decoding

8 0 set gain expression in dB unit (default value)

8 1 set gain expression in index

8 - get gain expression mode state

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Embedded Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 75

9 0 deactivate Enhanced Network Selection for Fixed Application

feature (default value)

9 1 activate Enhanced Network Selection for Fixed Application feature

9 - get Enhanced Network Selection for Fixed Application feature

mode state

6.3.4. Parameter Storage

12H<parameter1>, <parameter2> and <parameter3> are stored without using AT&W command. The

default values can be restored using AT&F.

6.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WBHV=? 13H+WBHV: 0,(0-1)

14H+WBHV: 1,(0-2)

15H+WBHV: 2,(0-1)

16H+WBHV: 3,(0-1),(0-1)

17H+WBHV: 4,(0-1)

18H+WBHV: 5,(0-1)

19H+WBHV: 6,(1-255),(10-2550)

120H+WBHV: 8,(0-1)

121H+WBHV: 9,(0-1)

OK

12HNote: Response on WMP50, WMP100

123HAT+WBHV=0,1

Note: Set modem response when audio path is

opened

OK

Note: Modem response is sent on audio path opened

AT+WBHV=0

Note: Interrogate modem respond mode

124H+WBHV: 0,1

OK

125HAT+WBHV=1,1

Note: Modem powerless mode

OK

AT+WBHV=1

Note: Interrogate modem init mode

126H+WBHV: 1,2

OK

127HAT+WBHV=2,1

128HNote: Modem response mode on a call: OK just after

+WIND: 5,x indication

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Embedded Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 76

Command Responses

AT+WBHV=2

Note: Interrogate modem call respond mode

129H+WBHV: 2,1

OK

130HAT+WBHV=3,0

Note: Deactivate ENS feature. The feature will be

deactivated after reset

OK

131HAT+WBHV=3,1

Note: Activate ENS feature. The feature will be

activated after reset

OK

132HNote: OK if STK session is already opened, else +CME ERROR: 3

AT+WBHV=3

Note: Interrogate ENS feature mode

13H+WBHV: 3,1,1

OK

Note: Third parameter <1> indicates that a embedded module reset is

needed

AT+WBHV? 134H+WBHV: 0,1

135H+WBHV: 1,1

136H+WBHV: 2,1

137H+WBHV: 3,1,1

138H+WBHV: 4,0

139H+WBHV: 5,0

140H+WBHV: 6,20,200

141H+WBHV: 8,0

142H+WBHV: 9,0,0

OK

Note1: Third parameter <1> indicates that a embedded module reset

is needed)

Note2: Response on WMP100

AT+CFUN=1 OK

AT+WBHV=3 143H+WBHV: 3,1,0

OK

Note: Third parameter <0> indicates that a embedded module reset is

not needed

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Embedded Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 77

Command Responses

AT+WBHV? 14H+WBHV: 0,1

145H+WBHV: 1,1

146H+WBHV: 2,1

147H+WBHV: 3,1,0

148H+WBHV: 4,0

149H+WBHV: 5,0

150H+WBHV: 6,20,200

151H+WBHV: 8,0

152H+WBHV: 9,0,0

OK

Note1: Third parameter <0> indicates that a embedded module reset

is not needed

Note2: Response on WMP100

AT&F

Note: Restore factory settings

OK

AT+WBHV=3 153H+WBHV: 3,0,1

OK

Note: Third parameter <1> indicates that a embedded module reset is

needed since ENS feature before AT&F was 1

154HAT+WBHV=8,1

Note: Enable gain expression in index

OK

AT+WBHV=8

Note: Get gain expression state

15H+WBHV: 8,1

OK

156HAT+WBHV=4,1

Note: Enable mix tone with voice

OK

AT+WBHV=4

Note: Get mix tone with voice feature state

157H+WBHV: 4,1

OK

158HAT+WBHV=5,1

Note: Enable network registration denied indication

OK

AT+WBHV=5

Note: Get network registration denied indication

feature state

159H+WBHV: 5,1

OK

AT+WBHV=6

Note: Get DTMF silent duration use to separate DTMF

during a DTMF decoding

160H+WBHV: 6,20,200

OK

161HNote: Response on WMP100, WMP50

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Embedded Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 78

Command Responses

162HAT+WBHV=6,30

Note: Set the duration used to separate DTMF during

a DTMF decoding to:

163H- 300 ms for a WMP100, WMP50

OK

AT+WBHV=6

Note: Get DTMF silent duration use to separate DTMF

during a DTMF decoding

164H+WBHV: 6,30,300

OK

165HNote: Response on WMP100, WMP50

16HAT+WBHV=6,10,100 +CME ERROR:3

Note: parameter2 and parameter3 are not used.

167HAT+WBHV=6,,250

Note: Set the duration used to separate DTMF during

a DTMF decoding to 250 ms

OK

AT+WBHV=6 168H+WBHV: 6,25,250

OK

169HNote: response on WMP100, WMP50

170HAT+WBHV=6,,251 OK

Note: a round up is done. The duration used to separate DTMF during

a DTMF decoding is:

171H260 ms for a WMP100, WMP50

AT+WBHV=6

Note: Get DTMF silent duration use to separate DTMF

during a DTMF decoding

172H+WBHV: 6,26,260

OK

173HNote: response on WMP100, WMP50 after a round up has been done

174HAT+WBHV=9,0

Note: Deactivate Enhanced Network Selection

feature. The feature will be deactivated after reset

OK

175HAT+WBHV=9,1

Note: Activate Enhanced Network Selection feature.

The feature will be activated after reset

OK

AT+WBHV=9

Note: Interrogate Enhanced Network Selection feature

mode

176H+WBHV: 9,1,1

OK

Note: Third parameter <1> indicates that a embedded module reset is

needed

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Embedded Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 79

Command Responses

AT+WBHV? 17H+WBHV: 0,0

178H+WBHV: 1,0

179H+WBHV: 2,0

180H+WBHV: 3,0,1

181H+WBHV: 4,1

182H+WBHV: 5,1

183H+WBHV: 6,26,260

184H+WBHV: 8,1

185H+WBHV: 9,1,1

OK

Note1: Third parameter <1> indicates that a embedded module reset

is needed)

Note2: Response on WMP100

AT+CFUN=1 OK

AT+WBHV? 186H+WBHV: 0,0

187H+WBHV: 1,0

18H+WBHV: 2,0

189H+WBHV: 3,0,0

190H+WBHV: 4,1

191H+WBHV: 5,1

192H+WBHV: 6,26,260

193H+WBHV: 8,1

194H+WBHV: 9,1,0

OK

Note: Third parameter <0> indicates that a embedded module reset is

not needed

Note2: Response on WMP100

AT&F

Note: Restore factory settings

OK

AT+WBHV=9 195H+WBHV: 9,0,1

OK

Note: Third parameter <1> indicates that a embedded module reset

is needed since the feature before AT&F was 1

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Embedded Module Behaviour Configuration +WBHV

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 80

6.3.6. Notes

196HIf <parameter1> value is 0, the command is used to configure when the embedded module sends the

response of an outgoing voice call.

197HIf <parameter1> value is 1, the command is used to configure the embedded module power

consumption mode.

198HIf <parameter1> value is 2, the command is used to configure when the embedded module sends the

response for a call.

19HIf <parameter1> value is 3, the command is used to activate/deactivate ENS feature.

20HIf <parameter1> value is 3, new setting will be taken into account only after a embedded module

reset. To be able to activate ENS Feature, a STK session must be opened (AT+STSF=1), otherwise

+CME ERROR: 3 occurs.

The mix tone with voice feature (<parameter1>= 4) does not allow cutting the voice when the

embedded module plays a tone during a voice communication.

The network registration denied indication feature (<parameter1>= 5) is used to change the +CREG

indication response to return the cause of the network registration reject.

The DTMF blank duration feature (<parameter1>= 6) is used to configure the threshold in ms used to

separate 2 DTMF when we use the DTMF decoding feature.

The gain expression mode (<parameter1>= 8) allows to choose how to express gain for audio

command (ex:+WTONE). The gain can be expressed in dB unit or in index (see table in the

corresponding AT command paragraph).

The Enhanced Network Selection for Fixed Application feature (<parameter>=9) is used to speed up

the embedded module registration to the network at switch on and when it stays in a fixed location.

This feature also enhances the embedded module power consumption.

201HIf <parameter1> value is 9, new setting will be taken into account only after a embedded module reset

or GSM stack restart (AT+CFUN=1,0).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Features Management +WFM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 81

6.4. Features Management +WFM

6.4.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command enables or disables specific selected features.

202HOnce a feature is successfully enabled or disabled, the product needs to be reset to take the

modification into account.

6.4.2. Syntax

Action command

203HAT+WFM=<mode>[,<FtrID>]

204H[+WFM: <FtrID>,<status>,<resetFlag>

205H[+WFM: <FtrID>,<status>,<resetFlag>[…]]]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

6.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: requested operation

0 disable feature <FtrID>

1 enable feature <FtrID>

2 get the feature <ftrID> state

206HIf the <FtrID> parameter is not used, the status of all the features are listed (with

several +WFM responses).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Features Management +WFM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 82

<FtrID>: feature identification

The +WFM response only uses alphabetical values for the <FtrID> parameter.

207HFor <FtrID> values with two digits (like 1x, 6x or 8x), the <mode> 0 value is not

"allowed". When a "xa" feature is enabled, enabling another "xb" feature will

automatically disable the "xa" feature.

numerical alphabetical

11 "MONO900" mono-band mode 900 MHz (default: 0)

12 "MONO1800" mono-band mode 1800 MHz (default:0)

13 "MONO1900" mono-band mode 1900 MHz (default:0)

14 "BI9001800" dual-band mode 900/1800 MHz (default: 0)

15 "BI9001900" dual-band mode 900/1900 MHz (default: 0)

16 "MONO850" mono-band mode 850 MHz (default: 0)

17 "BI8501900" dual-band mode 850/1900 MHz (default: 0)

18 "QUADBAND" quad-band mode 850/900/1800/1900 MHz (default: 1)

2 "EFR" enhanced full rate feature (default: 1)

3 "HR" half rate feature (default: 1)

4 "DTXDATA" data with DTX feature (default: 1)

5 "DATA144" data 14.4 kbits/s feature (default: 1)

61 "SIM3VONLY" 3V SIM voltage mode (default: 0)

62 "SIM1V8ONLY" 208H1,8V SIM voltage mode (default: 0)

63 "SIM1V8AND3V" 209H1,8V and 3V SIM voltage mode (default: 1)

7 "SIMREMOVE" SIM removal feature (default: 1)

8 "OFFWHENUNPLUG" off when unplug mode (default: 0)

9 "SWITCHATT" switch attenuation feature (default: 1)

A "CPHS" CPHS feature (default: 1)

B "SIMSPEEDENH" SIM speed enhancement feature (default:1)

C "LOCA" location feature (default: 0)

D "AMR" AMR feature (default: 1)

E "NT_6K" NIRR bit management for network (default: 1)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Features Management +WFM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 83

<status>: feature <FtrID> status

0 disabled

1 enabled

<resetFlag>: indicate if the embedded module must be reset to take into account the feature

<ftrID> state change.

0 The feature has not been modified since the last boot of the product.

1 The feature has been modified since the last boot of the product; a reset must be

performed to take the modifications into account.

6.4.4. Parameter Storage

The <status> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.

6.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

210HAT+WFM=2,"BI9001800" 21H+WFM: "BI9001800",1,0

OK

Note: Dual-band mode 900/1800 is enabled

212HAT+WFM=0,"EFR" OK

Note: Disable the Enhanced full rate feature

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Features Management +WFM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 84

Command Responses

AT+WFM=2 213H+WFM: "MONO900",0,0

+WFM: "MONO1800",0,0

+WFM: "MONO1900",0,0

+WFM: "BI9001800",1,0

+WFM: "BI9001900",0,0

+WFM: "MONO850",0,0

+WFM: "BI8501900",0,0

+WFM: "QUADBAND",0,0

+WFM: "EFR",0,1

+WFM: "HR",1,0

+WFM: "DTXDATA",1,0

+WFM: "DATA144",1,0

+WFM: "SIM3VONLY",0,0

+WFM: "SIM1V8ONLY",0,0

+WFM: "SIM1V8AND3V",1,0

+WFM: "SIMREMOVE",1,0

+WFM: "OFFWHENUNPLUG",0,0

+WFM: "SWITCHATT",1,0

+WFM: "CPHS",1,0

+WFM: "SIMSPEEDENH",0,0

+WFM: "LOCA",0,0

+WFM: "AMR",0,0

+WFM: "NT_6K",1,0

OK

Note : Get all <FtrID> status Note: The modified features have their <resetFlag> parameter

set to 1.

6.4.6. Notes

• 214H"MONO900", "MONO850", "MONO1800", "MONO1900", "BI9001900", "BI9001800",

"BI8501900" and "QUADBAND" features are read-only. In order to change the band

selection, use the +WMBS command.

• The "SIMREMOVE" feature and AT+WIND=1 enable "+WIND: 1" and "+WIND: 2" unsolicited

responses for SIM insertion and extraction.

• 215HWhen the "OFFWHENUNPLUG" feature is activated, if the pin interrupt is set, an AT+CPOF

is executed.

• 216HWhen the "SWITCHATT" feature is activated, the switch attenuation algorithm is available to

the +ECHO command.

• 217H"AMR" feature can only be activated for AMR product. If the AMR function is not available, its

activation or deactivation has neither effect nor error response.

• "SIMREMOVE" feature cannot be changed for product using the InSIM v1 (i.e. product that

used only the internal SIM without any way to connect an external SIM).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Commercial Feature Management +WCFM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 85

6.5. Commercial Feature Management +WCFM

6.5.1. Description

218HThis Sierra Wireless proprietary command enables or disables Sierra Wireless specific features.

Disabling a feature can be done with no restriction, but a password is required to enable features.

This command is used only on request of Sierra Wireless

219HOnce a feature is successfully enabled or disabled, the product needs to be reset to take the

modification into account.

6.5.2. Syntax

Action command

20HAT+WCFM=<mode>[,<FtrMask>[,<PassWord>]]

21H[+WCFM: <FtrMask>,<resetFlag>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Commercial Feature Management +WCFM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 86

6.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: requested operation

0 disable some features of <FtrMask>

1 enable some features of <FtrMask>

2 display the features state

3 Obsolete mode (disabled some extended commercial features of

<FtrMask>). This mode does not impact the embedded module even if the

returned response is OK.

4 Obsolete mode (enabled some extended commercial features of

<FtrMask>). This mode does not impact the embedded module even if the

returned response is OK.

5 Obsolete mode (displayed the extended commercial features state. These

extended commercial features are not locked anymore. The returned value

should not be taken into account. This mode is kept for compatibility).

<FtrMask>: features mask

16 bits hexadecimal string

2Hcommercial features ( <mode>=0, <mode>=1 or <mode>=2) :

02 "Reserved for future use" (old obsolete GPRS Class 2 feature. Now, this

feature is always activated)

04 "Reserved for future use" (old obsolete embedded module Highest GPRS

CLASS feature. Now, this feature is always activated)

08 "Reserved for future use" (old obsolete WAP feature)

10 "Reserved for future use"(old obsolete Open ATBluetooth Plug In)

20 Echo Cancellation Algorithm

40 EDGE (EGPRS)

80 Sierra Wireless debug feature

100 "Reserved for future use" (old obsolete AT Parser Lock feature)

200 DOTA 3

400 AirPrime Managment Services Third Server

800 "Reserved for future use"(old obsolete 3G feature feature)

<PassWord>: password for feature unlocking

256 bits hexadecimal string

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Commercial Feature Management +WCFM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 87

<resetFlag>: reset flag

0 The feature has not been modified since the last boot of the product.

1 The feature has been modified since the last boot of the product; a reset

must be performed to take the modifications into account.

6.5.4. Parameter Storage

The <FtrMask> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.

6.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WCFM=2

Note: Display the feature status

23H+WCFM: "AAAA",0

OK

24HAT+WCFM=0,"0A00"

Note: Disable some features

OK

AT+WCFM=2 25H+WCFM: "0A00",1

OK

Note: Display the feature status Note: <resetFlag> parameter indicates if a reset is

necessary

A reset must be performed to take the modifications into

account.

26HAT+WCFM=1,"0003","1234567890ABCDEF1234567

890ABCDEF1234567890ABCDEF1234567890ABCDEF

"

OK

Note : Enable features Note: The features are enabled (the password is correct)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Sierra Wireless SLEEP Mode +W32K

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 88

6.6. Sierra Wireless SLEEP Mode +W32K

6.6.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows the SLEEP mode to be enabled or disabled. This

command also allows to ignore or not the DTR signal for the SLEEP mode.

27HWith this command, a specific procedure on RS232 serial link is requested to activate or deactivate

SLEEP mode.

6.6.2. Syntax

Action command

28HAT+W32K=<mode>[,<DTRSignalUsed>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

6.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: SLEEP mode

0 disable

1 enable

<DTRSignalUsed> indicate if the DTR signal is used to enter/leave the SLEEP mode

0 29HThe DTR signal is ignored to enter the SLEEP mode. When using this setting, the

SLEEP cannot be left by using the DTR.

1 The DTR signal is used to enter or leave the SLEEP mode (default)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Sierra Wireless SLEEP Mode +W32K

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 89

6.6.4. Parameter Storage

None.

6.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+W32K=1

Note: Enable SLEEP mode

OK

Note: 32kHz SLEEP mode is enabled and the DTR signal is used to

enter/leave SLEEP mode.

AT+W32K=0

Note: Disable SLEEP mode

OK

230HAT+W32K=1,0

Note: Enable 32kHz SLEEP mode without using the

DTR signal

OK

Note: 32kHz SLEEP mode is enabled and the DTR signal is ignored

to enter/leave the SLEEP mode.

AT+W32K=0

Note: Disable 32kHz SLEEP mode

OK

Note: 32kHz SLEEP mode is disabled

6.6.6. Notes

• 231HWhen power down mode is entered, the product uses a 32kHz internal clock during inactivity

stages (despite of its nominal internal clock).

• 232HWhen enabled, power down mode is active after 1 to 15 seconds. The mode is not stored in

EEPROM: the command has to be repeated after a reset.

• 23HWhen enabled with "the DTR signal ignored", DTR signal is not taken into account to enter or

leave the SLEEP mode. The customer application needs to focus particularly on all sleep and

wake-up conditions without using the UART.

• 234HThe optional parameter <DTRSignalUsed> only applies to UART1 (and not UART2, CMUX

virtual ports).

• For additional information

􀂃 235Habout power down mode, see Application Note on Power Down Control via RS232,

􀂃 236Habout embedded module’s working modes, please refer to the Appendixes of the AT

Commands Interface Guide,

􀂃 237Habout RS232 serial link procedure to activate or deactivate the SLEEP mode, please refer

to the Appendixes of the AT Commands Interface Guide.

• When enabled with "the DTR signal ignored" the embedded module exits slow idle mode on

keypress and re-enters slow idle mode after all Open ATtreatments.

• By entering into 32kHz mode, the watchdog functionality of the unit will be turned OFF i.e. if a

problem occurs within the Open ATapplication, the unit will not power cycle to recover the

unit. To ensure full system recovery in this situation, an external watchdog needs to be

implemented.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Power Off +CPOF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 90

6.7. Power Off +CPOF

6.7.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command stops the GSM software stack and the hardware layer or

the embedded module activity. The AT+CFUN=0 command is equivalent to +CPOF.

Note: 238HIn autobaud mode, after a +CPOF unsolicited information waking up the embedded module is sent at

9600 bps until an AT command is sent. When an AT command is sent, the embedded module will

synchronize to the sender speed. (see CAUTION in section 8.2 Fixed DTE rate +IPR in Serial Ports

Commands section).

6.7.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CPOF[=<mode>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

6.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: power off mode

1 power off

6.7.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Power Off +CPOF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 91

6.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPOF

Note: Stop GSM stack

OK

AT+CPOF=1

Note: Stop the embedded module

OK

6.7.6. Notes

239HAfter AT+CPOF=1, the embedded module will not respond to AT commands. To reset, use the hard

reset.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Set Phone Functionality +CFUN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 92

6.8. Set Phone Functionality +CFUN

6.8.1. Description

This command selects the functionality level for the mobile station.

240HWhen the application wants to stop the product with a power off, or if the application wants to force

the product to execute an IMSI DETACH procedure, then it must send:

AT+CFUN=0 (equivalent to +CPOF).

This command executes an IMSI DETACH and makes a backup copy of some internal parameters in

SIM and in EEPROM. The SIM card cannot be accessed.

241HIf the mobile equipment is not powered off by the application after this command has been sent, a restart

command (AT+CFUN=1 or AT+CFUN=1,1) will have to be issued to restart the GSM registration

process.

242HIf the mobile equipment is turned off after this command, then a power on will restart the GSM

registration process.

243HThe AT+CFUN=1 (or AT+CFUN=1,1) command restarts the entire GSM stack and GSM functionality:

a complete software reset is performed. All parameters are reset to their previous values if AT&W was

not used.

24HThe AT+CFUN=1,0 command set the MT full functionality without reset. The command can be used

after AT+CFUN=0, AT+CPOF or AT+CFUN=4, otherwise +CME ERROR: 3 is returned. The RF and

SIM are accessible.

The AT+CFUN=4 command stops the RF (performs an IMSI DETACH if the embedded module is

registered) and keeps access to the SIM. All AT commands related to SIM access are allowed.

245HAfter performing a Power-OFF using +CPOF or AT+CFUN=0 command, the AT+CFUN=4 command

returns +CME ERROR: 3.

246HIf entries are written in the phonebook (+CPBW) and if the product is reset directly before +CPBW

response (AT+CFUN=1 or AT+CFUN=1,1, with no previous AT+CFUN=0 command), some entries

may be lost (the SIM task does not have enough time to write entries in the SIM card).

247HIn addition, the OK response will be sent at the last saved (AT&W) baud rate defined by the +IPR

command. With the autobauding mode, the response can be sent at a different baud rate, it is

therefore preferable to save the defined baud rate with AT&W before sending the AT+CFUN=1 (or

AT+CFUN=1,1) command.

248HNormally, when using UART1 or UART2 to manage the embedded module, the OK response is sent

to the application after the embedded module reset.

Caution: 249H When using the emulated serial port, the OK response is not provided. In addition, the embedded

module reset will cause the USB stack to stop. From the host’s point of view, it is similar to a USB

cable disconnection. As a consequence, the host will uninstall the Sierra Wireless USB driver and the

application will reference a non valid driver.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Set Phone Functionality +CFUN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 93

6.8.2. Syntax

Action command

250HAT+CFUN=<fun>[,<rst>]

OK

Read command

AT+CFUN?

+CFUN: <fun>

OK

Test command

AT+CFUN=?

251H+CFUN: (list of supported <fun>s),(list of supported <rst>s)

OK

6.8.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<fun>: functionality level

0 252Hset minimum functionality, IMSI detach procedure and SIM stop

1 set the full functionality mode with a complete software reset

4 only stop the RF (IMSI detach procedure) and keep access to the SIM

<rst>: reset (only for <fun> equals 1)

0 do not reset the MT before setting it to full functionality power level

1 reset the MT before setting it to full functionality power level (default value)

6.8.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Set Phone Functionality +CFUN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 94

6.8.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CFUN=? 253H+CFUN: (0,1,4),(0,1)

OK

AT+CFUN?

Note: Ask for current functionality level

+CFUN: 1

OK

Note: Full functionality

AT+CFUN=0

254HNote: Set minimum functionality, IMSI detach procedure

OK

25HAT+CFUN=1,0

Note: Set the full functionality mode with a complete software

reset

OK

256HAT+CFUN=1,0 +CME ERROR: 3

257HNote: No Power Off done before (CFUN=0, CFUN=4 or

CPOF)

AT+CFUN=4

Note: Stop the RF and keep SIM access

OK

AT+CFUN=1

Note: Set the full functionality mode with a complete software

reset

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Sierra Wireless Reset +WRST

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 95

6.9. Sierra Wireless Reset +WRST

6.9.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command resets the embedded module after a programmed delay.

The embedded module will reset cyclically until this mode is disabled.

6.9.2. Syntax

Action command

258HAT+WRST=<Mode>[,<Delay>]

OK

Read command

AT+WRST?

259H+WRST: <Mode>[,<Delay>,<RemainTime>]

OK

Test command

AT+WRST=?

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Sierra Wireless Reset +WRST

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 96

6.9.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Mode>: timer reset mode

0 disabled

1 enabled

<Delay>: time set to reset the embedded module

range: "000:01"- "168:59" (format hhh:mm)

<RemainTime>: time before next reset

range: "000:01"- "168:59" (format hhh:mm)

6.9.4. Parameter Storage

The <Mode> and <Delay> parameters are stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.

6.9.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WRST=0

Note: Disable timer

OK

260HAT+WRST=1,"001:03"

Note: Enable timer and set delay at 1 hour 3 minutes

OK

AT+WRST? 261H+WRST: 1,"001:03","001:01"

OK

262HNote: Timer activated to reset after 1hour and 3 minutes., next reset

is set for 1 hour and 1 minute.

6.9.6. Notes

Caution: : The +WRST command is strictly forbidden when the user application communicates with the Sierra

Wireless embedded module by using the USB serial port.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Save Configuration W

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 97

6.10. Save Configuration W

6.10.1. Description

This command writes the active configuration into a non-volatile memory (EEPROM).

6.10.2. Syntax

Action command

AT&W

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

6.10.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None.

6.10.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Save Configuration W

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 98

6.10.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+IPR=9600

Note: Change data rate in memory only

OK

AT&W OK

AT+CFUN=1 OK

AT+IPR?

+IPR: 9600

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Restore Factory Settings F

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 99

6.11. Restore Factory Settings F

6.11.1. Description

This command is used to restore factory settings from EEPROM.

6.11.2. Syntax

Action command

AT&F[<n>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

6.11.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: setting restore parameter

263HIf <n> is not omitted and with a value different from 0, the response is OK without any

treatment.

0 restore factory settings

6.11.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Restore Factory Settings F

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 100

6.11.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT&F

Note: Asks for restoring the factory settings

OK

Note: Done

AT&F0

Note: Idem

OK

Note: Done

6.11.6. Notes

264HFor each parameter, the section "Parameter Storage" specifies which default values can be restored

using AT&F. The parameters are restored in RAM and in E2P, overwriting the profile set with AT&W.

This command does not update the +IPR command.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Default Configuration ATZ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 101

6.12. Default Configuration ATZ

6.12.1. Description

This command restores the configuration profile from non-volatile memory (EEPROM).

6.12.2. Syntax

Action command

ATZ

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

6.12.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None.

6.12.4. Parameter Storage

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Default Configuration ATZ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 102

6.12.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+IPR?

+IPR: 115200

OK

Note: Default value is in EEPROM

AT+IPR=9600

Note: Change data rate in memory only

OK

AT+IPR?

+IPR: 9600

OK

ATZ OK

AT+IPR?

+IPR: 115200

OK

Note: Default value set back from EEPROM

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Display configuration V

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 103

6.13. Display configuration V

6.13.1. Description

This command is used to display the embedded module configuration.

6.13.2. Syntax

Action command

AT&V[<n>]

Q:<val1> V:<val2> S0:<val3> S2:<val4> S3:<val5> S4:<val6> S5:<val7>

+CR:<val8> +CRC:<val9> +CMEE:<val10> +CBST:<val11>

+SPEAKER:<val12> +ECHO:<val13> &C:<val14> &D:<val15> %C:<val16>

[+IPR:<val17>] +ICF:<val18> +IFC:<val19>

OK

265HNote: For each <valx> parameter, please refer to the corresponding command.

Read command

None

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Display configuration V

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 104

6.13.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: display control parameter

0 display the embedded module configuration in RAM (default value if no parameter

provided)

1 display the embedded module configuration in EEPROM

2 display the embedded module factory configuration

6.13.4. Parameter Storage

None.

6.13.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT&V

Note: Display active parameters in RAM

Q:0 V:1 S0:000 S2:043 S3:013 S4:010 S5:008

26H+CR:0 +CRC:0 +CMEE:0 +CBST:0,0,1

267H+SPEAKER:0 +ECHO:1,4 &C:1 &D:2 %C:0

268H+IPR:9600 +ICF:3,4 +IFC:2,2

OK

269HNote: Done for Echo, the first parameter indicates the echo cancellation activation

and the second parameter indicates the chosen algorithm. If no echo cancellation

is activated, the response is "+ECHO: 0".

6.13.6. Notes

The parameters displayed are the following:

• For <n> = 0 or 1

270H Q:val1, V:val2, S0:val3, S2:val4, S3:val5, S4:val6, S5:val7,

271H +CR:val8, +CRC:val9, +CMEE:val10, +CBST:val11,

272H +SPEAKER:val12, +ECHO:val13, &C:val14, &D:val15, %C:val16

273H +IPR:val17, +ICF:val18, +IFC:val19

• For <n> = 2

274H Q:val1, V:val2, S0:val3, S2:val4, S3:val5, S4:val6, S5:val7,

275H +CR:val8, +CRC:val9, +CMEE:val10, +CBST:val11,

276H +SPEAKER:val12, +ECHO:val13, &C:val14, &D:val15, %C:val16

27H +ICF:val18, +IFC:val19

The +IPR value is not returned for <n>=2.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Sierra Wireless Custom Character Set +WCCS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 105

6.14. Sierra Wireless Custom Character Set +WCCS

6.14.1. Description

278HThis Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows to edit and display the custom character set tables.

These tables are used by the "CUSTOM" mode of the +CSCS and the +WPCS commands. In this

"CUSTOM" mode, when the user enters a string, it is converted into GSM alphabet using the custom

to GSM table. In a similar way, when the user requests a string display, the string is converted from

GSM alphabet using the custom alphabet and the custom alphabet extension tables.

6.14.2. Syntax

• If <mode>=0

Action command

279HAT+WCCS=<mode>,<table>,<character_range>[,<character_range>]

280H+WCCS: <character_number>,<characters>

OK

• If <mode>=1

Action command

281HAT+WCCS=<mode>,<table>,<character_range>[,<character_range>]

> 

<characters><ctrl-Z>

OK

Read command

AT+WCCS=?

+WCCS: <mode>,<table>,<character_range>[,<character_range>]

OK

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Sierra Wireless Custom Character Set +WCCS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 106

6.14.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: requested operation

0 display the table

1 edit the table

<table>: character table selection

0 custom to GSM conversion table (default table is PCCP437 to GSM table)

1 custom alphabet table (default table is GSM 7 bit default alphabet)

2 custom alphabet extension table (default table is GSM 7 bit default alphabet

extended)

<character_range>: range of character codes in <table>

0-127 for table index 1 and index 2

0-255 for table index 0

<character_number>: number of displayed characters

0-127 for table index 1 and index 2

0-255 for table index 0

<characters>: sequence of ASCII characters

hexastring type

6.14.4. Parameter Storage

The <characters> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Sierra Wireless Custom Character Set +WCCS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 107

6.14.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WCCS=? 282H+WCCS: (0-1),(0-2),(0-255),(0-255)

OK

283HAT+WCCS=0,0,120,130

Note: Display from character 120 to character 130 of

the custom to GSM conversion table

284H+WCCS: 11, 78797A2020202020097E05

OK

Note: 11 characters displayed

285HAT+WCCS=1,0,115 >

20<ctrl-Z>

Note: Edit character 115 of the custom to GSM

conversion table

OK

Note: Edition successful

286HAT+WCCS=1,1,0,4 >

40A324A5E8<ctrl-Z>

Note: Edit the 5 first characters of the custom

alphabet table

OK

Note: Edition successful

287HAT+WCCS=0,1,1

Note: Display character 1 of the custom alphabet table

28H+WCCS: 1,A3

OK

6.14.6. Notes

289HIn edition mode, the session is terminated by <ctrl-Z>, or aborted by <ESC>. Only hexadecimal

characters ("0"…"9", "A"…"F") can be used. The number of characters entered must be equal to the

edition range requested, otherwise the command will return "+CME ERROR: 24".

The default custom alphabet extension table contains the following extended characters:

| ^ € { } [ ] ~ \

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Select TE Character Set +CSCS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 108

6.15. Select TE Character Set +CSCS

6.15.1. Description

290HThis command informs the ME which character set is used by the TE. The ME can convert each

character of entered or displayed strings. This is used to send, read or write short messages.

6.15.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CSCS=<Character Set>

OK

Read command

AT+CSCS?

+CSCS: <Character Set>

OK

Test command

AT+CSCS=?

+CSCS: (list of supported <Character Set>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Select TE Character Set +CSCS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 109

6.15.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Character Set>: character table set (ASCII string)

"GSM" GSM default alphabet.

"PCCP437" PC character set code page 437 (default value)

"CUSTOM" user defined character set

"HEX" hexadecimal mode. No character set used; the user can read or write

hexadecimal values

6.15.4. Parameter Storage

The <Character Set> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can

be restored using AT&F.

6.15.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CSCS=?

Note: Get possible values

291H+CSCS: ("GSM","PCCP437","CUSTOM","HEX")

OK

AT+CSCS="GSM"

Note: GSM default alphabet

OK

AT+CSCS?

Note: Get current value

+CSCS: "GSM"

OK

Note: GSM default alphabet

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Sierra Wireless Phonebook Character Set +WPCS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 110

6.16. Sierra Wireless Phonebook Character Set

+WPCS

6.16.1. Description

292HThis Sierra Wireless proprietary command informs the ME which character set is used by the TE for

the phonebooks. The ME can convert each character of entered or displayed strings. This is used to

read or write phonebook entries (parameters <text>, <address> and <mail>).

6.16.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WPCS=<Character Set>

OK

Read command

AT+WPCS?

+WPCS: <Character Set>

OK

Test command

AT+WPCS=?

+WPCS: (list of supported <Character Set>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Sierra Wireless Phonebook Character Set +WPCS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 111

6.16.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Character Set>: character table set (ASCII string)

"TRANSPARENT" transparent mode

The strings are displayed and entered as they are stored in SIM or in ME.

(default value)

"CUSTOM" user defined character set

"HEX" hexadecimal mode

No character set used; the user can read or write hexadecimal values.

6.16.4. Parameter Storage

The <Character Set> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can

be restored using AT&F.

6.16.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WPCS=?

Note: Get possible values

293H+WPCS: ("TRANSPARENT","HEX","CUSTOM")

OK

Note: Possible values

AT+WPCS="CUSTOM"

Note: Custom character set

OK

AT+WPCS? +WPCS: "CUSTOM"

Note: Get current value OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Set Language +CLAN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 112

6.17. Set Language +CLAN

6.17.1. Description

This command sets the language in the MT.

6.17.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CLAN=<code>

OK

Read command

AT+CLAN?

+CLAN: <code>

OK

Test command

AT+CLAN=?

+CLAN: (list of supported <code>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Set Language +CLAN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 113

6.17.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<code>: 2 character code for the language

The number indicated after the name refers to numeric value for the language in ISO

639 294H[16].

"AUTO" Selects the first language from EF-LP in the SIM card.

"AUTO" is not returned by the read command.

default value

"de" German (0)

"en" English (1)

"it" Italian (2)

"fr" French (3)

"es" Spanish (4)

"nl" Dutch (5)

"sv" Swedish (6)

"da" Danish (7)

"pt" Portuguese (8)

"fi" Finnish (9)

"no" Norwegian (10)

"el" Greek (11)

"tr" Turkish (12)

"hu" Hungarian (13)

"pl" Polish (14)

"cs" Czech (32)

"he" Hebrew (33)

"ar" Arabic (34)

"ru" Russian (35)

"is" Icelandic (36)

6.17.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Set Language +CLAN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 114

6.17.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CLAN="fr" OK

AT+CLAN=? 295H+CLAN:

("AUTO","de","en","it","fr","es","nl","s

v","da","pt","fi","no","el","tr","hu","p

l","cs","he","ar","ru","is")

OK

AT+CLAN? +CLAN: "fr"

OK

6.17.6. Notes

296HAfter reset, the embedded module starts in "AUTO" mode.

The read command returns a NULL string when in "AUTO" mode and the first entry in EF-LP is

undefined.

The read command returns an error message when in "AUTO" mode and the first entry in EF-LP SIM

file is invalid.

The read command returns an error message when EF-LP SIM file is invalidated.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Language Event +CLAE

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 115

6.18. Language Event +CLAE

6.18.1. Description

297HThis command is used to enable/disable +CLAV unsolicited result code, returned when the language

in the MT is changed.

6.18.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CLAE=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+CLAE?

+CLAE: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+CLAE=?

+CLAE: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

Unsolicited response

+CLAV: <code>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Language Event +CLAE

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 116

6.18.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: language event mode

0 disable unsolicited result code +CLAV (default value)

1 enable unsolicited result code +CLAV

<code>: 2 character code for the language

The number indicated after the name refers to numeric value for the language in ISO

639 298H[16].

"de" German (0)

"en" English (1)

"it" Italian (2)

"fr" French (3)

"es" Spanish (4)

"nl" Dutch (5)

"sv" Swedish (6)

"da" Danish (7)

"pt" Portuguese (8)

"fi" Finnish (9)

"no" Norwegian (10)

"el" Greek (11)

"tr" Turkish (12)

"hu" Hungarian (13)

"pl" Polish (14)

"cs" Czech (32)

"he" Hebrew (33)

"ar" Arabic (34)

"ru" Russian (35)

"is" Icelandic (36)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Language Event +CLAE

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 117

6.18.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

6.18.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CLAE=? +CLAE: (0-1)

OK

AT+CLAE=1 OK

+CLAV: "fr"

Note: Current language is French.

AT+CLAE? +CLAE: 1

OK

6.18.6. Notes

The +CLAV unsolicited response is returned by the embedded module when the "AT+CLAE=1"

command is sent to the embedded module and when the previous setting of <mode> was 0.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Select Type of Address +CSTA

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 118

6.19. Select Type of Address +CSTA

6.19.1. Description

This command selects the type of number for further dialing commands (D) according to GSM

specifications.

6.19.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CSTA=<type>

OK

Read command

AT+CSTA?

+CSTA: <type>

OK

Test command

AT+CSTA=?

+CSTA: (list of supported <type>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Select Type of Address +CSTA

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 119

6.19.3. Parameters and Defined Values

< type>: 29Htype of address octet (refer to 3GPP TS 24.008 subclause 10.5.4.7) ; default 145

when dialling string includes international access code character "+", otherwise 129

integer type

129 30HISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 301HISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

6.19.4. Parameter Storage

The <type> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

6.19.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CSTA=? 302H+CSTA: (129,145)

OK

AT+CSTA=145 OK

ATD33146290800;

Note: International access code character "+"will be

automatically added to each outgoing call

OK

AT+CSTA=129 OK

ATD+33146290800;

303HNote: International access code character "+" has to be

added for international calls, national calls otherwise.

OK

AT+CSTA? +CSTA: 129

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Cellular Text Telephone Modem +WCTM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 120

6.20. Cellular Text Telephone Modem +WCTM

6.20.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows the user to activate and deactivate the Cellular Text

Telephone Modem capability for outgoing voice call as specified in 3GPP 24.008 304H[8].

CTM mode is used to send audio signals from an external text terminal (ex: a TTY typewriter) within a

voice call made by the ME. The text terminal must have a special mobile phone input/output to work

correctly.

305HWhen the ME indicates that CTM text telephony for an outgoing voice call is supported, the network

selects a speech CODEC and additionally CTM text telephony detection and conversion functions.

306HTo guarantee optimal audio management of CTM signals, it is mandatory to deactivate Acoustic Echo

Cancellation (see +ECHO command) and Side Tone (see +SIDET command).

307HVoice gain of transmitter and receiver (see +VGR, +VGT commands) have to be calibrated according

to the external text terminal audio characteristics.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

6.20.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WCTM=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+WCTM?

+WCTM: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+WCTM=?

+WCTM: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Cellular Text Telephone Modem +WCTM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 121

6.20.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: CTM mode

0 disable (default value)

All incoming CTM calls will be rejected. Caller will receive a "no carrier"

indication.

1 enable

6.20.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored using AT&W command.

6.20.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WCTM=? +WCTM: (0-1)

OK

AT+WCTM=1 OK

AT+WCTM? +WCTM: 1

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Sierra Wireless Debug Interface Management +WDEBUG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 122

6.21. Sierra Wireless Debug Interface Management

+WDEBUG

6.21.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command enables or disables the Sierra Wireless debug interface.

308HOnce the interface state is modified, the product needs to be reset to take the modification into

account.

6.21.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDEBUG=<state>

OK

Read command

AT+WDEBUG?

309H+WDEBUG: <state>,<resetFlag>

OK

Test command

AT+WDEBUG=?

+WDEBUG: (list of supported <state>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Sierra Wireless Debug Interface Management +WDEBUG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 123

6.21.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<state>: state of the interface

0 disable (default value)

1 enable

<resetFlag>: reset flag

0 The state has not been modified since the last boot of the product.

1 The state has been modified since the last boot of the product; a reset must

be performed to take the modification into account.

6.21.4. Parameter storage

The <state> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.

6.21.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDEBUG=? 310H+WDEBUG: (0,1)

OK

AT+WDEBUG=1 OK

AT+WDEBUG?

31H+WDEBUG: 1,1

OK

AT+CFUN=1 OK

AT+WDEBUG? 312H+WDEBUG: 1,0

OK

6.21.6. Notes

This command is allowed only if the Sierra Wireless debug interface commercial feature is activated.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Digital to Analog Converter +DAC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 124

6.22. Digital to Analog Converter +DAC

6.22.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command sets various DACs present on embedded module to a

defined value.

6.22.2. Syntax

Action command

313HAT+DAC=<mode>,<DACIdx>[,<DACUnit>,<DACValue>]

OK

Read command

AT+DAC?

314H+DAC: <DAC0Value>[,<DAC1Value>[,<DAC2Value>] […]]

OK

Test command

AT+DAC=?

315H+DAC: <DACIdx>,<AnalogMinVolt>,<AnalogMaxVolt>,<Resolution>

316H[+DAC: <DACIdx>,<AnalogMinVolt>,<AnalogMaxVolt>,<Resolution> […]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Digital to Analog Converter +DAC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 125

6.22.3. Parameters and defined values

<mode>: mode

0 DAC de-allocation

1 DAC allocation

<DACIdx>: DAC index

<DACUnit>: write unit

0 write DAC in analog value

1 write DAC in digital value

<DACValue>: DAC value (in analog or digital unit)

Range example: 0-2300 (mV). It depends on embedded module (Please refer to

the embedded module Product Technical Specification).

317HFor the read command, DAC value is returned in analog unit.

<AnalogMinVolt>: minimal analog output signal deliverable by DAC (in mV)

It depends on embedded module (Please refer to the embedded module Product

Technical Specification)

<AnalogMaxVolt>: maximal analog output signal deliverable by DAC (in mV).

It depends on embedded module. (Please refer to the embedded module

Product Technical Specification)

<Resolution>: digital register number of bit

It depends on embedded module (Please refer to the embedded module Product

Technical Specification)

6.22.4. Parameters storage

No parameter is stored in EEPROM.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Digital to Analog Converter +DAC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 126

6.22.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+DAC=? 318H+DAC: 0,0,2200,8

OK

319HNote: Response on Q26XX, WMP100

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Response on Q24NG

AT+DAC? +CME ERROR: 505

320HNote: Response on Q26XX, WMP100. DAC has not been allocated

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Response on Q24NG

321HAT+DAC=0,0 +CME ERROR: 505

32HNote: Response on Q26XX, WMP100. DAC has not been allocated

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Response on Q24NG

323HAT+DAC=1,0,0,1600 OK

Note: DAC0 set to 1600mv

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Response on Q24NG

AT+DAC? +DAC: 1600

OK

324HNote: Response on Q26XX, WMP100

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Response on Q24NG

325HAT+DAC=1,0,0,2400 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: 4th parameter value exceeded. Previous DAC value is kept.if it

has been already set.

326HAT+DAC=1,0,1,45 OK

Note: DAC0 set to 45 (digital value)

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Response on Q24NG

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Digital to Analog Converter +DAC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 127

Command Responses

327HAT+DAC=1,0,1,45 +CME ERROR: 558

Note: DAC0 already reserved by another client.

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Response on Q24NG

328HAT+DAC=0,0 OK

Note: DAC0 deallocate.

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Response on Q24NG

6.22.6. Notes

329HDeallocation command (AT+DAC=0,x) and read command (AT+DAC?) return an error (+CME

ERROR: 505) if DAC has not been previously allocated.

30HIf an analog DAC value with a range 0 to 2200 is set, the converted digital value in the range of 0-255

is stored in the DAC register. As a result of the digital conversion, the requested value will differ from

the original analog value entered.

The AT+DAC command is not supported in the AirPrime SL6087 module; an error will be returned if

used with the SL6087.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Automatic Boost Mode +WCPS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 128

6.23. Automatic Boost Mode +WCPS

6.23.1. Description

31HThis Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows to activate or deactivate the automatic boost mode

functionality in the embedded module. When this feature is enabled, the firmware can change the

embedded module clock dynamically according to features used by the service user (like an EGPRS

transfer).

32HThe new setting will be taken into account immediately after the automatic boost mode feature

activation or deactivation. When this feature is disabled and if the service user hasn’t enabled the Vari

Speed feature (with a Sierra Wireless application), the firmware changes the embedded module clock

to the lowest frequencies.

Set the AHB bus clock. Only two values are possible, which corresponds to the minimal clock value

and the maximal clock value. This new setting will take into account only after resetting the embedded

module.

AHB bus is the internal bus between the ARM core and the peripherals. By increasing the bus speed,

it will optimise the RAM time access and at the same time, it will also increase the power

consumption, because the minimal ARM clock is equal to the AHB bus clock.

6.23.2. Syntax

Action command

3HAT+WCPS=<type>,<mode>

34H[+WCPS: <type>,<status>]

OK

Read command

AT+WCPS?

35H+WCPS: <type>,<status>

36H[+WCPS: <type>,<status>[…]]

OK

Test command

AT+WCPS=?

37H+WCPS: <type>,(list of supported <mode>s)

38H[+WCPS: <type>,(list of supported <mode>s)[…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Automatic Boost Mode +WCPS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 129

6.23.3. Parameters and defined values

<type>: embedded module functionality

0 automatic boost mode

1 AHB bus clock settings

<mode>: requested operation

For <type> = 0

0 deactivate the automatic boost mode

1 activate the automatic boost mode (default value)

2 get the automatic boost mode state

For <type> = 1

0 AHB bus clock set to its minimal value

1 AHB bus clock set to its maximal value

2 get the AHB bus clock state

<status>: current functionality status

For <type> = 0

0 automatic boost mode deactivated

1 automatic boost mode activated

For <type> = 1

0 AHB bus clock is set to minimal value

1 AHB bus clock is set to maximal value

6.23.4. Parameters storage

The <mode> parameter value is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Automatic Boost Mode +WCPS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 130

6.23.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WCPS=? 39H+WCPS: (0-1),(0-2)

OK

AT+WCPS? 340H+WCPS: 0,1

+WCPS: 1,0

OK

341HAT+WCPS=0,2 342H+WCPS: 0,1

OK

Note: Automatic boost mode is enabled.

AT+WCPS=1,2 +WCPS: 1,0

OK

Note: AHB bus clock set to its minimal value.

343HAT+WCPS=0,0

Note: Disable the automatic boost mode.

OK

AT+WCPS=1,1 OK

Note: AHB bus clock set to its maximal value.

AT+WCPS? 34H+WCPS: 0,0

+WCPS: 1,1

OK

Note: Automatic boost mode is disabled and AHB bus clock set to its

maximal value.

AT+CFUN=1

Note: Reset the embedded module.

OK

AT+WCPS? 345H+WCPS: 0,0

+WCPS: 1,1

OK

Note: Automatic boost mode is disabled and AHB bus clock set to its

maximal value.

346HAT+WCPS=0,0

Note: Disable the automatic boost mode when it’s

already enabled.

OK

AT&F

Note: Restore factory settings.

OK

Note: No effect on Automatic Boost Mode & AHB bus clock.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Automatic Boost Mode +WCPS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 131

Command Responses

AT+WCPS? 347H+WCPS: 0,0

+WCPS: 1,1

OK

Note: Automatic boost mode is disabled and AHB bus clock is set to

its maximal value. There is no effect of the AT&F command on the

Automatic Boost Mode status.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Auto shutdown +WASR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 132

6.24. Auto shutdown +WASR

6.24.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows the user to enable or disable the auto shutdown

feature on the specified UART port. The auto shutdown feature provides the ability to shut down or

power up an external RS232 transceiver by toggling a specific I/O in the embedded module. After the

feature is enabled in the embedded module, the user can activate or deactivate the auto shutdown

mode on that UART by toggling the DTR signal.

348HThe auto shutdown feature is only available on UARTs with DTR signal. By default, all UART ports will

have the auto shutdown feature disabled.

The user can enable the auto shutdown feature on <uart> only when that port is not used by another

plug-in application such as C-GPS or C-BT.

The user can enable the auto shutdown feature using <GpioId> only when that I/O is not used by

another feature.

349HThe new settings will be taken into account immediately after the auto shutdown feature has been

enabled or disabled. When the auto shutdown feature is enabled, a specific I/O pin will be dedicated

to the feature and cannot be used from other applications.

6.24.2. Syntax

• <mode=0>

Action command

350HAT+WASR=<mode>[,<uart>]

OK

• <mode=1>

Action command

351HAT+WASR=<mode>[,<uart>[,<GpioId>[,<timing>]]]

OK

• <mode=2>

Action command

352HAT+WASR=<mode>[,<uart>]

353H[+WASR: <status>,<uart>,<GpioId>,<timing>]

354H[+WASR: <status>,<uart>,<GpioId>,<timing>[…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Auto shutdown +WASR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 133

Read command

AT+WASR?

35H+WASR: <status>,<uart>,<GpioId>,<timing>

356H[+WASR: <status>,<uart>,<GpioId>,<timing>[…]]

OK

Test command

AT+WASR=?

357H+WASR: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <uart>s),(list of supported

<GpioId>s),(list of supported <timing>s)

358H[+WASR: list of supported <mode>s],(list of supported <uart>s), (list of supported

<GpioId>s),(list of supported <timing>s)[…]]

OK

6.24.3. Parameters and defined values

<mode>: requested operations

0 disable the auto shutdown feature on <uart>

359HIf <uart> is missing, all the available ports status will be disabled.

1 enable the auto shutdown feature on <uart> using the GPIO <GpioId> and the wake-up

time <timing>.

360HIf <uart>, <GpioId> and/or <timing> are missing, the current values (the previous

values set) will be used.

2 get the auto shutdown feature status on <uart>.

361H If <uart> is missing, all the available ports status will be listed.

<uart>: UART port identifier

1 UART1

Note: Currently only UART1 supports the auto shutdown Feature

<Gpiold>: I/O name

I/O name (as mentioned in the embedded module Product Technical Specification and

Customer Design Guideline) string type

362Hrange: list of available I/O (For WMP100, default value: GPIO24).

363HIf this parameter is missing, the current setting will be used

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Auto shutdown +WASR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 134

<timing> wake-up time of the external transceiver

t1 time delay to wake up the UART transceiver before displaying the unsolicited response in

30 micro second (μs) steps

range: 1-15 (default value: 6 (180μs))

364HIf this parameter is missing, the current setting will be used.

<status> current functionality status

0 auto shutdown feature disabled on <uart>(default value)

1 auto shutdown feature enabled on <uart>

6.24.4. Parameter Storage

365HThe <mode>, <uart>, <GpioId> and <timing> parameters are stored in EEPROM without using AT&W

command. The default values can be restored using AT&F.

6.24.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WASR=? 36H+WASR: (0-2),1,("GPIO0-GPIO44"),(1-15)

OK

Note: The range of GPIO depends on the type of embedded module.

Please refer to embedded module Product Technical Specification

and Customer Design Guideline for more information.

AT+WASR=? 367H+WASR: (0-2),1,("GPIO0-GPIO44,GPO0-GPO5"),(1-

15)

OK

Note: This format is only for product supporting both GPIO and

GPO. See embedded module Product Technical Specification and

Customer Design Guideline.

368HAT+WASR=1,1,"GPIO20",10

Note: The auto shutdown feature is activated on

UART1 using GPIO20 and the wake-up time is set to

300μs

OK

369HAT+WASR=2,1

Note: Get the auto shutdown feature status of UART1

370H+WASR:1,1,"GPIO20",10

OK

371HAT+WASR=0,1

Note: The auto shutdown feature is deactivated on

UART1

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Auto shutdown +WASR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 135

Command Responses

AT+WASR=1

372HNote: Enable the auto shutdown feature with current

UART, GPIO, and timing

OK

AT+CFUN=1

Note: Reset the embedded module

OK

AT+WASR=2

Note: Get the auto shutdown feature status of all UART

ports

373H+WASR:1,1,"GPIO20",10

OK

AT&F

Note: Restore factory settings

OK

AT+WASR=2

Note: Get the auto shutdown feature status of all UART

ports

374H+WASR:0,1,"GPIO24",6

OK

Note: There is only one UART port listed because currently only

UART1 supported the auto shutdown feature.

375HAT+WASR=1,1

Note: The auto shutdown feature is activated on

UART1 using default GPIO and t1

OK

376HAT+WASR=2,1

Note: Get the auto shutdown feature status of UART1

AT+WASR=1

37H+WASR:1,1,"GPIO24",6

OK

+CME ERROR: 560

Note: Auto shutdown feature already enabled

AT+WASR=0

Note: The auto shutdown feature is deactivated on all

UART ports

AT+WASR=0

OK

+CME ERROR: 560

Note: Auto shutdown feature already disabled

378HAT+WASR=1,2 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: <uart> out of range.

379HAT+WHCNF=0,2

380HAT+WHCNF=0,0

Note: Deactivate keypad

AT+CFUN=1

Note: A embedded module reset is needed to be able

to use an IO for another purpose

381H+WHCNF: 0,1

Note: Keypad is activated by default

OK

OK

382HAT+WASR=1,1,"GPIO4",10

Note: The auto shutdown feature is activated on

UART1 using GPIO4 and the wake-up time is set to

300μs

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

Auto shutdown +WASR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 136

Command Responses

383HAT+WASR=2,1

Note: Get the auto shutdown feature status of UART1

384H+WASR:1,1,"GPIO4",10

OK

385HAT+WASR=0,1

Note: The auto shutdown feature is deactivated on

UART1

AT+CFUN=1

Note: A embedded module reset is needed to be able

to use an IO for another purpose

OK

386HAT+WHCNF=0,1

Note: Activate keypad

AT+WASR=1

Note: Enable auto shutdown feature with current

parameters setting.

OK

+CME ERROR: 501

Note: GPIO allocation error because keypad and auto shutdown

feature share the same GPIO.

6.24.6. Notes

387HAfter the auto shutdown feature is enabled, the user is not allowed to alter the GPIO, which is

allocated for the auto shutdown feature status, using AT commands (such as +WIOM, +WIOR,

+WIOW) or Open ATฎ IO APIs in any circumstance. If the user tries to change the status (value or

direction) of the dedicated GPIO, an error will be returned.

38HOnce the auto shutdown mode is activated on the specified UART (e.g. UART1), no AT command will

be received by the embedded module (as DTR is set to low) through that UART port. When the auto

shutdown feature is disabled with AT+WASR command, the dedicated GPIO pin (e.g. GPIO24 for

Fastrack Supreme 10/20) is free to be used.

389HDue to the limitation of the maximum value in <timing>, the user must use a transceiver with the

wake-up time within the allowable range of <timing> (30μs - 450μs).

390HCurrently, only UART1 can support the auto shutdown feature.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

IP Stack Settings +WIPS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 137

6.25. IP Stack Settings +WIPS

6.25.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command configures the IP stack.

6.25.2. Syntax

Action command

391HAT+WIPS=[<param1>][,[<param2>][,[<param3>][,[<param4>][,[<param5>]

392H[,[<param6>][,[<param7>][,[<param8>][,[<param9>][,[<param10>]

393H[,[<param11>]]]]]]]]]]]

OK

Read command

AT+WIPS?

394H+WIPS: <param1>,<param2>,<param3>,<param4>,<param5>,<param6>,

<param7>,<param8>,<param9>,<param10>,<param11>

OK

Test command

AT+WIPS=?

395H+WIPS: (list of supported <param1>s),

(list of supported <param2>s),(list of supported <param3>s),

(list of supported <param4>s),(list of supported <param5>s),

(list of supported <param6>s),(list of supported <param7>s),

(list of supported <param8>s),(list of supported <param9>s),

(list of supported <param10>s),(list of supported <param11>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

IP Stack Settings +WIPS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 138

6.25.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<param>:

description range (default values)

<param1> Maximum number of sockets [8-32] 16

<param2> Maximum number of network buffers [24-255] 48

<param3> Maximum number of multicast group

entries

[0-255] 8

<param4> Maximum number of route entries [0-255] 8

<param5> Maximum number of DNS resolver

queries

[0-8] 4

<param6> DNS resolver cache size [0-255] 8

<param7> ARP cache size [0-255] 8

<param8> Number of PPP interfaces [0-10] 5

<param9> Number of GPRS interfaces [0-10] 6

<param10> Number of Ethernet interfaces [0-4] 1

<param11> Number of IP tunnel interfaces [0-10] 0

6.25.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command. The default values can be

restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Global Configuration Commands

IP Stack Settings +WIPS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 139

6.25.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WIPS=?

Note: Possible values

396H+WIPS: (8-32),(24-255),(0-255),(0-255),(0-

8),(0-255),(0-255),(0-10),(0-10),(0-

10),(0-10)

OK

AT+WIPS?

Note : Read parameters values for IP stack

397H+WIPS: 16,48,8,8,4,8,8,5,6,1,0

OK

398HAT+WIPS=16,48,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8

39HNote: Configure IP stack with params

(16,48,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8)

OK

AT+WIPS?

Note: Ask for the current params values

40H+WIPS: 16,48,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8

OK

401HAT+WIPS=,,14

Note: Change only the 3rd parameter

OK

AT+WIPS?

Note : Ask for the current params values.

402H+WIPS: 16,48,14,1,2,3,4,5,6,8

OK

6.25.6. Notes

403HIP stack is configured during the embedded module initialisation. Hence, if the user uses this

command or AT&F command, a reset is mandatory to take into account new parameters.

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 140

7. Embedded module Status

Commands

7.1. General Indications +WIND

7.1.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows controlling a general mechanism to send unsolicited

indications to the application.

7.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WIND=<IndLevel>

OK

Read command

AT+WIND?

+WIND: <IndLevel>

OK

Test command

AT+WIND=?

+WIND: (list of supported <IndLevel>s)

OK

• 404HFor <event>=0,1,2,3,4,7,8,9,13,14,16:

Unsolicited response

+WIND: <event>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

General Indications +WIND

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 141

• For <event>=5 and 6:

Unsolicited response

405H+WIND: <event>,<idx>

• For <event>=10:

Unsolicited response

406H+WIND:

<event>,<phonebook>,<status>[,<phonebook>,<status>[,<phonebook>,<status>[,<phoneboo

k>,<status>[,<phonebook>,<status>]]]]

• For <event>=11:

Unsolicited response

407H+WIND: <event>,[<checksum>],[<checksum>],[<checksum>],[<checksum>]

,[<checksum>],[<checksum>]

• For <event>=12:

Unsolicited response

408H+WIND: <event>,<ext_it_name>[,<EdgeState>]

• For <event>=15:

Unsolicited response

409H+WIND: <event>[,1,"<Full name>"][,2,"<Short name>"][,3,"<Local time

zone>"][,4,"<Universal time and local time zone>"][,5,"<LSA

Identity>"][,6,"<Daylight Saving time>"]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

General Indications +WIND

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 142

7.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<IndLevel>: indication levels

bit field (default value: 0)

bit set to 0: indication deactivated

bit set to 1: indication activated

0 no unsolicited "+WIND: <event>" will occur

1 (bit 0) activate hardware SIM insert / remove indications or SIM presence after

software reset

2 (bit 1) activate calling party alert indication

4 (bit 2) activate idle state indication

8 (bit 3) activate end of embedded module initialization (after PIN 1/CHV 1 code

entered) indication

16 (bit 4) activate new call identifier indication

32 (bit 5) activate call release indication

64 (bit 6) activate network service available indication

128 (bit 7) activate network lost indication

256 (bit 8) activate audio ON indication

512 (bit 9) activate SIM phonebooks reload status

1024 (bit 10) activate SIM phonebooks checksum indication

2048 (bit 11) activate interruption indication

4096 (bit12) activate hardware Rack Open/Closed Indication

8192 (bit13) activate NITZ indication

16384 (bit 14) activate SMS service ready indication

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

General Indications +WIND

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 143

<event>: event identifier

0 the SIM presence pin has detected a "SIM removed"

1 the SIM presence pin has detected a "SIM inserted"

2 the calling party is alerting

3 410Hthe product is ready to process AT commands (except phonebooks, AOC, SMS),

at init or after AT+CFUN=1

4 41Hthe product is ready to process all AT commands, end of phonebook init or swap

(FDN to ADN)

5 a call <idx> has been created (after ATD or +CCWA…)

6 412Ha call <idx> has been released, after a NO CARRIER, a "+CSSU: 5" indication, or

after the release of a call waiting

7 the network service is available for an emergency call

8 the network is lost

9 the audio channel is opened

10 reload status of each SIM phonebook after init phase (after power on or SIM

insertion)

11 checksum of SIM phonebooks after initialization

12 an interruption has occurred

13 the rack has been detected as closed

14 the rack has been detected as opened

15 the embedded module has received a NITZ information message from the

network

16 SMS and SMS CB services are initialized

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

General Indications +WIND

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 144

<idx>: call identifier

integer value

<phonebook>: phonebook memory storage

"SM" ADN

"FD" FDN

"ON" MSISDN

"SN" Service Number

"EN" Emergency Number

<status>: phonebook status after initialization

0 not reloaded from SIM (no change since last init or SIM removal)

1 reloaded from SIM to internal memory (at least one entry has changed)

<checksum>: 128-bit "fingerprint" of the phonebook

413HThe checksums are presented in the following order: SM, FD, ON, SN, EN, LD. If the

phonebook is not present in the SIM, the checksum is empty.

<ext_it_name>: interruption identifier (as mentioned in the embedded module Product Technical

Specification and Customer Design Guideline)

string type

<EdgeState>: state of the edge in case of both edge (the interruption happens with a high to low

and low to high edge) (please refer to +WIPC command description)

0 interruption happens with high to low edge

1 interruption happens with low to high edge

<Full name>: long alphanumerical format name received from the NITZ message

string type

<Short name>: short alphanumerical format name received from the NITZ message

string type

<Local time zone>: 414Hdifference, expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time and GMT.

signed integer

<Universal time and

local time zone>:

415Hindicates date, time and time zone expressed in quarters of an hour, in format

Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:SecondsฑTimeZone

416Hstring ("yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ssฑzz")

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

General Indications +WIND

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 145

<LSA Identity>: localized Service Area identity of the current cell in hexa format (3 bytes)

hexa string

<Daylight Saving

Time>:

417Hwhen the local time zone is compensated for DST (Day Saving time, or summertime),

the serving PLMN shall provide a DST parameter to indicate it. The adjustment for

DST can be +1h or +2h.

range: 0-2

7.1.4. Parameter Storage

The <IndLevel> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command. The default value

can be restored using AT&F.

7.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WIND? +WIND: 0

OK

AT+WIND=255 OK

Note: The SIM has been removed

+WIND: 0

Note: The SIM presence pin has been detected as "SIM removed"

Note: The SIM has been inserted

+WIND: 1

Note: The SIM presence pin has been detected as "SIM inserted"

Note: The network service is available for an

emergency call

+WIND: 7

Note: The initialization has been completed +WIND: 4

Note: The embedded module received a

NITZ information message

418H+WIND: 15,1,"Cingular

419HExtend",2,"Cingular",3,"+08",4,"03/14/27,1

6:59:48+08",5,"123456",6,"2"

AT+WIND=2048 OK

Note: Activate the +WIND indications for interruption

420H+WIND: 12,"INT0"

Note: An interruption occurred on INT0

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

General Indications +WIND

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 146

7.1.6. Notes

The following table indicates the correspondances between <IndLevel> values and "+WIND:

<event>[…]" indications that are activated.

<IndLevel> value corresponding <event>

1 0 and 1

2 2

4 3

8 4

16 5

32 6

64 7

128 8

256 9

512 10

1024 11

2048 12

4096 13 and 14

8192 15

16384 16

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Phone Activity Status +CPAS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 147

7.2. Phone Activity Status +CPAS

7.2.1. Description

This command returns the activity status of the mobile station.

7.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CPAS

+CPAS: <pas>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CPAS=?

+CPAS: (list of supported <pas>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Phone Activity Status +CPAS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 148

7.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<pas>: phone activity status

0 ready (allow commands from TA/TE)

1 unavailable (does not allow commands)

2 unknown

3 ringing (ringer is active)

4 call in progress

5 asleep (low functionality)

7.2.4. Parameter Storage

None.

7.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPAS +CPAS: 0

Note: Current activity status OK

AT+CPAS=? +CPAS: (0-5)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

SIM Holder Status +WSHS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 149

7.3. SIM Holder Status +WSHS

7.3.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows to check at any time the status of the SIM card

holder.

7.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WSHS

+WSHS: <status>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WSHS=?

+WSHS: (list of supported <status>s)

OK

7.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<status>: SIM holder status

0 open

1 closed

7.3.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

SIM Holder Status +WSHS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 150

7.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WSHS=? 421H+WSHS: (0,1)

OK

AT+WSHS

+WSHS: 0

OK

Note: Request the current SIM holder state Note: The SIM holder is open

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Indicator Control +CIND

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 151

7.4. Indicator Control +CIND

7.4.1. Description

42HThis command is used to read or set the values of ME indicators. If ME does not allow setting of

indicators or ME is not currently reachable, "+CME ERROR: <err>" is returned.

7.4.2. Syntax

Action command

None

Read command

AT+CIND?

423H+CIND: <ind>,<ind>,<ind>,<ind>,<ind>,<ind>,<ind>

OK

Test command

AT+CIND=?

424H+CIND: (<descr>,(list of supported <ind>s))[,(<descr>,(list of supported

<ind>s))[,…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Indicator Control +CIND

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 152

7.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<ind>: ME indicator state for one <descr> parameter

425Hinteger type value, which shall be in range of corresponding <descr> parameter

0 indicator is OFF or in a state which can be identified as "OFF" state

1 indicator is ON or in a state that is more substantial than "OFF" state

2-5 426H2 is more substantial than 1, and so on.

<descr>: ME indicator description

"battchg" battery charge level (0-5)

"signal" signal quality (0-5)

"service" service availability (0-1)

"message" message received (0-1)

"call" call in progress (0-1)

"roam" roaming indicator (0-1)

"smsfull" SMS memory storage status in the MT (0-2)

0: memory locations are available

1: memory full

2: One SMS has been received in the SC but the SMS storage where this SMS is

to be stored is full.

7.4.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Indicator Control +CIND

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 153

7.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CIND? 427H+CIND: 1,2,1,1,0,0,0

OK

428HNote: battchg: 1, signal: 2, service: 1 - ME registered on the network,

message: 1 - a SMS has been received, call: 0 – no call in progress, roam:

0 - not roaming, smsfull: 0 -SIM card is not full of SMS.

AT+CIND=?

429H+CIND: ("battchg",(0-5)),("signal",

(0-5)),("service",(0-1)),("message",

(0-1)),("call",(0-1)),("roam",

(0-1)),("smsfull",(0-2))

Note: Read possible value for ME indicators OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Mobile Equipment Event Reporting +CMER

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 154

7.5. Mobile Equipment Event Reporting +CMER

7.5.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command enables or disables sending of unsolicited result codes in

the case of a key press.

7.5.2. Syntax

Action command

430HAT+CMER=[<mode>][,[<keyp>][,[<disp>][,[<ind>][,[<bfr>]]]]]

OK

Read command

AT+CMER?

431H+CMER: <mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,<ind>,<bfr>

OK

Test command

None

Unsolicited response

432H+CKEV: <key>,<press> (key press event report)

43H+CIEV: <indresp>,<value> (indicator event report)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Mobile Equipment Event Reporting +CMER

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 155

7.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: Processing of unsolicited result codes

2 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is reserved and flush them

to the TE after reservation (after +++ was entered). Otherwise forward them directly

to the TE. (default value)

3 Forward unsolicited result codes to the TE by using a specific inband technique:

while TA-TE link is reserved (i.e. TE is in online data mode by CSD or GPRS call)

unsolicited result codes are replaced by a break (100ms) and stored in a buffer. The

unsolicited result codes buffer is flushed to the TE after reservation (after +++ was

entered). Otherwise, (the TE is not in online data mode) forward them directly to the

TE.

<keyp>: keypad event reporting mode

0 disabled (default value)

1 Keypad event reporting is routed using unsolicited code. Only the key pressings not

caused by +CKPD are indicated

2 Keypad event reporting is routed using unsolicited code. All key pressings are

indicated

<ind>: indicator event reporting mode

0 disabled (default value)

1 Indicator event reporting using unsolicited result code. Only the indicator events not

caused by +CIND shall be indicated by the TA to TE

2 Indicator event reporting using unsolicited result code. All indicator events shall be

directed from TA to TE

<key>: 434Hkeyboard map is (5,5)

0 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23 24

<press>: key operation

1 key pressed

0 key released

<indresp>: indicator order number (as specified for +CIND)

<value>: new value of the indicator

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Mobile Equipment Event Reporting +CMER

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 156

<bfr>: TA buffer of unsolicited result codes mode

0 TA buffer defined within this command is flushed to the TE

default value

<disp> display event reporting mode

0 disabled (default value)

7.5.4. Parameter Storage

The <keyp> and <ind> parameters are stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default values

can be restored using AT&F.

7.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

435HAT+CMER=,1

Note: Asks for key press event report

OK

436H+CKEV: 12,1

437H+CKEV: 12,0

Note: Key 12 has been pressed and released

438HAT+CMER=,,,1

Note: Asks for indicator event report

OK

439H+CMTI: "SM",10

40H+CIEV: 7,1

Note: SMS memory storage is full

AT+CMER? 41H+CMER: 2,1,0,1,0

OK

7.5.6. Notes

42HAs Sierra Wireless OS does not manage the emulation of key press, the values 1 and 2 of <keyp>

lead to the same results.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Mobile Equipment Control Mode +CMEC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 157

7.6. Mobile Equipment Control Mode +CMEC

7.6.1. Description

43HThis command selects the equipment which operates ME keypad, writes to ME display and sets ME

indicators. If operation mode is not allowed by the ME, "+CME ERROR: <err>" is returned.

7.6.2. Syntax

Action command

4HAT+CMEC=<keyp>[,<disp>[,<ind>]]

OK

Read command

AT+CMEC?

45H+CMEC: <keyp>,<disp>,<ind>

OK

Test command

AT+CMEC=?

46H+CMEC: (list of supported <keyp>s),(list of supported <disp>s),(list of supported

<ind>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Mobile Equipment Control Mode +CMEC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 158

7.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<keyp>: ME keypad control mode

2 ME can be operated from both ME keypad and TE

<disp>: ME display control mode

0 only ME can write to its display (+CDIS command can only be used to read the

display)

<ind>: ME indicators control mode

0 only ME can set the status of its indicators (+CIND command can only be used to

read the indicators)

7.6.4. Parameter Storage

None.

7.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CMEC=? 47H+CMEC: (2),(0),(0)

OK

48HAT+CMEC=2,0,0 OK

AT+CMEC? 49H+CMEC: 2,0,0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Sierra Wireless Status Request +WSTR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 159

7.7. Sierra Wireless Status Request +WSTR

7.7.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command returns some operation status. It can be used to check the

state of the initialization sequence and the network status.

7.7.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WSTR=<req status>

450H+WSTR: <req status>,<value>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WSTR=?

+WSTR: (list of supported <req status>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Sierra Wireless Status Request +WSTR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 160

7.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<req status>: requested status

1 initialization sequence status

2 network status

<value>: current status

For <req status>=1 For<req status>=2

0 not started no network

1 ongoing network available

2 finished

7.7.4. Parameter Storage

None.

7.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WSTR=?

Note: Asks for the list of possible values

+WSTR: (1-2)

OK

Note: possible values are 1 and 2

AT+WSTR=1

Note: Selects the status 1 (INIT SEQUENCE)

451H+WSTR: 1,2

OK

Note: Initialization finished

AT+WSTR=2

Note: Selects the status 2 (NETWORK STATUS)

452H+WSTR: 2,1

OK

Note: The network is available

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Temperature Monitoring Report +WTMR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 161

7.8. Temperature Monitoring Report +WTMR

7.8.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows users to enable or disable the unsolicited report of

the protocol stack status. The protocol stack will be switched off or on automatically as a result of

protection on the embedded module and its components against over-heating. This protection is

based on the Sierra Wireless embedded module temperature monitoring mechanism.

Note: The +WTMR command is available only for the Airprime Q26Extreme embedded module.

An unsolicited response with <state>=0 is sent to indicate the protocol stack is being switched off

when the CPU temperature is increasing and reaches the threshold T2_H.

453HAn unsolicited response with <state>=1 is sent to indicate the protocol stack is being switched on

when the CPU temperature is decreasing to the threshold T2_L (while the protocol stack was

switched off previously). In this state, the embedded module allows emergency calls only.

An unsolicited response with <state>=2 is sent to indicate the protocol stack can provide only limited

services when the CPU temperature is increasing and reaches the threshold T1_H (while full service

was provided previously). All activated PDP contexts and ongoing CS call will be deactivated but ongoing

emergency CS calls will be kept. In this state, the embedded module allows emergency calls

only.

An unsolicited response with <state>=3 is sent to indicate the protocol stack is providing full services

when the CPU temperature is decreasing to the threshold T1_L or below.

Embedded module temperature monitoring mechanism:

454HFour pre-defined threshold temperatures – T1_L, T1_H, T2_L and T2_H – will be used in this

mechanism.

: Unsolicited report to indicate the protocol stack states

45H 0, 1, 2, 3 : protocol stack states.

456HNormally, the embedded module will work with full services below T1_L. When the embedded module

temperature reaches the threshold T1_H or above, all activated PDP contexts and ongoing CS call

will be deactivated, except emergency call. Then, only emergency calls are accepted.

457HIn order to prevent damage to the embedded module and its components, the protocol stack will be

automatically switched off when the temperature T2_H is reached. The stack will be switched on

T2_H

T2_L

T1_H

T1_L

Temperature

1

0

2

1

0

2 2

3 3

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Temperature Monitoring Report +WTMR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 162

again when the temperature is down to T2_L. At this moment, only emergency call could be issued.

Full services of the embedded module are resumed once the temperature is at or below T1_L.

7.8.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WTMR=<mode>

458H[+WTMR: <mode>,<state>]

OK

Read command

AT+WTMR?

+WTMR: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+WTMR=?

+WTMR: (list of supported <mode>)

OK

Unsolicited Response

+WTMR: <state>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Temperature Monitoring Report +WTMR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 163

7.8.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: selected mode

0 unsolicited report off

1 unsolicited report on (default)

2 read current embedded module state

<state>: Embedded module protocol stack status

0 protocol stack is switched off

1 Emergency calls only. The protocol stack is switched on from the state which is

switched off previously.

2 Emergency calls only. All currently activated packets calls have been hanged-up and

ongoing CS call terminated except emergency CS calls.

3 Embedded module is in full services

7.8.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Temperature Monitoring Report +WTMR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 164

7.8.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WTMR=?

Note : Get possible value

+WTMR: (0-2)

OK

459HNote : Three modes (0,1,2) are available

AT+WTMR?

Note : Get current value

+WTMR: 1

OK

Note : Unsolicited report is enabled

+WTMR: 2

460HNote : Unsolicited report (threshold temperature T1_H reached,

protocol stack with limited services)

461HAT+CGACT=1,1 +CME ERROR: 567

Note : Operation denied due to CPU over-heated

AT+WTMR=2 462H+WTMR: 2,2

OK

Note: Read current <state>.

AT+WTMR=0 OK

Note: Unsolicited report is disabled.

AT+WTMR=3 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: Incorrect <mode>.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Sierra Wireless Critical Error Report +WCER

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 165

7.9. Sierra Wireless Critical Error Report +WCER

7.9.1. Description

This command is used to enable/disable +WCER unsolicited result code, returned when a critical

hardware error occurs on the embedded module.

Note: This command is not available for the Airprime Q26Extreme embedded module.

7.9.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WCER=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+WCER?

+WCER: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+WCER=?

+WCER: (0-1)

OK

Unsolicited response

+WCER: <errorCause>,<extendedValue>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Embedded module Status Commands

Sierra Wireless Critical Error Report +WCER

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 166

7.9.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: request operation

0 disable Critical Error Report result code +WCER (default value)

1 enable Critical Error Report unsolicited result code +WCER

<errorCause>: hardware error code

string type; two bytes error cause in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3" equals

195 in decimal);

range: "0000"-"1004"

<extendedValue>: extended hardware error code (additional information related to <errorCause>)

string type; two bytes extended error cause in hexadecimal format;

range: "0000"-"FFFF"

7.9.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EPROM without using the AT&W command.

7.9.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WCER=0 OK

AT+WCER=1

OK

Note: Enable Critical Error Report unsolicited indication

+WCER: "1000","0000"

Note: Critical error occurred on embedded module; main error code is

0x1000, additional error code is 0x0000.

AT+WCER? +WCER: 1

OK

AT+WCER=? +WCER: (0-1)

OK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 167

8. Serial Port Commands

8.1. Echo ATE

8.1.1. Description

This command is used to determine whether the embedded module echoes characters received by

an external application (DTE) or not.

8.1.2. Syntax

Action command

ATE[<n>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

8.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: echo activation parameter

0 Characters are not echoed (default value if <n> omitted)

1 Characters are echoed.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Echo ATE

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 168

8.1.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command.

8.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

ATE0

Note: Characters are not echoed

OK

Note: Done

ATE1

Note: Characters are echoed

OK

Note: Done

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Fixed DTE Rate +IPR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 169

8.2. Fixed DTE Rate +IPR

8.2.1. Description

This command specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands.

8.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+IPR=<rate>

OK

Read command

AT+IPR?

+IPR: <rate>

OK

Test command

AT+IPR=?

463H+IPR: (list of auto-detectable <rate>s),(list of supported <rate>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Fixed DTE Rate +IPR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 170

8.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<rate>: baud rates that can be used by the DCE

0 enables autobauding

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

38400

57600

115200 default value

230400

460800

921600

8.2.4. Parameter Storage

The <rate> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Fixed DTE Rate +IPR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 171

8.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+IPR? +IPR: 9600

OK

Note: Current rate is 9600 bps

AT+IPR=? 464H+IPR:

(1200,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200,230400,460800,921600),

(0,300,600,1200,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200,230400,

460800,921600)

OK

465HNote: Possible values, according to V25 ter recommendation: the first set of values indicates the range

of auto-detectable baud rates .The second set of values indicates the baud rates supported by the

DCE.

AT+IPR=38400 OK

Note: Disables autobauding and sets rate to 38400 bps

AT+IPR=0 OK

Note: Enables autobauding

8.2.6. Notes

• 46HThe serial autobauding feature is supported, and covers the following serial speeds (only):

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, 230400, 460800, 921600 bps.

Beyond those serial speeds, correct operation of the embedded module is not guaranteed.

• 467HAny AT command issued by the DTE must start with both capital ‘A’ and ‘T’ (or ‘/’) or both

lower case ‘a’ and ‘t’ (or ‘/’), otherwise the DCE may return some garbage characters and

become desynchronized. Should this happen, the DTE simply issues ‘AT\r’ (at 2400 or 4800

bauds) once or twice or just ‘AT’ (at 9600 bauds) to resynchronize the embedded module.

• 468HThe DTE waits for 1ms after receiving the last character of the AT response (which is always

‘\n’ or 0x0A) to send a new AT command at either the same rate or a new rate. Should this

delay be ignored, the DCE can become desynchronized. Once again, sending ’AT\r’ once or

twice or just ‘AT’ causes the DCE to recover.

Caution: 469H When starting up, if autobauding is enabled and no AT command has yet been received, the

product sends all unsolicited responses (like RING) at 9600 bauds.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 172

8.3. DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF

8.3.1. Description

This command is used to determine the local serial port start-stop (asynchronous) character framing

used by the DCE.

8.3.2. Syntax

Action command

470HAT+ICF=<format>[,<parity>]

OK

Read command

AT+ICF?

471H+ICF: <format>,<parity>

OK

Test command

AT+ICF=?

472H+ICF: (list of supported <format>s),(list of supported <parity>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 173

8.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<format>: character framing format

1 8 data 2 stop

<parity> parameter is ignored.

2 8 data 1 parity 1 stop

473Hif no <parity> provided, 3 is used by default as <parity> value.

3 8 data 1 stop

<parity> parameter is ignored.

default value

4 7 data 2 stop

<parity> parameter is ignored.

5 7 data 1 parity 1 stop

474Hif no <parity> provided, 3 is used by default as <parity> value.

6 7 data 1 stop

<parity> parameter is ignored.

<parity>: character framing parity

0 odd

1 even

2 mark

3 space

4 none (default value)

8.3.4. Parameter Storage

The <format> and <parity> parameters are stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 174

8.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+ICF=? 475H+ICF: (1-6),(0-4)

OK

Note: Possible values

476HAT+ICF=2,0 OK

Note: New values

AT+ICF? 47H+ICF: 2,0

OK

Note: Current values

8.3.6. Notes

478HAll framing settings of the serial interface (i.e 801, 8E1, 8S1, 8N1, 7N1, 7O1, 7E1, 7S1 and 7N2) are

supported for autobaud mode.

If USB port is used:

• 479Hthe action command is supported for compatibility reasons (but without effect),

• the response to the action command and the read command behaviour is the same as if sent

on UART1 or UART2. See the section Managing the USB feature of the "Appendixes to AT

Commands Interface Guide" for the supported USB emulated serial port settings.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

DTE-DCE Local Flow Control +IFC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 175

8.4. DTE-DCE Local Flow Control +IFC

8.4.1. Description

This command is used to control the operation of local flow control between the DTE and DCE.

8.4.2. Syntax

Action command

480HAT+IFC=<DCE_by_DTE>,<DTE_by_DCE>

OK

Read command

AT+IFC?

481H+IFC: <DCE_by_DTE>,<DTE_by_DCE>

OK

Test command

AT+IFC=?

482H+IFC: (list of supported <DCE_by_DTE>s),(list of supported <DTE_by_DCE>s)

OK

8.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<DCE_by_DTE>: local flow control parameter

0 none

2 RTS (default value)

<DTE_by_DCE>: local flow control parameter

0 none

2 CTS (default value)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

DTE-DCE Local Flow Control +IFC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 176

8.4.4. Parameter Storage

The <DCE_by_DTE> and <DTE_by_DCE> parameters are stored in EEPROM using AT&W command.

8.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+IFC=? 483H+IFC: (0,2),(0,2)

OK

Note: Possible values

484HAT+IFC=0,0 OK

Note: New values

AT+IFC? 485H+IFC: 0,0

OK

8.4.6. Notes

If USB port is used:

• 486Hthe action command is supported for compatibility reasons (but without effect),

• the response to the action command is the same as if sent on UART1 or UART2 and the

value of the both parameters is always 2.

487HWhen the <DTE_by_DCE> parameter is set to 0 (none), the CTS is kept high all the time.

The valid pairs of values for 'AT+IFC' action command are '0,0' and '2,2' as only 'Auto RTS CTS -

Hardware' flow control or Flow control as none values are supported.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Result Code Suppression ATQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 177

8.5. Result Code Suppression ATQ

8.5.1. Description

This command determines whether the mobile equipment sends result codes or not.

8.5.2. Syntax

Action command

ATQ[<n>]

[OK]

Read command

None

Test command

None

8.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: result code transmission parameter

0 DCE transmits result codes.

1 result codes suppressed and not transmitted (default value).

8.5.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be restored

using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Result Code Suppression ATQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 178

8.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

ATQ0

Note: DCE transmits result codes

OK

Note: Command valid

ATQ1

Note: Result codes are suppressed and not

transmitted

Note: No response

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

DCE Response Format ATV

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 179

8.6. DCE Response Format ATV

8.6.1. Description

48HThis command determines whether the DCE response format uses or not the header characters

<CR><LF>, and whether the result codes are provided as numeric or verbose.

8.6.2. Syntax

Action command

ATV<n>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

8.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: format control parameter

information responses result code

0 <text><CR><LF> <numeric code><CR>

1 (default

value)

<CR><LF>

<text><CR><LF>

<CR><LF>

<verbose code><CR><LF>.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

DCE Response Format ATV

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 180

8.6.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be restored

using AT&F.

8.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

ATV0

Note: DCE transmits limited headers and trailers and

numeric result codes

0

Note: Command is valid (0 means OK)

ATV1

Note: DCE transmits full headers and trailers and

verbose response text

OK

Note: Command valid

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Set DCD Signal C

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 181

8.7. Set DCD Signal C

8.7.1. Description

This command controls the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal.

8.7.2. Syntax

Action command

AT&C[<n>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

8.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: DCD signal control parameter

0 DCD always on

1 DCD matches the state of the remote embedded module’s data carrier (default

value).

8.7.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Set DCD Signal C

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 182

8.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT&C0

Note: DCD always on

OK

Note: Command valid

AT&C1

Note: DCD matches state of the remote embedded

module’s data carrier

OK

Note: Command valid

8.7.6. Notes

489HSierra Wireless products slightly differ from V25ter Recommendation. DCD signal ("Circuit 109") is

turned ON at the same time the CONNECT message is sent, whereas the specification states that the

DCD should be turned ON after the CONNECT message was received.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Set DTR Signal D

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 183

8.8. Set DTR Signal D

8.8.1. Description

This command controls the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal.

8.8.2. Syntax

Action command

AT&D[<n>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

8.8.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: DTR signal control parameter

0 DTR signal is ignored.

1 Embedded module switches from data to command mode when DTR switches from

ON to OFF.

2 490HUpon DTR switch from ON to OFF, the call is released (default value).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Set DTR Signal D

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 184

8.8.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be restored using AT&F.

8.8.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT&D0

Note: The DTR signal is ignored

OK

Note: Command valid

AT&D1

Note: Embedded module switches from data to

command mode when DTR switches from ON to OFF

OK

Note: Command valid

AT&D2

491HNote: Upon DTR switch from ON to OFF, the call is

released

OK

Note: Command valid

8.8.6. Notes

DTR detection can be done over UART or USB interface.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Set DSR Signal S

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 185

8.9. Set DSR Signal S

8.9.1. Description

This command controls the Data Set Ready (DSR) signal.

8.9.2. Syntax

Action command

AT&S[<n>]

OK

Read command

AT&S?

&S: <n>

OK

Test command

AT&S=?

ERROR

8.9.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: DSR signal control parameter

0 DSR always ON

1 492HDSR OFF in command mode, DSR ON in data mode (default value)

8.9.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be restored

using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Set DSR Signal S

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 186

8.9.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT&S0

Note: DSR always valid

OK

AT&S1

493HNote: DSR always valid

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Sierra Wireless Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 187

8.10. Sierra Wireless Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM

8.10.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command sets the state of the Ring Indicator Mode.

8.10.2. Syntax

Action command

494HAT+WRIM=<mode>[,<events_bit_field>[,<pulse_width>]]

OK

Read command

AT+WRIM?

+WRIM: <mode>[,<events_bit_field>[,<pulse_width>]]

OK

Test command

AT+WRIM=?

495H+WRIM: <mode>[,<events_bit_field>[,<pulse_width>]]

496H[+WRIM: <mode>[,<events_bit_field>[,<pulse_width>]][…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Sierra Wireless Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 188

8.10.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: RI mode

0 up-down RI mode: no pulses are sent before unsolicited AT response. Up-down

signals are sent when receiving an incoming call (default value).

1 497Hpulse RI mode: an electrical pulse is sent on the Ring Indicator signal ONLY for

selected event and/or unsolicited AT responses as specified in

<events_bit_field>, in order to lose no AT responses when client tasks are in

sleep state.

498HWhen receiving incoming calls, electrical pulses are sent on the RI signal. For

incoming IP packet event, the electrical pulse is sent just before sending a

downloaded data packet (GPRS or CSD) if the remote client tasks has dropped

down his RTS signal.

49HFor unsolicited AT response, the electrical pulse is sent just before sending an

unsolicited AT response.

<events_bit_field>: events for ring indication

mandatory in pulse RI mode (<mode> = 1)

bit set to 0: message disabled

bit set to 1: message enabled

bit 0 incoming IP packet

bit 1 50HRING, +CRING, +CCWA, +CLIP

bit 2 501H+CMT, +CMTI, +CDS, +CDSI

bit 3 502H+CBM, +CBMI

bit 4 503H+CME ERROR: 13, +CCED

The unsolicited response "+CME ERROR: 13" is sent out only when there is a

SIM card problem.

bit 5 504H+CREG, +CIEV

bit 6 +WDCI

bit 7 +CCCM

bit 8 +CKEV

bit 9 +CSQ

bit 10 NO CARRIER

bit 11 505H+STCR, +STRIL, +STIN

bit 12 +WIND

bit 13 +CALA

bit 14 506H+WDIAGI, +WBCI

bit 15 +WLOC

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Sierra Wireless Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 189

bit 16 for Open ATapplications

507HIf this bit is set, RI pulse will be sent when the unsolicited response initiated by

an Open ATapplication is sent.

bit 17 +CGREG

bit 18 +CGEV

bit 19 +CSSU

bit 20 +CUSD

bit 21 508H+WBTUM, +WBTSM

bit 22 +CLAV

<pulse_width>: RI pulse width in ms unit

used only in pulse RI mode (<mode>=1).

509HIf <pulse_width> parameter is omitted, the last entered value will be used.

Default value is 0

0-18 510HPulse duration is some μs and may be increased up to 3ms, due to overhead

interrupt processes.

19-5000 Pulse duration granularity is 18.46 ms. Then effective pulse duration will be

rounded to the lowest multiple of 18.46.

Example:

<pulse_width>=19 --> pulse duration is 18.46ms

<pulse_width>= 100 --> pulse duration is 92.3ms

8.10.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Sierra Wireless Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 190

8.10.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WRIM=?

Note : Ask for the list of possible values

+WRIM: 0

51H+WRIM: 1,(0-8388607),(0-5000)

OK

512HNote : Possible mode values 0, 1

AT+WRIM=0

Note : Select up-down RI mode

OK

Note : Up-down RI mode selected

513HAT+WRIM=1,71

514HNote: bit field (0…0)1000111 (0x47 or decimal 71) to

enable IP packets, RING, +CRING, +CCWA, +CLIP,

+CMT, +CMTI, +CDS, +CDSI, +WBCI, +WDCI

OK

AT+WRIM?

Note : Ask for the current value

515H+WRIM: 1,71,0

OK

Note : Current mode is pulse RI

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Back to online mode AT0

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 191

8.11. Back to online mode AT0

8.11.1. Description

This command allows to return to online data mode if a connection has been established and the ME

is in command mode.

8.11.2. Syntax

Action command

ATO

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

8.11.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None.

8.11.4. Parameter Storage

None.

8.11.5. Examples

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Multi-flow Management +WMFM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 192

8.12. Multi-flow Management +WMFM

8.12.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command manages Multi-Flows:

• opening or closing ports

• 516Hassociating (or attaching, redirecting) incoming data to ports.

517HBy default, only UART1 is opened, and GSM and GPRS (if applicable) data direction is dynamic.

8.12.2. Syntax

• for <type_of_action>=0

Action command

518HAT+WMFM=<type_of_action>,<mode>[,<port_id>]

519H[+WMFM: <type_of_action>,<mode>,<port_id>,<state>[…]]

OK

• for <type_of_action>=1

Action command

520HAT+WMFM=<type_of_action>,<mode>[,<port_id>[,<data>]]

521H[+WMFM: <type_of_action>,<mode>,<port_id>,<data>[…]]

OK

Read command

AT+WMFM?

52H+WMFM: <type_of_action>,<mode>,<port_id>,<state>

523H[+WMFM: <type_of_action>,<mode>,<port_id>,<state>[…]]

524H+WMFM: <type_of_action>,<mode>,<port_id>,<data>

525H[+WMFM: <type_of_action>,<mode>,<port_id>,<data>[…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Multi-flow Management +WMFM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 193

8.12.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<type_of_action>: managing mode

0 manage active physical ports

1 manage incoming data

<mode>: requested operation according to <type_of_action>:

0 close physical port

or

528Hset dynamic mode for incoming data (data direction is set on ATD / ATA

commands for GSM, or ATD / +CGDATA commands for GPRS)

1 open physical port

or

attach incoming data to <port_id>

2 read state

<port_id>: port identifier

1 UART1

1x DLC x on UART 1 (x : from 1 to 4)

2 UART2

2x DLC x on UART 2 (x : from 1 to 4)

3 USB

3x DLC x on USB (x: from 1 to 4)

4 529Hdynamic port (only in read mode, default value with <type_of_action>=1)

80 Open ATapplication

Test command

AT+WMFM=?

526H+WMFM: <type_of_action>,(list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported

<port_id>s)[,(list of supported <data>s)]

527H[+WMFM: <type_of_action>,(list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported

<port_id>s)[,(list of supported <data>s)][…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Multi-flow Management +WMFM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 194

<data>: data type

0 GSM data

1 GPRS data

<state>: physical port state

0 deactivated

1 activated

8.12.4. Parameter Storage

The <state> and <port_id> parameters are stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.

8.12.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WMFM=? 530H+WMFM: 0,(0-2),(1-3,80)

531H+WMFM: 1,(0-2),(1),(0,1)

OK

532HNote: To manage incoming data, only UART 1 is available

53HAT+WMFM=0,2

534H+WMFM: 0,2,1,1

535H+WMFM: 0,2,2,0

536H+WMFM: 0,2,3,0

OK

Note: Read state of all ports Note: UART1 is opened

537HAT+WMFM=0,1,2

Note: Open UART2

OK

538HAT+WMFM=0,2,2

Note: Read UART2 state

539H+WMFM: 0,2,2,1

OK

540HAT+WMFM=1,2 541H+WMFM: 1,2,4,0

542H+WMFM: 1,2,4,1

OK

Note: Read attachments of ports to which data are

redirected

Note: GSM and GPRS data are dynamic

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Multi-flow Management +WMFM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 195

Command Responses

543HAT+WMFM=1,1,1,0

Note: Attach GSM data to UART1

OK

Note: GSM data are redirected to UART1

54HAT+WMFM=1,1,1,1

Note: Attach GPRS data to UART1

OK

Note: GPRS data are redirected to UART1

545HAT+WMFM=1,2,1 546H+WMFM: 1,2,1,0

547H+WMFM: 1,2,1,1

OK

Note: Read attachments of UART1 Note: GSM and GPRS data are redirected to UART1

548HAT+WMFM=1,0,,0

Note: Set GSM data dynamic mode

OK

Note: GSM data are directed dynamically on call setup

549HAT+WMFM=1,0,,1

Note: Set GPRS data dynamic mode

OK

Note: GPRS data are directed dynamically on session setup

AT+WMFM? 50H+WMFM: 0,2,1,1

51H+WMFM: 0,2,2,1

52H+WMFM: 0,2,3,0

53H+WMFM: 1,2,4,0

54H+WMFM: 1,2,4,1

OK

AT+CMUX=0

Note: Launch 27.010 protocol on UART 2 and open 4

DLCs

OK

AT+WMFM=? 5H+WMFM: 0,(0-2),(1-3)

56H+WMFM: 1,(0-2),(1,21,22,23,24),(0,1)

OK

57HNote: To manage incoming data, UART1, and DLC 1, 2, 3, 4 on

UART2 are available.

58HAT+WMFM=1,1,21,0

Note: Attach GSM data to DLC 1 on UART2

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Multi-flow Management +WMFM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 196

8.12.6. Notes

• 59HSince the UART2 port does not provide all the serial signals (only RX/TX/RTS/CTS), it is not

recommended to use this port for GSM or GPRS data mode.

• The response to AT+WMFM=? is dynamic according to the different UART states for

<type_of_action>=1 (depending on which port number is opened when the command is sent

to the embedded module).

• Only the remote UART can be opened or closed (it is impossible to close UART1 sending

WMFM command trough UART1)

• 560HWhen <port Id> attached to a data flow allocated for incoming data is closed, the

management returns to dynamic mode.

• 561HIn the "mode" parameter, 3 value is not allowed because used internally.

• The reading "Port: 80" state with +WMFM command always returns +CME ERROR: 3

• The UART2 port is not available when the Bluetooth stack is started

• 562HWhen the redirection of the GPRS flow is activated and two GPRS communications are

established, the first GPRS flow is attached to the port specified by +WMFM command and

the second one is not redirected

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Multiplexing Mode +CMUX

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 197

8.13. Multiplexing Mode +CMUX

8.13.1. Description

This command is used to manage (enable or disable) the 3GPP TS 27.010 [14] multiplexing protocol

control channel.

This command allows the multiplexing of 4 logical channels on each UART and USB CDC/ACM.

Multiplexing can be applied simultaneously to all UART and USB. The client application may handle,

by this means, up to 12 channels (4 logical multiplexed channels on each UART and USB).

When a CMUX session is enabled on a specific port, the Sierra Wireless embedded module allows to

open 4 DLCs on this port. These DLCs can be in the range of 1 to 4. This excludes DLC0 which is for

the control channel.

563HThe AT+CMUX? command returns a +CMUX response only on a DLC port. On a physical port, only

OK response is returned.

The AT+CMUX? command returns the 27.010 MUX protocol configuration on the port on which this

command is sent.

8.13.2. Syntax

Action command

564HAT+CMUX=<mode>[,<subset>[,<port_speed>[,<N1>[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>[,<T3>]]]]]]]

OK

Read command

AT+CMUX?

565H[+CMUX: <mode>,<subset>,<port_speed>,<N1>,<T1>,<N2>,<T2>,<T3>]

OK

Test command

AT+CMUX=?

56H+CMUX: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <subset>s),(list of supported

<port_speed>s),(list of supported <N1>s),(list of supported <T1>s),(list of

supported <N2>s),(list of supported <T2>s),(list of supported <T3>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Multiplexing Mode +CMUX

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 198

8.13.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: multiplexer transparency mechanism

0 basic option

<subset>: multiplexer control channel set up

567HA virtual channel may subsequently be set up differently but if there is no settings

negotiation, the virtual channel will be set up according to the control channel

<subset> setting.

0 UIH frames used only

<port_speed>: transmission rate

1 9600 bit/s

2 19200 bit/s

3 38400 bit/s

4 57600 bit/s

5 115200 bit/s

6 230400 bit/s

7 460800 bit/s

8 921600 bit/s

<N1>: maximum frame size

1-255 default value: 31

<T1>: acknowledgement timer in units of 20 ms.

1-128 default value: 5 (100 ms)

<N2>: maximum number of retransmission

0-255 default value: 3

<T2>: response timer for the multiplexer control channel in units of 20 ms.

<T2> must be longer than <T1>

1-128 default value: 15 (300 ms)

<T3>: wake up response timer in units of 2 seconds

1-128 default value: 5 (10 s)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Multiplexing Mode +CMUX

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 199

8.13.4. Parameter Storage

None.

8.13.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CMUX=?

568H+CMUX: (0),(0),(1-5),(1-255),

(1-128),(0-255),(1-128),(1-128)

Note: Get supported values OK

569HAT+CMUX=0,0,5,31,5,3,15,5 OK

Note: Enter multiplex mode

AT+CMUX? 570H+CMUX: 0,0,5,31,5,3,15,5

Note: Get current values OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Sierra Wireless USB Configuration +WUSB

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 200

8.14. Sierra Wireless USB Configuration +WUSB

8.14.1. Description

The AT command described into this document allows the customer to configure the USB interface.

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows a user to:

• Update the device and configuration customization

• Set the USB classes to be used

8.14.2. Syntax

Depending on the context, several responses to the command are possible:

• For <Mode>=0

Action command

AT+WUSB=<Mode>

OK

• For <Mode>=1

Action command

AT+WUSB=<Mode>[,[<idVendor>][,[<iManufacturer>][,<iSerialNumber>]]]

OK

• For <Mode>=2

Action command

AT+WUSB=<Mode>,<StackId>[,[<idProduct>][,[<iProduct>][,[<bmAttributes>]

[,<bMaxPower>]]]]

OK

• For <Mode>=3

Action command

AT+WUSB=<Mode>,<Selection>[,<Function>]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Sierra Wireless USB Configuration +WUSB

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 201

• For <Mode>=4

Action command

AT+WUSB=<Mode>,<USBAlloc>

OK

Read command

AT+WUSB?

+WUSB: 1,<idVendor>,<iManufacturer>,<iSerialNumber>

+WUSB: 2,<StackId>,<idProduct>,<iProduct>,<bmAttributes>,<bMaxPower>

+WUSB: 3,<Selection>,<Function>

+WUSB: 4,<USBAlloc>

OK

Test command

AT+WUSB=?

+WUSB: 0

+WUSB: 1,<idVLen>,<iMLen>,<iSNLen>

+WUSB: 2,(list of supported <StackId>s),<idPLen>,<iPLen>,(list of supported

<bmAttributes>s),(list of supported <bMaxPower>s)

+WUSB: 3,(list of supported <Selection>s),(list of supported <Function>s)

+WUSB: 4,(list of supported <USBAlloc>s)

OK

8.14.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Mode>: Mode

0 Set the default values

1 Device customization

2 Configuration customization

3 USB firmware classes activation

4 USB resource allocation when the device starts (firmware or Open AT)

<idVendor>: Vendor Id (assigned by the USB-IF)

When this parameter is not defined, the value taken into account by the device

is: 0x114F. This value is a 16 bits value.

<iManufacturer>: Index of string descriptor describing manufacturer

When this parameter is not defined, the value taken into account by the device

is: “SIERRA WIRELESS”. Maximum length = 126 characters

<iSerialNumber>: USB serial number

When this parameter is not defined, the value taken into account by the device

is the device Serial number (see +WMSN command). Maximum length= 126

characters

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Sierra Wireless USB Configuration +WUSB

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 202

<StackId>: USB Stack identifier

Currently only 0 (meaning UDEV0) is supported

<idProduct>: Product ID (assigned by the manufacturer)

When this parameter is not defined, the value taken into account by the device

is 0x1234. This value is a 16 bits value.

<iProduct>: Index of string descriptor describing product

When this parameter is not defined, the value taken into account by the device

is USB MODULE. Maximum length = 126 characters

<bmAttributes>: Configuration characteristics

This parameter is taken into account at the next USB enumeration. Note that

no values other than those listed below are accepted.

128 bus powered device and no remote wakeup

160 bus powered device and remote wakeup

192 self powered device and no remote wakeup

224 self powered device and remote wakeup

<bMaxPower>: Maximum power consumption of the USB device from the bus in this specific

configuration when the device is fully operational.

Expressed in 2 mA units (i.e., 50 = 100 mA).Range: [0-255] in mA.

<Selection>: <Function> selection state

A functional layer needs to be selected on the USB port before using the USB

layer.

0 Deselected

1 Selected

<Function>: The function in question.

UFLCDC USB Function Layer Communications Device Class (default value)

<idVLen>: <idVendor> parameter max length

<iMLen>: <iManufactuerer> parameter max length

<iSNLen>: <iSerialNumber> parameter max length.

<idPLen>: <idProduct> parameter max length

<iPLen>: <iProduct> parameter max length

<USBAlloc>: USB resource allocation at boot.

0 USB binding allowed by the firmware at boot (default value)

1 USB binding not allowed by the firmware at boot (used when an Open AT

application defines its own USB class)

8.14.4. Parameter Storage

All parameters are stored in non-volatile memory without sending &W command. &F command has no

impact on these values.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Sierra Wireless USB Configuration +WUSB

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 203

8.14.5. Examples

Command Possible responses

AT+WUSB=? +WUSB: 1,4,126,126

+WUSB: 2,(0),4,126,(128,160,192,224),(0-255)

+WUSB: 3,(0-1),("UFLCDC")

+WUSB: 4,(0-1)

OK

AT+WUSB? +WUSB: 1,"114F","SIERRA

WIRELESS","A41010000101501"

+WUSB: 2,0,"1234","USB MODEM",192,20

+WUSB: 3,"UFLCDC"

+WUSB: 4,0

OK

Note: Default customization

AT+WUSB=2,0,"5000","MyProduct" OK

Note: Device customization

AT+WUSB? +WUSB: 1,"114F","SIERRA

WIRELESS","A41010000101501"

+WUSB: 2,0,"5000","MyProduct",192,20

+WUSB: 3,"UFLCDC"

+WUSB: 4,0

OK

AT+WUSB=1,”FFFF”,”MyCompanyName

”

OK

Note: Device customization

AT+WUSB? +WUSB: 1,"FFFF","MyCompanyName","A41010000101501"

+WUSB: 2,0,"5000","MyProduct",192,20

+WUSB: 3,"UFLCDC"

+WUSB: 4,0

OK

AT+WUSB=0 OK

Note: Set the default values

AT+WUSB? +WUSB: 1,"114F","SIERRA

WIRELESS","A41010000101501"

+WUSB: 2,0,"1234","USB MODEM",192,20

+WUSB: 3,"UFLCDC"

+WUSB: 4,0

OK

Note: Default customization

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Serial Port Commands

Sierra Wireless USB Configuration +WUSB

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 204

8.14.6. Notes

• To activate the class UFLCDC, see +WMFM command

• Deselect UFLCDC deactivates the class, meaning that the associate port will be closed.

• To delete the device customization, AT+WUSB=1 command should be sent to the device.

To delete the configuration customization, AT+WUSB=2,0 command should be sent to the

device

Caution: If the <idVendor> or <idProduct> are modified, the Sierra Wireless Windows driver is not usable. A

new driver corresponding to the customized parameters is mandatory to use the CDC.

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 205

9. Security Commands

9.1. Enter PIN +CPIN

9.1.1. Description

571HThis command is used to enter the ME passwords (PIN 1/CHV 1, PIN 2/CHV 2, PUK1, PUK2, etc.),

that are required before any ME functionality can be used.

572HPIN 1/CHV 1 and PIN 2/CHV 2 are between 4 and 8 digits long, PUK1 and PUK2 are only 8 digits

long.

573HAfter three unsuccessful attempts to enter the PIN, the PUK will be required. PUK validation forces

the user to enter a new PIN code as a second parameter and this will be the new PIN code if PUK

validation succeeds. PIN 1/CHV 1 is then enabled if PUK1 is correct.

The application is responsible for checking the PIN after each reset or power on if the PIN was

enabled.

9.1.2. Syntax

Action command

574HAT+CPIN=<pin>[,<NewPin>]

OK

Read command

AT+CPIN?

+CPIN: <code>

Note: No OK

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

Enter PIN +CPIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 206

9.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<NewPin>: Personal Identification Number

This parameter is required if the PIN state is SIM PUK.

four to eight digits number

<pin>: Personal Identification Number

normally PIN 1/CHV 1

575HAccording to AT+CPIN?, the <pin> parameter can be PUK 1, PH-SIM

PIN, PH-NET PIN, PH-NETSUB PIN, PH-SERVPROV PIN, PHCORPORATE

PIN

four to eight digits number

<code>: SIM code status

READY ME is not writing for any password

SIM PIN PIN 1/CHV 1 is required

SIM PUK PUK1 is required

SIM PIN2 PIN 2/CHV 2 is required

SIM PUK2 PUK2 is required

PH-SIM PIN SIM lock (phone-to-SIM) is required

PH-NET PIN network personalization is required

PH-NETSUB PIN network subset is required

PH- SERVPROV PIN service provider is required

PH- CORPORATE PIN corporate is required

9.1.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

Enter PIN +CPIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 207

9.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPIN=1234

Note: Enter PIN

OK

Note: PIN code is correct

AT+CPIN=5678

Note: Enter PIN

+CME ERROR: 3

576HNote: Operation not allowed, PIN previously entered

57HAT+CPIN=00000000,1234

Note: Enter PUK and new PIN

+CME ERROR: 16

Note: Incorrect PUK

578HAT+CPIN=12345678,1234

579HNote: Enter PUK and new PIN, 2nd attempt

OK

580HNote: PUK correct, new PIN stored

The response "+CME ERROR: 13" (SIM failure) is returned after 10 unsuccessful PUK attempts. The

SIM card is then out of order and must be replaced.

581HIf the user tries to do something which requires PIN 2/CHV 2, the product will refuse the action with a

"+CME ERROR: 17" (SIM PIN2 required). The product then waits for SIM PIN 2/CHV 2 to be given.

582HIf PIN 2/CHV 2 is blocked, SIM PUK2 is required instead of SIM PIN 2/CHV 2.

583HFor example, the product needs PIN 2/CHV 2 to write in the fixed dialing phonebook (FDN) , so if SIM

PIN 2/CHV 2 authentication has not been performed during the current session, SIM PIN 2/CHV 2 is

required

Command Responses

AT+CPBS="FD"

Note: Choose FDN

OK

584HAT+CPBW=5,"01290917",129,"Jacky"

Note: Write in FDN at location 5

+CME ERROR: 17

Note: SIM PIN2 is required

AT+CPIN? +CPIN: SIM PIN2

Note: SIM PIN2 is required

AT+CPIN=5678

Note: Enter SIM PIN2

OK

585HAT+CPBW=2,"01290917",129,"Jacky"

Note: Write in FDN at location 5

OK

Note: Writing in FDN is allowed

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

Enter PIN +CPIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 208

9.1.6. Notes

+CME ERROR: 553 is returned when the PIN 1/CHV 1 code is tried to be changed using burned PUK

1 code.

+CME ERROR: 554 is returned when the PIN 1/CHV 1 and PUK1 codes try to be entered when

theses codes are burned.

.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

Enter PIN2 +CPIN2

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 209

9.2. Enter PIN2 +CPIN2

9.2.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used to validate the PIN 2/CHV 2 code or to validate the

PUK2 code (UNBLOCK CHV2) and to define a new PIN 2/CHV 2 code.

This command is only used when the last command executed resulted in PIN 2/CHV 2 authentication

failure.

586HPIN 2/CHV 2 length is between 4 and 8 digits, PUK2 length is 8 digits only.

587HAfter three unsuccessful attempts, PUK2 will be required. PUK2 validation forces the user to enter a

new PIN 2/CHV 2 code as a second parameter and this will be the new PIN 2/CHV 2 code if PUK1

validation succeeds.

9.2.2. Syntax

Action command

58HAT+CPIN2=<pin2>[,<NewPin2>]

OK

Read command

AT+CPIN2?

+CPIN2: <code>

Note: No OK

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

Enter PIN2 +CPIN2

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 210

9.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<pin2>: Personal Identification Number 2

four to eight digits number

<oper>: Personal Unblocking Key 2 needed to change the PIN2.

<Newpin2> New Personal Identification Number 2

four to eight digits number

<code>: SIM code status

READY no PIN2 is needed

SIM PIN2 PIN2 is required

SIM PUK2 PUK2 is required

9.2.4. Parameter Storage

None.

9.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPIN2=1234 OK

Note: Enter PIN2 Note: PIN2 code is correct

AT+CPIN2=5678 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: Enter PIN2 589HNote: Operation not allowed, PIN2 previously entered

590HAT+CPIN2=00000000,1234

Note: Enter PUK2 and new PIN2

+CME ERROR: 16

Note: Incorrect Password (PUK2)

591HAT+CPIN2=12345678,1234

592HNote: Enter PUK2 and new PIN2, 2nd attempt

OK

593HNote: PUK2 correct, new PIN2 stored

AT+CPIN2=1234 OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

PIN Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 211

9.3. PIN Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC

9.3.1. Description

594HThis Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used to get the number of valid attempts for

PIN 1/CHV 1, PIN 2/CHV 2, PUK1 and PUK2 identifiers.

9.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CPINC

595H+CPINC: <n1>,<n2>,<k1>,<k2>

OK

Read command

AT+CPINC?

596H+CPINC: <n1>,<n2>,<k1>,<k2>

OK

Test command

AT+CPINC=?

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

PIN Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 212

9.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n1>: attempts left for PIN 1/CHV 1

range: 0-3

597H(0 = blocked, 3 = max)

<n2>: attempts left for PIN 2/CHV 2

range: 0-3

598H(0 = blocked, 3 = max)

<k1>: attempts left for PUK1

range: 0-10

59H(0 = blocked, 10 = max)

<k2>: attempts left for PUK2

range: 0-10

60H(0 = blocked, 10 = max)

9.3.4. Parameter Storage

None.

9.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPINC 601H+CPINC: 2,3,10,10

Note: Get the number of attempts left

OK

Note: First PIN 1/CHV 1 attempt was a failure

AT+CPINC? 602H+CPINC: 2,3,10,10

OK

Note: Get current values Note: First PIN 1/CHV 1 attempt was a failure

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

Change Password +CPWD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 213

9.4. Change Password +CPWD

9.4.1. Description

603HThis command is used by the application to change a password (PIN, call barring, NCK, etc.). The

facility values are the same as for the +CLCK command with a "P2" facility to manage "SIM PIN

2/CHV 2".

604HFor the network lock ("PN"), unlocking is forbidden after 10 failed attempts to disable (unlock) the

network lock with an incorrect password.

9.4.2. Syntax

Action command

605HAT+CPWD=<fac>,<oldpwd>,<newpwd>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CPWD=?

606H+CPWD: list of supported (<fac>,<pwdlength>)s

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

Change Password +CPWD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 214

9.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<fac>: facility P2 SIM P2

"PS" SIM lock facility with a 8 digits password

"SC" password change (user indicates old and new password)

"AO" BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls)

"OI" BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls)

"OX" BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except to Home Country)

"AI" BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls)

"IR" BIC-Roam (Barr Inc. When Roaming outside Home Country)

"AB" All Barring services

"AG" All out Going barring services

"AC" All inComing barring services

"P2" PIN code 2/CHV2

"FD" SIM Fixed Dialing Numbers (FDN) memory feature (PIN2 is

required as <password>)

"PN" Network lock with a 8 digits password (NCK)

"PU" Network Subset lock with a 8 digits password (NSCK)

"PP" Service Provider lock with a 8 digits password (SPCK).

"PC" Corporate lock with a 8 digits password (CCK)

<oldpwd>: on 4 or up to 8 or 16 digits according to the facility

<newpwd>: new password specified for the facility

string type [….]

<pwdlength>: maximum length of the password for the facility

range: 4-16

9.4.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

Change Password +CPWD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 215

9.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPWD=? 607H+CPWD: ("PS",8),("SC",8),("AO",4),

("OI",4),("OX",4),("AI",4),

("IR",4),("AB",4),("AG",4),

("AC",4),("P2",8),("FD",8),

("PN",8),("PU",8),("PP",8),

("PC",8)

OK

Note: Possible values 608HNote: PIN 1/ CHV 1, PIN 2/CHV 2 must be on 8 digits

maximum (4 minimum). For call barring, on 4 digits

maximum.

609HAT+CPWD="SC",1234,5555

Note: Change PIN

OK

Note: PIN was correct

610HAT+CPWD="SC",1234,5555

Note: Change PIN

+CME ERROR: 16

Note: PIN was wrong

AT+CPIN=5555

Note: Enter PIN

OK

Note: PIN was correct

61HAT+CPWD="PN",12345678,00000000

Note: Change NCK

OK

Note: NCK changed for network lock

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

Facility Lock +CLCK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 216

9.5. Facility Lock +CLCK

9.5.1. Description

612HThis command is used by the application to lock, unlock or ask for an ME or network facility.

9.5.2. Syntax

Action command

613HAT+CLCK=<fac>,<mode>[,<password>[,<class>]]

614H[+CLCK: <status>,<class>[…]]

OK

Read command

TAT+CLCK?

615H+CLCK: (<fac>,<status>),[…]

OK

Test command

AT+CLCK=?

+CLCK: (list of supported <fac>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

Facility Lock +CLCK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 217

9.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<fac>: facility

"PS" SIM lock facility with a 8 digits password

"SC" PIN enabled (<mode>=1) / disabled (<mode>=0)

"AO" BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls)

"OI" BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls)

"OX" BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except to Home Country)

"AI" BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls)

"IR" BIC-Roam (Barr Incoming When Roaming outside Home Country)

"AB" All Barring services

"AG" All out Going barring services

"AC" All inComing barring services

"FD" SIM Fixed Dialing Numbers (FDN) memory feature (PIN 2/CHV 2 is required as

<password>)

"PN" Network lock with a 8 digits password (NCK)

"PU" Network Subset lock with a 8 digits password (NSCK)

"PP" Service Provider lock with a 8 digits password (SPCK).

"PC" Corporate lock with a 8 digits password (CCK)

<mode>: requested operation

0 unlocks the facility

1 locks the facility

2 query status

<password>: password code

616Hstring type, 4 to 8 digits depending on <fac>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

Facility Lock +CLCK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 218

<class>: call class

617HThe combination of different classes is not supported, it will only result in the

activation/deactivation/status request of all classes (7).

1 voice

2 data

4 fax

7 618Hvoice, data and fax (default value if omitted)

8 short messages

<status>: facility lock status

0 not active

1 active

9.5.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> and <password> parameters are stored in EEPROM and SIM (depending on <fac>)

without using the AT&W command.

9.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CLCK=? 619H+CLCK:

("PS","SC","AO","OI","OX","AI","IR","AB","A

G","AC","FD","PN","PU","PP","PC")

OK

620HAT+CLCK="SC",1,1234

621HNote: activate PIN locking, 1234 is PIN 1/CHV 1

OK

62HAT+CLCK="SC",2 +CLCK: 1

OK

AT+CLCK? 623H+CLCK: ("PS",0),("SC",1),("FD",0),("PN",0)

,("PU",0),("PP",0),("PC",0)

OK

9.5.6. Notes

FDN locking is only available after receiving the +WIND: 4 indication.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

Sierra Wireless LoCK +WLCK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 219

9.6. Sierra Wireless LoCK +WLCK

All cases except auto CNL

For auto CNL

9.6.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows the ME to be locked on a specific network operator.

9.6.2. Syntax

Action command

624HAT+WLCK=<fac>,<passwd>,<NetId>[,<GID1>[,GID2]][,<CnlType>[,<CnlData>]]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

Sierra Wireless LoCK +WLCK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 220

9.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<fac>: facility to be locked

"PS" SIM lock facility with a 8 digits password (PCK)

"PN" network lock with a 8 digits password (NCK)

"PU" network subset lock with a 8 digits password (NSCK)

"PP" service provider lock with a 8 digits password (SPCK)

"PC" corporate lock with a 8 digits password (CCK)

<CnlType>: type of lock for cooperative network list (CNL)

0 automatic (cooperative network list retrieved from EF-CNL SIM file)

EF-CNL file must be present in SIM to use automatic mode.

1 manual (cooperative network list is given in the <CnlData> parameter)

<CnlData>: cooperative network list

same format as in EF-CNL SIM file (please refer to 625H[8] or 626H[9]) used only if

<CnlType> = 1

hexastring type

<passwd>: password code

627Hstring type, 8 digits

<NetId>: IMSI for SIM lock (<fac>="PS")

operator in numeric format (MCC and MNC) for other locks (other <fac> values)

<GID1>: Group IDentifier level 1

mandatory for service provider lock (<fac>="PP") and for corporate lock

(<fac>="PC")

<GID2>: Group IDentifier level 2

mandatory for corporate lock (<fac>="PC")

9.6.4. Parameter Storage

The lock action is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Security Commands

Sierra Wireless LoCK +WLCK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 221

9.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

628HAT+WLCK="PN",12345678,20810 OK

629HNote: Activate network lock on SFR (208,10) Note: Network lock activated

630HAT+WLCK="PS",12345678,208105923568974 OK

Note: Activate SIM lock Note: SIM lock activated

631HAT+WLCK="PU",12345678,2081035 OK

632HNote: Activate Network Subset lock on SFR (208, 10, 35) Note: Network Subset lock activated

63HAT+WLCK="PP",12345678,20810,"E5" OK

634HNote: Activate Service Provider lock on SFR (208, 10) and GID1 (0xE5). Note: Service Provider lock activated

635HAT+WLCK="PC",12345678,20810,"E5","10" OK

636HNote: Activate Corporate lock on SFR (208, 10), GID1 (0xE5) and GID2

(0x10)

Note: Corporate lock activated

637HAT+WLCK="PN",12345678,20810,0 OK

638HNote: Activate Network lock on SFR (208, 10) using cooperative

network list from SIM file EF-CNL (must be present in SIM)

Note: Network lock activated on SFR and cooperative

network list present in SIM

639HAT+WLCK="PN",12345678,20801,1,"02F802FFFFFF02F8

01FFFFFF"

OK

640HNote: Activate Network lock on F ORANGE (208, 01) with manual cooperative

network list including SFR (208, 10) and Bouygtel (208, 20)

641HNote: Network lock activated on F ORANGE

(primary network), SFR and Bouygtel (cooperative

networks)

9.6.6. Notes

Test SIM cards (with MCC=001 & MNC=01) do not check these locks.

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 222

10. Time Management Commands

10.1. Clock Management +CCLK

10.1.1. Description

This command is used to set or get the current date and time of the ME real time clock.

10.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CCLK=<date and time string>

OK

Read command

AT+CCLK?

+CCLK: <date and time string>

OK

Test command

None

10.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<date and time string>: 642Hstring format for date/time is: "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss"

643HValid years are 00 (for 2000) to 99 (for 2099). The seconds field is not

mandatory. Default date/time is "00/01/01,00:00:00" (January 1st, 2000

/midnight).

10.1.4. Parameter Storage

64HThe <date and time string> parameter is stored without using AT&W command. If no back-up power

supply is connected to the RTC pin, the date and time will be restored to the last value set with

+CCLK when the embedded module is power cycled.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Time Management Commands

Clock Management +CCLK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 223

10.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

645HAT+CCLK="00/06/09,17:33:00"

646HNote: Set date to June 9th, 2000, and time to 5:33 pm

OK

Note: Date/Time stored

647HAT+CCLK="00/13/13,12:00:00"

Note: Incorrect month entered

+CME ERROR: 3

AT+CCLK?

Note: Get current date and time

648H+CCLK: "00/06/09,17:34:23"

OK

649HNote: Current date is June 9th, 2000 current time is

5:34:23 pm

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Time Management Commands

Alarm Management +CALA

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 224

10.2. Alarm Management +CALA

10.2.1. Description

This command is used to set date/time alarms in the ME. The maximum number of alarms is 16.

Note: The current date/time should be already set with +CCLK command before using +CALA.

10.2.2. Syntax

Action command

650HAT+CALA=[<date and time string>][,<index>]

OK

Read command

AT+CALA?

651H+CALA: <date and time string>,<index>

652H[+CALA: <date and time string>,<index>[…]]

OK

Test command

None

Unsolicited response

653H+CALA: <date and time string>,<index>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Time Management Commands

Alarm Management +CALA

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 225

10.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<date and time string>: 654Hstring format for date/time is: "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss"

65HValid years are 00 (for 2000) to 99 (for 2099). The seconds field is not

mandatory. Default date/time is "00/01/01,00:00:00" (January 1st, 2000

/midnight).

<index>: 656Hoffset in the alarm list,

range: 1-16.

10.2.4. Parameter Storage

None.

10.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

657HAT+CALA="00/06/08,15:25"

658HNote: Set an alarm for June 8th, 2000 at 3:25 pm

OK

659HAT+CALA="00/06/09,07:30"

60HNote: Set an alarm for June 9th, 2000 at 7:30 am

OK

AT+CALA?

Note: List all alarms

61H+CALA: "00/06/08,15:25:00",1

62H+CALA: "00/06/09,07:30:00",2

OK

63HNote: Two alarms are set (index 1, 2)

64H+CALA: "00/06/08,15:25:00",1

Note: An alarm occurs (index 1)

65HAT+CALA="",2

Note: Delete alarm index 2

OK

Note: Alarm index 2 deleted

AT+CALA?

Note: List all alarms

OK

Note: No alarm

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 1 February 18, 2011 226

Index

A/, 21

AT, 20

AT0, 191

ATE, 167

ATI, 39

ATQ, 177

ATV, 179

ATZ, 101

C, 181

CALA, 224

CCLK, 222

CFUN, 92

CGMI, 23

CGMM, 25

CGMR, 37

CGSN, 35

CIND, 151

CLAE, 115

CLAN, 112

CLCK, 216

CMEC, 157

CMEE, 61

CMER, 154

CMUX, 197

CPAS, 147

CPIN, 205

CPIN2, 209

CPINC, 211

CPOF, 90

CPWD, 213

CSCS, 108

CSTA, 118

D, 183

DAC, 124

F, 99

GCAP, 47

ICF, 172

IFC, 175

IPR, 169

S, 185

V, 103

W, 97

W32K, 88

WASR, 132

WBHV, 72

WCCS, 105

WCER, 165

WCFM, 85

WCPS, 128

WCTM, 120

WDEBUG, 122

WDOP, 29

WDWL, 49

WFM, 81

WHCNF, 63

WHWV, 27

WIMEI, 31

WIND, 140

WIPS, 137

WLCK, 219

WMFM, 192

WMSN, 33

WOPEN, 51

WOPENRES, 60

WPCS, 110

WRIM, 187

WRST, 95

WSHS, 149

WSTR, 159

WSVN, 45

WTMR, 161

WUSB, 200

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079

019

February 18, 2011

Volume 2

AT Commands Interface Guide

for Firmware 7.45

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 2

Related Documents

This interface specification is based on the following recommendations:

[1] ETSI GSM 07.05: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Use of DTE-DCE

interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)

[2] ETSI GSM 07.07: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); AT command set for GSM

Mobile Equipment (ME)

[3] ITU-T Recommendation V.25 ter: Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control

[4] ETSI GSM 03.40: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Technical implementation

of the Short Message Service (SMS) Point-to-Point (PP)

[5] ETSI GSM 03.38: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Alphabets and languagespecific

information

[6] ETSI GSM 04.80: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2): Mobile radio interface

layer 3, Supplementary service specification, Formats and coding

[7] 3GPP 05.02: 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group GSM/EDGERadio

Access Network; Multiplexing and multiple access on the radio path – 3GPP TS 05.02

V6.9.2 (2001-04)

[8] 3GPP 24.008: Mobile radio interface Layer 3 specification; Core network protocols; Stage 3

[9] 3GPP TS 11.11 Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)

Interface

[10] 3GPP TS 05.08 Radio subsystem link control

[11] 3GPP TS 23.040 Technical realization of the Short Message Service (SMS);

[12] 3GPP TS 22.042 Network Identity and Time Zone (NITZ) service description; Stage 1

[13] 3GPP TS 51.011 Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)

interface

[14] 3GPP TS 27-010 Terminal Equipment to User Equipment (TE-UE) multiplexer protocol

[15] 3GPP 23.014 Support of Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) signaling

[16] ISO 639 Langages Codes

[17] 3GPP 27 060 Packet domain; Mobile Station (MS) supporting Packet Switched services

[18] 3GPP TS 23.038 Alphabets and language-specific information

[19] 3GPP TS 27.005 Use of Data Terminal Equipment - Data Circuit terminating Equipment (DTEDCE)

interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)

[20] ETSI GSM 11.14 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+); Specification of the SIM

Application Toolkit for the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM - ME) interface

[21] 3GPP TS 23.003 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile

Telecommunications System (UMTS); Numbering, addressing and identification

[22] ETSI GSM 02.24 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Description of

Charge Advice Information (CAI)

[23] ETSI GSM 02.86 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Advice of Charge

(AoC) Supplementary Services - Stage 1

[24] ETSI GSM 02.90 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Unstructured

Supplementary Service Data (USSD) - Stage 1

[25] ETSI GSM 02.85 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Closed User

Group (CUG) Supplementary Services - Stage 1

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 3

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

[26] 3GPP 27.007:Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile

Telecommunications System (UMTS);AT command set for 3GPP User Equipment (UE) (Release

1999)

[27] 3GPP 23.107:Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS);QoS Concept and

Architecture (Release 1999)

[28] 3GPP 24.008: European digital cellular telecommunication system (Phase 2+). Mobile radio

interface layer 3 specification. (Release 1999)

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 4

Contents

Volume 2

11.GSM NETWORK COMMANDS............................................................................6

11.1. Signal Quality +CSQ .........................................................................................................6

11.2. Network Registration +CREG ...........................................................................................8

11.3. Cell environment description +CCED .............................................................................12

11.4. Sierra Wireless Multi-band Selection Command +WMBS ..............................................27

11.5. Registration control +WREGC ........................................................................................30

11.6. Sierra Wireless Location +WLOC ...................................................................................35

11.7. Sierra Wireless Scan +WSCAN ......................................................................................39

11.8. Abort command +WAC....................................................................................................41

11.9. Band Services command +WUBS ..................................................................................43

11.10. Wireless Sevice Management +WWSM .........................................................................46

11.11. Wireless Power Level +WPOW.......................................................................................48

12.CALL CONTROL COMMANDS.........................................................................52

12.1. Dial Command to a specific number D............................................................................52

12.2. Direct Dial Command using phonebook index D ............................................................56

12.3. Direct Dial Command using a phonebook entry name D................................................59

12.4. Redial Last Telephone Number DL.................................................................................62

12.5. Answer a Call A ...............................................................................................................64

12.6. Hang-Up Command H.....................................................................................................66

12.7. Sierra Wireless Hang-up +WATH ...................................................................................68

12.8. Remote disconnection.....................................................................................................70

12.9. Extended Error Report +CEER .......................................................................................71

12.10. Automatic Dialing with DTR %Dn....................................................................................73

12.11. Automatic Answer S0 ......................................................................................................75

12.12. Incoming Call Bearer +CICB...........................................................................................77

12.13. Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS ................................................................................79

12.14. Service Reporting Control +CR.......................................................................................81

12.15. Cellular Result Codes +CRC...........................................................................................83

13.DATA COMMANDS ...........................................................................................85

13.1. Using AT Commands during a data connection..............................................................85

13.2. Bearer Type Selection +CBST........................................................................................86

13.3. DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting +ILRR ..........................................................................89

13.4. Radio Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP.........................................................................92

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 5

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

13.5. Other Radio Link Parameters +DOPT.............................................................................94

13.6. Select Mode +FCLASS ...................................................................................................96

13.7. Select Data Compression %C.........................................................................................98

13.8. V42 Bis Data Compression +DS...................................................................................100

13.9. V42 Bis Data Compression Report +DR.......................................................................102

13.10. Select Data Error Correcting Mode \N ..........................................................................104

14.GPRS COMMANDS .........................................................................................106

14.1. GPRS Mobile Station Class +CGCLASS......................................................................106

14.2. GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS ................................................................108

14.3. Define PDP Context +CGDCONT.................................................................................118

14.4. GPRS Attach or Detach +CGATT.................................................................................121

14.5. PDP Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT..............................................................123

14.6. Request GPRS IP Service D.........................................................................................125

14.7. Enter Data State +CGDATA..........................................................................................127

14.8. GPRS Hang-Up Command GH.....................................................................................129

14.9. Network requested PDP context activation...................................................................130

14.10. Manual Response to a Network Request for PDP Manual Context Activation

+CGANS ......................................................................................................................................131

14.11. Automatic Response to a Network Request for PDP Context Activation +CGAUTO… ..

.......................................................................................................................................133

14.12. Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGQMIN ........................................135

14.13. Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ.......................................................140

14.14. PDP Context Modify +CGCMOD ..................................................................................145

14.15. GPRS network registration status +CGREG.................................................................147

14.16. GPRS Event reporting +CGEREP ................................................................................150

14.17. Select Service for MO SMS Messages +CGSMS.........................................................153

14.18. Show PDP Address +CGPADDR..................................................................................155

14.19. GSM/GPRS Tx Burst Indication +WTBI........................................................................157

14.20. 3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ...............................................160

14.21. 3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGEQMIN................................169

14.22. 3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) +CGEQNEG...............................................177

14.23. Authentication Protocol AT+WPPP...............................................................................182

15.PLMN COMMANDS .........................................................................................185

15.1. Selection of Preferred PLMN list +CPLS.......................................................................185

15.2. Operator Selection +COPS...........................................................................................188

15.3. Preferred Operator List +CPOL.....................................................................................192

15.4. Operator List Management +WOLM .............................................................................196

15.5. Read Operator Name +WOPN......................................................................................199

15.6. Read Operator Name +COPN ......................................................................................203

15.7. Automatic Time Zone Update +CTZU...........................................................................205

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 6

11. GSM Network Commands

11.1. Signal Quality +CSQ

11.1.1. Description

This command is used to read the received signal strength indication and the channel bit error rate

with or without a SIM card inserted.

11.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CSQ

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

11.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<rssi>: received signal strength

0 -113 dBm or less

1 -111 dBm

2 to 30 -109 to –53 dBm

31 -51dBm or greater

99 not known or not detectable

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Signal Quality +CSQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 7

<ber>: channel bit error rate

0…7 as RXQUAL values in the table GSM 05.08 [10]

99 not known or not detectable

11.1.4. Parameter Storage

None.

11.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CSQ +CSQ: 17,1

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Network Registration +CREG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 8

11.2. Network Registration +CREG

11.2.1. Description

This command is used by the application to check the registration status of the product.

11.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CREG=<mode>

OK

• <stat≠3> : Nominal case

Read command

AT+CREG?

+CREG: <mode>,<stat>[,<lac>,<cid>[,<AcT>]]

OK

• <stat=3>: Specific case

Read command

AT+CREG?

+CREG: <mode>,<stat>[,<rejectCause>]

OK

Test command

AT+CREG=?

+CREG: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

• <stat≠3>: Nominal case

Unsolicited response

+CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<cid>[,<AcT>]]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Network Registration +CREG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 9

• <stat=3> Specific case

Unsolicited response

+CREG: <stat>[,<rejectCause>]

11.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: request operation

0 disable network registration unsolicited result code (default value)

1 enable network registration code result code +CREG: <stat>

2 enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code

+CREG: <stat>,<lac>,<ci>,<AcT> if there is a change of network cell

<stat>: network registration state

For <stat> = 1 or 5 (i.e the embedded module is registered on a network) the next

parameter couple is returned if <mode> = 2

For <stat> = 3 (i.e. the network registration is denied) and if the customer application

has enabled, the denied network registration cause with the +WBHV command, only

the <rejectCause> parameter is returned with the meaning as explained in

<rejectCause> mode

0 not registered, ME is not currently searching for a new operator

1 registered, home network

2 not registered, ME currently searching for a new operator

3 registration denied

4 unknown

5 registered, roaming

<lac>: location area code

string type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3" equals

195 in decimal)

<ci>: cell ID

string type ; four byte UTRAN/GERAN cell ID in hexadecimal format

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Network Registration +CREG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 10

<AcT> access technology of the registered network

0 GSM

2 UTRAN

<rejectCause> network registration denied cause

0 Illegal MS

1 Illegal ME

2 IMSI Unknown

3 Bad network authentication

11.2.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

11.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CREG? +CREG: <mode>,<stat>

OK

AT+CREG=0

Note: Disable network registration unsolicited result code

OK

Note: Command valid

AT+CREG=1

Note: Enable network registration

OK

Note: Command valid

AT+CREG=2

Note: Enable network registration unsolicited result code

registration

OK

Note: Command valid

AT+CREG=? +CREG: (0-2)

OK

Note: 0,1,2 <mode> values are supported

AT+CREG?

Note: Get the CREG status

+CREG: 2,1,"0006","00007D9A",0

OK

Note: The embedded module is registered on the home

network with the lac=0006 and the cell ID = 7D9A and

access technology=0

+CREG: 3

Note: The network indicates that the registration is denied

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Network Registration +CREG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 11

Command Responses

AT+WBHV=5,1

Note: Activate the mode to have the cause of the network reject

OK

AT+CREG?

Note: Get the CREG status

+CREG: 2,1,"0006","00007D9A",0

OK

Note: The embedded module is registered on the home

network with the lac=0006 and the cell ID = 7D9A and

access technology=0

+CREG: 3,1

Note: The network indicates that the registration is denied

for an Illegal ME reason.

11.2.6. Notes

When the network registration denied cause indication is enabled with the +WBHV command, the

<rejectCause> parameter is used to return the network reject cause when the <stat> parameter is

equal to 3. If the enhanced mode is not enabled (with the +WBHV command), the <stat> parameter

contains 3 to indicate that the network registration is denied but without <rejectCause> parameter. For

other <stat> value, the nominal syntax is used.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 12

11.3. Cell environment description +CCED

11.3.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command retrieves the parameters of the main cell and of up to six

neighboring cells for GSM or sixty-four neighboring cells for UTRA.

There are two possible methods to provide these cell parameters:

• On request by the application or

• Automatically by the product every 5 seconds.

Automatic mode is not supported during registration.

11.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CCED=<mode>[,<requested dump>[,<CsqStep>]][,<Extend>]

[+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>]

[+CCED: [<AcT>][[,]<Main Cell dump>][,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM

Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]][[,]<Main Cell TA>][[,]<Neighbor 1 TA>][[,]<Neighbor 2

TA>][[,]<Neighbor 3 TA>][[,]<Neighbor 4 TA>][[,]<Neighbor 5 TA>][[,]<Neighbor 6

TA>]][,<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 2 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 3

dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 5 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6

dump>[,…]]]]]]][,<Active Set 1 dump>[,<Active Set 2 dump>[,<Active Set 3

dump>[,<Active Set 4 dump>[,<Active Set 5 dump>[,<Active Set 6

dump>]]]]]]][,<MeasActiv bitmap>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 13

Unsolicited response

[+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>]

[+CCED: [<AcT>][[,]<Main Cell dump>][,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM

Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]][[,]<Main Cell TA>]][,<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN

Neighbor 2 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor

5 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6 dump>[,…]]]]]]][,<Active Set 1 dump>[,<Active Set 2

dump>[,<Active Set 3 dump>[,<Active Set 4 dump>[,<Active Set 5 dump>[,<Active Set 6

dump>]]]]]]][,<MeasActiv bitmap>]

11.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: requested operation

0 one shot requested

the requested dump is returned as intermediate response

1 automatic shots requested

the requested dump is returned by the embedded module as unsolicited response

2 stop automatic shots

<requested dump>: requested cell parameter

If omitted, the last value used for a CCED request is used, or 239 (if the command has

not been previously used)

1 Main Cell only

2G products:

+CCED: <Main Cell dump>

3G products:

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell dump>

2 GSM Neighbors 1 to 6

2G products:

+CCED: <GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6

dump>]]]]]

3G products:

+CCED: <AcT>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM

Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM

Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 14

3 Main Cell then GSM Neighbors 1 to 6

2G products:

+CCED: <Main Cell dump>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5

dump>[,<Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]

3G products:

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5

dump>[,<Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]

4 Main Cell Timing Advance

2G products:

+CCED: <Main Cell TA>

3G products:

+CCED: <AcT>[,<Main Cell TA>]

5 Main Cell, then Timing Advance

2G products:

+CCED: <Main Cell dump>[,<Main Cell TA>]

3G products:

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell dump>[,<Main Cell TA>]

6 GSM Neighbors 1 to 6, then Timing Advance

2G products:

+CCED: <GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6

dump>]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>]

3G products:

+CCED: <AcT>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM

Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM

Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>]

7 +CCED response: Main Cell, then GSM Neighbors 1 to 6, then Timing Advance

2G products:

+CCED: [<Main Cell dump>][[,]<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>]

3G products:

+CCED: <AcT>, [<Main Cell dump>][,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>]

8 Main Cell RSSI indications

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 15

9 Main Cell only

2G products:

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: <Main Cell dump>

3G products:

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell dump>

10 GSM Neighbors 1 to 6

2G products:

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: <GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6

dump>]]]]]

3G products:

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: <AcT>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM

Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM

Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]

11 Main Cell, then Neighbors 1 to 6

2G products:

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: [<Main Cell dump>][[,]<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]]

3G products:

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: <AcT>,[<Main Cell dump>][,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]]

12 Timing Advance only

2G products:

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: <Main Cell TA>

3G products:

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell TA>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 16

13 Main Cell, then Timing Advance

2G products:

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: <Main Cell dump>[,<Main Cell TA>]

3G products:

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell dump>[,<Main Cell TA>]

14 GSM Neighbors 1 to 6, then Timing Advance

2G products:

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: <GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>],<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6

dump>]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>]

3G products:

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: <AcT>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM

Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>],<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM

Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>]

15 Main Cell, then Neighbors 1 to 6, then Timing Advance

2G products:

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: [<Main Cell dump>][[,]<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>]

3G products:

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: <AcT>,[<Main Cell dump>][,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>]

16 <requested dump> 1 + <requested dump> 2 + <requested dump> 4 + Neighbor1 to

Neighbor6 Timing Advance (only available for mode= 0)

Neighbor1 to Neighbor6 Timing Advance are only available in IDLE mode.

2G products:

+CCED: [<Main Cell dump>][[,]<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]]][,<Main Cell TA>][,<Neighbor 1

TA>][,<Neighbor 2TA>][,<Neighbor 3 TA>][,<Neighbor 4 TA>][,<Neighbor 5

TA>][,<Neighbor 6 TA>]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 17

32 UTRAN Neighbor 1 to x (3G products only)

+CCED: <AcT>,<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 2 dump>[,<UTRAN

Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 5

dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6 dump>[,…]]]]]]

33 Main Cell then UTRAN Neighbor 1 to x (3G products only)

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor

2 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN

Neighbor 5 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6 dump>[,…]]]]]]

34 GSM Neighbors 1 to 6 then UTRAN Neighbor 1 to x (3G products only)

+CCED: <AcT>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2 dump>[,<GSM

Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5 dump>[,<GSM

Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]],<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 2

dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN

Neighbor 5 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6 dump>[,…]]]]]]

35 Main Cell then GSM Neighbors 1 to 6 then UTRAN Neighbor 1 to x (3G products

only)

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]],<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN

Neighbor 2 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4

dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 5 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6 dump>[,…]]]]]]

64 Active Set 1 to 6 (3G products only)

+CCED: <AcT>,<Active Set 1 dump> [,<Active Set 2 dump>[,<Active Set 3

dump>[,<Active Set 4 dump>[,<Active Set 5 dump>[,<Active Set 6 dump>]]]]]

65 Main Cell then Active Set 1 to 6 (3G products only)

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<Active Set 1 dump>[,<Active Set 2

dump>[,<Active Set 3 dump>[,<Active Set 4 dump>[,<Active Set 5 dump>[,<Active

Set 6 dump>]]]]]

97 Main Cell then UTRAN Neighbors 1 to x then Active Set 1 to 6 (3G products only)

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor

2 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN

Neighbor 5 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6 dump>[,…]]]]]],<Active Set 1

dump>[,<Active Set 2 dump>[,<Active Set 3 dump>[,<Active Set 4 dump>[,<Active

Set 5 dump>[,<Active Set 6 dump>]]]]]

99 Main Cell then GSM Neighbors 1 to 6 then UTRAN Neighbors 1 to x then Active Set

1 to 6 (3G products only)

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]],<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN

Neighbor 2 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4

dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 5 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6 dump>[,…]]]]]],<Active

Set 1 dump>[,<Active Set 2 dump>[,<Active Set 3 dump>[,<Active Set 4

dump>[,<Active Set 5 dump>[,<Active Set 6 dump>]]]]]

128 Measurement Activities (3G products only)

+CCED: <AcT>,<MeasActiv bitmap>

129 Main Cell then Measurement Activities

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<MeasActiv bitmap>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 18

161 Main Cell then UTRAN Neighbors 1 to x then Measurement Activities (3G products

only)

+CCED: <AcT>,<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 2 dump>[,<UTRAN

Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 5

dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6 dump>[,…]]]]]],<Main Cell dump>,<MeasActiv bitmap>

193 Main Cell then Active Set 1 to 6 then Measurement Activities (3G products only)

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<Active Set 1 dump>[,<Active Set 2

dump>[,<Active Set 3 dump>[,<Active Set 4 dump>[,<Active Set 5 dump>[,<Active

Set 6 dump>]]]]],<MeasActiv bitmap>

225 Main Cell then UTRAN Neighbors 1 to x then Active Set 1 to 6 then Measurement

Activities (3G products only)

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<UTRAN Neighbor 1 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor

2 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN

Neighbor 5 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6 dump>[,…]]]]]],<Active Set 1

dump>[,<Active Set 2 dump>[,<Active Set 3 dump>[,<Active Set 4 dump>[,<Active

Set 5 dump>[,<Active Set 6 dump>]]]]],<MeasActiv bitmap>

239 Main Cell then GSM Neighbor 1 to 6 then Timing Advance then UTRAN Neighbors 1

to x then Active Set 1 to 6 then Measurement Activities (3G products only)

+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

+CCED: <AcT>,<Main Cell dump>,<GSM Neighbor 1 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 2

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 3 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 4 dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 5

dump>[,<GSM Neighbor 6 dump>]]]]],[<Main Cell TA>],<UTRAN Neighbor 1

dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 2 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 3 dump>[,<UTRAN

Neighbor 4 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 5 dump>[,<UTRAN Neighbor 6

dump>[,…]]]]]],<Active Set 1 dump>[,<Active Set 2 dump>[,<Active Set 3

dump>[,<Active Set 4 dump>[,<Active Set 5 dump>[,<Active Set 6

dump>]]]]],<MeasActiv bitmap>

<CsqStep>: step required for the RSSI indications between two +CSQ unsolicited responses

range: 1-5 (default value: 1)

If not indicated, the previous value is taken into account

<Extend> This parameter (not mandatory) specify if the requested dump must be extended or not

0 dump not extended (default value)

1 dump extended

Note: This parameter will be ignored when <AcT> = 2

<AcT>: access technology of the registered network

0 GSM

2 UTRAN

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 19

<Main Cell dump>: This parameter gathers the following parameters for the Main Cell parameters.

For <AcT>=0

Not extended dump (<Extend> equals 0):

[<MCC>],[<MNC>],[<LAC>][,<CI>],[<BSIC>],[<BCCH Freq>],[<RxLev>],[<RxLev

Full>],[<RxLev Sub>],[<RxQual>],[<RxQual Full>],[<RxQual Sub>],[<Idle TS>]

Extended dump (<Extend> equals 1):

[<MCC>],[<MNC>],[<LAC>][,<CI>],[<BSIC>],[<BCCH Freq>],[<RxLev>],[<RxLev

Full>],[<RxLev Sub>],[<RxQual>],[<RxQual Full>],[<RxQual Sub>],[<Idle

TS>],[<C1>],[<C2>],[<MsTxPwrMaxCcch>]

For <AcT>=2

[<MCC>],[<MNC>],[<LAC>][,<CI>],[<RSCP>],[<EcNo>], [<Scrambling

Code>],[<UARFCN>],[<R>],[<R2>],[<H>], [<Squal>],[<Srxlev>]

<GSM Neighbor x

dump>:

This parameter gathers the following parameters for the Neighbor Cells parameters.

Not extended dump (<Extend> equals 0):

[<MCC>],[<MNC>],[<LAC>][,<CI>],[<BSIC>],[<BCCH

Freq>],[<RxLev>],[<R>],[<R2>],[<H>], [<Squal>],[<Srxlev>]

Extended dump (<Extend> equals 1):

[<MCC>],[<MNC>],[<LAC>][,<CI>],[<BSIC>],[<BCCH

Freq>],[<RxLev>],[<C1>],[<C2>],[<MsTxPwrMaxCcch>],[<R>],[<R2>], [<H>],

[<Squal>],[<Srxlev>]

x is between 1 and 6

<UTRAN Neighbor x

dump>:

This parameter gathers the following parameters for the UTRAN Neighbor Cells

parameters.

[<MCC>],[<MNC>],[<RSCP>],[<EcNo>],[<Scrambling

Code>],[<UARFCN>],[<R>],[<R2>],[<H>][<Squal>], [<Srxlev>]

x is a set of candidate cells for cell reselection (between 1 to 64)

<Neighbor x TA>: Neighbor cell Timing Advance ( for 2G products only)

neighbors timing Advance are not available in dedicated mode.

x is between 1 and 6

<MCC>: Mobile Country Code

3 digits

<MNC>: Mobile Network Code

2 or 3 digits

<LAC>: Location Area Code

string type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. “00C3“ equals 195 in

decimal)

<CI> : Cell Id

string type

Two bytes in hexadecimal format for 2G products.

Four bytes in hexadecimal format for 3G products.

If the Cell Id is not available, this parameter is omitted.

<BSIC>: Base Station Identity Code

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 20

<BCCH Freq>: Broadcast Control CHannel Freq absolute

The range depends of the selected band:

P900 range: 1-124

E900 range: 1-124, 975-1023 and 0 for 1024

850 range: 128-251

DCS1800 range: 512-885

PCS1900 range:

512-810 for the Q26Extreme or for the other embedded modules if it is not configured in

autoquadband (see the +WMBS command description)

1536-1834 for embedded modules other than Q26Extreme and if it is configured in

autoquadband (see +WMBS command description). This is made to distinguish DCS and

PCS absolute frequency in autoquadband.

<RxLev>: RSSI level on BCCH channel, in idle mode. This parameter is empty in dedicated mode.

0 -110 dBm or less

1 -110 dBm to -109 dBm

2 -109 dBm to -108 dBm

3-63 -108 dBm to -49 dBm

62 -49 dBm to -48 dBm

63 -48 dBm and greater

<RxLev Full>: RSSI level on all TCH channel, in dedicated mode

<RxLev Sub>: RSSI level on a subset of TCH channel, in dedicated mode

<RxQual>: signal quality on BCCH channel, in idle mode

<RxQual Full>: signal quality on all TCH channel, in dedicated mode

<RxQual Sub>: signal quality on a subset of TCH channel, in dedicated mode

<Idle TS>: Time Slot

<C1>: Cell selection criteria. Only available in IDLE mode.

<C2>: GSM cell reselection criteria. Only available in IDLE mode.

MsTxPwrMaxCcch Power control level. The maximum TX power level, an MS may use when accessing on a

Control Channel CCH. Range: 0 to 31

Only available in IDLE mode.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 21

<RSCP>: Received Signal Code Power

The power level in one chip

<EcNo>: Ratio of energy per modulating bit to the noise spectral density

This is the cell quality and is equal to RSCP/RSSI

<Scrambling code>: The downlink scrambling code of the serving cell for 3G network only

0-511 Scrambling code of the serving cell

Integer type

<UARFCN>: UTRA absolute radio Frequency channel number

<R>: ranking criteria for all types of cells (UTRA or GSM, based on RSCP (3G cells) or RSSI

(2G cells))

only significant when <AcT> = 2

<R2>: ranking criteria for UTRA cells only (based on EcNo)

only significant when <AcT> = 2

<H>: ranking criteria when HCS is used.

only significant when <AcT> = 2

<Squal>: S criteria - Cell selection quality value (dB)

only significant when <AcT> = 2

<Srxlev>: S criteria – Cell selection RX level value (dB)

only significant when <AcT> = 2

<Active Set x

dump>:

In dedicated mode, the set of radio links assigned to the UE such that there will be no

more breaks of radio link when the UE is moving from cell to cell (soft handover). This

parameter gathers the following parameters for the Active Set parameters:

<Scrambling Code>,<Rscp>

x is between 1 and 6

<MeasActiv

bitmap>:

This parameter gathers the Intra frequencies, Inter frequencies, and GSM measurement

activities (bitwise)

Bit 0 0 GSM measurement inactive (OFF)

1 GSM measurement active (ON)

Bit 1 0 UTRAN Intra frequencies measurement inactive (OFF)

1 UTRAN Intra frequencies measurement active (ON)

Bit 2 0 UTRAN Inter frequencies measurement inactive (OFF)

1 UTRAN Inter frequencies measurement active (ON)

<Main Cell TA>: Main Cell Timing Advance (significant only when <AcT>=0)

<rssi>: received signal strength

0 -113 dBm or less

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 22

1 -111 dBm

2 to 30 -109 to –53 dBm

31 -51dBm or greater

99 not known or not detectable

<ber>: channel bit error rate

This parameter is not evaluated using +CCED command.

99 not known or not detectable

Note: For more details about parameters, please refer to 3GPP 05.02 Radio Transmission and Reception

[7].

11.3.4. Parameter Storage

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 23

11.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CCED=0,3

Note: Request main cell and neighbors 1 to 6

For 2G products

+CCED:

454,06,008c,6704,10,62,48,,,0,,,0,454,06,008c,,4,93,15

,454,06,008c,,3,670,11,454,06,008c,,2,691,8,454,06,008

c,7e1b,34,665,6,454,06,008c,,8,700,9,454,06,008c,62cd,

13,90,8

OK

For 3G products

+CCED: 2,454,06,20d0,00048329,-95,-

10,211,10737,0,0,0,0,0,454,06,0000,,5,26112,0,454,06,0

000,,10,15872,0,454,06,0000,,8,48130,0,454,06,0000,,8,

27392,0,454,06,0000,,2,28160,0,454,06,0000,,1,29696,0,

454,06,0000,,2,42498,0

OK

AT+CCED=0

Note: Repeat last request

For 2G products

at+cced=0,3

+CCED:

454,06,008c,6704,10,62,48,,,0,,,0,454,06,008c,,4,93,15

,454,06,008c,,3,670,11,454,06,008c,,2,691,8,454,06,008

c,7e1b,34,665,6,454,06,008c,,8,700,9,454,06,008c,62cd,

13,90,8

OK

For 3G products

+CCED: 2,454,06,20d0,00048329,-95,-

10,211,10737,0,0,0,0,0,454,06,0000,,5,26112,0,454,06,0

000,,10,15872,0,454,06,0000,,8,48130,0,454,06,0000,,8,

27392,0,454,06,0000,,2,28160,0,454,06,0000,,1,29696,0,

454,06,0000,,2,42498,0

OK

AT+CCED=0,1

Note: Only main cell request

For 2G products

+CCED: 454,06,008c,6704,10,62,46,,,0,,,0

OK

For 3G products

+CCED: 2,454,06,20d0,00048329,-96,-

6,211,10737,0,0,0,0,0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 24

Command Responses

AT+CCED=0,1,,1

Note: Only main cell request

For 2G products

+CCED: 454,06,008c,6704,10,62,45,,,0,,,0,45,45,5

OK

For 3G products

+CCED: 2,454,06,20d0,00048329,-97,-

10,211,10737,0,0,0,0,0

OK

AT+CCED=0,1

Note: Call in progress:RXLev and RXQual are

empty, RxLewFull, RxLevSub, RxQualFull and

RxQualSub have data.

For 2G products

+CCED: 454,06,008c,6704,10,62,,41,42,,0,0,

OK

For 3G products

+CCED: 2,000,000,0000,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0

OK

Note: For 3G products, the response of +CCED on main cell is invalid in dedicated

mode

AT+CCED=1,8,1

Note: Request +CSQ response when the

<rssi> is changed (step = 1)

For 2G products

OK

+CSQ: 25,99

+CSQ: 26,99

+CSQ: 25,99

+CSQ: 26,99

+CSQ: 25,99

For 3G products

OK

+CSQ: 8,99

+CSQ: 6,99

+CSQ: 8,99

+CSQ: 6,99

+CSQ: 8,99

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 25

Command Responses

AT+CCED=0,16

Note: idle mode

For 2G products

+CCED:

454,06,008c,6704,10,62,,,,255,,,0,454,06,008c,65eb,4,9

3,15,454,06,008c,,3,670,11,454,06,008c,8503,2,691,9,45

4,06,008c,8504,8,700,9,2,2,2,2,2

OK

For 3G products

+CCED: 2,454,06,20d0,00048329,-98,-

11,211,10737,0,0,0,0,0,454,06,0000,,5,26112,0,454,06,0

000,,10,15872,0,454,06,0000,,8,48130,0,454,06,0000,,8,

27392,0,454,06,0000,,2,28160,0,454,06,0000,,1,29696,0,

454,06,0000,,2,42498,0,

OK

AT+CCED=0,16

Note: Dedicated mode

For 2G products

+CCED:

454,06,008c,6704,10,62,,40,39,,0,0,,,,,,4,93,15,,,,,8,

700,10,,,,,3,670,11,,,,,2,691,8,1,,,,

OK

For 3G products

+CCED:

2,000,000,0000,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,5,26112,0,0,0,0,0

,0,,,,10,15872,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,8,48130,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,8

,27392,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,2,28160,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,1,29696,0

,0,0,0,0,0,,,,2,42498,0,0,0,0,0,0

OK

Note: For 3G products, the response of +CCED on main cell is invalid in dedicated

mode

AT+CCED=0,129

Note: Request Main Cell then Measurement

Activities

For 2G products

+CME ERROR: 3

For 3G products

+CCED: 2,454,06,20d0,00048329,-97,-

11,211,10737,0,0,0,0,0,0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Cell environment description +CCED

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 26

Command Responses

AT+CCED=0,3 For 2G products

+CCED:

454,06,008c,6704,10,62,48,,,0,,,0,454,06,008c,,4,93,15

,454,06,008c,,3,670,11,454,06,008c,,2,691,8,454,06,008

c,7e1b,34,665,6,454,06,008c,,8,700,9,454,06,008c,62cd,

13,90,8

OK

For 3G products

+CCED:

0,454,06,008c,00006704,0,15872,48,,,0,,,0,454,06,0000,

,0,23808,22,454,06,008c,,8,48130,18,454,06,008c,,2,458

26,15,454,06,008c,,0,23040,15,454,06,0000,,0,23552,13,

454,06,008c,,3,40450,7

OK

Note: <Act>=0, the 3G product is registering to GSM (2G) network,

AT+CCED=0,32 For 2G products

+CME ERROR: 3

For 3G products

+CME ERROR: 30

Note: The 3G product is registering to GSM (2G) network, UTRAN parameters are

not available.

Note: Whenever the commands 'AT+CCED=0,15' or 'AT+CCED=0,16' are issued, '+CME ERROR: 30' is

observed.

11.3.6. Notes

When automatic shots are selected, +CSQ responses are sent whenever the <rssi> difference

measured by the product is equal to or greater than the <CsqStep> value. So, the <rssi> level

between successive +CSQ responses are equal to or greater than <CsqStep>.

Automatic shots are supported in idle mode and during communication.

Values of MCC/MNC are set to 0 in the case of "No service".

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Sierra Wireless Multi-band Selection Command +WMBS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 27

11.4. Sierra Wireless Multi-band Selection

Command +WMBS

11.4.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command selects the GSM bands on which the embedded module

has to operate. This command is allowed only if the selected bands are supported (please refer to

+WFM command). The user can choose if the change is immediate or not:

• either the embedded module has to be reset to take this change into account (this is the

default case)

• or the GSM stack restarts immediately on the specified band(s). In this mode, the command

+WMBS is forbidden during the initialization phase of the embedded module and during calls.

11.4.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WMBS=<Band>[,<Param>]

OK

Read command

AT+WMBS?

+WMBS: <Band>,<ResetFlag>

OK

Test command

AT+WMBS=?

+WMBS: (list of supported <Band>s),(list of supported <Param>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Sierra Wireless Multi-band Selection Command +WMBS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 28

11.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Band>: band frequency configuration

0 mono-band mode 850 MHz

1 mono-band mode 900 extended MHz (900E)

2 mono-band mode 1800 MHz

3 mono-band mode 1900 MHz

4 dual-band mode 850/1900 MHz

5 dual-band mode 900E (extended) / 1800 MHz

6 dual-band mode 900E (extended) / 1900 MHz

7 quad-band mode 850/900E (extended)/1800/1900 MHz

<Param>: type of change

0 the embedded module will have to be reset to start on specified band(s)

<ResetFlag> is set to 1

default value if omitted

1 the change is effective immediately: the GSM stack is restarted with

specified band(s)

<ResetFlag> is set to 0

this mode is forbidden while in communication and during embedded module

initialization

<ResetFlag>: reset flag

0 the feature was not modified since the last boot of the product

1 the feature has been modified since the last boot of the product: it has to be

reset in order to take the modification into account

11.4.4. Parameter Storage

The <Band> parameter is stored without using AT&W command.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Sierra Wireless Multi-band Selection Command +WMBS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 29

11.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WMBS=? +WMBS: (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7),(0-1)

OK

Note: All bands are available

AT+WMBS=0 OK

AT+WMBS? +WMBS: 0,1

OK

Note: Embedded module has to be reset for change to be effective.

AT+WMBS=1,1 OK

AT+WMBS? +WMBS: 1,0

OK

Note: Embedded module does not have to be reset for change to be

effective.

AT+WMBS=5,1 OK

Note: Embedded module does not have to be reset for change to be

effective.

AT+WMBS=7,1 OK

Note: Launch the autoquadband.

AT+WMBS? +WMBS: 7,0

OK

Note: Embedded module does not have to be reset for change to be

effective

11.4.6. Notes

To deactivate the autoquadband, AT+WMBS=<Band>,<ResetFlag> with <Band> other than 7 should

be sent to the embedded module, which is applicable only for products other than Q26Extreme..

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Registration control +WREGC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 30

11.5. Registration control +WREGC

11.5.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used by the application to disable GSM and GPRS

registration and deregistration procedures on the network If the registration/deregistration procedure

is disabled, the embedded module does not perform the procedure but considers itself as

attached/detached on the network. The command +WREGC therefore has no impact on the response

to AT+CREG?.

After the +WREGC mode is set to 1 (AT+WREGC=1), the embedded module enters the Spy Mode

immediately. During the Spy Mode, MS is in IMSI detached state, for both GSM and GPRS, but keeps

monitoring serving cell and all surrounding cells; only emergency call is allowed. Nevertheless,

network registration can be achieved manually in a very short time (less than 1 second in most of the

cases) once the Spy Mode is deactivated by the command AT+WREGC=0.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

11.5.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WREGC=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+WREGC?

+WREGC: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+WREGC=?

+WREGC: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Registration control +WREGC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 31

11.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: registration control mode

0 all registrations enabled (default value); Spy Mode is deactivated

1 The Spy mode is activated (GSM/GPRS registration disabled)

2 power down deregistration disabled

3 power up registration and power down deregistration disabled

11.5.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command. The default value

can be restored using AT&F.

11.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WREGC=? +WREGC: (0-3)

OK

AT+WREGC=0

Note: All registrations enabled

OK

AT+WREGC? +WREGC: 0

OK

Note: All registrations enabled (Spy Mode deactivated)

AT+WREGC=1 OK

AT+CREG? +CREG: 2

+CREG: 1,2

OK

Note: Spy Mode is entered immediately (emergency calls only)

AT+COPS=0 OK

AT+CREG? +CREG: 1,2

OK

Note: Embedded module is not registered as Spy Mode is in

active

AT+WREGC=0 OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Registration control +WREGC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 32

Command Responses

AT+CREG? +CREG: 1

+CREG: 1,1

OK

Note: Spy Mode is deactivated immediately (full services are

available)

AT+WREGC=1 OK

+CREG: 2

AT+WGPRS=0,0 OK

AT+CFUN=1 OK

+WIND: 3

+WIND: 1

+CREG: 2

+WIND: 7

+CGREG: 2

+WIND: 4

Note: Setting GPRS auto attachment is allowed even if Spy

Mode is activated. But GPRS auto attachment will not be

performed after restart.

AT+WREGC=0 OK

+CREG: 1

+CGREG: 1

AT+CFUN=1 OK

+WIND: 3

+WIND: 1

+CREG: 2

+WIND: 7

+CREG: 1

+CGREG: 1

+WIND: 4

Note: When Spy Mode is deactivated, GPRS/GPRS registration

will be performed immediately.

AT+WREGC=0 OK

AT+CGATT=1 OK

+CGREG: 1

AT+WREGC=1 OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Registration control +WREGC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 33

Command Responses

AT+CGATT=1 +CGREG: 0

+CREG: 2

+CME ERROR: 148

+CGREG: 2

Note: When Spy Mode is activated, GPRS attach failed.

AT+CGCLASS? +CGCLASS: “B"

OK

AT+WREGC=0 OK

+CREG: 1

+CGREG: 1

AT+CGCLASS="CG" OK

+WIND: 8

+CREG: 0

AT+CGCLASS? +CGCLASS: "CG"

OK

AT+WREGC=1 OK

+CGREG: 0

AT+CGCLASS="B" OK

+WIND: 7

+CREG: 2

Note: When Spy Mode is activated, CGCLASS can still be set

but the embedded module will not perform network registration

according to the selected CGCLASS.

AT+WREGC=0 OK

+CREG: 1

+CGREG: 1

Note: Once the Spy Mode is deactivated, CGCLASS change is

performed, the embedded module, registered in the network

according to the CGCLASS is selected.

AT+WREGC? +WREGC: 0

OK

AT+WREGC=2 OK

AT+WREGC=1 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: Spy Mode cannot be activated when the current <mode>

is 2 or 3

AT+WREGC=0 OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Registration control +WREGC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 34

Command Responses

AT+WREGC=1 OK

+CREG: 2

Note: Spy Mode is activated.

AT+WREGC=3 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: <mode> cannot be set to 3 while Spy Mode is activated.

AT+WREGC=0 OK

+CREG: 1

+CGREG: 1

Note: Spy Mode is deactivated.

AT+WREGC=3 OK

11.5.6. Notes

Spy Mode has precedence over other AT commands. When Spy Mode is activated, the AT

commands +WGPRS, +COPS, +CGATT, and +CGCLASS will not be executed; an error will be

returned from the embedded module if the operation cannot be performed. To activate the Spy Mode,

<mode> must undergo the transition from ‘0’ to ‘1’. Similarly, to deactivate the Spy Mode, <mode>

must undergo the transition from ‘1’ to ‘0’.

<mode> transitions Result

0 􀃆 1, 2, 3

1 􀃆 0

2 􀃆 0, 3

3 􀃆 0, 2

Allowed

1 􀃆 2, 3

2 􀃆 1

3 􀃆 1

Not allowed

When Spy Mode is activated and AT+WGPRS=0,0 is sent to enable the automatic GPRS attachment,

the latter will not be performed at the next CPU restart. It will be performed at the next CPU restart

once the Spy Mode is deactivated (AT+WREGC=0).

When Spy Mode is activated and AT command +COPS is sent to change the operator (PLMN)

selection mode, the embedded module will try to find the home operator or the specified operator

depending on the selected mode (automatic or manual) and performs GSM registration if found. Since

Spy Mode is activated, the registration is unable to perform and an error will be returned. However,

the operator selection will be performed once the Spy Mode is deactivated.

When Spy Mode is activated, sending AT+CGATT=1 for GPRS attachment will not work unless the

Spy Mode is deactivated.

When Spy Mode is activated and AT command +CGCLASS is sent to set the GPRS mobile station

class, the operation will not be performed successfully. However, the new class will be taken into

account once the Spy Mode is deactivated.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Sierra Wireless Location +WLOC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 35

11.6. Sierra Wireless Location +WLOC

11.6.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command can be used by the application to retrieve the following

local information: MCC-MNC, LAC, CI, Network measurement, BCCH channel list, Timing Advance,

date and time.

Two methods exist for the external application to get these information:

• on request of the application,

• periodically by the embedded module.

The location feature has to be activated to get information (see +WFM command).

11.6.2. Syntax

• <mode>=0

Action command

AT+WLOC=<mode>

OK

• <mode>=1

Action command

AT+WLOC=<mode>

+WLOC: [<MCC-MNC>,][<LAC>,][<CI>,][<NetMeas>,][<BCCHlist>,][<TA>,][<Date and Time>]

OK

• <mode>=2

Action command

AT+WLOC=<mode>[,<time period>]

OK

• <mode>=3

Action command

AT+WLOC=<mode>[,<requested dump>]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Sierra Wireless Location +WLOC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 36

Read command

AT+WLOC?

+WLOC: <status>,<time period>,<requested dump>

OK

Test command

AT+WLOC=?

OK

Unsollicited response

+WLOC: [<MCC-MNC>,][<LAC>,][<CI>,][<NetMeas>,][<BCCHlist>,][<TA>,][<Date and Time>]

11.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: requested operation

0 stop automatic shots

1 one shot requested

2 automatic shots requested (every x seconds)

3 configuration of the <dump> value

<time period>: time period for automatic shots

range: 5-255 (multiple of 5, default value 5)

If omitted, the value will be set to 5.

<requested dump>: requested measurements

bitfield: 1-255 (default value:255)

If omitted, the value will be set to 255.

1 date and time will be returned in the response

2 TA will be returned in the response

4 BCCH will be returned in the response

8 network measurements will be returned in the response

16 CI will be returned in the response

32 LAC will be returned in the response

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Sierra Wireless Location +WLOC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 37

64 MNC-MCC will be returned in the response

<MCC-MNC>: MCC and MNC codes

3 bytes in hexadecimal format (network coding)

<LAC>: Location Area Code

string type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3" equals

195 in decimal)

<CI>: Cell Id

string type; two bytes in hexadecimal format

If the Cell Id is not available, this parameter is omitted.

<NetMeas>: network measurements

16 bytes in hexadecimal format

<BCCHlist>: BCCH channel list

maximum 48 bytes (if version V0 of GSM Rec 11.14 [20] )

129 bytes (if version V1 of GSM Rec 11.14 [20] )

The version number is indicated in TERMINAL PROFILE information in EEPROM.

It is not usercustomizable. It is configured at production-time.

<TA>: timing advance

1 byte in hexadecimal format

<Date and Time>: date and time

7 bytes: date, time and time zone in SIM ToolKit format

<status>: automatic shot status

0 disabled

1 enabled

11.6.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode>, <time period> and <requested dump> parameters are stored without using AT&W

command. The default value of <mode> only can be restored using AT&F.

11.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WLOC=3,255

Note: Set the information to display (255 -> complete

information)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Sierra Wireless Location +WLOC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 38

Command Responses

AT+WLOC=1

Note: Displays the local information once

+WLOC:

02f802,0006,7772,f13101b04cf51278

91138e95a846d160,8b49d08d0797c419e

272e10889a000009302170399020403c1

020a03c5020a03,00,010121111349ff

OK

AT+WLOC=2,10

Note: Displays OK then the current local information

immediately for the first time and then every 10

seconds.

OK

+WLOC:

02f802,0006,7772,ed3001af4cf492780

b040889c74acc23,8b49d08d0797c419e2

72e1

0889a000009302160399020503c1020a0

3c5020a03,00,010121111354ff

+WLOC:

02f802,0006,7772,f02d01ae4cf41278

4b03c889c846dba5,8b49d08d0797c

419e272e10889a0000093021703990

20403c1020a03c5020903,00,010121

111404ff

AT+WLOC? +WLOC: 1,10,255

OK

Note: The location is in automatic mode, the period value is set to 10

seconds, the configuration value is set to 255.

AT+WLOC=0

Note: Stops the display of local information

OK

11.6.6. Notes

If the data are not valid at the requested time, the network measurement, BCCH list and Timing

Advance cannot be displayed (",," is displayed instead).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Sierra Wireless Scan +WSCAN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 39

11.7. Sierra Wireless Scan +WSCAN

11.7.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command displays the received signal strength indication for a

specified frequency (in absolute format).

This command is not allowed during communication.

Be sure that the <freq> parameter corresponds to the selected bands (see +WMBS command

description)

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

11.7.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WSCAN=<freq>

+WSCAN: <rssi>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Sierra Wireless Scan +WSCAN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 40

11.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<freq>: absolute frequency

The range depends of the selected band:

• P900 range: 1-124

• E900 range: 1-124, 975-1023 and 0 for 1024

• 850 range: 128-251

• DCS1800 range: 512-885

• PCS1900 range:

Embedded module and

configuration

<freq> range for PCS

1900

Not Q26Extreme and not in

autoquadband

512-810

Not Q26Extreme and in

autoquadband

1536-1834

This is made to distinguish DCS and PCS absolute frequency in

autoquadband for embedded module which is not a Q26Extreme.

<rssi>: received signal strength indication

0 -113 dBm or less

1 -111 dBm

2-30 -109 to -53 dBm

31 -51dBm or more

99 not known or not detectable

11.7.4. Parameter Storage

None.

11.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WSCAN=50

Note: Request <rssi> of absolute frequency 50

+WSCAN: 23

OK

Note: <rssi> is 23

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Abort command +WAC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 41

11.8. Abort command +WAC

11.8.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless prorietary command allows SMS, SS and PLMN selection related commands to

be aborted.

11.8.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WAC

OK

Read command

AT+WAC?

OK

Test command

AT+WAC=?

OK

11.8.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None

11.8.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Abort command +WAC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 42

11.8.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+COPS=?

Note: Available PLMN

AT+WAC

Note: Aborts the request of PLMN list

OK

Note: PLMN list request aborted

AT+CCFC=0,2

Note: Interrogation of status of Call Forwarding

service.

AT+WAC

Note: Aborts the request of Interrogation of Call

Forwarding service

+CME ERROR: 551

Note: Interrogation of Call Forwarding service request abortion failure

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Band Services command +WUBS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 43

11.9. Band Services command +WUBS

11.9.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command selects the UMTS-FDD bands on which the embedded

module has to operate. Multi-bands can be selected if the selected bands are supported by the

embedded module. The user can choose if the change is immediate or not:

• either the embedded module has to be reset to take this change into account (this is the

default case)

• or the 3G stack restarts immediately on the specified band(s). In this mode, the command

+WUBS is forbidden during the initialization phase of the embedded module and during calls.

Note: This command is only available for the Q26Extreme product.

11.9.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WUBS=<Band>[,<Param>]

OK

Read command

AT+WUBS?

+WUBS: <Band>,<ResetFlag>

OK

Test command

AT+WUBS=?

+WUBS: (list of supported <Band>s),(list of supported <Param>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Band Services command +WUBS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 44

11.9.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Band>: UMTS-FDD band frequency configuration (bit field)

bit set to 0: band not selected

bit set to 1: band selected

Multi-bands can be selected by setting the corresponding bits to 1.

range: 1 – 1FF

Default value: 1 (Band I, 2100 MHz, selected)

Bit 0 Band I (2100 MHz)

Bit 1 Band II (1900 MHz)

Bit 2 Band III (1800 MHz)

Bit 3 Band IV (1700 MHz)

Bit 4 Band V (850 MHz)

Bit 5 Band VI (800 MHz)

Bit 6 Band VII (2600 MHz)

Bit 7 Band VIII (900 MHz)

Bit 8 Band IX (1800 MHz)

<Param>: type of change

0 The embedded module will have to be reset to start on specified band(s).

<ResetFlag> is set to 1.

default value if omitted

1 The change is effective immediately: the 3G stack is restarted with specified band(s).

<ResetFlag> is set to 0.

This mode is forbidden while in communication and during embedded module

initialization.

<ResetFlag>: reset flag

0 The feature was not modified since the last boot of the product.

1 The feature has been modified since the last boot of the product: it has to be reset in

order to take the modification into account.

Note: To know the supported bands for individual embedded module, please refer to the corresponding

product specification (PTS).

11.9.4. Parameter Storage

The <Band> parameter is stored without using AT&W command.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Band Services command +WUBS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 45

11.9.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WUBS=? +WUBS: (1-1FF),(0-1)

OK

Note: Only Band I, Band II and Band V are available

AT+WUBS="1" OK

AT+WUBS? +WUBS: "1",0

OK

Note: Embedded module does not have to be reset for change to

be effective.since default <Band> is Band I.

AT+WUBS="2",1 OK

Note: Embedded module stack restarts immediately on the

specified band(s)

AT+WUBS? +WUBS: "2",0

OK

Note: Embedded module does not have to be reset for change to

be effective.

AT+WUBS="3" OK

Note: Select operating Band I and Band II.

AT+WUBS? +WUBS: "3",1

OK

Note: Embedded module has to be reset for change to be

effective.

AT+WUBS? +WUBS: "3",0

OK

AT+CFUN=1 OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Wireless Sevice Management +WWSM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 46

11.10. Wireless Sevice Management +WWSM

11.10.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used by the application to select the cellular network

(Wireless Data Service; WDA) to operate with the MT/TA. This command may be used when MT/TA

is asked to indicate the networks in which it can operate.

Set command selects to WDS side stack <mode> to be used by the TA. Read command shows

current setting and test command displays side stacks available in the TA.

The selected cellular network will be taken into account in the next embedded module reset.

Note: This command is available only on 3G supported embedded module.

11.10.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WWSM=<mode>[,<prefer_nwk>]

OK

Read command

AT+WWSM?

+WWSM: <mode>[,<prefer_nwk>]

OK

Test command

AT+WWSM=?

+WWSM: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <prefer_nwk>s)

OK

11.10.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: cellular network to operate

0 GSM Digital Cellular Systems (GERAN only)

1 UTRAN only

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Wireless Sevice Management +WWSM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 47

2 3GPP Systems (both GERAN and UTRAN) (default)

<prefer_nwk>: preferred network (workable when <mode>=2)

If omitted, the default value '0' will be used.

0 automatic (default)

1 GERAN preferred

2 UTRAN preferred

11.10.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> and <prefer_nwk> parameters are stored in EEPROM without using AT&W. The default

value can be restored using AT&F.

11.10.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WWSM=? +WWSM: (0,1,2),(0-2)

OK

Note: TA operation available in three mode: GERAN only, UTRAN

only and both GERAN+UTRAN

AT+WWSM?

Note: Get the network status

+WWSM: 2,0

OK

Note: Current mode = GERAN and UTRAN (UTRAN preferred)

AT+WWSM=2,1

Note: Select 3GPP system, GERAN preferred

OK

Note: Command valid

AT+WWSM=0

Note: Select GERAN system

OK

Note: Command valid

AT+WWSM=4 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: Invalid parameter.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Wireless Power Level +WPOW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 48

11.11. Wireless Power Level +WPOW

11.11.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used for production test purpose.

MS Transmitted power measurement:

A burst signal is repeatedly supplied from the embedded module with a constant power level on a

given channel.

The tester measures transmitted signal level.

MS Received signal power measurement:

The embedded module performs a single power measurement of the signal received in the given

channel. Measurement is performed with internal gain sets to the value corresponding to the given

input signal level.

Warning: +WPOW command is intended for non-signalling measurement purpose. Protocol stack must be

disabled (using +CPOF, +CFUN or +WBHV).

Warning: +WPOW is not compliant with nominal GSM-GPRS-EDGE protocol stack operations: no GSM

network registration or GSM call or GPRS- EDGE transfer can be carried on while using

+WPOW.

Warning: Embedded module system clock is no longer synchronized with any network. Therefore, GSM RF

frequency accuracy is very rough (< 30 ppm).

Warning: Be sure that the <Arfcn> parameter corresponds to the selected bands (see +WMBS command

description).

11.11.2. Syntax

• For <mode> = 0: Received signal power measurement

Action command

AT+WPOW=<mode>,<Arfcn>[,<Gain>]

[+WPOW: <SignalLevel>]

OK

• For <mode> = 1: Transmitted power measurement START

Action command

AT+WPOW=<mode>,<Arfcn>[,<Pcl>]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Wireless Power Level +WPOW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 49

• For <mode> = 2: Transmitted power measurement STOP

Action command

AT+WPOW=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+WPOW?

OK

Test command

AT+WPOW=?

OK

11.11.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: mode

0 received signal power measurement

1 transmitted power measurement START

2 transmitted power measurement STOP

<Arfcn>: Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (GSM radio channel number)

(see GSM 05.05, “Radio transmission and reception”).

GSM 900 / E GSM: range [1023 : 975] U [124 : 0]

GSM 850: range [128 : 251]

DCS 1800: range [512 : 885]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Wireless Power Level +WPOW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 50

PCS 1900:

Embedded module and

configuration

<freq> range for PCS 1900

Q26 Extreme 512-810

Not Q26 Extreme and not in

autoquadband

512-810

Not Q26 Extreme and in

autoquadband

1536-1834

In case of 2G products configured in autoquadband (not Q26 Extreme one),

for PCS 1900 parameter <freq> range [1536-1834] corresponds to

frequency range [512-810]. This is made to distinguish DCS 1800 and PCS

1900 absolute frequency in autoquadband for embedded module which is

not a Q26 Extreme.

<Pcl>: power control level

when <Mode> = 1, gives the GSM transmit Power Control Level.

(see GSM 05.05, “Radio transmission and reception”)

GSM: range [5: 19], 5 is maximum power (33 dBm ฑ 2 dBm)

DCS – PCS: range [0 : 15], 0 is maximum power (30 dBm ฑ 2 dBm)

Note: If <Pcl> is not specified, maximum power level is applied.

<Gain>: when <Mode> = 0, gives the internal gain to be internally used to perform

received signal measurement. Its value expressed in terms of input signal

level.

Range is [38;110], corresponding to [-110;-38] dBm.

Note: If <Gain> parameter is not specified, an internal gain control

algorithm applies the best suited gain for the input signal.

<SignalLevel>: the measured signal level

Range is [-105;-38] dBm

11.11.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GSM Network Commands

Wireless Power Level +WPOW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 51

11.11.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPOF

Note: Stop the Protocol stack before doing

measurement.

OK

AT+WPOW=0,62 +WPOW: -85

OK

AT+WPOW=0,62,97 +WPOW: -100

OK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 52

12. Call Control Commands

12.1. Dial Command to a specific number D

Emergency call

Normal call

12.1.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows an application to specify new Emergency Call

Codes.

According to 3GPP specifications, only several numbers should be considered as emergency

numbers:

• Without a SIM: 112, 911, 000, 08, 110, 999, 118 and 119

• With a SIM: 112, 911 and numbers present in the EFECC SIM file

All others numbers will be considered as GSM numbers.

The ATD command is used to set a voice, data or fax call. As per GSM 02.30, the dial command also

controls supplementary services.

The following Emergency Numbers are available without a SIM card:

000, 08, 110, 112, 118, 119, 911 and 999.

The following Emergency Numbers are available with a SIM card:

• when EFECC file is missing from SIM: 112 and 911

• when SIM includes an EFECC file: 112, 911 and any Emergency Numbers available in the

EFECC file.

An optional field can be filled for an emergency call: the Service Category. See the “Notes” paragraph

(this field is not supported on Q26Extreme product).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Dial Command to a specific number D

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 53

12.1.2. Syntax

Action command

ATD<nb>[<I>][<G>][;]

[Depending of GSM sequence]

OK / CONNECT <speed> / NO CARRIER / BUSY / NO ANSWER

Read command

None

Test command

None

12.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<nb>: destination phone number (ASCII string) or GSM sequence

0-9,*,#,+,A,B,C,D,P

<I>: CLIR supplementary service subscription

If present, the CLIR supplementary service subscription is overridden temporary for this

call only.

I activate (disable presentation of own phone number to remote)

i deactivate (enable presentation of own phone number to remote)

<G>: CUG supplementary service information

If present, the CUG supplementary service information is overridden temporary for this

call only.

G activate

g deactivate

; for voice call

If omitted, the call will be a data or a fax one.

<speed>: data call connection speed in bps

300

1200

2400

4800

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Dial Command to a specific number D

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 54

9600

14400

12.1.4. Parameter storage

None

12.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

ATD0123456789;

Note: Call the 0123456789 number, voice call

OK

Note: Call succeeds

ATD0123456789P123;

Note: Call the 0123456789 number, voice call with a pause and

DTMF sequence 123

OK

ATD0123456789

Note: Call the 0123456789 number, data call

CONNECT 9600

Note: Call succeeds

ATD*#21#

Note: Check any call forwarding status

+CCFC: 0,7

OK

Note: No call forwarding

ATD911#64;

Note: Initiate an emergency call with the Service Category field

set to “automatically initiated eCall” (see Notes)

OK

12.1.6. Notes

• If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not

supported.

• For an international number, the local international prefix does not need to be set (usually 00)

but must be replaced by the ‘+’ character.

Example: to set up a voice call to Sierra Wireless offices from another country, the AT

command is: "ATD+33146290800;"

• Note that some countries may have specific numbering rules for their GSM handset

numbering.

• When the FDN phonebook has been activated (see +CLCK command), only numbers

beginning with the digits of FDN phonebook entries can be called.

For example, if “014629" is entered in the FDN phonebook all the phone numbers beginning

with these 6 digits can be called.

• An outgoing call attempt can be refused if the AOC service is active and credit has expired

(NO CARRIER).

• As per GSM 02.30, GSM sequences may be controlled using dial commands. These

sequences can contain “*", “#", but “;" is forbidden in the sequence. For example, to invoke or

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Dial Command to a specific number D

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 55

suppress CLIR service temporally, ATD*31#<nb>[;] and ATD#31#<nb>[;] can be used (with ‘;’

at the end, a voice call will be launched).

• If the FDN phonebook is activated, the call forwarding sequences are allowed only if they are

present in the FDN.

• See GSM Sequence List paragraph in the Appendixes to have the list of supported

sequences.

• A category can be filled for an emergency call. To use this specificity, the following syntax

should be used:

ATD<nb>#<category>;

with <nb> is the emergency call

<category> is a bit field with the following explanation:

bit 1 Police

bit 2 Ambulance

bit 3 Fire Brigade

bit 4 Marine Guard

bit 5 Mountain Rescue

bit 6 manually initiated eCall

bit 7 automatically initiated eCall

bit 8 is spare and set to "0"

The <category> range is [1-127]. If an out of range value is filled and if the <nb> is an

emergency call, this field is not taken into account by the embedded module and the

emergency call is initiated (without this information).

If the <nb> number is not an emergency number, the <category> field is not takent into

account and a normal call is initiated by the embedded module.

If bit 6 and bit 7 are set to 1, the embedded module automatically set bit 6 to 0 and keep bit 7

to 1.

This field is not supported by the Q26Extreme product. If the ATD<nb>#<category> command

is sent to the Q26Extreme product with <nb> as an emergency number, the Q26Extreme will

initiate an emergency call without the category field.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Direct Dial Command using phonebook index D

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 56

12.2. Direct Dial Command using phonebook index

D

12.2.1. Description

This command allows initiating an outgoing voice, data or fax call directly by indicating the index of a

specific or current phonebook entry.

12.2.2. Syntax

Action command

ATD>[<mem>]<index>[<I>][<G>][;]

OK / CONNECT <speed> / NO CARRIER / BUSY / NO ANSWER

Read command

None

Test command

None

12.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mem>: phonebook memory storage

If omitted, the currently selected phonebook is used.

SM ADN Abbreviated Dialing Numbers (SIM phonebook)

FD FDN Fixed Dialing Numbers (SIM restricted phonebook)

ON MSISDN (SIM own numbers)

EN ECC Emergency Call Codes (SIM or ME)

LD LND Last Number Dialed

MC Missed (unanswered received) Calls list

ME ME (flash) phonebook

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Direct Dial Command using phonebook index D

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 57

MT combined ME and SIM phonebook (ME+SM)

RC Received Calls list

SN SDN Service Dialing Numbers (SIM special service numbers)

<index>: phonebook entry index

integer type

The range depends of the SIM capability (for ADN phonebook) and is (1-500) for flash

phonebook

<I>: CLIR supplementary service subscription

If present, the CLIR supplementary service subscription is overridden temporary for this

call only

I activate (disable presentation of own phone number to remote)

i deactivate (enable presentation of own phone number to remote)

<G>: CUG supplementary service information

If present, the CUG supplementary service information is overridden temporary for this

call only.

G activate

g deactivate

; for voice call

If omitted, the call will be a data or a fax one

<speed>: data call connection speed in bps

300

1200

2400

4800

9600

14400

12.2.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Direct Dial Command using phonebook index D

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 58

12.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

ATD>1;

Note: Call the 1st entry of current phonebook

OK

Note: Call succeeds

ATD>ME1;

Note: Call the 1st entry of flash phonebook

OK

Note: Call succeeds

12.2.6. Notes

When the FDN phonebook has been activated (see +CLCK command), only direct dialing from FDN

phonebook entries is available.

An outgoing call attempt can be refused if the AOC service is active and credit has expired (NO

CARRIER).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Direct Dial Command using a phonebook entry name D

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 59

12.3. Direct Dial Command using a phonebook

entry name D

12.3.1. Description

This command allows initiating an outgoing voice, data or fax call directly by indicating the entry name

of a specific phonebook.

12.3.2. Syntax

Action command

ATD>[<mem>]<name>[<I>][<G>][;]

OK / CONNECT <speed> / NO CARRIER / BUSY / NO ANSWER

Read command

None

Test command

None

12.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mem>: phonebook memory storage

If omitted, the currently selected phonebook is used.

SM ADN Abbreviated Dialing Numbers (SIM phonebook)

FD FDN Fixed Dialing Numbers (SIM restricted phonebook)

ON MSISDN (SIM own numbers)

EN ECC Emergency Call Codes (SIM or ME)

LD LND Last Number Dialed

MC Missed (unanswered received) Calls list

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Direct Dial Command using a phonebook entry name D

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 60

ME ME phonebook

MT combined ME and SIM phonebook (ME+SM)

RC Received Calls list

SN SDN Service Dialing Numbers (SIM special service numbers)

<name>: phonebook entry name

ASCII string (between "")

The maximum number of characters depends on SIM capability for all phonebooks

except ME (up to 30 characters).

<I>: CLIR supplementary service subscription

If present, the CLIR supplementary service subscription is overridden temporary for this

call only.

I activate (disable presentation of own phone number to remote)

i deactivate (enable presentation of own phone number to remote)

<G>: CUG supplementary service information

If present, the CUG supplementary service information is overridden temporary for this

call only.

G activate

g deactivate

; for voice call

If omitted, the call will be a data or a fax one.

<speed>: data call connection speed in bps

300

1200

2400

4800

9600

14400

12.3.4. Parameter storage

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Direct Dial Command using a phonebook entry name D

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 61

12.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

ATD>"John";

Note: Call the number of the current phonebook entry which

name is John

OK

Note: Call succeeds

ATD>ME"John";

Note: Call the number of the flash phonebook entry which

name is John

OK

Note: Call succeeds

12.3.6. Notes

When the FDN phonebook has been activated, only direct dialing from FDN phonebook entries is

available.

An outgoing call attempt can be refused if the AOC service is active and credit has expired (NO

CARRIER).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Redial Last Telephone Number DL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 62

12.4. Redial Last Telephone Number DL

12.4.1. Description

This command is used by the application to redial the last number used in the D command.

12.4.2. Syntax

Action command

ATDL

<last number>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

12.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<last number>: last number dialed followed by ";" for voice calls only

string type

12.4.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Redial Last Telephone Number DL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 63

12.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

ATDL

Note: Redial last number

0146290800;

OK

Note: Last call was a voice call.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Answer a Call A

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 64

12.5. Answer a Call A

12.5.1. Description

When the product receives a call, it sets the Ring Indicator signal and sends the ASCII "RING" or

"+CRING: <type>" string to the application (+CRING if the cellular result code +CRC is enabled).

Then it waits for the application to accept the call with the ATA command.

12.5.2. Syntax

Action command

ATA

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

12.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None.

12.5.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Answer a Call A

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 65

12.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

RING

Note: Incoming call

ATA

Note: Answer to this incoming call

OK

Note: Call accepted

ATH

Note: Disconnect call

OK

Note: Call disconnected

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Hang-Up Command H

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 66

12.6. Hang-Up Command H

12.6.1. Description

The ATH (or ATH0) command is used by the application to disconnect the remote user. In the case of

multiple calls, all calls are released (active, on-hold and waiting calls).

The Sierra Wireless proprietary ATH1 command has been added to disconnect the current outgoing

call, only in dialing or alerting state (i.e. ATH1 can be used only after the ATD command, and before

its terminal response (OK, NO CARRIER, …). It can be useful in the case of multiple calls.

12.6.2. Syntax

Action command

ATH[<n>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

12.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: disconnection type

0 ask for disconnection

1 ask for outgoing call disconnection

12.6.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Hang-Up Command H

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 67

12.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

ATH

Note: Ask for call disconnection

OK

Note: Every call, if any, are released

ATH1

Note: Ask for outgoing call disconnection

OK

Note: Outgoing call, if any, is released

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Sierra Wireless Hang-up +WATH

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 68

12.7. Sierra Wireless Hang-up +WATH

12.7.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used by the application to disconnect the remote user,

specifying a release cause and the location. In the case of multiple calls, all calls are released (active,

on-hold and waiting calls).

12.7.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WATH=<RelCause>[,<location>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WATH=?

+WATH= (list of supported <RelCause>s),(list of supported <location>s)

OK

12.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<RelCause>: release cause

range: 1-127

integer value

Please refer to section "Failure Cause from 3GPP TS 24.008 recommendation"

in the Appendixes chapter of this guide.

<location>: release location

Please refer to ETSI GSM 24.008 [8] for values.

0 user

1 private network serving the local user

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Sierra Wireless Hang-up +WATH

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 69

2 transit network

3 transit network

4 public network serving the remote user

5 private network serving the remote user

7 international network

10 network beyond inter-working point

12.7.4. Parameter Storage

None.

12.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WATH=? +WATH: (1-127),(0-5,7,10)

OK

AT+WATH=31

Note: Ask for disconnection with release

cause=normal and location=USER

OK

Note: All calls, if any, are released

AT+WATH=17,2

Note: Ask for disconnection with release cause=user

busy and location= public network serving the local

user

OK

Note: All calls, if any, are released

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Remote disconnection

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 70

12.8. Remote disconnection

This message is used by the product to inform the application that an active call has been released by

the remote user.

The product sends "NO CARRIER" to the application and sets the DCD signal.

In addition, for AOC, the product can release the call if credit has expired (release cause 68 with

+CEER command).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Extended Error Report +CEER

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 71

12.9. Extended Error Report +CEER

12.9.1. Description

This command gives the cause of call release when the last call set up (originating or answering)

failed.

12.9.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CEER

+CEER: <report>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

12.9.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<report>: call release cause (please refer to section "failure cause from 3GPP TS 24.008

recommendation" in Appendix)

12.9.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Extended Error Report +CEER

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 72

12.9.5. Examples

Command Responses

ATD123456789;

Note: Outgoing voice call

NO CARRIER

Note: Call setup failure

AT+CEER

Note: Ask for release cause

+CEER: Error 41

OK

Note: "Temporary failure"

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Automatic Dialing with DTR %Dn

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 73

12.10. Automatic Dialing with DTR %Dn

12.10.1. Description

This command enables and disables:

• automatic dialing of the phone number stored in the first location of the ADN phonebook (or

FDN phonebook, if it is activated using +CLCK command),

• automatic sending of the short message (SMS) stored in the first location of the SIM.

The number is dialed when DTR OFF switches to ON.

The short message is sent when DTR OFF switches to ON.

12.10.2. Syntax

Action command

AT%D<n>[;]

OK

Read command

AT%D?

%D: <n>

OK

Test command

None

12.10.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: automatic dialing mode

0 disables automatic DTR number dialing/message transmission

1 enables automatic DTR dialing if DTR switches from OFF to ON

Dials the phone number in the first location of the ADN phonebook (or FDN

phonebook, if it is activated using +CLCK command).

voice call (with semi-colon)

data or Fax call (without semi-colon)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Automatic Dialing with DTR %Dn

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 74

2 activates automatic DTR short message transmission if DTR switches from OFF

to ON

Sends the short message in the first location of the SIM (even if the current

selected SMS memory is not SM in +CPMS command).

; for voice call

If omitted, the call will be a data or a fax one.

12.10.4. Parameter Storage

None.

12.10.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT%D1;

Note: Activates DTR voice number dialing

OK

Note: Command has been executed

DTR is OFF

DTR switches ON

Note: The number in the first location of the ADN is dialed

automatically

DTR switches OFF

Note: The product goes on-hook

OK

AT%D2

Note: Activates DTR short message sending

OK

Note: Command has been executed

DTR is OFF

DTR switches ON

Note: The first short message is sent

+CMSS: 1

12.10.6. Notes

If the first location is empty:

• AT%D1 and AT%D2 commands will receive an OK response,

• the DTR ON event will trigger a "+CME ERROR: 21" or a "+CMS ERROR: 321".

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Automatic Answer S0

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 75

12.11. Automatic Answer S0

12.11.1. Description

This command determines and controls the product automatic answering mode.

12.11.2. Syntax

Action command

ATS0=<value>

OK

Read command

ATS0?

<value>

OK

Test command

None

12.11.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<value>: number of rings before automatic answer (3 characters padded with zeros)

Values range is 0 to 255 (default value: 000).

12.11.4. Parameter Storage

The <value> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Automatic Answer S0

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 76

12.11.5. Examples

Command Responses

ATS0=2

Note: Automatic answer after 2 rings

OK

ATS0?

Note: Current value

002

OK

Note: 3 characters padded with zeros

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Incoming Call Bearer +CICB

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 77

12.12. Incoming Call Bearer +CICB

12.12.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used to set the type of incoming calls when no incoming

bearer is specified (see +CSNS).

Note: Setting the +CICB command affects the current value of +CSNS.

12.12.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CICB=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+CICB?

+CICB: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+CICB=?

+CICB: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

12.12.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: default incoming call bearer

0 data

1 fax

2 speech (default value)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Incoming Call Bearer +CICB

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 78

12.12.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

12.12.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CICB=2

Note: If no incoming bearer, force a voice call

OK

AT+CICB?

Note: Get current value

+CICB: 2

OK

Note: Default incoming bearer: voice call

AT+CICB=?

Note: Test command

+CICB: (0-2)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 79

12.13. Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS

12.13.1. Description

This command selects the bearer to be used when an MT single numbering scheme call is set up

(see +CICB).

Note: Setting the +CSNS command affects the current value of +CICB.

12.13.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CSNS=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+CSNS?

+CSNS: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+CSNS=?

+CSNS: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

12.13.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: bearer to be used

0 voice (default value)

2 fax

4 data

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 80

12.13.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

12.13.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CSNS=0

Note: Force a voice call

OK

AT+CSNS?

Note: Get current value

+CSNS: 0

OK

Note: Default incoming bearer: voice call

AT+CSNS=?

Note: Test command

+CSNS: (0,2,4)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Service Reporting Control +CR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 81

12.14. Service Reporting Control +CR

12.14.1. Description

This command enables a detailed type of service reporting in case of incoming or outgoing data calls.

Before sending the CONNECT response to the application, the product will specify the type of data

connection which has been set up.

12.14.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CR=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+CR?

+CR: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+CR=?

+CR: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

Unsolicited response

+CR: <type>

12.14.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: extended reports activation

0 disable (default value)

1 enable

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Service Reporting Control +CR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 82

<type>: type of call

ASYNC asynchronous transparent

REL ASYNC asynchronous non transparent

GPRS GPRS

12.14.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

12.14.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CR=? +CR: (0,1)

OK

AT+CR=1 OK

Note: Extended reports enabled Note: Command valid

AT+CR? +CR: 1

OK

ATD0612345678

Note: CSD data call

+CR: ASYNC

CONNECT 9600

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Cellular Result Codes +CRC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 83

12.15. Cellular Result Codes +CRC

12.15.1. Description

This command allows more detailed ring information for an incoming call (voice or data). Instead of

the string "RING", an extended string is used to indicate which type of call is ringing.

12.15.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CRC=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+CRC?

+CRC: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+CRC=?

+CRC: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

Unsolicited response

+CRING: <type>[,<PDP_type>[,<PDP_addr>]]

12.15.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: extended ring information mode

0 disable (default value)

1 enable

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Call Control Commands

Cellular Result Codes +CRC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 84

<type>: detailed ring information

ASYNC asynchronous transparent

REL ASYNC asynchronous non transparent

VOICE voice

FAX fax

GPRS GPRS network request for PDP context activation

<PDP_type>: type of packet data protocol

"IP" Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)

"PPP" Point to Point Protocol (IETF STD 51)

<PDP_addr>: PDP address: identifies the MT in the address space applicable to the PDP

string type

12.15.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

12.15.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CRC=? +CRC: (0,1)

OK

AT+CRC=1 OK

Note: Extended reports enabled Note: Command valid

AT+CRC? +CRC: 1

OK

+CRING: VOICE

Note: Incoming voice call

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 85

13. Data Commands

13.1. Using AT Commands during a data

connection

To use AT commands during a data connection (e.g. while the product is in online mode), it is

necessary to switch to offline mode.

• Switch from online to offline mode

To switch from online mode to offline mode, the "+++" sequence must be sent. Following this, the

product gets back to offline mode with an "OK" response, and a AT command can be sent. This "+++"

sequence must be sent with a guard time of 1s before and after the sequence.

Note: The "+++" sequence will only work with the +ICF command using one of the following settings:

- 8 data bits, with no parity

- 7 data bits, with even parity

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

• Switch from offline to online mode

Please refer to the "O" command description.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

Bearer Type Selection +CBST

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 86

13.2. Bearer Type Selection +CBST

13.2.1. Description

This command allows to select a bearer type for outgoing and incoming data calls.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

13.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CBST=[<speed>][,[<name>][,<ce>]]

OK

Read command

AT+CBST?

+CBST: <speed>,<name>,<ce>

OK

Test command

AT+CBST=?

+CBST: (list of supported <speed>s),(list of supported <name>s),(list of supported

<ce>s)

OK

13.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<speed>: data call connection speed

used only for outgoing calls

0 autobauding, modem type: none (default value)

1 300 bps, modem type: V.21

2 1200 bps, modem type: V.22

3 1200/75 bps, modem type: V.23

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

Bearer Type Selection +CBST

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 87

4 2400 bps, modem type: V.22bis

5 2400 bps, modem type: V.26ter

6 4800 bps, modem type: V.32

7 9600 bps, modem type: V.32

8 specific

12 9600 bps, modem type: V.34

14 14400 bps, modem type: V.34

65 300 bps, modem type: V.110

66 1200 bps, modem type: V.110

68 2400 bps, modem type: V.110

70 4800 bps, modem type: V.110

71 9600 bps, modem type: V.110

75 14400 bps, modem type: V.110

<name>: operating mode

0 no data compression is provided and only asynchronous mode is supported

(default value)

<ce>: connection element

0 transparent only

1 non transparent only (default value)

2 transparent preferred

3 non transparent preferred

13.2.4. Parameter Storage

All parameters are stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be restored

using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

Bearer Type Selection +CBST

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 88

13.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CBST=? +CBST: (0-8,12,14,65,66,68,70,71,75),

(0),(0-3)

OK

AT+CBST=7,0,1 OK

Note: Select a bearer

AT+CBST?

Note: Current values

+CBST: 7,0,1

OK

13.2.6. Notes

For incoming calls, if <ce> is set to "Transparent only" and the network offers only "Non Transparent"

or vice versa, then the call is released.

<ce> parameter values 2 and 3 are equivalent to former values 100 and 101. These values are

managed for compatibility purposes, but they may not be used in new code (2 as former 100, and 3

as former 101).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting +ILRR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 89

13.3. DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting +ILRR

13.3.1. Description

This command controls whether a +ILRR unsolicited response is sent to the application with the

current (negotiated or renegotiated) DTE-DCE speed rate.

If enabled, the unsolicited result code is transmitted in an incoming or outgoing data call, after any

data compression report, and before any connection indication (CONNECT).

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

13.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+ILRR=<value>

OK

Read command

AT+ILRR?

+ILRR: <value>

OK

Test command

AT+ILRR=?

+ILRR: (list of supported <value>s)

OK

Unsolicited response

+ILRR: <rate>

13.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<value>: local port rate report

0 disable (default value)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting +ILRR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 90

1 enable

<rate>: current (negotiated or renegotiated) DTE-DCE speed rate

values in bps

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

38400

57600

115200

230400

460800

921600

13.3.4. Parameter Storage

The <value> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting +ILRR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 91

13.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+ILRR=? +ILRR: (0,1)

OK

AT+ILRR=0 OK

Note: Local port rate report disabled Note: Command valid

AT+ILRR=1 OK

Note: Local port rate report enabled Note: Command valid

AT+ILRR? +ILRR: 1

OK

ATD0123456789

Note: CSD call

+ILRR: 9600

CONNECT 9600

Note: Data rate is 9600

13.3.6. Notes

The +ILLR indication is displayed on the data window.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

Radio Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 92

13.4. Radio Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP

13.4.1. Description

This command modifies the radio link protocol parameters used for non transparent data

transmission.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

13.4.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CRLP=[<iws>][,[<mws>][,[<T1>][,[<N2>][,[<ver>]]]]]

OK

Read command

AT+CRLP?

+CRLP: <iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>,<ver>

OK

Test command

AT+CRLP=?

+CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s),(list of supported <mws>s),(list of supported

<T1>s),(list of supported <N2>s),(list of supported <ver>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

Radio Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 93

13.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<iws>: down window size

range: 0-61 (default value: 61)

<mws>: up window size

range: 0-61 (default value: 61)

<T1>: acknowledgement timer in units of 10 ms

range: 40-255 (default value: 48)

<N2>: retransmission attempts

range: 1-255 (default value 6)

<ver>: RLP version number

0 V42bis not supported

1 V42bis supported (default value)

13.4.4. Parameter Storage

Parameters are stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be restored

using AT&F.

13.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CRLP=? +CRLP: (0-61),(0-61),(40-255),(1-255),(0,1)

OK

AT+CRLP=61,61,48,6,0 OK

Note: Set new parameters

AT+CRLP? +CRLP: 61,61,48,6,0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

Other Radio Link Parameters +DOPT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 94

13.5. Other Radio Link Parameters +DOPT

13.5.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command modifies additional radio link protocol parameters.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

13.5.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+DOPT=[<reset_allowed>][,<dtx_allowed>]

OK

Read command

AT+DOPT?

<reset_allowed>,<dtx_allowed>

OK

Test command

AT+DOPT=?

(list of supported <reset_allowed>s),(list of supported <dtx_allowed>s)

OK

13.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<reset_allowed>: behaviour in case of bad radio link

0 data communication is hung up in case of bad radio link

1 data communication is held, even if the radio link is bad; there is a possibility of

losing data (default value)

<dtx_allowed>: power mode

0 normal mode

1 economic battery mode, not supported by all networks (default value)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

Other Radio Link Parameters +DOPT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 95

13.5.4. Parameter Storage

Parameters are stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be restored

using AT&F.

13.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+DOPT=? (0,1),(0,1)

OK

AT+DOPT=1 OK

Note: Second parameter is omitted

AT+DOPT=1,1 OK

Note: Set new parameters

AT+DOPT? 1,1

OK

AT+DOPT=,0

Note: First parameter is omitted

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

Select Mode +FCLASS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 96

13.6. Select Mode +FCLASS

13.6.1. Description

This command sets the product to a particular operating mode (data or fax).

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

13.6.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FCLASS=<n>

OK

Read command

AT+FCLASS?

+FCLASS: <n>

OK

Test command

AT+FCLASS=?

+FCLASS: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

13.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: operating mode

0 data (default value)

1 fax class 1

2 fax class 2

13.6.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

Select Mode +FCLASS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 97

13.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FCLASS=? +FCLASS: (0,1,2)

OK

Note: Test command Note: All operating modes supported

AT+FCLASS=1 OK

Note: Fax class 1 mode requested Note: Command valid

AT+FCLASS? +FCLASS: 1

OK

Note: Current value Note: Command valid

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

Select Data Compression %C

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 98

13.7. Select Data Compression %C

13.7.1. Description

This command enables or disables data compression negotiation.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

13.7.2. Syntax

Action command

AT%C[<n>]

OK

Read command

AT%C?

<n>

OK

Test command

None

13.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: compression mode

0 no compression (default value)

2 V42 compression if supported

13.7.4. Parameter Storage

<n> is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

Select Data Compression %C

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 99

13.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT%C2 OK

AT%C? 2

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

V42 Bis Data Compression +DS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 100

13.8. V42 Bis Data Compression +DS

13.8.1. Description

This command enables or disables V42bis data compression. Note that the product only allows the

MNP2 protocol.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

13.8.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+DS=[<dir>][,[<neg>][,[<P1>][,[<P2>]]]]

OK

Read command

AT+DS?

+DS: <dir>,<neg>,<P1>,<P2>

OK

Test command

AT+DS=?

+DS: (list of supported <dir>s),(list of supported <neg>s),(list of supported

<P1>s),(list of supported <P2>s)

OK

13.8.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<dir>: desired direction(s) of operation for the data compression feature, from the DTE point of

view

0 negotiated

1 transmit only

2 receive only

3 both directions, accept any direction (default value)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

V42 Bis Data Compression +DS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 101

<neg>: specifies whether the DCE may continue to operate or not if the desired result is not

obtained

0 do not disconnect if V42bis is not negotiated by the remote DCE as specified in <dir>

(default value)

1 disconnect if V42bis is not negotiated by the remote DCE as specified in <dir>

<P1>: maximum number of dictionary entries that may be negotiated

range: 512-2048 (default value: 2048)

<P2>: maximum string length to be negotiated

range: 6-250 (default value: 20)

13.8.4. Parameter Storage

All parameters are stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be restored

using AT&F.

13.8.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+DS=? +DS: (0-3),(0,1),(512-2048),(6-250)

OK

AT+DS=3,0,2048,250 OK

Note: Set new parameters

AT+DS? +DS: 3,0,2048,250

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

V42 Bis Data Compression Report +DR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 102

13.9. V42 Bis Data Compression Report +DR

13.9.1. Description

This command enables/disables the +DR intermediate result code that represents the current DCEDCE

data compression type. This intermediate result code, if enabled, is issued before the final result

code, after the service report control +CR and before the +ILRR intermediate report.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

13.9.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+DR=<status>

OK

Read command

AT+DR?

+DR: <status>

OK

Test command

AT+DR=?

+DR: (list of supported <status>s)

OK

Intermediate response

+DR: <direction>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

V42 Bis Data Compression Report +DR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 103

13.9.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<status>: status fo the V42bis use

0 disabled (default value)

1 enabled

<direction>: DCE-DCE data compression type

NONE data compression is not in use

V42B V42bis is in use in both directions

V42B RD V42bis is in use in receive direction only

V42B TD V42bis is in use in transmit direction only

13.9.4. Parameter Storage

The <status> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

13.9.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+DR=? +DR: (0,1)

OK

AT+DR=1 OK

Note: Reporting enabled

AT+DR? +DR: 1

OK

ATD0123456789

Note: outgoing data call

+DR: V42B

CONNECT 9600

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

Select Data Error Correcting Mode \N

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 104

13.10. Select Data Error Correcting Mode \N

13.10.1. Description

This command controls the preferred error correcting mode for a data connection. It can only be used

for transparent data transmission.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

13.10.2. Syntax

Action command

AT\N[<n>]

OK

Read command

AT\N?

<n>

OK

Test command

None

13.10.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: error correction mode

0 disables error correcting mode (default value)

5 selects MNP error correcting mode

13.10.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Data Commands

Select Data Error Correcting Mode \N

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 105

13.10.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT\N0 OK

Note: No error correction

AT\N? 0

OK

13.10.6. Notes

+E prefixed V25ter commands are not used.

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 106

14. GPRS Commands

14.1. GPRS Mobile Station Class +CGCLASS

14.1.1. Description

This command is used to set the MT to operate according to the specified GPRS mobile class.

Note: "A" class is not indicated for the Q26 Extreme.

Note: Class A is only for 3G product.

14.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGCLASS=<class>

OK

Read command

AT+CGCLASS?

+CGCLASS: <class>

OK

Test command

AT+CGCLASS=?

+CGCLASS: (list of supported <class>s)

OK

14.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<class>: GPRS mobile class (in descending order of functionality)

"A" class A in 3G only mode

"B" class B

"CG" class C in GPRS only mode

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS Mobile Station Class +CGCLASS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 107

"CC" class C in circuit switched only mode (lowest)

14.1.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.

14.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGCLASS=? +CGCLASS: ("CG","CC","B")

OK

AT+CGCLASS="CC"

Note: Enter GSM mode

OK

AT+CGCLASS? +CGCLASS: "CC"

OK

14.1.6. Notes

If the MT is GPRS attached, when the action command is issued with a <class>="CC" specified, a

GPRS detach request is sent to the network.

If the MT is GSM attached, when the action command is issued with a <class>="CG" specified, a

GSM detach request is sent to the network.

During switch-On in CG class, the MS always performs an automatic GPRS attach (the ATTACHSTATUS

parameter of +WGPRS is ignored).

If the MS is not already GPRS attached, when switching from B/CC class to CG class then no

automatic GPRS attach is performed.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 108

14.2. GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS

14.2.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command modifies some Sierra Wireless GPRS parameters:

• the ATTACH-STATUS (the ME does or not perform automatically a GPRS attachment after

initialization),

• the PDP-INIT-STATUS (activates automatically or not some defined PDP contexts after

initialization),

• the user-defined multislot class. This parameter represents the GPRS or EGPRS class

chosen by the user to perform power saving (by reducing TX /uplink time slots).

In addition, this command allows to:

• set automatically "ACTIVABLE" some defined PDP contexts after initialization,

• set some parameters for PALMOS software: PPP Silent Mode,

• return network technology capabilities, such as GPRS/EGPRS for GERAN, or

HSDPA/HSUPA for UTRAN, on the registered network.

(PPP waits for PPP Client to start the dialog) and Slow CONNECT (due to the delay of the processing

of PALMOS, the CONNECT is sent one second after the dialing command request)

The Sierra Wireless embedded module must be rebooted to activate the new setup except for

<mode> 3, 5, 6 and 7 (please refer to 14.2.3 "Defined Values" paragraph).

When the GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network technology capability and (modulation &) coding

scheme indication is enabled (with + WGPRS AT command), under the following conditions, an

unsolicited response +WGPRSIND will be returned by the embedded module:

• each time GPRS or EGPRS technologies availability is detected on the used network, even if

the Sierra Wireless embedded modules is only GPRS capable

• each time HSDPA or HSUPA technology availability is detected on the used network due to

intra PLMN handover (UMTS<->GSM) or inter system handover (for 3G supported embedded

module only)

• the (modulation &) coding scheme used at the beginning of each transfer (for GPRS/EGPRS

technology only)

• each time the (modulation &) coding scheme are modified during the transfer (for

GPRS/EGPRS technology only)

The (E)GPRS multislot class is not configurable at the 2nd chip used in Q26Extreme embedded

module. Whatever the (E)GPRS multislot class set via the WGRPS AT command, the module is

configured in (E)GPRS Class 12.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 109

14.2.2. Syntax

• For <mode>=9, <parameter>=1:

Action command

AT+WGPRS=<mode>[,[<parameter>][,<parameter2>]]

OK

• For <mode>=9, <parameter>=2:

Action command

AT+WGPRS=<mode>[,[<parameter>][,<parameter2>]]

+WGPRSIND: <techno>[,[<up_cs_ts0>],[<up_cs_ts1>],[<up_cs_ts2>],

[<up_cs_ts3>],[<up_cs_ts4>],[<up_cs_ts5>],[<up_cs_ts6>],

[<up_cs_ts7>],[<down_cs_ts0>],[<down_cs_ts1>],[<down_cs_ts2>],

[<down_cs_ts3>],[<down_cs_ts4>],[<down_cs_ts5>],[<down_cs_ts6>],

[<down_cs_ts7>]]

OK

• For all other cases:

Action command

AT+WGPRS=<mode>[,[<parameter>][,[<cid>],[<class>]]]

OK

Read command

AT+WGPRS?

+WGPRS: <mode>[,<response>[,<cid>]]

[+WGPRS: <mode>[,<response>[,<cid>]] […]]

OK

Test command

AT+WGPRS=?

+WGPRS: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <parameter>s),(list of

supported <cid>s),(list of supported <class>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 110

Unsolicited response

+WGPRSIND: <techno>[,[<up_cs_ts0>],[<up_cs_ts1>],[<up_cs_ts2>],

[<up_cs_ts3>],[<up_cs_ts4>],[<up_cs_ts5>],[<up_cs_ts6>],

[<up_cs_ts7>],[<down_cs_ts0>],[<down_cs_ts1>],[<down_cs_ts2>],

[<down_cs_ts3>],[<down_cs_ts4>],[<down_cs_ts5>],[<down_cs_ts6>],

[<down_cs_ts7>]]

14.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: Sierra Wireless GPRS parameter

0 ATTACH-STATUS (the ME DOES NOT perform automatically a GPRS

attachment after initialization)

only <parameter> is used

1 PDP-INIT-STATUS (declares some PDP contexts liable to be activated

automatically after initialization by <mode>=2)

only <parameter> is used

2 sets ACTIVABLE automatically after init a define PDP context

only <parameter> and <cid> are used

3 PPP silent mode (PPP waits for PPP Client to start the dialog)

only <parameter> is used

4 definition of the GPRS multislot class. This parameter represents the GPRS or

EGPRS class chosen by the user to perform power saving (by reducing TX

/uplink time slots).

only <class> is used

5 Slow CONNECT for PALMฎ OS (due to the delay of the processing of PALMฎ

OS, the CONNECT is sent one second after the dialing command request)

only <parameter> is used

6 PPP Filtering

only <parameter> is used

7 Automatic GPRS roaming inter-operator (ME automatically reattaches itself to the

network and reactivates its PDP context by changing of operator when reaching

border areas)

only <parameter> is used

8 Definition of the EGPRS multislot class (available for EGPRS compatible Sierra

Wireless embedded modules)

only <class> is used

9 GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network technology capability indication or

together with (modulation &) coding scheme indication

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 111

<parameter>: requested operation for <mode> (except for <mode>=4 and 8)

0 disabled

1 enabled

2 for <mode>=9 only

GERAN: read GPRS/EGPRS network technology capability or together with

(modulation &) coding scheme

UTRAN: read HSDPA/HSUPA network technology capability

<parameter2>: requested kind of information for <mode>=9 and <parameter>=1 or 2

If omitted, the value will be set to 0

0 enable only GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network capability indication

1 enable GPRS/EGPRS network capability and (modulation &) coding scheme

indication

2 read GPRS/EGPRS network technology capability or together with (modulation

&) coding scheme

<cid>: PDP context identifier

range: 1-4

integer type

<class>: GPRS or EGPRS multislot class number. Please refer to [6] and table in "Notes"

section for more information

0 deactivate EGPRS mode (in order to establish GPRS TBF)

only available for EGPRS enabled embedded modules and <mode>=8

2 multislot class 2

8 multislot class 8

10 multislot class 10

<response>: This parameter is returned in "AT+WGPRS?" response.

• for <mode>=0,1,2,3,5,6 and 7: <response>=<parameter>

• for <mode>=4 and 8: <response>=<class>

<techno>: technologies available on the used network

0 neither GPRS nor EGPRS features supported

1 only GPRS feature supported

2 EGPRS feature supported

3 3G Release 99 supported

4 HSDPA supported

5 HSUPA supported

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 112

6 HSUPA and HSDPA supported

<up_cs_tsX>: coding scheme (CS) or modulation & coding scheme (MCS) used in uplink for each

timeslot. Applicable to GPRS and EGPRS only

0 CS1 (GPRS)

1 CS2 (GPRS)

2 CS3 (GPRS)

3 CS4 (GPRS)

4 MCS1 (EGPRS)

5 MCS2 (EGPRS)

6 MCS3 (EGPRS)

7 MCS4 (EGPRS)

8 MCS5 (EGPRS)

9 MCS6 (EGPRS)

10 MCS7 (EGPRS)

11 MCS8 (EGPRS)

12 MCS9 (EGPRS)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 113

<down_cs_tsX>: coding scheme (CS) or modulation & coding scheme (MCS) used in downlink for

each timeslot. Applicable to GPRS and EGPRS only

0 CS1 (GPRS)

1 CS2 (GPRS)

2 CS3 (GPRS)

3 CS4 (GPRS)

4 MCS1 (EGPRS)

5 MCS2 (EGPRS)

6 MCS3 (EGPRS)

7 MCS4 (EGPRS)

8 MCS5 (EGPRS)

9 MCS6 (EGPRS)

10 MCS7 (EGPRS)

11 MCS8 (EGPRS)

12 MCS9 (EGPRS)

14.2.4. Parameter Storage

The <cid> and <class> parameters are stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.

The unsolicited network availability and (modulation &) coding scheme indication configuration is not

stored in EEPROM, even when using AT&W command.

14.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WGPRS=?

Note: Request ranges of values for a GPRS compatible

Sierra Wireless embedded module

+WGPRS: (0-7,9),(0-2),(0-4),(2,8,10)

OK

AT+WGPRS=?

Note: Request ranges of values for an EGPRS compatible

Sierra Wireless embedded module

+WGPRS: (0-9),(0-2),(0-4),(0,2,8,10)

OK

AT+WGPRS=2,1,3

Note: Set <cid>=3 to be automatically activated after

initialization

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 114

Command Responses

AT+WGPRS=7,1

Note: Set automatic re-attachment to the network and

reactivation of PDP context in case of change of operator for

MCC/MNC

OK

AT+WGPRS=4,,,8

Note: Choose GPRS multislot class 8

OK

AT+WGPRS=8,,,10

Note: Choose EGPRS multislot class 10

OK

Note: Choose EGPRS multislot class for an EGPRS

compatible Sierra Wireless embedded module other than

Q26Extreme.

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: Choose EGPRS multislot class for Q26Extreme

embedded module

AT+WGPRS=9,2

Note: Read the GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network

technology capability indication

+WGPRSIND: 0

OK

Note: Neither GPRS nor EGPRS features supported

AT+WGPRS=9,2

Note: Read the GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network

technology capability indication

+WGPRSIND: 3

OK

Note: Neither HSDPA nor HSUPA supported (3G R99 only)

AT+WGPRS=9,1

Note : Activate GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network

technology capability indication

OK

+WGPRSIND: 1

Note: Immediate unsolicited response after activation

+WGPRSIND: 2

Note: Immediate unsolicited response after the network

technology capability changed

AT+WGPRS=9,1,1

Note : Activate GPRS/EGPRS network technology capability

and (modulation &) coding schemes indication

OK

Note: EGPRS capabilities detected and changed +WGPRSIND: 1,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,

+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,

Note: Immediate unsolicited response after the network

technology capability changed

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 115

Command Responses

AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet"

ATD*99***1#

Note: Request the GPRS IP service

OK

+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,7,0

+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,0,,,,,,,,7,0

+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,0,,,,,,,,4,0

…

+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,7,,,,,,9,10,9,0

+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,7,,,,,,0,0,0,10

+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,0,,,,,,0,0,0,10

+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,0,,,,,,9,9,9,9

…

+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,0,,,,,,0,0,4,4,,,

+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,,7,,0,0,4,4,,,

+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,,0,,0,0,4,4,,,

Note: Immediate unsolicited response after each time the

(modulation &) coding scheme are modified during the transfer

AT+WGPRS=9,2

Note : Read GPRS/EGPRS network capability indication

+WGPRSIND: 2

OK

AT+WGPRS=9,2,1

Note : Read the current GPRS/EGPRS network capability

and (modulation &) coding schemes

+WGPRSIND: 2,,,,,,,,0,,0,0,4,4,,,

OK

AT+WGPRS?

Note: Read values for non EGPRS compatible embedded

module

+WGPRS: 0,1

+WGPRS: 1,0

+WGPRS: 2,0,1

+WGPRS: 2,1,3

+WGPRS: 3,0

+WGPRS: 4,8

+WGPRS: 5,0

+WGPRS: 6,0

+WGPRS: 7,1

+WGPRS: 9,1,1

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 116

Command Responses

AT+WGPRS?

Note: Read values for EGPRS compatible embedded

module. EGPRS class is 10.

+WGPRS: 0,1

+WGPRS: 1,0

+WGPRS: 2,0,1

+WGPRS: 2,1,3

+WGPRS: 3,0

+WGPRS: 4,8

+WGPRS: 5,0

+WGPRS: 6,0

+WGPRS: 7,1

+WGPRS: 8,10

Note: CPU.EGPRS class is 10.

+WGPRS: 9,1,1

Note: GPRS/EGPRS service indication activated.

OK

14.2.6. Notes

Additional information for <class>:

Multislot class Maximum number of slots Minimum number of slots Type of MS

Rx Tx Sum Tta Ttb Tra Trb

2 2 1 3 3 2 3 1 1

8 4 1 5 3 1 2 1 1

10 4 2 5 3 1 2 1 1

12 4 4 5 2 1 2 1 1

Type 1 MS are not required to transmit and receive at the same time.

When the embedded module is set in the "CG" class, the ME always automatically performs a GPRS

attachment after init, so AT+WGPRS? always gives +WGPRS: 0,0 for the parameter 0.

Additional information for <mode>= 9:

• When the user enables the GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network availability and

(modulation &) coding scheme indication, the embedded module returns OK response, and it

sends immediately an unsolicited response.

• The unsolicited responses are sent to all ports.

• When the GPRS/EGPRS/HSDPA/HSUPA network technology capability and (modulation &)

coding scheme indication is enabled (with + WGPRS AT command), under the following

conditions, an unsolicited response +WGPRSIND will be returned by the embedded module:

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 117

􀂃 each time GPRS or EGPRS technologies availability are detected on the used network,

even if the Sierra Wireless embedded modules is only GPRS capable

􀂃 each time HSDPA or HSUPA technology availability is detected on the used network due

to intra PLMN handover (UMTS<->GSM) or inter system handover (for 3G supported

embedded module only)

􀂃 the (modulation &) coding scheme used at the beginning of each transfer (for

GPRS/EGPRS technology only)

􀂃 each time the (modulation &) coding scheme are modified during the transfer (for

GPRS/EGPRS technology only)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Define PDP Context +CGDCONT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 118

14.3. Define PDP Context +CGDCONT

14.3.1. Description

This command specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by the local

context identification parameter.

Four PDP contexts can be defined through Sierra Wireless OS.

14.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGDCONT=<cid>[,<PDP_type>[,<APN>[,<PDP_addr>[,<d_comp>[,<h_comp>]]]]]

OK

Read command

AT+CGDCONT?

+CGDCONT: <cid>,<PDP_type>,<APN>,<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,<h_comp>

[+CGDCONT: <cid>,<PDP_type>,<APN>,<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,<h_comp>

[…]]

OK

Test command

AT+CGDCONT=?

+CGDCONT: (list of supported <cid>s),<PDP_type>,,,(list of supported

<d_comp>s),(list of supported <h_comp>s)

[+CGDCONT: (list of supported <cid>s),<PDP_type>,,,(list of supported

<d_comp>s),(list of supported <h_comp>s)[…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Define PDP Context +CGDCONT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 119

14.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<cid>: PDP context identifier

range: 1-4

integer type

<PDP_type>: type of packet data protocol

"IP" Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)

"PPP" Point to Point Protocol (IETF STD 51)

<APN>: access point name: logical name that is used to select the GGSN or the external

packet data network.

string type

If the value is null or omitted, then the subscription value will be

requested

<PDP_addr>: PDP address: identifies the MT in the address space applicable to the PDP

If the value is null or omitted, then a value may be provided by the TE during the PDP

startup procedure or a dynamic address will be requested.

The read form of the command will return the null string even if an address has been

allocated during the PDP startup procedure. The allocated address may be read

using the +CGPADDR command.

string type

<d_comp>: PDP data compression mode

0 OFF (default value)

1 ON

<h_comp>: PDP header compression mode

0 OFF (default value)

1 ON

14.3.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Define PDP Context +CGDCONT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 120

14.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGDCONT=? +CGDCONT: (1-4),"IP",,,(0-1),(0-1)

+CGDCONT: (1-4),"PPP",,,0,0

OK

AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet" OK

AT+CGDCONT? +CGDCONT: 1, "IP", "internet",,0,0

OK

AT+CGDCONT=1

Note: Delete <cid>=1

OK

AT+CGDCONT? OK

14.3.6. Notes

The data compression algorithm provided in SNDCP is V.42bis.

Due to Sierra Wireless choice, 4 PDP contexts can be specified with only one activated at the same

time.

A special form of the set command, AT+CGDCONT=<cid> causes the values for context number

<cid> to become undefined.

The embedded module supports only the PAP protocol for legacy products.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS Attach or Detach +CGATT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 121

14.4. GPRS Attach or Detach +CGATT

14.4.1. Description

This command is used to attach the MT to, or detach the MT from the GPRS service. After the

command has completed, the MT remains in V.25 ter command state [3]. If the MT is already in the

requested state, the command is ignored and the OK response is returned.

Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the attachment state changes to

detached.

14.4.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGATT=<state>

OK

Read command

AT+CGATT?

+CGATT: <state>

OK

Test command

AT+CGATT=?

+CGATT: (list of supported <state>s)

OK

14.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<state>: state of GPRS attachment

0 detached

1 attached

2 combined detach (GPRS and GSM detach in the same network request)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS Attach or Detach +CGATT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 122

14.4.4. Parameter Storage

None.

14.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGATT=1 OK

AT+CGATT? +CGATT: 1

OK

AT+CGATT=? +CGATT: (0-2)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

PDP Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 123

14.5. PDP Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT

14.5.1. Description

This command is used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s). After the command has

completed, the MT remains in V.25ter command state. If any PDP context is already in the requested

state, the state for that context remains unchanged.

14.5.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGACT=<state>[,<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]

OK

Read command

AT+CGACT?

+CGACT: <cid>,<state>

[+CGACT: <cid>,<state>[…]]

OK

Test command

AT+CGACT=?

+CGACT: (list of supported <state>s)

OK

14.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<state>: state of PDP context activation

0 deactivated

1 activated

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

PDP Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 124

<cid>: PDP context identifier

range: 1-4

integer type

14.5.4. Parameter Storage

None.

14.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","APN" OK

AT+CGACT=1,1 OK

AT+CGACT? +CGACT: 1,1

OK

AT+CGACT=? +CGACT: (0-1)

OK

AT+CGACT=0

Note: deactivate all contexts

OK

AT+CGACT=1

Note: activate first possible context

OK

14.5.6. Notes

Before the activation of the context, the MT has to attach itself to the GPRS network, if necessary.

If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not supported.

If the MT is not GPRS attached when the activation form of the command is executed, the MT first

performs a GPRS attach and then attempts to activate the specified contexts. If the attach fails, then

the MT responds with ERROR. Or if extended error responses are enabled, with the appropriate

failure-to-attach error message.

If no <cid>s are specified, the activation form of the command activates the first possible within the

defined contexts. If no <cid>s are specified, the deactivation form of the command deactivates all

active contexts.

One PDP context can be activated through Sierra Wireless OS at the same time.

When "AT+CGACT?" is sent, only the status of defined and valid PDP contexts are listed. The line

"+CGACT: 0,0", which appears in the previous software version, is not returned from OS 6.61.

Activation of multiple PDP contexts with a single command is successful only when all specified CIDs

are valid. If not an error is returned.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Request GPRS IP Service D

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 125

14.6. Request GPRS IP Service D

14.6.1. Description

This command causes the MT to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish communication

between the TE and the external PDN.

The V.25ter "D" (Dial) command causes the MT to enter the V.25ter online data state and, with the

TE, to start the specified layer 2 protocol. The MT returns CONNECT to confirm acceptance of the

command prior to entering the V.25ter online data state. No further commands may follow on the AT

command line.

The detailed behavior after the online data state has been entered is described briefly in clause 9, for

IP, of GSM 07.60.[17] GPRS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place prior

to or during the PDP startup if they have not already been performed using the +CGATT and

+CGACT commands.

14.6.2. Syntax

Action command

ATD*<GPRS_SC_IP>[***<cid>]#

CONNECT

Read command

None

Test command

None

14.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<GPRS_SC_IP>: GPRS Service Code for IP

digit string (value 99), which identifies a request to use the GPRS with IP (PDP types

IP and PPP)

<cid>: PDP context identifier

range: 1-4

integer type

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Request GPRS IP Service D

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 126

14.6.4. Parameter Storage

None.

14.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

ATD*99***1# CONNECT

14.6.6. Notes

If <cid> is supported, its usage is the same as in the +CGDATA command. The +CGDCONT,

+CGQREQ, etc. commands may then be used in the embedded module initialization AT command

string to set values for PDP type, APN, QoS etc…

If <cid> is not supported or is supported but omitted, the MT attempts to activate the context using the

'Empty PDP type' (3GPP TS 24.008, refer to [8]). No PDP address or APN is sent in this case and

only one PDP context subscription record is present in the HLR for this subscriber.

If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not supported.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Enter Data State +CGDATA

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 127

14.7. Enter Data State +CGDATA

14.7.1. Description

This command causes the MT to perform the necessary actions to set up communication between the

TE and the network. This may include performing a GPRS attach and one PDP context activation.

GPRS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place prior to or during the PDP

startup if they have not already been performed using the +CGATT and +CGACT commands.

If the activation is successful, data transfer may proceed.

After data transfer and layer 2 protocol termination procedure completion, the V.25ter command state

is re-entered and the MT returns the final result code OK.

14.7.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGDATA[=<cid>]

CONNECT

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CGDATA=?

+CGDATA:

OK

14.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<cid>: PDP context identifier

range: 1-4

integer type

14.7.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Enter Data State +CGDATA

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 128

14.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGDATA=? +CGDATA: "PPP"

OK

AT+CGDATA=1 CONNECT

14.7.6. Notes

If no <cid> is given, the MT attempts to activate the context with available information. The other

context parameters are set to their default values (no APN, default QoS parameters, dynamic IP

address requested).

In case of abnormal termination or start up, the V.25ter command state is reentered and the MT

returns the final result code NO CARRIER or, if enabled, "+CME ERROR". Attach, activate and other

errors may be reported.

This command has the same effects as ATD*99***.

If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not supported.

This command may be used in both normal and embedded module compatibility modes.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS Hang-Up Command GH

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 129

14.8. GPRS Hang-Up Command GH

14.8.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used by the application to release current GPRS

resources (Uplink and/or Downlink Temporary Block Flow).

The command does not affect an active voice call but interrupts any GPRS uplink or downlink transfer

without deactivating the used PDP context.

14.8.2. Syntax

Action command

ATGH

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

14.8.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None.

14.8.4. Parameter Storage

None.

14.8.5. Examples

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Network requested PDP context activation

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 130

14.9. Network requested PDP context activation

In this mode of operation, the MT behaves like an answering modem and accepts the normal V.25ter

commands associated with answering a call. If GPRS-specific configuration commands are required,

they may be sent to the MT as part of the modem initialization commands.

The +CGAUTO command is used to select modem compatibility mode.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

14.9.1. Automatic response to a network request for PDP

context activation 'S0'

The V.25ter "S0" (Automatic answer) command may be used to turn off and on the automatic

response to a network request for a PDP context activation.

When the "ATS0=n" (n>0) command is received, the MT attempts to perform a GPRS attach if it is not

already attached. Failure will result in ERROR being returned to the TE. Subsequently, the MT will

announce a network request for PDP context activation by issuing the unsolicited result code RING to

the TE, followed by the intermediate result code CONNECT. The MT then enters V.25ter online data

state and follows the same procedure as it would after having received a "AT+CGANS=1" with no

<cid> value specified.

Note: The "ATS0=n" (n=0) command does not perform an automatic GPRS detach.

14.9.2. Manual acceptance of a network request for PDP

context activation 'A'

The V.25ter "A" (Answer) command may be used to accept a network request for a PDP context

activation announced by the unsolicited result code RING. The MT responds with CONNECT, enters

V.25ter online data state and follows the same procedure as it would after having received a

"AT+CGANS=1" with no <cid> value specified. It is an error to issue the "A" command when there is

no outstanding network request.

14.9.3. Manual rejection of a network request for PDP

context activation "H"

The V.25ter "H" or "H0" (On-hook) command may be used to reject a network request for PDP

context activation announced by the unsolicited result code RING. The MT responds with OK.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Manual Response to a Network Request for PDP Manual

Context Activation +CGANS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 131

14.10. Manual Response to a Network Request for

PDP Manual Context Activation +CGANS

14.10.1. Description

This command requests the MT to respond to a network request for GPRS PDP context activation

which has been signaled to the TE by the RING or +CRING unsolicited result code.

PDP context activation procedures take place prior to or during the PDP startup.

14.10.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGANS[=<response>[,<cid>]]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CGANS=?

+CGANS: (list of supported <response>s)

OK

14.10.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<response>: response to the request

integer type

0 reject the request

If <response> is omitted it is assumed to be 0.

1 accept and request that the PDP context be activated

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Manual Response to a Network Request for PDP Manual

Context Activation +CGANS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 132

<cid>: PDP context identifier

range: 1-4

integer type

14.10.4. Parameter Storage

None.

14.10.5. Examples

Command Responses

RING

AT+CGANS=1,1 OK

AT+CGANS=? +CGANS: (0,1)

OK

14.10.6. Notes

One <cid> may be specified in order to provide the values needed for the context activation request.

During the PDP startup procedure the MT has the PDP type and the PDP address provided by the

network in the Request PDP Context Activation message.

If a <cid> is given, its information must match with the PDP type and PDP address in the network

request as follows:

• The PDP type must match exactly.

• The PDP addresses are considered to match if they are identical or if the address in the

context definition is unspecified.

If any of this information is in conflict, the command will fail.

The context is activated using the values for PDP type and PDP address provided by the network,

together with the other information found in the PDP context definition.

After data transfer is complete, and the layer 2 protocol termination procedure has completed

successfully, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the MT returns the final result code OK.

In the event of an erroneous termination or a failure to startup, the V.25ter command state is reentered

and the MT returns the final result code NO CARRIER or, if enabled, +CME ERROR. Attach,

activate and other errors may be reported. It is also an error to issue the +CGANS command when

there is no outstanding network request.

This command may be used in both normal and embedded module compatibility modes.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Automatic Response to a Network Request for PDP Context

Activation +CGAUTO

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 133

14.11. Automatic Response to a Network Request for

PDP Context Activation +CGAUTO

14.11.1. Description

This command disables or enables an automatic positive response (auto answer) to the receipt of a

"Request PDP Context Activation" message from the network. It also provides control over the use of

the V.25ter basic commands "S0", "A" and "H" for handling network requests for PDP context

activation. The setting does not affect the issuing of the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING.

14.11.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGAUTO=<n>

OK

Read command

AT+CGAUTO?

+CGAUTO: <n>

OK

Test command

AT+CGAUTO=?

+CGAUTO: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

14.11.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: automatic response mode

0 turn off automatic response for GPRS only

GPRS network requests are manually accepted or rejected by the +CGANS

command.

1 turn on automatic response for GPRS only

GPRS network requests are automatically accepted.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Automatic Response to a Network Request for PDP Context

Activation +CGAUTO

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 134

2 embedded module compatibility mode, GPRS only

Automatic acceptance of GPRS network requests is controlled by the "S0"

command. Manual control uses the "A" and "H" commands, respectively, to

accept and reject GPRS requests (+CGANS may also be used). Incoming circuit

switched calls can be neither manually nor automatically answered.

3 embedded module compatibility mode, GPRS and circuit switched calls (default

value)

Automatic acceptance of both GPRS network requests and incoming circuit

switched calls is controlled by the "S0" command. Manual control uses the "A"

and "H" commands, respectively, to accept and reject GPRS requests (+CGANS

may also be used).

14.11.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

14.11.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGAUTO=? +CGAUTO: (0-3)

OK

AT+CGAUTO=2 OK

AT+CGAUTO? +CGAUTO: 2

OK

14.11.6. Notes

In class C GPRS the embedded module cannot simultaneously receive GPRS and GSM incoming

calls.

When the AT+CGAUTO=0 command is received, the MT will not perform a GPRS detach if it is

attached. Subsequently, when the MT announces a network request for PDP context activation by

issuing the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING, the TE may manually accept or reject the

request by issuing the +CGANS command or may simply ignore the network request.

When the AT+CGAUTO=1 command is received, the MT will attempt to perform a GPRS attach if it is

not already attached. Failure will result in ERROR or, if enabled, "+CME ERROR: <err>" being

returned to the TE. Subsequently, when the MT announces a network request for PDP context

activation by issuing the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING to the TE, this is followed by the

intermediate result code CONNECT. The MT then enters V.25ter online data state and follows the

same procedure as it would after having received an AT+CGANS=1 with <cid> values specified.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGQMIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 135

14.12. Quality of Service Profile (Minimum

acceptable) +CGQMIN

14.12.1. Description

This command allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is checked by the MT

against the negotiated profile returned in the "Activate PDP Context Accept" message.

14.12.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGQMIN=<cid>[,<precedence>[,<delay>[,<reliability>[,<peak>[,<mean>]]]]]

OK

Read command

AT+CGQMIN?

+CGQMIN: <cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean>

[+CGQMIN: <cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean>

[…]]

OK

Test command

AT+CGQMIN=?

+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>,(list of supported <precedence>s),(list of supported

<delay>s),(list of supported <reliability>s),(list of supported <peak>s),(list of

supported <mean>s)

[+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>,(list of supported <precedence>s),(list of supported

<delay>s),(list of supported <reliability>s),(list of supported <peak>s),(list of

supported <mean>s)[…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGQMIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 136

14.12.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<cid>: PDP context identifier

range: 1-4

integer type

<precedence>: precedence class

integer type

0 subscribed precedence (subscribed by the Network by default if value is omitted)

1 high priority (service commitments shall be maintained ahead of precedence

classes 2 and 3)

2 normal priority (service commitments shall be maintained ahead of precedence

class 3.)

3 low priority (service commitments shall be maintained after precedence classes 1

and 2)

<delay>: delay class (see <delay> table below)

0 subscribed

1 delay class 1

2 delay class 2

3 delay class 3

4 delay class 4

<reliability>: reliability class (octet 3) (see <reliability> table below)

0 subscribed reliability class

1 unused. If received, it shall be interpreted as '010'

2 unacknowledged GTP; acknowledged LLC and RLC, protected data

3 unacknowledged GTP and LLC; acknowledged RLC, protected data

4 unacknowledged GTP, LLC, and RLC, protected data

5 unacknowledged GTP, LLC, and RLC, unprotected data

<peak>: peak throughput class

integer type

0 subscribed

1 up to 1 000 (8 kbits/s)

2 up to 2 000 (16 kbits/s)

3 up to 4 000 (32 kbits/s)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGQMIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 137

4 up to 8 000 (64 kbits/s)

5 up to 16 000 (128 kbits/s)

6 up to 32 000 (256 kbits/s)

7 up to 64 000 (512 kbits/s)

8 up to 128 000 (1 024 kbits/s)

9 up to 256 000 (2 048 kbits/s)

<mean>: mean throughput class

range: 0-31

integer type

14.12.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.

14.12.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGQMIN=? +CGQMIN:"IP",(0-3),(0-4),(0-5),(0-9),(0-31)

+CGQMIN:"PPP",(0-3),(0-4),(0-5),(0-9),(0-31)

OK

AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","APN" OK

AT+CGQMIN=1,1,4,5,2,31 OK

AT+CGQMIN? +CGQMIN: 1,1,4,5,2,31

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGQMIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 138

14.12.6. Notes

A special form of the set command, AT+CGQMIN=<cid> causes the minimum acceptable profile for

context number <cid> to become undefined. In this case no check is made against the negotiated

profile.

Detailed information regarding the parameters:

<delay>

delay (maximum values)

SDU size: 128 bytes SDU size: 1024 bytes

Delay Class

mean transfert

delay (sec)

95 percentile

delay

mean transfert

delay (sec)

95 percentile

delay

0 subscribes subscribed by the Nwk / default if value

is omitted

1 (Predictive) < 0.5 < 1.5 < 2 < 7

2 (Predictive) < 5 < 25 < 15 < 75

3 (Predictive) < 50 < 250 < 75 < 375

4 (Best effort) unspecified

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGQMIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 139

<reliability>

Reliability

Class

GTP Mode LLC Frame

Mode

LLC Data

Protection

RLC Block

Mode

Traffic Type

0 subscribed subscribed by the Nwk / default if value is omitted

1 unacknowledged acknowledged protected acknowledged non real-time

traffic, errorsensitive

application that

can cope with

infrequent data

loss.

2 unacknowledged acknowledged protected acknowledged non real-time

traffic, errorsensitive

application that

can cope with

infrequent data

loss.

3 unacknowledged unacknowledged protected acknowledged non real-time

traffic, errorsensitive

application that

can cope with

data

loss,GMM/SM,and

SMS.

4 unacknowledged unacknowledged protected unacknowledged real-time traffic,

error sensitive

application that

can cope with

data loss.

5 unacknowledged unacknowledged unprotected unacknowledged real-time traffic,

error non sensitive

application that

can cope with

data loss.

For real-time traffic, the QoS profile also requires appropriate settings for delay and throughput.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 140

14.13. Quality of Service Profile (Requested)

+CGQREQ

14.13.1. Description

This command allows the TE to specify a Quality of Service Profile that is used when the MT sends

an Activate PDP Context Request message to the network.

14.13.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGQREQ=[<cid>[,<precedence>[,<delay>[,<reliability>[,<peak>[,<mean>]]]]]]

OK

Read command

AT+CGQREQ?

+CGQREQ: <cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean>

[+CGQREQ: <cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean>[…]]

OK

Test command

AT+CGQREQ=?

+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,(list of supported <precedence>s),(list of supported

<delay>s),(list of supported <reliability>s),(list of supported <peak>s),(list of

supported <mean>s)

[+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,(list of supported <precedence>s),(list of supported

<delay>s),(list of supported <reliability>s),(list of supported <peak>s),(list of

supported <mean>s)[…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 141

14.13.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<cid>: PDP context identifier

range: 1-4

integer type

<precedence>: precedence class

integer type

0 subscribed precedence (subscribed by the Network by default if value is omitted)

1 high priority (service commitments shall be maintained ahead of precedence classes 2

and 3)

2 normal priority (service commitments shall be maintained ahead of precedence class 3.)

3 low priority (service commitments shall be maintained after precedence classes 1 and 2)

<delay>: delay class (see <delay> table below)

0 subscribed

1 delay class 1

2 delay class 2

3 delay class 3

4 delay class 4

<reliability>: reliability class (octet 3) (see <reliability> table below)

0 subscribed reliability class

1 unused. If received, it shall be interpreted as '010'

2 unacknowledged GTP; acknowledged LLC and RLC, protected data

3 unacknowledged GTP and LLC; acknowledged RLC, protected data

4 unacknowledged GTP, LLC, and RLC, protected data

5 unacknowledged GTP, LLC, and RLC, unprotected data

<peak>: peak throughput class

integer type

0 subscribed

1 up to 1 000 (8 kbits/s)

2 up to 2 000 (16 kbits/s)

3 up to 4 000 (32 kbits/s)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 142

4 up to 8 000 (64 kbits/s)

5 up to 16 000 (128 kbits/s)

6 up to 32 000 (256 kbits/s)

7 up to 64 000 (512 kbits/s)

8 up to 128 000 (1 024 kbits/s)

9 up to 256 000 (2 048 kbits/s)

<mean>: mean throughput class

integer type

0 subscribed by the Nwk / default if value is omitted

1 100 (~0.22 bit/s)

2 200 (~0.44 bit/s)

3 500 (~1.11 bit/s)

4 1 000 (~2.2 bit/s)

5 2 000 (~4.4 bit/s)

6 5 000 (~11.1 bit/s)

7 10 000 (~22 bit/s)

8 20 000 (~44 bit/s)

9 50 000 (~111 bit/s)

10 100 000 (~0.22 kbits/s)

11 200 000 (~0.44 kbits/s)

12 500 000 (~1.11 kbits/s)

13 1 000 000 (~2.2 kbits/s)

14 2 000 000 (~4.4 kbits/s)

15 5 000 000 (~11.1 kbits/s)

16 10 000 000 (~22 kbits/s)

17 20 000 000 (~44 kbits/s)

18 50 000 000 (~111 kbits/s)

31 Best effort

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 143

14.13.4. Parameter Storage

None.

14.13.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGQREQ=? +CGQREQ:"IP",(0-3),(0-4),(0-5),(0-9),(0-31)

+CGQREQ:"PPP",(0-3),(0-4),(0-5),(0-9),(0-31)

OK

AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","APN" OK

AT+CGQREQ=1,1,4,5,2,31 OK

AT+CGQREQ? +CGQREQ: 1,1,4,5,2,31

OK

14.13.6. Notes

A special form of the set command, AT+CGQREQ=<cid> causes the requested profile for context

number <cid> to become undefined.

Detailed information regarding the parameters:

<delay>

delay (maximum values)

SDU size: 128 bytes SDU size: 1024 bytes

Delay Class

mean transfert

delay (sec)

95 percentile

delay

mean transfert

delay (sec)

95 percentile

delay

0 subscribes subscribed by the Nwk / default if value is omitted

1 (Predictive) < 0.5 < 1.5 < 2 < 7

2 (Predictive) < 5 < 25 < 15 < 75

3 (Predictive) < 50 < 250 < 75 < 375

4 (Best effort) unspecified

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 144

<reliability>

Reliability

Class

GTP Mode LLC Frame

Mode

LLC Data

Protection

RLC Block

Mode

Traffic Type

0 subscribed subscribed by the Nwk / default if value is omitted

1 unacknowledged acknowledged protected acknowledged non real-time

traffic, errorsensitive

application that

can cope with

infrequent data

loss.

2 unacknowledged acknowledged protected acknowledged non real-time

traffic, errorsensitive

application that

can cope with

infrequent data

loss.

3 unacknowledged unacknowledged protected acknowledged non real-time

traffic, errorsensitive

application that

can cope with

data

loss,GMM/SM,and

SMS.

4 unacknowledged unacknowledged protected unacknowledged real-time traffic,

error sensitive

application that

can cope with

data loss.

5 unacknowledged unacknowledged unprotected unacknowledged real-time traffic,

error non sensitive

application that

can cope with

data loss.

For real-time traffic, the QoS profile also requires appropriate settings for delay and throughput.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

PDP Context Modify +CGCMOD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 145

14.14. PDP Context Modify +CGCMOD

14.14.1. Description

This command is used to modify the specified PDP context with respects to QoS profiles. After the

command has completed, the MT returns to V.25ter online data state.

14.14.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGCMOD[=<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CGCMOD=?

+CGCMOD: (list of <cid>s associated with active contexts)

OK

14.14.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<cid>: PDP context identifier

range: 1-4

integer type

14.14.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

PDP Context Modify +CGCMOD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 146

14.14.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","APN" OK

AT+CGACT=1,1 OK

AT+CGCMOD=1 OK

AT+CGCMOD=? +CGCMOD: (1)

OK

AT+CGCMOD

Notes: Modify all the active contexts

OK

14.14.6. Notes

Once the PDP context is activated, this command can only be used to modify the QoS which is set by

the command +CGQREQ. It cannot be used to modify the minimum acceptable QoS (set by

+CGQMIN).

If no <cid>s are specified the activation form of the command modifies all active contexts.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS network registration status +CGREG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 147

14.15. GPRS network registration status +CGREG

14.15.1. Description

This command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG when there is a

change in the MT's GPRS network registration status or when there is a change of the network cell.

14.15.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGREG=<n>

OK

Read command

AT+CGREG?

+CGREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>[,<AcT>]]

OK

Test command

AT+CGREG=?

+CGREG: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

Unsolicited response

+CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>[,<AcT>]

14.15.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: unsolicited result code activation mode

0 disable network registration unsolicited result code (default value)

1 enable network registration unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS network registration status +CGREG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 148

2 enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code

+CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>[,<AcT>]]

<stat>: network registration state

For <stat> = 1 or 5 (i.e. the embedded module is registered on a network), the next

parameter couple is returned if <mode> = 2

0 not registered, ME is not currently searching for a new operator to register to

1 registered, home network

2 not registered, but ME is currently searching for a new operator to register to

3 registration denied

4 unknown

5 registered, roaming

<lac>: string type;

two byte location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3" equals 195 in

decimal)

<ci>: string type;

four byte UTRAN/GERAN cell ID in hexadecimal format

<AcT>: access technology of the registered network

0 GSM

2 UTRAN

14.15.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS network registration status +CGREG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 149

14.15.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGREG=0

Note: Disable network registration unsolicited result code

OK

Note: Command valid

AT+CGREG=1

Note:Enable network registration

OK

+CGREG: 0

Note: Command valid

AT+CGREG=2

Note: Enable network registration unsolicited result code

registration

OK

+CGREG: 0

Note: Command valid

AT+CGREG=? +CGREG: (0-2)

OK

Note: 0,1,2 <n> values are supported

AT+CGATT=1 OK

+CGREG: 1,"20D0","00048329",2

AT+CGREG?

Note: Get the CGREG status

+CGREG: 2,1,"20D0","00048329",2

OK

Note: The embedded module is registered on the home

network with the lac=20D0 and the cell ID = 00048329 and

access technology=2

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS Event reporting +CGEREP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 150

14.16. GPRS Event reporting +CGEREP

14.16.1. Description

This command enables or disables sending of +CGEV unsolicited result codes from MT to TE in the

case of certain events occurring in the GPRS MT or the network.

14.16.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGEREP=<mode>[,<bfr>]

OK

Read command

AT+CGEREP?

+CGEREP: <mode>,<bfr>

OK

Test command

AT+CGEREP=?

+CGEREP: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <bfr>s)

OK

• If <event>=ME REJECT

Unsolicited response

+CGEV: <event> <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>

• If <event>= NW REACT or NW DEACT or ME DEACT

Unsolicited response

+CGEV: <event> <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>[,<cid>]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS Event reporting +CGEREP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 151

• If <event>=NW DETACH or ME DETACH

Unsolicited response

+CGEV: <event>

• If <event>= NW CLASS or ME CLASS

Unsolicited response

+CGEV: <event> <class>

14.16.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: buffer unsolicited result mode

0 disable buffer unsolicited result codes (default value)

2 enable buffer unsolicited result codes

<bfr>: handling method for buffered result codes

0 MT buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared

when <mode>=2 is entered.

<event>: GPRS event

ME REJECT A network request for PDP context activation occurred when the MT was

unable to report it to the TE with a +CRING unsolicited result code and was

automatically rejected.

NW REACT The network has requested a context reactivation. The <cid> that was used to

reactivate the context is provided if known to the MT.

NW DEACT The network has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used to

activate the context is provided if known to the MT.

ME DEACT The mobile equipment has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was

used to activate the context is provided if known to the MT.

NW DETACH The network has forced a GPRS detach. This implies that all active contexts

have been deactivated. These are not reported separately.

ME DETACH The mobile equipment has forced a GPRS detach. This implies that all active

contexts have been deactivated. These are not reported separately.

NW CLASS The network has forced a change of MS class. The highest available class is

reported.

ME CLASS The mobile equipment has forced a change of MS class. The highest available

class is reported.

<PDP_type>: type of packet data protocol

"IP" Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)

"PPP" Point to Point Protocol (IETF STD 51)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GPRS Event reporting +CGEREP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 152

<PDP_addr>: PDP address

identifies the MT in the address space applicable to the PDP

string type

<cid>: PDP context identifier

range: 1-4

integer type

14.16.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

14.16.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGEREP=? +CGEREP: (0,2),(0)

OK

AT+CGEREP=2 OK

AT+CGEREP? +CGEREP: 2,0

OK

+CGEV: ME DEACT "IP", "10.15.139.22",1

Note: PDP context deactivation

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Select Service for MO SMS Messages +CGSMS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 153

14.17. Select Service for MO SMS Messages

+CGSMS

14.17.1. Description

This command is used to specify the service or service preference that the MT will use to send MO

SMS messages.

14.17.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGSMS=<service>

OK

Read command

AT+CGSMS?

+CGSMS: <service>

OK

Test command

AT+CGSMS=?

+CGSMS: (list of supported <service>s)

OK

14.17.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<service>: service or service preference to be used

0 GPRS

1 circuit switched (default value)

2 GPRS preferred (use circuit switched if GPRS is not available)

3 circuit switched preferred (use GPRS if circuit switched not available)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Select Service for MO SMS Messages +CGSMS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 154

14.17.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.

14.17.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGSMS=? +CGSMS: (0-3)

OK

AT+CGSMS=0 OK

AT+CGSMS? +CGSMS: 0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Show PDP Address +CGPADDR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 155

14.18. Show PDP Address +CGPADDR

14.18.1. Description

This command returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers.

14.18.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGPADDR[=<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]

+CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr>

[+CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr>[…]]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CGPADDR=?

+CGPADDR: (list of defined <cid>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Show PDP Address +CGPADDR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 156

14.18.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<PDP_addr>: PDP address: identifies the MT in the address space applicable to the PDP

string type

The address may be static or dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by

the +CGDCONT command when the context was defined.

For a dynamic address, it will be the one assigned during the last PDP context

activation that used the context definition referred to by <cid>. <PDP_addr> is

omitted if none is available.

<cid>: PDP context identifier

range: 1-4

integer type

If no <cid> is specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are returned.

14.18.4. Parameter Storage

None.

14.18.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGPADDR=? +CGAPDDR: (1,2,4)

OK

AT+CGPADDR=2 +CGPADDR=2,"10.3.73.151"

OK

AT+CGPADDR +CGPADDR: 1,

+CGPADDR: 2,"10.3.73.151"

+CGPADDR: 4,

OK

Note: Context 2 is active

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GSM/GPRS Tx Burst Indication +WTBI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 157

14.19. GSM/GPRS Tx Burst Indication +WTBI

14.19.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows enable/disable GSM/GPRS Tx Burst Indication. This

is to use a GPIO pin toggle to inform customer application of coming GPRS Tx burst.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

14.19.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WTBI=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+WTBI?

+WTBI:<mode>

OK

Test command

AT+WTBI=?

+WTBI: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GSM/GPRS Tx Burst Indication +WTBI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 158

14.19.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: enable/disable the Tx burst indication.

0 disable

Note: A reset is needed to take into account the deactivation

1 enable

Note: A reset is not needed to take into account the activation

14.19.4. Parameter Storage

None.

14.19.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WTBI=? +WTBI: (0,1)

OK

AT+WTBI? +WTBI: 0

OK

AT+WTBI=1

Note: Enable the Tx Burst indication

OK

AT+WTBI? +WTBI: 1

OK

AT+WTBI=2 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: Index out of range

14.19.6. Notes

14.19.6.1. Functional description

Burst Indication is provided by the mean of an output (GPIO) signal changing of state before and after

each GSM, GPRS or EDGE TX burst.

Before TX burst rising, a time anticipation is applied to Burst Indication GPIO state change. This

allows enough time for application to switch off peripherals properly.

After TX burst falling, a time delay is applied to Burst Indication GPIO state change. This ensures

current consumption peak required by GSM, GPRS or EDGE activity to be completely finished.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

GSM/GPRS Tx Burst Indication +WTBI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 159

14.19.6.2. Timing Overview

Time distribution of power supply between application peripherals and GSM, GPRS or EDGE

depends on network configuration and traffic. Typical cases and time ranges are derived from GSM

frame interrupt period (4.615 ms) and GPRS slot allocation, as shown hereafter.

GPRS class 8 (4RX/1TX)

GPRS class 6 (3RX/2TX)

GSM/ GPRS class 1(1RX/1TX)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 160

14.20. 3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested)

+CGEQREQ

14.20.1. Description

This command allows the TE to specify a UMTS Quality of Service Profile that is used when the MT

sends an Activate PDP Context Request message to the network.

The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local) context identification

parameter, <cid>. The specified profile will be stored in the MT and sent to the network only at

activation or MS-initiated modification of the related context. Since this is the same parameter that is

used in the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands, the +CGEQREQ command is effectively an

extension to these commands. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which

may be set to a separate value.

A special form of the set command, +CGEQREQ=<cid> causes the requested profile for context

number <cid> to become undefined.

The read command returns the current settings for each defined context.

The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP

types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line.

14.20.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGEQREQ=[<cid>[,<Traffic class>[,<Maximum bitrate UL>[,<Maximum bitrate

DL>[,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>[,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>[,<Delivery order>[,<Maximum

SDU size>[,<SDU error ratio>[,<Residual bit error ratio>[,<Delivery of erroneous

SDUs>[,<Transfer delay>[,<Traffic handling priority>[,<Source statistics

descriptor>[,<Signalling indication>]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 161

Read command

AT+CGEQREQ?

+CGEQREQ: <cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate UL>,<Maximum bitrate

DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery order>,<Maximum SDU

size>,<SDU error ratio>,<Residual bit error ratio> ,<Delivery of erroneous

SDUs>,<Transfer delay>,<Traffic handling priority>,<Source statistics

descriptor>,<Signalling indication>

[<CR><LF>+CGEQREQ: <cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate UL>,<Maximum bitrate

DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery order>,<Maximum SDU

size>,<SDU error ratio>,<Residual bit error ratio>,<Delivery of erroneous

SDUs>,<Transfer delay>,<Traffic handling priority>,<Source statistics

descriptor>,<Signalling indication>[…]]

OK

Test command

AT+CGEQREQ=?

+CGEQREQ: <PDP_type>,(list of supported <Traffic class>s),(list of supported

<Maximum bitrate UL>s),(list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s),(list of supported

<Guaranteed bitrate UL>s),(list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate DL>s),(list of

supported <Delivery order>s),(list of supported <Maximum SDU size>s),(list of

supported <SDU error ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Residual bit error

ratio>s),(list of supported <Delivery of erroneous SDUs>s),(list of supported

<Transfer delay>s),(list of supported <Traffic handling priority>s) ,(list of

supported <Source statistics descriptor>s) ,(list of supported <Signalling

indication>s)

[<CR><LF>+CGEQREQ: <PDP_type>,(list of supported <Traffic class>s) ,(list of

supported <Maximum bitrate UL>s),(list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s),(list of

supported <Guaranteed bitrate UL>s),(list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate

DL>s),(list of supported <Delivery order>s),(list of supported <Maximum SDU

size>s),(list of supported <SDU error ratio>s),(list of supported <Residual bit

error ratio>s),(list of supported <Delivery of erroneous SDUs>s),(list of supported

<Transfer delay>s),(list of supported <Traffic handling priority>s) ,(list of

supported <Source statistics descriptor>s) ,(list of supported <Signalling

indication>s)[…]]

OK

14.20.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<cid>: a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT command)

integer type

<Traffic class>: type of application for which the UMTS bearer service is optimised (please refer to Table

1: UMTS QoS classes)

integer type

0 conversational

1 streaming

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 162

2 interactive

3 background

4 subscribed value (default value)

<Maximum bitrate UL>: maximum number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP

integer type

if the parameter is set to "0", the subscribed value will be requested

this parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or

streaming

0 subscribed maximum bit rate for uplink (default)

65535 0 kbps

1 – 63 in 1 kbps increment

64 – 568 in 8 kbps increments

576 - 8640 in 64 kbps increments

<Maximum bitrate DL>: maximum number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP

integer type

if the parameter is set to "0", the subscribed value will be requested

this parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or

streaming

0 subscribed maximum bit rate for downlink (default value)

65535 0 kbps

1 – 63 in 1 kbps increment

64 – 568 in 8 kbps increments

576 - 8640 in 64 kbps increments

8640 – 16000 in 100 kbps increments

<Guaranteed bitrate UL>: guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that

there is data to deliver)

integer type

if the parameter is set to '"0", the subscribed value will be requested

this parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or

streaming

Note: The Guaranteed bit rate for uplink value is ignored if the Traffic Class is

Interactive class or Background class, or Maximum bit rate for uplink is set to 0

kbps.

0 subscribed maximum bit rate for uplink (default value)

65535 0 kbps

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 163

1 – 63 in 1 kbps increment

64 – 568 in 8 kbps increments

576 - 8640 in 64 kbps increments

<Guaranteed bitrate DL>: guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP (provided

that there is data to deliver)

integer type

if the parameter is set to "0", the subscribed value will be requested

this parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or

streaming

Note: The Guaranteed bit rate for downlink value is ignored if the Traffic Class is

Interactive class or Background class, or Maximum bit rate for downlink is set

to 0 kbps.

0 subscribed maximum bit rate for downlink (default value)

65535 0 kbps

1 – 63 in 1 kbps increment

64 – 568 in 8 kbps increments

576 – 8640 in 64 kbps increments

8640 - 16000 in 100 kbps increments

<Delivery order>: indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not

integer type

0 no

1 yes

2 subscribed value (default value)

<Maximum SDU size>: maximum allowed SDU size in octets

integer type

if the parameter is set to "0", the subscribed value will be requested

0 subscribed maximum SDU size (default value)

10 – 1500 in 10 octets increments

1502

1510

1520

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 164

<SDU error ratio>: target value for the fraction of SDUs lost or detected as erroneous. SDU error ratio is

defined only for conforming traffic. The value is specified as "mEe".

string type

Example: a target SDU error ratio of 1•10-3 would be specified as '1E3' (e.g.

AT+CGEQREQ=…,"1E3",…)

"0E0" 0, subscribed SDU error ratio (default value)

"1E2" 1•10-2

"7E3" 7•10-3

"1E3" 1•10-3

"1E4" 1•10-4

"1E5" 1•10-5

"1E6" 1•10-6

<Residual bit error ratio>: target value for the undetected bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error detection is

requested, Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. The

value is specified as 'mEe'.

string type

Example: a target residual bit error ratio of 5•10-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g.

AT+CGEQREQ=…,"5E3",…)

"0E0" 0, subscribed residual BER (default value)

"5E2" 5•10-2

"1E2" 1•10-2

"5E3" 5•10-3

"4E3" 4•10-3

"1E3" 1•10-3

"1E4" 1•10-4

"1E5" 1•10-5

"1E6" 1•10-6

"6E8" 6•10-8

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 165

<Delivery of erroneous

SDUs>:

indicates whether SDUs detected as erroneous shall be delivered or not

integer type

0 no

1 yes

2 no detect

3 subscribed value (default value)

<Transfer delay>: targeted time between request to transfer an SDU at one SAP to its delivery at the other

SAP, in milliseconds

integer type

Note: The transfer delay value is ignored, if the Traffic Class is Interactive class or

Background class.

0 subscribed transfer delay (default value)

10 – 150 in 10 ms increments

200 – 950 in 50 kbps increments

1000 – 4000 in 100 ms increments

<Traffic handling

priority>:

relative importance for handling of all SDUs belonging to the UMTS bearer compared to

the SDUs of other bearers

integer type

Note: The transfer delay value is ignored if the Traffic Class is Conversation,

Streaming class or Background class.

0 subscribed transfer delay (default value)

1 priority level 1

2 priority level 2

3 priority level 3

<Source statistics

descriptor>:

characteristics of the source of the submitted SDUs for a PDP context

integer type

this parameter should be provided if the Traffic Class is specified as conversation or

streaming

this parameter is ignored if the Traffic Class is Interactive class or Background class

0 characteristics of SDUs is unknown (default value)

1 characteristics of SDUs corresponds to a speech source

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 166

<Signalling Indication>: signaling content of submitted SDUs for a PDP context

integer type

this parameter should be provided if the Traffic Class is specified as interactive

this parameter is ignored if the Traffic Class is Conversational class, Streaming class

or Background class

0 PDP context is not optimized for signalling (default value)

1 PDP context is optimized for signalling <PDP_type>: (see +CGDCONT command)

<PDP type> (Packet Data Protocol type) a string parameter which specifies the type of packet data

protocol

"IP" internet protocol

"PP" point to point protocol

14.20.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command. Default values can be

restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 167

14.20.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGEQREQ=?

Note: Test command

+CGEQREQ: "IP",(0-4),(0-8640,65535),(0-

16000,65535),(0-8640,65535),(0-

16000,65535),(0-2),(0,10-

1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3

","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2","1E2

","5E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8")

,(0-3),(0,10-4000),(0-3),(0-1),(0-1)

+CGEQREQ: "PPP",(0-4),(0-8640,65535),(0-

16000,65535),(0-8640,65535),(0-

16000,65535),(0-2),(0,10-

1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3

","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2","1E2

","5E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8")

,(0-3),(0,10-4000),(0-3),(0-1),(0-1)

OK

AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet";

+CGDCONT=2,"IP","abc.com"

OK

AT+CGEQREQ?

Note: Read command

+CGEQREQ:

1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

+CGEQREQ:

2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

OK

AT+CGEQREQ=1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0",

"0E0",3,0,0,0,0

Note: Specifies a 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1

OK

AT+CGEQREQ?

Note: Read command

+CGEQREQ:

1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

+CGEQREQ:

2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

OK

AT+CGEQREQ=1

Note: Undefined 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1

OK

AT+CGEQREQ?

Note: Undefined 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1

+CGEQREQ:

1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

+CGEQREQ:

2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

OK

AT+CGEQREQ=3,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0

",3,0,0

Note: Specifies a 3G QoS profile for PDP context #3 which

is not defined yet

+CME ERROR: 3

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGEQREQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 168

14.20.6. Notes

Traffic class Conversational

class

conversational

RT

Streaming class

streaming RT

Interactive class

Interactive best

effort

Background

Background best

effort

Fundamental

characteristics

Preserve time

relation (variation)

between information

entities of the

stream

Conversational

pattern (stringent

and low delay )

Preserve time

relation (variation)

between information

entities of the

stream

Request response

pattern

Preserve payload

content

Destination is not

expecting the data

within a certain time

Preserve payload

content

Example of the

application

voice streaming video Web browsing background

download of emails

Table 1: UMTS QoS classes

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)

+CGEQMIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 169

14.21. 3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum

acceptable) +CGEQMIN

14.21.1. Description

This command allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile, which is checked by the MT

against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate/Modify PDP Context Accept message.

The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local) context identification

parameter, <cid>. The specified profile will be stored in the MT and checked against the negotiated

profile only at activation or MS-initiated modification of the related context. Since this is the same

parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands, the +CGEQMIN command

is effectively an extension to these commands. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters,

each of which may be set to a separate value.

A special form of the set command, +CGEQMIN= <cid> causes the minimum acceptable profile for

context number <cid> to become undefined. In this case, no check is made against the negotiated

profile.

The read command returns the current settings for each defined context.

The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP

types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line.

14.21.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGEQMIN=[<cid>[,<Traffic class>[,<Maximum bitrate UL>[,<Maximum bitrate

DL>[,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>[,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>[,<Delivery order>[,<Maximum

SDU size>[,<SDU error ratio>[,<Residual bit error ratio>[,<Delivery of erroneous

SDUs>[,<Transfer delay>[,<Traffic handling priority>[,<Source statistics

descriptor>[,<Signalling indication>]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)

+CGEQMIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 170

Read command

AT+CGEQMIN?

+CGEQMIN: <cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate UL>,<Maximum bitrate

DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery order>,<Maximum SDU

size>,<SDU error ratio>,<Residual bit error ratio> ,<Delivery of erroneous

SDUs>,<Transfer delay>,<Traffic handling priority>,<Source statistics

descriptor>,<Signalling indication>

[<CR><LF>+CGEQMIN: <cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate UL>,<Maximum bitrate

DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery order>,<Maximum SDU

size>,<SDU error ratio>,<Residual bit error ratio>,<Delivery of erroneous

SDUs>,<Transfer delay>,<Traffic handling priority>,<Source statistics

descriptor>,<Signalling indication>[…]]

OK

Test command

AT+CGEQMIN=?

+CGEQMIN: <PDP_type>,(list of supported <Traffic class>s),(list of supported

<Maximum bitrate UL>s),(list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s),(list of supported

<Guaranteed bitrate UL>s),(list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate DL>s),(list of

supported <Delivery order>s),(list of supported <Maximum SDU size>s),(list of

supported <SDU error ratio>s) ,(list of supported <Residual bit error

ratio>s),(list of supported <Delivery of erroneous SDUs>s),(list of supported

<Transfer delay>s),(list of supported <Traffic handling priority>s) ,(list of

supported <Source statistics descriptor>s) ,(list of supported <Signalling

indication>s)

[<CR><LF>+CGEQMIN: <PDP_type>,(list of supported <Traffic class>s) ,(list of

supported <Maximum bitrate UL>s),(list of supported <Maximum bitrate DL>s),(list of

supported <Guaranteed bitrate UL>s),(list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate

DL>s),(list of supported <Delivery order>s),(list of supported <Maximum SDU

size>s),(list of supported <SDU error ratio>s),(list of supported <Residual bit

error ratio>s),(list of supported <Delivery of erroneous SDUs>s),(list of supported

<Transfer delay>s),(list of supported <Traffic handling priority>s) ,(list of

supported <Source statistics descriptor>s) ,(list of supported <Signalling

indication>s)[…]]

OK

14.21.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<cid>: a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands)

integer type

<Traffic class>: type of application for which the UMTS bearer service is optimized. Please refer to Table 1:

UMTS QoS classes for more information on QoS classes

integer type

0 conversational

1 streaming

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)

+CGEQMIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 171

2 interactive

3 background

4 subscribed value (default value)

<Maximum bitrate

UL>:

maximum number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP

integer type

if the parameter is set to "0", the subscribed value will be requested

this parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or

streaming

0 subscribed maximum bit rate for uplink (default value)

65535 0 kbps

1 – 63 in 1 kbps increment

64 – 568 in 8 kbps increments

576 - 8640 in 64 kbps increments

<Maximum bitrate

DL>:

maximum number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP

integer type

if the parameter is set to "0", the subscribed value will be requested

this parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or

streaming

0 subscribed maximum bit rate for downlink (default value)

65535 0 kbps

1 – 63 in 1 kbps increment

64 – 568 in 8 kbps increments

576 - 8640 in 64 kbps increments

8640 - 16000 in 100 kbps increments

<Guaranteed

bitrate UL>:

guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that

there is data to deliver)

integer type

if the parameter is set to '"0", the subscribed value will be requested

this parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or

streaming.

Note: The Guaranteed bit rate for uplink value is ignored if the Traffic Class is

Interactive class or Background class, or Maximum bit rate for uplink is set to 0

kbps.

0 subscribed maximum bit rate for uplink (default value)

65535 0 kbps

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)

+CGEQMIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 172

1 – 63 in 1 kbps increment

64 – 568 in 8 kbps increments

576 - 8640 in 64 kbps increments

<Guaranteed

bitrate DL>:

guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that

there is data to deliver)

integer type

if the parameter is set to "0", the subscribed value will be requested

this parameter should be provided if the Traffic class is specified as conversational or

streaming.

Note: The Guaranteed bit rate for downlink value is ignored if the Traffic Class is

Interactive class or Background class, or Maximum bit rate for downlink is set to

0 kbps.

0 subscribed maximum bit rate for downlink (default value)

65535 0 kbps

1 – 63 in 1 kbps increment

64 – 568 in 8 kbps increments

576 – 8640 in 64 kbps increments

8640 - 16000 in 100 kbps increments

<Delivery order>: indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not

integer type

0 no

1 yes

2 subscribed value (default value)

<Maximum SDU size>: maximum allowed SDU size in octets

integer type

if the parameter is set to "0", the subscribed value will be requested

0 subscribed maximum SDU size (default value)

10 – 1500 in 10 octets increments

1502

1510

1520

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)

+CGEQMIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 173

<SDU error ratio>: target value for the fraction of SDUs lost or detected as erroneous. SDU error ratio is

defined only for conforming traffic. The value is specified as "mEe".

string type

Example: a target SDU error ratio of 1•10-3 would be specified as "1E3" (e.g.

AT+CGEQMIN=…,"1E3",…). "0E0" means subscribed value.

"0E0" 0, subscribed SDU error ratio (default value)

"1E2" 1•10-2

"7E3" 7•10-3

"1E3" 1•10-3

"1E4" 1•10-4

"1E5" 1•10-5

"1E6" 1•10-6

<Residual bit error

ratio>:

target value for the undetected bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error

detection is requested, Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit error ratio in the

delivered SDUs. The value is specified as 'mEe'.

string type

Example: a target residual bit error ratio of 5•10-3 would be specified as "5E3" (e.g.

AT+CGEQMIN=…,"5E3",…)

"0E0" 0, subscribed residual BER (default value)

"5E2" 5•10-2

"1E2" 1•10-2

"5E3" 5•10-3

"4E3" 4•10-3

"1E3" 1•10-3

"1E4" 1•10-4

"1E5" 1•10-5

"1E6" 1•10-6

"6E8" 6•10-8

<Delivery of erroneous

SDUs>:

indicates whether SDUs detected as erroneous shall be delivered or not

integer type

0 no

1 yes

2 no detect

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)

+CGEQMIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 174

3 subscribed value (default value)

<Transfer delay>: targeted time between request to transfer an SDU at one SAP to its delivery at the

other SAP, in milliseconds

integer type

Note: The transfer delay value is ignored, if the Traffic Class is Interactive class

or Background class.

0 subscribed transfer delay (default value)

10 – 150 in 10 ms increments

200 – 950 in 50 ms increments

1000 – 4000 in 100 ms increments

<Traffic handling

priority>:

relative importance for handling of all SDUs belonging to the UMTS bearer

compared to the SDUs of other bearers

integer type

Note: The Traffic handling priority value is ignored, if the Traffic Class is

Conversation, Streaming class or Background class

0 subscribed traffic delay (default value)

1 priority level 1

2 priority level 2

3 priority level 3

<Source statistics

descriptor>

characteristics of the source of the submitted SDUs for a PDP context

integer type

this parameter should be provided if the Traffic Class is specified as

conversation or streaming

this parameter is ignored if the Traffic Class is Interactive class or Background

class

0 characteristics of SDUs is unknown (default value)

1 characteristics of SDUs corresponds to a speech source

<Signalling indication>: signaling content of submitted SDUs for a PDP context

integer type

this parameter should be provided if the Traffic Class is specified as interactive

this parameter is ignored if the Traffic Class is Conversational class, Streaming

class or Background class

0 PDP context is not optimized for signalling (default value)

1 PDP context is optimized for signalling <PDP_type>: (see +CGDCONT

command)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)

+CGEQMIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 175

<PDP type> (Packet Data Protocol type) a string parameter which specifies the type of

packet data protocol

"IP" internet protocol

"PP" point to point protocol

14.21.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command. Default values can be

restored using AT&F.

14.21.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGEQMIN=?

Note: Test command

+CGEQMIN: "IP",(0-4),(0-8640,65535),(0-

16000,65535),(0-8640,65535),(0-16000,65535),(0-

2),(0,10-

1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3","

1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2","1E2","5E3

","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-

3),(0,10-4000),(0-3),(0-1),(0-1)

+CGEQMIN: "PPP",(0-4),(0-8640,65535),(0-

16000,65535),(0-8640,65535),(0-16000,65535),(0-

2),(0,10-

1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3","

1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2","1E2","5E3

","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-

3),(0,10-4000),(0-3),(0-1),(0-1)

OK

AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet";+CGDCONT

=2,"IP","abc.com"

OK

AT+CGEQMIN?

Note: Read command

+CGEQMIN: 1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

+CGEQMIN: 2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

OK

AT+CGEQMIN=1,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E

0",3,0,0,0,0

Note: Set the minimum 3G QoS for Cid=1, Traffic class =

background, Maximum bitrate UL = 32kbit/s, and all

other parameters set to subscribed value

OK

AT+CGEQMIN?

Note: Read command

+CGEQMIN:

1,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

+CGEQMIN: 2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)

+CGEQMIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 176

Command Responses

AT+CGEQMIN=1

Note: Undefined 3G QoS profile (minimum acceptable)

for PDP context #1

OK

AT+CGEQMIN?

Note: Read command

+CGEQMIN: 1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

+CGEQMIN: 2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

OK

AT+CGEQMIN=3,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E

0",3,0,0,0,0

Note: Specifies a 3G QoS profile (minimum acceptable)

for PDP context #3 which is not defined yet

+CME ERROR: 3

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) +CGEQNEG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 177

14.22. 3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated)

+CGEQNEG

14.22.1. Description

This command allows the TE to retrieve the negotiated QoS profiles returned in the Activate PDP

Context Accept message.

The execution command returns the negotiated QoS profile for the specified context identifiers,

<cid>s. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may have a separate

value.

The test command returns a list of <cid>s associated with active contexts.

14.22.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CGEQNEG=[<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]

+CGEQNEG: <cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate UL>,<Maximum bitrate

DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery order>,<Maximum SDU

size>,<SDU error ratio>,<Residual bit error ratio> ,<Delivery of erroneous

SDUs>,<Transfer delay>,<Traffic handling priority>

[<CR><LF>+CGEQNEG: <cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate UL>,<Maximum bitrate

DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery order>,<Maximum SDU

size>,<SDU error ratio>,<Residual bit error ratio>,<Delivery of erroneous

SDUs>,<Transfer delay>,<Traffic handling priority>[…]]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CGEQNEG=?

+CGEQNEG: (list of <cid>s associated with active contexts)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) +CGEQNEG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 178

14.22.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<cid>: a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands)

integer type

<Traffic class>: type of application for which the UMTS bearer service is optimised. Please refer to Table 1:

UMTS QoS classes for more information on QoS classes

integer type

0 conversational

1 streaming

2 interactive

3 background

<Maximum bitrate

UL>:

maximum number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP

integer type

range: 0 to 8640 kbps

<Maximum bitrate

DL>:

maximum number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP

integer type

range: 0 to 16000 kbps

<Guaranteed

bitrate UL>:

guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered to UMTS (up-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that

there is data to deliver)

integer type

range: 0 to 8640 kbps

<Guaranteed

bitrate DL>:

guaranteed number of kbits/s delivered by UMTS (down-link traffic) at a SAP (provided that

there is data to deliver)

integer type

range: 0 to 16000 kbps

<Delivery order>: parameter indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or

not

integer type

0 no

1 yes

<Maximum SDU size>: maximum allowed SDU size in octets

integer type

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) +CGEQNEG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 179

<SDU error ratio>: target value for the fraction of SDUs lost or detected as erroneous. SDU error ratio is

defined only for conforming traffic. The value is specified as "mEe".

string type

Example: a target SDU error ratio of 1•10-3 would be specified as '1E3' (e.g.

AT+CGEQNEG=…,"1E3",…).

"0E0" 0, subscribed SDU error ratio (default value)

"1E2" 1•10-2

"7E3" 7•10-3

"1E3" 1•10-3

"1E4" 1•10-4

"1E5" 1•10-5

"1E6" 1•10-6

<Residual bit error

ratio>:

target value for the undetected bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error

detection is requested, Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit error ratio in the

delivered SDUs. The value is specified as 'mEe'.

string type

Example: a target residual bit error ratio of 5•10-3 would be specified as '5E3' (e.g.

AT+CGEQNEG=…,"5E3",…).

"0E0" 0, subscribed residual BER (default value)

"5E2" 5•10-2

"1E2" 1•10-2

"5E3" 5•10-3

"4E3" 4•10-3

"1E3" 1•10-3

"1E4" 1•10-4

"1E5" 1•10-5

"1E6" 1•10-6

"6E8" 6•10-8

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) +CGEQNEG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 180

<Delivery of erroneous

SDUs>:

parameter indicates whether SDUs detected as erroneous shall be delivered or not

integer type

0 no

1 yes

2 no detect

<Transfer delay>: targeted time between request to transfer an SDU at one SAP to its delivery at the

other SAP, in milliseconds

integer type

range: 10 – 4000 ms

<traffic handling

priority>:

relative importance for handling of all SDUs belonging to the UMTS bearer

compared to the SDUs of other bearers

integer type

1 priority level 1

2 priority level 2

3 priority level 3

14.22.4. Parameter Storage

None.

14.22.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CGEQNEG=?

Note: Test command

+CGEQNEG: "IP",(0-4),(0-8640,65535),(0-

16000,65535),(0-8640,65535),(0-

16000,65535),(0-2),(0,10-

1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3",

"1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2","1E2","5

E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-

3),(0,10-4000),(0-3),(0-1),(0-1)

+CGEQMIN: "PPP",(0-4),(0-8640,65535),(0-

16000,65535),(0-8640,65535),(0-

16000,65535),(0-2),(0,10-

1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3",

"1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2","1E2","5

E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-

3),(0,10-4000),(0-3),(0-1),(0-1)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated) +CGEQNEG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 181

Command Responses

AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet";

+CGDCONT=2,"IP","abc.com"

OK

AT+CGEQMIN?

Note: Read command

+CGEQMIN:

1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

+CGEQMIN:

2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

OK

AT+CGEQMIN=1,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0",

"0E0",3,0,0,0,0

Note: Set the minimum 3G QoS for Cid=1, Traffic

class = background, Maximum bitrate UL = 32kbit/s,

and all other parameters set to subscribed value

OK

AT+CGEQMIN?

Note: Read command

+CGEQMIN:

1,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

+CGEQMIN:

2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

OK

AT+CGEQMIN=1

Note: Undefined 3G QoS profile (minimum

acceptable) for PDP context #1

OK

AT+CGEQMIN?

Note: Read command

+CGEQMIN:

1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

+CGEQMIN:

2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0,0,0

OK

AT+CGEQMIN=3,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0",

"0E0",3,0,0,0,0

Note: Specifies a 3G QoS profile (minimum

acceptable) for PDP context #3 which is not defined

yet

+CME ERROR: 3

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Authentication Protocol AT+WPPP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 182

14.23. Authentication Protocol AT+WPPP

14.23.1. Description

This command will set the authentication protocol. Three options are possible:

• No protocol: No user name and password is used. The PPP connection is established

without authentication.

• PAP Protocol: This is a simple authentication protocol used to authenticate a user before the

network access. The user name and password are sent in plain text for the authentication.

• CHAP protocol: This protocol periodically verifies the identity of the client by using a threeway

handshake. This happens when the link is established, and may happen again at any

time. The verification is based on a shared secret (such as the client user's and password).

The shared password is encrypted before it is sent.

PAP is the default authentication protocol.

14.23.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WPPP=<auth>,[<cid>],[<username],[<password>]

OK

Read command

AT+WPPP?

+WPPP: <auth>,[<cid>],[<username>],[<password>]

OK

Test command

AT+WPPP=?

+WPPP: <list of supported <auth>s>,[<list of supported <cid>s>]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Authentication Protocol AT+WPPP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 183

14.23.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<auth> types of authentication supported

0 none

1 PAP (default)

2 CHAP

<cid>: PDP context identifier used in CGDCONT. If omitted, this configuration will be for all

PDP contexts.

range: 1-4

integer type

<username>: username for CHAP or PAP

string type, maximum of 50 characters

For modules different from Airprime Q26Extreme, If omitted, username will be retrieved

either from PPP connection or Open ATapplication.

Note: This parameter is mandatory for Airprime Q26Extreme module.

<password>: password for CHAP or PAP

string type, maximum of 50 characters

For modules different from Airprime Q26Extreme, If omitted, password will be retrieved

either from PPP connection or Open ATapplication.

Note: This parameter is mandatory for Airprime Q26Extreme module.

14.23.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

GPRS Commands

Authentication Protocol AT+WPPP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 184

14.23.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WPPP=? +WPPP: (0-2),(1-4)

OK

AT+WPPP=2 OK

AT+WPPP=2,1,"myusername","mypassword" OK

Note: Configure PDP context Cid=1 with CHAP protocol and set

username and password.

AT+WPPP? +WPPP: 2,1,"myusername","mypassword"

OK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 185

15. PLMN Commands

15.1. Selection of Preferred PLMN list +CPLS

15.1.1. Description

This command is used to select one PLMN selector with access technology listed in the SIM card that

is used by +CPOL command.

15.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CPLS=<list>

OK

Read command

AT+CPLS?

+CPLS: <list>

OK

Test command

AT+CPLS=?

+CPLS: (list of supported <list>s)

OK

15.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<list>: preferred PLMN list

0 user controlled PLMN selector with access technology EF_PLMNwAct

If this file is not found EF_PLMNSel will be selected.

1 operator controlled PLMN selector with access technology EF_OPLMNwAct

2 home PLMN selector with access technology EF_HPLMNwAct

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Selection of Preferred PLMN list +CPLS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 186

15.1.4. Parameter Storage

None.

15.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPLS?

Note: Ask for selection of the SIM file

+CPLS: 1

OK

Note: EF_OPLMNwAct is selected

AT+CPLS=0

Note: Selection of EF_PLMNwAct

OK

Note: If EF_PLMNwAct is not present, EF_PLMNsel will be

selected

AT+CPLS=1

Note: Selection of EF_OPLMNwAct

+CME ERROR: 3

Note: EF_OPLMNwAct is not present

AT+CPLS=?

Note: Get possible values

+CPLS: (0,1,2)

OK

Note: The 3 files with Access technology are present and

can be selected

AT+CPLS=?

Note: Get possible values

+CPLS: (0)

OK

Note: Only EF_PLMNwAct or EF_PLMNsel can be selected

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Selection of Preferred PLMN list +CPLS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 187

15.1.6. Notes

PLMN Sel PLMNwAct OPLMNwAct HPLMNwAct <list> default

value

X 0

X 0

X 1

X 2

X X 0

X X 0

X X 0

X X X 0

X X X 0

X X 0

X X 0

X X 1

The <list> default value is linked to the SIM file allocation.

The priority is 0 > 1 > 2.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Operator Selection +COPS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 188

15.2. Operator Selection +COPS

Or:

15.2.1. Description

There are three possible ways of selecting an operator (PLMN):

• The product is in manual mode. It then tries to find the operator specified by the application

and if found, tries to register.

• The product is in automatic mode. It then tries to find the home operator and if found, tries to

register. If not found, the product automatically searches for another network.

• The product enters into manual/automatic mode. It tries to find an operator specified by the

application (as in manual mode). If this attempt fails it enters automatic mode. If this is

successful, the operator specified by the application is selected. The mobile equipment then

enters into automatic mode.

Note: The read command returns the current mode and the current selected operator. In manual mode, this

PLMN may not be the one set by the application (as it is in the search phase).

Note: The access technology selected parameter, <AcT>, should only be used in terminals capable to

register to more than one access technology.

The access technology selected parameter, <AcT>, is not applicable in automatic mode (<mode>=0)

Note: These commands are not allowed during communication.

15.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+COPS=<mode>[,<format>[,<oper>[,<AcT>]]]

OK

Read command

AT+COPS?

+COPS: <mode>[,<format>,<oper>[,<AcT>]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Operator Selection +COPS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 189

Test command

AT+COPS=?

+COPS: [list of supported (<stat>,long alphanumeric <oper>,short

alphanumeric <oper>,numeric <oper>[,<AcT>])s]

OK

15.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: network registration mode

0 automatic (default value)

1 manual (<oper> shall be present and <AcT> field is optional)

2 deregistration; ME will be unregistered until <mode>=0 or 1 is selected

3 set only <format> (for read command AT+COPS?)

4 manual/automatic (<oper> shall be present), if manual selection fails, automatic

mode is entered.

<format>: format of <oper> field

0 long alphanumeric format <oper>

1 short alphanumeric format <oper>

2 numeric <oper> (default value)

<stat>: status of <oper> field

0 unknown

1 available

2 current

3 forbidden

<oper>: operator identifier (MCC/MNC in numeric format only for operator selection)

The long alphanumeric format can be up to 16 characters long (for operator names

description see "Operator names" section in the present document "Appendixes";

field is "Name"). The short alphanumeric format can be up to 10 characters long.

<AcT>: access technology selected

0 GSM

2 UTRAN

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Operator Selection +COPS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 190

15.2.4. Parameter Storage

The <format> and <mode> parameters are stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default

values can be restored using AT&F.

Note: The AT+COPS parameter storage information is not applicable for mode 2.

15.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+COPS?

Note: Ask for current PLMN

+COPS: 0,2,45400,2

OK

Note: Home PLMN is HK CSL with access technology UTRAN

AT+COPS=?

Note: Ask for PLMN list

+COPS: (3,"SmarToneVodafone","SMCVoda","

45406",2), (0,"SUNDAY","SUNDAY",

"45419",2),(2,"HK CSL","CSL", "45400",2),(0,"3

HK","3","45403",2)

OK

Note: Home PLMN is CSL, SMC-Voda, Sunday and 3 networks have

been detected

AT+COPS=1,2,45400,2

Note: Ask for registration on SFR network

+CME ERROR: 32

Note: Network not allowed – emergency calls only

AT+COPS=1,2,45406,2

Note: Ask for registration on UK Orange network

+CME ERROR: 529

Note: Selection failed – emergency calls only

AT+COPS=0

Note: Ask for registration in automatic mode

OK

Note: Successful

AT+COPS=3,0

Note: Set <format> to long alphanumeric

OK

Note: Successful

AT+COPS?

Note: Ask for current PLMN

+COPS: 0,0,"HK CSL",2

OK

Note: Home PLMN is HK CSL

AT+COPS=2

Note: Ask for deregistration from network

OK

Note: Successful

AT+COPS?

Note: Ask for current PLMN

+COPS: 2

OK

Note: ME is unregistered until <mode>=0 or 1 is selected

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Operator Selection +COPS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 191

15.2.6. Notes

• If an incoming call occurs during a PLMN list request, the operation is aborted (+CME

ERROR: 520) and the unsolicited RING appears.

• If SPN (Service Provider Name) is present in the SIM, it will be returned in both long and short

alphanumeric <oper> fields. The string in the "short" field will be the SPN truncated to the

appropriate number of characters (10).

• The fact that the network supports emergency call (+CME ERROR: 547) does not imply that

emergency call without SIM is working. The only way to verify this state, is to do ATD112.

• If the PLMN is unknown (meaning not present in the ROM table (see +COPN command), not

present in FLASH (see +WOLM command), and also not present in SIM (E-ONS, ONS...)),

the returned long name is formatted like "MCC XXX MNC YY(Y)" and the returned short

name is formatted like "XXX YY(Y)" where XXX is the MCC (3-digits) and YY(Y) is the MNC

(2-digits or 3-digits).

• Selection of <AcT> does not limit the capability to cell reselections. Though an attempt may

be made to select an access technology, the phone may still reselect a cell in another access

technology.

• The operation not allowed error (+CME ERROR: 3) may be returned for AT+COPS=? if the

protocol stack is currently busy with a different process like an automatic scan.

• On 2G (GSM/GPRS/EDGE) embedded modules, AT+COPS? will not return the current

PLMN if the GPRS module class is "CG" (GPRS only) or if a GPRS only SIM is used.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Preferred Operator List +CPOL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 192

15.3. Preferred Operator List +CPOL

15.3.1. Description

This command is used to edit (or update) the SIM preferred list of networks. This list is read in the SIM

file selected by +CPLS command.

15.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CPOL=[<index>][,<format>[,<oper>[,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcomp_Act>,<Utran_Act>]]]

OK

Read command

AT+CPOL?

+CPOL: <index>,<format>,<oper>[,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcomp_Act>,<Utran_Act>]

[+CPOL: <index>,<format>,<oper>[,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcomp_Act>,<Utran_Act>][…]]

OK

Test command

AT+CPOL=?

+CPOL: (list of supported <index>s),(list of supported <format>s)

OK

15.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<format>: format for <oper> parameter

0 long alphanumeric format for <oper>

1 short alphanumeric format for <oper>

2 numeric format for <oper>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Preferred Operator List +CPOL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 193

<oper>: operator identifier

character string or integer (see <format>)

<GSM_AcT>: GSM access technology

<GSMcomp_Act>: GSM compact access technology

<Utran_Act>:

0 access technology not selected

1 access technology selected

15.3.4. Parameter Storage

None.

15.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPOL?

Note: Ask for preferred list of networks with only EF_PLMNsel

present

+CPOL: 1,2,26201

+CPOL: 6,2,20810

OK

Note: Preferred list of networks in numeric format (read in

EF_PLMNsel)

AT+CPOL?

Note: Ask for preferred list of networks with EF_PLMNwAct

selected and present

+CPOL: 1,2,26201,1,0,0

+CPOL: 6,2,20810,1,0,0

OK

Note: Preferred list of networks in numeric format (read in

EF_PLMNwAct)

GSM access technology selected

GSM compact access technology not selected

Utran access technology not selected

AT+CPOL=,0

Note: Select long alphanumeric format

OK

AT+CPOL?

Note: Ask for preferred list of networks with only EF_PLMNsel

present

+CPOL: 1,0,"D1-TELEKOM"

+CPOL: 6,0,"F SFR"

OK

Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format

AT+CPOL=7,2,20801

Note: Add a network to the list

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Preferred Operator List +CPOL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 194

Command Responses

AT+CPOL?

Note: Ask for preferred list of networks with only EF_PLMNsel

present

+CPOL: 1,0,"D1-TELEKOM"

+CPOL: 6,0,"F SFR"

+CPOL: 7,0,"Orange F"

OK

Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format

AT+CPOL=7

Note: Delete 7th location

OK

AT+CPOL?

Note: Ask for preferred list of networks with only EF_PLMNsel

present

+CPOL: 1,0,"D1-TELEKOM"

+CPOL: 6,0,"F SFR"

OK

Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format

AT+CPOL=8,2,77777

Note: Add a new network to the list with only EF_PLMNsel

present

OK

AT+CPOL=8,2,77777,0,0,1

Note: Add a new network to the list with EF_PLMNwact present

OK

Note: Access technology UTRAN is selected

AT+CPOL=8,2,77777

Note: Add a new network to the list with EF_PLMNwact present

OK

Note: Default access technology GSM is selected

AT+CPOL?

Note: Ask for preferred list of networks with only EF_PLMNsel

present

+CPOL: 1,0,"D1-TELEKOM"

+CPOL: 6,0,"F SFR"

+CPOL: 8,2,77777

OK

Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format

but 8th entry is unknown so the product returns it in the

numeric format

AT+CPOL=9,0,"Orange F"

Note: Add a new network to the list (text format)

OK

AT+CPOL?

Note: Ask for preferred list of networks with only EF_PLMNsel

present

+CPOL: 1,0,"D1-TELEKOM"

+CPOL: 6,0,"F SFR"

+CPOL: 8,2,77777

+CPOL: 9,0,"Orange F"

OK

Note: Preferred list of networks in long.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Preferred Operator List +CPOL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 195

Command Responses

AT+CPOL=? +CPOL: (1-16),(0-2)

OK

Note: The EF can accept 16 records, and supported format

are 0,1 or 2.

15.3.6. Notes

The different possibilities are:

• AT+CPOL=<index>, to delete an entry.

• AT+CPOL=,<format>, to set the format used by the read command (AT+CPOL?).

• AT+CPOL=,<format>,<oper>, to put <oper> in the next free location.

• AT+CPOL=<index>,<format>,<oper>, to write <oper> in the <format> at the <index>.

• AT+CPOL=<index>,<format>,<oper>,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcp_Act>,<Utran_Act>, to write

<oper> in the <format> at the <index> giving the access technology (in the case of

EF_PLMNwact, EF_HPLMNwact or EF_OPLMNwact is present).

Note: If access technology parameters are not given, the GSM access technology will be chosen.

Note: The supported formats are those of the +COPS command. The length of this list is limited to 700

entries for EF_PLMNsel, EF_PLMNwAct, EF_OPLMNwAct and EF_HPLMNwAct.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Operator List Management +WOLM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 196

15.4. Operator List Management +WOLM

15.4.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows a new or modified operator to be added to the

PLMN list. At most 10 PLMNs can be created and stored in the flash memory.

Note that if two entries with the same network (MCC+MNC), but having different names, are entered,

the first one will be taken into account to have the name.

15.4.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WOLM=<mode>,<loc>[,<NumOper>,<short name>,<long name>]

OK

Read command

AT+WOLM?

+WOLM: <loc>,<NumOper>,<short name>,<long name>

[+WOLM: <loc>,<NumOper>,<short name>,<long name>[…]]

OK

Test command

AT+WOLM=?

OK

15.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: request operation

0 delete

1 write

2 read

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Operator List Management +WOLM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 197

<loc>: location

If this parameter is not filled with <mode>=1, the location will be the first empty.

<NumOper>: operator in numeric format: MCC and MNC

<short name>: the short name of the PLMN

<long name>: the long name of the PLMN

15.4.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Operator List Management +WOLM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 198

15.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WOLM=1,1,20812,"WM","WM PLMN"

Note: Add a new PLMN at location 1

OK

AT+WOLM=2,1 +WOLM: 1,20812,"WM","WM PLMN"

Note: Read the PLMN at location 1 OK

AT+WOLM=2,11

Note: Read the PLMN at location 11

+CME ERROR: 21

Note: Invalid index

AT+WOLM=1,1,20812,"WM1","WM1 PLMN"

Note: Modify an existing PLMN

OK

Note: Done

AT+WOLM=?

Note: Test command

OK

AT+WOLM?

Note: Interrogate current list

+WOLM: 1,20812,"WM1","WM1 PLMN"

OK

Note: List of the created PLMNs in flash

AT+WOLM=1,,20813,"PLMN2","PLMN2 LONG"

Note: Add a new PLMN at available location

OK

or

+CME ERROR: 20

Note: <Err> returns if no more PLMNs can be added

AT+WOLM=0,1

Note: Delete an entry at location 1

OK

AT+WOLM=0,11

Note: Delete an entry at location 11

+CME ERROR: 21

Note: Invalid index

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Read Operator Name +WOPN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 199

15.5. Read Operator Name +WOPN

15.5.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows to:

• read the operator name in long alphanumeric format from the numeric format,

• read the operator name in short alphanumeric format from the numeric format,

• erase NITZ PLMN names stored in flash memory,

• configure the method used for getting PLMN names.

15.5.2. Syntax

• For <mode>=0 or 1:

Action command

AT+WOPN=<mode>,<NumOper>[,<lac>]

+WOPN=<mode>,<AlphaOper>

OK

• For <mode>=3:

Action command

AT+WOPN=<mode>,0

OK

• For <mode>=4:

Action command

AT+WOPN=<mode>[,<PlmnMethod>]

[+WOPN: <PlmnMethod>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WOPN=?

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Read Operator Name +WOPN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 200

OK

15.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: requested operation

0 print operator name using long alphanumeric format

1 print operator name using short alphanumeric format

2 reserved for later use

3 erase NITZ PLMN list if <NumOper>=0

4 read or write the method used for getting PLMN names

read access if <PlmnMethod> omitted.

write access if <PlmnMethod> provided.

<NumOper>: operator identifier in numeric format (MCC/MNC)

integer type

<AlphaOper>: operator identifier in long or short alphanumeric format (refer to section "Operator

names" of the Appendixes of the present document for operator names description)

string type

<lac>: location Area Code

string type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3" equals

195 in decimal)

if it is not entered, current LAC will be used (0 if limited service)

<PlmnOns>: method for getting PLMN name

bit field (default value: 31)

bit set to 0: method deactivated

bit set to 1: method activated

Bit 0 E-ONS

Bit 1 CPHS

Bit 2 SPN

Bit 3 NITZ

Bit 4 Flash

15.5.4. Parameter Storage

The <PlmnMethod> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Read Operator Name +WOPN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 201

15.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WOPN=0,20801

Note: Give an operator in numeric format

+WOPN: 0,"Orange F"

OK

Note: Alphanumeric answer

AT+WOPN=3,0

Note: Erase NITZ PLMN names stored in flash memory

OK

AT+WOPN=4 +WOPN: 31

Note: Read from EEPROM which method will be used for

PLMN names.

OK

AT+WOPN=4,0

Note: Write to EEPROM which method will be used for PLMN

names.

OK

15.5.6. Notes

With E-ONS (Enhanced Operator Name Service) feature, <lac> is an optional parameter to read

names from OPL/PNN SIM files.

When the embedded module receives a NITZ (Network Information and Time Zone) message with

Long Name and/or Short Name information, an entry with registered PLMN and names in message is

created in the flash memory. These names will then be used with +COPS, +COPN, +WOPN, +CPOL

commands with the priority order defined in 3GPP TS 22.101. The embedded module supports only

network names with the default GSM alphabet coding scheme.

The priority order is:

1 - E-ONS First entry if on Home PLMN, or existing matching entry in OPL/PNN SIM files

2 - CPHS

if on Home PLMN, use SIM file CPHS ONS (0x6F14) for Long Name if present and

SIM file CPHS SONS (0x6F18) for short name if present (if not, reuse SIM file CPHS

ONS)

3 - SPN If on Home PLMN, use SIM file SPN (0x6F46) if present

4 - NITZ If there is a matching entry in the list of names received so far, use it.

5 - FLASH If there is a matching entry in flash PLMN list (created by +WOLM), use it.

6 - ROM PLMN names in ROM defined according to MoU SE.13 and NAPRD Operator Names

documents

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Read Operator Name +WOPN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 202

For details, please refer to the following diagram:

Once a long name is found following this priority order, it is given as response to AT command.

Refer to 3GPP TS 24.008 [8], 3GPP TS 23.040 [11], 3GPP TS 22.042 [12] and COMMON PCN

HANDSET SPECIFICATION CPHS Phase 2 v4.2 for more information.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Read Operator Name +COPN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 203

15.6. Read Operator Name +COPN

15.6.1. Description

This command returns the list of all operator names (in numeric and alphanumeric format) stored in

the embedded module.

15.6.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+COPN

+COPN: <NumOper>,<AlphaOper>

[+COPN: <NumOper>,<AlphaOper>[…]]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+COPN=?

OK

15.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<NumOper>: operator in numeric format

<AlphaOper>: operator in long alphanumeric format (see section "Operator names" of the

Appendixes for operator names description)

15.6.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Read Operator Name +COPN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 204

15.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+COPN

Note: Ask for list of all networks

+COPN: 20201"GR COSMOTE"

+COPN: 20205"vodafone GR"

+COPN: 20209"GR Q-TELECOM"

+COPN: 20210"TIM GR"

...

OK

AT+COPN=? OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Automatic Time Zone Update +CTZU

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 205

15.7. Automatic Time Zone Update +CTZU

15.7.1. Description

This command is used to enable or disable automatic time zone update via NITZ.

15.7.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CTZU=<Mode>

OK

Read command

AT+CTZU?

+CTZU: <Mode>

OK

Test command

AT+CTZU=?

+CTZU: (list of supported <Mode>s)

OK

15.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Mode>: requested operation

0 disable automatic time zone update via NITZ (default value)

1 enable automatic time zone update via NITZ

15.7.4. Parameter Storage

The <Mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command. The default value can

be restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

PLMN Commands

Automatic Time Zone Update +CTZU

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 206

15.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CTZU=? +CTZU: (0-1)

OK

AT+CTZU? +CTZU: 0

OK

AT+CTZU=1 OK

Note: enable the automatic time zone update

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 2 February 18, 2011 207

Index

A, 64

C, 98

CBST, 86

CCED, 12

CEER, 71

CGACT, 123

CGANS, 131

CGATT, 121

CGAUTO, 133

CGCLASS, 106

CGCMOD, 145

CGDATA, 127

CGDCONT, 118

CGEQMIN, 169

CGEQNEG, 177

CGEQREQ, 160

CGEREP, 150

CGPADDR, 155

CGQMIN, 135

CGQREQ, 140

CGREG, 147

CGSMS, 153

CICB, 77

COPN, 202

COPS, 187

CPLS, 184

CPOL, 191

CR, 81

CRC, 83

CREG, 8

CRLP, 92

CSNS, 79

CSQ, 6

CTZU, 204

D, 52

DL, 62

Dn, 73

DOPT, 94

DR, 102

DS, 100

FCLASS, 96

GH, 129

H, 66

ILRR, 89

N, 104

S0, 75, 130

WAC, 41

WATH, 68

WGPRS, 108

WLOC, 35

WMBS, 27

WOLM, 195

WOPN, 198

WPOW, 48

WPPP, 182

WREGC, 30

WSCAN, 39

WTBI, 157

WUBS, 43

WWSM, 46

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079

019

February 18, 2011

Volume 3

AT Commands Interface Guide

for Firmware 7.45

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 2

Related Documents

This interface specification is based on the following recommendations:

[1] ETSI GSM 07.05: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Use of DTE-DCE

interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)

[2] ETSI GSM 07.07: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); AT command set for GSM

Mobile Equipment (ME)

[3] ITU-T Recommendation V.25 ter: Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control

[4] ETSI GSM 03.40: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Technical implementation

of the Short Message Service (SMS) Point-to-Point (PP)

[5] ETSI GSM 03.38: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Alphabets and languagespecific

information

[6] ETSI GSM 04.80: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2): Mobile radio interface

layer 3, Supplementary service specification, Formats and coding

[7] 3GPP 05.02: 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group GSM/EDGERadio

Access Network; Multiplexing and multiple access on the radio path – 3GPP TS 05.02

V6.9.2 (2001-04)

[8] 3GPP 24.008: Mobile radio interface Layer 3 specification; Core network protocols; Stage 3

[9] 3GPP TS 11.11 Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)

Interface

[10] 3GPP TS 05.08 Radio subsystem link control

[11] 3GPP TS 23.040 Technical realization of the Short Message Service (SMS);

[12] 3GPP TS 22.042 Network Identity and Time Zone (NITZ) service description; Stage 1

[13] 3GPP TS 51.011 Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)

interface

[14] 3GPP TS 27-010 Terminal Equipment to User Equipment (TE-UE) multiplexer protocol

[15] 3GPP 23.014 Support of Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) signaling

[16] ISO 639 Langages Codes

[17] 3GPP 27 060 Packet domain; Mobile Station (MS) supporting Packet Switched services

[18] 3GPP TS 23.038 Alphabets and language-specific information

[19] 3GPP TS 27.005 Use of Data Terminal Equipment - Data Circuit terminating Equipment (DTEDCE)

interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)

[20] ETSI GSM 11.14 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+); Specification of the SIM

Application Toolkit for the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM - ME) interface

[21] 3GPP TS 23.003 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile

Telecommunications System (UMTS); Numbering, addressing and identification

[22] ETSI GSM 02.24 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Description of

Charge Advice Information (CAI)

[23] ETSI GSM 02.86 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Advice of Charge

(AoC) Supplementary Services - Stage 1

[24] ETSI GSM 02.90 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Unstructured

Supplementary Service Data (USSD) - Stage 1

[25] ETSI GSM 02.85 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Closed User

Group (CUG) Supplementary Services - Stage 1

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 3

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

[26] 3GPP 27.007:Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile

Telecommunications System (UMTS);AT command set for 3GPP User Equipment (UE) (Release

1999)

[27] 3GPP 23.107:Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS);QoS Concept and

Architecture (Release 1999)

[28] 3GPP 24.008: European digital cellular telecommunication system (Phase 2+). Mobile radio

interface layer 3 specification. (Release 1999)

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 4

Contents

Volume 3

16.PHONEBOOKS COMMANDS..............................................................................6

16.1. Select Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS.....................................................................6

16.2. Contact Selector +WCOS..................................................................................................9

16.3. Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW .....................................................................................11

16.4. Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR ...................................................................................17

16.5. Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF .....................................................................................22

16.6. Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP .................................................................................26

16.7. Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN ................................................................................31

16.8. Create and Delete a Phonebook Group +WPGW...........................................................36

16.9. Read a Phonebook Group +WPGR ................................................................................38

16.10. Settings of a Group +WPGS ...........................................................................................43

16.11. Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP....................................................................................45

16.12. Subscriber Number +CNUM ...........................................................................................47

16.13. Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM......................................................................................49

16.14. Avoid Phonebook Init +WAIP ..........................................................................................51

17.SHORT MESSAGE COMMANDS......................................................................53

17.1. Select Message Service +CSMS ....................................................................................53

17.2. New Message Indication +CNMI.....................................................................................55

17.3. Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP................................................................................62

17.4. Preferred Message Format +CMGF................................................................................65

17.5. Preferred Message Storage +CPMS...............................................................................67

17.6. Service Center Address +CSCA .....................................................................................70

17.7. Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH ............................................................................72

17.8. More Messages to Send +CMMS ...................................................................................74

17.9. Send Message +CMGS...................................................................................................76

17.10. Write Message to Memory +CMGW ...............................................................................79

17.11. Send Message From Storage +CMSS............................................................................82

17.12. Read Message +CMGR ..................................................................................................84

17.13. List Message +CMGL......................................................................................................89

17.14. Delete Message +CMGD ................................................................................................95

17.15. New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA .....................................................................98

17.16. Message Status Modification +WMSC..........................................................................101

17.17. Un-change SMS Status +WUSS...................................................................................103

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 5

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

17.18. Message Overwriting +WMGO .....................................................................................105

17.19. Copy Messages +WMCP..............................................................................................107

17.20. Save Settings +CSAS ...................................................................................................110

17.21. Restore Settings +CRES...............................................................................................111

17.22. Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB ............................................................112

17.23. Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM ................................................................115

18.SIM COMMANDS.............................................................................................117

18.1. Card Identification +CCID..............................................................................................117

18.2. Request IMSI +CIMI ......................................................................................................119

18.3. Generic SIM Access +CSIM..........................................................................................121

18.4. Restricted SIM Access +CRSM ....................................................................................124

18.5. Write Language Preference +WLPW............................................................................127

18.6. Read Language Preference +WLPR.............................................................................130

19.SIM TOOLKIT COMMANDS ............................................................................133

19.1. Overview of SIM Application ToolKit .............................................................................133

19.2. SIM ToolKit Set Facilities +STSF..................................................................................136

19.3. SIM ToolKit Indication +STIN ........................................................................................139

19.4. SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI ..............................................................................142

19.5. SIM ToolKit Give Response +STGR.............................................................................152

19.6. SIM ToolKit Control Response +STCR.........................................................................157

19.7. SIM ToolKit Indication +STRIL ......................................................................................159

20.SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES COMMANDS ................................................161

20.1. List Current Calls +CLCC..............................................................................................161

20.2. Call Related Supplementary Services +CHLD..............................................................164

20.3. Calling Line Identification Presentation +CLIP..............................................................167

20.4. Calling Line Identification Restriction +CLIR.................................................................170

20.5. Connected Line Identification Presentation +COLP......................................................172

20.6. Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN ...............................................................175

20.7. Unstructured Supplementary Service Data +CUSD .....................................................179

20.8. Call Forwarding +CCFC ................................................................................................182

20.9. Call Waiting +CCWA.....................................................................................................186

20.10. Keypad Control +CKPD.................................................................................................189

20.11. Advice Of Charge +CAOC ............................................................................................191

20.12. Accumulated Call Meter +CACM ..................................................................................193

20.13. Accumulated Call Meter Maximum+CAMM ..................................................................195

20.14. Price per UNIT and Currency Table +CPUC.................................................................197

20.15. Closed User Group +CCUG..........................................................................................199

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 6

16. Phonebooks Commands

16.1. Select Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS

16.1.1. Description

This command selects phonebook memory storage.

Please refer to Recommendation 3GPP 11.11 [9] for more details.

16.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CPBS=<storage>[,<pin2>]

OK

Read command

AT+CPBS?

+CPBS: <storage>,<used>,<total>

OK

Test command

AT+CPBS=?

+CPBS: (list of supported <storage>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Select Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 7

16.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<storage>: phonebook memory storage

"SM" ADN Abbreviated Dialing Numbers (SIM phonebook)

"FD" FDN Fixed Dialing Numbers (SIM restricted phonebook)

"ON" MSISDN (SIM own numbers)

"EN" ECC Emergency Call Codes (SIM or ME)

"LD" LND Last Number Dialed

"MC" ME missed (unanswered received) calls list

"ME" ME phonebook

"MT" combined ME and SIM phonebook (ME+SM)

"RC" ME received calls list

"SN" SDN Service Dialing Numbers (SIM special service numbers)

<pin2>: Personal Identification Number 2.

<used>: used locations in selected memory

integer type

<total> : total number of locations in selected memory

integer type

16.1.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Select Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 8

16.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPBS="SM" OK

Note: Select ADN phonebook Note: ADN phonebook is selected

AT+CPBS=? +CPBS:

("SM","LD","MC","ON","ME","RC","MT","SN","EN")

Note: Possible values OK

AT+CPBS? +CPBS: "SM",10,20

OK

Note: Get current phonebook memory storage Note: ADN phonebook selected, 10 locations used, 20 locations

available

16.1.6. Notes

On ADN and FDN activation: when FDN has been activated with the +CLCK command, the selection

of ADN phonebook is possible only if ADN status bit3 is set to 1 (EF file "readable and updatable

when invalidated").

Selection of ADN phonebook when FDN is active is SIM dependent.

Selection of "FD" phonebook with <pin2>, when <pin2> is already verified, will give "+CME ERROR:

3".

The previously selected phonebook remains the same when the embedded module is switched on or

reset, even if a new SIM card is inserted. However, in the case when the replacement SIM card does

not contain any selected phonebook, the ADN phonebook is selected.

The maximum number of entries for ME phonebook is set to 500.

When the SIM is not present, the following emergency numbers are available: 000, 08, 112, 110, 118,

119, 911, 999.

When a SIM is present, the following emergency numbers are available: 112, 911, emergency

numbers from ECC SIM files (if existing).

The following emergency numbers are stored in EEPROM:

• 112

• 911

• 999

• 08

So, "EN" will be available even if ECC SIM file is not present.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Contact Selector +WCOS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 9

16.2. Contact Selector +WCOS

16.2.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows extended contact display to be enabled\disabled.

16.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WCOS=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+WCOS?

+WCOS: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+WCOS=?

+WCOS: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

16.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: extended contact mode

0 select the SIM contacts (default mode)

1 select the extended contacts for phonebook entries

2 reserved

Customer application should not use this value.

16.2.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Contact Selector +WCOS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 10

16.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WCOS=?

Note: Possible values ?

+WCOS: (0-2)

OK

Note: Possible responses

AT+WCOS=1

Note: Extended contact selected

OK

AT+WCOS?

Note: Test command

+WCOS: 1

OK

Note: Extended contact selected

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 11

16.3. Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW

16.3.1. Description

This command writes a phonebook entry in an index location number of the current phonebook

memory storage.

16.3.2. Syntax

Depending on the context several possibilities:

• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:

Action command

AT+CPBW=[<index>][,<number>[,<type>[,<text>]]]

OK

• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1:

Action command

AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text>[,<phb_group>]]]]

OK

• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:

Action command

AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text>]]]

OK

• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=1:

Action command

AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text>[,<contact>[,<phb_group>]]]]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 12

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CPBW=?

+CPBW: (list of supported <index>s),[<nlength>],(list of supported

<type>s),[<tlength>]

OK

16.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<index>: location in memory storage

range of possible values depending on the capacity of the phonebook memory

integer type

<number>: phone number in ASCII format

string type

<type>: TON/NPI (type of address octet in integer format); default 145 when dialing string

includes international access code character “+”, otherwise 129

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<text>: associated contact name

string type (see Note below)

SIM dependant for the ADN phonebook (use AT+CPBW=?)

<phb_group>: phonebook group number in which the entry should be saved

range value (1-10)

<nlength>: max length of field <number>

integer type

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 13

<tlength>: max length of field <text>

integer type

<contact>: This parameter gathers the following parameters:

<num_Mobile>, <num_Work>, <num_Fax>, <num_Data>, <Email>, <Address>

<num_Mobile>: phone number (dedicated for mobile phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Work>: phone number (dedicated for work phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Fax>: phone number (dedicated for fax phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Data>: phone number (dedicated for data phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<Email>: e-mail address

string type

up to 56 characters

<Address>: mail address

string type

up to 56 characters

Note: For the <text> parameter all strings starting with "80" , "81" or "81" are considered in UCS2 format.

The +CSCS (Select Character Set) command does not affect the format for phonebook entries.

16.3.4. Parameter Storage

None.

16.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPBS="SM"

Note: ADN phonebook

OK

AT+CPBS?

Note: Get current memory storage

+CPBS:"SM",1,10

OK

Note: ADN phonebook is selected, 1 location is used and 10

locations are available

AT+WCOS=0

Note: Phonebook not extended

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 14

Command Responses

AT+CPBW=?

Note: Test command

+CPBW: (1-50),20,(128-255),10

OK

Note: 50 locations, phone number = 20 digits max, TON/NPI = 128-

255, text length = 10 character max

AT+CPBW=5,"112",129,"SOS"

Note: Write at location 5

OK

Note: Location 5 written

AT+CPBR=5

Note: Read the entry at location 5

+CPBR: 5,"112",129,"SOS"

OK

AT+CPBS?

Note: Get current memory storage

+CPBS: "SM",2,10

OK

Note: ADN phonebook is selected, 2 locations are used and 10

locations are available

AT+CPBW=5,"01290917",129,"Jacky"

Note: Overwrite location 5

OK

Note: Location 5 overwritten

AT+CPBW=6,"01292349",129,"8000410042" OK

Note: Write location 6 (UCS2 format for the<text> field) Note: Location 6 is written

AT+CPBW=8,"01292349",129,"80xyz"

Note: Write location

OK

Note: Location 8 is written. The string has a wrong UCS2 format, it

is therefore considered as an ASCII string.

AT+CPBW=5,"01290917",129,"Jacky",1 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: Write an extended entry Note: Error because +WCOS: 0

AT+WCOS=1

Note: Phonebook extended

OK

AT+CPBW=5,""01290917"",129,"Jacky",1

Note: Write an extended entry

OK

AT+WCOS=0

Note: Phonebook not extended

OK

AT+CPBS="ME"

Note: ME phonebook

OK

AT+CPBS?

Note: How many entries are used ?

+CPBS: "ME",2,500

Note: in ME phonebook, 2 locations are used out of 500 available

locations

AT+CPBW=1,"0123456798",129,"first entry"

Note: Write an not extended entry

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 15

Command Responses

AT+CPBR=1

Note: Read the first entry

+CPBR: 1,"0123456798",129,"first entry"

OK

AT+WCOS=1

Note: Phonebook extended

OK

AT+CPBW=1,"0123456798",129,"first entry"

Note: Write an entry not extended

OK

AT+CPBW=2,"9876543210",129,"secondentry"

,"6543210987",129

Note: Write an entry extended

OK

AT+CPBR=1,2

Note: Read entry 1 and 2

+CPBR: 1,"0123456798",129,"first

entry","",128,"",128,"",128,"",128,"","",0

+CPBR: 2,"9876543210",129,"second

entry","6543210987",129,"",128,"",128,"",128

,"","",0

OK

AT+CPBW=13,"+331290909",145,"Fred","0141

284549",129,"0600003210",129,"0141280000

",129,"019876543210",

129,"fred@mail_address.com", "Becker

Street London",1

Note: Write location with Contact and Phonebook Group nฐ1

OK

Note: Location 13 is written

AT+CPBW=,"+33145221100",145,"SOS"

Note: Write at the first location available

OK

Note: First location available is written

AT+CPBS="SM"

Note: ADN phonebook

OK

AT+WCOS? +WCOS: 1

OK

Note: Extended phonebook

AT+CPBW=1

Note: Delete entry at first location

OK

AT+CPBW=1,"0123456",,"test",1

Note: Add an extended entry in SIM with group number (1)

OK

AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR:1,"0123456",129,"test",1

OK

AT+CPBW=1,””,,”No number”

Note : Write an empty number. The TON/NPI is omitted

OK

AT+CPBW=2,”7654321”,161,”test2”,1 OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 16

Command Responses

AT+CPBR=2 +CPBR:2,"7654321",161,"test2",1

OK

16.3.6. Notes

• This command is not allowed when the fixed dialing phonebook (FDN) is locked. Moreover,

when the FDN is unlocked, PIN2 is required to write in the FDN phonebook. If PIN2

authentication has been performed during the current session, the +CPBW command with

FDN is allowed.

• "RC" and "MC" phonebooks can only be erased by using +CPBW. Adding field and/or

modifying field is not allowed for these phonebooks.

• This command is not allowed for "EN", "LD", "MC", "RC", "MT", "SN" phonebooks, which can

not be written.

• If the AT+WCOS=1 command was used, the request would include the ‘Contact’ structure.

• When an empty number is written, the <type> parameter should be omitted. When this entry

is read, the <type> in the response is equal to 128 (unknown) (see +CPBR command).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 17

16.4. Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR

16.4.1. Description

This command returns phonebook entries for a range of locations from the current phonebook

memory storage selected with +CPBS.

16.4.2. Syntax

Depending on the context several possibilities:

• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:

Action command

AT+CPBR=<first_entry>[,<last_entry>]

+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>

[+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>[…]]

OK

• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1:

Action command

AT+CPBR=<first_entry>[,<last_entry>]

+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<phb_group>

[+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<phb_group>[…]]

OK

• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:

Action command

AT+CPBR=<first_entry>[,<last_entry>]

+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>

[+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>[…]]

OK

• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=1:

Action command

AT+CPBR=<first_entry>[,<last_entry>]

+CPBR:<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<contact>,<phb_group>

[+CPBR:<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<contact>,<phb_group>[…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 18

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CPBR=?

+CPBR: (list of supported <loc>s),<nlength>,<tlength>

OK

16.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<first_entry>: first location (or range of locations) where to read phonebook entry

<last_entry>: last location (or range of locations) where to read phonebook entry

<type>: TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<nlength>: value indicating the maximum length of field <num>

integer type

<tlength>: value indicating the maximum length of field <name>

integer type

<loc>: phonebook index

integer type

<phb_group>: phonebook group

range value (1-10)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 19

<num>: phone number

string type

<name>: name associated with the phone number

up to 30 ASCII characters or 13 UCS2

<contact>: this parameter gathers the following parameters:

<num_Mobile>, <num_Work>, <num_Fax>, <num_Data>,

<Email>,<Address>

<num_Mobile>: phone number (dedicated for mobile phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Work>: phone number (dedicated for work phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Fax>: phone number (dedicated for fax phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Data>: phone number (dedicated for data phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<Email>: e-mail address

string type

up to 56 characters

<Address>: mail address

string type

up to 56 characters

16.4.4. Parameter Storage

None.

16.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPBR=? +CPBR: (1-50),20,10

OK

Note: Test command Note: 50 locations (from 1 to 50), max length for phone number is

20 digits, 10 characters max for name

AT+WCOS? +WCOS: 0

OK

Note: Test command Note: Contact not selected

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 20

Command Responses

AT+CPBR=12,14 +CPBR: 12,"112",129,"Emergency"

+CPBR: 13,"+331290909",145,"Fred"

+CPBR: 14,"0146290808",129,"Zazi"

OK

Note: Read entries from 12 to 14 Note: Display locations 12,13,14 with location, number, type

(TON/NPI), name

AT+CPBR=10 +CPBR: 10,"0146290921",129,"Rob"

OK

Note: Read entry 10 Note: Display location 10

AT+CPBR=11 +CPBR: 11,"0146290921",129,"8000010002FFFF"

OK

Note: Read entry 11 (UCS2 format) Note: Display location 11

AT+CPBS="ME"

Note: Flash memory

OK

AT+WCOS=1 OK

Note: Contact selected

AT+CPBR=13 +CPBR:

13,"+331290909",145,"Fred","0141284549",129,

"0600003210",129

,"0141280000",129,"019876543210",129,"fred@m

ail_address.com","Becker Street London",1

OK

Note: Read entry Note: Display location 13 with location, number, type (TON/NPI),

name and contact and phonebook group nฐ1

AT+CPBS="SM"

Note: ADN phonebook

OK

AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR=1,"0123456",129,"test"

OK

AT+WCOS=0 OK

AT+CPBW=1,””,,”No number” OK

AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR: 1,””,128,”No number”

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 21

16.4.6. Notes

• For all phonebook read commands (+CPBR, +CPBF, +CPBN, +CPBP, +CNUM), the

TON/NPI MSB of each number is set to 1 (ex: a TON/NPI stored as 17 is displayed as 145).

• If the AT+WCOS=1 command was used, the response will include <Contact> structure.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 22

16.5. Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF

16.5.1. Description

This command returns phonebook entries with alphanumeric fields starting with a given pattern. The

AT+CPBF="" command can be used to display all phonebook entries sorted in alphabetical order.

This command is not allowed for "LD", "RC", "MC" phonebooks and for the "EN" phonebook, which

does not contain alphanumeric fields.

It is possible to use this command with UCS2 strings. If a wrong UCS2 format is entered, the string is

considered as an ASCII string.

16.5.2. Syntax

Depending on the context several responses to the command are possible:

• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:

Action command

AT+CPBF=<string>

+CPBF: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>

OK

• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1

Action command

AT+CPBF=<string>

+CPBF: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<phb_group>

OK

• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=0

Action command

AT+CPBF=<string>

+CPBF: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 23

• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=1

Action command

AT+CPBF=<string>

+CPBF: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<contact>,<phb_group>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CPBF=?

+CPBF: [<nlength>],[<tlength>],[<glength>],[<slength>],[<elength>]

OK

16.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<string>: searched pattern string (depends on the format of data stored in the phonebooks)

<loc>: location number (20 digits max)

<num>: phone number (20 digits max)

<type>: TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<phb_group>: phonebook group

range value (1-10)

<name>: name associated with the phone number .

up to 30 ASCII characters or 13 UCS2

<contact>: this parameter gathers the following parameters:

<num_Mobile>, <num_Work>, <num_Fax>, <num_Data>, <Email>,<Address>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 24

<num_Mobile>: phone number (dedicated for mobile phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Work>: phone number (dedicated for work phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Fax>: phone number (dedicated for fax phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Data>: phone number (dedicated for data phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<Email>: e-mail address

string type

up to 56 characters

<Address>: mail address

string type

up to 56 characters

16.5.4. Parameter Storage

None.

16.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPBF=? +CPBF: 20,14

OK

Note: Test command Note: Max length for phone number is 20 digits, 14 characters for the text

AT+CPBF="E" +CPBF: 12,"112",129,"Emergency"

+CPBF: 15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"

OK

Note: Read entries with "E" Note: Display locations with text field starting with "E"

AT+CPBF="H"

Note: Read entries with "H"

+CME ERROR: 22

Note: No entry found

AT+CPBF="800001" +CPBF: 11,"0146290921",129,"8000010002FFFF"

OK

Note: Read entries starting with 0001 UCS2

character

Note: Display locations with text field starting with 0001 UCS2 character

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 25

Command Responses

AT+CPBF="8045C"

Note: Read entries with "8045C" (ASCII format)

+CME ERROR: 22

Note: No entry found. The string has a wrong UCS2 format, it is therefore

considered as an ASCII string

AT+CPBS="SM"

Note: ADN phonebook

OK

AT+WCOS=0

Note: Phonebook not extended

OK

AT+CPBF="Test"

Note: Read entries with "Test"

+CPBF: 1,"0123456789",129,"Test ADN"

Note: Display locations with text field starting with "Test"

AT+WCOS=1

Note: Phonebook extended

OK

AT+CPBF="Test"

Note: Read entries with "Test"

+CPBF: 1,"0123456789",129,"Test ADN",0

Note: Display locations with text field starting with "Test" extended entry

AT+CPBS="ME"

Note: Flash phonebook

OK

AT+WCOS=0

Note: Phonebook not extended

OK

AT+CPBF="Test"

Note: Read entries with "Test"

+CPBF: 1,"0123456789",129,"Test ME"

Note: Display locations with text field starting with "Test"

AT+WCOS=1

Note: Phonebook extended

OK

AT+CPBF="Test" +CPBF: 1,"0123456789",129,"Test

ME","9876543210",129,"",128,"",128,"",128,"e_mail@ma

il_address.com",

"post address",0

Note: Read entries with "Test" Note: Display locations with text field starting with "Test", extended entry

AT+WCOS=0 OK

AT+CPBW=1,"",,"No number" OK

AT+CPBF="No number" +CPBF: 1,"",128,"No number"

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 26

16.6. Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP

16.6.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command orders the product to search in the phonebook for an item

with the same phone number as provided in the parameter.

If two different entries of the selected phonebook have the same number, the entry returned by

+CPBP command is the first one written using +CPBW command..

16.6.2. Syntax

Depending on the context several responses to the command are possible:

• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:

Action command

AT+CPBP=<number>

+CPBP: <index>,<number>,<type>,<text>

OK

• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1

Action command

AT+CPBP=<number>

+CPBP: <index>,<number>,<type>,<text>,<phb_group>

OK

• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=0

Action command

AT+CPBP=<number>

+CPBP: <index>,<number>,<type>,<text>

OK

• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=1

Action command

AT+CPBP=<number>

+CPBP: <index>,<number>,<type>,<text>,<contact>,<phb_group>

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 27

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CPBP=?

+CPBP: (list of supported <index>s),<nlength>,<tlength>

OK

16.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<index>: location in memory storage

range of possible values depending on the capacity of the phonebook memory

integer type

<number>: phone number in ASCII format

string type

<type>: TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 28

<text>: associated contact name

string type (see note below)

SIM dependant for the ADN phonebook (use AT+CPBW=?)

<phb_group>: phonebook group number

range value (1-10)

<nlength>: max length of field <number>

integer type

<tlength>: max length of field <text>

integer type

<contact>: this parameter gathers the following parameters:

<num_Mobile>, <num_Work>, <num_Fax>, <num_Data>, <Email>,<Address>

<num_Mobile>: phone number (dedicated for mobile phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Work>: phone number (dedicated for work phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Fax>: phone number (dedicated for fax phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Data>: phone number (dedicated for data phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<Email>: e-mail address

string type

up to 56 characters

<Address>: mail address

string type

up to 56 characters

16.6.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 29

16.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPBP=?

Note: Test command

+CPBP: (1-50),20,10

OK

Note: 50 locations (from 1 to 50), max length for phone number is

20 digits, max length for text is 10 characters

AT+CPBP="+331290101" +CPBP: 15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"

OK

Note: Search entries corresponding to this phone

number

Note: Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone

number

AT+CPBP="01290202"

Note: Search entries corresponding to this phone

number

+CPBP: 15,"+331290202",145,"David"

OK

Note: Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone

number

AT+CPBP="+331288575" +CPBP: 15,"+331290101",145,"8045682344FFFF"

OK

Note: Search entries corresponding to this phone

number

Note: Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone

number (UCS2 format)

AT+CPBS="SM"

Note: ADN phonebook

OK

AT+WCOS=0

Note: Phonebook not extended

OK

AT+CPBP="0123456789"

Note: Search entries corresponding to this phone

number

+CPBP: 1,"0123456789",129,"Test ADN"

OK

Note: Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone

number

AT+WCOS=1

Note: Phonebook extended

OK

AT+CPBP="0123456789"

Note: Search entries corresponding to this phone

number

+CPBP: 1,"0123456789",129,"Test ADN",0

OK

AT+CPBS="ME"

Note: ME phonebook

OK

AT+WCOS=0

Note: Phonebook not extended

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 30

Command Responses

AT+CPBP="0123456789"

Note: Search entries corresponding to this phone

number

+CPBP: 1,"0123456789",129,"Test ME"

OK

AT+WCOS=1

Note: Phonebook extended

OK

AT+CPBP="0123456789"

Note: Search entries corresponding to this phone

number

+CPBP: 1,"0123456789",129,"Test

ME","9876543210",129,"",128,"",128,"",128,"e

_mail@somewhere.com","postal address",0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 31

16.7. Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN

16.7.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command performs a forward or backward move in the phonebook (in

alphabetical order). It is not allowed for the "EN" phonebook which does not contain alphanumeric

fields.

16.7.2. Syntax

Depending on the context, several responses to the command are possible:

• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:

Action command

AT+CPBN=<mode>

+CPBN: <index>,<number>,<type>,<name>

OK

• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1

Action command

AT+CPBN=<mode>

+CPBN: <index>,<number>,<type>,<name>,<phb_group>

OK

• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=0

Action command

AT+CPBN=<mode>

+CPBN: <index>,<number>,<type>,<name>

OK

• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=1

Action command

AT+CPBN=<mode>

+CPBN: <index>,<number>,<type>,<name>,<contact>,<phb_group>

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 32

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CPBN=?

+CPBN: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

16.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: requested entry to be displayed

0 first item

1 last item

2 next valid item in alphabetical order

3 previous valid item in alphabetical order

4 last item read (usable only if a read operation has been performed on the current

phonebook)

5 last item written (usable only if a write operation has been performed on the

current phonebook)

<index>: location in memory storage

range of possible values depending on the capacity of the phonebook memory

integer type

<number>: phone number in ASCII format

string type

<type>: TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 33

<phb_group>: phonebook group number

range :1-10

<name>: name of the group.

up to 30 ASCII characters or 13 UCS2

<contact>: this parameter gathers the following parameters:

<num_Mobile>, <num_Work>, <num_Fax>, <num_Data>, <Email>,<Address>

<num_Mobile>: phone number (dedicated for mobile phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Work>: phone number (dedicated for work phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Fax>: phone number (dedicated for fax phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Data>: phone number (dedicated for data phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<Email>: e-mail address

string type

up to 56 characters

<Address>: mail address

string type

up to 56 characters

16.7.4. Parameter Storage

None.

16.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPBN=? +CPBN: (0-5)

OK

Note: Possible modes

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 34

Command Responses

AT+CPBS="SM"

Note: ADN phonebook

OK

AT+WCOS=0

Note: Phonebook not extended

OK

AT+CPBN=0 +CPBN: 15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"

OK

Note: Read the first location Note: Display the first location

AT+WCOS=1

Note: Phonebook extended

OK

AT+CPBN=2 +CPBN: 5,"+33147658987",145,"Frank",0

OK

Note: Read the next location Note: Display the second location, extended entry

AT+CPBN=2

Note: Read the next location

+CPBN: 6,"+331290302",145,"Marc",0

OK

Note: Display the third location, extended entry

AT+WCOS=0

Note: Phonebook not extended

OK

AT+CPBN=3 +CPBN: 5,"+33147658987",145,"Frank"

OK

Note: Read the previous location Note: Display the second location

AT+CPBN=1

Note: Read the last location

+CPBN: 6,"+331290302",145,"Marc"

OK

Note: Display the last location

AT+CPBN=2

Note: Read the next location

+CPBN: 15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"

OK

Note: Display the first location

AT+CPBF="Er"

Note: Find "Er" in phonebook

+CPBF: 15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"

OK

Note: Display the location

AT+CPBN=2

Note: Read the next location

+CPBN: 5,"+33147658987",145,"Frank"

OK

Note: Display the following location

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 35

Command Responses

AT+CPBF="Er"

Note: Find "Er" in phonebook

+CPBF: 15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"

OK

Note: Display the location

AT+CPBN=4

Note: Get the last location read

+CPBN: 15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"

OK

Note: Display the last location read

AT+CPBW=,"0146290800",129,"WM"

Note: Write an item at the first location available

OK

Note: No information about this location

AT+CPBN=4

Note: Get the last location read

+CPBN: 15,"+331290101",145,"Eric"

OK

Note: Display the last location read

AT+CPBN=5

Note: Display the last item written with its

location

+CPBN: 38,"0146290800",129,"WM"

OK

Note: Display the last item written with its

location

AT+CPBN=4

Note: Get the last item read

+CPBN: 38,"0146290800,129,"WM"

OK

Note: Now the last item read is the last written item too

AT+CPBF="800041FFFF"

Note: Find"800041" in phonebook

+CPBF: 15,"+3312345",145,"8000414339FFFF"

OK

Note: Display this location

AT+CPBN=4

Note: Get the last location read

+CPBN: 15,"+3312345",145,"8000414339FFFF"

OK

Note: Display the last location read Please note that the

AT+CPBN=5 command is useful after an AT+CPBW command

used without a location.

16.7.6. Notes

The AT+CPBN=5 command is useful after an AT+CPBW command used without a location.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Create and Delete a Phonebook Group +WPGW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 36

16.8. Create and Delete a Phonebook Group

+WPGW

16.8.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command creates or deletes a phonebook group.

16.8.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WPGW=<phb_group>[,<name>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WPGW=?

+WPGW: (list of supported <index>s),<tlength>

OK

16.8.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<phb_group>: phonebook group number

range value (1-10)

<name>: name of the group.

up to 30 ASCII characters or 13 UCS2

<tlength>: value indicating the maximum length of field <name>

integer type

16.8.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Create and Delete a Phonebook Group +WPGW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 37

16.8.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WPGW=?

Note: Test command

+WPGW: (1-10),30

OK

Note: 10 possible groups, group name can be 30 characters max

AT+WPGW=1,"group 1"

Note: Create group #1

OK

Note: Group 1 created

AT+WPGW=1,"phb group1"

Note: Rename group #1

OK

Note: Group 1 renamed

AT+WPGW=1 OK

Note: Erase group #1

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Read a Phonebook Group +WPGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 38

16.9. Read a Phonebook Group +WPGR

16.9.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command reads the phonebook group entries, the phonebook group

name or the number of entries used in a group.

16.9.2. Syntax

Depending on the mode, several syntaxes are available for the action command:

• <mode>= 1, 2

Action command

AT+WPGR=<mode>[,<group index>]

+WPGR: <group index>,<group name>

[+WPGR: <group index>,<group name>[…]]

OK

• <mode>= 3

Action command

AT+WPGR=<mode>,<group index>

+WPGR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>[,<contact>][,<phb_group>]

[+WPGR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>[,<contact>][,<phb_group>][…]]

OK

Note: The response syntax is the same as +CPBR (refer to +CPBR command for more details.

<Contact> field is returned only if the entry is stored in ME phone book

• <mode> = 4

Action command

AT+WPGR=<mode>,<index>

+WPGR: <used>/<total>

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Read a Phonebook Group +WPGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 39

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WPGR=?

+WPGR: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <group index>s)

OK

16.9.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: phonebook group read mode

1 read the name of one phonebook group

2 read the names of all phonebook groups

3 list all entries of one phonebook group (in alphabetical order)

4 read the number of used entries in a phonebook group

<used>: number of used entries in a phonebook group

integer type

<total>: number of available entries in a phonebook group

integer type

<group name>: phonebook group name

string type

<group index>: phonebook group index

integer type

range value (1-10)

<loc>: phonebook index

integer type

<phb_group>: phonebook group number

range value (1-10)

<num>: phone number

string type

<name>: name associated with the phone number .

up to 30 ASCII characters or 13 UCS2

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Read a Phonebook Group +WPGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 40

<type>: TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

<number> includes the international access code character "+"

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<contact>: this parameter gathers the following parameters:

<num_Mobile>, <num_Work>, <num_Fax>, <num_Data>, <Email>,<Address>

<num_Mobile>: phone number (dedicated for mobile phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Work>: phone number (dedicated for work phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Fax>: phone number (dedicated for fax phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<num_Data>: phone number (dedicated for data phone number for example)

up to 20 digits

<Email>: e-mail address

string type

up to 56 characters

<Address>: mail address

string type

up to 56 characters

16.9.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Read a Phonebook Group +WPGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 41

16.9.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WPGR=?

Note: Test command

+WPGR: (1-4),(1-10)

OK

Note: 10 possible groups

AT+WPGR=1,1 +WPGR: 1,"group 1"

Note: Read the name of phonebook group 1 OK

AT+WPGR=2 +WPGR: 1,"group 1"

+WPGR: 2,"group 2"

Note: Read the names of all phonebook groups OK

AT+WCOS=0

Note: Phonebook not extended

OK

AT+WPGR=3,1 +WPGR: 2,"+33567891234",145,"Elvis"

+WPGR: 31,"+331290909",145,"Fred"

+WPGR: 1,"+33123456789",145,"John"

+WPGR: 33,””,128,”No number”

+WPGR: 32,"0123456789",129,"Test"

OK

Note: Lists all entries of phonebook group 1 Note: SIM entries: index 1 and 2; Flash entries: index 31 and

32

(The SIM supports 30 entries in this example)

AT+WCOS=1

Note: Phonebook extended

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Read a Phonebook Group +WPGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 42

Command Responses

AT+WPGR=3,1 +WPGR: 2,"+33567891234",145,"Elvis",1

+WPGR:

31,"+331290909",145,"Fred","0141284549",1

29,"0600003210",129,"0141280000",

129,"019876543210",129,"fred@mail_address

.com","Becker Street London",1

+WPGR: 1,"+33123456789",145,"John",1

+WPGR: 33,””,128,”No number”,"",128,"",12

8,"",128,"",128,"","",1

+WPGR:

32,"0123456789",129,"Test","0141284549",1

29,"0600003210",129,

"0141280000",129,

"6549873210",129,"test@mail_address.com",

"",1

OK

Note: Lists all entries of phonebook group 1

The entries list displayed with AT+WPGR=3,1 contains

records from both ME and SIM phonebook (MT phonebook).

Note: SIM entries: index 1 and 2; Flash entries: index 31 and

32 (The SIM supports 30 entries in this example)

AT+WPGR=4,1 +WPGR: 5/100

OK

Note: Read the number of used entries in the phonebook

group 1

Note: 4 entries are used from the 100 possible entries

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Settings of a Group +WPGS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 43

16.10. Settings of a Group +WPGS

16.10.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command sets the parameters for a group.

16.10.2. Syntax

Depending on the mode, several syntaxes are available for the action command:

• <mode>= 0

Action command

AT+WPGS=<mode>,<group index>

+WPGS: <restrict call>

OK

• <mode>= 1

Action command

AT+WPGS=<mode>,<group index>,<restrict call>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WPGS=?

+WPGS: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <group index>s),(list of

supported <restrict call>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Settings of a Group +WPGS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 44

16.10.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: requested operation

0 read group settings

1 write group settings

<group index>: index of a group

<restrict call>: call restriction mode

0 all refused - incoming call is forwarded to the voice mailbox or rejected like busy

line (depends on network operator)

1 all accepted - incoming call is received (RING message is displayed)

16.10.4. Parameter Storage

None.

16.10.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WPGS=1,1,1

Note: Set restrict call to "All Accepted"

OK

AT+WPGS=0,1 +WPGS: 1

OK

Note: Command reads group 1 settings Note: Group 1 all accepted

AT+WPGS=? +WPGS: (0-1),(1-10),(0-1)

Note: Test command OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 45

16.11. Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP

16.11.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows to delete the calls listed in some phonebooks.

16.11.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDCP=<mem>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WDCP=?

+WDCP: (list of supported <mem>s)

OK

16.11.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mem>: type of phonebook

"LD" SIM (ME extended) last dialing phonebook

"MC" ME missed calls list phonebook

"RC" ME received calls list phonebook

16.11.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 46

16.11.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDCP=? +WDCP: ("LD","MC","RC")

OK

Note: Possible values? Note: Identifiers of the phonebooks supporting a list of calls

AT+WDCP="LD"

Note: Delete all the content of Last Dialing phonebook.

OK

Note: Last Dialing phonebook is now empty.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Subscriber Number +CNUM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 47

16.12. Subscriber Number +CNUM

16.12.1. Description

This command returns the subscriber MSISDN(s). If the subscriber has several MSISDNs for various

services, each MSISDN is returned in a separate line.

16.12.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CNUM

+CNUM: <alpha1>,<number1>,<type1>

[+CNUM: <alpha2>,<number2>,<type2>[…]]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CNUM=?

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Subscriber Number +CNUM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 48

16.12.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<alphai>: optional alphanumeric string associated with <numberi>

<numberi>: phone number in ASCII format

string type

<typei>: TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

16.12.4. Parameter Storage

None.

16.12.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CNUM +CNUM: "Phone","0612345678",129

+CNUM: "Fax","0687654321",129

+CNUM: "80001002FFFF","+0183773",145

OK

Note: Get MSISDN(s) Note: Last number is in UCS2 format

AT+CNUM=? OK

AT+CPBS="ON" OK

AT+CPBW=4,"0146278478",161,"Cell" OK

AT+CNUM +CNUM: "Phone","0612345678",129

+CNUM: "Fax","0687654321",129

+CNUM: "80001002FFFF","+0183773",145

+CNUM: "Cell","0146278478",161

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 49

16.13. Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM

16.13.1. Description

This command allows to set/get and enable/disable the voice mail number in memory.

Note: This command is used to specifically manage the ME Memory stored Voicemail Numbers. Any

actions related to the SIM stored Voicemail Numbers (from the CPHS SIM Storage) MUST be

managed through AT+CPHS=2,2.

16.13.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CSVM=<mode>[,<number>[,<type>]]

OK

Read command

AT+CSVM?

+CSVM: <mode>,<number>,<type>

OK

Test command

AT+CSVM=?

+CSVM: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <type>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 50

16.13.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: voice mail number mode

0 disable the voice mail number (default value)

1 enable the voice mail number

<number>: phone number in ASCII format

string type

<type>: TON/NPI for <number>; default 145 when dialing string includes international access

code character "+", otherwise 129

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

16.13.4. Parameter Storage

All parameters are stored in EEPROM. The default value can be restored using AT&F.

16.13.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CSVM=?

Note: Possible values?

+CSVM: (0-1),(128-255)

OK

Note: Activation/deactivation and format 128-255 are supported

AT+CSVM=0,"888",129

Note: Disable Voice Mail number and change value to

"888".

OK

AT+CSVM?

Note: Get mail number

+CSVM: 1,"888",129

OK

Note: Voice mail number "888" is activated

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Avoid Phonebook Init +WAIP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 51

16.14. Avoid Phonebook Init +WAIP

16.14.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows the initialization of all phonebooks to be inhibited

during subsequent boots.

16.14.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WAIP=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+WAIP?

+WAIP: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+WAIP=?

+WAIP: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

16.14.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: phonebook initialization mode

0 normal initialization (default value)

1 no phonebook initialization

16.14.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Phonebooks Commands

Avoid Phonebook Init +WAIP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 52

16.14.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WAIP=? +WAIP: (0,1)

OK

Note: Query possible values Note: Disable / enable

AT+WAIP=1

Note: Inhibit initialization of phonebooks (next boot)

OK

Note: no answer

AT+WAIP?

Note: Get current value

+WAIP: 1

OK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 53

17. Short message Commands

17.1. Select Message Service +CSMS

17.1.1. Description

This command defines the availability of the SMS services and the SMS AT commands version.

The supported services are originated (SMS-MO), terminated short message (SMS-MT) or Cell

Broadcast Message (SMS-CB) services.

17.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CSMS=<service>

+CSMS: <mt>,<mo>,<bm>

OK

Read command

AT+CSMS?

+CSMS: <service>,<mt>,<mo>,<bm>

OK

Test command

AT+CSMS=?

+CSMS: (list of supported <service>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Select Message Service +CSMS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 54

17.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<service>: selected service

0 SMS AT commands are compatible with GSM 07.05 [1] phase 2 version 4.7.0.

(default value)

1 SMS AT commands are compatible with GSM 07.05 [1] phase 2+ version.

<mt>: SMS-MT support

0 SMS-MT not supported

1 SMS-MT supported

<mo>: SMS-MO support

0 SMS-MO not supported

1 SMS-MO supported

<bm>: SMS-CB support

0 SMS-CB not supported

1 SMS-CB supported

17.1.4. Parameter Storage

The <service> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

17.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CSMS=0

Note: SMS AT command phase 2 version 4.7.0

+CSMS: 1,1,1

OK

Note: SMS-MO, SMS-MT and SMS-CB supported

AT+CSMS?

Note: Get current values

+CSMS: 0,1,1,1

OK

AT+CSMS=?

Note: Possible services

+CSMS: (0,1)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

New Message Indication +CNMI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 55

17.2. New Message Indication +CNMI

17.2.1. Description

This command selects the procedure for message reception from the network.

17.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CNMI=<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>

OK

Read command

AT+CNMI?

+CNMI: <mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>

OK

Test command

AT+CNMI=?

+CNMI: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <mt>s),(list of supported

<bm>s),(list of supported <ds>s),(list of supported <bfr>s)

OK

• For <mt>=1

Unsolicited response

+CMTI: <mem>,<index>

• For <mt>=2 and PDU mode

Unsolicited response

+CMT: [<alpha>],<length>

<pdu>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

New Message Indication +CNMI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 56

• For <mt>=2 and text mode

Unsolicited response

+CMT: <oa>,[<alpha>],<scts>[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]

<data>

• For <bm>=1

Unsolicited response

+CBMI: <mem>,<index>

• For <bm>=2 and PDU mode

Unsolicited response

+CBM: <length>

<pdu>

• For <bm>=2 and text mode

Unsolicited response

+CBM: <sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages>

<data>

• For <ds>=1 and PDU mode

Unsolicited response

+CDS: <length>

<pdu>

• For <ds>=1 and text mode

Unsolicited response

+CDS: <fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>

• For <ds>=2

Unsolicited response

+CDSI: <mem>,<index>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

New Message Indication +CNMI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 57

17.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: processing of unsolicited result codes (see Note below)

0 same processing as <mode>=2

1 same processing as <mode>=2

2 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is reserved and flush

them to the TE after reservation.

Otherwise forward them directly to the TE

3 Forward unsolicited result codes to the TE by using a specific inband technique:

while TA-TE link is reserved (i.e. TE is in online data mode by CSD or GPRS call)

unsolicited result codes are replaced by a break (100ms) and stored in a buffer.

The unsolicited result codes buffer is flushed to the TE after reservation (after +++

was entered). Otherwise, (the TE is not in online data mode) forward them directly

to the TE

<mt>: result code indication routing for SMS-DELIVER indications

0 no SMS-DELIVER indications are routed

1 SMS-DELIVERs are routed using unsolicited code +CMTI (default value)

2 SMS-DELIVERs (except class 2 messages) are routed using unsolicited code

+CMT

3 Class 3 SMS-DELIVERS are routed directly using code in <mt>=2

Other classes messages result in indication <mt>=1

<bm>: rules for storing the received CBMs (Cell Broadcast Message) types.

They also depend on the coding scheme (text or PDU) and the setting of Select CBM

Types (see +CSCB command).

0 no CBM indications are routed to the TE (default value).

The CBMs are stored.

1 The CBM is stored and an indication of the memory location is routed to the

customer application using unsolicited result code +CBMI.

2 New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited result code +CBM.

3 Class 3 CBMs: as <bm>=2.

Other classes CBMs: as <bm>=1.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

New Message Indication +CNMI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 58

<ds>: SMS-STATUS-REPORTs routing

0 no SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed (default value)

1 SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed using unsolicited code +CDS.

2 SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are stored and routed using the unsolicited result code

+CDSI.

<bfr>: TA buffer of unsolicited result codes mode

0 TA buffer defined within this command is flushed to the TE when <mode> = 1 to 3

is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the codes).

Default value

1 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when

<mode> 1…3 is entered.

<mem>: memory storage

"SM" SMS message storage in SIM (default value)

"ME" SMS message storage in Flash

"SR" status report message storage (in SIM if the EF-SMR file exists, otherwise in the

ME non volatile memory)

"BM" CBM message storage (in volatile memory)

<length>: text mode (AT+CMGF=1): number of characters

PDU mode (AT+CMGF=0): length of the TP data unit in bytes

integer type

<alpha>: associated phonebook name

string type

<scts>: service center timestamp

string format: "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:sszz"

(Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:SecondsTimeZone)

<oa>: originator address

string type

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

New Message Indication +CNMI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 59

<tooa>: type of address of <oa>; when first character of <oa>is “+” default is 145, otherwise

default is 129 (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<fo>: first byte of SMS-DELIVER or SMS-STATUS-REPORT, for further information refer to

document [1]

integer type

<pid>: protocol identifier

integer type

<dcs>: data coding scheme, coded like in document [5]

integer type

<sca>: service center address

string type

<tosca>: type of address of <sca>; when first character of <sca>is “+” default is 145, otherwise

default is 129 (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<data>: SMS user data in text mode

string type

<pdu>: SMS user data in PDU mode

string type (hexadecimal format)

<index>: place of storage in memory

integer type

<sn>: CBM serial number

integer type

<mid>: CBM message identifier

integer type

<page>: CBM page parameter bits 4-7

integer type

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

New Message Indication +CNMI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 60

<pages>: CBM page parameter bits 0-3

integer type

<mr>: message reference

integer type

<ra>: recipient address

string type

<tora>: type of address of <ra>; when first character of <ra>is “+” default is 145, otherwise

default is 129 (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<dt>: discharge time

string format: "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:sszz"(Year [00-99], Month [01-12], Day [01-31],

Hour, Minute, Second and Time Zone [quarters of an hour])

<st>: status of a SMS-STATUS-REPORT

integer type

Note: Please refer to document [4] (ETSI GSM 03.40: Digital cellular

telecommunications system (Phase 2); Technical implementation of the

Short Message Service (SMS) Point-to-Point (PP)) for detailed description

and possible values.

Note: Only <mode>=2 and 3 are supported.

Any other value for <mode> (0 or 1) is accepted (return code will be OK), but the processing of

unsolicited result codes will be the same as with <mode>=2.

17.2.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds> and <bfr> parameters are stored in EEPROM using the AT+CSAS

command. The default values can be restored using AT&F.

17.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CNMI=2,1,0,0,0

Note: <mt>=1

OK

+CMTI: "SM",1

Note: Message received

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

New Message Indication +CNMI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 61

Command Responses

AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0

Note: <mt>=2

OK

+CMT:

"123456","98/10/01,12:3000+00",129,4,32,240,"15

379",129,5

Note: Message received

AT+CNMI=2,0,0,1,0

Note: <ds>=1

OK

AT+CMGS="+33146290800"<CR>

Happy Birthday !<ctrl-Z>

Note: Send a message in text mode

+CMGS: 7

OK

Note: Successful transmission

+CDS:

2,116,"+33146290800",145,"98/10/01,12:30:07+04"

,"98/10/0112:30:08+04",0

Note: Message was correctly delivered

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 62

17.3. Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP

17.3.1. Description

This command is used to select a value for <vp>, <pid>, and <dcs> and configure the text mode.

17.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CSMP=<fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>

OK

Read command

AT+CSMP?

+CSMP: <fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>

OK

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 63

17.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<fo>: see Note below

<vp>: validity period

In text mode is only coded in "relative" format.

default value 167 (24 hours)

This means that one byte can describe different values.

0 to 143 (VP + 1) x 5 minutes (up to 12 hours)

144 to 167 12 hours + ( (VP – 143) x 30 minutes )

168 to 196 (VP – 166) x 1 day

197 to 255 (VP – 192) x 1 week

<pid>: protocol Id (please refer to [1])

string type

<dcs>: data encoding scheme (please refer to [1])

integer type

Note: The <fo> byte comprises 6 fields:

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

RP UDHI SRR VPF RD Mit

RP: Reply Path, not used in text mode

UDHI: User Data Header Information

b6=1 if the beginning of the User Data field contains a Header in addition to the short

message. This option is not supported in +CSMP command, but can be used in PDU

mode (+CMGS).

SRR: Status Report Request.

b5=1 if a status report is requested. This mode is supported.

VPF: Validity Period Format

b4=0 & b3=0 -> <vp> field is not present

b4=1 & b3=0 -> <vp> field is present in relative format

Others formats (absolute & enhanced) are not supported.

RD: Reject Duplicates

b2=1 to instruct the SC to reject an SMS-SUBMIT for an SM still held in the SC which

has the same <mr> and the same <da> as the previously submitted SM from the

same <oa>.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 64

MTI: Message Type Indicator

b1=0 & b0=0 -> SMS-DELIVER (in the direction SC to MS)

b1=0 & b0=1 -> SMS-SUBMIT (in the direction MS to SC)

17.3.4. Parameter Storage

The <vp> parameter is stored in E2P using the AT+CSAS command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

17.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CSMP?

Note: Current values

+CSMP: 0,0,0,0

OK

Note: No validity period <dcs>= PCCP437 alphabet (8 bits _ 7

bits)

AT+CSMP=17,23,64,244

Note:<vp> = 23 (2 hours, relative format)

<dcs> = GSM 8 bits alphabet. Remind to enter <fo> value

in decimal notation.

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Preferred Message Format +CMGF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 65

17.4. Preferred Message Format +CMGF

17.4.1. Description

This command allows to select the preferred message format. The message formats supported are

text mode and PDU mode.

17.4.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CMGF=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+CMGF?

+CMGF=<mode>

OK

Test command

AT+CMGF=?

+CMGF: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

17.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode> : PDU or text mode

0 PDU mode

1 text mode (default value)

17.4.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Preferred Message Format +CMGF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 66

17.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CMGF?

Note : Current message format

+CMGF:1

OK

Note: Text mode

AT+CMGF=?

Note: Possible message format

+CMGF: (0,1)

OK

Note: Text or PDU modes are available

AT+CMGF=0

Note: Set PDU mode

OK

Note: PDU mode valid

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Preferred Message Storage +CPMS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 67

17.5. Preferred Message Storage +CPMS

17.5.1. Description

This command allows the message storage area to be selected (for reading, writing).

17.5.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CPMS=<mem1>,[,<mem2>,[<mem3>]]

+CPMS: <used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2>,<used3>,<total3>

OK

Read command

AT+CPMS?

+CPMS: <used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2>,<used3>,<total3>

OK

Test command

AT+CPMS=?

+CPMS: (list of supported <mem1>s,list of supported <mem2>s,list of supported

<mem3>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Preferred Message Storage +CPMS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 68

17.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mem1>: memory used to list, read and delete messages.

"SM" SMS message storage in SIM (default value)

"ME" SMS message storage in Flash

"SR" status report message storage (in SIM if the EF-SMR file exists, otherwise in the

ME non volatile memory)

"BM" CBM message storage (in volatile memory)

<mem2>: memory used to write and send messages

"SM" SMS message storage in SIM (default value)

"ME" SMS message storage in Flash

<mem3>: memory to which received SMS are preferred to be stored

"SM" SMS message storage in SIM (default value)

"ME" SMS message storage in Flash

<used1>: used capacity of <mem1>

<used2>: used capacity of <mem2>

<used3>: used capacity of <mem3>

<total1>: total capacity of <mem1>

<total2>: total capacity of <mem2>

<total3>: total capacity of <mem3>

17.5.4. Parameter Storage

Parameters are stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. Default values can be restored using

AT&F.

17.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPMS=? +CPMS:

(("SM","ME","BM","SR"),("SM","ME"),("SM","ME"))

OK

Note: Possible message storages Note: Read, list, delete: SMS or SMS Status Report

Write, send: SMS

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Preferred Message Storage +CPMS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 69

Command Responses

AT+CPMS? +CPMS: "SM",3,10,"SM",3,10,"SM",3,10

OK

Note: Read Note: Read, write, SMS from/to SIM. 3 SMS are stored in SIM. 10 is the

total memory available in SIM

AT+CPMS="SM","ME","SM"

Note: Select SM for reading, ME for writing and SM

for storing

+CPMS: 3,10,3,99,3,10

OK

AT+CPMS? +CPMS: "SM",3,10,"ME",3,99,"SM",3,10

OK

Note: Read Note: Read, store, SMS from/to flash, write SMS to flash. 3 SMS are

stored in flash. 99 is the total memory available in flash

+CMTI: "SM",4

Note: Receive a SMS stored in SIM at location 4

AT+CPMS="ME","ME","ME"

Note: Select ME for reading, ME for writing and ME

for storing

+CPMS: 3,99,3,99,3,99

OK

AT+CPMS? +CPMS: "ME",3,99,"ME",3,99,"ME",3,99

OK

Note: Read Note: Read, write, store SMS from/to flash. 3 SMS are stored in flash.

99 is the total memory available in flash

+CMTI: "ME",4

Note: Receive a SMS stored in flash at location 4

AT+CPMS="AM"

Note: Select wrong message storage

+CMS ERROR: 302

AT+CPMS="SM"

Note: Select SM for reading, writing and storing

memory are not changed

+CPMS: 4,10,4,99,4,99

OK

AT+CPMS?

Note: Read

+CPMS: "SM",4,10,"ME",4,99,"ME",4,99

OK

Note: Read SMS from SIM; write, store SMS from/to flash

17.5.6. Notes

When <mem1> is selected, all the following +CMGL, +CMGR and +CMGD commands are related to

the type of SMS stored in this memory.

The maximum number of SMS in flash is 99.

When the embedded module is switched on, <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> are initialized to SM.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Service Center Address +CSCA

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 70

17.6. Service Center Address +CSCA

17.6.1. Description

This command is used to indicate to which service center the message must be sent.

The product has no default value for this address. If the application tries to send a message without

having indicated the service center address, an error will be generated.

Therefore, the application must indicate the SC address when initializing the SMS. This address is

then permanently valid. The application may change it if necessary.

17.6.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CSCA=<sca>[,<tosca>]

OK

Read command

AT+CSCA?

+CSCA: <sca>[,<tosca>]

OK

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Service Center Address +CSCA

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 71

17.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<sca>: service center address

<tosca>: type of address of <sca>; when first character of <sca>is “+” default is 145, otherwise

default is 129 (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

17.6.4. Parameter Storage

The <sca> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the CSAS command.

17.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CSCA="0696741234"

Note: Service center initialization

OK

AT+CSCA? +CSCA: "0696741234",129

OK

AT+CSCA="0696745678",161 OK

AT+CSCA? +CSCA: "0696745678",161

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 72

17.7. Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH

17.7.1. Description

This command gives additional information on text mode result codes. This information can be found

in the description of the +CMT, +CMGR, +CMGL commands and responses.

17.7.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CSDH=<n>

OK

Read command

AT+CSDH?

+CSDH: <n>

OK

Test command

AT+CSDH=?

+CSDH: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

17.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: show text mode

0 do not show header values (default value)

1 show the values in result codes

17.7.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 73

17.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CSDH=0

Note: Set value to "do not show"

OK

AT+CSDH?

Note: Current value

+CSDH: 0

OK

Note: Do not show header values

AT+CSDH=? +CSDH: (0,1)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

More Messages to Send +CMMS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 74

17.8. More Messages to Send +CMMS

17.8.1. Description

This command allows to keep the link opened while sending several short messages within a short

delay.

17.8.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CMMS=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+CMMS

+CMMS: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+CMMS=?

+CMMS: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

More Messages to Send +CMMS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 75

17.8.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: operating mode

0 disable feature

1 keeps link opened while messages are sent

If the delay between two messages exceeds 5 seconds, the link is closed and the

mode is reset to 0: the feature is disabled.

2 keeps link opened while messages are sent

If the delay between two messages exceeds 5 seconds, the link is closed but the

mode remains set to 2: the feature is still enabled.

17.8.4. Parameter Storage

None.

17.8.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CMMS=? +CMMS: (0-2)

OK

AT+CMMS=2 OK

Note: Feature is enabled, link is open

AT+CMMS? +CMMS: 2

OK

17.8.6. Notes

• The delay of 5 seconds complies with Recommandation 3GPP TS 27.005 [19].

• Before sending the last SMS in the link, use AT+CMMS=0 command. This command will

indicate that the next SMS will be the last one.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Send Message +CMGS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 76

17.9. Send Message +CMGS

17.9.1. Description

This command allows the user application to send short messages to the network. The text can

contain all existing characters except <ctrl-Z> and <ESC> (ASCII 27).This command can be aborted

using the <ESC> character when entering text.

In PDU mode, only hexadecimal characters are used ("0"…"9","A"…"F").

17.9.2. Syntax

• In text mode:

Action command

AT+CMGS=<da>[,<toda>]<CR>

> "text to be sent <Ctrl-Z>"

+CMGS: <mr>

OK

• In PDU mode :

Action command

AT+CMGS=<length><CR>

> "PDU to be sent <Ctrl-Z>"

+CMGS: <mr>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Send Message +CMGS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 77

17.9.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<da>: destination address

string type

<toda>: type of address of da

<length>: text mode (AT+CMGF=1): number of characters

PDU mode (AT+CMGF=0): length of the TP data unit in bytes

integer type

<mr>: message reference

integer type

17.9.4. Parameter Storage

None.

17.9.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CMGS="+33146290800"<CR> >

Please call me soon, Fred. <ctrl-Z>

Note: Send a message in text mode

+CMGS: <250>

OK

Note: Successful transmission

AT+CMGS=<length><CR>

Note: Send a message in PDU mode (1/3)

> 

<pdu>

Note: Enter message in PDU mode (2/3)

<ctrl-Z>

Note: End the message (3/3)

+CMGS: <251>

OK

Note: Successful transmission

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Send Message +CMGS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 78

17.9.6. Notes

The message reference, <mr>, which is returned to the application is allocated by the product. This

number begins with 0 and is incremented by one for each outgoing message (successful and failure

cases); it is cyclic on one byte (0 follows 255).

This number is not a storage number – outgoing messages are not stored.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Write Message to Memory +CMGW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 79

17.10. Write Message to Memory +CMGW

17.10.1. Description

This command stores a message in memory (either SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-DELIVERS). The memory

location <index> is returned (no choice possible as with phonebooks +CPBW).

Text or PDU is entered as described for the Send Message +CMGS command.

17.10.2. Syntax

Depending on the mode, two syntax commands are available.

• In text mode:

Action command

AT+CMGW=<oa/da>[,<tooa/toda>[,<stat>]]<CR>

> enter text <ctrl-Z / ESC>

OK

• In PDU mode:

Action command

AT+CMGW=<length>[,<stat>]<CR>

> give PDU <ctrl-Z / ESC>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Write Message to Memory +CMGW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 80

17.10.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<oa/da>: originating or destination Address Value

string format.

<toda>: type of address of <da>; when first character of <da> is “+” default is 145, otherwise

default is 129 (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<tooa>: type of address of <oa>; when first character of <oa>is “+” default is 145, otherwise

default is 129 (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<stat>: status of message in memory (PDU mode)

0 received unread messages

1 received read messages

2 stored unsent messages

3 stored sent messages

<stat>: status of message in memory (text mode)

"REC

UNREAD"

received unread messages

"REC READ" received read messages

"STO UNSENT" stored unsent messages (default if omited)

"STO SENT" stored sent messages

<length>: length of the actual data unit in bytes

integer type

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Write Message to Memory +CMGW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 81

17.10.4. Parameter Storage

None.

17.10.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CMGW="+33146290800"<CR> >

Hello how are you ?<ctrl-Z>

Note: Write a message in text mode

+CMGW: 4

OK

Note: Message stored in index 4

AT+CMGW=<length><CR>

Note: Write a message in PDU mode (1/3)

> 

<pdu>

Note: Enter message in PDU mode (2/3)

<ctrl-Z>

Note: End the message (3/3)

+CMGW: <index>

OK

Note: Message stored in <index>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Send Message From Storage +CMSS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 82

17.11. Send Message From Storage +CMSS

17.11.1. Description

This command sends a message stored at a specific location from preferred message storage

<mem2> (defined by the +CPMS command) to the network.

17.11.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CMSS=<index>[,<da>[,<toda>]]

+CMSS: <mr>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Send Message From Storage +CMSS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 83

17.11.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<da>: destination address, coded like GSM 03.40 [4]TP-DA

<index>: place of storage in memory

<toda>: type of address of <da>; when first character of <da>is “+” default is 145, otherwise

default is 129 (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<mr>: message reference

integer type

17.11.4. Parameter Storage

None.

17.11.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CMGW=0660123456 >

Today is my birthday <ctrl-Z>

+CMGW: 5

OK

Note: Message stored with index 5

AT+CMSS=5,0680654321

Note: Send the message 5 to a different destination

number

+CMSS: <157>

OK

Note: Successful transmission

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Read Message +CMGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 84

17.12. Read Message +CMGR

17.12.1. Description

This command allows the application to read stored messages. The messages are read from the

memory selected by the +CPMS command.

17.12.2. Syntax

Depending on the mode, several responses are possible.

• For SMS-DELIVER and text mode:

Action command

AT+CMGR=<index>

+CMGR:

<stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>,]<scts>[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]

<data>

OK

• For SMS-SUBMIT and text mode:

Action command

AT+CMGR=<index>

+CMGR:

<stat>,<da>,[<alpha>,][,<toda>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]

<data>

OK

• For SMS-STATUS-REPORT and text mode:

Action command

AT+CMGR=<index>

+CMGR: <stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>

OK

• For PDU mode:

Action command

AT+CMGR=<index>

+CMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length>

<pdu>

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Read Message +CMGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 85

Read command

None

Test command

None

17.12.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<da>: destination address

string type

<toda>: type of address of <da>.

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<dcs>: data coding scheme, coded like in document [5]

integer type

<dt>: discharge time

string format: "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:sszz"(Year [00-99], Month [01-12], Day [01-31],

Hour, Minute, Second and Time Zone [quarters of an hour])

<oa>: originator address

string type

<tooa>: type of address of <oa>

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<scts>: service center timestamp

string format: "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:sszz"

(Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:SecondsTimeZone)

<fo>: first byte of SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-STATUS-REPORT, for further

information refer to document [1]

integer type

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Read Message +CMGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 86

<pid>: protocol identifier

integer type

<index>: place of storage in memory

integer type

<length>: text mode (AT+CMGF=1): number of characters

PDU mode (AT+CMGF=0): length of the TP data unit in bytes

integer type

<mr>: message reference

integer type

<pdu>: SMS user data in PDU mode

string type (hexadecimal format)

<ra>: recipient address

string type

<sca>: service center address

string type

<st>: status of a SMS-STATUS-REPORT

integer type

<stat>: status of message in memory (PDU mode)

0 received unread messages

1 received read messages

2 stored unsent messages

3 stored sent messages

<stat>: status of message in memory (text mode)

"REC

UNREAD"

received unread messages

"REC READ" received read messages

"STO UNSENT" stored unsent messages

"STO SENT" stored sent messages

<tora>: type of address of <ra>

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Read Message +CMGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 87

<tosca>: type of address of <sca>

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<alpha>: associated phonebook name

string type

<data>: SMS user data in text mode

string type

<vp>: validity period

In text mode is only coded in "relative" format.

This means that one byte can describe different values.

0 to 143 (VP + 1) x 5 minutes (up to 12 hours)

144 to 167 12 hours + ( (VP – 143) x 30 minutes )

168 to 196 (VP – 166) x 1 day

197 to 255 (VP – 192) x 1 week

17.12.4. Parameter Storage

None.

17.12.5. Examples

Command Responses

+CMTI: "SM",1

Note: New message received

AT+CMGR=1

Note: Read the message

+CMGR: "REC

UNREAD","0146290800","98/10/01,18:22:11+00"

ABCdefGHI

OK

AT+CMGR=1 +CMGR: "REC

READ","0146290800","98/10/01,18:22:11+00"

ABCdefGHI

OK

Note: Read the message again Note: Message is read now

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Read Message +CMGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 88

Command Responses

AT+CMGR=2 OK

Note: Location empty

AT+CMGF=0;+CMGR=1 +CMGR: 2,,26

07913366003000F3040B913366920547F4001300119041

2530400741AA8E5A9C5201

OK

Note: In PDU mode Note: Message is stored but unsent, no <alpha>field

AT+CMGF=1;+CPMS="SR";+CNMI=,,,2

Note: Reset to text mode, set read memory to "SR",

and allow storage of further SMS Status Report into

"SR" memory

OK

AT+CMSS=3

Note: Send an SMS previously stored

+CMSS: 160

OK

+CDSI: "SR",1

Note: New SMS Status Report stored in "SR" memory at index 1

AT+CMGR=1 +CMGR: "REC

UNREAD",6,160,"+33612345678",129,"01/05/31,15:

15:09+00","01/05/31,15:15:09+00",0

Note: Read the SMS Status Report OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

List Message +CMGL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 89

17.13. List Message +CMGL

17.13.1. Description

This command allows the application to read stored messages by indicating the type of the message

to read. The messages are read from the memory selected by the +CPMS command.

17.13.2. Syntax

Depending on the mode, several responses are possible.

• For SMS-DELIVER or SMS-SUBMIT and text mode

Action command

AT+CMGL=<stat>

+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<da/oa>,[<alpha>],[<scts>,<tooa/toda>,<length>]

<data>

[+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<da/oa>,[<alpha>],[<scts>,<tooa/toda>,<length>]

<data>[…]]

OK

• For SMS-STATUS-REPORT and text mode

Action command

AT+CMGL=<stat>

+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>

[+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>[…]]

OK

• For PDU mode

Action command

AT+CMGL=<stat>

+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length>

<pdu>

[+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length>

<pdu>[…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

List Message +CMGL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 90

Read command

AT+CMGL?

ERROR

Test command

AT+CMGL=?

+CMGL: (""REC UNREAD"",""REC READ"",""STO UNSENT"",""STO SENT"",""ALL"")

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

List Message +CMGL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 91

17.13.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<da>: destination address

string type

<toda>: type of address of <da>

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<dt>: discharge time

string format: "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:sszz"(Year [00-99], Month [01-12], Day [01-31],

Hour, Minute, Second and Time Zone [quarters of an hour])

<oa>: originator address

string type

<tooa>: type of address of <oa>

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<scts>: service center timestamp

string format: "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:sszz"

(Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:SecondsTimeZone)

<fo>: first byte of SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-STATUS-REPORT, for further

information refer to document [1]

integer type

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

List Message +CMGL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 92

<pid>: protocol identifier

integer type

<index>: place of storage in memory

integer type

<length>: text mode (AT+CMGF=1): number of characters

PDU mode (AT+CMGF=0): length of the TP data unit in bytes

integer type

<mr>: message reference

integer type

<ra>: recipient address

string type

<sca>: service center address

string type

<st>: status of a SMS-STATUS-REPORT

integer type

<stat>: status of message in memory (PDU mode)

0 received unread messages

1 received read messages

2 stored unsent messages

3 stored sent messages

<stat>: status of message in memory (text mode)

"REC

UNREAD"

received unread messages

"REC READ" received read messages

"STO UNSENT" stored unsent messages

"STO SENT" stored sent messages

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

List Message +CMGL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 93

<tora>: type of address of <ra>

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<alpha>: associated phonebook name

string type

17.13.4. Parameter Storage

None.

17.13.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CMGL="REC UNREAD" +CMGL: 1,"REC UNREAD","0146290800",,

I will be late

+CMGL: 3,"REC UNREAD","46290800",,

See you tonight !

OK

Note: List unread messages in text mode Note: 2 messages are unread, these messages will then have their status

changed to "REC READ"

AT+CMGL="REC READ" +CMGL: 1,"REC READ","0146290800",,

I will be late

+CMGL: 2,"REC READ","0146290800",,

Keep cool

+CMGL: 3,"REC READ","46290800",,

See you tonight!

Note: List read messages in text mode OK

AT+CMGL="STO SENT"

Note: List stored and sent messages in text

mode

OK

Note: No message found

AT+CMGL=1 +CMGL: 1,1,,26

07913366003000F3040B913366920547F400130011904125

30400741AA8E5A9C5201

Note: List read messages in PDU mode OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

List Message +CMGL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 94

17.13.6. Notes

For SMS status reports, only "ALL" / 4 and "READ" / 1 values of the <stat> parameter will list

messages; other values will only return OK.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Delete Message +CMGD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 95

17.14. Delete Message +CMGD

17.14.1. Description

This command is used to delete one or several messages from preferred message storage ("BM"

SMS-CB "RAM storage", "SM" SMSPP storage "SIM storage" or "SR" SMS Status-Report storage).

Refer also to +CPMS command.

17.14.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CMGD=<index>[,<DelFlag>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

17.14.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<index>: Index of the message to be deleted

(If <DelFlag> = 0)

1-20 if the preferred message storage is "BM"

If <DelFlag> is > 0, <index> is ignored.

SIM values If the preferred message storage is "SM" or "SR".

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Delete Message +CMGD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 96

<DelFlag>: message deletion mode

0 delete message at location <index> (default value )

If <DelFlag> is omitted, the default value is used.

a

1 delete all READ messages

2 delete all READ and SENT messages

3 delete all READ, SENT and UNSENT messages

4 delete all messages

17.14.4. Parameter Storage

None.

17.14.5. Examples

Command Responses

+CMTI:"SM",3

Note: New message received

AT+CMGR=3 +CMGR: "REC

UNREAD","0146290800","98/10/01,18:19:20+00"<CR><LF>

Note: Message received!

Note: Read it Note: Unread message received from 0146290800 on the 10/01/1998 at

18H19m 20s

AT+CMGD=3

Note: Delete it

OK

Note: Message deleted

AT+CMGD=1,0 OK

Note: The message from the preferred message storage at the location 1 is

deleted

AT+CMGD=1,1 OK

Note: All READ messages from the preferred message storage are deleted

AT+CMGD=1,2 OK

Note: All READ messages and SENT mobile originated messages are

deleted

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Delete Message +CMGD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 97

Command Responses

AT+CMGD=1,3 OK

Note: All READ, SENT and UNSENT messages are deleted

AT+CMGD=1,4 OK

Note: All messages are deleted

17.14.6. Notes

When the preferred message storage is "SR", as SMS status reports are assumed to have a "READ"

status, if <DelFlag> is greater than 0, all SMS status reports will be deleted.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 98

17.15. New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA

17.15.1. Description

This command enables the acknowledgement of the reception of a new message routed directly to

the TE.

• In TEXT mode, only positive acknowledgement to the network (RP-ACK) is possible.

• In PDU mode, either positive (RP-ACK) or negative (RP-ERR) acknowledgement to the

network is possible.

Acknowledge with +CNMA is possible only if the +CSMS parameter is set to 1 (AT+CSMS=1) when a

+CMT or +CDS indication is shown (see +CNMI command).

If no acknowledgement is given within the network timeout, an RP-ERR is sent to the network, the

<mt> and <ds> parameters of the +CNMI command are then reset to zero (do not show new

message indication).

17.15.2. Syntax

Depending on the mode, two syntaxes are available:

• text mode

Action command

AT+CNMA

OK

• PDU mode

Action command

AT+CNMA[=<n>[,<length>[<CR> PDU is entered <ctrl-Z/ESC>]]]

OK

Read command

AT+CNMA?

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 99

Test command

AT+CNMA=?

OK

17.15.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: type of acknowledgement in PDU mode

0 send RP-ACK without PDU (same as TEXT mode)

1 send RP-ACK with optional PDU message

2 send RP-ERR with optional PDU message

<length>: length of the PDU message

Please refer to GSM 03.40 Recommendation [4] for other PDU negative

acknowledgement codes.

17.15.4. Parameter Storage

None.

17.15.5. Examples

Example of acknowledgement of a new message in TEXT mode:

Command Responses

AT+CSMS=1

Note: SMS AT commands compatible with GSM 07.05

Phase 2 + version [1]

OK

AT+CMGF=1

Note: Set TEXT mode

OK

Note: TEXT mode valid

AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0

Note: <mt>=2

OK

+CMT: "123456","98/10/01,12:30

00+00",129,4,32,240,"15379",129,5

Received message

Note: Message received

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 100

Command Responses

AT+CNMA

Note: Acknowledge the message received

OK

Note: Send positive acknowledgement to the network

AT+CNMA

Note: Try to acknowledge again

+CMS ERROR: 340

Note: No +CNMA acknowledgment expected

Example of acknowledgement of a new message in PDU mode:

Command Responses

AT+CSMS=1

Note: SMS AT commands compatible with GSM 07.05

Phase 2 + version

OK

AT+CMGF=0

Note: Set PDU mode

OK

Note: PDU mode valid

AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0

Note: <mt>=2

OK

+CMT:

,2907913366003000F1240B913366920547F300000

03003419404800B506215D42ECFE7E17319

Note: Message received

AT+CNMA=2,2<CR>>00D3 <Ctrl-Z>

Note: Negative ACK to the SMS. Reason is: memory

capacity exceeded

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Message Status Modification +WMSC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 101

17.16. Message Status Modification +WMSC

17.16.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows the manipulation of a message status. The

accepted status changes are from READ to NOT READ and vice versa, and from SENT to NOT

SENT and vice versa.

17.16.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WMSC=<loc>,<status>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Message Status Modification +WMSC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 102

17.16.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<loc>: location number of the stored message

integer type

<stat>: status of message in memory (PDU mode)

0 received unread messages

1 received read messages

2 stored unsent messages

3 stored sent messages

<stat>: status of message in memory (text mode)

"REC

UNREAD"

received unread messages

"REC READ" received read messages

"STO UNSENT" stored unsent messages (default if ommited)

"STO SENT" stored sent messages

17.16.4. Parameter Storage

None.

17.16.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CMGR=2 +CMGR: "REC

READ","+336290918",,"99/05/0114:19:44+04"

Hello All of you !

OK

AT+WMSC=2,"REC UNREAD" OK

AT+CMGR=2 +CMGR: "REC

UNREAD","+336290918",,"99/05/01

14:19:44+04"

Hello All of you !

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Un-change SMS Status +WUSS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 103

17.17. Un-change SMS Status +WUSS

17.17.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used to keep the SMS Status to UNREAD after +CMGR

or +CMGL.

17.17.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WUSS=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+WUSS?

+WUSS: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+WUSS=?

+WUSS: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

17.17.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: SMS status change mode

1 the SMS status will not change

0 the SMS status will change (default value)

17.17.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM. The default value can be restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Un-change SMS Status +WUSS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 104

17.17.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WUSS=? +WUSS: (0-1)

OK

AT+WUSS=1 OK

+CMTI: "SM",10

Note: SMS has been received in index 10

AT+CMGR=10 +CMGR: "REC

UNREAD","+33660669023",,"03/02/13,18:36:35+00"

Do you want to change state ?

OK

AT+CMGR=10 +CMGR: "REC

UNREAD","+33660669023",,"03/02/13,18:36:35+00"<CR><LF>

Do you want to change state ?

OK

Note: The state hasn’t be updated

AT+WUSS=0 OK

+CMTI: "SM",11

Note: SMS has been received in index 11

AT+CMGR=11 +CMGR: "REC

UNREAD","+33660669023",,"03/02/13,18:56:55+00"

It is me again.

OK

AT+CMGR=11 +CMGR: "REC

UNREAD","+33660669023",,"03/02/13,18:56:55+00"<CR><LF>

It is me again.

OK

Note: The state has been updated

AT+WUSS? +WUSS: 0

OK

AT+CMGR=10 +CMGR: "REC READ","+33660669023",,

"03/02/13,18:56:55+00"

AT+WUSS? +WUSS: 0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Message Overwriting +WMGO

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 105

17.18. Message Overwriting +WMGO

17.18.1. Description

The Sierra Wireless proprietary +WMGO command is used to specify a location in the SIM or Flash

memory, for the next SMS storing with +CMGW command. The defined location is used only once:

+WMGO has to be used again to perform another overwrite.

17.18.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WMGO=<loc>

OK

Read command

AT+WMGO?

+WMGO: <loc>

OK

Test command

AT+WMGO=?

+WMGO: (list of supported <loc>s)

OK

17.18.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<loc>: location number of the SMS to write or overwrite

Number depends of the SIM or Flash memory capacity.

17.18.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Message Overwriting +WMGO

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 106

17.18.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPMS?

Note: Check the storage area

+CPMS: "SM",3,10,"SM",3,10,"SM",3,10

OK

AT+CMGW="+33146290800"<CR>

Hello how are you ?<ctrl-Z>

Note: Write a message in text mode

+CMGW: 4

OK

Note: Message stored in index 4 in the SIM

AT+WMGO=? +WMGO: (1-10)

OK

Note: Possible values for the SIM

AT+CMGW=4 OK

AT+CMGW="+33146290000"<CR>

You are overwritten

<ctrl-Z>

+CMGW: 4

OK

Note: New Message stored in index 4

17.18.6. Notes

• If the external application specifies a free location, and an incoming message is received

before the +CMGW command occurs, the product may store the incoming message at the

specified available location. If the user then issues an +CMGW command without changing

the location with another +WMGO, the received message will be overwritten.

• The location number is not kept over a software reset.

• If the storage area is changed with the +CPMS command, the value of WMGO will be reset to

0.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Copy Messages +WMCP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 107

17.19. Copy Messages +WMCP

17.19.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command copies the SMS from the SIM to the Flash or from the

Flash to the SIM.

17.19.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WMCP=<mode>[,<loc>]

OK

Read command

AT+WMCP?

OK

Test command

AT+WMCP=?

+WMCP: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <loc>s)

OK

17.19.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: copy mode

0 from the SIM to the Flash

1 from the Flash to the SIM

<loc>: location of the SMS to copy (mandatory for <mode>=1)

If this location is not defined, all the SMS will be copied.

The SMS copied will have the first free location.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Copy Messages +WMCP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 108

17.19.4. Parameter Storage

None.

17.19.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WMCP=? +WMCP: 0,(1-12)

+WMCP: 1,(1-99)

OK

Note: The location of the SMS which can be copied from the SIM

to the flash is 1 to 12 (maximum available in the SIM). The

location of the SMS which can be copied from the flash to the

SIM is 1 to 99 (the maximum available in the flash).

AT+CPMS?

Note: Read the SMS storage

+CPMS: "SM",3,10,"ME",0,99,"SM",3,10

OK

Note: Read, write…SMS from/to SIM. 3 SMS are stored in SIM.

10 is the total memory available in SIM. No SMS in Flash.

AT+CMGR=1 +CMGR: "REC UNREAD","0146290800",

"98/10/01,18:22:11+00",<CR><LF>

My test message: SMS in the SIM at

location 1

Note: Read the first SMS from the SIM OK

AT+WMCP=0,1

Note: Copy the SMS at location 1 in the SIM to the Flash

OK

AT+CPMS?

Note: Read the SMS storage

+CPMS: "SM",3,10,"ME",1,99,"SM",3,10

OK

Note: Read, write…SMS from/to SIM. 3 SMS are stored in SIM.

10 is the total memory available in SIM. 1 SMS in Flash.

AT+CPMS="ME","ME","ME"

Note: Select ME for reading, ME for writing and ME for

storing

+CPMS: 1,99,1,99,1,99

OK

AT+CMGR=1 +CMGR: "REC READ","0146290800",

"98/10/01,18:22:11+00",<CR><LF>

My test message: SMS in the SIM at

location 1

Note: Read the first SMS from the Flash OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Copy Messages +WMCP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 109

Command Responses

AT+CMGW="+33146290800"<CR>

Other test message: SMS in the Flash

at location 2<ctrl-Z>

+CMGW: 2

OK

Note: Write a message in text mode Note: Message stored in index 2 in the flash

AT+CPMS? +CPMS: "ME",2,99,"ME",2,99,"ME",2,99

OK

Note: Read the SMS storage Note: Read, write…SMS from/to the flash. 2 SMS are stored in

the flash

AT+WMCP=1,2

Note: Copy the SMS at location 2 in the flash to the SIM

OK

AT+CPMS="SM","ME","SM"

Note: Select SM for reading, ME for writing and SM for

storing

+CPMS: 4,10,2,99,4,10

OK

AT+CMGR=4 +CMGR: "REC UNREAD","+33146290800",

"98/10/01,18:22:11+00",<CR><LF>

Other test message: SMS in the Flash at

location 2

Note: Read the first SMS from the SIM OK

AT+CPMS="ME"

Note: Select ME for reading

+CPMS: 2,99,2,99,4,10

OK

AT+CMGD=0,4

Note: Erase all the SMS stored in the Flash

OK

AT+CPMS?

Note: Read the SMS storage

+CPMS: "ME",0,99,"ME",0,99,"SM",4,10

OK

Note: No SMS is stored in the flash.

AT+WMCP=0

Note: Copy all the SMS from the SIM to the Flash

OK

AT+CPMS?

Note: Read the SMS storage

+CPMS: "ME",4,99,"ME",4,99,"SM",4,10

OK

Note: 4 SMS are stored in the flash.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Save Settings +CSAS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 110

17.20. Save Settings +CSAS

17.20.1. Description

All settings specified by the +CSCA, +CNMI and +CSMP commands are stored in EEPROM if the

SIM card is a Phase 1 card or in the SIM card if it is a Phase 2 SIM card.

17.20.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CSAS

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

17.20.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None.

17.20.4. Parameter Storage

None.

17.20.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CSAS

Note: Store +CSCA and +CSMP parameters

OK

Note: Parameters saved

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Restore Settings +CRES

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 111

17.21. Restore Settings +CRES

17.21.1. Description

All settings specified in the +CSCA and +CSMP commands are restored from EEPROM if the SIM

card is Phase 1 or from the SIM card if it is a Phase 2 one.

17.21.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CRES

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

17.21.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None.

17.21.4. Parameter Storage

None.

17.21.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CRES

Note: Restore +CSCA and +CSMP parameters

OK

Note: Parameters restored

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 112

17.22. Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB

17.22.1. Description

This command selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME. It is allowed in both PDU

and text modes.

17.22.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CSCB=<mode>[,[<mids>,[,<dcs>]]]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 113

17.22.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: please refer to [1]

0 activation of CBM reception

<mids>: message Identifiers

Indicates to which type of message identifiers the ME should listen.

<dcs>: data coding schemes, please refer to [1]

string type

0 German

1 English Italian

2 French

3 Spanish Dutch

4 Swedish

5 Danish

6 Portuguese Finnish

7 Norwegian Greek

8 Turkish

9 Hungarian Polish

10 Czech

11 German

12 English Italian

13 French

14 Spanish Dutch

32 Swedish

Note: The <bm> parameter of +CNMI command controls the message indication. The activation of CBM

reception (<mode>=0) can select only specific Message Identifiers (list in <mids>) for specific

Languages (list in <dcss>), but the deactivation stops any reception of CBMs (only AT+CSCB=1 is

allowed).

17.22.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 114

17.22.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CSCB=0,"15-17,50,86",""

Note: Accept SMS-CB types, 15,16,17,50 and 86 in any

language

OK

Note: CBMs can be received

+CBM: 1000112233445566778899

Note: CBM length of a received Cell Broadcast message (SMSCB),

CBM bytes in PDU mode)

AT+CSCB=1

Note: Deactivate the reception of CBMs

OK

Note: CBM reception is completely stopped

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 115

17.23. Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM

17.23.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used to read the EF-CBMI SIM file. The EF-CBMI file is

not used with the +CSCB command.

The application should read this file (using AT+WCBM?) and combine the Message Identifiers with

those required by the application.

17.23.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WCBM=<mids>

OK

Read command

AT+WCBM?

+WCBM: <mids>

OK

Test command

None

17.23.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mids>: message Identifiers

Indicates to which type of message identifiers the ME should listen.

17.23.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Short message Commands

Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 116

17.23.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WCBM="10,100,1000,10000"

Note: Write 4 messages identifiers in EF-CBMI

OK

Note: CBMIs are stored in EF-CBMI

AT+WCBM?

Note: Read the CBMIs in EF-CBMI

+WCBM: "10,100,1000,100000"

OK

Note: 4 CBMIs are stored in EF-CBMI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 117

18. SIM Commands

18.1. Card Identification +CCID

18.1.1. Description

This command orders the product to read the EF-CCID file on the SIM card.

18.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CCID

+CCID: <CCID>

OK

Read command

AT+CCID?

+CCID: <CCID>

OK

Test command

AT+CCID=?

OK

18.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<CCID>: identification number for the SIM (20 digit)

18.1.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Card Identification +CCID

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 118

18.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CCID

Note: Get card ID

+CCID: "123456789AB111213141"

OK

Note: EF-CCID is present, hexadecimal format

AT+CCID?

Note: Get current value

+CCID: "123456789AB111213141"

OK

Note: Same result as +CCID

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Request IMSI +CIMI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 119

18.2. Request IMSI +CIMI

18.2.1. Description

This command is used to read and identify the IMSI of the SIM card.

18.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CIMI

<IMSI>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

18.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<IMSI>: IMSI of the SIM card

15 digits number

18.2.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Request IMSI +CIMI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 120

18.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CIMI

Note: Read the IMSI

208200120320598

OK

Note: IMSI value (15 digits), starting with MCC (3 digits) /

MNC (2 digits, 3 for PCS 1900)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Generic SIM Access +CSIM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 121

18.3. Generic SIM Access +CSIM

18.3.1. Description

This command allows direct control of the SIM by a distant application on the TE. The <command> is

sent without any modification to the SIM. In the same manner the SIM <response> is sent back by the

ME unchanged.

The user must then pay attention to processing SIM information within the frame specified by GSM as

specified in recommendation 3GPP 11.11 [9] (or 3GPP 51.011 [13]).

If operation mode is not allowed by the ME, a "+CME ERROR: <err>" is returned.

Between two successive +CSIM commands, there is no locking of the interface between the SIM and

the GSM application. Since in this situation some command types and parameters can modify wrong

SIM files, some operations, described below, are not allowed for the CSIM command. However, it is

possible to process them with the CRSM command.

18.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CSIM=<length>,<command>

+CSIM: <length>,<response>

OK

Read command

AT+CSIM?

OK

Test command

AT+CSIM=?

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Generic SIM Access +CSIM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 122

18.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<length>: Length of the characters that are sent to TE in <command> or <response> (two

times the actual length of the command or response). For command sent to TE, this

value must be in the range [ 10 – 522 ], else a "+CME ERROR: 3" is returned.

integer type

<command>: Command passed on by the MT to the SIM in the format as described in 3GPP 11.11

[9] (or 3GPP 51.011 [13]) (hexadecimal character format; see the +CSCS

command).

The supported commands are :

READ BINARY

READ RECORD

FETCH

STATUS

SELECT

SEEK

TERMINAL RESPONSE

ENVELOPE

TERMINAL RESPONSE

hexadecimal type

Second Byte Value not supported:

Due to the absence of locking protection, a "+CME ERROR: 3" is returned for the

following instructions ( See CRSM commands):

• D6 : UPDATE BINARY

• DC : UPDATE RECORD

• 32 : INCREASE

• 44 : REHABILITATE

• 04 : INVALIDATE

• 88 : RUN GSM ALGORITHM

• 20 : VERIFY CHV

• 24 : CHANGE CHV

• 26 : DISABLE CHV

• 28 : ENABLE CHV

• 2C : UNBLOCK CHV

• FA : SLEEP

• C0 : GET RESPONSE

Second Byte Value warning:

Due to the absence of locking, the right response may not be returned for the

following instructions (See CRSM commands).

• C2 : ENVELOPE

• A2 : SEEK

• A4 : SELECT

Fifth Byte Value Restriction:

For the following instructions (Second Byte):

• A4 : SELECT

• 10 : TERMINAL PROFILE

• C2 : ENVELOPE

• 14 : TERMINAL RESPONSE

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Generic SIM Access +CSIM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 123

• A2 : SEEK

the user must make sure that the value of the fifth Byte of the instruction corresponds

of the length of bytes (data starting from 6th byte) which follow it.

The value of the Fifth Byte must be equal of the value: <length>/2 – 5, else the

command is not send to the SIM and "CME ERROR: 3" is returned.

<response>: Response to the command passed on by the SIM to the MT in the format as

described in 3GPP 11.11 [9] (or 3GPP 51.011 [13]) (hexadecimal character format;

refer to CSCS).

hexadecimal type

18.3.4. Parameter Storage

None.

18.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CSIM=14,"A0A40000027F20"

Note: Select DF Telecom (7F20)

+CSIM: 4,"9F16"

OK

Note : Command correctly treated with length 16 for

response data

AT+CSIM? OK

AT+CSIM=? OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Restricted SIM Access +CRSM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 124

18.4. Restricted SIM Access +CRSM

18.4.1. Description

By using this command instead of Generic SIM Access +CSIM, the application has easier but more

limited access to the SIM database. This command transmits the SIM <command> and its required

parameters to the MT.

As response to the command, the MT sends the actual SIM information parameters and response

data. The MT error result code "+CME ERROR: <err>" may be returned when the command cannot

be passed to the SIM, but failure in the execution of the command in the SIM is reported in the

response parameters.

As with the +CSIM command, there is no locking between two successive commands. The user

should be aware of the precedence of the GSM application commands over the TE commands.

18.4.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CRSM=<command>[,<fileid>[,<P1>,<P2>,<P3>[,<data>]]]

+CRSM: <sw1>,<sw2>[,<response>]

OK

Read command

AT+CRSM?

OK

Test command

AT+CRSM=?

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Restricted SIM Access +CRSM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 125

18.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<command>: command passed on by the MT to the SIM (all other values are reserved); refer to

3GPP 11.11 [9] (or 3GPP 51.011 [13]).

integer type (see Note 1 below)

176 READ BINARY

178 READ RECORD

192 GET RESPONSE

242 STATUS

<fileid>: identifier of an elementary data file on SIM

mandatory for every command except STATUS

integer type (see Note 2 below)

<P1>, <P2>, <P3>: parameters passed on by the MT to the SIM

These parameters are mandatory for every command, except GET RESPONSE and

STATUS. The values are described in 3GPP 11.11 [9] (or 3GPP 51.011 [13]).

integer type

<data>: information which is to be written to the SIM (hexadecimal character format; refer to

+CSCS)

hexadecimal type

<sw1>, <sw2>: information from the SIM about the execution of the actual command

These parameters are delivered to the TE in both cases, on successful or failed

execution of the command.

integer type

<response>: response to successful completion of the command previously issued (hexadecimal

character format; refer to +CSCS)

STATUS and GET RESPONSE return data, which gives information about the

current elementary data field. This information includes the file type and size (refer to

3GPP [9] 11.11 (or 3GPP 51.011 [13]). After the READ BINARY or READ RECORD

command, the requested data will be returned.

hexadecimal type

Note: The MT internally executes all commands necessary for selecting the desired file, before performing

the actual command.

Note: The range of valid file identifiers depends on the actual SIM and is defined in 3GPP 11.11 [9] (or

3GPP 51.011 [13]). Optional files may not be present at all. This value must be in the range [0 –

65535] else a "+CME ERROR: 3" is returned.

18.4.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Restricted SIM Access +CRSM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 126

18.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CRSM=178,28474,1,4,28

Note : READ RECORD on EF-ADN (1st entry) with length 28

+CRSM:

144,0,"74657374FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF07811

032466587F9FFFFFFFFFFFF"

OK

Note : SIM response : 9000 with the data stored in SIM

AT+CRSM? OK

AT+CRSM=? OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Write Language Preference +WLPW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 127

18.5. Write Language Preference +WLPW

18.5.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command writes a Language Preference value in EF-LP.

18.5.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WLPW=<index>,<value>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Write Language Preference +WLPW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 128

18.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<index>: offset in the available languages range (SIM dependent)

integer value

<value>: example of values for languages (Please refer to [18])

0 German

1 English

2 Italian

3 French

4 Spanish

5 Dutch

6 Swedish

7 Danish

8 Portuguese

9 Finnish

10 Norwegian

11 Greek

12 Turkish

13 Hungarian

14 Polish

32 Czech

33 Hebrew

34 Arabic

35 Russian

18.5.4. Parameter Storage

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Write Language Preference +WLPW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 129

18.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WLPW=1,5

Note: Writes Language Preference equal to 5 with

index 1

OK

Note: EF-LP correctly updated

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Read Language Preference +WLPR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 130

18.6. Read Language Preference +WLPR

18.6.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command reads a Language Preference value of EF-LP. The first

indices should have the highest priority.

18.6.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WLPR=<index>

+WLPR: <value>

OK

Read command

AT+WLPR?

+WLPR: <nb>

OK

Test command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Read Language Preference +WLPR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 131

18.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<index>: offset in the available languages range (SIM dependent)

integer value

<nb>: number of non empty Language Preferences in EF-LP (SIM dependent)

integer value

<value>: example of values for languages, please refer to [18] for more information.

0 German

1 English

2 Italian

3 French

4 Spanish

5 Dutch

6 Swedish

7 Danish

8 Portuguese

9 Finnish

10 Norwegian

11 Greek

12 Turkish

13 Hungarian

14 Polish

32 Czech

33 Hebrew

34 Arabic

35 Russian

18.6.4. Parameter Storage

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM Commands

Read Language Preference +WLPR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 132

18.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WLPR? +WLPR: 4

OK

Note: Four language preferences are available in EF-LP

AT+WLPR=1

Note: Read first EF-LP index value

+WLPR: 5

OK

Note: Language preference is 5

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 133

19. SIM ToolKit Commands

19.1. Overview of SIM Application ToolKit

19.1.1. Summary

SIM ToolKit, also known as "SIM Application ToolKit" introduces functionalities, which open the way to

a broad range of value added services.

The principle is to allow service providers to develop new applications (e.g. for banking, travel, ticket

booking, etc.) for subscribers and to download them into the SIM.

This solution allows new services to be accessible to the user by adding new SIM-based applications

without modifying the embedded module.

19.1.2. Functionality

SIM ToolKit refers to the functionalities described in the GSM Technical specification 11.14 [20].

It introduces twenty five commands for the SIM. Three classes of increasing ToolKit functionalities

have been defined, with class 1 offering a subset of commands and class 3 offering the full range of

commands (Please refer to section "Support of SIM ToolKit by the M.E." in the Appendixes).

The SIM Application ToolKit supports:

• profile download,

• proactive SIM,

• data download into SIM,

• menu selection,

• call control by SIM.

19.1.3. Profile Download

The profile download instruction is sent by the customer application to the SIM as part of the

initialization. It is used to indicate which SIM Application ToolKit features are supported by the

customer application.

The AT command used for this operation is +STSF (SIM ToolKit Set Facilities).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

Overview of SIM Application ToolKit

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 134

19.1.4. Proactive SIM

A proactive SIM provides a mechanism whereby the SIM can ask the customer application to perform

certain actions.

These actions include:

• display menu,

• display given text,

• get user input,

• send a short message,

• play the requested tone,

• set up a call,

• provide location information.

This mechanism allows SIM applications to generate powerful menu-driven sequences on the

customer application and to use services available in the network.

The commands used for this operation are:

• +STIN (SIM ToolKit Indication),

• +STGI (SIM ToolKit Get Information),

• +STGR (SIM ToolKit Give Response).

19.1.5. Data Download to SIM

Data downloading to the SIM (SMS, phonebook…) allows data or programs (Java applets) received

by SMS or by Cell Broadcast to be transferred directly to the SIM Application.

This feature does not need any AT command. It is transparent to the customer application.

19.1.6. Menu Selection

A set of menu items is supplied by the SIM Application ToolKit. The menu selection command can

then be used to signal to the SIM Application which menu item is selected.

The commands used for this operation are +STIN, +STGI and +STGR.

19.1.7. Call control by SIM

The call control mechanism allows the SIM to check all dialed numbers, supplementary service

control strings and USSD strings before connecting to the network. This gives the SIM the ability to

allow, bar or modify the string before the operation starts.

The commands used for this operation are:

• +STCR (SIM ToolKit Control Response),

• +STGR (SIM ToolKit Give Response).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

Overview of SIM Application ToolKit

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 135

19.1.8. Messages exchanged during a SIM ToolKit

operation

The following figure shows the SIM ToolKit commands and unsolicited results that are exchanged.

SIERRA WIRELESS

Embedded Module

Customer

Application

AT+STSF=X,XXXXXXXX

+STIN: X

AT+STGI=X

+STGI response

AT+STGR=X,XXXXXX

STEP 1: Configuration and Activation

STEP 2: SIM sends proactive

command

STEP 3: Customer application gets all the

information.

Step 4: User response is sent to the SIM.

+STCR: X

On the first step, the customer application informs the Sierra Wireless product which facilities are

supported. This operation is performed with the +STSF (SIM ToolKit Set Facilities) command, which

also allows to activate or deactivate the SIM ToolKit functionality.

On the second step, an unsolicited result +STIN (SIM ToolKit indication) is sent by the product,

indicating to the customer application which command type the SIM Application ToolKit is running on

the SIM card. The last SIM ToolKit indication can be requested by the AT+STIN? command.

On the third step, the customer application uses the +STGI (SIM ToolKit Get Information) command to

get all the information about the SIM ToolKit command, returned by a +STIN message.

On the fourth step, the customer application uses the +STGR (SIM ToolKit Give Response) to send

its response (if any) to the SIM ToolKit Application.

The +STCR (SIM ToolKit Control response) indication is an unsolicited result sent by the SIM when

Call control functionality is activated and before the customer application has performed any outgoing

call, SMS, SS, or USSD.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Set Facilities +STSF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 136

19.2. SIM ToolKit Set Facilities +STSF

19.2.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows SIM ToolKit facilities to be activated, deactivated or

configured.

The activation or deactivation of the SIM ToolKit functionalities requires the use of the +CFUN (Set

phone functionality) command to reset the product. This operation is not necessary if PIN is not

entered yet.

19.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+STSF=<mode>[,[<Config>][,[<Timeout>][,<AutoMode>]]]

OK

Read command

AT+STSF?

+STSF: <mode>,<Config>,<Timeout>,<AutoMode>

OK

Test command

AT+STSF=?

+STSF: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <Config>s),

(list of supported <Timeout>s),(list of supported <AutoMode>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Set Facilities +STSF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 137

19.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: SIM ToolKit functionalities activation mode

0 deactivates the SIM ToolKit functionalities.

1 activates the SIM ToolKit functionalities (default value)

2 configures the SIM ToolKit functionalities.

<Config>: SIM ToolKit terminal profile

This parameter gives the list of the SIM Application ToolKit facilities that are

supported by the customer application.

Some bits of the first nine bytes are related to the product only and not to the

customer application. The product automatically sets these bits to either 0 or 1

whatever the user enters with the +STSF command.

Each facility is coded on 1 bit:

• bit = 1: facility is supported by the customer application.

• bit = 0: facility is not supported by the customer application.

Please refer to section "Structure of Terminal Profile" in the Appendixes for more

information.

range: 320060C01F0100471C-FFFFFFFF7F01005F3E

default value: 3F6BFFFF1F0100573E

<Timeout>: timeout for user responses (in units of 10 seconds).

This parameter sets the maximum time for the user action (e.g. to select an item or to

input a text).

range: 1-255 (default value:1)

<AutoMode>: automatic modes; auto response and silent mode

When autoresponse is activated, the +STIN indication for "Play Tone", "Display

Text", "Refresh", "Send SS", "Send SMS" or "Send USSD" is automatically followed

by the corresponding +STGI response.

When the silent mode is activated, the autoresponse mode is activated and no +STIN

and no +STGI indications are returned by the embedded module

0 no auto mode activated

1 auto response mode activated

2 silent mode activated (default value)

19.2.4. Parameter Storage

All parameters are stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Set Facilities +STSF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 138

19.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+STSF=?

Note: Test command SIM ToolKit Set Facilities

+STSF: (0-2),(320060C01F0100471CFFFFFFFF7F01005F3E)),(

1-255),(0-2)

OK

AT+STSF? +STSF: 0," 1F6BFFFF1F0100573E ",3,2

Note: No activation of SIM ToolKit functionality

AT+STSF=2, "FFFFFFFF7F01005F3E",,0

Note: Set all SIM ToolKit facilities (class 3).

OK

AT+STSF=1

Note: Activation of SIM ToolKit functionality

OK

AT+CFUN=1 OK

Note: Reboot embedded module.

AT+STSF? +STSF: 1,"FFFFFFFF7F01005F3E",3,0

OK

Note: SIM ToolKit functionality activated with all facilities

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Indication +STIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 139

19.3. SIM ToolKit Indication +STIN

19.3.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows the customer application to identify the proactive

command sent via a mechanism of unsolicited SIM ToolKit indications.

The last SIM ToolKit indication sent by the SIM can be requested by the AT+STIN? command. This

command is only usable between the sending of the STIN indication by the SIM (see Messages

exchanged during a SIM ToolKit operation step 2) and the response of the user with the +STGI

command.

19.3.2. Syntax

Action command

None

Read command

AT+STIN?

+STIN: <CmdType>

OK

Test command

AT+STIN=?

OK

Unsolicited response

+STIN: <CmdType>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Indication +STIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 140

19.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<CmdType>: type of proactive command or error sent by the SIM

0 "Setup Menu"

1 "Display Text"

2 "Get Inkey"

3 "Get Input"

4 "Setup Call"

5 "Play Tone" (*)

6 "Sel Item"

7 "Refresh" (*)

8 "Send SS" (*)

9 "Send SMS" (*)

10 "Send USSD" (*)

11 "SETUP EVENT LIST"

12 a "SET UP IDLE MODE TEXT"

13 a "SEND DTMF"

14 a "LANGUAGE NOTIFICATION"

93 "SMS-PP Data Download" failed due to SIM BUSY

94 "SMS-PP Data Download" failed due to SIM ERROR

98 timeout when no response from user

99 "End Session"

(*)if the automatic response parameter is activated, this indication is followed by the corresponding

+STGI response.

19.3.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Indication +STIN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 141

19.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

+STIN: 0

Note: "Setup Menu" proactive command has been sent by the SIM.

AT+STIN?

Note: Ask for the last SIM ToolKit indication sent by

the SIM

+STIN: 0

OK

Note: The last SIM ToolKit indication was a "Setup Menu"

AT+STGI=0 +STGI: "Toolkit Menu"+STGI: 1,4,"Item 1",0

+STGI: 2,4,"Item 2",0

OK

+STGI: 99

Note: Display the SIM ToolKit application menu

AT+STIN?

Note: Ask for the last SIM ToolKit indication sent by

the SIM

+CME ERROR: 4

Note: Operation not supported, the +STGI command has been

already used

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 142

19.4. SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI

19.4.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows to get the information (e.g. text to display, menu

information, priorities…) of a proactive command sent by the SIM.

The information is returned only after receiving a SIM ToolKit indication (+STIN).

19.4.2. Syntax

Depending on the value of the <CmdType> parameter several response syntaxes are available:

• For <CmdType>=0: get information about "Setup Menu" (No action expected from SIM).

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI: <Alpha Identifier menu>

+STGI: <Id>,<NbItems>,<AlphaId Label>,<HelpInfo>[,<NextActionId>]

[+STGI: <Id>,<NbItems>,<AlphaId Label>,<HelpInfo>[,<NextActionId>]

[…]]

OK

• For <CmdType>=1: get information about "Display Text" (No action expected from SIM).

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI: <Prior>,<Text>,<ClearMode>

OK

• For <CmdType>=2: get information about "Get Inkey" (SIM expects key pressed sent using

+STGR)

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI: <InkeyFormat>,<HelpInfo>[,<TextInfo>]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 143

• For <CmdType>=3: get information about ‘"Get Input" (SIM expects key input sent using

+STGR)

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI:

<InputFormat>,<EchoMode>,<SizeMin>,<SizeMax>,<HelpInfo>[,<TextInfo>,

<DefaultText>]

OK

• For <CmdType>=4: get information about "Setup Call" (If <Class> is omitted, call is

processed as a voice call)

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI: <Type>,<CalledNb>,<SubAddress>,<Class>,<AlphaId>,<AlphaId2>

OK

• For <CmdType>=5: get information about "Play Tone" (No action)

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI: <ToneType>[,<TimeUnit>,<TimeInterval>,<TextInfo>]

OK

• For <CmdType>=6: get information about "Sel Item" (SIM expects an item choice sent using

+STGR)

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI: <PresetStyle>,<PresetChoice>,<DefaultItem>, <Alpha Identifier menu>

+STGI: <Id>,<NbItems>,<AlphaId Label>,<HelpInfo>[,<NextActionId>]

[+STGI: <Id>,<NbItems>,<AlphaId Label>,<HelpInfo>[,<NextActionId>]

[…]]

OK

• For <CmdType>=7: get information about "Refresh" (No action, "Refresh" done automatically

by product).

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI: <RefreshType>

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 144

• For <CmdType>=8: get information about "Send SS" (No action, "Send SS" done

automatically by product).

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI: <TextInfo>

OK

• For <CmdType>=9: get information about "Send SMS" (No action, "Send SMS" done

automatically by product).

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI: <TextInfo>

OK

• For <CmdType>=10: get information about "Send USSD" proactive command. (No action,

"Send USSD" done automatically by product)

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI: <TextInfo>

OK

• For <CmdType>=11: get information about "Setup Event List".

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI: <Evt>

OK

• For <CmdType>=12: get information about "Setup Idle Mode Text".

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI: <Text>

OK

• For <CmdType>=13: get information about "Send DTMF".

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI: <TextInfo>

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 145

• For <CmdType>=14: get information about "Language Notification".

Action command

AT+STGI=<CmdType>

+STGI: <Specific>[,<Code>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+STGI=?

+STGI: (list of supported <CmdType>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 146

19.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Alpha Identifier menu>: alpha identifier of the main menu

string type

<Id>: menu item Identifier

range: 1-255

<NbItems>: number of items in the main menu

range: 1-255

<AlphaId Label>: alpha identifier label of items

string type (ASCII format)

<HelpInfo>: help information availability

0 not available

1 available

<NextActionId>: next proactive command identifier

integer type

<Prior>: display priority

0 normal

1 high

<Text>: text to display

string type (ASCII format)

<ClearMode>: message clearing mode

0 clear message after a delay (3 seconds)

1 wait for user to clear message

<InkeyFormat>: "Get Inkey" format

0 Digit (0-9, *, #,and +)

1 SMS alphabet default

2 UCS2

3 Yes/No (y and n)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 147

<Textinfo>: text information

string type (ASCII format)

<InputFormat>: "Get Input" format

0 digit (0-9, *, #,and +)

1 SMS alphabet default

2 UCS2

3 unpacked format

4 packed format

<EchoMode>: echo mode

0 off

1 on

<SizeMin>: minimum length of input

range: 1-255

<SizeMax>: maximum length of input

range: 1-255

<DefaultText>: default input text

string type (ASCII format)

<Type>: call behaviour

0 set up call but only if not currently busy on another call

1 set up call, putting all other calls (if any) on hold

2 set up call, disconnecting all other calls (if any)

<CalledNb>: called party number

string type (ASCII format)

<SubAdress>: called party sub-address

string type (ASCII format)

<Class>: call class

0 voice call

1 data call

2 fax call

<Alpha Id>: text information for user confirmation phase

string type (ASCII format)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 148

<Alpha Id2>: text information for call set-up phase and calling phase

string type (ASCII format)

<ToneType>: tone type

0 dial

1 busy

2 congestion

3 radio ack

4 dropped

5 error

6 call waiting

7 ringing

8 general beep

9 positive beep.

10 negative beep.

<TimeUnit>: time unit for < TimeInterval>

0 minutes

1 seconds

2 tenths of seconds

<TimeInterval>: time required for tone playing expressed in <TimeUnit>

range: 1-255

<PresentStyle>: presentation type

0 unspecified

1 specified in <PresentChoice>

<PresentChoice>: presentation choice for <PresentStyle>=1

0 choice of data values

1 choice of navigation options

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 149

<DefaultItem>: default item identifier

range: 1-255

<RefreshType>: refresh type

0 SlM initialization and full file change notification

1 file change notification

2 SIM initialization and file change notification

3 SIM initialization

4 SIM reset

<Evt>: setup event list

1 reporting asked for "Idle Screen"

2 reporting asked for "User Activity"

3 reporting asked for "Idle Screen" and "User Activity"

4 cancellation of reporting event

<Specific>: language notification type

0 non specific

1 specific

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 150

<Code>: 2 character code for the language

The number indicated after the name refers to numeric value for the language in

ISO 639 [16].

If non-specific, no <Code> will be defined.

See Notes for UCS2 format texts.

"de" German (0)

"en" English (1)

"it" Italian (2)

fr" French (3)

"es" Spanish (4)

"nl " Dutch (5)

"sv" Swedish (6)

"da" Danish (7)

"pt" Portuguese (8)

"fi" Finnish (9)

"no" Norwegian (10)

"el" Greek (11)

"tr" Turkish (12)

"hu" Hungarian (13)

"pl" Polish (14)

"cs" Czech (32)

"he" Hebrew (33)

"ar" Arabic (34)

"ru" Russian (35)

"is" Icelandic (36)

19.4.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 151

19.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

+STIN: 0

Note: "Setup Menu" proactive command has been sent by the SIM.

AT+STGI=0 +STGI: "SIM TOOLKIT MAIN MENU"

+STGI: 1,3,"BANK",0

+STGI: 2,3,"QUIZ",0

+STGI: 3,3,"WEATHER",0

OK

Note:Get information about the main menu Note: Main menu contains 3 items

19.4.6. Notes

For the UCS2 format, texts are displayed in Hexa ASCII format. Example: when the SIM sends a

TextString containing 0x00 0x41, the text displayed is "0041". (For details see section "3.6 Coding of

Alpha fields in the SIM for UCS2" of the Appendixes)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Give Response +STGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 152

19.5. SIM ToolKit Give Response +STGR

19.5.1. Description

This command allows the application/user to select an item in the main menu, or to answer the

following proactive commands:

• GET INKEY key pressed by the user

• GET INPUT message entered by the user

• SELECT ITEM selected item

• SETUP CALL user confirmation

• DISPLAY TEXT user confirmation to clear the message

• SETUP EVENT LIST reporting events

• SETUP IDLE MODE TEXT reporting events

It is also possible to terminate the current proactive command session by sending a Terminal

Response to the SIM, with the following parameters:

• BACKWARD MOVE process a backward move

• BEYOND CAPABILITIES command beyond ME capabilities

• UNABLE TO PROCESS ME is currently unable to process

• NO RESPONSE no response from the user

• END SESSION user abort

19.5.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+STGR=<CmdType>[,<Result>[,<Data>]]

[> <input text> <ctrl-Z/ESC>]

OK

Read command

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Give Response +STGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 153

Test command

AT+STGR=?

OK

19.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<CmdType>: command type

0 item selection in the main menu

1 user confirmation to clear a "DISP TEXT"

2 response for a "GET INKEY"

3 response for a "GET INPUT"

4 response for a "SETUP CALL"

6 response for a "SEL ITEM"

11 response for a "SETUP EVENT LIST"

12 response for a "SETUP IDLE MODE TEXT"

95 send "BACKWARD MOVE" to SIM

96 send "BEYOND CAPABILITIES" to SIM

97 send "UNABLE TO PROCESS" to SIM

98 send "NO RESPONSE" to SIM

99 send "END SESSION" to SIM

• Values when <CmdType>=0 (Select an item from the main menu)

<Result>: user action

1 item selected by the user

2 help information required by user

<Data>: item identifier of the item selected by the user

integer type

• Values when <CmdType>=1 (Select an item from the main menu)

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Give Response +STGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 154

• Values when <CmdType>=2 (GET INKEY, see Notes)

<Result>: user action

0 session ended by user

1 response given by the user

2 help information required by user

<Data>: key pressed by the user

string type

• Values when <CmdType>=3 (GET INPUT, see Notes)

<Result>: user action

0 session ended by user

1 response given by the user

2 help information required by user

<input text>: text sent by user

string type

• Values when <CmdType>=4 (SETUP CALL)

<Result>: user action

0 user refuses the call

1 user accepts call

2 user accepts call; call is started by applicative software

• Values when <CmdType>=6 (SELECT ITEM)

<Result>: user action

0 session terminated by the user

1 Item selected by the user

2 help information required by the user

3 return to the back item

<Data>: item identifier selected by the user

integer type

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Give Response +STGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 155

• Values when <CmdType>=11 (SETUP EVENT LIST)

<Result>: user action

1 user selects idle screen

2 user selects user activity

• Values when <CmdType>=12 (SETUP IDLE MODE TEXT)

<Result>: user action

0 user successfully integrates the idle mode text

1 user is not able to successfully integrate the idle mode text

• For all other cases, no values are needed.

19.5.4. Parameter Storage

None.

19.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

+STIN: 0

Note: The main menu has been sent from the SIM.

AT+STGI=0 +STGI: 1,3,"BANK",0

+STGI: 2,3,"QUIZ",0

+STGI: 3,3,"WEATHER",0

OK

Note: Get information about the main menu Note:The main menu contains 3 items

AT+STGR=0,1,1 OK

+STIN: 6

Note: The item 2 of the main menu has been selected.

+STIN: 4

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Give Response +STGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 156

Command Responses

AT+STGI=4 +STGI: 0,"0146290800","",0

OK

AT+STGR=4,2 OK

ATD0146290800 OK

+STIN: 99

AT+STGI=6

Note: Get information about the BANK menu

+STGI: 1,"BANK"

+STGI: 1,2,"PERSONAL ACCOUNT ENQUIRY",1

+STGI: 2,2,"NEWS",0

OK

Note: The BANK menu contains two items.

AT+STGR=6,1,1 OK

Note: Select Item 1

+STIN: 99

Note: End of session

19.5.6. Notes

• For a GET INKEY with format set to "Yes/No", the data shall contain:

􀂃 the value "y" when the answer is "positive",

􀂃 the value "n" when the answer is "negative".

• For inputs in UCS2 format, the data are entered in ASCII format.

Example: For "8000410042FFFF" entered, the SIM receives 0x00 0x41 0x00 0x42 with UCS2

DCS. (about the different UCS2 syntaxes, please refer to section "Coding of Alpha fields in

the SIM for UCS2" of the Appendixes to AT Commands Interface Guide).

• Comments upon Terminal Responses:

􀂃 For the SETUP MENU Proactive Command, it is only possible to send a Terminal

Response after the "+STIN: 0" indication, not after a "AT+STGI=0" request. For the other

Proactive Commands, it is possible to send a Terminal Response after the "+STIN"

indication or after the "+STGI" command.

􀂃 All of the Terminal Responses are not possible with all of the Proactive Commands.

Compatibility between available Terminal Responses and Proactive Commands is given

in section "Support of SIM ToolKit by the M.E." of the Appendixes to AT Commands

Interface Guide. If a Terminal Response is attempted during a incompatible Proactive

Command session, a "+CME ERROR: 3" will be returned.

• If AT+STGR=4,2 command is sent to confirm a STK Setup Call, the applicative software must

send the ATD command (using the call number given by AT+STGI=4 command) within a

timeout value to define (check existing internal STK timeouts).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Control Response +STCR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 157

19.6. SIM ToolKit Control Response +STCR

19.6.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary unsolicited response allows the customer application to identify "Call

Control" and "SMS Control" responses when an outgoing call is initiated or an outgoing SMS is sent

and the call control facility is activated. This is also applicable to SS calls.

19.6.2. Syntax

Action command

None

Read command

None

Test command

None

Unsolicited response

+STCR: <Result>[,<Number>,<MODestAddr>,<TextInfo>]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Control Response +STCR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 158

19.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Result>: SIM response to the operation

0 control response not allowed

1 control response with modification

<Number>: called number, Service Center Address or SS String

string type (ASCII format)

<MODestAddr>: MO destination address

string type (ASCII format)

<TextInfo>: text information

string type (ASCII format)

19.6.4. Parameter Storage

None.

19.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

+STIN: 9

Note: "Send SMS" proactive command has been sent by the SIM.

AT+STGI=9

Note: get information about "Send SMS”

+STGI: "Send SM"

+STCR: 1,"+112233445566779","+012345679"

OK

Note: The “Send SMS” was allowed with modifications. The SC

address was changed from +012345679 to +112233445566779

+STIN: 99

Note: End of session

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Indication +STRIL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 159

19.7. SIM ToolKit Indication +STRIL

19.7.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows the customer application to exchange SIM ToolKit

messages directly with the SIM card, using the unsolicited indication +STRIL to get the full command

string.

19.7.2. Syntax

Action command

None

Read command

None

Test command

None

Unsolicited response

+STRIL: <CmdTreated>,<Command string>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

SIM ToolKit Commands

SIM ToolKit Indication +STRIL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 160

19.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<CmdTreated>:

0 the command must be treated by the application

1 the command is already treated by the embedded module

<Command string>: SIM command string in hexadecimal format

string type

19.7.4. Parameter Storage

None.

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 161

20. Supplementary Services

Commands

20.1. List Current Calls +CLCC

20.1.1. Description

This command is used to return a list of current calls.

20.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CLCC

[+CLCC: <id>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>[,<number>,<type>[,<alpha>]]][…]

OK

Read command

AT+CLCC?

OK

Test command

AT+CLCC=?

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

List Current Calls +CLCC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 162

20.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<id>: call identification

integer type

range: 1-7

<dir>: call direction

0 mobile originated (MO) call

1 mobile terminated (MT) call

<stat>: call state

0 active

1 held

2 dialing (MO call)

3 alerting (MO call)

4 incoming call (MT call)

5 waiting call (MT call)

<mode>: teleservice

0 voice

1 data

2 fax

9 unknown

<mpty>: multiparty

0 call is not one of multiparty (conference) call parties

1 call is one of multiparty (conference) call parties

<number>: phone number in format specified by <type>

string type

<type>: TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

List Current Calls +CLCC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 163

<alpha>: phonebook number entry

optional alphanumeric representation of <number>, corresponding to the

entry found in phonebook. (for UCS2 format see commands examples

+CLIP, +CCWA or +COLP)

string type

20.1.4. Parameter Storage

None.

20.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

RING

Note: Incoming call

AT+CLCC +CLCC: 1,1,4,0,0,"0123456789",129

OK

ATA OK

Note: Answering the call

AT+CLCC +CLCC: 1,1,1,0,0,"0123456789",129

OK

ATH

Note: Releasing the call

OK

ATD0123456789;

Note: Outgoing call

AT+CLCC +CLCC: 1,0,2,0,0,"0123456789",129

Note: Before the called party is ringing OK

AT+CLCC +CLCC: 1,0,3,0,0,"0123456789",129

Note: The called party is ringing OK

OK

Note: Response to dial command

AT+CLCC +CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"0123456789",129

Note: The call is being answered OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Call Related Supplementary Services +CHLD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 164

20.2. Call Related Supplementary Services +CHLD

20.2.1. Description

This command is used to manage call hold and multiparty conversation (conference call). Calls can

be put on hold, recovered, released or added to a conversation.

Call hold and multiparty are only applicable to teleservice 11 (speech telephony).

20.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CHLD=<n>

OK

Read command

AT+CHLD?

OK

Test command

AT+CHLD=?

+CHLD: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Call Related Supplementary Services +CHLD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 165

20.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: call related services

0 release all held calls or set User Determined User Busy (UDUB) for a waiting call.

1 release all active calls (if any exist) and accepts the other (held or waiting) call.

1X release a specific call X (active, held or waiting).

2 place all active calls (if any exist) on hold and accepts the other (held or waiting)

call.

2X place all active calls on hold except call X with which communication is

supported.

3 add a held call to the conversation.

4 connect the two calls and disconnect the subscriber from both calls (Explicit Call

Transfer).

20.2.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Call Related Supplementary Services +CHLD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 166

20.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CHLD=?

+CHLD: (0-4,11-17,21-27)

OK

ATD0123456789; OK

+WIND: 5,1

AT+CLCC

+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"0123456789",129

OK

+WIND: 5,2

Note: incoming call in waiting state

AT+CLCC

Note: Com id 1 is active, com id 2 is in waiting state

+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"0123456789",129

+CLCC: 2,1,5,0,0

OK

AT+CHLD=2 OK

AT+CLCC +CLCC: 1,0,1,0,0,"0123456789",129

+CLCC: 2,1,0,0,0

OK

Note: Com id 1 is held, com id 2 is active

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Calling Line Identification Presentation +CLIP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 167

20.3. Calling Line Identification Presentation +CLIP

20.3.1. Description

This command enables the Calling Line Identification Presentation supplementary service. When

presentation of the CLI is enabled (and the calling subscriber allows the function), +CLIP unsolicited

response is returned after every RING (or +CRING) result code.

20.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CLIP=<n>

OK

Read command

AT+CLIP?

+CLIP: <n>,<m>

OK

Test command

AT+CLIP=?

+CLIP: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

Unsolicited response

+CLIP: <number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype>[,[<alpha>][,<CLI validity>]]]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Calling Line Identification Presentation +CLIP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 168

20.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: CLIP mode in the TA

0 disable (default value)

1 enable

<m>: subscriber CLIP service status in the network

0 CLIP not provisioned

1 CLIP provisioned

2 unknown (no network…)

<number>: phone number

string type

<type>: TON/NPI type of address octet for <number>. (refer to GSM 04.08 subclause

10.5.4.7 [6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

<number> does not include the international access code character "+"

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

<number> includes the international access code character "+"

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<subaddr> not supported

<satype>: not supported

<alpha>: phonebook name associated with <number>

string type

<CLI validity>: not supported

20.3.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be restored

using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Calling Line Identification Presentation +CLIP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 169

20.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CLIP=1

Note: Enable CLIP

OK

AT+CLIP?

Note: Ask for current functionality

+CLIP:1,1

OK

Note: CLIP is enabled and provisioned

RING

Note: Incoming call

+CLIP: "0146290800",129,1,,"FRED"

Note: Incoming call with number and name presentation

RING

Note: Incoming call

+CLIP: "0146290800",129,1,,"8000204212FFFF"

Note: Incoming call with number and name presentation (UCS2

format)

RING

Note: Incoming call

+CLIP: "0146290800",161

Note: Incoming call not found in any phonebook

AT+CLIP=? +CLIP: (0-1)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Calling Line Identification Restriction +CLIR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 170

20.4. Calling Line Identification Restriction +CLIR

20.4.1. Description

This command enables the Calling Line Identification Restriction supplementary service.

20.4.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CLIR=<n>

OK

Read command

AT+CLIR?

+CLIR: <n>,<m>

OK

Test command

AT+CLIR=?

+CLIR: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

20.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: CLIR mode for outgoing calls

0 Presentation indicator is used according to the subscription of the CLIR service.

(default value)

1 CLIR invocation

2 CLIR suppression

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Calling Line Identification Restriction +CLIR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 171

<m>: subscriber CLIR status in the network

0 CLIR not provisioned

1 CLIR provisioned in permanent mode

2 unknown (no network…)

3 CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted

4 CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed

20.4.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM witghout using AT&W command.

20.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CLIR=2 OK

AT+CLIR?

Note: Ask for current functionality

+CLIR: 2,4

OK

AT+CLIR=? +CLIR: (0-2)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Connected Line Identification Presentation +COLP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 172

20.5. Connected Line Identification Presentation

+COLP

20.5.1. Description

This command enables the COnnected Line identification Presentation supplementary service. This

can be useful for call forwarding of the connected line. When presentation of the connected line

identification is enabled (and the calling subscriber allows the function), +COLP unsolicited response

is returned in response of an ATD command.

20.5.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+COLP=<n>

OK

Read command

AT+COLP?

+COLP: <n>,<m>

OK

Test command

AT+COLP=?

+COLP: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

Unsolicited response

+COLP: <number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype>[,<alpha>]]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Connected Line Identification Presentation +COLP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 173

20.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: parameter sets/shows the result code presentation status in the TA

0 disable (default value)

1 enable

<m>: parameter shows the subscriber COLP service status in the network

0 COLP not provisioned

1 COLP provisioned

2 unknown (no network)

<number>: phone number

string type

<type>: TON/NPI Type of address octet for <number> (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7

[6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

<number> does not include the international access code character "+"

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

<number> includes the international access code character "+"

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<subaddr> subaddress

string type

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Connected Line Identification Presentation +COLP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 174

<satype>: TON/NPI Type of address octet for <subaddr> (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7

[6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

<subaddr> does not include the international access code character "+"

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

<subaddr> includes the international access code character "+".

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<alpha>: phonebook name associated with <number>

string type

20.5.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

20.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+COLP=1

Note: Activate COLP

OK

AT+COLP?

Note: Ask for current functionality

+COLP:1,1

OK

Note: COLP is enabled and provisioned

ATD146290800; +COLP: "0146290800",129,,"SIERRA WIRELESS"

or

+COLP: "0146290800",129,1,,"8000204212FFFF"

OK

Note: Outgoing call Note:

"8000204212FFFF": UCS2 format

Connected outgoing line number and name presentation

AT+COLP=? +COLP: (0-1)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 175

20.6. Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN

20.6.1. Description

This command allows to configure the supplementary service related network initiated notifications.

20.6.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CSSN=<n>,<m>

OK

Read command

AT+CSSN?

+CSSN: <n>,<m>

OK

Test command

AT+CSSN=?

+CSSN: (list of supported <n>s),(list of supported <m>s)

OK

Intermediate response

+CSSI: <code1>[,<index>]

Note: +CSSI becomes a unsolicited response in the case of +WBHV: 2,1.

Unsolicited response

+CSSU: <code2>[,<index>[,<number>,<type>]]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 176

20.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: MO supplementary service notification

0 disable (default value)

1 enable

When a supplementary service notification is received after a mobile

originated call setup, intermediate result code +CSSI is sent before any

other MO call setup result codes.

<m>: MT supplementary service notification

0 disable (default value)

1 enable

When a supplementary service notification is received during a call,

unsolicited result code +CSSU is sent.

<code1>: manufacturer specific service code

0 unconditional call forwarding is active

1 some of the conditional call forwarding are active

2 call has been forwarded

3 call is waiting

4 Closed User Group call, with CUG <index>

5 outgoing calls are barred

6 incoming calls are barred

7 CLIR suppression rejected

8 call has been deflected

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 177

<code2>: service code

0 forwarded call (MT call setup)

1 closed user Group call, with CUG <index>

2 call has been put on hold (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may

be present)

3 call has been retrieved (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may

be present)

4 multiparty call entered (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may

be present)

5 call on hold has been released (during a voice call)

7 call is being connected (alerting) with the remote party in alerting state in

Explicit Call Transfer operation (during a voice call)

8 call has been connected with the other remote party in Explicit Call Transfer

operation (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may be present)

9 this is a deflected call (MT call setup)

10 additional incoming call forwarded

<index>: closed user group

string type

<number>: phone number

string type

<type>: TON/NPI Type of address octet of <number> (refer GSM 04.08 subclause

10.5.4.7 [6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

20.6.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> and <m> parameters are stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can

be restored using AT&F command.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 178

20.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CSSN=? +CSSN: (0-1),(0-1)

OK

AT+CSSN? +CCSN: 0,0

OK

AT+CSSN=0,1 OK

ATD0123456789; OK

+CCWA: "9876543210",128,1

Note: Call waiting

AT+CHLD=2

Note: Accept the waiting call and place the active one

on hold

OK

+CSSU: 5

Note: The held call was released (by the remote)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Unstructured Supplementary Service Data +CUSD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 179

20.7. Unstructured Supplementary Service Data

+CUSD

20.7.1. Description

This command is used to:

• enable or disable the CUSD indication sent to the application by the product when an

incoming USSD is received

• send and receive USSD strings

Note: The USSD supplementary service is described in GSM 02.90 [24]. It is based on sequences of digits

which may be entered by a mobile user with a handset. A sequence entered is sent to the network

which replies with an alphanumerical string, for display only, or for display plus request for the next

sequence

20.7.2. Syntax

• to enable disable

Action command

AT+CUSD=<n>[,<str>[<dcs>]]

OK

Read command

AT+CUSD?

+CUSD: <n>

OK

Test command

AT+CUSD=?

+CUSD: (list of supported<n>s)

OK

Unsolicited response

+CUSD: <m>[,<str>[,<dcs>]]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Unstructured Supplementary Service Data +CUSD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 180

20.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: requested operation

0 disable the result code presentation (default value)

1 enable the result code presentation

2 cancel session (not applicable to read command response)

<m>: USSD status

0 no further user action required (network initiated USSD-Notify, or no further

information needed after mobile initiated operation)

1 further user action required (network initiated USSD-Request, or further

information needed after mobile initiated operation)

2 USSD terminated by network

3 other local client has responded

4 operation not supported

5 network timeout

<str>: USSD string

converted in the selected character set (please refer to +CSCS)

string type

<dcs>: data coding scheme

integer type

Refer to [5] for more information.

20.7.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W. The default value can be restored

using AT&F command.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Unstructured Supplementary Service Data +CUSD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 181

20.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CUSD=? +CUSD: (0-2)

OK

AT+CUSD=1,"#123#" OK

+CUSD: 1,"02/08 report:0h04mn00S",15

Note: USSD reponse from network

AT+CUSD? +CUSD: 1

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Call Forwarding +CCFC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 182

20.8. Call Forwarding +CCFC

20.8.1. Description

This command allows control of the call forwarding supplementary service.

20.8.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CCFC=<reason>,<mode>[,<number>[,<type>[,<class>[,<subaddr>

[,<satype>[,<time>]]]]]]

[+CCFC: <status>,<class>[,<number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype>

[,<time>]]][…]]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CCFC=?

+CCFC: (list of supported <reason>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Call Forwarding +CCFC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 183

20.8.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<reason>: call forwarding reason

0 unconditional

1 mobile busy

2 no reply

3 not reachable

4 all call forwarding

5 all conditional call forwarding

<mode>: requested operation

0 disable

1 enable

2 interrogate

3 registration

4 erasure unconditional

<number>: phone number

string type

<type>: TON/NPI Type of address octet. (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6]); default

145 when dialing string includes international access code character “+”, otherwise

129

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

<number> does not include the international access code character "+"

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

<number> includes the international access code character "+"

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Call Forwarding +CCFC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 184

<class>: call class

The combination of different classes is not supported, it will only result in the

activation/deactivation/status request of all classes (7).

1 voice

2 data

4 fax

7 voice, data and fax (default value if omitted)

8 short messages

<subaddr>: not supported

<satype>: not supported

<time>: time to wait

1-30 for <reason> = 2 (No reply), 4 (all calls forwarding) and 5 (all conditional call

forwarding), (1 to 30) in seconds before call is forwarded

default value: 20

<status>: call forwarding status

0 not active

1 active

20.8.4. Parameter Storage

None.

20.8.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CCFC=0,3,"0146290800"

Note: Register to an unconditional call forwarding for all

classes

OK

AT+CCFC=0,2

Note: Interrogate unconditional call forwarding

+CCFC: 1,1,"0146290800",129

Note: Call forwarding active for voice

+CCFC: 1,2,"0146290800",129

Note: Call forwarding active for data

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Call Forwarding +CCFC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 185

Command Responses

+CCFC: 1,4,"0146290800",129

OK

Note: Call forwarding active for fax

AT+CCFC=0,4

Note: Erase unconditional call forwarding

OK

20.8.6. Notes

If the FDN phonebook is activated, the registration is restricted to the phone numbers written in it.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Call Waiting +CCWA

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 186

20.9. Call Waiting +CCWA

20.9.1. Description

This command allows to control the call waiting supplementary service.

The product will send a +CCWA unsolicited result code when the call waiting service is enabled.

20.9.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CCWA=<n>,[<mode>[,<class>]]

[+CCWA:<status>,<class>[…]]

OK

Read command

AT+CCWA?

+CCWA: <n>

OK

Test command

AT+CCWA=?

+CCWA: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

Unsolicited response

+CCWA: <number>,<type>[,<class>][,<alpha>]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Call Waiting +CCWA

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 187

20.9.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: result code presentation status in the TA

0 disable

1 enable

<mode>:

0 disable

1 enable

2 query

<number>: phone number in ASCII format

string type

<type>: TON/NPI Type of address octet for <number>. (refer GSM 04.08 subclause

10.5.4.7 [6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<class>: call class

The combination of different classes is not supported. It will only result in the

activation/deactivation/status request of all classes (7).

1 voice

2 data

4 fax

7 voice, data and fax (default value if omitted)

8 short messages

<status>: call waiting status

0 not active

1 active

<alpha>: phonebook name associated with <number>

string type

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Call Waiting +CCWA

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 188

20.9.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F

20.9.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CCWA=? +CCWA: (0,1)

OK

AT+CCWA=1,1,1 OK

Note: Enable call waiting for voice calls

AT+CCWA=1,2 +CCWA:1,1

OK

Note: Interrogate call waiting Note: Call waiting active for voice calls

+CCWA:"0146290800",145,1,

"FREDDY"

Note: Number and name of the waiting voice call

+CCWA:"0146290800",145,1,"8023459678FFFF"

Note: Number and name of the waiting voice call (UCS2 format)

AT+CCWA=1,0,7 OK

Note: Erase call waiting

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Keypad Control +CKPD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 189

20.10. Keypad Control +CKPD

20.10.1. Description

This command emulates the ME keypad by sending each keystroke as a character in a <keys> string.

The supported GSM sequences are listed in the Appendixes.

If emulation fails, a "+CME ERROR: <err>" is returned.

If emulation succeeds, the result depends on the GSM sequence activated.

20.10.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CKPD=<keys>

Depending of <keys>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+CKPD=?

+CKPD: (list of supported <keys>)

OK

20.10.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<keys>: keyboard sequence

string of the following characters

(0-9,*,#)

20.10.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Keypad Control +CKPD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 190

20.10.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CKPD="*#21#"

Note: Check every call forwarding status

OK

AT+CKPD="1234"

Note: Sequence not allowed

+CME ERROR: 3

20.10.6. Notes

In the case where the FDN phonebook is activated, the sequences concerning "call forwarding" are

allowed only if the entire sequence is written in the FDN.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Advice Of Charge +CAOC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 191

20.11. Advice Of Charge +CAOC

20.11.1. Description

This commands allows to configure the Advice Of Charge (AOC) supplementary service (GSM 02.24

[22] and GSM 02.86 [23] ) which enables the subscriber to obtain information on call cost.

20.11.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CAOC=<mode>

[+CAOC: <ccm>]

OK

Read command

AT+CAOC?

+CAOC: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+CAOC=?

+CAOC: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

Unsolicited response

+CCCM: <ccm>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Advice Of Charge +CAOC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 192

20.11.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: requested operation

0 query CCM value

1 deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value (default value)

2 activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value

<ccm>: current call meter value

three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00001E"

corresponds to the decimal value 30). The value is in home units and bytes are

coded in a similar way as the ACMmax value in SIM.

string type

20.11.4. Parameter Storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

20.11.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CAOC=? +CAOC: (0-2)

OK

Note: Request supported modes Note: 0, 1, 2 modes supported

AT+CAOC=0 +CAOC: "000A08"

OK

Note: Query CCM value Note: Display CCM value (CCM=2568)

AT+CAOC=1 OK

Note: Deactivate unsolicited report of CCM value Note: CCM report deactivated

AT+CAOC=2 OK

Note: Activate unsolicited report of CCM value Note: CCM report activated

AT+CAOC? +CAOC: 2

OK

+CCCM: "000A09"

Note: Unsolicited CCM value

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Accumulated Call Meter +CACM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 193

20.12. Accumulated Call Meter +CACM

20.12.1. Description

This command resets the Advice Of Charge for Accumulated Call Meter (ACM) value in SIM file EFACM.

The ACM contains the total number of home units for both the current and preceding calls. SIM

PIN2 is required to reset the value.

20.12.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CACM=<pin2passwd>

OK

Read command

AT+CACM?

+CACM: <acm>

OK

Test command

AT+CACM=?

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Accumulated Call Meter +CACM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 194

20.12.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<pin2passwd>: Personal Identification Number 2.

8 digit number

<acm>: Accumulated Call Meter

three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00001E"

corresponds to the decimal value 30). The value is in home units and bytes are

coded in a similar way as the ACMmax value in SIM.

string type

20.12.4. Parameter Storage

None.

20.12.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CACM?

Note: Request ACM value

+CACM: "000400"

OK

Note: Display ACM value (ACM=1024)

AT+CACM=1234

Note: Request ACM reset, real PIN2 is "1234"

OK

Note: ACM value is reset

AT+CACM?

Note: Request ACM value

+CACM: "000000"

OK

Note: Display ACM value (ACM = 0)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Accumulated Call Meter Maximum +CAMM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 195

20.13. Accumulated Call Meter Maximum +CAMM

20.13.1. Description

The set command sets the Advice Of Charge related to Accumulated Call Meter maximum value in

SIM file EF-ACMmax. ACMmax contains the maximum number of home units the subscriber is

allowed to spend. When ACM (see +CACM) reaches ACMmax, calls are prohibited. SIM PIN2 is

required to set the value.

20.13.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CAMM=<ACMmax>,<pin2passwd>

OK

Read command

AT+CAMM?

+CAMM: <ACMmax>

OK

Test command

AT+CAMM=?

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Accumulated Call Meter Maximum +CAMM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 196

20.13.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<pin2passwd>: Personal Identification Number 2.

8 digit number

<ACMmax>: Accumulated Call Meter maximum

three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00001E"

corresponds to the decimal value 30). The value is in home units and bytes are

coded in a similar way as the ACMmax value in SIM.

string type

20.13.4. Parameter Storage

None.

20.13.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CAMM="000400",1234 OK

Note: Request ACMmax update, PIN2 is "1234" Note: ACMmax updated to 1024

AT+CAMM? +CAMM:"000400"

OK

Note: Request ACMmax value Note: ACMmax = 1024

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Price per UNIT and Currency Table +CPUC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 197

20.14. Price per UNIT and Currency Table +CPUC

20.14.1. Description

This command sets the parameters for Advice of Charge related to price per unit and the currency

table in SIM file EF-PUCT.

PUCT information can be used to convert the home units (as used in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM)

into currency units.

20.14.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CPUC=<currency>,<ppu>,<pin2passwd>

OK

Read command

AT+CPUC?

+CPUC: <currency>,<ppu>

OK

Test command

AT+CPUC=?

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Price per UNIT and Currency Table +CPUC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 198

20.14.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<currency>: currency code

three character currency code (e.g. "GBP", "DEM")

string type

<ppu>: price per unit

dot is used as a decimal separator (e.g. "2.66")

string type

<pin2 passwd>: Personal Identification Number 2.

8 digit number

20.14.4. Parameter Storage

None.

20.14.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPUC="EUR","0.82",1234 OK

Note: Set Currency and Price per unit update Note: Euros at a rate of 0.82 per unit set

AT+CPUC? +CPUC "EUR","0.82"

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Closed User Group +CCUG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 199

20.15. Closed User Group +CCUG

20.15.1. Description

This command is used to:

• activate/deactivate the control of CUG information for all following outgoing calls,

• select a CUG index,

• suppress Outgoing Access (OA). OA allows or not a member of a CUG to place calls outside

the CUG.

• suppress the preferential CUG. Preferential is the default CUG used by the network when it

does not receive an explicit CUG index.

The Closed User Group Supplementary Service enables subscribers to form groups with restricted

access (both access to and from).

The CUG supplementary service is described in GSM 02.85 [25]. This service is provided on prior

arrangement with the service provider. Subscription options should be selected at implementation.

20.15.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CCUG=<n>[,<index>[,<info>]]

OK

Read command

AT+CCUG?

+CCUG: <n>,<index>,<info>

OK

Test command

AT+CCUG=?

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Supplementary Services Commands

Closed User Group +CCUG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 200

20.15.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: CUG activation mode

0 disable (default value)

1 enable

<index>: CUG index

0-9 selected default value: 0)

10 preferred

<info>: actions

0 no information (default value)

1 suppress OA

2 suppress preferential CUG

3 suppress OA and preferential CUG

20.15.4. Parameter Storage

All parameters are stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.

20.15.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CCUG=0,0,0 OK

AT+CCUG? +CCUG: 0,0,0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 3 February 18, 2011 201

Index

CACM, 194

CAMM, 196

CAOC, 192

CCFC, 183

CCID, 118

CCUG, 200

CCWA, 187

CHLD, 165

CIMI, 120

CKPD, 190

CLCC, 162

CLIP, 168

CLIR, 171

CMGD, 96

CMGF, 66

CMGL, 91

CMGR, 86

CMGS, 78

CMGW, 81

CMMS, 76

CMSS, 84

CNMA, 99

CNMI, 55

CNUM, 47

COLP, 173

CPBF, 22

CPBN, 31

CPBP, 26

CPBR, 17

CPBS, 6

CPBW, 11

CPMS, 68

CPUC, 198

CRES, 112

CRSM, 125

CSAS, 111

CSCA, 72

CSCB, 113

CSDH, 74

CSIM, 122

CSMP, 63

CSMS, 53

CSSN, 176

CSVM, 49

CUSD, 180

STCR, 158

STGI, 143

STGR, 153

STIN, 140

STRIL, 160

STSF, 137

WAIP, 51

WCBM, 116

WCOS, 9

WDCP, 45

WLPR, 131

WLPW, 128

WMCP, 108

WMGO, 106

WMSC, 102

WPGR, 38

WPGS, 43

WPGW, 36

WUSS, 104

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079

019

February 18, 2011

Volume 4

AT Commands Interface Guide

for Firmware 7.45

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 2

Related Documents

This interface specification is based on the following recommendations:

[1] ETSI GSM 07.05: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Use of DTE-DCE

interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)

[2] ETSI GSM 07.07: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); AT command set for GSM

Mobile Equipment (ME)

[3] ITU-T Recommendation V.25 ter: Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control

[4] ETSI GSM 03.40: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Technical implementation

of the Short Message Service (SMS) Point-to-Point (PP)

[5] ETSI GSM 03.38: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2); Alphabets and languagespecific

information

[6] ETSI GSM 04.80: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2): Mobile radio interface

layer 3, Supplementary service specification, Formats and coding

[7] 3GPP 05.02: 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group GSM/EDGERadio

Access Network; Multiplexing and multiple access on the radio path – 3GPP TS 05.02

V6.9.2 (2001-04)

[8] 3GPP 24.008: Mobile radio interface Layer 3 specification; Core network protocols; Stage 3

[9] 3GPP TS 11.11 Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)

Interface

[10] 3GPP TS 05.08 Radio subsystem link control

[11] 3GPP TS 23.040 Technical realization of the Short Message Service (SMS);

[12] 3GPP TS 22.042 Network Identity and Time Zone (NITZ) service description; Stage 1

[13] 3GPP TS 51.011 Specification of the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM-ME)

interface

[14] 3GPP TS 27-010 Terminal Equipment to User Equipment (TE-UE) multiplexer protocol

[15] 3GPP 23.014 Support of Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) signaling

[16] ISO 639 Langages Codes

[17] 3GPP 27 060 Packet domain; Mobile Station (MS) supporting Packet Switched services

[18] 3GPP TS 23.038 Alphabets and language-specific information

[19] 3GPP TS 27.005 Use of Data Terminal Equipment - Data Circuit terminating Equipment (DTEDCE)

interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)

[20] ETSI GSM 11.14 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+); Specification of the SIM

Application Toolkit for the Subscriber Identity Module - Mobile Equipment (SIM - ME) interface

[21] 3GPP TS 23.003 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile

Telecommunications System (UMTS); Numbering, addressing and identification

[22] ETSI GSM 02.24 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Description of

Charge Advice Information (CAI)

[23] ETSI GSM 02.86 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Advice of Charge

(AoC) Supplementary Services - Stage 1

[24] ETSI GSM 02.90 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Unstructured

Supplementary Service Data (USSD) - Stage 1

[25] ETSI GSM 02.85 Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM);Closed User

Group (CUG) Supplementary Services - Stage 1

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 3

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

[26] 3GPP 27.007:Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2+) (GSM); Universal Mobile

Telecommunications System (UMTS);AT command set for 3GPP User Equipment (UE) (Release

1999)

[27] 3GPP 23.107:Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS);QoS Concept and

Architecture (Release 1999)

[28] 3GPP 24.008: European digital cellular telecommunication system (Phase 2+). Mobile radio

interface layer 3 specification. (Release 1999)

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 4

Contents

Volume 4

21.AUDIO COMMANDS............................................................................................7

21.1. Speaker & Microphone Selection +SPEAKER..................................................................7

21.2. Ringer Sound Level +CRSL ............................................................................................11

21.3. Microphone Mute Control +CMUT ..................................................................................16

21.4. Loudspeaker Volume Level +CLVL.................................................................................18

21.5. Side Tone Modification +SIDET ......................................................................................22

21.6. Gain Control +VGR .........................................................................................................27

21.7. Gain Control +VGT..........................................................................................................30

21.8. Digital Gain Control +WDGR...........................................................................................34

21.9. Digital Gain Control +WDGT ...........................................................................................41

21.10. Audio Filter Command +WADF.......................................................................................47

21.11. Echo Cancellation +ECHO..............................................................................................53

21.12. Sierra Wireless Voice Rate +WVR..................................................................................61

21.13. DTMF Signals +VTD .......................................................................................................64

21.14. DTMF Signals +VTS........................................................................................................66

21.15. Play tone +WTONE.........................................................................................................68

21.16. Play DTMF tone + WDTMF.............................................................................................74

21.17. DTMF Detection Mode +WDDM .....................................................................................79

21.18. Set Standard Tone +WSST.............................................................................................82

21.19. Ring Melody Playback +CRMP.......................................................................................87

21.20. Sierra Wireless Change Default Melody +WCDM ..........................................................93

21.21. Sierra Wireless Change Default Player +WCDP ............................................................95

21.22. Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP.....................................................................................97

21.23. Auto-tests &T...................................................................................................................99

21.24. Audio Diagnostic Start +WADS.....................................................................................101

22.I/O COMMANDS...............................................................................................106

22.1. Input/Output Management +WIOM ...............................................................................106

22.2. Read GPIO value +WIOR .............................................................................................111

22.3. Write GPIO value +WIOW.............................................................................................113

22.4. Sierra Wireless Interrupt Pin Configuration +WIPC ......................................................115

23.BATTERY COMMANDS ..................................................................................118

23.1. Analog Digital Converters Measurements +ADC..........................................................118

23.2. Sierra Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM................................................121

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 5

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

23.3. Sierra Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG ...............................................................................129

24.CPHS COMMANDS .........................................................................................136

24.1. CPHS Command: +CPHS.............................................................................................136

24.2. Sierra Wireless CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN........................................................144

24.3. Sierra Wireless Alternate Line Service: +WALS ...........................................................147

25.FAX COMMANDS ............................................................................................149

25.1. Introduction....................................................................................................................149

25.2. Transmit Speed +FTM...................................................................................................150

25.3. Receive Speed +FRM...................................................................................................152

25.4. HDLC Transmit Speed +FTH........................................................................................154

25.5. HDLC Receive Speed +FRH.........................................................................................156

25.6. Stop Transmission and Wait +FTS ...............................................................................158

25.7. Receive Silence +FRS ..................................................................................................160

26.FAX CLASS 2 COMMANDS............................................................................162

26.1. Transmit Data +FDT......................................................................................................162

26.2. Receive Data +FDR ......................................................................................................163

26.3. Transmit Page Punctuation +FET.................................................................................164

26.4. Page Transfer Status Parameters +FPTS ....................................................................166

26.5. Terminate Session +FK.................................................................................................168

26.6. Page Transfer Bit Order +FBOR...................................................................................169

26.7. Buffer Size Report +FBUF ............................................................................................171

26.8. Copy Quality Checking +FCQ.......................................................................................173

26.9. Capability to Receive +FCR ..........................................................................................175

26.10. Current Session Parameters +FDIS..............................................................................177

26.11. DCE Capabilities Parameters +FDCC ..........................................................................181

26.12. Local ID String +FLID....................................................................................................184

26.13. Page Transfer Timeout Parameter +FPHCTO..............................................................186

26.14. Additional Fax Class 2 indication messages.................................................................188

27.REMOTE DEVICE MANAGEMENT SERVICES COMMANDS........................190

27.1. Device Services Configuration +WDSC........................................................................190

27.2. Device Services Error +WDSE......................................................................................195

27.3. Device Services Fallback +WDSF ................................................................................198

27.4. Device Services General status +WDSG......................................................................200

27.5. Device Services Reply +WDSR ....................................................................................203

27.6. Device Services Session +WDSS.................................................................................206

27.7. Device Services Indications +WDSI..............................................................................210

27.8. Device Services Bootstrap +WDSB ..............................................................................216

27.9. Device Services Host +WDSH ......................................................................................218

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 6

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

27.10. Device Services Local Download +WDSD....................................................................222

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 7

21. Audio Commands

21.1. Speaker & Microphone Selection +SPEAKER

21.1.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used to select the speaker and the microphone set.

21.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+SPEAKER=<ActiveConfig>

OK

Read command

AT+SPEAKER?

+SPEAKER: <ActiveConfig>

OK

Test command

AT+SPEAKER=?

+SPEAKER: (list of supported <ActiveConfig>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Speaker & Microphone Selection +SPEAKER

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 8

21.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<ActiveConfig>: speaker mode (please refer to the "Notes" section below)

1 MIC_1 + SPK_2 at 8kHz

2 MIC_1 + SPK_1 at 8kHz

3 MIC_2 + SPK_2 at 8kHz

4 MIC_2 + SPK_1 at 8kHz

5 MIC_1 + SPK_2 + DAI at 8kHz)

6 MIC_1 + SPK_1 + DAI at 8kHz

7 MIC_2 + SPK_2 + DAI at 8kHz

8 MIC_2 + SPK_1 + DAI at 8kHz

9 SPK_USER + MIC_USER (Bluetooth)

10 No Audio

11 MIC_1 + SPK_2 at 16kHz

12 MIC_1 + SPK_1 at 16kHz

13 MIC_2 + SPK_2 at 16kHz

14 MIC_2 + SPK_1 at 16kHz

21.1.4. Parameter Storage

The <ActiveConfig> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value

can be restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Speaker & Microphone Selection +SPEAKER

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 9

21.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+SPEAKER=? +SPEAKER: (1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14)

OK

Note: Response on Q26xx and WMP100

+SPEAKER: (2,3)

OK

Note: Response on Q24NG

AT+SPEAKER=1

Note: Activate config1

OK

Note: Response on Q26xx and WMP100

+CME ERROR:3

Note: Response on Q24NG

AT+SPEAKER? +SPEAKER: 1

OK

Note: Config 1 is active

Note: Response on Q26xx and WMP100

21.1.6. Notes

• Some configuration may not be available on some embedded module:

<ActiveConfig> Q24NG Q268x, WMP100 Q26Extreme SL6087

1 N/A X (default) X (default) X (default)

2 X (default) X X N/A

3 X X X N/A

4 N/A X X N/A

5 N/A X N/A X

6 N/A X N/A N/A

7 N/A X N/A N/A

8 N/A X N/A N/A

9 N/A X X X

10 N/A X X X

11 N/A X N/A X

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Speaker & Microphone Selection +SPEAKER

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 10

<ActiveConfig> Q24NG Q268x, WMP100 Q26Extreme SL6087

12 N/A X N/A N/A

13 N/A X N/A N/A

14 N/A X N/A N/A

• On the embedded module, the speaker and microphone are selected as follows:

􀂃 For Q24NG:

<ActiveConfig> Analog In (Mic) Analog Out (Speaker)

2 MIC_1 SPK_1

3 MIC_2 SPK_2

􀂃 For WMP100 and Q26xx:

<ActiveConfig> Analog In (Mic) Analog Out

1 MIC_1 (Mic) SPK_2 (Hfr)

2 MIC_1 (Mic) SPK_1 (Ear)

3 MIC_2 (Auxmic) SPK_2 (Hfr)

4 MIC_2 (Auxmic) SPK_1 (Ear)

􀂃 Audio 1 (sub-audio): Auxmic + Ear,

􀂃 Audio 2 (main audio): Mic + Hfr.

The digital audio interface (IOM-2) mode allows the connectivity with audio peripherals, and

consists of 4 wires (PCM-SYNC, PCM-CLK, PCM-IN, PCM-OUT).

The IOM-2 frame is divided in 6 slots: each slot allows the transmission/reception of a 16 bits

word.

When a configuration that includes digital IOs is used, the slot 0 will be allocated for exchanging

audio data with the embedded module. Depending on the chosen configuration, the audio

samples will be routed in different location in the audio chain.

• During the call, the <ActiveConfig> can not be changed between three configuration groups:

(1,2,3,4,9,10), (5-8) and (11-14).

If AT&W is used during communication, the command responses are OK but the speaker

configuration could be not changed if active configuration is in another group than default

configuration (for instance from 5 to 1).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Ringer Sound Level +CRSL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 11

21.2. Ringer Sound Level +CRSL

21.2.1. Description

This command is used to set/get the sound level of the ringer on incoming calls. The action command

changes the default <volume> value of the +CRMP command.

21.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CRSL=<sound level>

OK

Read command

AT+CRSL?

+CRSL: <sound level>

OK

Test command

AT+CRSL=?

+CRSL: (list of supported <sound level>s)

OK

21.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<sound level>: There are two configuration modes. A mode to give the sound level in deci dB units,

and a mode to give it in index. By default gains are expressed in deci dB value.

All values are possible for <sound level> between the min and max (see table in

Notes). If a value does not correspond to a table value, the nearest is kept.

Else, if the configuration mode has changed with +WBHV command, one index

corresponds to one deci dB value.

21.2.4. Parameter Storage

The <sound level> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can

be restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Ringer Sound Level +CRSL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 12

21.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CRSL=-1000

Note: Set volume to -10 dB

OK

Note: Current ring playing with max volume.

AT+CRSL?

Note: Get current ringer sound level.

+CRSL: -1000

OK

Note: -9 dB is the nearest value for –10 dB.

AT+CRSL=?

Note: Supported parameters

+CRSL:(-8000 - 0)

OK

AT+WBHV=5,1

Note: Set configuration to indexed mode

OK

AT+CRSL=41 OK

AT+CRSL?

Note: Get current ringer sound level

+CRSL: 41

OK

Note: Current level is 41

AT+CRSL=?

Note: Supported parameters

+CRSL:(0-255)

OK

21.2.6. Notes

Below are listed the values for <sound level>. They are in deci dB units and index (default value is

grayed).

Gain

in

index

Gain

in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

0 -8000 -80 64 -1204 -12.04 128 -602 -6.02 192 -250 -2.5

1 -4816 -48.16 65 -1191 -11.91 129 -595 -5.95 193 -245 -2.45

2 -4214 -42.14 66 -1177 -11.77 130 -589 -5.89 194 -241 -2.41

3 -3862 -38.62 67 -1164 -11.64 131 -582 -5.82 195 -236 -2.36

4 -3612 -36.12 68 -1151 -11.51 132 -575 -5.75 196 -232 -2.32

5 -3419 -34.19 69 -1139 -11.39 133 -569 -5.69 197 -228 -2.28

6 -3260 -32.6 70 -1126 -11.26 134 -562 -5.62 198 -223 -2.23

7 -3126 -31.26 71 -1114 -11.14 135 -556 -5.56 199 -219 -2.19

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Ringer Sound Level +CRSL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 13

Gain

in

index

Gain

in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

8 -3010 -30.1 72 -1102 -11.02 136 -549 -5.49 200 -214 -2.14

9 -2908 -29.08 73 -1090 -10.9 137 -543 -5.43 201 -210 -2.1

10 -2816 -28.16 74 -1078 -10.78 138 -537 -5.37 202 -206 -2.06

11 -2734 -27.34 75 -1066 -10.66 139 -530 -5.3 203 -201 -2.01

12 -2658 -26.58 76 -1055 -10.55 140 -524 -5.24 204 -197 -1.97

13 -2589 -25.89 77 -1043 -10.43 141 -518 -5.18 205 -193 -1.93

14 -2524 -25.24 78 -1032 -10.32 142 -512 -5.12 206 -189 -1.89

15 -2464 -24.64 79 -1021 -10.21 143 -506 -5.06 207 -185 -1.85

16 -2408 -24.08 80 -1010 -10.1 144 -500 -5 208 -180 -1.8

17 -2356 -23.56 81 -1000 -10 145 -494 -4.94 209 -176 -1.76

18 -2306 -23.06 82 -989 -9.89 146 -488 -4.88 210 -172 -1.72

19 -2259 -22.59 83 -978 -9.78 147 -482 -4.82 211 -168 -1.68

20 -2214 -22.14 84 -968 -9.68 148 -476 -4.76 212 -164 -1.64

21 -2172 -21.72 85 -958 -9.58 149 -470 -4.7 213 -160 -1.6

22 -2132 -21.32 86 -947 -9.47 150 -464 -4.64 214 -156 -1.56

23 -2093 -20.93 87 -937 -9.37 151 -459 -4.59 215 -152 -1.52

24 -2056 -20.56 88 -928 -9.28 152 -453 -4.53 216 -148 -1.48

25 -2021 -20.21 89 -918 -9.18 153 -447 -4.47 217 -144 -1.44

26 -1987 -19.87 90 -908 -9.08 154 -441 -4.41 218 -140 -1.4

27 -1954 -19.54 91 -898 -8.98 155 -436 -4.36 219 -136 -1.36

28 -1922 -19.22 92 -889 -8.89 156 -430 -4.3 220 -132 -1.32

29 -1892 -18.92 93 -880 -8.8 157 -425 -4.25 221 -128 -1.28

30 -1862 -18.62 94 -870 -8.7 158 -419 -4.19 222 -124 -1.24

31 -1834 -18.34 95 -861 -8.61 159 -414 -4.14 223 -120 -1.2

32 -1806 -18.06 96 -852 -8.52 160 -408 -4.08 224 -116 -1.16

33 -1779 -17.79 97 -843 -8.43 161 -403 -4.03 225 -112 -1.12

34 -1754 -17.54 98 -834 -8.34 162 -397 -3.97 226 -108 -1.08

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Ringer Sound Level +CRSL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 14

Gain

in

index

Gain

in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

35 -1728 -17.28 99 -825 -8.25 163 -392 -3.92 227 -104 -1.04

36 -1704 -17.04 100 -816 -8.16 164 -387 -3.87 228 -101 -1.01

37 -1680 -16.8 101 -808 -8.08 165 -382 -3.82 229 -97 -0.97

38 -1657 -16.57 102 -799 -7.99 166 -376 -3.76 230 -93 -0.93

39 -1634 -16.34 103 -791 -7.91 167 -371 -3.71 231 -89 -0.89

40 -1612 -16.12 104 -782 -7.82 168 -366 -3.66 232 -86 -0.86

41 -1591 -15.91 105 -774 -7.74 169 -361 -3.61 233 -82 -0.82

42 -1570 -15.7 106 -766 -7.66 170 -356 -3.56 234 -78 -0.78

43 -1550 -15.5 107 -758 -7.58 171 -350 -3.5 235 -74 -0.74

44 -1530 -15.3 108 -750 -7.5 172 -345 -3.45 236 -71 -0.71

45 -1510 -15.1 109 -742 -7.42 173 -340 -3.4 237 -67 -0.67

46 -1491 -14.91 110 -734 -7.34 174 -335 -3.35 238 -63 -0.63

47 -1472 -14.72 111 -726 -7.26 175 -330 -3.3 239 -60 -0.6

48 -1454 -14.54 112 -718 -7.18 176 -325 -3.25 240 -56 -0.56

49 -1436 -14.36 113 -710 -7.1 177 -321 -3.21 241 -52 -0.52

50 -1419 -14.19 114 -703 -7.03 178 -316 -3.16 242 -49 -0.49

51 -1401 -14.01 115 -695 -6.95 179 -311 -3.11 243 -45 -0.45

52 -1384 -13.84 116 -688 -6.88 180 -306 -3.06 244 -42 -0.42

53 -1368 -13.68 117 -680 -6.8 181 -301 -3.01 245 -38 -0.38

54 -1352 -13.52 118 -673 -6.73 182 -296 -2.96 246 -35 -0.35

55 -1336 -13.36 119 -665 -6.65 183 -292 -2.92 247 -31 -0.31

56 -1320 -13.2 120 -658 -6.58 184 -287 -2.87 248 -28 -0.28

57 -1305 -13.05 121 -651 -6.51 185 -282 -2.82 249 -24 -0.24

58 -1290 -12.9 122 -644 -6.44 186 -277 -2.77 250 -21 -0.21

59 -1275 -12.75 123 -637 -6.37 187 -273 -2.73 251 -17 -0.17

60 -1260 -12.6 124 -630 -6.3 188 -268 -2.68 252 -14 -0.14

61 -1246 -12.46 125 -623 -6.23 189 -264 -2.64 253 -10 -0.1

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Ringer Sound Level +CRSL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 15

Gain

in

index

Gain

in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

62 -1232 -12.32 126 -616 -6.16 190 -259 -2.59 254 -7 -0.07

63 -1218 -12.18 127 -609 -6.09 191 -254 -2.54 255 0 0

Note: For buzzer output, very high and very low gain values are not accepted. Hence, the nearest value is

kept, which depends on the used embedded module. Please refer to Product Technical Specification,

for more information.

Example: If buzzer minimum gain is -46.03 dB and -48.06 dB gain is selected (gain 1 in index mode),

then -46.03 dB is played

.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Microphone Mute Control +CMUT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 16

21.3. Microphone Mute Control +CMUT

Test and read command

Action command

21.3.1. Description

This command is used to mute the microphone input on the product (for the active microphone set

with the +SPEAKER command). The action command is only allowed during a call.

21.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CMUT=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+CMUT?

+CMUT: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+CMUT=?

+CMUT: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Microphone Mute Control +CMUT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 17

21.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: microphone mute mode

0 microphone mute off (default value)

1 microphone mute on

21.3.4. Parameter Storage

None.

21.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CMUT=? +CMUT: (0,1)

OK

AT+CMUT=1

Note: Mute ON (call active)

OK

AT+CMUT?

Note: Get current value

+CMUT: 1

OK

Note: Mute is active (call active)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Loudspeaker Volume Level +CLVL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 18

21.4. Loudspeaker Volume Level +CLVL

21.4.1. Description

This command is used by the application to tune the loudspeaker volume level.

21.4.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CLVL=<Volume>

OK

Read command

AT+CLVL?

+CLVL: <Volume>

OK

Test command

AT+CLVL=?

+CLVL: (list of supported <Volume>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Loudspeaker Volume Level +CLVL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 19

21.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Volume>: reception volume

There are two configuration modes:

• the gain is entered in deci dB units,

• the gain is entered in index.

By default gains are expressed in deci dB value.

All values are possible between the minimum and maximum values of the table given

in the Notes section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the nearest is

kept.

If the configuration mode has been changed with +WBHV command to the index

mode, the deci dB value will correspond to the index entered as described in the

table of the Notes section.

21.4.4. Parameter Storage

All parameters are stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Loudspeaker Volume Level +CLVL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 20

21.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CLVL=?

Note: Test command

+CLVL: (-4000-800)

OK

Note: Possible values if speaker1 selected on Q26XX and

WMP100 embedded module

AT+CLVL=-2100 OK

AT+CLVL? +CLVL: -2000

OK

AT+WBHV=8,1

Note: Set configuration to indexed mode

OK

AT+CLVL=? +CLVL: (0-15)

OK

Note: Possible values if speaker1 or speaker2 selected on Q24NG

embedded module

AT+CLVL=9 OK

AT+CLVL? +CLVL: 9

OK

21.4.6. Notes

Below are listed the values for <volume>. They are in deci dB units and index.

For Q24NG embedded module:

• Speaker 1 (-16.3dB by default) and speaker 2 (-10.3dB by default).

Gain

in

index

Gain

in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

0 -26.3 4 -1830 -18.3 8 -1030 -10.3 12 -230 -2.3

1 -2430 -24.3 5 -1630 -16.3 9 -830 -8.3 13 -30 -0.3

2 -2230 -22.3 6 -1430 -14.3 10 -630 -6.3 14 170 1.7

3 -2030 -20.3 7 -1230 -12.3 11 -430 -4.3 15 370 3.7

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Loudspeaker Volume Level +CLVL

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 21

For Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module:

(Default values are grayed).

• Speaker 1:

Gain

in

index

Gain

in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

0 -4000 -40 4 -2400 -24 8 -800 -8 12 800 8

1 -3600 -36 5 -2000 -20 9 -400 -4

2 -3200 -32 6 -1600 -16 10 0 0

3 -2800 -28 7 -1200 -12 11 400 4

• Speaker 2:

Gain

in

index

Gain

in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

0 -3400 -34 4 -1800 -18 8 -200 -2 12 1400 14

1 -3000 -30 5 -1400 -14 9 200 2

2 -2600 -26 6 -1000 -10 10 600 6

3 -2200 -22 7 -600 -6 11 1000 10

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Side Tone Modification +SIDET

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 22

21.5. Side Tone Modification +SIDET

21.5.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used to set the level of audio feedback in the speaker

(microphone feedback in the speaker).

21.5.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+SIDET=<val1>[,<val2>]

OK

Read command

AT+SIDET?

+SIDET: <val1>,<val2>

OK

Test command

AT+SIDET=?

+SIDET: (list of supported <val1>s),(list of supported <val2>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Side Tone Modification +SIDET

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 23

21.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<val1>: side tone mode

0 side tone is disabled

1 side tone is enabled (default value)

<val2>: side tone level

There are two configuration modes:

• the gain is entered in deci dB units,

• the gain is entered in index.

By default gains are expressed in deci dB value.

All values are possible between the minimum and maximum values of the table

given in the Notes section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the

nearest is kept.

If the configuration mode has been changed with +WBHV command to the index

mode, the deci dB value will correspond to the index entered as described in the

table of the Notes section.

21.5.4. Parameter Storage

The <val1>and <val2> parameters are stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default

values can be restored using AT&F and AT+VIP=1.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Side Tone Modification +SIDET

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 24

21.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+SIDET=? +SIDET: (0-1),(-32768-540)

OK

Note: Response on Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module

+SIDET: (0-1),(-32768-595)

OK

Note: Response on Q24NG embedded module

AT+SIDET=1,190 OK

AT+SIDET? +SIDET: 1,188

OK

AT+WBHV=8,1

Note: Set configuration to indexed mode

OK

AT+SIDET=? +SIDET: (0-1),(0-63)

OK

Note: Response on Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module

+SIDET: (0-1),(0-127)

OK

Note: Response on Q24NG embedded module

AT+SIDET=1,0 OK

AT+SIDET?

Note: Current value

+SIDET: 1,0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Side Tone Modification +SIDET

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 25

21.5.6. Notes

• Sidetone level default value is kept if <val2> parameter is ommited.

• The following tables list values for the two configuration modes for <val2>:

For Q24NG embedded module (default value is grayed)

Gain

in

index

Gain in

dB

Real dB

Value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real dB

Value

Gain in

index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

Value

Gain

in

index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

Value

0 -32768 inf 32 -602 -6.02 64 0 0 96 352 3.52

1 -3612 -36.12 33 -575 -5.75 65 13 0.13 97 361 3.61

2 -3010 -30.1 34 -549 -5.49 66 27 0.27 98 370 3.7

3 -2658 -26.58 35 -524 -5.24 67 40 0.4 99 379 3.79

4 -2408 -24.08 36 -500 -5 68 53 0.53 100 388 3.88

5 -2214 -22.14 37 -476 -4.76 69 65 0.65 101 396 3.96

6 -2056 -20.56 38 -453 -4.53 70 78 0.78 102 405 4.05

7 -1922 -19.22 39 -430 -4.3 71 90 0.9 103 413 4.13

8 -1806 -18.06 40 -408 -4.08 72 102 1.02 104 422 4.22

9 -1704 -17.04 41 -387 -3.87 73 114 1.14 105 430 4.3

10 -1612 -16.12 42 -366 -3.66 74 126 1.26 106 438 4.38

11 -1530 -15.3 43 -345 -3.45 75 138 1.38 107 446 4.46

12 -1454 -14.54 44 -325 -3.25 76 149 1.49 108 454 4.54

13 -1384 -13.84 45 -306 -3.06 77 161 1.61 109 462 4.62

14 -1320 -13.2 46 -287 -2.87 78 172 1.72 110 470 4.7

15 -1260 -12.6 47 -268 -2.68 79 183 1.83 111 478 4.78

16 -1204 -12.04 48 -250 -2.5 80 194 1.94 112 486 4.86

17 -1151 -11.51 49 -232 -2.32 81 205 2.05 113 494 4.94

18 -1102 -11.02 50 -214 -2.14 82 215 2.15 114 501 5.01

19 -1055 -10.55 51 -197 -1.97 83 226 2.26 115 509 5.09

20 -1010 -10.1 52 -180 -1.8 84 236 2.36 116 517 5.17

21 -968 -9.68 53 -164 -1.64 85 246 2.46 117 524 5.24

22 -928 -9.28 54 -148 -1.48 86 257 2.57 118 531 5.31

23 -889 -8.89 55 -132 -1.32 87 267 2.67 119 539 5.39

24 -852 -8.52 56 -116 -1.16 88 277 2.77 120 546 5.46

25 -816 -8.16 57 -101 -1.01 89 286 2.86 121 553 5.53

26 -782 -7.82 58 -86 -0.86 90 296 2.96 122 560 5.6

27 -750 -7.5 59 -71 -0.71 91 306 3.06 123 567 5.67

28 -718 -7.18 60 -56 -0.56 92 315 3.15 124 574 5.74

29 -688 -6.88 61 -42 -0.42 93 325 3.25 125 581 5.81

30 -658 -6.58 62 -28 -0.28 94 334 3.34 126 588 5.88

31 -630 -6.3 63 -14 -0.14 95 343 3.43 127 595 5.95

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Side Tone Modification +SIDET

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 26

For Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module(default value is grayed)

Gain

in

index

Gain in

dB

Real dB

Value

Gain

in

inde

x

Gain in

dB

Real dB

Value

Gain

in

index

Gain in

dB

Real dB

Value

Gain

in

index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

Value

0 -32768 -Inf 16 -3260 -32.6 32 -1860 -18.62 48 -620 -6.16

1 -6020 -60.21 17 -3130 -31.26 33 -1750 -17.54 49 -510 -5.12

2 -5420 -54.19 18 -3010 -30.1 34 -1660 -16.57 50 -420 -4.19

3 -5070 -50.66 19 -2910 -29.08 35 -1570 -15.7 51 -340 -3.35

4 -4820 -48.16 20 -2820 -28.16 36 -1490 -14.91 52 -260 -2.59

5 -4620 -46.23 21 -2730 -27.34 37 -1420 -14.19 53 -190 -1.89

6 -4460 -44.64 22 -2660 -26.58 38 -1350 -13.52 54 -120 -1.24

7 -4330 -43.3 23 -2590 -25.89 39 -1290 -12.9 55 -60 -0.63

8 -4210 -42.14 24 -2520 -25.24 40 -1230 -12.32 56 -10 -0.07

9 -4020 -40.21 25 -2410 -24.08 41 -1130 -11.26 57 100 0.96

10 -3860 -38.62 26 -2310 -23.06 42 -1030 -10.32 58 190 1.88

11 -3730 -37.28 27 -2210 -22.14 43 -950 -9.47 59 270 2.72

12 -3610 -36.12 28 -2130 -21.32 44 -870 -8.7 60 350 3.48

13 -3510 -35.1 29 -2060 -20.56 45 -800 -7.99 61 420 4.18

14 -3420 -34.19 30 -1990 -19.87 46 -730 -7.34 62 480 4.82

15 -3340 -33.36 31 -1920 -19.22 47 -670 -6.73 63 540 5.42

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Gain Control +VGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 27

21.6. Gain Control +VGR

21.6.1. Description

This command is used by the application to set the speaker gain

21.6.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+VGR=<Rgain>

OK

Read command

AT+VGR?

+VGR: <Rgain>

OK

Test command

AT+VGR=?

+VGR: (list of supported <Rgain>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Gain Control +VGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 28

21.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Rgain>: reception gain

There are two configuration modes:

• the gain is entered in deci dB units,

• the gain is entered in index.

By default gains are expressed in deci dB value.

All values are possible between the minimum and maximum values of the table given

in the Notes section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the nearest is

kept.

If the configuration mode has been changed with +WBHV command to the index

mode, the deci dB value will correspond to the index entered as described in the

table of the Notes section.

21.6.4. Parameter Storage

All parameters are stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command.

21.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+VGR=?

Note: Test command

+VGR: (-4000-800)

OK

Note: Possible values if speaker1 is selected on Q26XX and

WMP100 embedded module

AT+VGR=-2100 OK

AT+VGR?

Note: Get current reception gain value

+VGR: -2000

OK

Note: Receive gain

AT+WBHV=8,1

Note: Set configuration to indexed mode

OK

AT+VGR=?

Note: Test command

+VGR: (0-15)

OK

Note: Possible values if speaker1 or speaker2 selected on Q24NG

embedded module

AT+VGR=9 OK

AT+VGR?

Note: Get current reception gain value

+VGR: 9

OK

Note: Receive gain

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Gain Control +VGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 29

21.6.6. Notes

Below are listed the values for <Rgain>. They are in deci dB units and index.

For Q24NG embedded module:

• Speaker 1 (-16.3dB by default) and speaker 2 (-10.3dB by default).

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

0 -26.3 4 -1830 -18.3 8 -1030 -10.3 12 -230 -2.3

1 -2430 -24.3 5 -1630 -16.3 9 -830 -8.3 13 -30 -0.3

2 -2230 -22.3 6 -1430 -14.3 10 -630 -6.3 14 170 1.7

3 -2030 -20.3 7 -1230 -12.3 11 -430 -4.3 15 370 3.7

For Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module(default values are grayed):

• Speaker 1:

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in

value

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

0 -4000 -40 -2400 -24 8 -800 -8 12 800 8

1 -3600 -36 5 -2000 -20 9 -400 -4

2 -3200 -32 6 -1600 -16 10 0 0

3 -2800 -28 7 -1200 -12 11 400 4

• Speaker 2:

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

0 -3400 -34 4 -18 00 -18 8 -200 -2 12 1400 14

1 -3000 -30 5 -1400 -14 9 200 2

2 -2600 -26 6 -1000 -10 10 600 6

3 -2200 -22 7 -600 -6 11 1000 10

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Gain Control +VGT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 30

21.7. Gain Control +VGT

21.7.1. Description

This command is used by the application to set the microphone gain.

21.7.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+VGT=<Tgain>

OK

Read command

AT+VGT?

+VGT: <Tgain>

OK

Test command

AT+VGT=?

+VGT: (list of supported <Tgain>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Gain Control +VGT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 31

21.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Tgain>: transmission gain

There are two configuration modes:

• the gain is entered in deci dB units,

• the gain is entered in index.

By default gains are expressed in deci dB value.

All values are possible between the minimum and maximum values of the table given

in the Notes section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the nearest is

kept.

If the configuration mode has been changed with +WBHV command to the index

mode, the deci dB value will correspond to the index entered as described in the

table of the Notes section.

21.7.4. Parameter Storage

All parameters are stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command.

21.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+VGT?

Note: Get current transmission gain value

+VGT: (700-3500)

OK

Note: Possible values on Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module

AT+VGT=900 OK

AT+VGT=?

Note: Get current transmission gain value

+VGT: 700

OK

AT+WBHV=8,1

Note: Set configuration to indexed mode

OK

AT+VGT=? +VGT: (0-117)

OK

Note: Possible values on Q24NG embedded module

AT+VGT=9 OK

AT+VGT?

Note: Get current transmission gain value

+VGT: 9

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Gain Control +VGT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 32

21.7.6. Notes

Below are listed the values for <Tgain>. They are in deci dB units and index:

• For Q24NG embedded module (default values are grayed):

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

0 -650 -6.5 31 900 9 62 2380 23.8 93 3930 39.3

1 -600 -6 32 950 9.5 63 2430 24.3 94 3980 39.8

2 -550 -5.5 33 1000 10 64 2480 24.8 95 4030 40.3

3 -500 -5 34 980 9.8 65 2530 25.3 96 4080 40.8

4 -450 -4.5 35 1030 10.3 66 2580 25.8 97 4130 41.3

5 -400 -4 36 1080 10.8 67 2630 26.3 98 4180 41.8

6 -350 -3.5 37 1130 11.3 68 2680 26.8 99 4230 42.3

7 -300 -3 38 1180 11.8 69 2730 27.3 100 4280 42.8

8 -250 -2.5 39 1230 12.3 70 2780 27.8 101 4330 43.3

9 -200 -2 40 1280 12.8 71 2830 28.3 102 4380 43.8

10 -150 -1.5 41 1330 13.3 72 2880 28.8 103 4430 44.3

11 -100 -1 42 1380 13.8 73 2930 29.3 104 4480 44.8

12 -50 -0.5 43 1430 14.3 74 2980 29.8 105 4530 45.3

13 0 0 44 1480 14.8 75 3030 30.3 106 4580 45.8

14 50 0.5 45 1530 15.3 76 3080 30.8 107 4630 46.3

15 100 1 46 1580 15.8 77 3130 31.3 108 4680 46.8

16 150 1.5 47 1630 16.3 78 3180 31.8 109 4730 47.3

17 200 2 48 1680 16.8 79 3230 32.3 110 4780 47.8

18 250 2.5 49 1730 17.3 80 3280 32.8 111 4830 48.3

19 300 3 50 1780 17.8 81 3330 33.3 112 4880 48.8

20 350 3.5 51 1830 18.3 82 3380 33.8 113 4930 49.3

21 400 4 52 1880 18.8 83 3430 34.3 114 4980 49.8

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Gain Control +VGT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 33

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

22 450 4.5 53 1930 19.3 84 3480 34.8 115 5030 50.3

23 500 5 54 1980 19.8 85 3530 35.3 116 5080 50.8

24 550 5.5 55 2030 20.3 86 3580 35.8 117 5130 51.3

25 600 6 56 2080 20.8 87 3630 36.3

26 650 6.5 57 2130 21.3 88 3680 36.8

27 700 7 58 2180 21.8 89 3730 37.3

28 750 7.5 59 2230 22.3 90 3780 37.8

29 800 8 60 2280 22.8 91 3830 38.3

30 850 8.5 61 2330 23.3 92 3880 38.8

• For Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module (default values are grayed):

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

0 700 7 1 2000 20 2 3500 35

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Digital Gain Control +WDGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 34

21.8. Digital Gain Control +WDGR

21.8.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used by the application to tune the receive digital gain of

the speaker.

21.8.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDGR=<Configuration>,<Rgain>

OK

Read command

AT+WDGR?

+WDGR: <Configuration>,<Rgain>

[+WDGR: <Configuration>,<Rgain>[…]]

OK

Test command

AT+WDGR=?

+WDGR: <Configuration>, (list of supported <Rgain>s)

[+WDGR: <Configuration>, (list of supported <Rgain>s)]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Digital Gain Control +WDGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 35

21.8.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Configuration>: audio configuration

1 HWL_AUDIO_DSP_RX_PGA_CONF

2 HWL_AUDIO_DSP_RX_VOL_CONF

<Rgain>: reception gain

There are two configuration modes:

• the gain is entered in deci dB units,

• the gain is entered in index.

By default gains are expressed in deci dB value.

All values are possible between the minimum and maximum values of the table given

in the Notes section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the nearest is

kept.

If the configuration mode has been changed with +WBHV command to the index

mode, the deci dB value will correspond to the index entered as described in the

table of the Notes section.

21.8.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command The default value can be

restored using AT&F and "AT+VIP=1".

21.8.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDGR=? +WDGR: 1,(-32768-1201)

+WDGR: 2,(-32768-1201)

OK

Note: Possible values on Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module

AT+WDGR=1,879 OK

Note: PGA configured with a gain of 8.79 dB

AT+WDGR? +WDGR: 1,879

+WDGR: 2,1184

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Digital Gain Control +WDGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 36

Command Responses

AT+WBHV=8,1

Note: Set configuration to indexed mode

OK

AT+WDGR=? +WDGR: 1,(0-255)

+WDGR: 2,(0-255)

OK

Note: Possible values on Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module

AT+WDGR=1,176 OK

Note: PGA configured with a gain of 8.79 dB

AT+WDGR? +WDGR: 1,176

+WDGR: 2,250

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Digital Gain Control +WDGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 37

21.8.6. Notes

Below are listed the values for <Rgain>. They are in deci dB units and index

For Q24NG embedded module (default values are grayed):

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

0 -32768 inf 32 -602 -6.02 64 0 0 96 352 3.52

1 -3612 -36.12 33 -575 -5.75 65 13 0.13 97 361 3.61

2 -3010 -30.1 34 -549 -5.49 66 27 0.27 98 370 3.7

3 -2658 -26.58 35 -524 -5.24 67 40 0.4 99 379 3.79

4 -2408 -24.08 36 -500 -5 68 53 0.53 100 388 3.88

5 -2214 -22.14 37 -476 -4.76 69 65 0.65 101 396 3.96

6 -2056 -20.56 38 -453 -4.53 70 78 0.78 102 405 4.05

7 -1922 -19.22 39 -430 -4.3 71 90 0.9 103 413 4.13

8 -1806 -18.06 40 -408 -4.08 72 102 1.02 104 422 4.22

9 -1704 -17.04 41 -387 -3.87 73 114 1.14 105 430 4.3

10 -1612 -16.12 42 -366 -3.66 74 126 1.26 106 438 4.38

11 -1530 -15.3 43 -345 -3.45 75 138 1.38 107 446 4.46

12 -1454 -14.54 44 -325 -3.25 76 149 1.49 108 454 4.54

13 -1384 -13.84 45 -306 -3.06 77 161 1.61 109 462 4.62

14 -1320 -13.2 46 -287 -2.87 78 172 1.72 110 470 4.7

15 -1260 -12.6 47 -268 -2.68 79 183 1.83 111 478 4.78

16 -1204 -12.04 48 -250 -2.5 80 194 1.94 112 486 4.86

17 -1151 -11.51 49 -232 -2.32 81 205 2.05 113 494 4.94

18 -1102 -11.02 50 -214 -2.14 82 215 2.15 114 501 5.01

19 -1055 -10.55 51 -197 -1.97 83 226 2.26 115 509 5.09

20 -1010 -10.1 52 -180 -1.8 84 236 2.36 116 517 5.17

21 -968 -9.68 53 -164 -1.64 85 246 2.46 117 524 5.24

22 -928 -9.28 54 -148 -1.48 86 257 2.57 118 531 5.31

23 -889 -8.89 55 -132 -1.32 87 267 2.67 119 539 5.39

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Digital Gain Control +WDGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 38

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

24 -852 -8.52 56 -116 -1.16 88 277 2.77 120 546 5.46

25 -816 -8.16 57 -101 -1.01 89 286 2.86 121 553 5.53

26 -782 -7.82 58 -86 -0.86 90 296 2.96 122 560 5.6

27 -750 -7.5 59 -71 -0.71 91 306 3.06 123 567 5.67

28 -718 -7.18 60 -56 -0.56 92 315 3.15 124 574 5.74

29 -688 -6.88 61 -42 -0.42 93 325 3.25 125 581 5.81

30 -658 -6.58 62 -28 -0.28 94 334 3.34 126 588 5.88

31 -630 -6.3 63 -14 -0.14 95 343 3.43 127 595 5.95

For Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module (default values are grayed):

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

0 -32768 -Inf 64 0 0 128 602 6.02 192 954 9.54

1 -3612 -36.12 65 13 0.13 129 609 6.09 193 959 9.59

2 -3010 -30.1 66 27 0.27 130 616 6.16 194 963 9.63

3 -2658 -26.58 67 40 0.4 131 622 6.22 195 968 9.68

4 -2408 -24.08 68 53 0.53 132 629 6.29 196 972 9.72

5 -2214 -22.14 69 65 0.65 133 635 6.35 197 977 9.77

6 -2056 -20.56 70 78 0.78 134 642 6.42 198 981 9.81

7 -1922 -19.22 71 90 0.9 135 648 6.48 199 985 9.85

8 -1806 -18.06 72 102 1.02 136 655 6.55 200 990 9.9

9 -1704 -17.04 73 114 1.14 137 661 6.61 201 994 9.94

10 -1612 -16.12 74 126 1.26 138 667 6.67 202 998 9.98

11 -1530 -15.3 75 138 1.38 139 674 6.74 203 1003 10.03

12 -1454 -14.54 76 149 1.49 140 680 6.8 204 1007 10.07

13 -1384 -13.84 77 161 1.61 141 686 6.86 205 1011 10.11

14 -1320 -13.2 78 172 1.72 142 692 6.92 206 1015 10.15

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Digital Gain Control +WDGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 39

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

15 -1260 -12.6 79 183 1.83 143 698 6.98 207 1020 10.2

16 -1204 -12.04 80 194 1.94 144 704 7.04 208 1024 10.24

17 -1151 -11.51 81 205 2.05 145 710 7.1 209 1028 10.28

18 -1102 -11.02 82 215 2.15 146 716 7.16 210 1032 10.32

19 -1055 -10.55 83 226 2.26 147 722 7.22 211 1036 10.36

20 -1010 -10.1 84 236 2.36 148 728 7.28 212 1040 10.4

21 -968 -9.68 85 246 2.46 149 734 7.34 213 1044 10.44

22 -928 -9.28 86 257 2.57 150 740 7.4 214 1048 10.48

23 -889 -8.89 87 267 2.67 151 746 7.46 215 1053 10.53

24 -852 -8.52 88 277 2.77 152 751 7.51 216 1057 10.57

25 -816 -8.16 89 286 2.86 153 757 7.57 217 1061 10.61

26 -782 -7.82 90 296 2.96 154 763 7.63 218 1065 10.65

27 -750 -7.5 91 306 3.06 155 768 7.68 219 1069 10.69

28 -718 -7.18 92 315 3.15 156 774 7.74 220 1072 10.72

29 -688 -6.88 93 325 3.25 157 779 7.79 221 1076 10.76

30 -658 -6.58 94 334 3.34 158 785 7.85 222 1080 10.8

31 -630 -6.3 95 343 3.43 159 790 7.9 223 1084 10.84

32 -602 -6.02 96 352 3.52 160 796 7.96 224 1088 10.88

33 -575 -5.75 97 361 3.61 161 801 8.01 225 1092 10.92

34 -549 -5.49 98 370 3.7 162 807 8.07 226 1096 10.96

35 -524 -5.24 99 379 3.79 163 812 8.12 227 1100 11

36 -500 -5 100 388 3.88 164 817 8.17 228 1104 11.04

37 -476 -4.76 101 396 3.96 165 823 8.23 229 1107 11.07

38 -453 -4.53 102 405 4.05 166 828 8.28 230 1111 11.11

39 -430 -4.3 103 413 4.13 167 833 8.33 231 1115 11.15

40 -408 -4.08 104 422 4.22 168 838 8.38 232 1119 11.19

41 -387 -3.87 105 430 4.3 169 843 8.43 233 1122 11.22

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Digital Gain Control +WDGR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 40

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

42 -366 -3.66 106 438 4.38 170 849 8.49 234 1126 11.26

43 -345 -3.45 107 446 4.46 171 854 8.54 235 1130 11.3

44 -325 -3.25 108 454 4.54 172 859 8.59 236 1133 11.33

45 -306 -3.06 109 462 4.62 173 864 8.64 237 1137 11.37

46 -287 -2.87 110 470 4.7 174 869 8.69 238 1141 11.41

47 -268 -2.68 111 478 4.78 175 874 8.74 239 1144 11.44

48 -250 -2.5 112 486 4.86 176 879 8.79 240 1148 11.48

49 -232 -2.32 113 494 4.94 177 884 8.84 241 1152 11.52

50 -214 -2.14 114 501 5.01 178 888 8.88 242 1155 11.55

51 -197 -1.97 115 509 5.09 179 893 8.93 243 1159 11.59

52 -180 -1.8 116 517 5.17 180 898 8.98 244 1162 11.62

53 -164 -1.64 117 524 5.24 181 903 9.03 245 1166 11.66

54 -148 -1.48 118 531 5.31 182 908 9.08 246 1170 11.7

55 -132 -1.32 119 539 5.39 183 913 9.13 247 1173 11.73

56 -116 -1.16 120 546 5.46 184 917 9.17 248 1177 11.77

57 -101 -1.01 121 553 5.53 185 922 9.22 249 1180 11.8

58 -86 -0.86 122 560 5.6 186 927 9.27 250 1184 11.84

59 -71 -0.71 123 567 5.67 187 931 9.31 251 1187 11.87

60 -56 -0.56 124 574 5.74 188 936 9.36 252 1190 11.9

61 -42 -0.42 125 581 5.81 189 941 9.41 253 1194 11.94

62 -28 -0.28 126 588 5.88 190 945 9.45 254 1197 11.97

63 -14 -0.14 127 595 5.95 191 950 9.5 255 1201 12.01

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Digital Gain Control +WDGT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 41

21.9. Digital Gain Control +WDGT

21.9.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used by the application to tune the transmit digital gain

of the microphone.

21.9.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDGT=<Configuration>,<Tgain>

OK

Read command

AT+WDGT?

+WDGT: <Configuration>,<Tgain>

[+WDGT: <Configuration>,<Tgain>[…]]

OK

Test command

AT+WDGT=?

+WDGT: (list of supported <Configuration>s), (list of supported <Tgain>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Digital Gain Control +WDGT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 42

21.9.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Configuration>: audio configuration

1 HWL_AUDIO_DSP_TX_PGA_CONF

<Tgain>: transmission gain

There are two configuration modes:

• the gain is entered in deci dB units,

• the gain is entered in index.

By default gains are expressed in deci dB value.

All values are possible between the minimum and maximum values of the table

given in the Notes section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the

nearest is kept.

If the configuration mode has been changed with +WBHV command to the index

mode, the deci dB value will correspond to the index entered as described in the

table of the Notes section.

21.9.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F and "AT+VIP=1".

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Digital Gain Control +WDGT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 43

21.9.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDGT=? +WDGT: (1),(-32768-1201)

OK

Note: Possible values on Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module

AT+WDGT=1,879 OK

Note: PGA configured with a gain of 8.79 dB

AT+WDGT? +WDGT: 1,879

OK

AT+WBHV=8,1

Note: Set configuration to indexed mode

OK

AT+WDGT=? +WDGT: (1),(0-255)

OK

Note: Possible values on Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module

AT+WDGT=1,176 OK

Note: PGA configured with a gain of 8.79 dB

AT+WDGT? +WDGT: 1,176

OK

21.9.6. Notes

Below are listed the values for <Tgain>. They are in deci dB units and index.

For Q26XX and WMP100 embedded module (default values are grayed):

Gain

in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

0 -32768 -Inf 64 0 0 128 602 6.02 192 954 9.54

1 -3612 -36.12 65 13 0.13 129 609 6.09 193 959 9.59

2 -3010 -30.1 66 27 0.27 130 616 6.16 194 963 9.63

3 -2658 -26.58 67 40 0.4 131 622 6.22 195 968 9.68

4 -2408 -24.08 68 53 0.53 132 629 6.29 196 972 9.72

5 -2214 -22.14 69 65 0.65 133 635 6.35 197 977 9.77

6 -2056 -20.56 70 78 0.78 134 642 6.42 198 981 9.81

7 -1922 -19.22 71 90 0.9 135 648 6.48 199 985 9.85

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Digital Gain Control +WDGT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 44

Gain

in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

8 -1806 -18.06 72 102 1.02 136 655 6.55 200 990 9.9

9 -1704 -17.04 73 114 1.14 137 661 6.61 201 994 9.94

10 -1612 -16.12 74 126 1.26 138 667 6.67 202 998 9.98

11 -1530 -15.3 75 138 1.38 139 674 6.74 203 1003 10.03

12 -1454 -14.54 76 149 1.49 140 680 6.8 204 1007 10.07

13 -1384 -13.84 77 161 1.61 141 686 6.86 205 1011 10.11

14 -1320 -13.2 78 172 1.72 142 692 6.92 206 1015 10.15

15 -1260 -12.6 79 183 1.83 143 698 6.98 207 1020 10.2

16 -1204 -12.04 80 194 1.94 144 704 7.04 208 1024 10.24

17 -1151 -11.51 81 205 2.05 145 710 7.1 209 1028 10.28

18 -1102 -11.02 82 215 2.15 146 716 7.16 210 1032 10.32

19 -1055 -10.55 83 226 2.26 147 722 7.22 211 1036 10.36

20 -1010 -10.1 84 236 2.36 148 728 7.28 212 1040 10.4

21 -968 -9.68 85 246 2.46 149 734 7.34 213 1044 10.44

22 -928 -9.28 86 257 2.57 150 740 7.4 214 1048 10.48

23 -889 -8.89 87 267 2.67 151 746 7.46 215 1053 10.53

24 -852 -8.52 88 277 2.77 152 751 7.51 216 1057 10.57

25 -816 -8.16 89 286 2.86 153 757 7.57 217 1061 10.61

26 -782 -7.82 90 296 2.96 154 763 7.63 218 1065 10.65

27 -750 -7.5 91 306 3.06 155 768 7.68 219 1069 10.69

28 -718 -7.18 92 315 3.15 156 774 7.74 220 1072 10.72

29 -688 -6.88 93 325 3.25 157 779 7.79 221 1076 10.76

30 -658 -6.58 94 334 3.34 158 785 7.85 222 1080 10.8

31 -630 -6.3 95 343 3.43 159 790 7.9 223 1084 10.84

32 -602 -6.02 96 352 3.52 160 796 7.96 224 1088 10.88

33 -575 -5.75 97 361 3.61 161 801 8.01 225 1092 10.92

34 -549 -5.49 98 370 3.7 162 807 8.07 226 1096 10.96

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Digital Gain Control +WDGT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 45

Gain

in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

35 -524 -5.24 99 379 3.79 163 812 8.12 227 1100 11

36 -500 -5 100 388 3.88 164 817 8.17 228 1104 11.04

37 -476 -4.76 101 396 3.96 165 823 8.23 229 1107 11.07

38 -453 -4.53 102 405 4.05 166 828 8.28 230 1111 11.11

39 -430 -4.3 103 413 4.13 167 833 8.33 231 1115 11.15

40 -408 -4.08 104 422 4.22 168 838 8.38 232 1119 11.19

41 -387 -3.87 105 430 4.3 169 843 8.43 233 1122 11.22

42 -366 -3.66 106 438 4.38 170 849 8.49 234 1126 11.26

43 -345 -3.45 107 446 4.46 171 854 8.54 235 1130 11.3

44 -325 -3.25 108 454 4.54 172 859 8.59 236 1133 11.33

45 -306 -3.06 109 462 4.62 173 864 8.64 237 1137 11.37

46 -287 -2.87 110 470 4.7 174 869 8.69 238 1141 11.41

47 -268 -2.68 111 478 4.78 175 874 8.74 239 1144 11.44

48 -250 -2.5 112 486 4.86 176 879 8.79 240 1148 11.48

49 -232 -2.32 113 494 4.94 177 884 8.84 241 1152 11.52

50 -214 -2.14 114 501 5.01 178 888 8.88 242 1155 11.55

51 -197 -1.97 115 509 5.09 179 893 8.93 243 1159 11.59

52 -180 -1.8 116 517 5.17 180 898 8.98 244 1162 11.62

53 -164 -1.64 117 524 5.24 181 903 9.03 245 1166 11.66

54 -148 -1.48 118 531 5.31 182 908 9.08 246 1170 11.7

55 -132 -1.32 119 539 5.39 183 913 9.13 247 1173 11.73

56 -116 -1.16 120 546 5.46 184 917 9.17 248 1177 11.77

57 -101 -1.01 121 553 5.53 185 922 9.22 249 1180 11.8

58 -86 -0.86 122 560 5.6 186 927 9.27 250 1184 11.84

59 -71 -0.71 123 567 5.67 187 931 9.31 251 1187 11.87

60 -56 -0.56 124 574 5.74 188 936 9.36 252 1190 11.9

61 -42 -0.42 125 581 5.81 189 941 9.41 253 1194 11.94

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Digital Gain Control +WDGT

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 46

Gain

in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

62 -28 -0.28 126 588 5.88 190 945 9.45 254 1197 11.97

63 -14 -0.14 127 595 5.95 191 950 9.5 255 1201 12.01

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Audio Filter Command +WADF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 47

21.10. Audio Filter Command +WADF

21.10.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command enables/disables the high pass and low pass filters on TX

and RX mode, and the FIR and FIR2 filters on RX mode.

21.10.2. Syntax

• For <filter>=1,2,3 or 4

Action command

AT+WADF=<mode>,<filter>[,[<param1>][,[<param2>][,[<param3>]

[,[<param4>][,[<param5>][,[<param6>][,[<param7>][,[<param8>]

[,[<param9>][,[<param10>]]]]]]]]]]]

OK

• For <filter>=5

Action command

AT+WADF=<mode>,<filter>[,[<param1>][,[<param2>][,[<param3>]

[,[<param4>][,[<param5>][,[<param6>][,[<param7>][,[<param8>]

[,[<param9>][,[<param10>],[<param11>]]]]]]]]]]]

OK

• For <filter>=6

Action command

AT+WADF=<mode>,<filter>[,[<line>][,[<param1>][,[<param2>]

[,[<param3>]…[,[<param16>]]]]]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Audio Filter Command +WADF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 48

Read command

AT+WADF?

• For <filter>=1,2,3 or 4

+WADF: <mode>,<filter>,<param1>,<param2>,<param3>,

<param4>,<param5>,<param6>,<param7>,<param8>,<param9>,<param10>[…]

• For <filter>=5

+WADF: <mode>,<filter>,<param1>,<param2>,<param3>,<param4>,

<param5>,<param6>,<param7>,<param8>,<param9>,<param10>,<param11>[…]

• For <filter>=6

+WADF:<mode>,<filter>,<line>,<param1>,<param2>,<param3>,<param4>

[,[<param5>][,[<param6>]….[,[<param16>]]]][…]

OK

Test command

AT+WADF=?

• For <filter>=1,2,3 or 4

+WADF: (list of supported <mode>s), <filter>,

(list of supported <param1>s),(list of supported <param2>s),

(list of supported <param3>s),(list of supported <param4>s),

(list of supported <param5>s),(list of supported <param6>s),

(list of supported <param7>s),(list of supported <param8>s),

(list of supported <param9>s),(list of supported <param10>s)[…]

• For <filter>=5

+WADF: (list of supported <mode>s),<filter>,

(list of supported <param1>s),(list of supported <param2>s),(list of supported

<param3>s),(list of supported <param4>s), (list of supported <param5>s),(list of

supported <param6>s), (list of supported <param7>s),(list of supported <param8>s),

(list of supported <param9>s),(list of supported <param10>s), (list of supported

<param11>s)[…]

• For <filter>=6

+WADM: (list of supported <mode>s),<filter>,(list of supported <line>s,(list of

supported <param1>s),(list of supported <param2>s),(list of supported <param3>s),

(list of supported <param4>s[,[(list of supported <param5>s)]…[,[(list of supported

<param16>s)]]][…]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Audio Filter Command +WADF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 49

21.10.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: requested operation

0 stop a specific filter

1 enable a specific filter

2 ask for the current parameters values of a specific filter

<filter>: filter type

1 high pass filter in TX mode

2 high pass filter in RX mode

3 low pass filter in TX mode

4 low pass filter in RX mode

5 FIR filter (Finite impulse response numeric filter) in RX mode

6 FIR2 filter (Finite impulse response numeric filter) in RX mode

<line>: (0-1)

only for <filter>=6

FIR2 has 2 lines of 16 parameters (32 parameters are used to set FIR2 filter)

<paramx>: filter parameters

range high pass filter in TX

and RX mode

(default values)

low pass filter in TX

and RX mode

(default values)

<param1> 0-65535 4032 0

<param2> 0-65535 61562 0

<param3> 0-65535 57484 0

<param4> 0-65535 8051 0

<param5> 0-65535 4032 4096

<param6> 0-65535 0 0

<param7> 0-65535 0 0

<param8> 0-65535 61617 0

<param9> 0-65535 3742 0

For <filter>=

1,2,3 or 4

<param10> 0-65535 3919 4096

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Audio Filter Command +WADF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 50

<param1> Symmetrical: (0-1) – default value: 0

<param2> Gain: (0-255) - default value: 0

For

<filter>=5

<param3>-

<param11>

FIR Coefficients: (0-65365)

For <param3>, default value is 32767

For all other params, default value is 0

For

<filter>=6

<param1>-

<param16>

FIR2 Coefficients: (0-65365)

For <line>=0:

<param1> default value is 32767.

<param2>-<param16> default values are 0

For <line>=1:

<param1>-<param16> default values are 0

21.10.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W.command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F and "AT+VIP=1".

21.10.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WADF=? +WADF: (0-2),1,(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-

65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-

65535),(0-65535)

+WADF: (0-2),2,(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-

65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-

65535),(0-65535)

+WADF: (0-2),3,(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-

65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-

65535),(0-65535)

+WADF: (0-2),4,(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-

65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-65535),(0-

65535),(0-65535)

OK

Note: Possible values on WMP100, WMP50

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Audio Filter Command +WADF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 51

Command Responses

AT+WADF? +WADF:

0,1,4032,61562,57484,8051,4032,0,0,61617,3742,3919

+WADF:

0,2,4032,61562,57484,8051,4032,0,0,61617,3742,3919

+WADF: 0,3,0,0,0,0,4096,0,0,0,0,4096

+WADF: 0,4,0,0,0,0,4096,0,0,0,0,4096

OK

Note : Read the status and parameter values for all filters on WMP100,

WMP50

AT+WADF=1,1,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9

Note: Activate the high pass filter in TX mode

with params (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9)

OK

AT+WADF=2,1

Note: Ask for the current params values of the

high pass filter in TX mode

+WADF: 1,1,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9

OK

AT+WADF?

Note: Ask for the current params values of all

filters on WMP100

+WADF: 1,1,0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9

+WADF: 0,2,4032,61562,57484,8051,

4032,0,0,61617,3742,3919

+WADF: 0,3,0,0,0,0,4096,0,0,0,0,4096

+WADF: 0,4,0,0,0,0,4096,0,0,0,0,4096

OK

AT+WADF=1,1,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1,0

Note : Update the params value of the high

pass filter in TX mode. The <mode> parameter

has the current value, the activation mode will

not change.

OK

AT+WADF=2,1

Note: Ask for the current params values of the

high pass filter in TX mode

+WADF: 1,1,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1,0

OK

AT+WADF=1,1,,,,,,,,,,30

Note : Update <param10> of the high pass filter

in TX mode using the current <mode> value

without changing the others parameters

OK

AT+WADF=2,1

Note: Ask for the current params values of the

high pass filter in TX mode

+WADF: 1,1,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1,30

OK

AT+WADF=0,1

Note: Stop the high pass filter in TX mode

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Audio Filter Command +WADF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 52

Command Responses

AT+WADF=1,6,0,,1

Note: Activate FIR2 filter with set the second

parameter of the first line

OK

21.10.6. Notes

• Each filter's availability depends on the embedded module used

• All available filters on the embedded module are activable with each other filter

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Echo Cancellation +ECHO

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 53

21.11. Echo Cancellation +ECHO

21.11.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used to enable, disable or configure the Echo

Cancellation functions for voice calls.

21.11.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+ECHO=<mode>,<algoId>[,<param_1>,…,<param_n>]

OK

Read command

AT+ECHO?

+ECHO: <status>,<algoId>,<param_1>,…,<param_n>

[+ECHO: <status>,<algoId>,<param_1>,…,<param_n>[…]]

OK

Test command

AT+ECHO=?

+ECHO: (list of supported <mode>s), <algoId>, (list of supported <param>s)

[+ECHO: (list of supported <mode>s), <algoId>, (list of supported <param>s) […]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Echo Cancellation +ECHO

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 54

21.11.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: mode

0 deactivate echo cancellation

1 activate echo cancellation.

<algoId> is mandatory. The other configuration parameters are optional, so current values

are taken into account.

<algoId>: algorithm

0 Algorithm 1. Switch attenuation (default AEC algorithm if there are several algorithms).

1 Algorithm 2. Basic Sierra Wireless AEC

2 Algorithm 3: Basic Sierra Wireless AEC

3 Algorithm 6. Advanced Sierra Wireless AEC.

4 Algorithm LiveVibes version 1. Philips AEC.

5 Algorithm LiveVibes version 2. Philips AEC.

<Status>: echo cancellation status

0 deactivated.

1 activated.

2 Reset is needed to activate echo cancellation.

<param_n>: parameter of echo cancellation

depends on the choses algorithm

<alg

oId>

<param_n>

0 <Volout> maximum attenuation of the swith

0 31 db (default)

1 29 db

3 27 db

... ...

14 31 db

15 1 db

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Echo Cancellation +ECHO

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 55

0 <step> attenuation step between attenuation and no attenuation

0 1 db

1 2 db

2 3 db

3 4 db (default value)

0 <PcmThRel> relative threshold between max and min energy information

range: [0; 31] (default value: 10)

0 <PcmThMax> threshold of max energy information.

range: [0; 31] (default value: 7)

1 TBD

2 <AlgoParam> high value leads to high echo attenuation but the full-duplex

quality will be less efficient.

range: [0; 63] (default value: 30)

2 <NoiseThres> noise threshold

Low value leads to high noise attenuation. The threshold 32767

indicates no noise attenuation.

range: [0; 32767] (default value: 8000)

2 <NmbTaps> Number of Taps of the Adaptive Filter

range: [64; 256]. (default value: 256)

64 taps is for short Echo

256 taps is for long Echo

3 <AlgoParam> high value leads to high echo attenuation but the full-duplex

quality will be less efficient.

range: [0; 63]. (30 by default)

3 <NoiseThres> noise threshold

Low value leads to high noise attenuation. The threshold 32767

indicates no noise attenuation.

range: [0; 32767] (default value: 50)

Values above 512 have no effect (noise reduction will be

disabled)

3 <NmbTaps> number of Taps of the Adaptive Filter.

range: [2; 256] ( 256 by default)

64 taps is for short Echo

256 taps is for long Echo.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Echo Cancellation +ECHO

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 56

3 <ConvergenceTime1> convergence time in quiet condition:

This parameter expresses duration as the number of GSM

speech frames (20 ms each) containing far end speech, upon

which the switch only mechanism must run, in quiet conditions.

range: [162; 32767] (default value: 200)

3 <ConvergenceTime2> convergence time in noise condition:

This parameter is the same as <ConvergenceTime1> but in

noisy condition.

range: [162; 32767] (default value: 550)

Caution: :<ConvergenceTime2> must be greater than or

equal to <ConvergenceTime1>

3 <NoiseLevelMAX> upper bound of the noise floor estimate

This parameter is expressed as integer on 16bits, and

corresponds to the rounded value of the noise floor estimate

expressed in dB (log2).

range: [NOISE_LEVEL_MIN+1; 31] (default value: 15 )

NOISE_LEVEL_MIN is a constant (NOISE_LEVEL_MIN=4 in

the current implementation)

3 <DetectionThreshold> far-end speech detection threshold:

In order to detect far end speech on the loudspeaker’s signal,

the SNR is computed regarding to the far end signal power and

the far end signal noise floor level. This parameter specifies a

threshold on the SNR above which the switch mechanism will

be activated.

This parameter is expressed as an integer on 16bits.

range: [0; 32767] (default value: 32767)

3 <CNGAdjust> comfort noise volume gain

Although the comfort noise volume will self adjust to the

estimated ambient noise level, it is possible to artificially reduce

its level. This parameter is expressed in fixed point as a signed

Q15, meaning that 32767 stands for 1.0, and 0 for 0.0.

range: [0;32767] (default value: 32767)

Setting this value to 0 will mean no comfort noise

3 <CNGParam1>

<CNGParam2>

16 bits comfort noise AR2 coefficients:

The user will set the AR2 coefficients for a specific car. Their

value will be estimated on a recorded noise sequence by mean

of a tool provided by Sierra Wireless (C or Matlab source code).

The recorded sequence shall be made in the noisy conditions

and contain noise only.

range: [0; 65535] (default value: 27484 for CNG Param1 and

38697 for CNGParam2)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Echo Cancellation +ECHO

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 57

3 <CNGGain> 16 bits Comfort noise AR2 gain coefficient.

It specifies the gain of the AR2 filter used for comfort noise

generation. It will be estimated by the same tool used to

estimate CNGParam1 and CNGParam2.

It is represented as a Q15 on 16 bits.

range: [0; 32767] (default value: 7311)

3 <SOMValue> Switch attenuation value at the beginning of the call

This parameter sets the depth of the attenuation of the transmit

audio signal when speech is detected on the distant side.

range: [1; 16] (default value: 4)

3 <NoiseEstimate> value of the noise floor estimate written by the DSP (only in

case of active communication)

The allowed range is [0; 32] when a communication is active.

Otherwise the returned value is 65535. This field is present only

in the response to AT+ECHO?

4-5 < echoMode > echo mode. It is a 8 bits field.

range: [0; 255]

Bit 0: echo canceller.

Bit 1: dynamic echo suppressor.

Bit 2: noise suppression.

Bit 3: confort noise injection.

Bit 4: extra suppression of non-linear echoes.

Bit 5: internal use.

Bit 6: internal use.

Bit 7: non-linear preprocessing of the far-end signal.

4-5 <NLMSEchoPathDelay> range: [160; 270] (default value: 254)

4-5 <NLMSTaps> range: [12; 200] (default value: 200)

4-5 <NLMSTwoAlpha> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 8192

4-5 <NLMSErl> range: [0; 32767] default value: (128)

4-5 <NLMSPresetCoefs> range: [0; 2] (default value: 1)

4-5 <NLMSOffset> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 328)

4-5 <ESSpdetFar> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 16384)

4-5 <ESSpdetMic> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 29491)

4-5 <NLSpdetXClip> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 7951)

4-5 <ESTailAlpha> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 26214)

4-5 <ESTailPortion> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 984)

4-5 <ESSpdetNear> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 512)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Echo Cancellation +ECHO

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 58

4-5 <ESGammaEHigh> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 512)

4-5 <ESGammaEdt> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 256)

4-5 <ESGammaELow> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 128)

4-5 <ESGammaN> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 256)

4-5 <NSBlockSize> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 400)

4-5 <NSLimit> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 10922)

4-5 <NLAtten> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 2048)

4-5 <CNILevel> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 8192)

4-5 <WBEchoRatio> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 256)

4-5 <NLPPGain> range: [0; 255] (default value: 2048)

4-5 <NLPPLimit> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 32767)

4-5 <txGain> range: [0; 32767] (default value: 64)

5 <biquad> HPF filter biquad

Composed of 6 parameters: shift, b2, b1, b0, a2, a1.

The allowed range for each: [0; 65535].

Only for LiveVibes V2.

21.11.4. Parameter Storage

All parameters are stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command. The default values can be

restored using AT&F or AT+VIP=1.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Echo Cancellation +ECHO

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 59

21.11.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CMEE=1

Note: Enables the use of result code

OK

AT+ECHO? +ECHO: (0-1),0,(0-15),(0-3),(0-

31),(0-31)

+ECHO: (0-1),2,(0-63),(0-32767),(64-

256)

OK

Note: Algo1 and Algo3 available on this embedded

module

AT+ECHO=? +ECHO: (0-1),4,(0-255),(160-270),(12-

200),(0-32767),(0-32767),(0-2),(0-

32767),(0-32767),(0-32767),(0-

32767),(0-32767),(0-32767),(0-

32767),(0-32767),(0-32767),(0-

32767),(0-32767),(0-32767),(0-

32767),(0-32767),(0-32767),(0-

32767),(0-255),(0-32767),(0-32767)

OK

Note: Only Algo LV-V1 available on this embedded

module

AT+ECHO?

Note: Read current settings

+ECHO: 0,0,0,3,10,7

+ECHO: 0,2,30,8000,256

OK

AT+ECHO=1,0

Note: Activate Algo1 with current parameters

OK

AT+ECHO?

Note: Read current settings

+ECHO: 1,0,0,3,10,7

+ECHO: 0,2,30,8000,256

OK

AT+ECHO=1,2

Note: Activate Algo3 with current parameters

+CME ERROR: 519

Note: The new algorithm will be activated after a reset of

the product

AT+ECHO=?

Note: Read current settings

+ECHO: 1,0,0,3,10,7

+ECHO: 2,2,30,8000,256

OK

AT+CFUN=1

Note: Reset the product

OK

AT+ECHO?

Note: Read current settings

+ECHO: 0,0,0,3,10,7

+ECHO: 1,2,30,8000,256

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Echo Cancellation +ECHO

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 60

Command Responses

AT+ECHO=0,2

Note: Deactivate the Echo Cancellation

OK

AT+ECHO?

Note: Read current settings

+ECHO: 0,0,0,3,10,7

+ECHO: 0,2,30,8000,256

OK

AT+ECHO=1,0

Note: Activate Algo1 with current parameters

+CME ERROR: 519

Note: The new algorithm will be activated after a reset of

the product because the last activated AEC is different

AT+ECHO?

Note: Read current settings

+ECHO: 2,0,0,3,10,7

+ECHO: 0,2,30,8000,256

OK

AT+CFUN=1

Note: Reset the product

OK

AT+ECHO?

Note: Read current settings

+ECHO: 1,0,0,3,10,7

+ECHO: 0,2,30,8000,256

OK

21.11.6. Notes

When embedded module resets, an AEC algo is loaded. If the user wants to activate another AEC

algo (even if not any is activated), a reset is needed. Then, the change will be taken into account after

a reset.

When a reset is needed to activate a new AEC algorithm, if a previous algorithm was activated, it

continues to be activated as long as a reset is not performed. No automatic reset is done.

Only one AEC algorithm can be running at a time.

You can change parameters of an AEC algorithm X during another AEC algorithm Y running with

mode 0 (AT+ECHO= 0,X). No reset is needed.

Echo cancellation can be activated and deactivated during a call if the chosen AEC algo is the default

one.

The echo parameters can be updated without changing the activation mode using the <mode> and

<algoid> current values.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Sierra Wireless Voice Rate +WVR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 61

21.12. Sierra Wireless Voice Rate +WVR

21.12.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows the voice rate for bearer voice to be configured for

outgoing and incoming calls.

21.12.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WVR=[<out_coding_type>][,<in_coding_type>]

OK

Read command

AT+WVR?

+WVR: <out_coding_type>,<in_coding_type>

OK

Test command

AT+WVR=?

+WVR: (list of supported <out_coding_type>s),(list of supported <in_coding_type>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Sierra Wireless Voice Rate +WVR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 62

21.12.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<out_coding_type> voice outgoing call coding type, see following table

Preferred type Other supported types

0 FR

1 EFR FR

2 HR FR

3 FR HR

4 HR EFR

5 EFR HR

6 AMR-FR EFR, AMR-HR

7 (default value) AMR-FR EFR, AMR-HR, HR

8 AMR-HR HR, AMR-FR, EFR

9 AMR-HR AMR-FR, EFR

10 AMR-HR AMR-FR, FR

11 AMR-HR HR, AMR-FR

12 AMR-FR AMR-HR

13 AMR-FR FR, AMR-HR

14 AMR-FR FR, AMR-HR, HR

<in_coding_type>: voice incoming call coding type, see <out_coding_type> for possible values

21.12.4. Parameter Storage

The <out_coding_type> and <in_coding_type> parameters are stored in EEPROM without using the

AT&W command.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Sierra Wireless Voice Rate +WVR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 63

21.12.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WVR=? +WVR: (0-14),(0-14)

Note: HR, EFR and AMR available

AT+WVR=1

Note: Configures voice type FR and EFR for outgoing

calls only

OK

Note: Bearer is configured for outgoing calls

AT+WVR=1,4

Note: Configures voice type FR and EFR for outgoing

calls and HR and EFR for incoming calls

OK

Note: Bearer is configured for outgoing and incoming calls

AT+WVR=,4

Note: Configures voice type HR and EFR for incoming

calls

OK

Note: Bearer is unchanged for outgoing calls and configured for

incoming calls

AT+WVR?

Note: Asks for the current values

+WVR: 1,4

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

DTMF Signals +VTD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 64

21.13. DTMF Signals +VTD

21.13.1. Description

The product enables the user application to send DTMF tones over the GSM network. This command

is used to define tone duration.

21.13.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+VTD=<n>

OK

Read command

AT+VTD?

+VTD: <n>

OK

Test command

AT+VTD=?

+VTD: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

21.13.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: length of tones emitted as a result of the +VTS command, in units of 100 ms

integer type

Value zero (default value) causes a tone duration of 70 ฑ 5 ms, according to 3GPP

23.014 [11] .

The value used is modulo 256.

21.13.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

DTMF Signals +VTD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 65

21.13.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+VTD=6

Note: Define 600 ms tone duration

OK

AT+VTD?

Note: Get current tone duration

+VTD: 6

OK

AT+VTD=? +VTD: (0-255)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

DTMF Signals +VTS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 66

21.14. DTMF Signals +VTS

21.14.1. Description

The product enables the application to send DTMF tones over the GSM network. This command

enables tones to be transmitted, only when there is an active call.

21.14.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+VTS=<Tone>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+VTS=?

+VTS: (list of supported <Tone>s)

OK

21.14.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Tone>: DTMF tone to transmit

values are in {0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D}

21.14.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

DTMF Signals +VTS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 67

21.14.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+VTS=? +VTS: (0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D)

OK

AT+VTS="A" OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Play tone +WTONE

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 68

21.15. Play tone +WTONE

21.15.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows a tone to be played on the current speaker or on the

buzzer.

21.15.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WTONE=<mode>[,<dest>,<freq>[,[<gain>][,[<duration>][,<freq2>[,<gain2>]]]]]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WTONE=?

OK

21.15.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: tone activation/deactivation

0 stop playing

1 play a tone

<dest>: destination setting

1 speaker

2 buzzer

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Play tone +WTONE

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 69

<freq>: tone frequency (in Hz)

1-3999 If <dest>=1 (speaker)

from 1 to a

maximum value

referred in Product

Technical

Specification

If <dest>=2 (buzzer)

<gain>: There are two configuration modes:

• the gain is entered in deci dB units,

• the gain is entered in index.

By default gains are expressed in deci dB value.

All values are possible between the minimum and maximum values of the table

given in the Notes section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the

nearest is kept.

If the configuration mode has been changed with +WBHV command to the index

mode, the deci dB value will correspond to the index entered as described in the

table of the Notes section.

<freq2>: 2nd tone frequency (in Hz)

optional if <mode>=1

only available with the speaker

1-3999 speaker

<gain2>: tone gain for the <freq2>

same values as <gain>

<duration>: tone duration (in 100 ms units)

0-50 default value if omitted: 0

When <duration>=0, the duration is up to 21 minutes, and the tone can be

stopped by AT+WTONE=0

21.15.4. Parameter Storage

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Play tone +WTONE

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 70

21.15.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WTONE=1,1,300,-1510,50

Note: Play a tone

OK

Note: Done

AT+WTONE=0

Note: Stop playing

OK

Note: Done

AT+WTONE=1,1,300,-1510,50,600,-1510

Note: Play a tone with 2 frequencies (allowed only

with the speaker)

OK

Note: Done

AT+WBHV=8,1

Note: Set configuration to indexed mode

OK

AT+WTONE=1,1,300,45,50

Note: Play a tone

OK

Note: Done

AT+WTONE=0

Note: Stop playing

OK

Note: Done

AT+WTONE=1,1,300,45,50,600,45

Note: Play a tone with 2 frequencies (allowed only

with the speaker)

OK

Note: Done

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Play tone +WTONE

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 71

21.15.6. Notes

Below are listed the values for <gain>. They are in deci dB units and index.

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

0 -8000 -80 64 -1204 -12.04 128 -602 -6.02 192 -250 -2.5

1 -4816 -48.16 65 -1191 -11.91 129 -595 -5.95 193 -245 -2.45

2 -4214 -42.14 66 -1177 -11.77 130 -589 -5.89 194 -241 -2.41

3 -3862 -38.62 67 -1164 -11.64 131 -582 -5.82 195 -236 -2.36

4 -3612 -36.12 68 -1151 -11.51 132 -575 -5.75 196 -232 -2.32

5 -3419 -34.19 69 -1139 -11.39 133 -569 -5.69 197 -228 -2.28

6 -3260 -32.6 70 -1126 -11.26 134 -562 -5.62 198 -223 -2.23

7 -3126 -31.26 71 -1114 -11.14 135 -556 -5.56 199 -219 -2.19

8 -3010 -30.1 72 -1102 -11.02 136 -549 -5.49 200 -214 -2.14

9 -2908 -29.08 73 -1090 -10.9 137 -543 -5.43 201 -210 -2.1

10 -2816 -28.16 74 -1078 -10.78 138 -537 -5.37 202 -206 -2.06

11 -2734 -27.34 75 -1066 -10.66 139 -530 -5.3 203 -201 -2.01

12 -2658 -26.58 76 -1055 -10.55 140 -524 -5.24 204 -197 -1.97

13 -2589 -25.89 77 -1043 -10.43 141 -518 -5.18 205 -193 -1.93

14 -2524 -25.24 78 -1032 -10.32 142 -512 -5.12 206 -189 -1.89

15 -2464 -24.64 79 -1021 -10.21 143 -506 -5.06 207 -185 -1.85

16 -2408 -24.08 80 -1010 -10.1 144 -500 -5 208 -180 -1.8

17 -2356 -23.56 81 -1000 -10 145 -494 -4.94 209 -176 -1.76

18 -2306 -23.06 82 -989 -9.89 146 -488 -4.88 210 -172 -1.72

19 -2259 -22.59 83 -978 -9.78 147 -482 -4.82 211 -168 -1.68

20 -2214 -22.14 84 -968 -9.68 148 -476 -4.76 212 -164 -1.64

21 -2172 -21.72 85 -958 -9.58 149 -470 -4.7 213 -160 -1.6

22 -2132 -21.32 86 -947 -9.47 150 -464 -4.64 214 -156 -1.56

23 -2093 -20.93 87 -937 -9.37 151 -459 -4.59 215 -152 -1.52

24 -2056 -20.56 88 -928 -9.28 152 -453 -4.53 216 -148 -1.48

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Play tone +WTONE

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 72

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

25 -2021 -20.21 89 -918 -9.18 153 -447 -4.47 217 -144 -1.44

26 -1987 -19.87 90 -908 -9.08 154 -441 -4.41 218 -140 -1.4

27 -1954 -19.54 91 -898 -8.98 155 -436 -4.36 219 -136 -1.36

28 -1922 -19.22 92 -889 -8.89 156 -430 -4.3 220 -132 -1.32

29 -1892 -18.92 93 -880 -8.8 157 -425 -4.25 221 -128 -1.28

30 -1862 -18.62 94 -870 -8.7 158 -419 -4.19 222 -124 -1.24

31 -1834 -18.34 95 -861 -8.61 159 -414 -4.14 223 -120 -1.2

32 -1806 -18.06 96 -852 -8.52 160 -408 -4.08 224 -116 -1.16

33 -1779 -17.79 97 -843 -8.43 161 -403 -4.03 225 -112 -1.12

34 -1754 -17.54 98 -834 -8.34 162 -397 -3.97 226 -108 -1.08

35 -1728 -17.28 99 -825 -8.25 163 -392 -3.92 227 -104 -1.04

36 -1704 -17.04 100 -816 -8.16 164 -387 -3.87 228 -101 -1.01

37 -1680 -16.8 101 -808 -8.08 165 -382 -3.82 229 -97 -0.97

38 -1657 -16.57 102 -799 -7.99 166 -376 -3.76 230 -93 -0.93

39 -1634 -16.34 103 -791 -7.91 167 -371 -3.71 231 -89 -0.89

40 -1612 -16.12 104 -782 -7.82 168 -366 -3.66 232 -86 -0.86

41 -1591 -15.91 105 -774 -7.74 169 -361 -3.61 233 -82 -0.82

42 -1570 -15.7 106 -766 -7.66 170 -356 -3.56 234 -78 -0.78

43 -1550 -15.5 107 -758 -7.58 171 -350 -3.5 235 -74 -0.74

44 -1530 -15.3 108 -750 -7.5 172 -345 -3.45 236 -71 -0.71

45 -1510 -15.1 109 -742 -7.42 173 -340 -3.4 237 -67 -0.67

46 -1491 -14.91 110 -734 -7.34 174 -335 -3.35 238 -63 -0.63

47 -1472 -14.72 111 -726 -7.26 175 -330 -3.3 239 -60 -0.6

48 -1454 -14.54 112 -718 -7.18 176 -325 -3.25 240 -56 -0.56

49 -1436 -14.36 113 -710 -7.1 177 -321 -3.21 241 -52 -0.52

50 -1419 -14.19 114 -703 -7.03 178 -316 -3.16 242 -49 -0.49

51 -1401 -14.01 115 -695 -6.95 179 -311 -3.11 243 -45 -0.45

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Play tone +WTONE

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 73

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

52 -1384 -13.84 116 -688 -6.88 180 -306 -3.06 244 -42 -0.42

53 -1368 -13.68 117 -680 -6.8 181 -301 -3.01 245 -38 -0.38

54 -1352 -13.52 118 -673 -6.73 182 -296 -2.96 246 -35 -0.35

55 -1336 -13.36 119 -665 -6.65 183 -292 -2.92 247 -31 -0.31

56 -1320 -13.2 120 -658 -6.58 184 -287 -2.87 248 -28 -0.28

57 -1305 -13.05 121 -651 -6.51 185 -282 -2.82 249 -24 -0.24

58 -1290 -12.9 122 -644 -6.44 186 -277 -2.77 250 -21 -0.21

59 -1275 -12.75 123 -637 -6.37 187 -273 -2.73 251 -17 -0.17

60 -1260 -12.6 124 -630 -6.3 188 -268 -2.68 252 -14 -0.14

61 -1246 -12.46 125 -623 -6.23 189 -264 -2.64 253 -10 -0.1

62 -1232 -12.32 126 -616 -6.16 190 -259 -2.59 254 -7 -0.07

63 -1218 -12.18 127 -609 -6.09 191 -254 -2.54 255 0 0

Note: For a buzzer output, very high and very low gain values are not accepted. It depends on used

embedded module. Please refer to Product Technical Specification for more information.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Play DTMF tone + WDTMF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 74

21.16. Play DTMF tone + WDTMF

21.16.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows a DTMF tone to be played on the current speaker.

21.16.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDTMF=<mode>[,<dtmf>[,[<gain>][,<duration>]]]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WDTMF=?

+WDTMF: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <dtmf>s),(list of supported

<gain>s),(list of supported <duration>s)

OK

21.16.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: tone activation/deactivation

0 stop playing

1 play a DTMF tone

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Play DTMF tone + WDTMF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 75

<dtmf>: DTMF to be played (mandatory if <mode>=1)

range: {0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D}

<gain>: There are two configuration modes:

• the gain is entered in deci dB units,

• the gain is entered in index.

By default gains are expressed in deci dB value.

All values are possible between the minimum and maximum values of the table

given in the Notes section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the

nearest is kept.

If the configuration mode has been changed with +WBHV command to the index

mode, the deci dB value will correspond to the index entered as described in the

table of the Notes section.

<duration>: tone duration (in 100 ms units)

0-50 default value if omitted: 0

When <duration>=0, the duration is infinite, and the DTMF tone can be stopped

by AT+WDTMF=0

21.16.4. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDTMF=?

Note: Possible values.

+WDTMF: (0-1),(0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D),(-8000-0),(0-

50)

OK

AT+WDTMF=1,"*",-1510,50

Note: Play a DTMF tone

OK

AT+WDTMF=0

Note: Stop playing

OK

AT+WBHV=8,1

Note: Set configuration to indexed mode

OK

AT+WDTMF=?

Note: Possible values.

+WDTMF: (0-1),(0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D),(0-255),(0-

50)

OK

AT+WDTMF=1,"*",9,50

Note: Play a DTMF tone

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Play DTMF tone + WDTMF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 76

21.16.5. Notes

Below are listed the values for <gain>. They are in deci dB units and index.

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

0 -8000 -80 64 -1204 -12.04 128 -602 -6.02 192 -250 -2.5

1 -4816 -48.16 65 -1191 -11.91 129 -595 -5.95 193 -245 -2.45

2 -4214 -42.14 66 -1177 -11.77 130 -589 -5.89 194 -241 -2.41

3 -3862 -38.62 67 -1164 -11.64 131 -582 -5.82 195 -236 -2.36

4 -3612 -36.12 68 -1151 -11.51 132 -575 -5.75 196 -232 -2.32

5 -3419 -34.19 69 -1139 -11.39 133 -569 -5.69 197 -228 -2.28

6 -3260 -32.6 70 -1126 -11.26 134 -562 -5.62 198 -223 -2.23

7 -3126 -31.26 71 -1114 -11.14 135 -556 -5.56 199 -219 -2.19

8 -3010 -30.1 72 -1102 -11.02 136 -549 -5.49 200 -214 -2.14

9 -2908 -29.08 73 -1090 -10.9 137 -543 -5.43 201 -210 -2.1

10 -2816 -28.16 74 -1078 -10.78 138 -537 -5.37 202 -206 -2.06

11 -2734 -27.34 75 -1066 -10.66 139 -530 -5.3 203 -201 -2.01

12 -2658 -26.58 76 -1055 -10.55 140 -524 -5.24 204 -197 -1.97

13 -2589 -25.89 77 -1043 -10.43 141 -518 -5.18 205 -193 -1.93

14 -2524 -25.24 78 -1032 -10.32 142 -512 -5.12 206 -189 -1.89

15 -2464 -24.64 79 -1021 -10.21 143 -506 -5.06 207 -185 -1.85

16 -2408 -24.08 80 -1010 -10.1 144 -500 -5 208 -180 -1.8

17 -2356 -23.56 81 -1000 -10 145 -494 -4.94 209 -176 -1.76

18 -2306 -23.06 82 -989 -9.89 146 -488 -4.88 210 -172 -1.72

19 -2259 -22.59 83 -978 -9.78 147 -482 -4.82 211 -168 -1.68

20 -2214 -22.14 84 -968 -9.68 148 -476 -4.76 212 -164 -1.64

21 -2172 -21.72 85 -958 -9.58 149 -470 -4.7 213 -160 -1.6

22 -2132 -21.32 86 -947 -9.47 150 -464 -4.64 214 -156 -1.56

23 -2093 -20.93 87 -937 -9.37 151 -459 -4.59 215 -152 -1.52

24 -2056 -20.56 88 -928 -9.28 152 -453 -4.53 216 -148 -1.48

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Play DTMF tone + WDTMF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 77

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

25 -2021 -20.21 89 -918 -9.18 153 -447 -4.47 217 -144 -1.44

26 -1987 -19.87 90 -908 -9.08 154 -441 -4.41 218 -140 -1.4

27 -1954 -19.54 91 -898 -8.98 155 -436 -4.36 219 -136 -1.36

28 -1922 -19.22 92 -889 -8.89 156 -430 -4.3 220 -132 -1.32

29 -1892 -18.92 93 -880 -8.8 157 -425 -4.25 221 -128 -1.28

30 -1862 -18.62 94 -870 -8.7 158 -419 -4.19 222 -124 -1.24

31 -1834 -18.34 95 -861 -8.61 159 -414 -4.14 223 -120 -1.2

32 -1806 -18.06 96 -852 -8.52 160 -408 -4.08 224 -116 -1.16

33 -1779 -17.79 97 -843 -8.43 161 -403 -4.03 225 -112 -1.12

34 -1754 -17.54 98 -834 -8.34 162 -397 -3.97 226 -108 -1.08

35 -1728 -17.28 99 -825 -8.25 163 -392 -3.92 227 -104 -1.04

36 -1704 -17.04 100 -816 -8.16 164 -387 -3.87 228 -101 -1.01

37 -1680 -16.8 101 -808 -8.08 165 -382 -3.82 229 -97 -0.97

38 -1657 -16.57 102 -799 -7.99 166 -376 -3.76 230 -93 -0.93

39 -1634 -16.34 103 -791 -7.91 167 -371 -3.71 231 -89 -0.89

40 -1612 -16.12 104 -782 -7.82 168 -366 -3.66 232 -86 -0.86

41 -1591 -15.91 105 -774 -7.74 169 -361 -3.61 233 -82 -0.82

42 -1570 -15.7 106 -766 -7.66 170 -356 -3.56 234 -78 -0.78

43 -1550 -15.5 107 -758 -7.58 171 -350 -3.5 235 -74 -0.74

44 -1530 -15.3 108 -750 -7.5 172 -345 -3.45 236 -71 -0.71

45 -1510 -15.1 109 -742 -7.42 173 -340 -3.4 237 -67 -0.67

46 -1491 -14.91 110 -734 -7.34 174 -335 -3.35 238 -63 -0.63

47 -1472 -14.72 111 -726 -7.26 175 -330 -3.3 239 -60 -0.6

48 -1454 -14.54 112 -718 -7.18 176 -325 -3.25 240 -56 -0.56

49 -1436 -14.36 113 -710 -7.1 177 -321 -3.21 241 -52 -0.52

50 -1419 -14.19 114 -703 -7.03 178 -316 -3.16 242 -49 -0.49

51 -1401 -14.01 115 -695 -6.95 179 -311 -3.11 243 -45 -0.45

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Play DTMF tone + WDTMF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 78

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

52 -1384 -13.84 116 -688 -6.88 180 -306 -3.06 244 -42 -0.42

53 -1368 -13.68 117 -680 -6.8 181 -301 -3.01 245 -38 -0.38

54 -1352 -13.52 118 -673 -6.73 182 -296 -2.96 246 -35 -0.35

55 -1336 -13.36 119 -665 -6.65 183 -292 -2.92 247 -31 -0.31

56 -1320 -13.2 120 -658 -6.58 184 -287 -2.87 248 -28 -0.28

57 -1305 -13.05 121 -651 -6.51 185 -282 -2.82 249 -24 -0.24

58 -1290 -12.9 122 -644 -6.44 186 -277 -2.77 250 -21 -0.21

59 -1275 -12.75 123 -637 -6.37 187 -273 -2.73 251 -17 -0.17

60 -1260 -12.6 124 -630 -6.3 188 -268 -2.68 252 -14 -0.14

61 -1246 -12.46 125 -623 -6.23 189 -264 -2.64 253 -10 -0.1

62 -1232 -12.32 126 -616 -6.16 190 -259 -2.59 254 -7 -0.07

63 -1218 -12.18 127 -609 -6.09 191 -254 -2.54 255 0 0

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

DTMF Detection Mode +WDDM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 79

21.17. DTMF Detection Mode +WDDM

21.17.1. Description

This specific command allows to start/stop the DTMF detection.

21.17.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDDM=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+WDDM?

+WDDM: <mode>

OK

Test command

AT+WDDM=?

+WDDM: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

Unsolicited response

+WDDI: <char>,<duration>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

DTMF Detection Mode +WDDM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 80

21.17.3. Parameters and defined values

<mode>: DTMF detection activation

0 stop DTMF detection (default value)

1 start DTMF detection

<char>: detected DTMF character

possible detected DTMF characters: [0-9],[A-D],*, #

<duration>: duration of the incoming character in milliseconds

range: 20 (depending on DTMF decoder behavior) to 1200000 approximately (value

limited by the network capabilities)

21.17.4. Parameter storage

The <mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.

The default values can be restored using AT&F.

21.17.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDDM=?

Note: Test command

+WDDM: (0,1)

AT+WDDM=1

Note: Start DTMF detection

OK

AT+WDDM=1

Note: Start DTMF detection

+CME ERROR: 558

Note: DTMF detection already started by another client.

AT+WDDM?

Note: Read current value

+WDDM: 1

OK

Note: Detection started

+WDDI: "*",60

Note: ‘*’ char was detected during 60ms

AT+WDDM=0

Note: Stop DTMF detection

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

DTMF Detection Mode +WDDM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 81

21.17.6. Notes

• The DTMF decoding will be only available for one applicative layer: ATI or Open AT. If the

DTMF decoding is requested by one part and then requested by another part, a specific error

(+CME ERROR: 558 ) will be returned to the second part.

• The different audio filters and processes in Rx path should not be activated while DTMF

decoding mode is set.

The following AT commands are partially deactivated when DTMF decoding is activated:

􀂃 +WADF command

􀂃 +ECHO command

The different audio filters return in its old state when DTMF decoder is deactivated.

• When the detector is enabled (with +WDDM AT command), each time an incoming DTMF is

detected, an unsolicited response will be returned by the embedded module with DTMF value

and its duration.

• If DTMF comes with duration lower than 20ms, the unsolicited event +WDDI will not be

returned.

• Decoded DTMF signals will be notified only during a voice call.

• The DTMF decoding is only suspended when the voice call is finished and when the SU does

not request the DTMF decoding deactivation.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Set Standard Tone +WSST

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 82

21.18. Set Standard Tone +WSST

21.18.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows to set/get the level of the standard tones (outgoing

call tone level, busy tone level and congestion tone level).

21.18.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WSST=<N/A>[,<ring tone level>]

AT+WSST=[<N/A>],<ring tone level>

OK

Read command

AT+WSST?

+WSST: <N/A>,<ring tone level>

OK

Test command

AT+WSST=?

+WSST: (list of supported <N/A>),(list of supported

<ring tone level>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Set Standard Tone +WSST

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 83

21.18.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<N/A>: not applicable

<ring tone level>: ring tone level

<level>: There are two configuration modes:

• the gain is entered in deci dB units,

• the gain is entered in index.

By default gains are expressed in deci dB value.

All values are possible between the minimum and maximum values of the table

given in the Notes section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the

nearest is kept.

If the configuration mode has been changed with +WBHV command to the

index mode, the deci dB value will correspond to the index entered as

described in the table of the Notes section.

21.18.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W command.

21.18.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WSST=?

Note: Get supported parameters

+WSST: (-8000-0),(-8000-0)

OK

AT+WSST=,-301

Note: Set ring tone level to -3.01dB

OK

AT+WSST?

Note: Get current standard tones sound level

+WSST: -4214,-301

OK

AT+WBHV=8,1

Note: Set configuration to indexed mode

OK

AT+WSST=?

Note: Get supported parameters

+WSST: (0-255),(0-255)

OK

AT+WSST=,5

Note: Set ring tone level to 5

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Set Standard Tone +WSST

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 84

21.18.6. Notes

Below are listed the values for <level>. They are in deci dB units and index. Default values are

grayed in the following table.

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

0 -8000 -80 64 -1204 -12.04 128 -602 -6.02 192 -250 -2.5

1 -4816 -48.16 65 -1191 -11.91 129 -595 -5.95 193 -245 -2.45

2 -4214 -42.14 66 -1177 -11.77 130 -589 -5.89 194 -241 -2.41

3 -3862 -38.62 67 -1164 -11.64 131 -582 -5.82 195 -236 -2.36

4 -3612 -36.12 68 -1151 -11.51 132 -575 -5.75 196 -232 -2.32

5 -3419 -34.19 69 -1139 -11.39 133 -569 -5.69 197 -228 -2.28

6 -3260 -32.6 70 -1126 -11.26 134 -562 -5.62 198 -223 -2.23

7 -3126 -31.26 71 -1114 -11.14 135 -556 -5.56 199 -219 -2.19

8 -3010 -30.1 72 -1102 -11.02 136 -549 -5.49 200 -214 -2.14

9 -2908 -29.08 73 -1090 -10.9 137 -543 -5.43 201 -210 -2.1

10 -2816 -28.16 74 -1078 -10.78 138 -537 -5.37 202 -206 -2.06

11 -2734 -27.34 75 -1066 -10.66 139 -530 -5.3 203 -201 -2.01

12 -2658 -26.58 76 -1055 -10.55 140 -524 -5.24 204 -197 -1.97

13 -2589 -25.89 77 -1043 -10.43 141 -518 -5.18 205 -193 -1.93

14 -2524 -25.24 78 -1032 -10.32 142 -512 -5.12 206 -189 -1.89

15 -2464 -24.64 79 -1021 -10.21 143 -506 -5.06 207 -185 -1.85

16 -2408 -24.08 80 -1010 -10.1 144 -500 -5 208 -180 -1.8

17 -2356 -23.56 81 -1000 -10 145 -494 -4.94 209 -176 -1.76

18 -2306 -23.06 82 -989 -9.89 146 -488 -4.88 210 -172 -1.72

19 -2259 -22.59 83 -978 -9.78 147 -482 -4.82 211 -168 -1.68

20 -2214 -22.14 84 -968 -9.68 148 -476 -4.76 212 -164 -1.64

21 -2172 -21.72 85 -958 -9.58 149 -470 -4.7 213 -160 -1.6

22 -2132 -21.32 86 -947 -9.47 150 -464 -4.64 214 -156 -1.56

23 -2093 -20.93 87 -937 -9.37 151 -459 -4.59 215 -152 -1.52

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Set Standard Tone +WSST

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 85

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

24 -2056 -20.56 88 -928 -9.28 152 -453 -4.53 216 -148 -1.48

25 -2021 -20.21 89 -918 -9.18 153 -447 -4.47 217 -144 -1.44

26 -1987 -19.87 90 -908 -9.08 154 -441 -4.41 218 -140 -1.4

27 -1954 -19.54 91 -898 -8.98 155 -436 -4.36 219 -136 -1.36

28 -1922 -19.22 92 -889 -8.89 156 -430 -4.3 220 -132 -1.32

29 -1892 -18.92 93 -880 -8.8 157 -425 -4.25 221 -128 -1.28

30 -1862 -18.62 94 -870 -8.7 158 -419 -4.19 222 -124 -1.24

31 -1834 -18.34 95 -861 -8.61 159 -414 -4.14 223 -120 -1.2

32 -1806 -18.06 96 -852 -8.52 160 -408 -4.08 224 -116 -1.16

33 -1779 -17.79 97 -843 -8.43 161 -403 -4.03 225 -112 -1.12

34 -1754 -17.54 98 -834 -8.34 162 -397 -3.97 226 -108 -1.08

35 -1728 -17.28 99 -825 -8.25 163 -392 -3.92 227 -104 -1.04

36 -1704 -17.04 100 -816 -8.16 164 -387 -3.87 228 -101 -1.01

37 -1680 -16.8 101 -808 -8.08 165 -382 -3.82 229 -97 -0.97

38 -1657 -16.57 102 -799 -7.99 166 -376 -3.76 230 -93 -0.93

39 -1634 -16.34 103 -791 -7.91 167 -371 -3.71 231 -89 -0.89

40 -1612 -16.12 104 -782 -7.82 168 -366 -3.66 232 -86 -0.86

41 -1591 -15.91 105 -774 -7.74 169 -361 -3.61 233 -82 -0.82

42 -1570 -15.7 106 -766 -7.66 170 -356 -3.56 234 -78 -0.78

43 -1550 -15.5 107 -758 -7.58 171 -350 -3.5 235 -74 -0.74

44 -1530 -15.3 108 -750 -7.5 172 -345 -3.45 236 -71 -0.71

45 -1510 -15.1 109 -742 -7.42 173 -340 -3.4 237 -67 -0.67

46 -1491 -14.91 110 -734 -7.34 174 -335 -3.35 238 -63 -0.63

47 -1472 -14.72 111 -726 -7.26 175 -330 -3.3 239 -60 -0.6

48 -1454 -14.54 112 -718 -7.18 176 -325 -3.25 240 -56 -0.56

49 -1436 -14.36 113 -710 -7.1 177 -321 -3.21 241 -52 -0.52

50 -1419 -14.19 114 -703 -7.03 178 -316 -3.16 242 -49 -0.49

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Set Standard Tone +WSST

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 86

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

51 -1401 -14.01 115 -695 -6.95 179 -311 -3.11 243 -45 -0.45

52 -1384 -13.84 116 -688 -6.88 180 -306 -3.06 244 -42 -0.42

53 -1368 -13.68 117 -680 -6.8 181 -301 -3.01 245 -38 -0.38

54 -1352 -13.52 118 -673 -6.73 182 -296 -2.96 246 -35 -0.35

55 -1336 -13.36 119 -665 -6.65 183 -292 -2.92 247 -31 -0.31

56 -1320 -13.2 120 -658 -6.58 184 -287 -2.87 248 -28 -0.28

57 -1305 -13.05 121 -651 -6.51 185 -282 -2.82 249 -24 -0.24

58 -1290 -12.9 122 -644 -6.44 186 -277 -2.77 250 -21 -0.21

59 -1275 -12.75 123 -637 -6.37 187 -273 -2.73 251 -17 -0.17

60 -1260 -12.6 124 -630 -6.3 188 -268 -2.68 252 -14 -0.14

61 -1246 -12.46 125 -623 -6.23 189 -264 -2.64 253 -10 -0.1

62 -1232 -12.32 126 -616 -6.16 190 -259 -2.59 254 -7 -0.07

63 -1218 -12.18 127 -609 -6.09 191 -254 -2.54 255 0 0

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Ring Melody Playback +CRMP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 87

21.19. Ring Melody Playback +CRMP

21.19.1. Description

This command allows a melody to be played. All melodies are manufacturer defined.

For incoming voice, data or fax calls, 10 manufacturer-defined melodies can be played back (in a

loop).

For an incoming short message, 2 manufacturer-defined sounds can be played back (once).

Melody #1: short beep / Melody #2: long beep.

21.19.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+CRMP=<call type>[,[<volume>][,[<type>][,<index>]]]

OK

Read command

AT+CRMP?

OK

Test command

AT+CRMP=?

+CRMP: (list of supported <call type>s),(list of supported <volume>s),(list of

supported <type>s),(list of supported <index>s)

OK

21.19.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<call type>: call type

0 incoming voice call

1 incoming data call

2 incoming fax call

3 incoming short message (SMS)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Ring Melody Playback +CRMP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 88

<volume>:

There are two configuration modes:

- the gain is entered in deci dB units,

- the gain is entered in index.

By default gains are expressed in deci dB value.

All values are possible between the minimum and maximum values of the table

given in the Notes section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the

nearest is kept.

If the configuration mode has been changed with +WBHV command to the index

mode, the deci dB value will correspond to the index entered as described in the

table of the Notes section.

<type>: melody type

0 manufacturer defined (default value if omitted)

<index>: melody index

0 stop melody playback

1-10 melody ID (default value if omitted: 1)

Range of values:1 to 10 for voice/data/fax call type, and 1 to 2 for short

messages.

21.19.4. Parameter Storage

None

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Ring Melody Playback +CRMP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 89

21.19.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CRMP=0,-1510,0,2

Note: Play voice call melody index 2 with volume level -15dB.

OK

Note: Melody playback

AT+CRMP=0,,,0

Note: Stop the melody.

OK

Note: The melody is stopped.

AT+CRMP=?

Note: Supported parameters

+CRMP: (0-3),(-8000-0),0,(0-10)

OK

AT+WBHV=8,1

Note: Set configuration to indexed mode

OK

AT+CRMP=0,7,0,2

Note: Play voice call melody index 2 with volume level 7.

OK

AT+CRMP=?

Note: Supported parameters

+CRMP: (0-3),(0-255),0,(0-10)

OK

21.19.6. Notes

Loop melodies (for voice/data/fax call) must be stopped by a +CRMP command with the <index> field

set to 0 (example: AT+CRMP=0,,,0).

When the <volume> parameter is given, this overwrites the <sound level> value of the +CRSL

command. If the <volume> parameter is not given, the <sound level> value of +CRSL is used as

default value.

+CRMP command does not associate a specific melody to a specific incoming call type i.e. selected

melody will be played in local. Separate melodies cannot be associated with data call, voice call or fax

using +CRMP command

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Ring Melody Playback +CRMP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 90

Below are listed the values for <volume>. They are in deci dB units and index.

Gain

in

index

Gain

in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

0 -8000 -80 64 -1204 -12.04 128 -602 -6.02 192 -250 -2.5

1 -4816 -48.16 65 -1191 -11.91 129 -595 -5.95 193 -245 -2.45

2 -4214 -42.14 66 -1177 -11.77 130 -589 -5.89 194 -241 -2.41

3 -3862 -38.62 67 -1164 -11.64 131 -582 -5.82 195 -236 -2.36

4 -3612 -36.12 68 -1151 -11.51 132 -575 -5.75 196 -232 -2.32

5 -3419 -34.19 69 -1139 -11.39 133 -569 -5.69 197 -228 -2.28

6 -3260 -32.6 70 -1126 -11.26 134 -562 -5.62 198 -223 -2.23

7 -3126 -31.26 71 -1114 -11.14 135 -556 -5.56 199 -219 -2.19

8 -3010 -30.1 72 -1102 -11.02 136 -549 -5.49 200 -214 -2.14

9 -2908 -29.08 73 -1090 -10.9 137 -543 -5.43 201 -210 -2.1

10 -2816 -28.16 74 -1078 -10.78 138 -537 -5.37 202 -206 -2.06

11 -2734 -27.34 75 -1066 -10.66 139 -530 -5.3 203 -201 -2.01

12 -2658 -26.58 76 -1055 -10.55 140 -524 -5.24 204 -197 -1.97

13 -2589 -25.89 77 -1043 -10.43 141 -518 -5.18 205 -193 -1.93

14 -2524 -25.24 78 -1032 -10.32 142 -512 -5.12 206 -189 -1.89

15 -2464 -24.64 79 -1021 -10.21 143 -506 -5.06 207 -185 -1.85

16 -2408 -24.08 80 -1010 -10.1 144 -500 -5 208 -180 -1.8

17 -2356 -23.56 81 -1000 -10 145 -494 -4.94 209 -176 -1.76

18 -2306 -23.06 82 -989 -9.89 146 -488 -4.88 210 -172 -1.72

19 -2259 -22.59 83 -978 -9.78 147 -482 -4.82 211 -168 -1.68

20 -2214 -22.14 84 -968 -9.68 148 -476 -4.76 212 -164 -1.64

21 -2172 -21.72 85 -958 -9.58 149 -470 -4.7 213 -160 -1.6

22 -2132 -21.32 86 -947 -9.47 150 -464 -4.64 214 -156 -1.56

23 -2093 -20.93 87 -937 -9.37 151 -459 -4.59 215 -152 -1.52

24 -2056 -20.56 88 -928 -9.28 152 -453 -4.53 216 -148 -1.48

25 -2021 -20.21 89 -918 -9.18 153 -447 -4.47 217 -144 -1.44

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Ring Melody Playback +CRMP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 91

Gain

in

index

Gain

in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

26 -1987 -19.87 90 -908 -9.08 154 -441 -4.41 218 -140 -1.4

27 -1954 -19.54 91 -898 -8.98 155 -436 -4.36 219 -136 -1.36

28 -1922 -19.22 92 -889 -8.89 156 -430 -4.3 220 -132 -1.32

29 -1892 -18.92 93 -880 -8.8 157 -425 -4.25 221 -128 -1.28

30 -1862 -18.62 94 -870 -8.7 158 -419 -4.19 222 -124 -1.24

31 -1834 -18.34 95 -861 -8.61 159 -414 -4.14 223 -120 -1.2

32 -1806 -18.06 96 -852 -8.52 160 -408 -4.08 224 -116 -1.16

33 -1779 -17.79 97 -843 -8.43 161 -403 -4.03 225 -112 -1.12

34 -1754 -17.54 98 -834 -8.34 162 -397 -3.97 226 -108 -1.08

35 -1728 -17.28 99 -825 -8.25 163 -392 -3.92 227 -104 -1.04

36 -1704 -17.04 100 -816 -8.16 164 -387 -3.87 228 -101 -1.01

37 -1680 -16.8 101 -808 -8.08 165 -382 -3.82 229 -97 -0.97

38 -1657 -16.57 102 -799 -7.99 166 -376 -3.76 230 -93 -0.93

39 -1634 -16.34 103 -791 -7.91 167 -371 -3.71 231 -89 -0.89

40 -1612 -16.12 104 -782 -7.82 168 -366 -3.66 232 -86 -0.86

41 -1591 -15.91 105 -774 -7.74 169 -361 -3.61 233 -82 -0.82

42 -1570 -15.7 106 -766 -7.66 170 -356 -3.56 234 -78 -0.78

43 -1550 -15.5 107 -758 -7.58 171 -350 -3.5 235 -74 -0.74

44 -1530 -15.3 108 -750 -7.5 172 -345 -3.45 236 -71 -0.71

45 -1510 -15.1 109 -742 -7.42 173 -340 -3.4 237 -67 -0.67

46 -1491 -14.91 110 -734 -7.34 174 -335 -3.35 238 -63 -0.63

47 -1472 -14.72 111 -726 -7.26 175 -330 -3.3 239 -60 -0.6

48 -1454 -14.54 112 -718 -7.18 176 -325 -3.25 240 -56 -0.56

49 -1436 -14.36 113 -710 -7.1 177 -321 -3.21 241 -52 -0.52

50 -1419 -14.19 114 -703 -7.03 178 -316 -3.16 242 -49 -0.49

51 -1401 -14.01 115 -695 -6.95 179 -311 -3.11 243 -45 -0.45

52 -1384 -13.84 116 -688 -6.88 180 -306 -3.06 244 -42 -0.42

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Ring Melody Playback +CRMP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 92

Gain

in

index

Gain

in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

53 -1368 -13.68 117 -680 -6.8 181 -301 -3.01 245 -38 -0.38

54 -1352 -13.52 118 -673 -6.73 182 -296 -2.96 246 -35 -0.35

55 -1336 -13.36 119 -665 -6.65 183 -292 -2.92 247 -31 -0.31

56 -1320 -13.2 120 -658 -6.58 184 -287 -2.87 248 -28 -0.28

57 -1305 -13.05 121 -651 -6.51 185 -282 -2.82 249 -24 -0.24

58 -1290 -12.9 122 -644 -6.44 186 -277 -2.77 250 -21 -0.21

59 -1275 -12.75 123 -637 -6.37 187 -273 -2.73 251 -17 -0.17

60 -1260 -12.6 124 -630 -6.3 188 -268 -2.68 252 -14 -0.14

61 -1246 -12.46 125 -623 -6.23 189 -264 -2.64 253 -10 -0.1

62 -1232 -12.32 126 -616 -6.16 190 -259 -2.59 254 -7 -0.07

63 -1218 -12.18 127 -609 -6.09 191 -254 -2.54 255 0 0

Note: For buzzer output, very high and very low gain values are not accepted. Hence, the nearest value is

kept, which depends on the used embedded module. Please refer to Product Technical Specification,

for more information.

Example: If buzzer minimum gain is -46.03 dB and -48.06 dB gain is selected (gain 1 in index mode),

then -46.03 dB is played.

.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Sierra Wireless Change Default Melody +WCDM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 93

21.20. Sierra Wireless Change Default Melody

+WCDM

21.20.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows the selection of a manufacturer specific melody.

This default melody will be played for any new incoming voice call, either on the buzzer or on the

speaker.

21.20.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WCDM=<melody>[,<player>]

AT+WCDM=[<melody>],<player>

OK

Read command

AT+WCDM?

+WCDM: <melody>,<player>

OK

Test command

AT+WCDM=?

+WCDM: (list of supported <melody>s),(list of supported <player>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Sierra Wireless Change Default Melody +WCDM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 94

21.20.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<melody>: melody number

0 no melody (default value)

1-10 melody 1 to 10

<player>: output used to play the melody

0 The melody will be played on the buzzer for any new incoming voice call. (default

value)

1 The melody will be played on the speaker for any new incoming voice call.

21.20.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.command. The default values can be

restored using AT&F.

21.20.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WCDM=? +WCDM: (0-10),(0-1)

OK

AT+WCDM=5

Note: Select melody #5

OK

AT+WCDM?

Note: Indicate the current melody

+WCDM: 5,0

OK

Note: Melody #5 is currently selected, and the buzzer is selected to

play it. An incoming call occurs, and the melody #5 is played on the

buzzer.

AT+WCDM=,1

Note: Select the speaker to play the melody on

OK

AT+WCDM? +WCDM: 5,1

OK

Note: The speaker is selected to play the melody if an incoming call

occurs.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Sierra Wireless Change Default Player +WCDP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 95

21.21. Sierra Wireless Change Default Player +WCDP

21.21.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows the default melody player to be selected.

21.21.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WCDP=<player>

OK

Read command

AT+WCDP?

+WCDP: <player>

OK

Test command

AT+WCDP=?

+WCDP: (list of supported <player>s)

OK

21.21.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<player>: output selected to play the melody

0 buzzer (default value)

1 speaker

21.21.4. Parameter Storage

The <player> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W.command The default value

can be restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Sierra Wireless Change Default Player +WCDP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 96

21.21.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WCDP=? +WCDP: (0-1)

OK

AT+WCDP=0

Note: Selects the buzzer

OK

AT+WCDP? +WCDP: 0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 97

21.22. Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP

21.22.1. Description

This command allows factory settings for voice parameters to be restored from EEPROM.

These voice parameters include:

• gain control (+VGR & +VGT commands),

• speaker & microphone selection (+SPEAKER command),

• echo cancellation (+ECHO command),

• side tone modification (+SIDET command),

• digital gain (+WDGT, +WDGR commands),

• audio filter (+WADF command),

• loud speaker volume level (+CLVL command).

21.22.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+VIP=<n>

OK

Read command

AT+VIP?

+VIP: <n>

OK

Test command

AT+VIP=?

+VIP: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 98

21.22.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: initialization setting

1 restore all voice parameters

21.22.4. Parameter Storage

None.

21.22.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+VIP=? +VIP: (1)

OK

AT+VIP=1

Note: Restore the factory settings from EEPROM

OK

AT+VIP? +VIP: 1

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Auto-tests &T

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 99

21.23. Auto-tests &T

21.23.1. Description

This command allows to trigger various auto-tests.

21.23.2. Syntax

Action command

AT&T[<n>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

21.23.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: auto-test activation parameter

0 perform software auto-tests

1 execute the audio loop test (close)

2 stop the audio loop test (open)

21.23.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Auto-tests &T

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 100

21.23.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT&T0

Note: Perform software auto-tests

OK

Note: No software problem detected, all checksums are correct

21.23.6. Notes

AT&T command has to be used when the MS is registered in order to process the AUDIO test loop

correctly.

Caution: : The audio loop activation (enabled with AT&T1 command, disabled with AT&T2 command) involves

some restrictions on the use of other AT commands.

- Audio loop mode must not be enabled when a communication is active.

- Audio loop mode must not be enabled when a tone is under generation

- Audio loop must be disabled (if active) Before opening a communication

- Tone generation and sidetone modification must not be possible when the audio loop is active.

AT&T0 just returns OK (no action)

AT&T1 activates the audio loop:

• On Q24 Series, the audio loop consists in an analog near-end loop (the microphone analog

audio signal is looped back to the speaker) and a digital far-end loop (the downlink digital

audio data is looped back to the uplink stream).

• On Q268x and WMP Series, the loop audio consists in a digital near-end loop (the

microphone digital audio samples are looped back to the speaker).

AT&T2 de-activates the audio loop.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Audio Diagnostic Start +WADS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 101

21.24. Audio Diagnostic Start +WADS

21.24.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary launches the Audio Diagnostic to make a diagnostic of audio path

using a specific DTMF with duration and gain. DTMF is played by the speaker and is analyzed by the

microphone and returned by the embedded module.

21.24.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WADS=<DtmfCharacter>[,[<DtmfDuration>][,<Gain>]]

+WADS: <DecodedDtmf>,<DecodedDuration>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WADS=?

+WADS: (list of supported <DtmfCharacter>s),(list of supported

<DtmfDuration>s),(list of supported <Gain>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Audio Diagnostic Start +WADS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 102

21.24.3. Parameters and defined values

<DtmfCharacter>: DTMF used for the diagnostic

string type

possible values: 0-9,A,B,C,D,*,#

<DtmfDuration>: duration of DTMF (in ms).

It is equal to 100ms if omitted.

5-250 in ms, in 20 ms unit.

<Gain>: DTMF gain

It is equal to default value if omitted (-15.1 dB, corresponding to index 45).

There are two configuration modes:

• the gain is entered in deci dB units,

• the gain is entered in index.

By default gains are expressed in deci dB value.

All values are possible between the minimum and maximum values of the table

given in the Notes section. If a value does not correspond to a table value, the

nearest is kept.

If the configuration mode has been changed with +WBHV command to the

index mode, the deci dB value will correspond to the index entered as

described in the table of the Notes section.

<DecodedDtmf>: DTMF decoded.

possible values: 0-9,A,B,C,D,*,#

<DecodedDuration >: DTMF decoded.

5-500 in ms, in 20ms unit

21.24.4. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WADS=? +WADS: (0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D),(5-250),(-8000-0)

OK

AT+WADS=”1”,100,-1510 +WADS: "1",100

OK

AT+WBHV=8,1 OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Audio Diagnostic Start +WADS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 103

21.24.5. Notes

This command is available when the embedded module is in idle mode (no active voice call).

The played tone detection on microphone is not guaranteed if gain is either too small or too high.

When this feature is used, we recommend to disable the echo cancellation, using the AT+ECHO

command, in order not to disrupt tones detection, which could be handled as an echo by the AEC.

Below are listed the values for <Gain>. They are in deci dB units and index.

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

0 -8000 -80 64 -1204 -12.04 128 -602 -6.02 192 -250 -2.5

1 -4816 -48.16 65 -1191 -11.91 129 -595 -5.95 193 -245 -2.45

2 -4214 -42.14 66 -1177 -11.77 130 -589 -5.89 194 -241 -2.41

3 -3862 -38.62 67 -1164 -11.64 131 -582 -5.82 195 -236 -2.36

4 -3612 -36.12 68 -1151 -11.51 132 -575 -5.75 196 -232 -2.32

5 -3419 -34.19 69 -1139 -11.39 133 -569 -5.69 197 -228 -2.28

6 -3260 -32.6 70 -1126 -11.26 134 -562 -5.62 198 -223 -2.23

7 -3126 -31.26 71 -1114 -11.14 135 -556 -5.56 199 -219 -2.19

8 -3010 -30.1 72 -1102 -11.02 136 -549 -5.49 200 -214 -2.14

9 -2908 -29.08 73 -1090 -10.9 137 -543 -5.43 201 -210 -2.1

10 -2816 -28.16 74 -1078 -10.78 138 -537 -5.37 202 -206 -2.06

11 -2734 -27.34 75 -1066 -10.66 139 -530 -5.3 203 -201 -2.01

12 -2658 -26.58 76 -1055 -10.55 140 -524 -5.24 204 -197 -1.97

13 -2589 -25.89 77 -1043 -10.43 141 -518 -5.18 205 -193 -1.93

14 -2524 -25.24 78 -1032 -10.32 142 -512 -5.12 206 -189 -1.89

15 -2464 -24.64 79 -1021 -10.21 143 -506 -5.06 207 -185 -1.85

16 -2408 -24.08 80 -1010 -10.1 144 -500 -5 208 -180 -1.8

17 -2356 -23.56 81 -1000 -10 145 -494 -4.94 209 -176 -1.76

18 -2306 -23.06 82 -989 -9.89 146 -488 -4.88 210 -172 -1.72

19 -2259 -22.59 83 -978 -9.78 147 -482 -4.82 211 -168 -1.68

20 -2214 -22.14 84 -968 -9.68 148 -476 -4.76 212 -164 -1.64

21 -2172 -21.72 85 -958 -9.58 149 -470 -4.7 213 -160 -1.6

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Audio Diagnostic Start +WADS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 104

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

22 -2132 -21.32 86 -947 -9.47 150 -464 -4.64 214 -156 -1.56

23 -2093 -20.93 87 -937 -9.37 151 -459 -4.59 215 -152 -1.52

24 -2056 -20.56 88 -928 -9.28 152 -453 -4.53 216 -148 -1.48

25 -2021 -20.21 89 -918 -9.18 153 -447 -4.47 217 -144 -1.44

26 -1987 -19.87 90 -908 -9.08 154 -441 -4.41 218 -140 -1.4

27 -1954 -19.54 91 -898 -8.98 155 -436 -4.36 219 -136 -1.36

28 -1922 -19.22 92 -889 -8.89 156 -430 -4.3 220 -132 -1.32

29 -1892 -18.92 93 -880 -8.8 157 -425 -4.25 221 -128 -1.28

30 -1862 -18.62 94 -870 -8.7 158 -419 -4.19 222 -124 -1.24

31 -1834 -18.34 95 -861 -8.61 159 -414 -4.14 223 -120 -1.2

32 -1806 -18.06 96 -852 -8.52 160 -408 -4.08 224 -116 -1.16

33 -1779 -17.79 97 -843 -8.43 161 -403 -4.03 225 -112 -1.12

34 -1754 -17.54 98 -834 -8.34 162 -397 -3.97 226 -108 -1.08

35 -1728 -17.28 99 -825 -8.25 163 -392 -3.92 227 -104 -1.04

36 -1704 -17.04 100 -816 -8.16 164 -387 -3.87 228 -101 -1.01

37 -1680 -16.8 101 -808 -8.08 165 -382 -3.82 229 -97 -0.97

38 -1657 -16.57 102 -799 -7.99 166 -376 -3.76 230 -93 -0.93

39 -1634 -16.34 103 -791 -7.91 167 -371 -3.71 231 -89 -0.89

40 -1612 -16.12 104 -782 -7.82 168 -366 -3.66 232 -86 -0.86

41 -1591 -15.91 105 -774 -7.74 169 -361 -3.61 233 -82 -0.82

42 -1570 -15.7 106 -766 -7.66 170 -356 -3.56 234 -78 -0.78

43 -1550 -15.5 107 -758 -7.58 171 -350 -3.5 235 -74 -0.74

44 -1530 -15.3 108 -750 -7.5 172 -345 -3.45 236 -71 -0.71

45 -1510 -15.1 109 -742 -7.42 173 -340 -3.4 237 -67 -0.67

46 -1491 -14.91 110 -734 -7.34 174 -335 -3.35 238 -63 -0.63

47 -1472 -14.72 111 -726 -7.26 175 -330 -3.3 239 -60 -0.6

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Audio Commands

Audio Diagnostic Start +WADS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 105

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain

in

Index

Gain

in dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

Gain in

Index

Gain in

dB

Real

dB

value

48 -1454 -14.54 112 -718 -7.18 176 -325 -3.25 240 -56 -0.56

49 -1436 -14.36 113 -710 -7.1 177 -321 -3.21 241 -52 -0.52

50 -1419 -14.19 114 -703 -7.03 178 -316 -3.16 242 -49 -0.49

51 -1401 -14.01 115 -695 -6.95 179 -311 -3.11 243 -45 -0.45

52 -1384 -13.84 116 -688 -6.88 180 -306 -3.06 244 -42 -0.42

53 -1368 -13.68 117 -680 -6.8 181 -301 -3.01 245 -38 -0.38

54 -1352 -13.52 118 -673 -6.73 182 -296 -2.96 246 -35 -0.35

55 -1336 -13.36 119 -665 -6.65 183 -292 -2.92 247 -31 -0.31

56 -1320 -13.2 120 -658 -6.58 184 -287 -2.87 248 -28 -0.28

57 -1305 -13.05 121 -651 -6.51 185 -282 -2.82 249 -24 -0.24

58 -1290 -12.9 122 -644 -6.44 186 -277 -2.77 250 -21 -0.21

59 -1275 -12.75 123 -637 -6.37 187 -273 -2.73 251 -17 -0.17

60 -1260 -12.6 124 -630 -6.3 188 -268 -2.68 252 -14 -0.14

61 -1246 -12.46 125 -623 -6.23 189 -264 -2.64 253 -10 -0.1

62 -1232 -12.32 126 -616 -6.16 190 -259 -2.59 254 -7 -0.07

63 -1218 -12.18 127 -609 -6.09 191 -254 -2.54 255 0 0

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 106

22. I/O Commands

22.1. Input/Output Management +WIOM

22.1.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used to manage GPIO.

It allocates the GPIOs and set their configuration (input, output, or tri-state) as well as their GPIO

value (if set as an output). These actions can be done only if the GPIO is available (i.e. the pin is not

already allocated by another application).

22.1.2. Syntax

• For <Mode>=0: release the GPIO

Action command

AT+WIOM=<mode>[,<Gpiold>]

OK

• For <Mode>=1: allocate and set the GPIO configuration

Action command

AT+WIOM=<mode>,<Gpiold>,<GpioDir>[,<GpioVal>]

OK

• For <Mode>=2: list the current GPIO status for all GPIO (allocated or not)

Action command

AT+WIOM=<mode>

+WIOM: <Gpiold>,<GpioStatus>

[+WIOM: <Gpiold>,<GpioStatus>[…]]

OK

• For <Mode>=3: list the GPIO capabilities for all GPIO (allocated or not)

Action command

AT+WIOM=<mode>

+WIOM: <Gpiold>,<GpioAccess>

[+WIOM: <Gpiold>,<GpioAccess>[…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

I/O Commands

Input/Output Management +WIOM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 107

• For <Mode>=4 and 5: save / delete the configuration in flash memory

Action command

AT+WIOM=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+WIOM?

+WIOM: <Gpiold>,<GpioDir>[,<GpioVal>]

[+WIOM: <Gpiold>,<GpioDir>[,<GpioVal>][…]]

OK

Test command

None

22.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>: working mode

0 release the GPIO

1 allocate and set the GPIO configuration

2 list the current GPIO status

3 list the GPIO capabilities

4 save the configuration in flash memory

5 delete the saved configuration in flash memory

<Gpiold>: GPIO name (as mentioned in the embedded module Product Technical Specification

and Customer Design Guideline)

string type

<GpioDir>: I/O direction or configuration

0 input

1 output

2 tri-state (only available on GPO, please refer to the embedded module Product

Technical Specification and Customer Design Guideline)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

I/O Commands

Input/Output Management +WIOM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 108

<GpioVal>: output / tri-state state

optional for GPIO with input writable attribute or GPO forbidden for GPI

0 <Gpiold> is reset/low (initial value if IO with input writable attribute)

1 <Gpiold> is set/high

<GpioAccess>: I/O access attribute

bit field

bit 0 output is readable

bit 1 input is writable

bit 2 output and tri-state (only available on GPO, please refer to the embedded module

Product Technical Specification and Customer Design Guideline)

<GpioStatus>: GPIO pin usage

0 input

1 output

2 tri-state

3 not available: already allocated by another application (Open ATfor example)

4 currently available: the pin is not used by a feature, or the GPIO has been previously

released

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

I/O Commands

Input/Output Management +WIOM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 109

22.1.4. Parameter Storage

The <Gpiold>, <GpioDir> and <GpioVal> parameters are stored or deleted in flash memory using the

action command.

22.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WIOM=2 +WIOM: "GPIO1",4

+WIOM: "GPIO2",4

+WIOM: "GPIO3",4

+WIOM: "GPIO4",3

+WIOM: "GPI1",4

+WIOM: "GPO1",4

OK

Note: GPIO1, GPIO2, GPIO3, GPI1 and GPO1 are available, GPIO4

is used.

AT+WIOM=1,"GPIO1",0 OK

Note: Allocate the GPIO1 as input

AT+WIOM=1,"GPIO2",1 OK

Note: Allocate and configure the GPIO2 as output (output initial value:

0)

AT+WIOM=1,"GPI1",0 OK

Note: Allocate the GPI1

AT+WIOM=1,"GPO1",1,0 OK

Note: Allocate and configure the GPO1 value to low

AT+WIOM? +WIOM: "GPIO1",0

+WIOM: "GPIO2",1,0

+WIOM: "GPI1",0

+WIOM: "GPO1",1,0

OK

AT+WIOM=2 +WIOM: "GPIO1",0

+WIOM: "GPIO2",1

+WIOM: "GPIO3",4

+WIOM: "GPIO4",3

+WIOM: "GPI1",0

+WIOM: "GPO1",1

OK

Note: GPIO1, GPIO2, GPI1 and GPO1 are allocated by the user,

GPIO3 is available, GPIO4 is used.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

I/O Commands

Input/Output Management +WIOM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 110

Command Responses

AT+WIOM=0,"GPIO1" OK

AT+WIOM=2 +WIOM: "GPIO1",4

+WIOM: "GPIO2",1

+WIOM: "GPIO3",4

+WIOM: "GPIO4",3

+WIOM: "GPI1",0

+WIOM: "GPO1",1

OK

Note: GPIO2, GPI1 and GPO1 are allocated by the user, GPIO1 and

GPIO3 are available, GPIO4 is used.

AT+WIOM=3 +WIOM: "GPIO1",3

+WIOM: "GPIO2",3

+WIOM: "GPIO3",0

+WIOM: "GPIO4",0

+WIOM: "GPI1",0

+WIOM: "GPO1",4

OK

AT+WIOM=4 OK

Note: Save the configuration

22.1.6. Notes

A GPIO can be used either as input or output, if it is not used by a hardware feature.

Read command AT+WIOM? lists the direction and the value for allocated GPIO only.

When a GPIO is used by a feature, it is not available anymore: It doesn't appear in the capabilities list

and its status cannot be retrieved (using AT+WIOM=2). When writable or readable operations are

attempted on these GPIOs, a '+CME ERROR: 501' error will be returned.

After a pin is set in GPIO mode (or a GPIO is released), it is not possible to use it anymore in other

feature than GPIO mode until the next boot occurs: if user tries to activate a multiplexed feature, an

error message "+CME ERROR: 3" is returned. Similarly, to change a pin association to a feature into

a GPIO pin (please refer to the embedded module Product Technical Specification and Customer

Design Guideline for the list of the features), a reset is needed.

If the parameter <GpioId> is omitted for <mode>=0, all allocated GPIO are deallocated.

In all cases, the <GpioVal> parameter is saved in a register, which is used when the IO is configured

as output. This value can be set at any moment (by +WIOM or +WIOW commands). This mechanism

prevents from the transition states. The register initial value is zero.

Likewise, when a IO is configured as output with an output value, the output value is set before

modification of the direction to avoid transition states.

The multiplexing pins list and the available GPIO list are given in the embedded module Product

Technical Specification and Customer Design Guideline.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

I/O Commands

Read GPIO value +WIOR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 111

22.2. Read GPIO value +WIOR

22.2.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command reads the requested GPIO state.

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is allowed only on the inputs and the outputs with readable

attributes, which were allocated by the user.

22.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WIOR=<Gpiold>

+WIOR: <GpioVal>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

22.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Gpiold>: GPIO name (as mentioned in the embedded module Product Technical Specification

and Customer Design Guideline)

string type

<GpioVal>: GPIO state

0 <Gpiold> is reset/low

1 <Gpiold> is set/high

22.2.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

I/O Commands

Read GPIO value +WIOR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 112

22.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WIOR="GPIO05"

Note: Reads GPIO05 value

+WIOR: 0

OK

Note: GPIO05 is reset/low

22.2.6. Notes

The GPIO allocation and the GPIO configuration are done by the +WIOM command.

The string <Gpiold> is to be indicated as mentioned in the embedded module Product Technical

Specification and Customer Design Guideline. It depends on the pins capabilities of the embedded

module.

Please refer to the embedded module Product Technical Specification and Customer Design

Guideline for information about the existing GPIO.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

I/O Commands

Write GPIO value +WIOW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 113

22.3. Write GPIO value +WIOW

22.3.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command sets the requested GPIO state.

This command is allowed only on the outputs and the inputs with writable attribute which were

allocated by the user.

22.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WIOW=<Gpiold>,<GpioVal>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

22.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Gpiold>: GPIO name (as mentioned in the embedded module Product Technical Specification

and Customer Design Guideline)

string type

<GpioVal>: GPIO state

0 <Gpiold> is reset/low

1 <Gpiold> is set/high

22.3.4. Parameter storage

The <state> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

I/O Commands

Write GPIO value +WIOW

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 114

22.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WIOW="GPIO02",0

Note: Sets GPIO02 to low

OK

Note: GPIO state is written

22.3.6. Notes

The GPIO allocation and the I/O configuration are done by the +WIOM command.

The string <Gpiold> is to be indicated as mentioned in the embedded module Product Technical

Specification and Customer Design Guideline. It depends on the pins capabilities of the embedded

module.

Please refer to the embedded module Product Technical Specification and Customer Design

Guideline for information about the existing GPIO.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

I/O Commands

Sierra Wireless Interrupt Pin Configuration +WIPC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 115

22.4. Sierra Wireless Interrupt Pin Configuration

+WIPC

22.4.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used to configure interrupt pins on the embedded

module.

Please refer to the embedded module Product Technical Specification and Customer Design

Guideline for information on the GPIO multiplexed with external interrupts.

This command can be used only if the external interrupts are not currently in use by another

application.

22.4.2. Syntax

• For <Mode>=0: release an external interrupt

Action command

AT+WIPC=<mode>[,<interruptId>]

OK

• For <Mode>=1: allocate and set an external interrupt

Action command

AT+WIPC=<mode>,<interruptId>,<polarity>,<filter>[,<debounceTiming>]

OK

• For <Mode>=2 and 3: save / delete the configuration in flash memory

Action command

AT+WIPC=<mode>

OK

Read command

AT+WIPC?

+WIPC: <interruptId>,<polarity>,<filter>[,<debounceTiming>]

[+WIPC: <interruptId>,<polarity>,<filter>[,<debounceTiming>][…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

I/O Commands

Sierra Wireless Interrupt Pin Configuration +WIPC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 116

Test command

AT+WIPC=?

+WIPC: (list of supported <mode>s),list of supported <interruptId>s),list of

supported <polarity>s),(list of supported <filter>s),(list of supported

<debounceTiming>s)

OK

22.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<InterruptId>: external interrupt name (as mentioned in the embedded module Product Technical

Specification and Customer Design Guideline)

string type

<mode>: requested configuration

0 release the external interrupt

1 allocate and set the external interrupt

2 save the configuration in flash memory

3 delete the saved configuration in flash memory

<polarity>: external interrupt polarity selection

0 falling

1 rising

2 both edges (with or without debounce)

<filter>: processing filter

0 bypass mode (no stretching and no debounce)

1 stretching (not allowed for both edges)

2 debounce

<debounceTiming>: number of cycles for debounce duration (in units of 7.8 ms)

mandatory if <filter>=2

range: 1-7

22.4.4. Parameter Storage

The <polarity>, <filter> and <debounceTiming> parameters are stored or deleted in the flash memory

using the action command.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

I/O Commands

Sierra Wireless Interrupt Pin Configuration +WIPC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 117

22.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WIPC=? +WIPC:(0-3),("INT0","INT1","INT2"),(0-2),(0-

2),(1-7)

OK

AT+WIPC? OK

Note: No external interrupts have been allocated.

AT+WIPC=1,"INT0",0,0 OK

Note: INT0 is configured in bypass mode.

AT+WIPC=1,"INT2",1,2,1 OK

Note: INT2 is configured in rising edge sensitivity with debounce.

AT+WIPC? +WIPC: "INT0",0,0

+WIPC: "INT2",1,2,1

OK

Note: Only INT0 and INT2 have been allocated .

AT+WIND=2048 OK

Note: Activate the +WIND indications for interruption

Note : Interrupt on INT0 +WIND: 12,"INT0"

Note : Interrupt on INT2 +WIND: 12,"INT2"

AT+WIPC=0,"INT2"

OK

Note: Release INT2

AT+WIPC? +WIPC: "INT0",0,0

OK

22.4.6. Notes

The <debounceTiming> parameter is used only when <filter>=2.

The action command is only usable on external interrupts when it is not currently used by another

device. The read command lists only the interrupts used by the user.

If <interruptId> is not set with <mode>=0 (deallocate mode), all allocated external interrupts will be

released.

After a pin is set in external interrupt mode (or an external interrupt is released), it is not possible to

use it any more in other feature than external interrupt mode, until the next boot occurs. Similarly, to

change a pin association to a feature into an external interrupt pin (refer to embedded module Product

Technical Specification and Customer Design Guideline for the list of the features), a reset is needed.

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 118

23. Battery Commands

23.1. Analog Digital Converters Measurements

+ADC

23.1.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command retrieves the measures of various ADCs present on

embedded module.

The measurement can be expressed in mV, corresponding to analog input signal measurement. It

can also be expressed in digital value corresponding to ADC result register value.

23.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+ADC=<mode>,<ADCIdx>

+ADC: <mode>,<ADCValue>

OK

Read command

AT+ADC?

+ADC: <ADC0Value>[,<ADC1Value>[,<ADC2Value>] […]]

OK

Test command

AT+ADC=?

+ADC: <ADCIdx>,<AnalogMinVolt>,<AnalogMaxVolt>,<Resolution>

[+ADC: <ADCIdx>,<AnalogMinVolt>,<AnalogMaxVolt>,<Resolution> […]]

OK

Note: For the read command, ADC values are expressed in analog value.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Analog Digital Converters Measurements +ADC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 119

23.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<AnalogMinVolt>: Minimal value measurable by ADC (in mV), depends on embedded module. Please

refer to the embedded module Product Technical Specification.

<AnalogMaxVolt>: Maximal value measurable by ADC (in mV), depends on embedded module. Please

refer to the embedded module Product Technical Specification.

<Resolution>: Digital register number of bit, depends on embedded module. Please refer to the

Product Technical Specification.

<mode>: mode

0 ADC measure expressed in analog value

1 ADC measure expressed in digital value

<ADCIdx>: ADC Index

0 The first index is reserved to measure the battery voltage.

Other index can be available. Please refer to Product Technical Specification to

know how many other ADCs are available on embedded module.

<ADCValue> value of ADC measured

0-2000 (mV) <ADCValue> is expressed in analog value (except for battery voltage, a resistor

bridge is used)

0-4095 <ADCValue> is expressed in digital value (the register value coded on 12 bits)

23.1.4. Parameter Storage

No parameter is stored in EEPROM.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Analog Digital Converters Measurements +ADC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 120

23.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+ADC?

Note: Ask for the list of possible values

+ADC: 0,3200,4800,12

+ADC: 1,0,2000,12

+ADC: 2,0,2000,12

+ADC: 3,0,2000,12

OK

Note: Response on Q2687, WMP100

AT+ADC? +ADC: 3450,1800,1000,1800

OK

Note: Response on Q2687, WMP100

AT+ADC=0,0 +ADC: 0,3450

OK

Note: ADC0 asked in analog mode

AT+ADC=1,0 +ADC: 1,36

OK

Note: ADC0 asked in digital mode

AT+ADC=1,2 +ADC: 1,77

OK

Note: ADC2 asked in digital mode

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 121

23.2. Sierra Wireless Battery Charge Management

+WBCM

23.2.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used to manage the battery charging operations (start

and stop the charge, enable or disable unsolicited +WBCI battery charge Indications) and to set the

battery charge parameters.

Note: Unsolicited responses for battery charge are only returned through one port (except +WBCI: 0 and

+WBCI: 1). If these responses are already activated on a port and if the activation/deactivation is

made on another port, the command will return "+CME ERROR: 552" specific error.

23.2.2. Syntax

• For <Mode>=0 or 1:

Action command

AT+WBCM=<Mode>[,<ChargeInd>]

OK

• For <Mode>=2:

Action command

AT+WBCM=<Mode>

+WBCI: <Status1>,<BattLevel>

OK

• For <Mode>=3

Action command

AT+WBCM=<Mode>,[<ChargeInd>],[<ChargingVoltage>],

[<DischargeCutOffVoltage>],[<OverChargeVoltage>],

[<BatteryTempMaxVolt>],[<BatteryTempMinVolt>],

[<AutomaticChargeResume>,[<WBCITimer>],

[<BattLevelFilter>]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 122

• For <Mode>=4:

Action command

AT+WBCM=<Mode>[,<ChargeMode>]

[+WBCM: <Mode>,<ChargeMode>]

OK

• For <Mode>=5:

Action command

AT+WBCM=5

+WBCM: <Mode>,<ChargerState>

OK

• For <Mode>=6:

Action command

AT+WBCM=<Mode>[,<BatteryChargeManagementEnable>]

[+WBCM: <Mode>,<BatteryChargeManagementEnable>]

OK

Read command

AT+WBCM?

+WBCM: <Mode>,<ChargeInd>,<ChargingVoltage>,

<DischargeCutOffVoltage>,<OverChargeVoltage>,

<BatteryTempMaxVolt>,<BatteryTempMinVolt>,

<AutomaticChargeResume>,<WBCITimer>,<BattLevelFilter>

OK

Test command

None

Unsolicited response

+WBCI: <Status2>[,<BattLevel>]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 123

23.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<mode>:

0 stop the battery charging (default).

1 start the battery charging

2 get the current battery voltage

3 set the battery charge parameters

4 choose the type of charging

5 get the charger state

6 enable the battery charge management

<ChargeInd>: battery charge unsolicited indication mode

0 disable the battery charge unsolicited indications

(default value)

1 enable the battery charge unsolicited indications.

<ChargeMode>: charging algorithm

0 NI-CD, NI-MH

1 Li-ion

<Charging Voltage>: maximum level for the battery voltage in mV

When reached, the battery is considered as charged

range: 3800-4300 (default value: 4200)

<DischargeCutOffVoltage>: minimum level for the battery voltage in mV

When reached, the battery is considered as discharged:

- If a charger is plugged, the charge is

automatically launched

- else the GSM software stack is stopped (with

the +CPOF command behavior)

range: 3200-3800 (default value: 3200)

<OverChargeVoltage>: value of the over voltage protection

range: 4200-5000 (default value: 4700)

Unused if a PMU manages the battery charge on the

embedded module.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 124

<AutomaticChargeResume>: The charge is automatically resumed to keep the

maximum level for the battery voltage.

0 The automatic charge is not resumed.

1 The automatic charge resume is performed, the

maximum voltage for the battery is kept.

< WBCITimer >: time in ms between +WBCI unsolicited responses in or

out of charge (for <ChargeInd>=1)

range: 1000-10000 (default value: 2000)

<BattLevelFilter>: battery changed level in mV

The +WBCI: 2 or +WBCI: 3 indications only occur when

the delta between two battery voltage measurements

has reached this value.

range: 100-500 (default value: 0)

For value 0, +WBCI indications are not filtered with

<BattLevelFilter>.

<BatteryTempMaxVolt>: highest value for battery temperature sensor voltage in

mV (lowest temperature with a NTC) with an accuracy

of +/-20mv, depending on the ADC tolerance

default value: 1438 (3ฐC)

unused if <ChargeMode>=0

<BatteryTempMinVolt>: lowest value for battery temperature sensor voltage in

mV (highest temperature with a NTC) with an accuracy

of +/-20mv, depending on the ADC tolerance

default value: 601 (42ฐC)

unused if <ChargeMode>=0

<Status1>:

2 battery currently in charge, the <BattLevel>

parameter is also present

3 battery currently out of charge, the <BattLevel>

parameter is also present

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 125

<Status2>:

0 minimum battery level reached. The battery is

considered as discharged

The product is turned off (as with the +CPOF

command) if a charger is not plugged. Else the

charge automatically begins.

not dependent on the <ChargeInd> parameter

1 maximum battery level reached (the battery is

considered as charged) or charging discontinuation

The battery charging is stopped.

not dependent on the parameter <ChargeInd>

2 battery currently in charge, the <BattLevel>

parameter is also present

3 battery currently out of charge, the <BattLevel>

parameter is also present

4 charger plugged,

5 charger unplugged,

6 unusual voltage or temperature

7 start of the automatic charge resume

<BattLevel>: current battery voltage in mV during or out of charging

range: 2800-4300

<ChargerState>: current charger state

0 unplugged

1 plugged

<BatteryChargeManagementEnable>: state of the battery charge management

If disabled, <mode>=1 to 5 are not allowed. The

temperature ADC can be used for another usage.

0 disabled

1 enabled

23.2.4. Parameter Storage

All parameters except <Status1>, <Status2> and <BattLevel> are stored in EEPROM without using

the AT&W.command. The default value can be restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 126

23.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WBCM? +WBCM:

0,0,4200,3200,4700,1438,601,1,2000,0

OK

Note: Current values

AT+WBCM=0

Note: Stop the battery charging

OK

AT+WBCM=4,0

Note: Configure the battery charging in Ni-Cd/Ni-MH mode

OK

AT+WBCM=4

Note: Get the charging mode

+WBCM: 4,0

OK

Note: The charging mode is Ni-Cd/Ni-MH

AT+WBCM=5 +WBCM: 5,1

OK

Note: the charger is plugged

AT+WBCM=1,1

Note: Start the battery charging with charge indications

OK

AT+WBCM=1,1

Note: Start the battery charging with charge indications

+CME ERROR : 563

Note : Charge is not started due to an error, but

unsolicited event is activated

+WBCI: 2,4060

Note: Unsolicited charge indication: the current battery

voltage is 4.06 V.

AT+WBCM=1,0

Note: Start the battery charging without charge indications

OK

AT+WBCM=2

Note: Get the battery voltage during the charging

+WBCI: 2,4110

OK

Note: The current battery voltage is 4.11 V

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 127

Command Responses

+WBCI: 1

Note: The battery voltage has reached the max level.

The battery is considered as charged and the charging

is stopped.

AT+WBCM=0,1

Note: Enable the battery charge unsolicited indications out of charge

OK

+WBCI: 3,4195

Note: The current battery voltage is 4.195 V.

AT+WBCM=3,0,4200,3500,4650…1,5000,200

Note: Configure the battery charging parameters (depends on battery

specification); in this case the charging mode is Ni-Cd/Ni-MH

OK

+WBCI: 0

Note: The battery voltage has reached the minimum

level. The battery is considered as discharged. If a

charger is not plugged, the product is turned off, with

the +CPOF command behaviour. Else the charge

automatically begins.

AT+WBCM=4,1

Note: Configure the battery charging in Li-Ion mode

OK

AT+WBCM=3,0,4200,3300,4600,1440,600,1,10000,100

Note: Configure the battery charging parameters in Li-Ion

OK

+WBCI: 7

Note: The battery voltage has reached the maintain

level. If a charger is not plugged, the embedded

module continues with a normal behaviour. Else the

charge automatically begins.

AT+WBCM=6,0 OK

Note: Disabled the battery charge management

AT+WBCM=1 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: Battery charge management is disabled

AT+WBCM=6 +WBCM: 6,0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Battery Charge Management +WBCM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 128

23.2.6. Notes

Please check charger and battery recommendations.

If the battery charging is started without charger plugged or with an abnormal temperature or voltage,

the charging does not start. +WBCI: 3 unsolicited indications are sent. After solving the anomaly, it is

necessary to start again the battery charging.

<BatteryTempMaxVolt> indicative temperature values:

ฐC mV ฐC mV ฐC mV

0 1495 5 1399 10 1293

1 1477 6 1378 11 1271

2 1458 7 1357 12 1249

3 1438 8 1336 13 1226

4 1419 9 1315 14 1203

These values are obtained with the NTC equal to the Pull-up (Sierra Wireless recommends 100K) and

the NTC is polarized with the VCC_1V8 signal. Please refer to the battery application note and the

Customer Design Guidelines for more information

<BatteryTempMinVolt> indicative temperature values:

ฐC mV ฐC mV ฐC mV

31 817 36 714 41 619

32 796 37 694 42 601

33 775 38 675 43 584

34 754 39 656 44 567

35 734 40 637 45 550

These values are obtained with the NTC equal to the Pull-up (Sierra Wireless recommends 100K) and

the NTC is polarized with the VCC_1V8 signal. Please refer to the battery application note and the

Customer Design Guidelines for more information.

For <mode>=4 (type of charging), if the <ChargeMode> parameter is omitted, the command will get

the charging mode (please refer to section Example).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 129

23.3. Sierra Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG

23.3.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command enables to control the embedded module self diagnostic.

23.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDIAG=<type>,<mode>[,<period>,<trig1>,<trig2>,<trig3>,<trig3_freq>]

OK

Read command

AT+WDIAG?

+WDIAG: <type>,<mode>,<period>,<trig1>,<trig2>,<trig3>,<trig3_freq>

OK

Test command

AT+WDIAG=?

OK

Unsolicited response

+WDIAGI: <type>,<indication>[,<value>]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 130

23.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<type >: ADC type

0 The first index is reserved to measure the battery voltage.

Other index can be available. Please refer to Product Technical

Specification for more information on available ADCs on the embedded

module.

1 ADC auxiliary autodiag (AUX-ADC0)

2 ADC auxiliary autodiag (AUX-ADC1)

<mode>: selfdiagnostic activation mode

0 stop (default value)

1 start

<period>: period of ADC reading in seconds

0 best effort, approximately 50 readings per second (default value)

1 - 3600 fixed period in seconds

<trig1>: minimum threshold

When this threshold is reached, unsolicited response +WDIAGI is sent to

the user application.

0 trigger deactivated (default value)

(ADCminV+100) -

(ADCmaxV-1)

threshold in mV

Please refer to the Product Technical Specification to determine the

corresponding ADCminV and ADCmaxV for the chosen ADC.

<trig2>: maximum threshold

When this threshold is reached, unsolicited response +WDIAGI is sent to

the user application.

0 trigger deactivated (default value)

(ADCminV+100) -

(ADCmaxV-1)

threshold in mV

Please refer to the Product Technical Specification to determine the

corresponding ADCminV and ADCmaxV for the chosen ADC.

<trig3>: delta threshold

When the delta of the last <trig3freq> ADC readings exceeds the

threshold, unsolicited response +WDIAGI is sent to the user application.

0 trigger deactivated (default value)

10 - 3000 threshold in mV

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 131

<trig3_freq>: number of last values used for the delta calculation

0 5 (default value)

1 10

2 20

<indication>: type of event

0 current value (not available in best effort mode)

1 ADC value is under the minimum threshold value (<trig1>)

2 ADC value is above the minimum threshold value (<trig1>) (only after an

unsolicited response with <indication>=1)

3 ADC value is under the maximum threshold value (<trig2>)

4 ADC value is under the maximum threshold value (<trig2>) (only after an

unsolicited response with <indication>=3)

5 The delta between two values among the <trig3freq> last values is more

important than the delta threshold value (<trig3>)

<value>: ADC value in mV

range: 1-8000

for <indication> = 0: the current ADC value

for <indication> = 2: the minimum ADC value read while the minimum

threshold has been exceeded.

for <indication> = 4: the maximum ADC value read while the maximum

threshold has been exceeded.

for <indication> = 5: the delta ADC value read

23.3.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM using the AT&W.command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 132

23.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDIAG=0,1,0,3000,4000,0

Note: ADC selfdiagnostic start in “best effort” for a min

and a max trig

OK

Note: Done

AT+WDIAG?

Note: Current value

+WDIAG: 0,1,0,3000,4000,0,0

OK

Note: Done

AT+WDIAG=0,1,60,0,0,50,0

Note: ADC selfdiagnostic start with a 60s frequency

for a delta trig

OK

Note: Done

AT+WDIAG?

Note: Current value

+WDIAG: 0,1,60,0,0,50,0

OK

Note: Done

AT+WDIAG=0,0

Note: ADC selfdiagnostic stop

OK

Note: Done

23.3.6. Notes

Unsolicited responses for self diagnostic are only returned through one port. If these responses are

already activated on a port and if the activation is made on another port, the command will return

"+CME ERROR: 552" specific error.

Values over 4650 mV are not used

After a +WBCI=0 indication (minimum battery level reached), the selfdiagnostic is stopped.

Only one <type> can be activated at the same time.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 133

Examples of selfdiagnostic feature behaviour

• Example 1

AT+WDIAG=0,1,5,0,0,0,0

Note: ADC selfdiagnostic started with a 5s period.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 134

• Example 2

AT+WDIAG=0,1,0,3000,0,0,0

Note: ADC selfdiagnostic started in "best effort" with a 3000 mV minimum threshold.

• Example 3

AT+WDIAG=0,1,0,0,4000,0,0

Note: ADC selfdiagnostic started in "best effort" with a 4000 mV maximum threshold

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Battery Commands

Sierra Wireless Autodiag +WDIAG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 135

• Example 4

AT+WDIAG=0,1,10,0,4000,0,0

Note: ADC selfdiagnostic started with a 10s period for a 4000 mV maximum threshold.

+WDIAGI: 3

+WDIAGI: 4,4300

4300

• Example 5

AT+WDIAG=0,1,0,0,0,100,1

Note: ADC selfdiagnostic started in "best effort" with a 100 mV delta threshold.

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 136

24. CPHS Commands

24.1. CPHS Command: +CPHS

24.1.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command is used to activate, deactivate or interrogate a CPHS

feature (e.g. voice mail indicator, mail box number…)

It also activates the following unsolicited responses:

• +WMVI which indicates the status of the LINE 1, LINE 2, DATA or FAX mailboxes.

• +WDCI which provides the call forwarding flags.

Note: This command is used to specifically manage the SIM stored Voicemail Numbers. Any actions related

to the ME Memory stored Voicemail Numbers MUST be managed through the +CSVM Command.

24.1.2. Syntax

• For <Mode>=0 or 1:

Action command

AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>

OK

• For <Mode>=2 and <FctId>=1:

Action command

AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>

+WVMI: <LineId>,<VoiceMailStatus>

[+WVMI: <LineId>,<VoiceMailStatus>[…]]

OK

• For <Mode>=2 and <FctId>=2:

Action command

AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>

+WMBN: <Lineld>,[<number>],[<type>],[<name>],<NumberStatus>

[+WMBN: <Lineld>,[<number>],[<type>],[<name>],<NumberStatus>[…]]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

CPHS Commands

CPHS Command: +CPHS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 137

• For <Mode>=2 and <FctId>=3:

Action command

AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>

+WALS: <Lineld>

OK

• For <Mode>=2 and <FctId>=4:

Action command

AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>

+WDCI: <LineId>,<DivertedStatus>

[+WDCI: <LineId>,<DivertedStatus>[…]]

OK

• For <Mode>=2 and <FctId>=5:

Action command

AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>[,<type format>]

+WNON: <type format>,<operator name>

OK

• For <Mode>=2 and <FctId>=6:

Action command

AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>[,<data field>]

+WCPI: <data field>,<InfoStatus>

OK

• For <Mode>=2 and <FctId>=7:

Action command

AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>,<Service>

+WCSP: <Service>,<ServiceStatus>

OK

Read command

AT+CPHS?

+CPHS: <FctId>[,<Status>]

[+CPHS: <FctId>[,<Status>][…]]

OK

Test command

AT+CPHS=?

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

CPHS Commands

CPHS Command: +CPHS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 138

Unsolicited response

+WVMI: <LineId>,<VoiceMailStatus>

Unsolicited response

+WDCI: <LineId>,<DivertedStatus>

24.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Mode>: requested operation

this parameter has not effect for alternate line service, Network Operator Name,

CPHS information and Customer Profile Service features (<FctId>=3,5,6,7).

default value: 0 for <FctId>=1,2,4

0 deactivate a CPHS feature

1 activate a CPHS feature

2 interrogate a CPHS status

< FctId>: CPHS feature CPHS feature

the Customer Service Profile and Alternate Line Service features are activated if

the field is set in CPHS information and CSP files. The Network Operator Name

is activated if at least one of the two format names exist (long or short

format).This is done at initialization.

1 voice mail indicator

2 mail box number

3 alternate line service

4 diverted call indicator

5 network operator name

6 CPHS Information

7 Customer Service Profile

<Status>: CPHS feature state

0 disabled

1 enabled

<Lineld>: line identity

1 line 1

2 line 2

3 data

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

CPHS Commands

CPHS Command: +CPHS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 139

4 fax

<VoiceMailStatus>: voice mail status

0 no message waiting

1 at least one message is waiting

<number>: phone number in ASCII format

string type

<type>: TON/NPI Type of address octet (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7 [6])

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<name>: name of mailbox

string type

the +WPCS command affects the format of the mailbox <name> entry

the maximum length is SIM dependent

<NumberStatus>: Indicates if <number> can be updated or not

0 update is not possible

1 update is possible

<DivertedStatus>: divert Call Status

0 disabled

1 enabled

<type format>: <operator name> format

0 long format (default value)

1 short format

<operator name>: operator name

string type

<data field>: CPHS information field bit number

range: 0-25 (default value if omitted: 0)

If <data field> field is equal to 0, the whole CPHS information field will be displayed

in <InfoStatus> parameter

Please refer to section “CPHS information field” in the appendices

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

CPHS Commands

CPHS Command: +CPHS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 140

<InfoStatus>: CPHS information field status

0 service is not customer-accessible

1 service is customer-accessible

"xxxxxxxx" whole CPHS information bit field

hexadecimal string (8 digits)

<Service>: CSP field bit number

range: 1-81

Please refer to section “CSP constants” in the appendices.

<ServiceStatus>: CSP bit status

0 service is not customer-accessible

1 service is customer-accessible

24.1.4. Parameter Storage

The <Mode> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W.command. The default value

can be restored using AT&F.

24.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPHS?

Note: Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality

+CPHS: 1,0

Note: The voice mail indicator functionality is deactivated

+CPHS: 2,0

Note: The mail box number functionality is deactivated

+CPHS: 3,1

Note: The alternate line service functionality is activated

+CPHS: 4,0

Note: The divert call indicator functionality is deactivated

+CPHS: 5,1

Note: The network operator name functionality is activated

+CPHS: 6,1

Note: The CPHS information functionality is activated

+CPHS: 7,1

Note: The customer service profile functionality is activated

OK

AT+CPHS=1,1

Note: Activate the voice mail indicator functionality

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

CPHS Commands

CPHS Command: +CPHS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 141

Command Responses

AT+CPHS?

Note: Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality

+CPHS: 1,1

Note: The voice mail indicator functionality is activated

+CPHS: 2,0

Note: The mail box number functionality is deactivated

+CPHS: 3,1

Note: The alternate line service functionality is activated

+CPHS: 4,0

Note: The divert call indicator functionality is deactivated

+CPHS: 5,1

Note: The network operator name functionality is activated

+CPHS: 6,1

Note: The CPHS information functionality is activated

+CPHS: 7,1

Note: The customer service profile functionality is activated

OK

+WVMI: 1,1

Note: A message is waiting on line 1

+WVMI: 2,1

Note: A message is waiting on line 2

AT+CPHS=1,4

Note: Activate the divert call indicator functionality

OK

**** The call forwarding is active on line 1 ***** +WDCI: 1,1

Note: Call forwarding is activated on line 1

AT+CPHS=2,1

Note: Interrogate the status of voice mail indicator

functionality

+WVMI: 1,1

Note: A message is waiting on line 1

+WVMI: 2,1

Note: A message is waiting on line 2

+WVMI: 3,0

Note: No data waiting

+WVMI: 4,0

Note: No fax waiting

OK

AT+CPHS=1,2

Note: Activate the mail box number functionality

OK

AT+WALS=1 +WALS: 2

OK

Note: Interrogate the status of activated line Note: The current line is number 2

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

CPHS Commands

CPHS Command: +CPHS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 142

Command Responses

AT+CPHS=0,4

Note: Deactivate the divert call indicator functionality

OK

AT+CPHS?

Note: Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality

+CPHS: 1,1

Note: The voice mail indicator functionality is activated

+CPHS: 2,1

Note: The mail box number functionality is activated

+CPHS: 3,1

Note: The alternate line service functionality is activated

+CPHS: 4,0

Note: The divert call indicator functionality is deactivated

+CPHS: 5,1

Note: The network operator name functionality is activated

+CPHS: 6,1

Note: The CPHS Information functionality is activated

+CPHS: 7,1

Note: The Customer Service Profile functionality is activated

OK

AT+CPHS=2,2

Note: Get current values

+WMBN: 1,"19254871234",129,,1

Note: Mail box number for line 1

+WMBN: 2,,,1

Note: Mail box number for line 2

+WMBN: 3,,,1

Note: Mail box number for data line

+WMBN: 4,,,1

Note: Mail box number for fax line

OK

Note: Only line1 can be updated

AT+CPHS=2,5

Note: Get the operator name

+WNON: 0,"Orange F"

OK

AT+CPHS=2,7,9

Note: Get the current status for barring of all

outgoing calls

+WCSP: 9,1

OK

Note: Barring of all outgoing calls is customer accessible.

AT+CPHS=2,6

Note: Get the current status for all CPHS info field

+WCPI: 0,"0033000F"

OK

AT+CPHS=2,6,13

Note: Get the current status for call forward activated

indicator for line 1

+WCPI: 13,1

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

CPHS Commands

CPHS Command: +CPHS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 143

24.1.6. Notes

This command may answer "+CME ERROR: 3" if the CPHS feature is disabled or if the SIM card

does not support this CPHS feature.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

CPHS Commands

Sierra Wireless CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 144

24.2. Sierra Wireless CPHS Mail Box Number

+WMBN

24.2.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command sets the different mailbox numbers in SIM. The +CPHS

command can be used to know which mailbox numbers can be updated.

24.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WMBN=<Lineld>[,<number>,[<type>],[<name>]]

OK

Read command

AT+WMBN?

OK

Test command

AT+WMBN=?

OK

24.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Lineld>: line associated to the mailbox

1 line 1

2 line 2

3 data

4 fax

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

CPHS Commands

Sierra Wireless CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 145

<number>: phone number

ASCII format

up to 20 digits

<type>: TON/NPI Type of address octet for <number> (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7

[6]); default 145 when dialing string inclues international access code character “+”,

otherwise 129

integer type

129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown

145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number

161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number

128-255 other values (refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 [6])

<name>: name of mailbox

string type

the +WPCS command affects the format of the mailbox <name> entry.

the maximum length is SIM dependent.

24.2.4. Parameter Storage

None.

24.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+CPHS=2,2

Note: Gets the current mail box numbers in SIM

+WMBN:1,"0123456789",129,"Home",1

+WMBN:2,"9876543210",129,"Work",1

+WMBN:3,,,,1

+WMBN:4,,,,1

OK

AT+WMBN=1,"+0033122334455",145 OK

Note: Sets mailbox number for line 1 Note: Mailbox number for line 1 is set

AT+WMBN=2 OK

Note: Erases mailbox number & name for line 2

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

CPHS Commands

Sierra Wireless CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 146

Command Responses

AT+CPHS=2,2 +WMBN: 1,"+33122334455",145,,1

+WMBN: 2,,,,,1

+WMBN: 3,,,,,1

+WMBN: 4,,,,,1

OK

Note: Gets the current mail box numbers again

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

CPHS Commands

Sierra Wireless Alternate Line Service +WALS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 147

24.3. Sierra Wireless Alternate Line Service +WALS

24.3.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows to set and to get an active line. The +CPHS

command can be used to know which line is activated.

24.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WALS=<CmdType>[,<Lineld>]

[+WALS: <Lineld>]

OK

Read command

AT+WALS?

+WALS: <Lineld>

OK

Test command

AT+WALS=?

+WALS: (list of supported <CmdType>s),(list of supported <Lineld>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

CPHS Commands

Sierra Wireless Alternate Line Service +WALS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 148

24.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<CmdType>: requested operation

0 sets active line

1 gets active line

<Lineld>: line number

used only with <CmdType>=0

1 line 1

2 line 2

24.3.4. Parameter Storage

The <LineId> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using the AT&W.command.

24.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WALS=? +WALS: (0-1),(1-2)

OK

AT+WALS=0,1

Note: Activate line 1

+WALS:1

OK

AT+WALS=1

Note: Get the current activated line

+WALS:1

OK

AT+CPHS?

Note: Get the current activated line

+WALS:1

OK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 149

25. Fax Commands

25.1. Introduction

The fax service provided by the product is class 1 compliant. However, only the core commands

defined by ITU T.31 are supported. This means that commands such as AT+FAR, +FCC, etc. are not

supported.

Autobauding must be enabled to set up the product for fax.

All the following commands return an ERROR response code if they are not issued during

communication.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax Commands

Transmit Speed +FTM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 150

25.2. Transmit Speed +FTM

25.2.1. Description

This command sets the fax transmit speed.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

25.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FTM=<speed>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+FTM=?

(list of supported <speed>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax Commands

Transmit Speed +FTM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 151

25.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<speed>: fax transmit speed

24 2400 bps (modem type V.27ter)

48 4800 bps (modem type V.27ter)

72 7200 bps (modem type V.29)

73 7200 bps (long) (modem type V.17)

74 7200 bps (short) (modem type V.17)

96 9600 bps (modem type V.29)

97 9600 bps (long) (modem type V.17)

98 9600 bps (short) (modem type V.17)

121 12000 bps (long) (modem type V.17)

122 12000 bps (short) (modem type V.17)

145 14400 bps (long) (modem type V.17)

146 14400 bps (short) (modem type V.17)

25.2.4. Parameter Storage

None.

25.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FTM=145

Note: Set fax speed at 14400 bps for a V.17

type modem

OK

AT+FTM=?

Note: Get possible values

(24,48,72,73,74,96,97,98,121,122,145,146)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax Commands

Receive Speed +FRM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 152

25.3. Receive Speed +FRM

25.3.1. Description

This command sets the fax receive speed.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

25.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FRM=<speed>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+FRM=?

(list of supported <speed>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax Commands

Receive Speed +FRM

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 153

25.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<speed>: fax receive speed

24 2400 bps (modem type V.27ter)

48 4800 bps (modem type V.27ter)

72 7200 bps (modem type V.29)

73 7200 bps (long) (modem type V.17)

74 7200 bps (short) (modem type V.17)

96 9600 bps (modem type V.29)

97 9600 bps (long) (modem type V.17)

98 9600 bps (short) (modem type V.17)

121 12000 bps (long) (modem type V.17)

122 12000 bps (short) (modem type V.17)

145 14400 bps (long) (modem type V.17)

146 14400 bps (short) (modem type V.17)

25.3.4. Parameter Storage

None.

25.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FRM=?

Note: Get possible values

(24,48,72,73,74,96,97,98,121,122,145,146)

OK

AT+FRM=145

Note: Set fax speed at 14400 bps for a V.17

type modem

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax Commands

HDLC Transmit Speed +FTH

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 154

25.4. HDLC Transmit Speed +FTH

25.4.1. Description

This command sets the fax transmit speed using the HDLC protocol.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

25.4.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FTH=<speed>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+FTH=?

(list of supported <speed>s)

OK

25.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<speed>: HDLC fax transmit speed

3 V.21 channels 300 bps

25.4.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax Commands

HDLC Transmit Speed +FTH

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 155

25.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FTH=3

Note: Set fax speed at 300 bps

OK

AT+FTH=?

Note: Get possible values

(3)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax Commands

HDLC Receive Speed +FRH

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 156

25.5. HDLC Receive Speed +FRH

25.5.1. Description

This command sets the fax receive speed using the HDLC protocol.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

25.5.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FRH=<speed>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+FRH=?

(list of supported <speed>s)

OK

25.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<speed>: HDLC fax receive speed

3 V.21 channels 300 bps

25.5.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax Commands

HDLC Receive Speed +FRH

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 157

25.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FRH=3

Note: Set fax speed at 300 bps

OK

AT+FRH=?

Note: Get possible values

(3)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax Commands

Stop Transmission and Wait +FTS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 158

25.6. Stop Transmission and Wait +FTS

25.6.1. Description

This command stops the transmission for a specified period.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

25.6.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FTS=<n>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+FTS=?

(list of supported <n>s)

OK

25.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: fax transmit silence period

0-255 silence period (unit is 10 ms)

25.6.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax Commands

Stop Transmission and Wait +FTS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 159

25.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FTS=?

Note: Test command

(0-255)

OK

AT+FTS=50 OK

Note: Stops transmission and waits for 0.5s

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax Commands

Receive Silence +FRS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 160

25.7. Receive Silence +FRS

25.7.1. Description

This command causes the embedded module to stop listening to the network and report back to the

DTE after the specified period.

It is aborted if any character is received from the application.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

25.7.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FRS=<n>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+FRS=?

(list of supported <n>s)

OK

25.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: fax receive non listening period

0-255 non listening period (unit is 10ms)

25.7.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax Commands

Receive Silence +FRS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 161

25.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FRS=?

Note: Get possible values

(0-255)

OK

AT+FRS=50 OK

Note: Stops listening and waits for 0.5s

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 162

26. Fax class 2 Commands

26.1. Transmit Data +FDT

26.1.1. Description

This command prefixes data transmission.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

26.1.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FDT

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

26.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None.

26.1.4. Parameter Storage

None.

26.1.5. Examples

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Receive Data +FDR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 163

26.2. Receive Data +FDR

26.2.1. Description

This command initiates data reception.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

26.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FDR

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

26.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None.

26.2.4. Parameter Storage

None.

26.2.5. Examples

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Transmit Page Punctuation +FET

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 164

26.3. Transmit Page Punctuation +FET

26.3.1. Description

This command punctuates page and document transmission after the +FDT command. It indicates

that the current page is complete, and if there are additional pages to send.

The +FET unsolicited response reports post page message response.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

26.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FET=<ppm>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

Unsolicited response

+FET: <ppm>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Transmit Page Punctuation +FET

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 165

26.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<ppm>: post page message

0 another page next, same document

1 another document next

2 no more pages or documents

3 another partial page next

4 another page, procedure interrupt

5 another document, procedure interrupt

6 all done, procedure interrupt

26.3.4. Parameter Storage

None.

26.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FET=0 OK

Note: Send another page of the same document

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Page Transfer Status Parameters +FPTS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 166

26.4. Page Transfer Status Parameters +FPTS

26.4.1. Description

This command sets post page transfer response.

The +FPTS unsolicited response reports received page transfer status.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

26.4.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FPTS=<ppr>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

Unsolicited response

+FPTS: <ppr>

26.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<ppr>: post page transfer response

1 page good

2 page bad; retry requested

3 page good; retrain requested

4 page bad; interrupt requested

5 page good; interrupt requested

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Page Transfer Status Parameters +FPTS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 167

26.4.4. Parameter Storage

None.

26.4.5. Examples

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Terminate Session +FK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 168

26.5. Terminate Session +FK

26.5.1. Description

This command causes the product to terminate the session.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

26.5.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FK

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

26.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

None.

26.5.4. Parameter Storage

None.

26.5.5. Examples

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Page Transfer Bit Order +FBOR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 169

26.6. Page Transfer Bit Order +FBOR

26.6.1. Description

This command sets the bit order for negotiation and fax page transfer. The order is related to the bit

order on radio link.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

26.6.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FBOR=<n>

OK

Read command

AT+FBOR?

<n>

OK

Test command

AT+FBOR=?

(list of supported <n>s)

OK

26.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>:

Bit order for negotiation Bit order for page transfer

0 same (default) same (default)

1 same reverse

2 reverse same

3 reverse reverse

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Page Transfer Bit Order +FBOR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 170

26.6.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

26.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FBOR=? (0-3)

OK

AT+FBOR=0 OK

Note: Set bit order to 0 Note: Bit order set at default settings

AT+FBOR? 0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Buffer Size Report +FBUF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 171

26.7. Buffer Size Report +FBUF

26.7.1. Description

This command requests the size of the exchange buffer between the embedded module and the fax

application.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

26.7.2. Syntax

Action command

None

Read command

AT+FBUF?

<buffer size>

OK

Test command

None

26.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<buffer size>: size of the exchange buffer in bytes

integer type

26.7.4. Parameter Storage

None.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Buffer Size Report +FBUF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 172

26.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FBUF? 1024

OK

Note: Get current buffer size Note: Current buffer size is 1024 bytes

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Copy Quality Checking +FCQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 173

26.8. Copy Quality Checking +FCQ

26.8.1. Description

This command controls copy quality checking for receiving faxes.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

26.8.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FCQ=<n>

OK

Read command

AT+FCQ?

<n>

OK

Test command

AT+FCQ=?

(list of supported <n>s)

OK

26.8.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: copy quality mode

0 copy quality checking (default value)

26.8.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Copy Quality Checking +FCQ

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 174

26.8.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FCQ=? (0)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Capability to Receive +FCR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 175

26.9. Capability to Receive +FCR

26.9.1. Description

This command controls the capability of the embedded module to accept incoming faxes.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

26.9.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FCR=<n>

OK

Read command

AT+FCR?

<n>

OK

Test command

AT+FCR=?

(list of supported <n>s)

OK

26.9.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<n>: capability to receive mode

0 The embedded module will not accept incoming faxes.

1 The embedded module will accept incoming faxes (default value)

26.9.4. Parameter Storage

The <n> parameter is stored in EEPROM using AT&W command. The default value can be restored

using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Capability to Receive +FCR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 176

26.9.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FCR=? (0,1)

OK

AT+FCR=1 OK

AT+FCR? 1

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Current Session Parameters +FDIS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 177

26.10. Current Session Parameters +FDIS

26.10.1. Description

This command allows the DTE to configure the capabilities used for the current session.

The +FDIS unsolicited response reports remote capabilities.

The +FDCS unsolicited response reports current session capabilities.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

26.10.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FDIS=[<vr>][,[<br>][,[<wd>][,[<ln>][,[<df>][,[<ec>][,[<bf>][,[<st>]]]]]]]]

OK

Read command

AT+FDIS?

<vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>

OK

Test command

AT+FDIS=?

(list of supported <vr>s),(list of supported <br>s),(list of supported <wd>s),(list

of supported <ln>s),(list of supported <df>s),(list of supported <ec>s),(list of

supported <bf>s),(list of supported <st>s)

OK

Unsolicited response

+FDCS: <remote_vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>

+FDIS: <remote_vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Current Session Parameters +FDIS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 178

26.10.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<vr>: vertical resolution

0 normal: 98 LPI (default value)

1 fine: 196 LPI

<remote_vr>: remote vertical resolution (bitfield)

0x01 R8 ด 7.7 l/mm, Fine (196 LPI)

0x02 R8 ด 15.4 l/mm

0x04 R16 ด 15.4 l/mm

0x08 200 dpi ด 100 l/25.4 mm

0x10 200 dpi ด 200 l/25.4 mm

0x20 200 dpi ด 400 l/25.4 mm

0x40 300 dpi ด 300 l/25.4 mm

<br>: bit rate

0 2400 bps (modem type V.27 ter)

1 4800 bps (modem type V.27 ter)

2 7200 bps (modem type V.29)

3 9600 bps (modem type V.29, V.17). (default value if "DATA144" feature

IS NOT supported)

4 12000 bps (modem type V.33, V.17)

only when product supports "DATA144" feature

5 14400 bps (modem type V.33, V.17). (default value if "DATA144" feature

IS supported)

only when product supports "DATA144" feature

<wd>: page width

0 1728 pixels in 215 mm (default value)

1 2048 pixels in 255 mm

2 2432 pixels in 303 mm

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Current Session Parameters +FDIS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 179

<ln>: page length

0 A4, 297 mm

1 B4, 364 mm

2 unlimited (default value)

<df>: data compression format

0 1-D modified Huffman (default value)

1 2-D modified read

2 2-D uncompressed mode

3 2-D modified modified read

<ec>: error correction

0 disable Fax ECM

<bf>: binary file transfer

0 disable

<st>: scan time per line

if <vr>=0 if <vr>=1

0 0 ms (default) 0 ms (default)

1 5 ms 5 ms

2 10 ms 5 ms

3 10 ms 10 ms

4 20 ms 10 ms

5 20 ms 20 ms

6 40 ms 20 ms

7 40 ms 40 ms

26.10.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Current Session Parameters +FDIS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 180

26.10.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FDIS=? (0,1),(0-5),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),

(0),(0),(0-7)

OK

AT+FDIS=,4

Note: Change bit rate

OK

AT+FDIS? 0,4,0,2,0,0,0,0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

DCE Capabilities Parameters +FDCC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 181

26.11. DCE Capabilities Parameters +FDCC

26.11.1. Description

This command allows the DTE to configure the capabilities used for the any session.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

26.11.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FDCC=[<vr>][,[<br>][,[<wd>][,[<ln>][,[<df>][,[<ec>][,[<bf>][,[<st>]]]]]]]]

OK

Read command

AT+FDCC?

<vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>

OK

Test command

AT+FDCC=?

(list of supported <vr>s),(list of supported <br>s),(list of supported <wd>s),(list

of supported <ln>s),(list of supported <df>s),(list of supported <ec>s),(list of

supported <bf>s),(list of supported <st>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

DCE Capabilities Parameters +FDCC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 182

26.11.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<vr>: vertical resolution

0 normal: 98 LPI (default value)

1 fine: 196 LPI

<br>: bit rate

0 2400 bps (modem type V.27 ter)

1 4800 bps (modem type V.27 ter)

2 7200 bps (modem type V.29)

3 9600 bps (modem type V.29, V.17). (default value if "DATA144" feature

IS NOT supported)

4 12000 bps (modem type V.33, V.17)

only when product supports "DATA144" feature

5 14400 bps (modem type V.33, V.17). (default value if "DATA144" feature

IS supported)

only when product supports "DATA144" feature

<wd>: page width

0 1728 pixels in 215 mm (default value)

1 2048 pixels in 255 mm

2 2432 pixels in 303 mm

<ln>: page length

0 A4, 297 mm

1 B4, 364 mm

2 unlimited (default value)

<df>: data compression format

0 1-D modified Huffman (default value)

1 2-D modified read

2 2-D uncompressed mode

3 2-D modified modified read

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

DCE Capabilities Parameters +FDCC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 183

<ec>: error correction

0 disable Fax ECM

<bf>: binary file transfer

0 disable

<st>: scan time per line

if <vr>=0 if <vr>=1

0 0 ms (default) 0 ms (default)

1 5 ms 5 ms

2 10 ms 5 ms

3 10 ms 10 ms

4 20 ms 10 ms

5 20 ms 20 ms

6 40 ms 20 ms

7 40 ms 40 ms

26.11.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

26.11.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FDCC=? (0,1),(0-5),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),

(0),(0),(0-7)

OK

AT+FDCC=,4 OK

Note: Change bit rate

AT+FDCC? 0,4,0,2,0,0,0,0

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Local ID String +FLID

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 184

26.12. Local ID String +FLID

26.12.1. Description

This command defines or queries the local ID string.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

26.12.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FLID=<string>

OK

Read command

AT+FLID?

<string>

OK

Test command

AT+FLID=?

(<nb_characters>),(list of supported <ascii_code>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Local ID String +FLID

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 185

26.12.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<string>: local ID string

string type

default value: empty string

<nb_characters>: maximum number of characters

integer type

default value: 20

<ascii_code>: allowed ASCII code

range: 32-127

26.12.4. Parameter Storage

The <string> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can be

restored using AT&F.

26.12.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FLID=? (20),(32-127)

OK

AT+FLID="local ID string" OK

AT+FLID? local ID string

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Page Transfer Timeout Parameter +FPHCTO

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 186

26.13. Page Transfer Timeout Parameter +FPHCTO

26.13.1. Description

This command sets the time interval during which the embedded module expects another page

before it assumes there are no more pages and aborts.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

26.13.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+FPHCTO=<time_out>

OK

Read command

AT+FPHCTO?

<time_out>

OK

Test command

AT+FPHCTO=?

(list of supported <time_out>s)

OK

26.13.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<time_out>: waiting period for another page in units of 100 ms.

range: 0-255 (default value: 30)

26.13.4. Parameter Storage

The <time_out> parameter is stored in EEPROM using the AT&W command. The default value can

be restored using AT&F.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Page Transfer Timeout Parameter +FPHCTO

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 187

26.13.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+FPHCTO=? (0-255)

OK

AT+FPHCTO=50 OK

AT+FPHCTO? 50

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Additional Fax Class 2 indication messages

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 188

26.14. Additional Fax Class 2 indication messages

26.14.1. Description

The following messages are used to indicate DCE Responses. They are used in communication only.

The +FCON response indicates a connection with a fax machine.

The +FCFR response indicates confirmation to receive.

The +FTSI response reports the received transmit station ID string.

The +FCSI response reports the received called station ID string.

The +FHNG response reports the hang-up cause. It indicates that the call has been terminated.

Note: This command is not yet available to the AirPrime Q26Extreme module.

26.14.2. Syntax

Unsolicited response

+FCON

Unsolicited response

+FCFR

Unsolicited response

+FTSI: "<string>"

Unsolicited response

+FCSI: "<string>"

Unsolicited response

+FHNG: <cause>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Fax class 2 Commands

Additional Fax Class 2 indication messages

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 189

26.14.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<cause>: hang-up cause

0-9 normal end of connection.

10-19 transmit phase A error

20-39 transmit phase B error

40-49 transmit phase C error

50-69 transmit phase D error

70-89 receive phase B error

90-99 receive phase C error

100-119 receive phase D error

<string>: remote ID string

string type

26.14.4. Parameter Storage

None.

26.14.5. Examples

None.

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 190

27. Remote Device Management

Services Commands

27.1. Device Services Configuration +WDSC

27.1.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows a user to configure:

• the user agreement for connection, package download and package install

• the polling mode to make a connection to the Device Services server

• the retry mode to attempt a new connection to the server when the GPRS service is

temporarily out of order or when a http error occurs

• the mode of automatic registration to the AirPrime Managment Services server

27.1.2. Syntax

• For <Mode>= 0,1,2,3

Action command

AT+WDSC=<Mode>,<State>

OK

• For <Mode>=4

Action command

AT+WDSC=<Mode>,<Timer_1>[[,<Timer_2>]...[,<Timer_n>]]

OK

• For <Mode>=5

Action command

AT+WDSC=<Mode>,<Config>[,<ValidityPeriod>]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Configuration +WDSC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 191

Read command

AT+WDSC?

+WDSC: 0,<State>

+WDSC: 1,<State>

+WDSC: 2,<State>

+WDSC: 3,<State>

+WDSC: 4,<Timer_1>[[,<Timer_2>]...[,<Timer_n>]]

+WDSC: 5,<State>,[<ValidityPeriod>]

OK

Test command

AT+WDSC=?

+WDSC: (list of supported <Mode>s),(list of supported <State>s) [,(list of

supported <Timer_n>s)]

OK

27.1.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Mode>: Mode

0 User agreement for connection

When this mode is activated and when a notification SMS is received by the

embedded module, an indication (see +WDSI indication for more

information) is returned by the embedded module to request for an

agreement before connecting to the AirPrime Managment Services server

1 User agreement for package download

When this mode is activated, an indication (see +WDSI indication for more

information) is returned by the embedded module to request for an

agreement before downloading any package

2 User agreement for package install

When this mode is activated, an indication (see +WDSI indication for more

information) is returned by the embedded module to request for an

agreement before installing any package

3 Polling mode

The embedded module will initiate a connection to the Device Services

server according to the defined timer

4 Retry mode

If an error occurs during a connection to the Device Services server (GPRS

establishment failed, http error code received), the embedded module will

initiate a new connection according to the defined timers. This mechanism is

persistent to the reset

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Configuration +WDSC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 192

5 An automatic registration to the AirPrime Managment Services server can be

configured with this command:

- network registration: the registration is done by a GPRS

connection to the server

- MSISDN registration: the registration is performed by sending a

SMS to the server (this configuration is useful to obtain the MSISDN of the

embedded module by the server)

The registration is performed using +WDSS command.

<State>: Status of the mode

For <Mode> = 0,1 and 2:

0 disabled (default value)

1 enabled

For <Mode> = 3: Value in range [0-525600] (units: min)

0 the polling mode is deactivated

For <Mode> = 5:

0 No registration is configured

1 MSISDN registration is configured

2 Network registration is configured

<Timer_1>: Timer between the first failed connection and the next attempt

Value in range [0 to 20160] (units: min)

With value 0, the retry mode is deactivated

Default value: 15

<Timer_n>: Timer between the nth failed attempt connection and the (n+1)th connection

(n<=8)

Value in range [1 to 20160] (units: min)

Default values:

<Timer_2>=60

<Timer_3>=240

<Timer_4>=960

<Timer_5>=2880

<Timer_6>=10080

<Timer_7>=10080

<Timer_8> not used

<Config> Configuration of the automatic registration

1 MSISDN configuration enabled

2 Network configuration enabled

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Configuration +WDSC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 193

<ValidityPeriod> Validity period of the SMS sent during the MSISDN registration

This parameter is also used to arm a timer to re-try the MSISDN registration

This parameter is only available when the MSISDN registration is enabled.

Default value: 167 (1 day)

Coding:

<ValidityPeriod> value: Validity period value:

0 to 143 (<ValidityPeriod> + 1) x 5 minutes

144 to 167 12 hours + ((<ValidityPeriod> - 143) x 30

minutes

168 to 196 (<ValidityPeriod> - 166) x 1 day

197 to 255 (<ValidityPeriod> - 192) x 1 week

27.1.4. Parameter Storage

The <State>, <Timer_1> and <Timer_n>, <Config> and <ValidityPeriod> parameters are stored in

non-volatile memory without sending &W command. &F command has no impact on these values.

27.1.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDSC=? +WDSC: (0-2),(0-1)

+WDSC: 3,(0-525600)

+WDSC: 4,(0-20160),(1-20160),(1-20160),(1-

20160),(1-20160),(1-20160),(1-20160),(1-

20160)

+WDSC: 5,(1,2),(0-255)

OK

AT+WDSC? +WDSC: 0,0

+WDSC: 1,0

+WDSC: 2,0

+WDSC: 3,0

+WDSC: 4,15,60,240,960,2880,10080,

10080

+WDSC: 5,0

OK

Note: All modes are deactivated except retry mode

which used the default timers

AT+WDSC=0,1 OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Configuration +WDSC

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 194

Command Responses

AT+WDSC? +WDSC: 0,1

+WDSC: 1,0

+WDSC: 2,0

+WDSC: 3,0

+WDSC: 4,15,60,240,960,2880,10080,

10080

+WDSC: 5,0

OK

AT+WDSC=5,1 OK

AT+WDSC? +WDSC: 0,1

+WDSC: 1,0

+WDSC: 2,0

+WDSC: 3,0

+WDSC: 4,15,60,240,960,2880,10080,

10080

+WDSC: 5,1,167

OK

27.1.6. Notes

The switch between the two registration modes is not possible when a registration mode has been

set.

When the registration has failed, a new registration (same or different) can be set again.

In network registration case, the registration is considered as “failed” when all connections configured

by the retry mode have failed. This registration is forbidden while the APN is not set by the +WDSS

command.

In MSISDN registration case, a new SMS is sent when:

• the time since the last registration SMS sent reaches the validity period <ValidyPeriod>

• the SMS was not acknowledged by a SMS report

• no SMS was received from the AirPrime Managment Services server

Four new attempts are made before the registration. When all attempts are made and a SMS is

received from the server, the registration state (see +WDSI command) changes from “failed” to “done”.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Error +WDSE

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 195

27.2. Device Services Error +WDSE

27.2.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows a user to know the last HTTP response received by

the device.

27.2.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDSE

[+WDSE: <HTTP_Status>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

None

27.2.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<HTTP_Status>: Last HTTP response received by the embedded module

100 continue

101 switching protocols

200 ok

201 created

202 accepted

203 non-authoritative information

204 no content

205 reset content

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Error +WDSE

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 196

206 partial content

300 multiple choices

301 moved permanently

302 found

303 see other

304 not modified

305 use proxy

307 temporary redirect

400 bad request

401 unauthorized

402 payment required

403 forbidden

404 not found

405 method not allowed

406 not acceptable

407 proxy authentication required

408 request time-out

409 conflict

410 gone

411 length required

412 precondition failed

413 request entity too large

414 request-uri too large

415 unsupported media type

416 requested range not satisfiable

417 expectation failed

500 internal server error

501 not implemented

502 bad gateway

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Error +WDSE

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 197

503 service unavailable

504 gateway time-out

505 http version not supported

Note: If no session was made with the server, AT+WDSE only returns with OK response, without any

+WDSE: <HTTP_Status> response.

27.2.4. Parameter Storage

No parameter storage.

27.2.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDSS=1,1 OK

Note: A session was made with the server.

AT+WDSE +WDSE: 200

OK

Note: The last HTTP response received by the embedded

module is OK.

27.2.6. Notes

This command returns +CME ERROR: 3 when:

• a parameter is filled

• the Device services are not in ACTIVATED state (see +WDSG command for more

information)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Fallback +WDSF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 198

27.3. Device Services Fallback +WDSF

27.3.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows a user to get back a previous installation or to

delete a package (only if a reverse patch is present).

27.3.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDSF=<Mode>

OK

Read command

AT+WDSF?

+WDSF: 1,<FallbackInfo>

+WDSF: 2,<EraseInfo>

OK

Test command

AT+WDSF=?

+WDSF: (1,2)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Fallback +WDSF

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 199

27.3.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Mode>: Mode

1 downgrade to a previous installation

2 delete the download package which contains the reverse patch

<FallbackInfo>: Indicate the presence of the previous package

0 previous package is not present

1 previous package is present

<EraseInfo>: Indicate if a package can be deleted. This case is only available if A&D memory

was pre-empted to allow the package download (See +WDSI command for more

information). Be careful, erasing the package will disable the possibility to make

any recovery or manual fallback

0 package cannot be deleted

1 package can be deleted

27.3.4. Parameter Storage

The parameters are not stored.

27.3.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDSF? +WDSF: 1,1

+WDSF: 2,0

OK

Note: A reverse package is present,no A&D memory pre-emption

AT+WDSF=1 OK

Note: Downgrade to the previous installation

+WDSI: 17,1

Note: Downgrade the package successfully done.

27.3.6. Notes

The result of the operation (+WDSI) is displayed only if +WDSI indication is activated (see +WDSI for

more information)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services General status +WDSG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 200

27.4. Device Services General status +WDSG

27.4.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command returns some general status about Device Services.

27.4.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDSG

+WDSG: <Indication>,<State>

[+WDSG: <Indication>,<State>[…]]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WDSG=?

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services General status +WDSG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 201

27.4.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Indication>: Indication

0 device services activation state

1 session and package indication

<State>: Status of an indication

For <Indication>=0

0 device services are prohibited. Device services will never be activated

1 device services are deactivated. Connection parameters to a Device Services

server have to be provisioned

2 device services have to be provisioned. NAP parameters have to be provisioned

3 device services are activated

If a device has never been activated (first used of device services on this device),

the <State> is set to 1

The connection parameters are automatically provisioned, no action are needed

by the user (<State>=2 or <State>=3)

The device will be activated (<State>=3) when a dedicated NAP will be set

manually or automatically at the first session (see +WDSS command for more

information)

For <Indication>=1

0 no session or package

1 a session is under treatment

2 a package is available on the server

3 a package was downloaded and ready to install

When a package was installed or not (not certified to be sent by the AirPrime

Managment Services server, see +WDSI command for more information) or a

recovery was made, the <State> is set to 0.

27.4.4. Parameter Storage

No storage.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services General status +WDSG

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 202

27.4.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDSG=? OK

AT+WDSG +WDSG: 0,3

+WDSG: 1,0

OK

Note: Device services are activated, no session to the server, no

patch to download or to install.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Reply +WDSR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 203

27.5. Device Services Reply +WDSR

27.5.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows a user to respond to the Device Services server

request when user agreement is requested for connection, download and/or package install (see

+WDSI command for more information).

27.5.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDSR=<Reply>[,<Timer>]

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WDSR=?

+WDSR: (list of supported <Reply>s),(list of supported <Timer>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Reply +WDSR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 204

27.5.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Reply>: Reply to a user agreement request (see +WDSI command description for more

information) from the embedded module

0 delay or refuse the connection to the server

1 accept the connection to the server

2 delay or refuse to download

3 accept the download (download now)

4 accept the install (Install now)

5 delay the install (Install later)

<Timer>: Timer until a new User agreement request is returned by the embedded module

This parameter is only available for <Reply>=0, 2 and 5

Units: minutes (0-1440)

When this value is not filled, a default value is set to 30 minutes later

Value 0 indicates that the application refuses the user agreement (impossible for

<Reply>=5)

27.5.4. Parameter Storage

No parameter storage.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Reply +WDSR

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 205

27.5.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDSR=? +WDSR: (0-5),(0-1440)

OK

+WDSI: 1

Note: The Device Services server requests the device to make a

connection to the server. The user is requested to allow the

connection.

AT+WDSR=1 OK

+WDSI: 3

Note: A user agreement is requested to install a package

AT+WDSR=5,10 OK

Note: A delay (10 minutes) is requested.

+WDSI: 3

Note: 10 minutes later, a new user agreement is requested to

install a package.

AT+WDSR=4 OK

Note: The install is requested.

27.5.6. Notes

It is not possible to refuse an install request (AT+WDSR=5,0), which will return +CME ERROR: 3

response.

After an install delay, if the embedded module is powered-down, it is not powered-on and the new

user agreement request will be returned during the next start up.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Session +WDSS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 206

27.6. Device Services Session +WDSS

27.6.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows a user to configure a dedicated NAP and to initiate

a connection to the Device Services server.

This command is also used to activate an automatic registration to the AirPrime Managment Services

server.

27.6.2. Syntax

• For <Mode>=0

Action command

AT+WDSS=<Mode>,<Apn>[,<User>[,<Pwd>]]

OK

• For <Mode>=1

Action command

AT+WDSS=<Mode>,<Action>

OK

• For <Mode>=2

Action command

AT+WDSS=<Mode>

OK

Read command

AT+WDSS?

[+WDSS: 0,<Apn>[,<User>]]

[+WDSS: 1,<Action>]

[+WDSS: 2,<State>]

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Session +WDSS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 207

Test command

AT+WDSS=?

+WDSS: 0,(Max length for <Apn>),(Max length for <User>),(Max length for <Pwd>)

+WDSS: 1,(list of supported <Action>s for this <Mode>)

+WDSS: 2,(list of supported <State>)

OK

27.6.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Mode>: Mode

0 PDP context configuration for Device Services

1 user initiated connection to the Device Services server

2 activate the automatic registration

<Apn>: access point name for Device Services

string type, up to 50 chars

<User>: login for the APN

string type, up to 30 chars

<Pwd>: password for the APN

string type, up to 30 chars

<Action>:

For <Mode>=1 only

0 release the current connection to the Device Services server (default value)

1 establish a connection to the Device Services server

<State>: state of the automatic registration on the AirPrime Managment Services server

0 configuration is not set with +WDSC command

1 a registration mode is configured with +WDSC command

2 registration is activated

3 registration in progress

4 registration failed

5 registration done

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Session +WDSS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 208

27.6.4. Parameter Storage

<User> and <Pwd> parameters are stored in flash without using &W command. &F has no effect on

these parameters.

<Apn> parameter is stored in E2P.

27.6.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDSS=? +WDSS: 0,50,30,30

+WDSS: 1,(0-1)

+WDSS: 2

OK

AT+WDSS? OK

Note: No APN is defined.

AT+WDSS=0,"Sierra Wireless"

Note: Define the APN for Device Services: Sierra Wireless

OK

AT+WDSS? +WDSS: 0,"Sierra Wireless"

+WDSS: 1,0

+WDSS: 2,0

OK

Note: No connection to the server and the used PDP context for

the next connection is the one defined by the provisioning

AT+WDSS=1,1 OK

Note: The user initiates a connection to the Device Services

server

AT+WDSS=1,0 OK

Note: The user releases the current connection to the Device

Services server.

AT+WDSS=2 OK

Note: The automatic registration is performed (depend on the

configuration set by +WDSC)

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Session +WDSS

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 209

27.6.6. Notes

27.6.6.1. Activation of dedicated PDP context

When no dedicated NAP is defined using +WDSS command and a session is asked (by AT command

or notify by SMS), the embedded module will use a NAP defined by +CGDCONT command to activate

the dedicated PDP context. This NAP will be recorded to configure the NAP Device Services and it

will be used to activate the dedicated PDP context for the next sessions.

When the PDP context cannot be activated because of bad AirPrime Managment Services NAP

configuration, the embedded module will use a NAP defined by +CGDCONT command to activate the

dedicated PDP context (but the initial NAP configuration is not erased).

27.6.6.2. AT command behaviour

AT+WDSS? command returns only OK if no APN is defined.

When a request is sent to the Wireless Microprocesserto resume an inexistent or unsuspended

session, +CME ERROR: 3 is returned.

When a request is sent to the Wireless Microprocesserto release an inexistent session, +CME

ERROR: 3 is returned.

27.6.6.3. Registration information

The activation of the automatic registration depends on the configuration which was done with

+WDSC:

• If the network registration was set, the embedded module try to connect to the AirPrime

Managment Services server with a GPRS connection

• If the MSISDN registration was set, a SMS is sent to the AirPrime Managment Services

server

The activation is done if the embedded module is registered on the network. If the embedded module

is not registered when the command is performed, the activation will be done at the next network

registration (even if the embedded module resets).

If MSISDN registration is configured, a new SMS is automatically sent when the SIM is changed.

No GPRS connection to the AirPrime Managment Services server is possible when a registration is

not completed.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Indications +WDSI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 210

27.7. Device Services Indications +WDSI

27.7.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows the user to request some unsolicited indication for

Device Services.

27.7.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDSI=<Level>

OK

Read command

AT+WDSI=?

[+WDSI: <Level>

OK

Test command

AT+WDSI=?

+WDSI: (list of supported <Level>s)

OK

Unsolicited response

+WDSI: <Event>[,Data>]

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Indications +WDSI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 211

27.7.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Level>: Indication level, bit field (default value = 0)

bit set to 0: indication deactivated

bit set to 1: indication activated

0 no indication

1 (bit 0) activate the initialization end indication (<Event>=0)

2 (bit 1) activate the server request for a user agreement indication (<Event>=1,2,3)

4 (bit 2) activate the authentication indications (<Event> = 4 & 5)

8 (bit 3) activate the session start indication (<Event> = 6, 7 & 8)

16 (bit 4) activate the package download indications (<Event> = 9, 10 & 11)

32 (bit 5) activate the certified downloaded package indication (<Event> = 12 & 13)

64 (bit 6) activate the update indications (<Event> = 14, 15 & 16)

128 (bit 7) activate the fallback indication (<Event> = 17)

256 (bit 8) activate download progress indication (<Event>=18)

512 (bit 9) activate memory pre-emption indication (<Event>=19)

1024 (bit 10) activate User Pin request indication for bootstrap (<Event>=20)

2048 (bit 11) Activate provisioning indication (<Event>=21)

4096 (bit 12) Activate automatic registration indication (<Event>=22)

<Event>:

0 device services are initialized and can be used. Devices services are initialized

when the SIM PIN code is entered and a dedicated NAP is configured (see

+WDSS command)

1 the Device Services server requests the device to make a connection. The device

requests a user agreement to allow the embedded module to make the

connection. The response can be sent using +WDSR command and this

indication can be returned by the device if the user has activated the user

agreement for connection (see +WDSC command for more information)

2 the Device Services server requests the device to make a package download.

The device requests a user agreement to allow the embedded module to make

the download. The response can be sent using +WDSR command and this

indication can be returned by the device if the user has activated the user

agreement for download (see +WDSC command for more information).

3 the device has downloaded a package. The device requests a user agreement to

install the downloaded package. The response can be sent using +WDSR

command and this indication can be returned by the device if the user has

activated the user agreement for install (see +WDSC command for more

information).

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Indications +WDSI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 212

4 the embedded module starts sending data to the server

5 authentication with the server failed

6 authentication has succeeded, a session with the server started

7 session with the server failed

8 session with the server is finished

9 a package is available on the server and can be downloaded by the embedded

module. A <Data> parameter is returned indicating the package size in kB

10 a package was successfully downloaded and stored in flash

11 an issue happens during the package download. If the download has not started

(+WDSI: 9 indication was not returned), this indication indicates that there is not

enough space in the device to download the update package. If the download has

started (+WDSI: 9 indication was returned), a flash problem implies that the

package has not been saved in the device

12 downloaded package is certified to be sent by the AirPrime Managment Services

server

13 downloaded package is not certified to be sent by the AirPrime Managment

Services server

14 update will be launched

15 OTA update client has finished unsuccessfully

16 OTA update client has finished successfully

17 a fallback mechanism was launched

18 download progress. This event is returned without <Data> parameter to indicate

that a download starts. During the download, a percentage progress is indicated

in <Data> parameter

19 memory pre-emption for a package download. This event is returned when a

memory pre-emption is needed on A&D volume to store the package which is

available on the AirPrime Managment Services server. The <Data> parameter

indicates how many 64kB sectors are pre-empted. When the pre-emption is over,

this event is also returned without <Data> parameter

20 a Bootstrap SMS was received and a User Pin is requested (See +WDSB

command for more information)

21 A provision was made by the AirPrime Managment Services server

22 Automatic registration status

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Indications +WDSI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 213

<Data>: Specific data for some <event>

For <Event>=5 To be defined

For <Event>=9 <Data> indicates the package size in bytes, which will be downloaded

<Data> indicates the pre-empted DOTA area size needed to download an update

package.

Unit: kBytes.

If pre-emption is not made, this parameter is not returned for this event.

If a reverse package is not downloaded and stored, the pre-empted area will be

released after the installation.

For <Event>=17 <Data> indicates if the fallback was asked by the user or applied because a

recovery was necessary

0 automatic recovery (a recovery mechanism was made)

1 fallback asked by the user (see +WDSF command for more information)

For <Event>=18 <Data> indicates the download progress in percentage

For <Event>=19 <Data> indicates the number of 64k sector which is pre-empted for the package

download (See Notes). If pre-emption is not made, this parameter is not returned

for this event. If a reverse package is not downloaded and stored, the pre-empted

area will be released after the installation.

For <Event>=21 <Data> indicates the provisioned parameters

0 Commercial feature (a reset is needed to take into account this update) (See

+WCFM command)

1 Alarm (see +CALA command)

2 Echo cancellation (see +ECHO command)

3 Greeting (see +CGMI command)

4 Preferred PLMN (see +CPOL command)

5 PDP context (see +CGDCONT and +WDSS commands)

6 SIM PIN code activation state (see +CLCK command)

7 Voice codec (see +WVR command)

8 GPRS class (see +CGCLASS command)

9 Device Service Polling mode (see +WDSC command for more information)

10 Network selection (see +WDSC command for more information)

11 Open ATapplication activation state (see +WOPEN command)

12 Retry mode (see +WDSC command for more information (mode 4))

For <Event>=22 <Data> indicates the state of the automatic registration

0 Registration in progress

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Indications +WDSI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 214

1 Registration failed (after retries)

2 Registration succeeded

27.7.4. Parameter Storage

The <Level> parameter is stored in EEPROM without using AT&W command. The default value can

be restored using AT&F.

27.7.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDSI=? +WDSI: (0-8191)

OK

AT+WDSI? +WDSI: 0

OK

Note: All indications are deactivated

AT+WDSI=8191 OK

+WDSI: 1

Note: The Device Services server requests a connection to the

embedded module

AT+WDSR=1

Note: Accept the connection

OK

+WDSI: 4

Note: The embedded module will send the first data to the

AirPrime Managment Services server.

+WDSI: 6

Note: The authentication succeeded

+WDSI: 8

Note: The session with the server is over.

+WDSI: 9,1000

Note: A package will be downloaded, the size is 1kbytes

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Indications +WDSI

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 215

Command Responses

+WDSI: 18, "1%"

Note: 1% was downloaded

+WDSI: 18,"100%"

Note: The whole package was donwloaded

+WDSI: 10

Note: The whole package was stored in flash.

27.7.6. Notes

To receive +WDSI indications, the Device Services should be in activated state (see +WDSG

command for more information).

When a package is available on the AirPrime Managment Services server, the embedded module

checks if enough space is available in a dedicated memory area.

This dedicated area is size to 1 64kB sector on 32Mb flash and 4 64kB sectors on 64Mb and 128Mb

flash.

When the package to be downloaded is bigger than the dedicated area size, the embedded module

will pre-empt the sufficient memory size on A&D memory area. This will be only available if the A&D

memory contains sufficient free memory. The A&D memory size can be configured using +WOPEN

command.

When the package is downloaded, the embedded module tries to install it. After installing it, a new

+WDSI: 19,<Data> can be returned by the embedded module if the package contains a reverse

patch. In this case, the package is not deleted after the install in order to keep the possibility to make

a manual fallback (using +WDSF command).

If the package does not contain a reverse patch, in this case, the embedded module will delete the

downloaded package in order to resize the package dedicated area to the default size and +WDSI: 19

(without <Data> parameter> is returned by the embedded module.

If the downloaded package is not certified (bad CRC, bad signature, not correspond to the current

software), this package is automatically deleted in order to resize the package dedicated area to the

default size. In this case also, +WDSI: 19 (without <Data> parameter> is returned by the embedded

module.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Bootstrap +WDSB

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 216

27.8. Device Services Bootstrap +WDSB

27.8.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows a user to enter the User Pin for the Bootstrap SMS

treatment.

27.8.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDSB=<UserPin>

OK

Read command

AT+WDSB?

+WDSB: <BootStatus>

OK

Test command

None

27.8.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<UserPin>: User Pin which is filled on AirPrime Managment Services server. This User Pin is

needed in order to treat a Bootstrap SMS

Length: up to 20 digits.

<BootStatus>: Status of Bootstrap SMS

0 no Bootstrap SMS was received. No User Pin is required

1 a Bootstrap SMS was received. A User Pin is required

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Bootstrap +WDSB

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 217

27.8.4. Parameter Storage

No storage.

27.8.5. Examples

Command Responses

+WDSI: 20

Note: A Bootstrap SMS was received. A user Pin is requested.

AT+WDSB=1234 OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Host +WDSH

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 218

27.9. Device Services Host +WDSH

27.9.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows a user to define all host applications that can use

the update mechanism using AirPrime Managment Services and acknowledge an update for a host

application. An upload mechanism is available for UART using 1K-Xmodem protocol.

27.9.2. Syntax

• For <Mode>=0, 1, 2, 3, 4

Action command

AT+WDSH=<Mode>,<Name>[,<Version>,<PhysicalPort>]

OK

• For <Mode>=5

Action command

AT+WDSH=<Mode>,<Name>

OK

Read command

AT+WDSH?

+WDSH: <Name>,<Version>,<PhysicalPort>

[+WDSH: <Name>,<Version>,<PhysicalPort>[…]]

OK

Test command

AT+WDSH?

+WDSH: (list of supported <Mode>s),<Nlength>,<Vlength>,(list of supported

<PhysicalPort>s)

OK

Unsolicited response

+WDSH: <Name>

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Host +WDSH

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 219

27.9.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Mode>: Mode

0 declare and delete a host application

To add a host application, a <Name>, a <Version> and a <PhysicalPort>,

parameters have to be filled.

To delete a host application, only the <Name> parameter has to be filled.

1 acknowledge the host application update install

To acknowledge that a host application update install succeeded, the <Name>,

<Version> and <PhysicalPort> parameters have to be filled. <Name> and

<Version> parameters can be different that the previous one declared.

2 update was not made

To acknowledge that a host application update install failed, the <Name>,

<Version> and <PhysicalPort> parameters have to be filled. Those parameters

have to be the same as the previous one declared. If one of these parameters is

different from the previous one declared, the command returns an error.

3 a recovery was made on a host application

To acknowledge that a host application recovery was made, the <Name>,

<Version> and <PhysicalPort> parameters have to be filled. <Name> and

<Version> parameters can be different from the previous one declared.

4 a fallback was made on a host application

To acknowledge that a host application fallback was made, the <Name>,

<Version> and <PhysicalPort> parameters have to be filled. <Name> and

<Version> parameters can be different from the previous one declared.

5 launch the upload on one UART, using 1K-X modem protocol

<Name>: Host application name. ASCII string, up to 50 characters.

<Version>: Version of the customer host application. ASCII string, up to 50 characters.

<PhysicalPort>: Physical Port where the version and the name of a host application were

declared. The possible value of this field depends on the embedded module

hardware capabilities.

UARTx: UART number x

SPIx: SPI bus number x

I2Cx: I2C bus number x

PARALLEL: parallel bus x

X is a digit which depends on the platform. Please refer to the platform Product

Technical Specifications.

Note: Parallel bus and SPI2 are not supported by the AirPrime SL6087

module.

<Vlength>: maximum length for <Version>, equal to 50.

<Nlength>: maximum length for <Name>, equal to 50

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Host +WDSH

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 220

27.9.4. Parameter Storage

All parameter (except <Mode>) are stored in flash without using AT&W command. AT&F command

has no effect on these parameters.

27.9.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDSH=? +WDSH: (0-5),50,50,(UART1-2,USB1,SPI1-

2,I2C1)

OK

Note: On the device, 2 UARTS, 1 USB, 2 SPI and 1 I2C are

available.

AT+WDSH=0,”Host1”,”v1.0”,”UART1”

Note: Declare the host application on UART 1.

OK

AT+WDSH? +WDSH: ”Host1”,”v1.0”,”UART1”

OK

Note: The host application was declared on UART 1

AT+WDSH=0,”New Host”,”v1.1”,”UART1”

Note: Declare the host application on UART1.

OK

AT+WDSH? +WDSH: ”Host1”,”v1.0”,”UART1”

+WDSH: ”New Host”,”v1.1”,”UART1”

OK

AT+WDSH=0,”Host2”,”v2”,”UART2”

Note: Declare the host application on UART2.

OK

AT+WDSH? +WDSH: ”Host1”,”v1.0”,”UART1”

+WDSH: ”Host2”,”v2”,”UART2”

+WDSH: ”New Host”,”v1.1”,”UART1”

OK

AT+WDSH=0,”Host2”

Note: Delete host application which name is “Host2”

OK

AT+WDSH? +WDSH: “Host1”,”v1.0”,”UART1”

+WDSH: ”New Host”,”v1.1”,”UART1”

OK

AT+WDSS=1,1 OK

+WDSI: 18,1500

Note: User agreement for host application package download

(1500 kBytes)

+WDSH: ”Host1”

Note: The downloaded package is a package for the host

application which name is “Host1”

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Host +WDSH

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 221

Command Responses

AT+WDSH=5,”Host1”

Note: Launch the upload

C

Note: ‘C’ character launches the updload using 1K

Xmodem protocol.

<data>

Note: Package data for Host 1 transmitted on the port where

AT+WDSH=5,… command was sent.

AT+WDSH=1,”Host1”,”v1.1”,”UART1”

Note: Acknowledge the update, indicating the new version

and the same name

OK

AT+WDSH=1,”Host1.1”,”v1.1”,”UART1”

Note: Acknowledge the update, indicating the new version

and the new name.

OK

AT+WDSH=2,”Host1”,”v1.0”,”UART1”

Note: The update was not made

OK

27.9.6. Notes

Up to 10 host applications can be defined on one Physical port.

The <Name> parameter MUST be different for each host application. If space is present at the end of

the name, these spaces are removed. Therefore the following names are considered as the same:

“name” and “name “.

In AT+WDSH? response, the host application is sorted by name.

When AT+WDSH=5,<Name> is sent to the embedded module, the embedded module is waiting for

ASCII ‘C’ character (0x43) to start the upload.

Host application states:

• Defined: This is the initial state for a host application. In this state, <Mode>=0 only is

supported for the host application.

• Downloaded: The host application is set to that state when the +WDSH: <Name> unsolicited

response is returned by the embedded module. In this state, <Mode>=0 and 4 cannot be

used. The allowed modes are <Mode>=1, 2, 3 and 5.

• Updated: The host application is set to that state when the +WDSH command with <Mode>=1

is received by the embedded module. In this state, the allowed modes are <Mode>=3 and 4.

Parallel bus and SPI2 are not supported in the AirPrime SL6087 module.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Local Download +WDSD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 222

27.10. Device Services Local Download +WDSD

27.10.1. Description

This Sierra Wireless proprietary command allows a customer to download an update package to the

device using a local port.

The response to AT+WDSD=<Size> command is <NACK> character when the device is ready to

receive data using 1K-Xmodem protocol.

After having downloaded the whole package, the device will return an OK response (response to the

+WDSD command).

After the OK response, the package is ready to be installed using +WDSR command.

If an error occurs during the download, a +CME ERROR: 3 is returned.

27.10.2. Syntax

Action command

AT+WDSD=<Size>

<Nack>

OK

Read command

None

Test command

AT+WDSD=?

+WDSD: (list of supported <Size>s)

OK

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Remote Device Management Services Commands

Device Services Local Download +WDSD

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 223

27.10.3. Parameters and Defined Values

<Size>: Package size in bytes.

The possible range for this parameter depends on flash capability and on A&D

configuration (see +WOPEN command description, parameter <A&DSize> of

AT+WOPEN=6 command response).

MaxSize value differs according to the flash memory size:

1024 Kbytes for 32Mbits Flash size, 4864 Kbytes for 64Mbits flash size and 13056

Kbytes for 128Mbits flash size.

27.10.4. Parameter Storage

None.

27.10.5. Examples

Command Responses

AT+WDSD=? +WDSD: (0-851968)

OK

AT+WOPEN=6 +WOPEN: 6,832,448

OK

AT+WDSD=1000

Note: Download a 1kBytes package

<NACK>

Note: The device is ready to receive data

Send Data

OK

Note: All data are well received by the embedded module

+WDSI: 3

Note: A package is ready to be installed (see +WDSI and

+WDSR commands description).

27.10.6. Notes

The flow control of the hyperterminal has to be set to ‘Hardware’.

This command will automatically activate the user agreement for install (see +WDSC command

description).

No reset is made during the package download.

A timeout will happen (and a +CME ERROR: 3 is returned) if no data is sent to the device during 5

minutes.

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Volume 4 February 18, 2011 224

Index

ADC, 119

CLVL, 18

CMUT, 16

CPHS, 137

CRMP, 87

CRSL, 11

ECHO, 53

FBOR, 170

FBUF, 172

FCQ, 174

FCR, 176

FDCC, 182

FDIS, 178

FDR, 164

FDT, 163

FET, 165

FK, 169

FLID, 185

FPHCTO, 187

FPTS, 167

FRH, 157

FRM, 153

FRS, 161

FTH, 155

FTM, 151

FTS, 159

SIDET, 22

SPEAKER, 7

T, 99

VGR, 27

VGT, 30

VIP, 97

VTD, 64

VTS, 66

WADF, 47

WADS, 101

WALS, 148

WBCM, 122

WCDM, 93

WCDP, 95

WDDM, 79

WDGR, 34

WDGT, 41

WDIAG, 130

WDSB, 217

WDSC, 191

WDSD, 224

WDSE, 196

WDSF, 199

WDSG, 201

WDSH, 219

WDSI, 211

WDSR, 204

WDSS, 207

WDTMF, 74

WIOM, 106

WIOR, 111

WIOW, 113

WIPC, 115

WMBN, 145

WSST, 82

WTONE, 68

WVR, 61

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079

019

February 18, 2011

Appendix

AT Commands Interface Guide

for Firmware 7.45

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 2

Contents

1. CODES AND VALUES.........................................................................................4

1.1. ME Error Result Code: +CME ERROR.............................................................................4

1.2. Message Service Failure Result Code: +CMS ERROR....................................................6

1.3. Specific Error Result Codes ..............................................................................................7

1.4. Failure Cause from 3GPP TS 24.008 recommendation (+CEER)..................................10

1.5. Specific Failure Cause for +CEER..................................................................................12

1.6. GSM 04.11 Annex E-2: Mobile Originating SM-transfer ...............................................13

1.7. Result Codes ...................................................................................................................15

1.8. GSM Sequences List.......................................................................................................16

1.9. Operator Names..............................................................................................................19

1.10. CPHS Information Field...................................................................................................20

1.11. CSP Constants................................................................................................................21

2. EXAMPLES........................................................................................................24

2.1. Examples with the PIN Required.....................................................................................24

2.2. Examples where a Voice Call is Originated ....................................................................25

2.3. Example with Incoming Calls ..........................................................................................26

2.4. Example of a Call Forwarding .........................................................................................26

2.5. Example of a Multiparty Call............................................................................................27

2.6. Examples about Phonebooks..........................................................................................27

2.7. Examples about Short Messages....................................................................................34

2.8. Examples about Fax Class 2...........................................................................................35

2.9. +CSIM and +CRSM Examples........................................................................................37

2.10. + WBHV Examples..........................................................................................................38

2.11. +WDSI Examples ............................................................................................................41

2.12. Full AT GPRS Commands Examples .............................................................................47

2.13. Unit test cases for AT +WOPEN=7 mode .......................................................................52

2.14. Unit test cases for AT + WOPEN=8 mode......................................................................54

3. TECHNICAL APPENDIXES ...............................................................................58

3.1. Working Modes................................................................................................................58

3.2. Multiplexing Mode ...........................................................................................................61

3.3. Support of SIM ToolKit by the M.E..................................................................................67

3.4. Structure of TERMINAL PROFILE ..................................................................................68

3.5. Command Type and Next Action Indicator. ....................................................................72

3.6. Coding of Alpha Fields in the SIM for UCS2 ...................................................................73

3.7. Specifications of Power Down Control mechanism through serial Ports (physical 􀃙

RS232 ports or virtual 􀃙 CMUX ports) ..........................................................................................75

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 3

AT Commands Interface Guide for Firmware 7.45

3.8. Description of Multi-Flow Behavior..................................................................................81

3.9. USB CDC feature ............................................................................................................83

4. INTEROPERABILITY.........................................................................................86

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 4

1. Codes and Values

1.1. ME Error Result Code: +CME ERROR

<error> is defined as below:

<error> Meaning Resulting from the following commands

3 Operation not allowed

Access techno param filled while the

SIM file does not support it

All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 3)

+CPOL

4 Operation not supported All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 4)

5 PH-SIM PIN required (SIM lock) All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 5)

10 SIM not inserted All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 10)

11 SIM PIN required All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 11)

12 SIM PUK required All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 12)

13 SIM failure All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 13)

16 Incorrect password

Bad user pin

+CACM, +CAMM, +CPUC, +CLCK, +CPWD, +CPIN,

+CPIN2 (+CME ERROR: 16)

+WDSB

17 SIM PIN2 required +CPBW (FDN), +CLCK (FDN),

18 SIM PUK2 required +CACM, +CAMM, +CPUC, +CPBW (FDN), +CPIN,

+CPIN2, +CLCK (FDN), +CPWD

20 Memory full +CPBW, +WOLM, ATD

21 Invalid index +CPBR, +CPBW, ATD>[mem]index, +WMGO, +WPGW,

+WOLM

22 Not found +CPBF, +CPBP, +CPBN, +CGSN, +WOPN,

ATD>[mem]"name"

24 <Apn>, <User>, <Pwd> too long +CPBW, +CPIN, +CPIN2, +CLCK, +CPWD, +WPGW,

+WCCS, +WIMEI, +WDSS

26 Dial string too long +CPBW, ATD, +CCFC

27 Invalid characters in dial string +CPBW

30 No network service +VTS, +COPS=?, +CLCK, +CCFC, +CCWA, +CUSD,

+CCED

32 Network not allowed – emergency

calls only

+COPS, +CCED

40 Network personalization PIN required

(Network lock)

All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 40)

42 Network personalization PIN required

(Network subset lock)

All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 42)

44 Network personalization PIN required

(Service Provider lock)

All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 44)

46 Network personalization PIN required

(Corporate lock)

All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 46)

103 Incorrect MS identity. +CGATT

106 ME is blacklisted by the network. +CGATT

107 MS is not allowed to operate in GPRS. +CGATT

111 MS is not allowed to operate in the

requested PLMN.

+CGATT

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 5

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

<error> Meaning Resulting from the following commands

112 MS is not allowed to make location

updating in this area.

+CGATT

113 Roaming in this location area is not

allowed.

+CGATT

132 service option not supported (#32) +CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99

133 requested service option not

subscribed (#33)

+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99

134 service option temporarily out of order

(#34)

+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99

148 unspecified GPRS error All GPRS commands

149 PDP authentication failure +CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99

150 invalid mobile class +CGCLASS +CGATT

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 6

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

1.2. Message Service Failure Result Code: +CMS

ERROR

<er> is defined as below:

<er> Meaning Resulting from the following commands

1 to 127 Error cause values from the GSM

recommendation 04.11 Annex E-2

+CMGS, +CMSS

301 SMS service of ME reserved +CSMS (with +CMS: ERROR 301)

302 Operation not allowed All SMS commands (+CMSS, +CMGL, +CPMS, +CSMP…

303 Operation not supported All SMS commands

304 Invalid PDU mode parameter +CMGS, +CMGW

305 Invalid text mode parameter +CMGS, +CMGW, +CMSS

310 SIM not inserted All SMS commands

311 SIM PIN required All SMS commands

312 PH-SIM PIN required All SMS commands

313 SIM failure All SMS commands

316 SIM PUK required All SMS commands

317 SIM PIN2 required All SMS commands

318 SIM PUK2 required All SMS commands

321 Invalid memory index +CMGR, +CMSS, +CMGD

322 SIM or ME memory full +CMGW

330 SC address unknown +CSCA?, +CMSS, +CMGS

340 no +CNMA acknowledgement

expected

+CNMA

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 7

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

1.3. Specific Error Result Codes

<error> Meaning Resulting from the following commands

500 Unknown error. All commands

501 GPIO cannot be reached by

device layer (for example the

GPIO is not currently allocated to

the user).

+WIOM, +WIOR, +WIOW, +WASR

502 AT command is inconsistent (for

example, the user tries to

configure a GPI in output)

+WIOM, +WIOR, +WIOW

503 The external interrupt cannot be

reached

+WIPC

504 Error during external interrupt

treatment

+WIPC

505 The resource has not been

reserved

+DAC

512 MM establishment failure (for

SMS).

+CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 512)

513 Lower layer failure (for SMS) +CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 513)

514 CP error (for SMS). +CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 514)

515 Please wait, init or command

processing in progress.

All commands ("+CME ERROR: 515" or "+CMS ERROR:

515") except ATH0, ATH1, AT+WIOR, AT+WIOW,

AT+CFUN=1, AT+CLCC, AT+WAC, AT+CPAS, AT+VGR,

AT+VTS, AT+SPEAKER.

517 SIM Toolkit facility not supported. +STGI

518 SIM Toolkit indication not

received.

+STGI

519 Reset the product to activate or

change a new echo cancellation

algorithm.

+ECHO, +VIP

520 Automatic abort about get PLMN

list for an incoming call.

+COPS=?

526 PIN deactivation forbidden with

this SIM card.

+CLCK

527 Please wait, RR or MM is busy.

Retry your selection later.

+COPS

528 Location update failure.

Emergency calls only.

+COPS

529 PLMN selection failure.

Emergency calls only.

+COPS

531 SMS not sent: the <da> is not in

FDN phonebook, and FDN lock is

enabled. (for SMS)

+CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 531)

532 the embedded application is

activated so the objects flash are

not erased

+WOPEN

533 Missing or Unknown APN ATD*99 +GACT +CGDATA

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 8

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

<error> Meaning Resulting from the following commands

536 Class locked: a command has

been launched from a port, the

effect is to lock all commands

belonging to the same class. If

another port launches a command

of this class, this error will occur

as long as the class is not

released (at first command’s

completion time)

All commands

537 Phonebook group full. +CPBW

538 Not Enough Space to copy SMS +WMCP

539 Invalid SMS +CMGR

541 Open ATapplication and AT

software version do not match

+WOPEN

543 CMUX connection is refused by

remote, after a restart of CMUX

protocol by embedded module,

due to a 27.010 connection loss

during virtual channels

establishment.

+CMUX

544 CMUX connection timeout +CMUX

546 Emergency call is not allowed

without SIM

+COPS

547 Emergency call is allowed without

SIM

+COPS

548 No flash objects to delete +WOPEN

549 The phone number of the

requested phonebook entry is

empty

ATD><index>[;], ATD><phonebook><index>[;]

550 Unable to resize the Application &

Data storage place, since the new

required size would overlap with

the current Open ATapplication

storage place.

+WOPEN

551 Service abort request has failed AT +WAC

552 Unsolicited responses for autodiag

or charge indications are already

activated on another port

+WDIAG, +WBCM

553 The PUK 1 code is burned but PIN

1/CHV 1 code is OK

+CPIN, +CKPD, D (sequence)

554 The SIM is blocked (PIN 1/CHV 1

and PUK 1 codes are burned)

All GSM 07.07 commands

555 AT command aborted by a

POWER OFF (the AT command

treatment should be partial)

AT+CPOL? command is under

treatment and if a POWER OFF is

made in the mean time using

+CPOF command (the +CPOLS?

treatment is then stopped)

+COPS, +CPIN, +CPIN2, +CMGL, +CMGR, +CMGD,

+WDCP, +WLPR, +WLPW, +CCID, +CSIM, +CRSM, +CLCK,

+CACM, +CAMM, +CPUC, +WMSC, +WMCP, +CPOL,

+CSQ, +CCED

+CPOL

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 9

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

<error> Meaning Resulting from the following commands

556 AT command aborted by a SIM

Extract (the AT command

treatment should be partial)

AT+CPOL? command is under

treatment and if the SIM is

removed (the +CPOLS? treatment

is then stopped)

+COPS, +CPIN, +CPIN2, +CMGL, +CMGR, +CMGD,

+WDCP, +WLPR, +WLPW, +CCID, +CSIM, +CRSM, +CLCK,

+CACM, +CAMM, +CPUC, +WMSC, +WMCP, +CPOL

+CPOL

558 The service activation associated

to the AT command is already

activated by another port

the resource has been already

reserved by another application

+WDDM

+DAC

559 Audio Diagnostic was stopped

because an incoming call

happens.

+WADS

560 Auto Shutdown is already enabled

or disabled

+WASR

562 AT command aborted by an auto

answer to an incoming call (the AT

command treatment should be

partial)

AT+CPOL? command is under

treatment and if an auto-answer

mechanism happens on the same

port (the +CPOLS? treatment is

then stopped)

+CPBF, +CPBR, +CGATT, +CGCLASS, +CPWD, +CLCK,

+CPIN, +CPIN2, +CSIM, +CRSM, +VTS, +CPBS, +CPBW,

+WDCP, +CMGR, +CMGL, +WMSC, +CMGW, +CMGS,

+CMSS, +WCBM, +CSAS, +CMGD, +WLPR, +WLPW,

+CCID, +CCFC, +CLIR, +CLIP, +COLP, +CCWA, +CACM,

+CAMM, +CPUC, +CPOL

+CPOL

563 The charge is not started due to

an error. (Example: charger not

plugged), but other command part

(unsolicited event activation) is

done.

+WBCM

567 Operation denied due to CPU

overheated

+WTMR

567 Operation denied due to CPU

overheated

+WTMR

650 General error

Device Services not in good state

+WDSS

651 Communication error +WDSS

652 Session in progress +WDSS

653 GSM call in progress +WDSS

654 RDMS services are in

DEACTIVATED state

+WDSE, +WDSF, +WDSR, +WDSS

655 RDMS services are in

PROHIBITED state

+WDSA, +WDSB, +WDSC, +WDSD, +WDSE, +WDSF,

+WDSH, +WDSI, +WDSR, +WDSS

656 RDMS services are in TO BE

PROVISIONED state

No NAP are available (either in

+CGDCONT)

+WDSC, +WDSE, +WDSF, +WDSR, +WDSS

+WDSS

657 Automatic registration error +WDSS, +WDSC

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 10

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

1.4. Failure Cause from 3GPP TS 24.008

recommendation (+CEER)

Cause value Diagnostic

1 Unassigned (unallocated) number

3 No route to destination

6 Channel unacceptable

8 Operator determined barring

16 Normal call clearing

17 User busy

18 No user responding

19 User alerting, no answer

21 Call rejected

22 Number changed

26 Non selected user clearing

27 Destination out of order

28 Invalid number format (incomplete number)

29 Facility rejected

30 Response to STATUS ENQUIRY

31 Normal, unspecified

34 No circuit/channel available

38 Network out of order

41 Temporary failure

42 Switching equipment congestion

43 Access information discarded

44 Requested circuit/channel not available

47 Resources unavailable, unspecified

49 Quality of service unavailable

50 Requested facility not subscribed

55 Incoming calls barred with in the CUG

57 Bearer capability not authorized

58 Bearer capability not presently available

63 Service or option not available, unspecified

65 Bearer service not implemented

68 ACM equal to or greater than ACMmax

69 Requested facility not implemented

70 Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available

79 Service or option not implemented, unspecified

81 Invalid transaction identifier value

87 User not member of CUG

88 Incompatible destination

91 Invalid transit network selection

95 Semantically incorrect message

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 11

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Cause value Diagnostic

96 Invalid mandatory information

97 Message type non-existent or not implemented

98 Message type not compatible with protocol state

99 Information element non-existent or not implemented

100 Conditional IE error

101 Message not compatible with protocol state

102 Recovery on timer expiry

111 Protocol error, unspecified

127 Inter-working, unspecified

224 MS requested detach

225 NWK requested Detach

226 Unsuccessful attach cause NO SERVICE

227 Unsuccessful attach cause NO ACCESS

228 Unsuccessful attach cause GPRS SERVICE REFUSED

229 PDP Deactivation requested by NWK

230 PDP Deactivation because LLC link activation Failed

231 PDP Deactivation cause NWK reactivation with same TI

232 PDP Deactivation cause GMM abort

233 PDP Deactivation cause LLC or SNDCP failure

234 PDP Unsuccessful activation cause GMM error

235 PDP Unsuccessful activation cause NWK reject

236 PDP Unsuccessful activation cause NO NSAPI available

237 PDP Unsuccessful activation cause SM refuse

238 PDP Unsuccessful activation cause MMI ignore

239 PDP unsuccessful activation cause Nb Max Session Reach

All other values in the range Will be treated as cause

[0,31] 31

[32,47] 47

[48,63] 63

[64,79] 79

[80,95] 95

[96,111] 111

[112,127] 127

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 12

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

1.5. Specific Failure Cause for +CEER

Cause value Diagnostic

240 FDN is active and number is not in FDN

241 Call operation not allowed

252 Call barring on outgoing calls

253 Call barring on incoming calls

254 Call impossible

255 Lower layer failure

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 13

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

1.6. GSM 04.11 Annex E-2: Mobile Originating

SM-transfer

These error causes could appear for SMS commands (+CMGS, +CMSS, +CMGD…)

Error # Error label Description

1 Unassigned (unallocated)

number

The destination requested by the Mobile Station cannot be

reached because, although the number is in a valid format, it is

not currently assigned (allocated).

8 Operator determined barring The MS has tried to send a mobile originating short message

when the MS’s network operator or service provider has

forbidden such transactions.

10 Call barred The outgoing call barred service applies to the short message

service for the called destination.

21 Short message transfer

rejected

The equipment sending this cause does not wish to accept this

short message, although it could have accepted the short

message since the equipment sending. This cause is neither

busy nor incompatible.

27 Destination out of service The destination indicated by the Mobile Station cannot be

reached because the interface to the destination is not

functioning correctly. The term "not functioning correctly"

indicates that a signaling message was unable to be delivered

to the remote user; e.g., a physical layer or data link layer

failure at the remote user, user equipment off-line, etc.

28 Unidentified subscriber The subscriber is not registered in the PLMN (e.g.. IMSI not

known)

29 Facility rejected The facility requested by the Mobile Station is not supported by

the PLMN.

30 Unknown subscriber The subscriber is not registered in the HLR (e.g.. IMSI or

directory number is not allocated to a subscriber).

38 Network out of order The network is not functioning correctly and the condition is

likely to last a relatively long period of time; e.g., immediately

reattempting the short message transfer is not likely to be

successful.

41 Temporary failure The network is not functioning correctly and the condition is not

likely to last a long period of time; e.g., the Mobile Station may

wish to try another short message transfer attempt almost

immediately.

42 Congestion The short message service cannot be serviced because of high

traffic.

47 Resources unavailable,

unspecified

This cause is used to report a resource unavailable event only

when no other cause applies.

50 Requested facility not

subscribed

The requested short message service could not be provided by

the network because the user has not completed the necessary

administrative arrangements with its supporting networks.

69 Requested facility not

implemented

The network is unable to provide the requested short message

service.

81 Invalid short message transfer

reference value

The equipment sending this cause has received a message

with a short message reference which is not currently in use on

the MS-network interface.

95 Invalid message, unspecified This cause is used to report an invalid message event only

when no other cause in the invalid message class applies.

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 14

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Error # Error label Description

96 Invalid mandatory information The equipment sending this cause has received a message

where a mandatory information element is missing and/or has

a content error (both cases are undistinguishable).

97 Message type non-existent or

not implemented

The equipment sending this cause has received a message

with a message type it does not recognize either because this

is a message not defined or defined but not implemented by

the equipment sending this cause.

98 Message not compatible with

short message protocol state

The equipment sending this cause has received a message

such that the procedures do not indicate that this is a

permissible message to receive while in the short message

transfer state.

99 Information element nonexistent

or not implemented

The equipment sending this cause has received a message

which includes unrecognized information elements because the

information element identifier is not defined or it is defined but

not implemented by the equipment sending the cause.

However, the information element is not required to be present

in the message so that the equipment sends the cause to

process the message.

111 Protocol error, unspecified This cause is used to report a protocol error event only when

no other cause applies.

127 Inter-working, unspecified There has been inter-working with a network which does not

provide causes for actions it takes; thus, the precise cause for

a message which is being sent cannot be ascertained.

All values other than specified should be treated as error #41.

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 15

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

1.7. Result Codes

Verbose result code Numeric (V0 set) Description

+CME ERROR: <err> As verbose Error from GSM 07.05 commands

+CMS ERROR: <err> As verbose Error from SMS commands (07.07)

BUSY 7 Busy signal detected

ERROR 4 Command not accepted

NO ANSWER 8 Connection completion timeout

NO CARRIER 3 Connection terminated

OK 0 Acknowledges correct execution of a command

line

RING 2 Incoming call signal from network

+COLP:<number>,<type> as verbose Outgoing Call Presentation

+CR: <type> as verbose Outgoing Call report control

+ILRR: <rate> as verbose Local TA-TE data rate

CONNECT 300 10 Data connection at 300 bauds

CONNECT 1200 11 Data connection at 1200 bauds

CONNECT 1200/75 12 Data connection at 1200/75 bauds

CONNECT 2400 13 Data connection at 2400 bauds

CONNECT 4800 14 Data connection at 4800 bauds

CONNECT 9600 15 Data connection at 9600 bauds

CONNECT 14400 16 Data connection at 14400 bauds

+CSSI: <code1>[,<index>] As verbose Supplementary service notification during a call

setup

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 16

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

1.8. GSM Sequences List

In accordance with GSM 02.30, the product supports the following GSM sequences, which can be

used through the ATD and the +CKPD commands.

1.8.1. Security

Change PIN code **04*OLDPIN*NEWPIN*NEWPIN#

Change PIN2 code **042*OLDPIN2*NEWPIN2*NEWPIN2#

Unlock PIN code **05*PUK*NEWPIN*NEWPIN#

Unlock PIN2 code **052*PUK2*NEWPIN2*NEWPIN2#

Show the IMEI number *#06#

1.8.2. Call Forwarding

Please refer to SC and BS values below in this paragraph.

Activate *SC#

or *SC**BS#

Register and activate **SC*PhoneNumber#

or **SC*PhoneNumber*BS#

or **SC*PhoneNumber*[BS]*T#

or *SC*PhoneNumber#

or *SC*PhoneNumber*BS#

or *SC*PhoneNumber*[BS]*T#

Check status *#SC#

or *#SC**BS#

Deactivate #SC#

or #SC**BS#

Unregister and deactivate ##SC#

or ##SC**BS#

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 17

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Service Codes (SC) Network Service Codes (BS)

002 all call forwarding No code All tele- and bearer services

004 all conditional call forwarding 10 All tele-services

21 call forwarding unconditional 11 Telephony

61 call forwarding on no answer 12 All data tele-services

62 call forwarding on not reachable 13 Fax services

67 call busy 16 Short Message Services

17 Voice Group Call Service

18 Voice Broadcast Service

19 All tele-services except SMS

20 All bearer services

21 All asynchronous services

22 All synchronous services

24 All data circuit synchronous

25 All data circuit asynchronous

Note: The no-reply condition timer (T), is only used for SC = 002, 004 or 61.

1.8.3. Call Barring

Please refer to SC values below in this paragraph. BS values are the same as above, see Call

Forwarding.

Activate *SC*Password#

or *SC*Password*BS#

Check status *#SC#

or *#SC**BS#

Deactivate #SC*Password#

or #SC*Password*BS#

Change password for call barring **03*330*OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#

or **03**OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#

or *03*330*OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#

or *03**OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#

Service Codes (SC)

33 call barring of outgoing call

330 all barring service (only for deactivation)

331 call barring of outgoing international call

332 call barring of outgoing international calls except to HPLMN

333 all outgoing barring service (only for deactivation)

35 call barring of incoming calls

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 18

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Service Codes (SC)

351 call barring of incoming calls if roaming

353 all incoming barring service (only for deactivation)

1.8.4. Call Waiting

BS values are the same as above, see Call Forwarding.

Activate *43*BS#

Check status *#43*BS#

Deactivate #43*BS#

1.8.5. Number Presentation

CLIP check status *#30#

CLIR check status *#31#

Suppress CLIR for a voice call *31#PhoneNumber

Invoke CLIR for a voice call #31#PhoneNumber

COLP check status *#76#

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 19

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

1.9. Operator Names

For more information, refer to the following documentation:

• SE13 (22nd August,2005)

• NAPRD 2.6.8

Note: The Country Initials may vary for the same MCC (Mobile Country Code) without any impact.

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 20

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

1.10. CPHS Information Field

CPHS Information

Data field Bit Field Meaning

0 None All information

1 0 CSP service activated and allocated

2 1 SST service activated and allocated

3 2 Mailbox Number service activated and allocated

4 3 Operator Name Shortform service activated and allocated

5 4 Information Numbers service activated and allocated

6 5 RFU

7 6 RFU

8 7 RFU

9 8 Voice Message Waiting indicator for Line 1

10 9 Voice Message Waiting indicator for Line 2

11 10 Data Message Waiting indicator

12 11 Fax Message Waiting indicator

13 12 Call Forward Activated indicator for Line 1

14 13 Call Forward Activated indicator for Line 2

15 14 Call Forward Activated indicator for Data

16 15 Call Forward Activated indicator for Fax

17 16 Reserved

18 17 Reserved

19 18 Reserved

20 19 Reserved

21 20 Line 1 Mailbox Number available

22 21 Line 2 Mailbox Number available

23 22 Data Mailbox Number available

24 23 Fax Mailbox Number available

25 24 EF Mn Updateable

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 21

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

1.11. CSP Constants

1.11.1. Service Group: Call Offering

Service External value

Call Forwarding Unconditional 1

Call Forwarding On User Busy 2

Call Forwarding on No Reply 3

Call Forwarding On User Not Reachable 4

Call Transfer 5

1.11.2. Service Group: Call Restriction

Service External value

Barring of All Outgoing Calls 9

Barring of Outgoing International Calls 10

Barring of Outgoing International Calls except those directed

to the Home PLMN country

11

Barring of All Incoming Calls when Roaming Outside the

Home PLMN country

12

BIC roam 13

1.11.3. Service Group: Other Supplementary Services

Service External value

Multi-Party Service 17

Closed User Group 18

Advice Of Charge 19

Preferential CUG 20

CUG Outgoing Access 21

1.11.4. Service Group: Group Completion

Service External value

Call Hold 25

Call Waiting 26

Completion of Call to Busy Subscriber 27

Restriction of the menus allowing use of user to user

signaling

28

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 22

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

1.11.5. Service Group: Teleservices

Service External value

Short Message – Mobile Terminated 33

Short Message – Mobile Originated 34

Short Message – Cell Broadcast 35

Restricts menu options for the ability to set reply path active

on outgoing Short Messages

36

SMS Delivery Confirmation 37

Restriction of menus for SMS Protocol ID options 38

Validity Period, restriction of menus for SMS Validity period

options

39

1.11.6. Service Group: CPHS Teleservices

Service External value

Alternate Line Service 41

1.11.7. Service Group: CPHS Features

Service External value

Reserved: SST in phase 1 CPHS 49

1.11.8. Service Group: Number Identification

Service External value

Calling Line Identification Presentation 57

Connected Line Identification Restriction 59

Connected Line Identification Presentation 60

Malicious Call Indicator 61

CLI per call mode – default block CLI – menu to send CLI 63

CLI per call mode – default send CLI – menu to block CLI 64

Codes and Values

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 23

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

1.11.9. Service Group: Phase 2+ Services

Service External value

Menus concerned with GPRS functionality 65

Menus concerned with High Speed Circuit Switched Data

functionality

66

ASCI Voice Group call menus 67

ASCI Voice Broadcast service menus 68

Multi Subscriber profile menus 69

Multiple band: Restriction of menus allowing user to select a

particular GSM 900/ 1800 or 1900 band

70

1.11.10. Service Group: Value Added Services

Service External value

Restriction of menu options for manual PLMN selection 73

Restriction of menu options for Voice Mail or other similar

menus

74

Restriction of menu options for the ability to send Short

messages with type Paging

75

Restriction of menu options for the ability to send Short

messages with type Email

76

Restriction of menu options for Fax calls 77

Restriction of menu options for Data calls 78

Restriction of menus allowing the user to change language 80

1.11.11. Service Group: Information Numbers

Service External value

The ME shall only present Information numbers to the user if

this field is set to FF

81

Note: External values not used in these tables are reserved for further use.

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 24

2. Examples

This chapter gives illustrative examples of the general AT commands used for a communication. The

presentation of commands and responses is as close as possible to what a user can see on its test

monitor. Blank lines have been intentionally removed. The characters on the left margin are DTE

generated. Middle column characters are embedded module generated.

2.1. Examples with the PIN Required

2.1.1. When the ME has to be powered ON

AT+CMEE=1 Enable the report mobile equipment errors

OK

AT+CREG=1 Report registration

OK

AT+CPAS Query ME Status

+CPAS: 5 (ME is asleep)

OK

AT+CFUN=1 Set ME to full functionality

OK

AT+COPS=0 Ask for automatic operator selection and registration.

+CME ERROR: 11 SIM PIN required.

AT+CPIN=1234 User entered a wrong PIN

+CME ERROR: 16 Incorrect password.

AT+CPIN=0000

OK PIN Ok

AT+COPS=0 Ask for automatic operator selection and registration.

OK

+CREG:1 Registered on the network

AT+COPS=3,0 Select the long name alphanumeric format.

OK

AT+COPS? Get the operator name

+COPS: 0,0,"I OMNITEL"

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 25

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

2.1.2. When the ME has already been powered on

AT+CMEE=1 Enable the report mobile equipment errors

OK

AT+CPAS Get the ME Status

+CPAS: 0 ME is ready to receive commands

OK

AT+CPIN? Is ME requiring a password?

+CPIN: SIM PIN Yes, SIM PIN required

AT+CPIN=0000

OK PIN Ok

2.2. Examples where a Voice Call is Originated

2.2.1. When the ME is powered on and the SIM PIN has

been entered

AT+CMEE=1 Enable the reporting of mobile equipment errors

OK

AT+WIND=63 Ask to display the general indications.

OK

AT+CPIN? Is ME requiring a password?

+CPIN: READY product is ready

ATD0607103543; Make a voice call

+WIND: 5,1 Indication of call

+WIND: 2 Remote party is ringing.

OK Call setup was successful

Conversation…

ATH Release the call

OK

2.2.2. When a voice call is attempted from a phonebook

ATD>"John Pamborn";

+CME ERROR: 22 The "John Pamborn" entry is not found.

ATD>"Joel Guerry";

+WIND: 5,1 Indication of outgoing call.

+WIND: 2 Remote party is ringing.

OK Call setup was successful

Conversation…

ATH Release the call

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 26

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

2.3. Example with Incoming Calls

2.3.1. When the ME is powered on and the SIM PIN has

been entered

AT+CMEE=1 Enable the report mobile equipment errors

OK

AT+WIND=63 Ask to display the general indications.

OK

AT+CLIP=1 Enable the calling line identification presentation.

OK

AT+CRC=1 Enable extended format of incoming indication.

OK

AT+CNUM Query own number (voice number) or MSISDN.

+CNUM: "Speech","+33608971019",145

OK

Call this number from another equipment.

+WIND: 5, 1 Indication of call (Ring)

+CRING: VOICE Type of call is VOICE.

+CLIP: "+33607103543",145,,,"John Panborn" Identification of the remote party.

+CRING: VOICE

ATA Answer the call.

OK

…Conversation…

NO CARRIER The call has been released by the remote party.

+WIND: 6,1 Indication of call release.

2.4. Example of a Call Forwarding

2.4.1. When the ME is powered on and the SIM PIN has

been entered

AT+CMEE=1 Enable the report mobile equipment errors

OK

AT+CCFC=1,3,"0607492638" Register to a call forwarding when ME is busy.

OK

AT+CCFC=2,3,"0149293031",129 Register to a call forwarding when it does answer.

+CME ERROR: 30 No network service

AT+CCFC=1,2 Interrogate

+CCFC: 1,1,"+33607492638",145 Call forwarding active for a voice call.

AT+CCFC=1,4 Delete call forwarding ME busy

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 27

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

2.5. Example of a Multiparty Call

When the ME is powered on and the SIM PIN has been entered.

AT+CMEE=1 Enable the report mobile equipment errors

OK

AT+WIND=63 Ask to display the general indications.

OK

AT+CCWA=1,1 Enable call waiting.

OK

ATD>"John Panborn";

+WIND: 5,1 Indication of call.

+WIND: 2 Remote party is ringing.

OK Call setup was successful

…Conversation (call1)…

+WIND: 5,2 Indication of another call.

+CCWA: "+33595984834",145,"Dolores Claiborne" Another call is waiting.

AT+CHLD=2 Put first call on hold and answer the second one.

OK

…Conversation (call2)…

AT+CHLD=3 Every call is part of a multiparty conversation.

OK

AT+CHLD=11 Release the first call (with John Panborn) and recover the second call (with Dolores

Claiborne)

…Conversation (call2)…

ATH Release the second call.

2.6. Examples about Phonebooks

For each example illustrated in this section: at the beginning the ME is powered on and the SIM PIN

has been entered.

2.6.1. Example 1: The whole phonebook of the ME is

read

Command Response

AT+CPBS=?

Note: Query supported phonebook memories

+CPBS: ("SM","FD","ON")

OK

Note: ADN, FDN, and MSISDN phonebooks supported.

AT+CPBS="SM"

Note: Select ADN phonebook.

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 28

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Command Response

AT+CPBR=?

Note: Read the index range and the length of the elements.

+CPBR: (1-80),20,14

OK

Note: 80 locations (from 1 to 80), max length of 20 for the

phone number, 14 characters max for the text.

AT+CPBR=1,80

Note: Read all entries (only the set ones are returned).

+CPBR: 1,"0346572834",129,"Dolores

Claiborne"

+CPBR: 2,"1284374523",129,"Thad

Beaumont"

+CPBR: 3, "1243657845",129,"John

Panborn"

OK

2.6.2. Example 2: Erase or Write a Phonebook Entry

Command Response

AT+CPBW=?

Note: Get the phonebook type.

+CPBW: (1-80),20,(129,145),14

OK

Note: 80 locations, max length of 20 for the phone number,

TON/NPI of 129 or 145 and 14 characters max for the text.

AT+CPBW=3

Note: Erase location 3

OK

AT+CPBW=3,"4356729012",129,"Carry"

Note: Write at location 3.

OK

AT+CPBR=1,80

Note: Read all entries (only the ones set are returned).

+CPBR:1,"0346572834",129,"Dolores

Claiborne"

+CPBR:2,"1284374523",129,"Thad Beaumont"

+CPBR: 3,"4356729012",129,"Carry"

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 29

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

2.6.3. Example 3: Find Phonebook Entries

Command Response

AT+CPBF=?

Note: Get the phonebook type.

+CPBF: 20,14

OK

Note: Max length of 20 for the phone number, 10 characters

for the text.

AT+CPBF="D"

Note: Read entries starting with "D".

+CPBF: 1,"0346572834",129,"Dolores

Clairborne"

OK

AT+CPBF="W"

Note: Read entries with "W".

+CME ERROR: 22

Note: Entry not found.

2.6.4. Example 4: Phonebook and Custom Character Set

The Custom To Extended GSM conversion table and the Extended GSM To Custom conversion table

can be used to display the extended GSM characters:

| ^ € { } [ ] ~ \

To manage one of these extended characters, the character 0x1B must be set in the right place (in

the position corresponding to the value of the ASCII code) in the Custom to GSM conversion table

(instead of 0x20 (space ASCII code)).

For example, the ASCII code of \ (backslash) is 0x5C, the character 0x1B must be set at the position

0x5C of the Custom to GSM conversion table. The range of character 0x5C in this table is 92. So to

update the table the command AT+WCCS=1,0,92 will be used.

In the other way, write the space ASCII code 0x20 in the right place in the Custom to GSM conversion

table if an extended character is not needed.

Command Response

AT+CPBS?

Note: Query the current phonebook

+CPBS: 3,80

OK

Note: ADN selected, 3 entries stored

AT+WPCS?

Note: Query the current phonebook char set

+WPCS: "TRANSPARENT"

OK

Note: Transparent mode selected

AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR: 1,"0146290800",129,"S

bastien"

OK

Note: GSM character "้" is not displayed

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 30

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Command Response

AT+WCCS=1,0,0,255

>202020202020202020200A20200D202020202020205F20

202020202020202020202122230225262728292A2B2C2D2

E2F303132333435363738393A3B3C3D3E3F004142434445

464748494A4B4C4D4E4F505152535455565758595A20202

02011206162636465666768696A6B6C6D6E6F7071727374

75767778797A20202020202020202020202020202020202

02020202027272020202020202020202020202020402001

2403205F20202020202D202020202020272020202020202

020202060414141415B0E1C09451F454549494949445D4F

4F4F4F5C200B5555555E59201E7F6161617B0F1D6304056

56507696969207D086F6F6F7C200C0675757E792079

OK

AT+WCCS=1,1,0,127

>40A324A5E8E9F9ECF2C70AD8F80DC5E5205F2020202020

2020202020C6E6DFC920212223A425262728292A2B2C2D2

E2F303132333435363738393A3B3C3D3E3FA14142434445

464748494A4B4C4D4E4F505152535455565758595AC4D6D

1DCA7BF6162636465666768696A6B6C6D6E6F7071727374

75767778797AE4F6F1FCE0

Note: Set the custom character set tables to enable a GSM to default

font conversion

OK

AT+WPCS="CUSTOM"

Note: Use the custom character set

OK

AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR:

1,"0146290800",129,"S้bastien"

OK

Note: GSM character "้" is correctly displayed

2.6.5. Example 5: Use the Extended Phonebook

Command Response

AT+WCOS? +WCOS: 0

OK

Note: Phonebook not extended

AT+CPBS? +CPBS: "SM",10,20

OK

Note: Selected phonebook: ADN

AT+CPBW=1,"0123456",,"test" OK

Note: Write an entry in SIM

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 31

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Command Response

AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR: 1,"0123456",129,"test"

OK

Note: Read an entry in SIM

AT+CPBW=1,"0123456",,"test",1 +CME ERROR: 3

Note: +WCOS=0; you can’t write a phonebook

group

AT+WCOS=1 OK

Note: Phonebook extended in SIM

AT+CPBW=1,"0123456",,"test",1 OK

Note: Write an entry in SIM

AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR: 1, "0123456", 129, "test",

1

OK

Note: Read an entry in SIM (extended)

AT+WCOS=0 OK

AT+WCOS? +WCOS: 0

OK

Note: Phonebook not extended

AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR: 1,"0123456",129,"test"

OK

Note: Read an entry in SIM (not extended)

AT+CPBS="ME" OK

Note: Selected phonebook: ME (Flash)

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 32

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Command Response

AT+WCOS=1 OK

Note: Phonebook extended

AT+CPBW=1, "+331290909", 145, "Fred",

"0141284549", 129, "0600003210", 129,

"0141280000", 129, "019876543210", 129,

"fred@mywebaddress.com", "Becker Street

London",1

OK

Note: Write an entry in Flash

AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR: 1, "+331290909",

145,"Fred", "0141284549", 129,

"0600003210", 129, "0141280000",

129, "019876543210", 129,

"fred@mywebaddress.com", "Becker

Street London",1

OK

AT+WCOS=0 OK

AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR: 13,"+331290909",145,"Fred"

OK

Note: Read an entry in Flash (not extended)

To use the extended ME phonebook, you must do:

AT+CPBS="ME"

AT+WCOS=1

To use the extended ADN phonebook, you must do:

AT+CPBS="SM"

AT+WCOS=1

To use the not extended phonebook, you must do:

AT+WCOS=0

2.6.6. Example 6: Phonebook and Custom Character Set

Command Response

AT+CPBS?

Note: Query the current phonebook

+CPBS: 3,80

OK

Note: ADN selected, 3 entries stored

AT+WPCS?

Note: Query for the current phonebook character set

+WPCS: "TRANSPARENT"

OK

Note: Transparent mode selected

AT+CPBW=1,"0146290800",129,"test of { }"

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 33

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Command Response

AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR: 1,"0146290800",129," test

of "

OK

Note: GSM characters "{"and "}" are not displayed

AT+WCCS=1,0,0,255<CR>

>202020202020202020200A20200D202020202020205F20

202020202020202020202122230225262728292A2B2C2D2

E2F303132333435363738393A3B3C3D3E3F004142434445

464748494A4B4C4D4E4F505152535455565758595A1B1B1

B1B11206162636465666768696A6B6C6D6E6F7071727374

75767778797A1B1B1B1B201B20202020202020202020202

02020202027272020202020202020202020202020402001

2403205F20202020202D202020202020272020202020202

020202060414141415B0E1C09451F454549494949445D4F

4F4F4F5C200B5555555E59201E7F6161617B0F1D6304056

56507696969207D086F6F6F7C200C0675757E792079

<CTRL-Z>

OK

AT+WCCS=1,1,0,127<CR>

>40A324A5E8E9F9ECF2C70AD8F80DC5E5205F2020202020

2020202020C6E6DFC920212223A425262728292A2B2C2D2

E2F303132333435363738393A3B3C3D3E3FA14142434445

464748494A4B4C4D4E4F505152535455565758595AC4D6D

1DCA7BF6162636465666768696A6B6C6D6E6F7071727374

75767778797AE4F6F1FCE0

<CTRL-Z>

Note: Set the custom character set tables to enable a GSM to default

font conversion

OK

AT+WPCS="CUSTOM"

Note: Use the custom character set

OK

AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR: 1,"0146290800",129," test

of { }"

OK

Note: GSM characters "{" and "}" are correctly

displayed

2.6.7. Example 7: MT Phonebook (read only)

Command Response

AT+CPBS="MT" OK

Note: Select MT phonebook

AT+WCOS=1

Note: Select extended entries

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 34

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Command Response

AT+CPBF=""

Note: Read all entries

+CPBF: 1,"0987654321",129," Carry",0

+CPBF: 2;"9876543210",129,"John",0

+CPBF: 31,"0346572834",129,"Dolores

Claiborne","9876543210",129,"",,"",,"654789123

0",129, "dolores@mywebaddress.com"," Becker

Street London",0

+CPBF: 32, "6547892012", 129, "Pierre", "",

,"",,"9874521021",129,"",,,"Pierre@mywebaddres

s.com", "",0

OK

AT+WCOS=0

Note: Select extended entries: not extended

OK

AT+CPBF=""

Note: Read all entries

+CPBF: 1,"0987654321",129," Carry"

+CPBF: 2;"9876543210",129,"John"

+CPBF: 31,"0346572834",129,"Dolores Claiborne"

+CPBF: 32,"6547892012",129,"Pierre"

OK

Index: 1 and 2 􀃆 SM phonebook entries

Index: 31 and 32 􀃆 ME phonebook entries

2.7. Examples about Short Messages

2.7.1. Send a Short Message

AT+CNMI=0,1,1,1,0 SMS-DELIVERs are directly stored, SMS-STATUS- REPORTs are displayed

OK

AT+CSMP=17,169,0,0 SMS-SUBMIT message with a validity period (one day)

OK

AT+CMGF=1 Text mode to send a Short Message

OK

AT+CSCA="+33608080706" Set Service Center Address to +33608080706

OK

AT+CMGS=0601290800 Send a SMS-SUBMIT to mobile phone

Product sends a 4 characters sequence: 0x0D 0x0A 0x3E 0x20

This is the first text line Edit first line and press carriage return (<CR>, 0x0D)

This is the last text line Edit last line and send message by pressing <ctrl-Z> (0x1A)

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 35

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

+CMGS: 5 Success: message reference 5 is returned from the SMS Service Center

+CDS: 2,5,"0601290800",129,"99/05/01 14:15:10+04"

Success: report of successful message delivery received

2.7.2. Read Short Messages

AT+CMGF=1 Text mode to read Short Messages

AT+CMGL="ALL" List all stored messages

+CMGL: 1,"REC READ","+336290918",,"99/05/01 14:15:10+04"

I will be late This is the first message

+CMGL: 2,"REC UNREAD","+336290918",,"99/05/01 14:19:44+04"

Traffic jam on Broadway This is the second message

OK

AT+CMGR=1 " " Read the first message

+CMGR: "REC READ","+336290918",,"99/05/01 14:19:44+04"

OK

2.8. Examples about Fax Class 2

2.8.1. Send a Fax Class 2

AT+FCLASS=2 Select fax class 2

OK

AT+FLID="LocalFax"

OK

ATD0601234567 Call establishment

+FCON Connection OK

[+FCSI: "RemoteFax"]

+FDIS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0

OK

AT+FDT Beginning of the data transfer

+FDCS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0

CONNECT

<0x11h> Send carrier

First page data terminated by <0x10h><0x03h>

OK Page transmitted

AT+FET=0 Send another page

+FPTS:1 First page acquitted

OK

AT+FDT

CONNECT

<0x11h> Send carrier

Second page data terminated by <0x10h><0x03h>

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 36

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

OK Page transmitted

AT+FET=2 No more page

+FPTS:1 First page acknowledged

+FHNG:0 Normal end of connection

OK

2.8.2. Receive a Fax Class 2

AT+FCR=1

OK

AT+FLID="LocalFax"

OK

RING Incoming call

ATA Answer

+FCON Connection OK

[+FTSI: "RemoteFax"]

+FDCS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0

OK

AT+FDR

+FCFR

+FDCS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0

CONNECT

<0x12h> Receive page carrier

First page data terminated by

<0x10h><0x03h>

OK Page received

+FPTS:1 First page acknowledged

+FET:0 To receive another page

OK

AT+FDR

+FDCS:0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0

CONNECT

<0x12h> Receive page carrier

Second page data terminated by

<0x10h><0x03h>

OK Page received

+FPTS:1 Second page acknowledged

+FET:2 No more page to receive

OK

AT+FDR

+FHNG:0 Normal end of connection

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 37

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

2.9. +CSIM and +CRSM Examples

Note: if SIM answer is not specified in the following examples, it will mean that the answer will depend on

the SIM content.

2.9.1. DF GSM Selection and then Status

AT+CSIM=14,"A0A40000027F20"

+CSIM=4,"9F16"

OK

AT+CSIM=10,"A0F2000016"

+CSIM=48,"…"

OK

2.9.2. DF Telecom Selection and then Status

AT+CSIM=14,"A0A40000027F10"

+CSIM=4,"9F16"

OK

AT+CSIM=10,"A0F2000016"

+CSIM=48,"…"

OK

2.9.3. EF ADN Selection and then Status

DF Telecom selection is mandatory just before the following AT commands.

AT+CSIM=14,"A0A40000026F3A"

+CSIM=4,"9F0F"

OK

AT+CSIM=10,"A0C000000F"

+CSIM=34,"…"

OK

2.9.4. Status Commands

Status – No File Id – without P1,P2, P3

AT+CRSM=242

Status – 6F3A (EF ADN) – without P1, P2, P3

AT+CRSM=242,28474

Status – 6F07 (EF IMSI) – without P1, P2, P3

AT+CRSM=242,28423

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 38

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Status – 3F00 (MF) – without P1, P2, P3

AT+CRSM=242,16128

Status – 7F10 (DF Telecom) – without P1, P2, P3

AT+CRSM=242,32528

Status – 7F20 (DF GSM) – without P1, P2, P3

AT+CRSM=242,32544

2.9.5. Get Response Commands

Get Response – (EF ADN) – without P1, P2, P3

AT+CRSM=192,28474

Get Response – (EF IMSI) – without P1, P2, P3

AT+CRSM=192, 28423

Get Response – (MF) – without P1, P2, P3

AT+CRSM=192,16128

Get Response – (DF Telecom) – without P1, P2, P3

AT+CRSM=192,32528

Get Response – (DF GSM) – without P1, P2, P3

AT+CRSM=192,32544

Get Response – 6F07 (EF IMSI)

AT+CRSM=192, 28423,0,0,15

2.9.6. Read Record Commands

Read Record – EF ADN (Pin Code validated)

AT+CRSM=178,28474,1,4,28

2.10. + WBHV Examples

2.10.1. Restart the embedded module

AT+CFUN=1

OK

2.10.2. Interrogate embedded module Configuration

AT+WBHV?

+WBHV: 0,0

+WBHV: 1,0

+WBHV: 2,0

+WBHV: 3,0,0

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 39

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

2.10.3. Activate ENS Feature

There is no STK session open yet.

AT+WBHV=3,1

+CME ERROR: 3

2.10.4. Open a STK Session

AT+STSF=2,"5FFFFFFF7F"

OK

AT+STSF=1

OK

2.10.5. Activate ENS Feature

AT+WBHV=3,1

OK

AT+WBHV=3

+WBHV: 3,1,1 // Embedded module reset is needed

OK

2.10.6. Restart the embedded module and Interrogate ENS

Feature Mode

AT+CFUN=1

OK

AT+WBHV=3

+WBHV: 3,1,0

OK

2.10.7. Deactivate ENS Feature

AT+WBHV=3,0

OK

AT+WBHV=3

+WBHV: 3,0,1 // Embedded module reset is needed

OK

2.10.8. Restart the Embedded module and Interrogate

embedded module ENS Feature Mode

AT+CFUN=1

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 40

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

AT+WBHV=3

+WBHV: 3,0,0 // Embedded module reset is not needed

OK

2.10.9. Activate and Deactivate the Feature

AT+WBHV=3,1

OK

AT+WBHV=3

+WBHV: 3,1,1 // Embedded module reset is needed

OK

AT+WBHV=3,0

OK

AT+WBHV=3

+WBHV: 3,0,0 // Embedded module reset is not needed

OK

2.10.10. Restore Factory Settings

Case 1: ENS feature is already deactivated

AT+WBHV=3

+WBHV: 3,0,0 // Embedded module reset is not needed

OK

AT&F

OK

AT+WBHV=3

+WBHV: 3,0,0 // Embedded module reset is not needed

OK

Activate the ENS feature

AT+WBHV=3,1

OK

AT+WBHV=3

+WBHV: 3,1,1 // Embedded module reset is needed

OK

AT&F // restore the factory settings again

OK

AT+WBHV=3

+WBHV: 3,0,0 // Embedded module reset is not needed for the new setting

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 41

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Case 2: ENS feature is already activated

AT+WBHV=3

+WBHV: 3,1,0 // Embedded module reset is not needed

OK

AT&F

OK

AT+WBHV=3

+WBHV: 3,0,1 // Embedded module reset is needed for the new setting

OK // since the ENS feature mode before AT&F is ‘1’

2.11. +WDSI Examples

2.11.1. No user agreement, no job on server, no error

AT+WDSS=1,1

OK

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

2.11.2. No user agreement, bad authentication

AT+WDSS=1,1

OK

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 5

+WDSI: 7

2.11.3. No user agreement, bad server URL

AT+WDSS=1,1

OK

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 7

AT+WDSE

+WDSE: 404

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 42

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

2.11.4. No user agreement, server error during the

session

AT+WDSS=1,1

OK

+WDSI: 4

[+WDSI: 6]

[+WDSI: 9]

+WDSI: 7

AT+WDSE

+WDSE: 500

OK

2.11.5. No user agreement, package download, no DOTA

pre-emption

AT+WDSS=1,1

OK

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

+WDSI: 9,<size>

+WDSI: 18

[+WDSI: 18,"1%"]

…

+WDSI: 18,"100%"

+WDSI: 10

2.11.6. No user agreement, download failure, no DOTA

pre-emption

AT+WDSS=1,1

OK

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

+WDSI: 9,<size>

+WDSI: 18

[+WDSI: 18,"1%]

…

+WDSI: 11

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 43

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

+WDSI: 4 (reconnection to the server to send the status)

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

2.11.7. No user agreement, not enough space to store

package

AT+WDSS=1,1

OK

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

+WDSI: 11 (No +WDSI: 9)

+WDSI: 4 (reconnection to the server to send the status)

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

2.11.8. User agreement for connection, no job on server

+WDSI: 1

AT+WDSR=1

OK

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

2.11.9. User agreement for download, no DOTA preemption

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

+WDSI: 9,<size>

+WDSI: 2

AT+WDSR=3

OK

+WDSI: 18

[+WDSI: 18,"1%"]

…

+WDSI: 18,"100%"

+WDSI: 10

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 44

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

2.11.10. User agreement for install, valid package

+WDSI: 3

AT+WDSR=4

OK

+WDSI: 12

+WDSI: 14

Reset

+WDSI: 16

2.11.11. No user agreement, download and install, valid

package, no DTOA pre-emption

AT+WDSS=1,1

OK

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

+WDSI: 9,<size>

+WDSI: 18

[+WDSI: 18,"1%"]

…

+WDSI: 18,"100%"

+WDSI: 10

+WDSI: 12

+WDSI: 14

Reset

+WDSI: 16

2.11.12. User agreement for download and install, invalid

package (bad signature), no DOTA pre-emption

AT+WDSS=1,1

OK

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

+WDSI: 9,<size>

+WDSI: 2

AT+WDSR=3

[+WDSI: 18,"1%"]

…

+WDSI: 18,"100%"

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 45

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

+WDSI: 10

+WDSI: 3

AT+WDSR=4

OK

+WDSI: 13

2.11.13. No user agreement, download and install, invalid

package (bad signature), no DOTA pre-emption

AT+WDSS=1,1

OK

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

+WDSI: 9,<size>

+WDSI: 18

[+WDSI: 18,"1%"]

…

+WDSI: 18,"100%"

+WDSI: 10

+WDSI: 13

2.11.14. Recovery

+WDSI: 8

+WDSI: 12

+WDSI: 14

Reset

+WDSI: 17,0

2.11.15. No user agreement, package download, install,

DOTA pre-emption, no reverse patch

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

+WDSI: 19,1 (one sector was pre-empted)

+WDSI: 9,<size>

+WDSI: 18

[+WDSI: 18,"1%"]

…

+WDSI: 18,"100%"

+WDSI: 10

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 46

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

+WDSI: 12

+WDSI: 14

Reset

+WDSI: 16

+WDSI: 19

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

2.11.16. No user agreement, package download, install,

DOTA pre-emption, reverse patch

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

+WDSI: 19,1 (one sector was pre-empted)

+WDSI: 9,<size>

+WDSI: 18

[+WDSI: 18,"1%"]

…

+WDSI: 18,"100%"

+WDSI: 10

+WDSI: 12

+WDSI: 14

Reset

+WDSI: 16

+WDSI: 19,1 (reverse patch, so the package is kept in flash)

+WDSI: 4

+WDSI: 6

+WDSI: 8

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 47

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

2.12. Full AT GPRS Commands Examples

2.12.1. Activation of an IP PDP Context

• Example 1:

AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet";+CGDCONT=2,"IP","abc.com"

OK

ATD*99***1#

CONNECT

• Example 2:

AT+CGCLASS="CG"

OK

+CGREG: 1

AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet"

OK

AT+CGQREQ=1,1,4,5,2,14

OK

AT+CGQMIN=1,1,4,5,2,14

OK

AT+CGATT=1

OK

AT+CGACT=1,1

OK

Note: +CGDATA: the goal of this command is the same as ATD*99***

AT +CGDATA=1

CONNECT

…….

Data transfer

…….

+CGEV: NW DETACH

2.12.2. Network Request

AT+CGAUTO=0

OK

+CRING: GPRS "IP", "211.45.89.152"

AT+CGANS=1

CONNECT

…….Data transfer

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 48

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

2.12.3. 3G Quality of Service Profile (Requested)

+CGEQREQ - Example

Test command

AT+CGEQREQ=?

+CGEQREQ: "IP",(0-4),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-

2),(0,10-

1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2"

,"1E2","5E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-3),(0,10-4000),(0-3)

+CGEQREQ: "PPP",(0-4),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-

2),(0,10-

1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2"

,"1E2","5E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-3),(0,10-4000),(0-3)

OK

Define primary PDP contexts #1 and #2

AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet";+CGDCONT=2,"IP","abc.com"

OK

Ask for 3G QoS Profiles

AT+CGEQREQ?

+CGEQREQ: 1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

+CGEQREQ: 2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

Specifies a 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1

AT+CGEQREQ=1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

Ask for QoS Profiles

AT+CGEQREQ?

+CGEQREQ: 1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

+CGEQREQ: 2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

Undefined 3G Qos profile for PDP context #1

AT+CGEQREQ=1

OK

Ask for 3G QoS Profiles

AT+CGEQREQ?

+CGEQREQ: 1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

+CGEQREQ: 2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 49

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Specifies a 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1

AT+CGEQREQ=1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

Ask for 3G QoS Profiles

AT+CGEQREQ?

+CGEQREQ: 1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

+CGEQREQ: 2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

Specifies a 3G QoS profile for PDP context #3 which is not defined yet

AT+CGEQREQ=3,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

+CME ERROR: 3

2.12.4. 3G Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)

+CGEQMIN - Example

Define primary PDP contexts #1 and #2

AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet";+CGDCONT=2,"IP","abc.com"

OK

Test command

AT+CGEQMIN=?

+CGEQMIN "IP",(0-4),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-

2),(0,10-

1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2"

,"1E2","5E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-3),(0,10-4000),(0-3)

+CGEQMIN: "PPP",(0-4),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-384,65535),(0-

2),(0,10-

1500,1502,1510,1520),("0E0","1E1","1E2","7E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6"),("0E0","5E2"

,"1E2","5E3","4E3","1E3","1E4","1E5","1E6","6E8"),(0-3),(0,10-4000),(0-3)

OK

Ask for minimum 3G QoS Profiles

AT+CGEQMIN?

+CGEQMIN: 1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

+CGEQMIN: 2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

Specifies a minimum 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1.

AT+CGEQMIN=1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 50

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Specifies a minimum 3G QoS profile for PDP context #3 where #3 is not defined yet.

AT+CGEQMIN=3,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

+CME ERROR: 3

Ask for 3G QoS Profiles

AT+CGEQMIN?

+CGEQMIN: 1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

+CGEQMIN: 2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

Undefined the minimum 3G Qos profile for PDP context #1

AT+CGQMIN=1

OK

Ask for the minimum 3G QoS Profiles

AT+CGEQMIN?

+CGEQMIN: 1,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

+CGEQMIN: 2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

Specifies a minimum 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1

AT+CGEQMIN=1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

Ask for the minimum 3G QoS Profiles

AT+CGEQMIN?

+CGEQMIN: 1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

+CGEQMIN: 2,4,0,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

2.12.5. 3G Quality of Service Profile (Negotiated)

+CGEQNEG - Example

Example:

Define primary PDP contexts #1 and #2

AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet";+CGDCONT=2,"IP","abc.com"

OK

Ask for 3G QoS Profiles

AT+CGEQREQ?

+CGEQREQ: 1,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

+CGEQREQ: 2,3,32,0,0,0,2,0,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 51

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Specifies a 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1

AT+CGEQREQ=1,3,0,128,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

Specifies a minimum 3G QoS profile for PDP context #1

AT+CGEQMIN=1,3,64,64,0,0,2,1500,"0E0","0E0",3,0,0

OK

Activate PDP context #1

AT+CGACT=1,1

OK

AT+CGACT?

+CGACT=1,1

OK

Test for the negotiated 3G QoS profile

AT+CGEQNEG=?

+CGEQNEG: (1)

OK

Ask for the negotiated 3G QoS profile

AT+CGEQNEG=1

+CGEQNEG: 1,3,128,128,64,64,1,1500,"5E3","1E5",2,150,2

OK

Ask for the negotiated 3G QoS profile

AT+CGEQNEG=2 // Inactivated PDP context #2

OK

AT+CGEQNEG=3 // Undefined PDP context #3

+CME ERROR: 3

AT+CGEQNEG=1,2 // PDP context #1 is activated but #2 is not activated

+CGEQNEG: 1,3,128,128,64,64,1,1500,"5E3","1E5",2,150,2

OK

AT+CGEQNEG=1,3 // PDP context #1 is activated but #3 is not defined

+CME ERROR: 3

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 52

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

2.13. Unit test cases for AT +WOPEN=7 mode

• No application binary

AT+WOPEN=0

OK

AT+WOPEN=4

OK

AT+WOPEN=1

OK

AT+WOPEN?

+WOPEN: 1

OK

AT+WOPEN=7

+WOPEN: 7,1

OK

Download a corrupted binary (write a random byte somewhere in the binary before the download,

thanks to a hexadecimal editor)

AT+WDWL

+WDWL:0

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

OK

AT+WOPEN=1

OK

AT+WOPEN?

+WOPEN: 1

OK

AT+WOPEN=7

+WOPEN: 7,2

OK

Download a binary with corrupted header (write a random byte in the binary header (in the first 8

bytes) before the download, thanks to an hexadecimal editor)

AT+WDWL

+WDWL:0

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

OK

AT+WOPEN=1

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 53

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

AT+WOPEN?

+WOPEN: 1

OK

AT+WOPEN=7

+WOPEN: 7,3

OK

Download a binary with wrong version (modify the version in the header before the download, thanks

to an hexadecimal editor)

AT+WOPEN=1

OK

AT+WDWL

+WDWL:0

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

OK

AT+WOPEN?

+WOPEN: 1

OK

AT+WOPEN=7

+WOPEN: 7,4

OK

Download a binary with too many tasks (use a Basic application which required more than three

tasks)

AT+WDWL

+WDWL:0

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

OK

AT+WOPEN=1

OK

AT+WOPEN?

+WOPEN: 1

OK

AT+WOPEN=7

+WOPEN: 7,5

OK

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 54

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Download a binary requiring too many RAM (use an application which requires a call stack of

256KBytes)

AT+WDWL

+WDWL:0

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

OK

AT+WOPEN=1

OK

AT+WOPEN?

+WOPEN: 1

OK

AT+WOPEN=7

+WOPEN: 7,9

OK

2.14. Unit test cases for AT + WOPEN=8 mode

• Without application binary

AT+WOPEN=0

OK

AT+WOPEN=4

OK

AT+WOPEN=1

OK

AT+WOPEN?

+WOPEN: 1

OK

AT+WOPEN=7

+WOPEN: 7,1

OK

Download a corrupted binary (write a random byte somewhere in the binary before the download,

thanks to an hexadecimal editor)

AT+WDWL

+WDWL:0

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

OK

AT+WOPEN=8,0,0,0

+WOPEN: 8,0,0,0

OK

AT+WOPEN=8

+WOPEN: 8,0,0,0

OK

AT+CFUN=1

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 55

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

OK

(Press any key, embedded module starts normally)

• With application binary

AT+WOPEN=1

OK

AT+WOPEN?

+WOPEN:1

OK

AT+WOPEN=7

+WOPEN: 7,2

OK

Download a binary with corrupted header (write a random byte in the binary header (in the first 8

bytes) before the download, thanks to an hexadecimal editor)

AT+WDWL

+WDWL: 0

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

OK

AT+WOPEN=1

OK

AT+WOPEN?

+WOPEN: 1

OK

AT+WOPEN=7

+WOPEN: 7,3

OK

Download a binary with wrong version (modify the version in the header before the download, thanks

to an hexadecimal editor)

AT+WOPEN=1

OK

AT+WDWL

+WDWL: 0

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

OK

AT+WOPEN?

+WOPEN: 1

OK

AT+WOPEN=7

+WOPEN: 7,4

OK

Download a binary with too many tasks (use a Basic application which required more than three

tasks)

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 56

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

AT+WDWL

+WDWL: 0

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

OK

AT+WOPEN= 1

OK

AT+WOPEN?

+WOPEN: 1

OK

AT+WOPEN=7

+WOPEN: 7,5

OK

Download a binary requiring too many RAM (use an application which requires a call stack of

256KBytes)

AT+WDWL

+WDWL:0

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

OK

AT+WOPEN=1

OK

AT+WOPEN?

+WOPEN: 1

OK

AT+WOPEN=7

+WOPEN: 7,9

OK

AT+WOPEN=8

+WOPEN: 8,0,0,0

AT+WOPEN=8,0,0,0

OK

AT+CFUN=1

(Press any key, embedded module and Open ATapplication start normally)

• With application binary

AT+WOPEN=1

OK

AT+WOPEN=8,1,10,12

OK

AT+WOPEN=8

+WOPEN: 8,1,10,12

OK

Press the keys 10 and 12, nothing occurs

AT+CFUN=1

Examples

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 57

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

OK

Press any key except key 10 and 12, embedded module and Open ATapplication start normally

AT+CFUN=1

OK

Press only the key 10 or 12, embedded module start and Open ATapplication start normally

AT+CFUN=1

OK

Press the keys 10 and 12, embedded module starts but Open ATapplication does not start

AT+WOPEN=7

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 58

3. Technical Appendixes

3.1. Working Modes

3.1.1. Working Mode Description

Embedded module can work in different modes. Each one is characterized by:

• power consumption,

• Open ATpower processing,

• feature availability.

3.1.1.1. ACTIVE mode

In ACTIVE mode, the embedded module is fully powered and all services are available.

There are two varieties of ACTIVE mode status based on the GSM stack as described below.

3.1.1.1.1. ACTIVE mode with GSM stack in idle

This is the default mode for the embedded module. To switch the embedded module to this mode

use "AT+WBHV=1,0" command. The embedded module must be restarted in order to take the new

behavior into account.

No features are restricted in this mode.

3.1.1.1.2. ACTIVE mode with GSM stack turned off

In this mode, the SIM device and GSM/GPRS features (like GSM voice or data call, SMS, GPRS data

transfer) are not available. The embedded application is running and the serial port remains active,

meaning AT commands are available. If any data has to be transmitted over the network, this mode

has to be turned off.

To switch the embedded module to this mode use "AT+WBHV=1,1" command. The embedded

module must be restarted in order to take the new behavior into account.

To disable this mode, use the "AT+WBHV=1,0" command and restart the embedded module. To turn

off and on the GSM stack without any reset, use commands AT+CFUN=1,0 and AT+CFUN=0,0.

3.1.1.2. SLEEP mode

In SLEEP mode, the embedded module is fully powered but the internal processor is in sleep state for

a low power consumption mode. The software is suspended, waiting for RTC alarm expiration, TCU

timer expiration, wireless paging (if GSM stack is enabled), external IT, keypad press, UART DTR

drop, or USB resume, removing it from this state.

There are two varieties of SLEEP mode status based on the GSM stack as described below.

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 59

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

3.1.1.2.1. SLEEP mode with GSM stack in idle

This mode is a low power consumption mode. In this mode the embedded module has restricted

access to peripheral interfaces, thereby UARTs, USB, SPIs, I2C, GPIOs, ADCs and Buzzer are not

available.

To enable or disable this mode use AT+W32K command.

The mode activation and deactivation is initiated when the customer device is connected to the serial

interface (DTE). DTR pin must be pulled UP for requesting activation of the SLEEP mode with GSM

stack in idle. To deactivate this mode DTR pin must be pulled DOWN. All details are described in

chapter 3.7 'Specifications of Power down Control mechanism through serial Ports (physical 􀃙

RS232 ports or virtual 􀃙 CMUX ports)'.

When this mode is activated, the embedded module requires 1 to 15 seconds to power down

consumption. In this state, a 32 kHz internal clock is used during the inactivity stage.

Then, the embedded module can automatically wake up on unsolicited events such as:

• GSM paging,

• external interruption,

• key press,

• alarm,

• Open ATtimer expiration.

During the wake up period, the embedded module will have the same characteristic as the ACTIVE

mode with GSM stack in idle in terms of power consumption and Open ATpower processing.

The embedded module automatically switches back to idle state after all Open ATtreatments.

3.1.1.2.2. SLEEP mode with GSM stack turned off

This mode is a low power consumption mode.

In this mode, SIM device and GSM/GPRS features like GSM voice or data call, SMS, GPRS data

transfer are not available. In addition, the embedded module has restricted access to peripheral

interfaces, thereby UARTs, USB, SPIs, I2C, GPIOs, ADCs and Buzzer are not available.

In this mode, the embedded module can automatically wake up on unsolicited events such as:

• external interruption,

• key press,

• alarm,

• Open ATtimer expiration.

During the wake up period, the embedded module has the same characteristics as the ACTIVE mode

in terms of power consumption and Open ATpower processing.

The embedded module automatically switches back to idle state after all Open ATtreatments.

To switch the embedded module to this mode, use "AT+WBHV=1,2" command. The embedded

module must be restarted in order to take the new behavior into account.

To disable this mode, use "AT+WBHV=1,0" command and restart.

3.1.1.3. Alarm mode

This mode is a low power consumption mode. The only feature which is available in this mode is the

alarm wake up. The RTC is powered in the embedded module which can be woke up either on preprogrammed

RTC alarm expiration or on user request (ON/OFF pin out).

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 60

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

To use it, an alarm wake up has to be previously recorded by AT+CALA command before switching to

this mode.

To activate the embedded module in this mode, use the "AT+CPOF" command when the ON/OFF

switch is LOW.

Deactivate this mode by placing the ON/OFF switch to HIGH or after alarm wake up.

3.1.1.4. OFF mode

In OFF mode, nothing is powered in the embedded module, and no service is available.

3.1.2. Working Mode Features

The table below sums up feature availability in each mode.

Features ACTIVE

mode

SLEEP

mode

ALARM

Mode

OFF

Mode

Alarm √ √ √ -

Wake-up Open ATฎ application on timer events √ √ - -

GSM/GPRS paging (alert from the network for incoming

call, incoming SMS or incoming GPRS data)

Yes, if GSM

Stack is not

turned off.

Yes, if GSM

Stack is not

turned off.

- -

SIM - - -

UARTs - - -

USB - - -

SPIs - - -

I2C - - -

GPIO - - -

ADCs - - -

Buzzer - - -

Keypad √ √ - -

External IT √ √ - -

Flash led √ √ - -

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 61

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

3.1.3. Open ATPower Processing Performance

The Open ATpower processing performance is evaluated thanks to a Dhrystone Open AT

application. The source code of this application is extracted from "dhryansi " which is a part of the

samples given in ADS 1.2 release. This Dhrystone algorithm is executed for at least 2 seconds.MIPS

Levels:

CPU Power Level MIPS

CPU@26Mhz 21 MIPS

CPU@104Mhz 87 MIPS

CPU Consumption per Service:

State Consumption of maximum processing power

GSM idle state 2%

GSM call state 15%

GPRS transfer state 18%

For example using the two tables above, an Open ATApplication running on WMP100 embedded

module at 104MHz during a GPRS transfer can consume 87-(18%*87)=71 MIPS.

3.1.4. Power Consumption Performance

For additional power consumption performance, please refer to the embedded module Product

Technical Specification.

3.2. Multiplexing Mode

3.2.1. Description

The AT+CMUX command is used to manage (enable or disable) the 3GPP TS 27.010 multiplexing

protocol control channel. It allows to multiplex up to 4 logical channels on each UART and USB.

Several MUX sessions can be launched on different physical ports at the same time. The client

application may handle, by this mean, up to 12 channels (4 logical multiplexed channels on both

UART and on USB)."

Notes on speed and autobauding:

• The response is returned at the speed of the received AT+CMUX command (prior to entering

<mode>).

• It is recommended that whenever the multiplexer control channel is released, the embedded

module should assume an interface rate for autobauding purposes irrespective of any

previous higher speed having been selected.

• If a +CMUX command is issued whilst in any multiplexer mode then that +CMUX command is

ignored and the embedded module will return an +CME ERROR: <err> response.

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 62

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

3.2.1.1. Restrictions

• Only basic option and UIH framing is supported.

• Only convergence layers type 1 and 3 are supported.

• Autobauding is not compatible with multiplex mode. It is neither possible to start multiplexing

when autobauding is active (AT+IPR=0), nor to set autobauding during multiplex mode, since

the multiplexer uses only a fixed baud rate. In the same way, the bit rate can not be changed

through AT+IPR command while multiplex mode is active. Therefore, AT+IPR=<rate> should

not be used, and will have no effect.

• Before starting multiplexing mode, port speed must be configured by AT+IPR=<rate>

command, to be compliant with defined values for <port _speed> parameter (in the volume 1,

refer to "Multiplexing Mode +CMUX" section, "Parameters and Defined Values" section).

3.2.1.2. Specific Behaviors

• In multiplexing mode, AT configuration commands (as AT+CMEE for example), (see: [2]ง

1.10) will be applied to all logical channels.

• In multiplexing mode, unsolicited result code (see: [2]ง 1.7) will be transmitted to all logical

channels

• AT commands are grouped by classes (SMS, phonebook, GPRS, SIM TOOL KIT, … See [2]

ง3.7.1) and launching an AT command from a port, has for the effect to lock all commands

belonging to the same class.

If another port launches an AT command of the locked class, an +CME ERROR: 536 will

occur as long as the class is not released (at first command’s completion time).

• If Bluetooth is started, it is not possible to start CMUX on UART2.

In the same way, it MUX is started on UART2, it is not possible to start Bluetooth.

• After an at+cfun=1 during a CMUX session, CMUX is automatically restarted by the

embedded module with previous parameters, and all previous opened DLCs are reopened,

with the speed of at+ipr? Command.

• DCD, RI and DTR signals are managed virtually:

When V24 sets DCD,RI or DTR signal, a MSC frame is sent to remote part, to indicate a

virtual state change .Everything is logical, no physical signals are involved.

• +++ Escape Sequence is always possible to get offline.

• Flow control is managed physically or virtually by MSC.

By default, the embedded module manage a hardware flow control on a UART, and this flow

control becomes virtual on logical channels when some DLCs are opened.

• At CMUX session stop, Sierra Wireless embedded module automatically goes back into AT

mode, without having to reset the embedded module.

• A timeout of 5 minutes is implemented for CMUX connection. After this timeout, if no DLC is

opened, the MUX session is closed, and previous physical port is reopened. This timeout

avoids to be blocked into the MUX opening state without any activities."

3.2.2. Results

AT+CMUX=<mode>[,<subset>[,<port_speed>[,<N1>[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>[,<T3>]]]]]]], will respond OK

when parameters are in the range, and number of parameters are in correct syntax.

Note: The 230400 (<port_speed> = 6), 460800 (<port_speed> = 7) and 921600 (<port_speed> = 8) speeds

are added in AT+CMUX=? and AT+CMUX? responses.

The 230400, 460800 and 921600 speeds are added in AT+IPR=? and AT+IPR? responses.

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 63

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

AT+CMUX=<mode>[,<subset>[,<port_speed>[,<N1>[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>[,<T3>]]]]]]], will respond

ERROR when:

ERROR Responses Meaning

+CME ERROR: 3 - Operation not allowed:

Example: Trying to start a MUX session during autobauding.

- Parameters or number of parameters are out of range.

+CME ERROR: 544 CMUX connection Timeout (no answer from the remote) ie no DLC0

opened response.

3.2.3. Execution Conditions

Before reception of errors of ง2.1, AT+CMUX=<mode>[,<subset>

[,<port_speed>[,<N1>[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>[,<T3>]]]]]]] first reply OK.

3.2.4. Power Down Control (Sleep Mode)

CMUX feature is based on ETSI 27.010 specifications that provide Sleep-On/Wake-Up procedure

through 27.010 multiplexing protocol. It suits the description of the serial port sleep mode mechanism

(Please refer to Specifications of Power Down Control mechanism through serial Ports (physical 􀃙

RS232 ports or virtual 􀃙 CMUX ports)

To match sleep mode specifications, Sierra Wireless embedded module handles 27.010 MSC

protocol frames that are dependent of each emulated port (associated to a particular DLCI).

􀃙 Physical signals (such as DTR) of the UART on which it has been activated are not monitored

by Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE).

To cope with Sierra Wireless sleep mode, 27.010 sleep mode procedures are authorized only when

all activated emulated/virtual ports are in Serial Sleep mode state 􀃙 emulated application DTR and

CTS are low on each port, no AT response is to be sent…

CMUX wake-up/sleep-on frames as specified in 27.010 recommendations applies to all activated DLC

since those particular frames (PSC frames) are sent/received over the DLCI 0, which is the control

channel.

3.2.5. Sleep Mode Activation

For all opened DLCI, each connected application on each DLC should set its DTR low in order to

have the Sierra Wireless module sleep.

RX data line (DTE)

Not Clear to Send

Clear to Send

Busy

Ready

CTS (DTE e.g. logical MSC frame sent by the Sierra Wireless module)

DTR (DTE e.g. logical MSC frame through PC MUX driver)

1

2 3

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 64

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

1: The application (DTE) drops DTR to indicate a busy state (a protocol MSC frame is sent by the PC

CMUX driver on the concerned DLCI)

2: Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE) checks if there are any pending AT response to send.

3: When DTR is low and there are no more AT responses, the DCE sets CTS to low.

Once the last opened DLCI detects the DTR drop from the PC application, the CMUX driver starts

sending a 27.010 PSC protocol frame, and waits for its response before allowing the entire system to

go into Sleep Mode state.

Clear to Send

PSC response

PSC frame

Not Clear to Send

TX data line (DTE)

RX data line (DTE)

1

2

3 4

1: All the logical CTS are set high (each connected application can see CTS low)

2: Last CTS drop causes Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE) CMUX driver to send a PSC

frame and to wait for the PSC response.

: Application replies with a PSC response

: All Sierra Wireless embedded module serial virtual ports are in sleep mode state.

3.2.6. Wake Up Procedure

There are two different ways of waking up the embedded module:

3.2.6.1. Wake up by DTE (e.g. desktop PC) wakes up embedded

module with a 27.010 Wake up frame

In order to wake up the embedded module, the client application has to trigger one of its connected

DTR high like the physical scheme.

When wanting to send the DTR MSC protocol frame, the DTE MUST first sends F9F9F9 wake up

frames, waiting for embedded module response, and then sends as a valid frame the DTR on MSC

frame.

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 65

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Otherwise, the embedded module might sleep on again if all DTR are detected low !

TX data line (DTE)

1

2

3

4

RX data line (DTE)

No data

Valid protocol

frame

F9F9F9F9 wake up

frame (order target to

wake up)

F9F9F9F9 wake up frame acknowledgement (inform

Application that target is waken up)

1: DTE sends 27.010 protocol F9F9F9F9 frame to wake up the asleep target.

2: DCE replies with 27.010 F9F9F9F9 wake up frame as acknowledgment and waits for a valid frame.

: DTE sends a valid 27.010 frame in order to have the target stop its acknowledgment.

(It is required that the first valid frame is a MSC frame that raise application DTR)

: DCE stops sending F9F9F9F9 answer after receiving this valid frame.

F9F9F9 protocol wake up frame

F9F9F9 wake up response

DTR on MSC frame

MSC response

Application raises one of the DTR

(or reopen a COM port to make it raised)

Target stops

sending F9F9

flags when

receiving a valid

frame

Target PC MUX driver PC Application

Note: If the valid frame is a DATA frame, the embedded module does not detect any DTR change and

sleeps on again with the PSC frame.

3.2.6.2. Wake up by Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE)

(unsolicited AT response" e.g. "RING" is to be sent)

The embedded module wakes up the DTE with a 27.010 protocol wake up frame first and then sends

its unsolicited indication.

The protocol preliminary wake up sequence is described below:

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 66

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

b

RX data line

1

2

3

4

TX data line

No data

Valid protocol

frame

F9F9F9F9 wake up

frame (order target to

wake up)

F9F9F9F9 wake up frame acknowledgement (inform

Application that target is waken up)

27.010 Test frame

1: DCE sends 27.010 protocol F9F9F9F9 frame to wake up the asleep Application.

2: DTE replies with 27.010 F9F9F9F9 wake up frame as acknowledgment and waits for a valid frame.

: DCE sends a valid 27.010 test frame in order to have the target stop its acknowledgment.

: DTE stops sending F9F9F9F9 answer after receiving the valid frame.

The entire "unsolicited string" wake up sequence and sending is described below:

RX data line

Wake Up

MSC frames "RING"

Wake Up

MSC frames

Sleep On

MSC frames

Sleep On

"RING" MSC frames

DTR (logical MSC frame sent by the DTE

Busy

0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3

0: The DCE is disturbed with an incoming call.

1: DCE starts sending F9F9F9 wake up frame, waiting for its response and sending a valid test frame

(0x4D ,0x55, 0x58, 0x57, 0x41, 0x4B, 0x45, 0x55, 0x50 = MUXWAKEUP ). (Once waken up, the RI is

sent before the RING string in our case)

2: The unsolicited response message is sent.

8 : After the unsolicited response has been sent, the port is in sleep mode again (no more AT

response and DTR low). Then DCE sends PSC to sleep on and waits for its response.

During the preliminary Wake Up sequence, if no F9F9F9 is received within T3 timer, the embedded

module takes the decision to close all the ports assuming that there is no more CMUX driver in the

remote side.

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 67

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

F9F9F9 protocol wake up frame

F9F9F9 wake up response

Valid frame: test frame "MUXWAKEUP"

Test frame response

An unsolicited AT response ("RING") is to be

sent out

SIERRA WIRELESS Module

(DCE) DTE 27.010 driver

DTE Application

(e.g. Hyperterminal on PC)

PC stops sending F9F9F9

when receiving valid frame

UIH frames

DCE sends "RING" unsolicited string

through 27.010

Protocol PSC Sleep On

PSC response

Preliminary

Wake up phase

DCE "unsolicited

response sending"

phase

3.3. Support of SIM ToolKit by the M.E.

The table below indicates the commands of the supported letter classes:

Table 1: Support of SIM Toolkit classes (Not supported)

Letter

classes

Command/function description

a Proactive command: GET READER STATUS

Proactive command: PERFORM CARD APDU

Proactive command: POWER ON CARD

Proactive command: POWER OFF CARD

Event download: Card reader status

b Proactive command: RUN AT COMMAND

c Proactive command: LAUNCH BROWSER

Event download: Browser termination

d Soft key support

e Proactive command: OPEN CHANNEL

Proactive command: CLOSE CHANNEL

Proactive command: RECEIVE DATA

Proactive command: SEND DATA

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 68

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Letter

classes

Command/function description

Proactive command: GET CHANNEL STATUS

Event download: Data available

Event download: Channel status

Table 2: Compatibility between available Terminal Responses and Proactive Commands

Proactive commands

Setup

Menu

Display

Text

Get

Inkey

Get

Input

Setup

Call

Play

Tone

Select

Item

Refresh Send

SS

Send

SMS

Send

USSD

Setup

eventlist

Setup idle

modetext

Send

DTMF

Lang

Notification

Terminal

Reponses

(0) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)

(95) Backward Move • • • •

(96) Command

beyond ME

capabilities

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

(97) ME currently

unable to

process

command

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

(98) No response

from the user

• • • •

(99) SIM session

terminated by

the user

• • • • • • •

3.4. Structure of TERMINAL PROFILE

• First byte (Download):

b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Profile download User choice

SMS-PP data download Set by product to 1

Cell Broadcast data download User choice

Menu selection User choice

‘9E XX’ response code for SIM

data download error

Set by product to 1

Timer expiration Set by product to 0

USSD string data object

supported in Call Control

User choice

Enveloppe Call Control always

sent to the SIM during

automatic redial mode

User choice

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 69

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

• Second byte (Other):

b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Command result User choice

Call Control by SIM User choice

Cell identity included in Call

Control by SIM

User choice

MO short message control by SIM User choice

Handling of the alpha

identifier according to

subclause 9.1.3

User choice

UCS2 Entry supported User choice

UCS2 Display supported User choice

Display of the extension text User choice

• Third byte (Proactive SIM):

b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Proactive SIM: DISPLAY TEXT User choice

Proactive SIM: GET INKEY User choice

Proactive SIM: GET INPUT User choice

Proactive SIM: MORE TIME User choice

Proactive SIM: PLAY TONE User choice

Proactive SIM: POLL INTERVAL Set by product to 1

Proactive SIM: POLLING OFF Set by product to 1

Proactive SIM: REFRESH User choice

• Fourth byte (Proactive SIM):

b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Proactive SIM: SELECT ITEM User choice

Proactive SIM: SEND SHORT

MESSAGE

User choice

Proactive SIM: SEND SS User choice

Proactive SIM: SEND USSD User choice

Proactive SIM: SET UP CALL User choice

Proactive SIM: SET UP MENU User choice

Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL

INFORMATION (MCC, MNC, LAC,

Cell ID & IMEI)

Set by product to 1

Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL

INFORMATION (NMR)

Set by product to 1

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 70

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

• Fifth byte (Event driven information):

b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Proactive SIM: SET UP EVENT LIST Set by product to 1

Event: MT call Set by product to 1

Event: Call connected Set by product to 1

Event: Call disconnected Set by product to 1

Event: Location status Set by product to 1

Event: User activity User choice

Event: Idle screen available User choice

Event: Card reader status Set by product to 0

• Sixth byte: (reserved for Event driven information extensions)

b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Event: Language selection Set by product to 1

Event: Browser Termination Set by product to 0

Event: Data available Set by product to 0

Event: Channel status Set by product to 0

RFU, bit = 0

• Seventh byte (Multiple card proactive commands) for class "a"

b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Proactive SIM: POWER ON CARD Set by product to 0

Proactive SIM: POWER OFF CARD Set by product to 0

Proactive SIM: PERFORM CARD APDU Set by product to 0

Proactive SIM: GET READER STATUS Set by product to 0

RFU, bit = 0

• Eighth byte (Proactive SIM):

b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Proactive SIM: TIMER

MANAGEMENT (start, stop)

Set by product to 1

Proactive SIM: TIMER

MANAGEMENT (get current value)

Set by product to 1

Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL

INFORMATION (date, time and

time zone)

Set by product to 1

Binary choice in GET INKEY User choice

SET UP IDLE MODE TEXT User choice

RUN AT COMMAND (e.g.. class

"b" is supported)

Set by product to 0

2nd alpha identifier in SET UP

CALL

Set by product to 1

2nd capability configuration

parameter (see 9.1.6)

Set by product to 0

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 71

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

• Ninth byte:

b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

Sustained DISPLAY TEXT (see

6.4.1)

Set by product to 0

SEND DTMF command (see 6.4.24) User choice

Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL

INFORMATION - BCCH Channel

List coding as in subclause

12.29)

Set by product to 1

Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL

INFORMATION (language)

Set by product to 1

Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL

INFORMATION (Timing Advance)

Set by product to 1

Proactive SIM: LANGUAGE

NOTIFICATION

User choice

Proactive SIM: LAUNCH BROWSER Set by product to 0

RFU, bit = 0

• Subsequent bytes:

b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1

RFU, bit = 0

Information about BCCH channel list

(This is an extract of GSM Rec.11.14)

Byte(s) Description Length

1 BCCH channel list tag 1

2 Length (X) of bytes following 1

3 to X+2 BCCH channel list X

8 BCCH channel list

Contents: the list of absolute RF channels for BCCH carriers, as known by the ME from the SYSTEM

INFORMATION messages. The BCCH channel list is composed of one to three BCCH channel sub

lists, each sub list is derived from the set of frequencies defined by reference neighbor cells

description information element or elements. In the latter case the set is the union of the different

subsets defined by the neighbor cells description information elements (see TS 3GPP TS 24.008 [8]).

The length of the BCCH channel list field depends on the length of the received BCCH channel list

derived from the different SYSTEM INFORMATION messages to be considered.

Coding: Each ARFCN (Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number) is represented by 10 bits. Spare

bit(s) are to be filled with 0.

Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1

Byte 1 ARFCN#1 (high part)

Byte 2 ARFCN#1 (low part) ARFCN#2 (high part)

Byte 3 ARFCN#2 (low part) ARFCN#3 (high part)

… …

Byte X-1 ARFCN#m-1 (low part) ARFCN#m (high part)

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 72

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1

Byte X ARFCN#m (low part) Spare bit

(0)

Spare

bit(0)

SIM applications should take into account that early implementations of SIM application toolkit may

have coded this field differently, because of an inconsistency between the content and the coding of

this element in previous versions of 11.14. The SIM is able to identify Mes that are using the coding

described above by evaluating the indication "BCCH Channel List coding" in the TERMINAL

PROFILE command.

3.5. Command Type and Next Action Indicator.

This table has been extracted from the GSM Technical specification 11.14.

Value Name Used for Type

of Command

coding

used for Next

Action Indicator

coding

'00' - -

'01' REFRESH X

'02' MORE TIME X

'03' POLL INTERVAL X

'04' POLLING OFF X

'05' SET UP EVENT LIST X

'10' SET UP CALL X X

'11' SEND SS X X

'12' SEND USSD X X

'13' SEND SHORT MESSAGE X X

'14' SEND DTMF X

‘15’ LAUNCH BROWSER class "c" X

'20' PLAY TONE X X

'21' DISPLAY TEXT X X

'22' GET INKEY X X

'23' GET INPUT X X

'24' SELECT ITEM X X

'25' SET UP MENU X X

'26' PROVIDE LOCAL INFORMATION X

'27' TIMER MANAGEMENT X

'28' SET UP IDLE MODEL TEXT X X

'30' PERFORM CARD APDU class "a" X X

'31' POWER ON CARD class "a" X X

'32' POWER OFF CARD class "a" X X

'33' GET READER STATUS class "a" X X

'34' RUN AT COMMAND class "b" X

‘35’ LANGUAGE NOTFIICATION X

‘40’ OPEN CHANNEL class "e" X X

‘41’ CLOSE CHANNEL class "e" X X

‘42’ RECEIVE DATA class "e" X X

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 73

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Value Name Used for Type

of Command

coding

used for Next

Action Indicator

coding

‘43’ SEND DATA class "e" X X

‘44’ GET CHANNEL STATUS class "e" X X

'81' End of the proactive session not applicable X

3.6. Coding of Alpha Fields in the SIM for UCS2

The coding can take one of the three following structures, or GSM default alphabet. If the ME

supports UCS2 coding of alpha fields in the SIM, it will support all three coding schemes for character

sets containing 128 characters or less. For character sets containing more than 128 characters, the

ME will at least support the first coding scheme. Within a record, only one coding scheme, either GSM

default alphabet, or one of the three described below, can be used.

1. If the first byte in the alpha string is ‘0x80’, then the other bytes are 16 bit UCS2 characters.

The most significant byte (MSB) of the UCS2 character is coded in the lower numbered byte of

the alpha field, and the less significant byte (LSB) of the UCS2 character is coded in the higher

numbered alpha field byte. In other words, byte 2 of the alpha field contains the most significant

byte (MSB) of the first UCS2 character, and byte 3 of the alpha field contains the less significant

byte (LSB) of the first UCS2 character (as shown below). Unused bytes shall be set to ‘FF’: if the

alpha field has an even length in bytes, the last (unusable) byte will be set to ‘FF’.

Example 1

Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9

‘80’ Ch1MSB Ch1LSB Ch2MSB Ch2LSB Ch3MSB Ch3LSB ‘FF’ ‘FF’

2. If the first byte of the alpha string is ‘0x81’, then the 2nd byte contains a value indicating the

number of characters in the string. The 3rd byte contains an 8 bit number which defines bits 15 to

8 of a 16 bit base pointer, where bit 16, and bits 7 to 1 would be set to zero. These sixteen bits

represent a base pointer to a "half-page" in the UCS2 code space, to be used with some or all of

the remaining bytes in the string. The 4th and subsequent bytes in the string contain coding as

follows:

• if bit 8 of the byte is set to zero, the remaining bits of the byte contain a GSM Default Alphabet

character

• if bit 8 of the byte is set to one, the remaining bits are an offset value to add to the 16 bit base

pointer defined by byte 3, and the resulting 16 bit value is a UCS2 code point, and defines a

UCS2 character.

Example 2

Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9

‘81’ ‘05’ ‘13’ ‘53’ ‘95’ ‘A6’ ‘28’ ‘FF’ ‘FF’

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 74

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

In the example above

• Byte 2 indicates there are 5 characters in the string

• Byte 3 indicates bits 15 to 8 of the base pointer, and indicates a bit pattern of

0hhh shah h000 0000 as the 16 bit base pointer number. Bengali characters for example start

at code position 0980 (0000 1001 1000 0000), which is indicated by the coding ‘13’ in byte 3

(shown by the italicized underlined digits).

• Byte 4 indicates GSM Default Alphabet character ‘53’, e.g.. "S".

• Byte 5 indicates a UCS2 character offset to the base pointer of ‘15’, expressed in binary as

follows 001 0101, which, when added to the base pointer value results in a sixteen bit value of

0000 1001 1001 0101, e.g.. ‘0995’, which is the Bengali letter KA.

• Byte 8 contains the value ‘FF’: as the string length is 5, this a valid character in the string,

where the bit pattern 111 1111 is added to the base pointer, yielding to a sixteen bit value of

0000 1001 1111 1111 for the UCS2 character (that is ‘09FF’).

• Byte 9 contains the padding value OxFF.

3. If the first byte of the alpha string is set to ‘0x82’, then the 2nd byte contains the length of the

string (number of characters).The 3rd and 4th bytes contain a 16 bit number which defines the

complete 16 bit base pointer to a "half-page" in the UCS2 code space, for use with some or all of

the remaining bytes in the string. The 5th and subsequent bytes in the string contain coding as

follows:

• if bit 8 of the byte is set to zero, the remaining seven bits of the byte contain a GSM Default

Alphabet character,

• if bit 8 of the byte is set to one, the remaining seven bits are an offset value added to the base

pointer defined in bytes 3 and 4, and the resulting 16 bit value is a UCS2 code point, and

defines a UCS2 character.

Example 3

Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9

‘82’ ‘05’ ‘05’ ‘30’ ‘2D’ ‘82’ ‘D3’ ‘2D’ ‘31’

In the example above:

• Byte 2 indicates there are 5 characters in the string

• Bytes 3 and 4 contain a 16 bit base pointer number of ‘0530’, pointing to the first character of

the Armenian character set.

• Byte 5 contains a GSM Default Alphabet character of ‘2D’, which is a dash "-".

• Byte 6 contains a value ‘82’, which indicates it is an offset of ‘02’ added to the base pointer,

resulting in a UCS2 character code of ‘0532’, which represents Armenian character Capital

BEN.

• Byte 7 contains a value ‘D3’, an offset of ‘53’, which when added to the base pointer results in

a UCS2 code point of ‘0583’, representing Armenian Character small PIWR.

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 75

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

3.7. Specifications of Power Down Control

mechanism through serial Ports (physical 􀃙

RS232 ports or virtual 􀃙 CMUX ports)

3.7.1. What is new on X55 and further software releases

V24 Sleep mode and Sierra Wireless 32K mode used to be a one and only functionality. Since v24

now supports several ports (physical or virtual), Sierra Wireless products are allowed to enter 32K low

consumption mode only when all of these ports are individually ready to enter such a mode.

3.7.2. Definitions

3.7.2.1. Serial Port Sleep Mode State

This mode reflects the particular V24 state of a port (physical or virtual) regarding the possibility to

enter or not 32K low consumption mode.

• This mode is entered automatically when:

􀂃 The port is in AT command mode. (no GSM/GPRS communication is in progress on it).

􀂃 No AT response is to be sent to the DTE.

􀂃 The connected DTE is no more ready to communicate on it (meaning DTE sets DTR low).

• This mode is left automatically when some unsolicited responses are to be sent to the DTE.

The connected DTE is ready to communicate on it (meaning DTE sets DTR high).

CTS is set when in this mode, the DCE does not allow the DTE to send data to the involved serial port

(meaning low on that port).

3.7.2.2. Serial Ports Sleep Mode Global State

This mode reflects the state of all the internal serial ports regarding their ability to enter 32K low

consumption mode.

It is a Boolean (asleep or not) that authorizes or not GSM/GPRS protocol and Hardware Layers to

enter 32K low consumption mode.

This mode is entered and left automatically depending on the state of all currently available serial

ports (virtual or physical).

• Global V24 sleep mode is entered when all v24 available ports are in sleep mode state.

• Global V24 sleep mode is left when at least one of the v24 available ports is not in sleep

mode state.

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 76

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

3.7.2.3. Sierra Wireless 32K Low Consumption Mode

This mode is based on a slower clock (32KHz) that is used instead of 13MHz clock. Most of hardware

blocks are stopped. It is aimed at reducing the power consumption.

This mode is entered and left automatically if the feature is allowed.

To activate this mode, the "+W32K" AT command must be used.

It is authorized or not by peripherals (such as UARTs, Buses, …) and mainly driven by GSM/GPRS

protocols and Hardware Layers: this mode is entered when no GSM/GPRS activity is required (no

communication is in progress, no paging is in progress, …).

Regarding UARTs and serial ports activity, 32K low consumption mode may be entered as soon as

V24 sleep mode global state is "asleep".

Sierra Wireless embedded module decides on its own to leave 32K low consumption at each

GSM/GPRS paging occasion.

During, this little time (which is operator dependant), UARTs are activated again so that DTR state

changes can be processed.

When this mode is activated, no data can be exchanged on RXD and TXD lines. Only embedded

module status changes can be monitored (DTR and RTS changes) by the DCE.

3.7.3. Summary

To summarize the 3 definitions, the following schematics describe the functional links between, serial

port sleep mode single state manager, serial ports sleep mode global state manager and W32K

sleep mode manager.

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 77

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Customer Application

Customer enables

SIERRA WIRELESS

32K low power mode

consumption

AT+W32K=1

Manage each serial port sleep mode state (asleep or not)

SIERRA

WIRELESS 32K

low power mode

manager

Serial link driver

V24

is

ASLEEP or NOT

SIERRA WIRELESS

Module

Authorize or

not Low power

mode

Update Global

Serial Sleep

mode state

Serial Port 1

Serial Port N-1 Serial Port N

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 78

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

3.7.4. Case of Single Serial Port Use

This section describes the expected behavior for a single serial port (physical or virtual). Please

remember that this behavior is independent of W32K feature activation.

3.7.4.1. Sleep on Procedure

In order to place a serial port in Sleep Mode state, the DTE just has to drop its DTR signal to indicate

that it is Busy. Then, Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE) sets the DTE CTS low.

1

3

2

DTR (DTE)

Clear to Send

Busy

RX data line (DTE)

Clear to Send

CTS (DTE)

Ready

1: The application drops its DTR to indicate a busy state

2: Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE) detects DTR drop and check if there are still AT

responses to send on that port.

8 : When DTR is low and there are no more AT response, the DCE sets the application (DTE)

CTS low. (At this point, the associated serial port is in Sleep Mode state)

Note: While in data mode, the CTS does not follow the DTR.

3.7.4.2. Wake up Procedures

3.7.4.2.1. On DTE initiative: Wake up by DTR Raise

DTR (DTE)

Busy

CTS (DTE)

Not Clear to Send

Clear to Send

Ready

1

2 3

1: The application raises its DTR signal to indicate a ready state (meaning DTE wants to

communicate with the DCE).

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 79

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

2: Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE) takes into account the DTR signal change. (MSR IRQ for

physical port or protocol frame for CMUX)

8 : V24 triggers the DTE CTS signal to allow AT commands again. (CTS is high)

3.7.4.2.2. On DCE initiative: Wake up by AT unsolicited indications ( e.g.

"RING " indicator)

CTS (DTE)

RX data line (DTE) "RING" "RING"

Not Clear to Send

DTR (DTE) Busy

1 2 1 2

1: An incoming call occurs. Consequently unsolicited indications ("RING") are sent to the DTE.

8 : As soon as unsolicited indication has been sent, the port switches back to sleep mode state

(as long as there is no more AT command response to send and that DTR remains High)

3.7.4.3. Complete Sequence Behavior

DTR (DTE)

CTS (DTE)

TX data line (DTE)

RX data line (DTE)

Not Clear to Send

Clear to Send Clear to Send

Ready

Ready

Busy

"RING" "RING"

time

time

time

time

"ATA"

"OK"

1

2 3

4 4

5 6

7

8

1: The application (DTE) drops its DTR to indicate to DCE a busy state

2: Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE) computes and check if there are still AT responses to

send on that port.

3: Since no more AT response is to be sent, the DCE sets CTS to low so that application (DTE)

can not send any data to the Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE). 􀃙 At this stage, the

associated serial port is in Sleep Mode state.

4: An incoming call occurs. As a consequence, unsolicited AT indications (e.g. "RING") are sent

to the DTE.

Note that even if RING are sent, Serial Port remains in Sleep Mode state.

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 80

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

5: Customer application (DTE) wants to answer to "RING" unsolicited AT indications. It MUST

raise first DTR to wake up the serial Port.

6: On Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE), detection of DTR rise informs that customer

application (DTE) wants to get out from sleep mode state. DCE sets CTS high so that

customer application (DTE) can send again data to Sierra Wireless embedded module.

Note that at this stage, Serial Port is no more in Sleep Mode state.

7: Customer application (DTE) replies to RING indication with "ATA" command.

8: Sierra Wireless embedded module (DCE) acknowledges and processes the command.

Note that this behavior applies whether W32K is activated or not.

3.7.4.4. Transition State (from Asleep to Awake)

When unsolicited AT responses are to be sent (e.g. "RING" indication), V24 software elements enters

a transition state that places the global sleep mode state in the "Awake State". Thus, until unsolicited

responses are sent, the Sierra Wireless embedded module can not enter Low power mode

consumption (W32K). As a consequence, RTS signal MUST remain High to allow the transmission of

the unsolicited response.

Note: Mind that unsolicited responses are broadcasted on all available serial ports 􀃙 when unsolicited

responses are to be sent (e.g. "RING") on a serial port and signals are not managed (e.g. RS232

cable is disconnected whereas associated V24 serial port is still registered) then Sierra Wireless

embedded module is not allowed to enter W32K low power mode consumption.

3.7.5. Case of Several Serial Ports Use

The behavior specified in section Case of Single Serial Port Use applies to each of the activated serial

ports (physical or virtual e.g. CMUX).

Note: When Sierra Wireless 32K low power mode is activated (AT+W32K=1), embedded module really

enters low power mode when all activated serial ports are set to sleep mode state.

3.7.6. UART2 Exception (on all embedded modules)

Physical block of the UART2 only provides embedded module with RX/TX and CTS/RTS signals so

that DTR can not be wired on UART2 serial port.

Since only RXD/TXD and RTS/CTS are available, there is no way to enter/leave sleep mode on this

particular port.

Thus, UART2 is not scanned to manage global Serial Sleep mode state. As a consequence, data can

be lost on UART2 if W32k is activated.

Warning: When only UART2 is activated, activation of W32K mode is forbidden.

Note: When emulating one (or more) virtual port(s) over UART2 using CMUX feature, it is then possible to

use W32K mode.

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 81

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

3.8. Description of Multi-Flow Behavior

Multi-flows allow the embedded module to treat commands from various sources (or flows):

• UART ports

• USB port

• embedded Open ATapplications.

• CMUX virtual ports

AT commands are organized in classes , and multi-flow allows the simultaneous execution of

commands of different classes coming from the possible sources:

• commands belonging to the same class can not be treated as the same time. When a

command of a class is treated, the embedded module will respond "busy" to any command of

the same class until the first command processing has completed.

• when a flow is waiting for the treatment of a command, it is busy until the command execution

completion.

Example:

The embedded module receives a command of class AT_CLASS_PHONEBOOK on UART1. The

processing of the command starts, and a response from the phonebook entity is expected. No other

command of the AT_CLASS_PHONEBOOK class can be processed, and the UART1 port is busy.

The embedded module receives then a command from USB port, of another class. It is able to

immediately process this second command.

When the phonebook entity answers, the first command’s processing completes. UART1 port and

AT_CLASS_PHONEBOOK class are released.

Notes:

• concatenation of commands remains possible,

• the Repeat command (A/) runs independently for each flow,

• an embedded Open ATapplication or "+WMFM" AT command may change data redirection.

3.8.1. Commands Classes

There are 27 commands classes, presented in the array below:

Class name Related commands

AT_CLASS_A_SLASH A/

AT_CLASS_COM +CHLD, +VTD, +VTS, +WATH, A, D, DL, H, O

AT_CLASS_CPHS +CPHS, +WALS, +WMBN

AT_CLASS_DATA +CRLP, +DOPT

AT_CLASS_FAX +FBOR, +FBUF, +FCQ, +FCR, +FDCC, +FDIS, +FPHCT, +FRH,

+FRM, +FRS, +FTH, +FTM, +FTS, FLID

AT_CLASS_GPRS +CGACT, +CGANS, +CGATT, +CGAUT, +CGCLA, +CGDATA,

+CGDCONT, +CGERE, +CGPAD, +CGQMI, +CGQRE, +CGREG,

+CGSMS, +GCAP, +WGPRS;+CGCMOD

AT_CLASS_LOCATION +WLOC

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 82

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Class name Related commands

AT_CLASS_MAIN %D, &C, &D, &E, &F, &S, &T, &V, &W, +ADC, +ATGH;+CALA,

+CBST, +CCLK, +CEER, +CGMI, +CGMM, +CGMR, +CGSN,

+CICB, +CIND, +CLAE;+CLAN;+CLCC, +CLVL;+CMEC, +CMEE,

+CMER, +CMUT, +CMUX+CPAS, +CR, +CRC, +CREG, +CRMP,

+CRSL, +CSCS, +CSNS, +CSTA;+CSVM, +ECHO, +FCLASS, +ICF,

+IFC, +ILRR, +IPR, +SIDET, +SPEAK, +VGR, +VGT, +VIP, +W32K,

+WAC, +WADF;+WBCM, +WCCS, +WCDM, +WCDP, +WCFM,

+WCTM, +WDGR; +WDGT; +WDOP, +WDTMF, +WDWL, +WFM,

+WHWV, +WIMEI, +WIND, +WIOM, +WIOR, +WIOW, +WLCK, ,

+WMSN, +WPCS, +WREGC;+WRIM, +WRST, +WSCAN, +WSST, ,

+WSTR, +WSVN, +WTONE, +WVR, E, I, Q, S, V, Z, +WMFM,

+WOPEN, +WCOS

AT_CLASS_NETWORK +CCED, +COPN, +COPS, +CPLS, +CPOL, +CSQ, +WMBS,

+WOPN, +WOLM

AT_CLASS_PHONEBOOK +CNUM, +CPBF, +CPBN, +CPBP, +CPBR, +CPBS, +CPBW,

+WAIP, +WDCP

AT_CLASS_PHONEBOOK WPGW, WPGR, WPGS

AT_CLASS_POFF +CFUN, +CPOF, +WBHV

AT_CLASS_RIL +CRSM, +CSIM

AT_CLASS_RS +CPWL

AT_CLASS_SECURITY +CLCK, +CPIN, +CPIN2, +CPINC, +CPWD

AT_CLASS_SIM +CCID, +CIMI, +WLPR, +WLPW

AT_CLASS_SMS +CMGD, +CMGF, +CMGL, +CMGR, +CMGS, +CMGW, +CMSS,

+CNMA, +CNMI, +CPMS, +CRES, +CSAS, +CSCA, +CSCB,

+CSDH, +CSMP, +CSMS, +WCBM, +WMGO, +WMSC, +WUSS,

+WMCP

AT_CLASS_SS +CACM, +CAMM, +CAOC, +CCFC, +CCUG, +CCWA, +CKPD,

+CLIP, +CLIR, +COLP, +CPUC, +CSSN, +CUSD

AT_CLASS_STLK +STGI, +STGR, +STIN, +STSF

AT_CLASS_V24B %C, \N, +DR, +DS

3.8.2. Remark on Error 536

When a class is locked and when another command belonging to the same class arrives, the

embedded module answers +CME ERROR: 536.

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 83

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

3.9. USB CDC feature

3.9.1. Software Specification

The embedded module implements an Abstract Control Modem as specified in the Communication

Device Class 1.1 specification, therefore a host can use the embedded module either as a embedded

module device or as a virtual communication port (VCOM).

3.9.2. Managing the USB Feature

3.9.2.1. Enabling the USB Port

To activate the USB feature, in CDC mode, the application must send the AT+WMFM=0,1,3

command to the embedded module. The embedded module replies:

• OK if the USB stack successfully started,

• +CME ERROR: 3 if the USB stack failed to start.

From here there is 2 possibilities:

1 – The embedded module is wired to the host, the device enumeration is done: if the enumeration

is successfully completed, a VCOM and a embedded module device (viewable in the devices

manager) are created at the host side otherwise the failure is notified to the user (by the host).

2 – The embedded module is not wired to the host: the USB stack is waiting for the USB cable

plugging. As soon as the cable is plugged, the enumeration stage described above starts.

3.9.2.2. Disabling the USB Port

To deactivate the USB feature, the application must send the AT+WMFM=0,0,3 command by using

either the UART1 or the UART2.

Two cases are supported:

1- The USB stack is running in CDC mode: if the stack is successfully stopped the embedded

module replies OK otherwise it replies '+CME ERROR: 3' (note the USB stack is still running

in CDC mode).

2- The USB stack is stopped: the embedded module replies unconditionally '+CME ERROR: 3'.

A embedded module reset, whatever its origin, stops the USB stack. If the user has saved the USB

CDC configuration in EEPROM the stack will be restarted while the embedded module is rebooting.

Stopping the USB stack and then disabling the CDC device implies that the VCOM and embedded

module are getting unavailable at the host side. The applications using these resources must be

closed since the piece of software drivers they are using does not longer exist.

3.9.3. USB Restrictions

The Sierra Wireless implementation does not, currently support, the remote wake up feature.

The Sierra Wireless implementation does not, currently, support the low power mode.

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 84

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

3.9.4. Supported Applications

In a general way all the applications using a serial port can be used on the USB serial port. Some

tests have been conducted with the following applications:

• hyper terminal

• Y-Modem / X-Modem / Z-Modem

• TMT

• DockLight

Delrina Fax (select the Sierra Wireless USB embedded module)

3.9.5. AT Command Restrictions

When using the USB port to manage the embedded module the following commands are either not

supported or have a specific behavior.

• AT+ICF - character format

AT+ICF? The list of supported USB emulated serial port settings are stated (highlighted in green) in

the following table. The settings highlighted in orange must not be used.

Data number Stop number Kind of Parity AT+ICF? responses

None +ICF: 3,4

Odd +ICF: 2,0

Even +ICF: 2,1

Mark

8 1

Space

Not supported always

replies: "+ICF: 2,4"

8 2 None +ICF: 1,4

Odd +ICF: 2,0

Even +ICF: 2,1

Mark

Space

Not supported always

replies: "+ICF: 2,4"

7 1 None +ICF: 6,4

Odd +ICF: 5,0

Even +ICF: 5,1

Mark

Space

Not supported always

replies: "+ICF: 5,4"

7 2 None +IFC: 4,4

Odd +IFC: 5,0

Even +IFC: 5,1

Mark

Space

Not supported always

replies: "+ICF: 5,4"

8 or 7 1.5 None

Odd

Even

Mark

Space

Not supported always

replies "+ICF: 2,4"

Technical Appendixes

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 85

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

AT+ICF=? will provide the same responses as it is sent on UART1 or 2.

• AT+CFUN=1 - embedded module reset

Normally (when using UART1/2 to manage the embedded module) the OK response is sent to the

application after the embedded module reset.

When using the emulated serial port a such response is not provided! In addition the embedded

module reset will cause the USB stack stopping. From the host’s point of view it is similar to a USB

cable disconnection. As consequence the host is going to un-install the Sierra Wireless USB driver

and the application will reference a non valid driver.

• AT+WDWL - firmware download

This command is unsupported when using the USB serial emulated port.

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 86


 

&E OK

AT&G OK

AT&K OK

AT&P OK

AT&Q OK

AT&R OK

AT&Y OK

AT+GOI OK

AT+GCI OK

WM_DEV_OAT_UGD_079 Rev. 019 Appendix February 18, 2011 87

AT Commands Interface Guide for

Firmware 7.45

Index

ACTIVE, 58

Alarm, 59

CEER, 10

CGEQMIN, 49

CGEQNEG, 50

CGEQREQ, 48

CME, 4

CMS, 6

CMUX, 75

CPHS, 20

CRSM, 37

CSIM, 37

CSP, 21

MT, 33

OFF, 60

SLEEP, 58

WDSI, 41

WOPEN, 52